JP2024081744A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of increasing interest of a game.SOLUTION: In a game machine of the present invention, vibration performances during a variation performance include a first vibration performance that is executed by an operation during a valid operation period that occurs at the time of a winning/losing performance during a ready-to-win performance and a second vibration performance in which the valid operation period does not occur. The second vibration performance includes a first performance and a second performance that is executed at a different timing from the first performance, has a different vibration mode from that of the first performance, and has a performance period that does not overlap that of the first performance. A vibration period of the first vibration performance is longer than a vibration period of the first performance, and a predetermined performance and the first performance can be executed according to a read-ahead result. The expectation of a big winning is higher when the first performance is executed than when the predetermined performance is executed in a predetermined period after the start of the variation performance. In a predetermined period during the variation performance, the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be executed without overlapping in the performance period, and the ease of execution of the second vibration performance in the predetermined period during the variation performance differs between the first game state and the second game state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 73

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Conventional gaming machines typically determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player based on the determination information acquired when the starting conditions are met, and then execute a game presentation (variable presentation) according to the result of that determination.

Some of these gaming machines are known to use a specific presentation device (such as a presentation button, a movable member, a lamp, or an image display device) to create a presentation (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2019-033816 A

However, conventional gaming machines such as those described in the above patent documents have the problem that the game is not very entertaining.

The present invention was made in consideration of the above problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

In order to solve the above problems, according to the present invention, a gaming machine capable of controlling the progress of a special game (jackpot game) is provided with an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by a player, and is capable of executing a variable effect of a pattern (effect pattern, effect pattern + special pattern, special pattern only) according to judgment information (special pattern judgment information) acquired based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole), and is capable of determining in advance the judgment information when the variable effect has not been executed, and is capable of controlling to a second game state (specific game state) that is more advantageous to the player than a first game state (normal game state), and is capable of executing an initial vibration that vibrates the operation means after the start of power supply, and is capable of executing an initial vibration that vibrates the special game during the execution of the variable effect. It is possible to execute a predetermined effect (pre-reading effect effect, pre-reading action effect, for example, icon change to blue, etc.) that makes the player expect the execution of the special game, a vibration effect that vibrates the operating means, a reach effect that makes the player expect the execution of the special game, and a win/lose effect (decision effect) that suggests whether the special game will be executed or not, and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect at the time of a dialogue notice effect, a cut-in effect, a decision success effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation effective period, and a second vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the operation effective period, and the second vibration effect includes a first effect (pre-reading vibration effect) that is executed at a predetermined timing. and a second performance (a vibration performance at the time of a step-up performance, a pattern alignment, a c pattern alignment, and a confirmation performance) that is executed at a timing different from that of the first performance, and it is possible to make the vibration mode in the first performance different from the vibration mode in the second performance, and it is possible to execute the first performance and the second performance so that their performance periods do not overlap during the execution of the variable performance, and the operation effective period related to the first vibration performance occurs when the reach performance is being executed and the winning/losing performance is being executed, and the vibration period in the first vibration performance associated with the winning/losing performance is longer than the vibration period in the first performance, The predetermined performance and the first performance can be executed according to the result of the preliminary determination, and in a predetermined period after the start of the variable performance (until the first high-speed fluctuation of the performance pattern 70a ends), the expectation of the special game being executed is higher when the second vibration performance is executed than when the predetermined performance is executed, and the first vibration performance and the second vibration performance can be executed so that their performance periods do not overlap, the ease of executing the second vibration performance in the predetermined period after the start of the variable performance differs between the first game state and the second game state, and the operation means can be vibrated in different ways between the initial vibration and the first performance.

The present invention makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of games.

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a front view of the gaming machine. FIG. 4 is a rear view showing the state in which each unit is assembled to the base frame. FIG. 3 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG. 2 . FIG. FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view including a base of the main board case. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the main board case when disassembled. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining the structure of a main control board. 13 is a front view of the main board case when the main control board is stored. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a big win determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol determination table. A figure showing an example of a normal special chart variation pattern determination table. A figure showing an example of a special chart change pattern determination table for special bonus/normal time reduction. A figure showing an example of a special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for special time reduction. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pre-determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a game status setting table. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing main processing in a main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing input control processing in the main control board. A diagram showing the first starting hole detection switch input processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the second starting hole detection switch input processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the special diagram special electric control processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the special pattern memory determination process in the main control board. A diagram showing the special chart variation pattern determination process in the main control board. A diagram showing special pattern change processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the jackpot game ending processing on the main control board. A diagram showing the main processing in the performance control unit. A diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the performance control unit. A diagram showing customer waiting performance processing in the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a demonstration waiting time determination table. A diagram showing menu operation processing in the performance control unit. A diagram showing a look-ahead type performance processing in the performance control unit. A diagram showing the icon change performance decision process in the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of a change scenario determination table. A diagram showing the icon change performance execution process in the performance control unit. A figure showing an example of a change pattern determination table for the hold icon. 13A is a diagram showing an example of a one-stage change pattern determination table for the icon, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a two-stage change pattern determination table for the icon. A diagram showing the continuous preview performance decision process in the performance control unit. A figure showing an example of a continuous preview type determination table for presentation modes A to C (normal game play state). This figure shows an example of a continuous preview type determination table for presentation modes D to H (specific game play states). A figure showing an example of a continuous preview presentation scenario determination table for presentation modes A to C (normal game play state). A figure showing an example of a continuous preview presentation scenario determination table for presentation modes D to H (specific game play states). A diagram showing the continuous preview performance execution processing in the performance control unit. A diagram showing the lamp change performance execution process in the performance control unit. A diagram showing the process of determining the light-emitting effect when a prize is won in the effect control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a winning light-emitting effect pattern determination table. A diagram showing the variable performance pattern determination process in the performance control unit. A figure showing an example of a variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes A to C (normal game state). A figure showing an example of a variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes D to G (specific game states). A figure showing an example of a variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation mode H (specific game state). A diagram showing the timer performance decision process in the performance control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of an event timer count determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a first suggestive event determination table for a single timer. A figure showing an example of a second suggestive event determination table for a timer of two times. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating an example of an update pattern determination table. A diagram showing the jackpot preview performance decision process in the performance control unit. This figure shows an example of a role prediction determination table at the start of fluctuation for presentation modes A to C (normal game state). This figure shows an example of a role prediction determination table at the start of fluctuation for presentation modes D to H (specific game states). A figure showing an example of a pre-reach notice determination table for presentation modes A to C (normal game play state). A figure showing an example of a pre-reach notice determination table for presentation modes D to H (specific game states). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a dialogue preview pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a step-up notice pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table. A figure showing an example of a development effect pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a cut-in effect pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a deciding effect pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a re-lottery effect pattern determination table. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a confirmed effect pattern determination table. This figure shows the ratio of the advance notice limit period for the miss variable presentation of presentation modes A to C. This figure shows the percentage of the advance notice limit period for the miss variable presentation of presentation modes D to G. A figure showing the percentage of the advance notice limit period for the miss variable presentation in presentation mode H. A diagram showing the types of vibration effects for each effect mode. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a main process in a central control unit. A diagram showing the initial processing of the reels in the lamp control unit. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an origin return process in a lamp control unit. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing an initial operation process in a lamp control unit. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a board role initial operation pattern determination table. A figure showing an example of a frame role initial operation pattern determination table. This figure shows a specific example of a case where there are no recovery abnormalities in various reels after power is turned on. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example in which a second movable member has a return abnormality after power is turned on; 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example in which a first movable member has a return abnormality after power is turned on; A figure showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button after power is turned on. This figure shows a specific example of a case where there are no recovery abnormalities in various reels after power is restored. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example in which a second movable member has a return abnormality after power is restored. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example in which a first movable member has a return abnormality after power is restored. A figure showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button after power is restored. This figure shows a specific example of the state after power is restored when the special pattern is being displayed in a changing state and there is pending memory. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of a case where a power-on command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of a case where a power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of a case where power-on commands (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be normally received when the power is on. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 of a case where power supply to only the main control board is stopped and then resumed. A figure showing a specific example 2 of a case where power supply to only the main control board is stopped and then resumed. A figure showing a specific example 3 of a case where power supply to only the main control board is stopped and then resumed. A figure showing a specific example 4 in which power supply to only the main control board is stopped and then resumed. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a first modified example in which power supply to the main control board is restarted after being stopped only. A figure showing variant example 2 in which power supply to the main control board is stopped and then resumed. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating a modified example in which the second movable member has a return abnormality after power is turned on. A diagram showing a modified example of the initial processing of the reels in the lamp control unit. This figure shows a specific example of a case where there are no recovery abnormalities in various reels after power is turned on. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example in which a second movable member has a return abnormality after power is turned on; 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example in which a first movable member has a return abnormality after power is turned on. A figure showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button after power is turned on. This figure shows a specific example of a case where there are no recovery abnormalities in various reels after power is restored. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example in which a second movable member has a return abnormality after power is restored. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example in which a first movable member has a return abnormality after power is restored. A figure showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button after power is restored. This figure shows a specific example of the state after power is restored when the special pattern is being displayed in a changing state and there is pending memory. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of a case where a power-on command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of a case where a power restoration designation command cannot be normally received when the power is turned on. 11A and 11B are diagrams illustrating a specific example of a case where power-on commands (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be normally received when the power is on. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example 1 of a case where only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a second specific example of a case in which power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example 3 in which power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a specific example 4 in which power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed. 11A and 11B are diagrams showing specific examples of changes in the connection state of various detection means when waiting for customers. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing specific examples of when the operating unit is operated while waiting for customers. A figure showing a specific example of customizing the performance while waiting for customers. This is a timing chart showing when the variable performance starts from the waiting state for customers. This is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which a variable performance starts from a waiting state for customers. This shows the continuation of the example presentation in which the variable presentation begins from a waiting state for customers. This is a timing chart showing the increase in the number of reserved balls during a variable performance. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which the number of reserved balls increases during a variable presentation. This is a timing chart showing the number of reserved items increasing immediately after decreasing. This figure shows an example of a presentation in which the number of reserved items increases immediately after decreasing. This is a timing chart showing the increase in the number of reserved balls during a specific reach performance. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which the number of reserved balls increases during a specific reach presentation. This is a timing chart showing the increase and decrease in the number of reserved balls before and after the end of a specific game state. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which the number of reserved balls increases or decreases before and after the end of a specific game state. This figure shows the continuation of the example presentation in which the number of reserved balls increases or decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state. A figure showing an example of a presentation when a player changes a presentation element during the first variable presentation in a specific game state. A figure showing an example of a presentation when a player changes a presentation element during a second variable presentation in a specific game state. A figure showing an example of a performance when a pre-reading action performance and a step-up preview performance are executed. A figure showing the continuation of the example presentation when a pre-reading action presentation and a step-up preview presentation are executed. A figure showing an example of a performance when a pre-reading vibration performance and a dialogue preview performance are executed. A figure showing the continuation of the example of the performance when a pre-reading vibration performance and a dialogue preview performance are executed. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which a pseudo consecutive presentation is executed before a reach presentation. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which a pseudo consecutive presentation is executed after a reach presentation. A figure showing an example of a presentation when a development presentation is executed and an SP reach presentation is executed. A figure showing an example of a presentation when a development presentation is executed and an SPSP reach presentation is executed. A figure showing an example of a presentation in which a cut-in presentation is executed during an SP reach presentation, resulting in a jackpot. This figure shows the continuation of the example presentation when a cut-in presentation is executed during an SP reach presentation, resulting in a jackpot. This figure shows example 1 of a presentation in which a deciding performance is executed during an SPSP reach performance, resulting in a jackpot. This figure shows a continuation of presentation example 1 when a deciding presentation is executed during the SPSP reach presentation, resulting in a jackpot. This figure shows example 2 of a presentation in which a deciding effect is executed during an SPSP reach effect, resulting in a jackpot. This figure shows the continuation of presentation example 2 when a deciding presentation is executed during the SPSP reach presentation, resulting in a jackpot. A diagram showing the execution timing of the timer performance for each variable performance pattern. A figure showing an example of a presentation when two timer presentations are executed during a variable presentation. This figure shows an example of a presentation when a special SP reach presentation is executed in the second variable presentation in presentation mode A (normal game state) resulting in a jackpot. This figure shows an example of a presentation when a chance presentation is executed in the first variable presentation in presentation mode G (specific game state) resulting in a jackpot. A figure showing an example of a performance when a special mission performance is executed during a jackpot. A figure showing examples of opening and ending effects for a jackpot game in each game state. A figure showing examples of the opening and ending effects of a jackpot game during a special time-saving game state. A figure showing an example of a presentation when a special time-saving game state occurs. A figure showing an example of a presentation when a special time-saving game state that occurs without a jackpot history ends. A figure showing an example of a presentation when a special time-saving game state that occurs when there is a jackpot history ends. A figure showing an example of a presentation when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then resumed while the icon change presentation and lamp change presentation are being executed. This figure shows the continuation of the example presentation when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then resumed while the icon change presentation and lamp change presentation are being executed. This figure shows examples of presentations when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then resumed while a look-ahead effect presentation, a pending icon change presentation, and a lamp change presentation are being executed. This figure shows the continuation of the example presentation when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then resumed while the look-ahead effect presentation, the pending icon change presentation, and the lamp change presentation are being executed. 1 is a timing chart 1 showing a case where a command cannot be normally received. 4 shows examples of effects at various timings in the timing chart 1. 11 is a timing chart 2 showing a case where a command cannot be normally received. This is a first example of performance at various timings in the timing chart 2. This is a second example of performance at various timings in timing chart 2. 11 is a timing chart 3 showing a case where a command cannot be normally received. This is a first example of a performance at various timings in the timing chart 3. This is a second example of performance at various timings in the timing chart 3. 4 is a timing chart 4 showing a case where a command cannot be normally received. 4 shows examples of effects at various timings in the timing chart 4. 5 is a timing chart 5 showing a case where a command cannot be normally received. 6 shows examples of effects at various timings in the timing chart 5. 6 is a timing chart 6 showing a case where a command cannot be normally received. 4 shows examples of effects at various timings in the timing chart 6. 7 is a timing chart 7 showing a case where a command cannot be normally received. 4 shows examples of effects at various timings in the timing chart 7. 8 is a timing chart 8 showing a case where a command cannot be normally received. 13 shows examples of effects at various timings in the timing chart 8. This is a first modified example when a command cannot be received normally. This is a second modified example when the command cannot be received normally. This is a third modified example when a command cannot be received normally. This is a fourth modified example when a command cannot be received normally. This is a fifth modified example when a command cannot be received normally. This is a ninth specific example of a case where a command cannot be received normally. This is a tenth specific example of a case where a command cannot be received normally. This is an eleventh specific example of a case where a command cannot be received normally. This is a twelfth specific example of a case where a command cannot be received normally. This is a thirteenth specific example of a case where a command cannot be received normally. This is a fourteenth specific example of a case where a command cannot be received normally. This is a fifteenth specific example of a case where a command cannot be received normally. This is a sixteenth specific example of a case where a command cannot be received normally. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a front view of a gaming machine according to a second embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a finishing effect pattern determination table in the second embodiment. A figure showing an example of a frame role object initial operation pattern determination table in the second embodiment. This figure shows a specific example of a game ball hit from the left side entering the starting hole during normal gameplay. This figure shows a specific example of a game ball hit from the left side entering the starting hole in a specific game state (a special game state, various time-saving game states). A figure showing the special icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit in the second embodiment. 1A is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table for a MAX reserved chance, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing an example of a puzzle reserved chance presentation pattern determination table; A figure showing an example of a presentation when a MAX hold chance presentation is executed. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a presentation when a puzzle reservation chance presentation is executed. FIG.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to Fig. 1. Fig. 1 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 according to this embodiment.

The gaming machine 1 is provided with an outer frame 2, a gaming board mounting frame 3 that is rotatably supported relative to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 that is rotatably supported relative to the gaming board mounting frame 3, and a gaming board 5 that has a gaming area 5a formed therein through which gaming balls flow.

The outer frame 2 is made up of a rectangular base frame 2a with a central opening in the front-rear direction, to which a decorative plate 2b is attached at the lower front. The outer frame 2 is fixed to the island equipment of the amusement arcade via fastening members (e.g., nails, fasteners, etc.).

The game board mounting frame 3 has a mounting section (not shown) for mounting the game board 5 from the front, is detachably connected to the outer frame 2 via a first hinge mechanism section 6 at one horizontal end, and is supported rotatably with the first hinge mechanism section 6 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door relative to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, making it possible to perform maintenance on various devices provided on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3.

The glass frame 4 is detachably connected to the front side of the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one horizontal end so as to cover the front of the mounting portion of the game board mounting frame 3, and is supported rotatably with the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated like a door relative to the game board mounting frame 3, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-to-rear direction is formed in the approximate center near the top of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (such as a glass plate or acrylic plate) is attached to cover the opening 8 from the rear, making it possible to see the playing area 5a of the playing board 5 attached to the mounting portion of the playing board mounting frame 3 through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there are provided an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame lighting device 10 having multiple decorative lamps (LEDs), an upper tray 11 for storing multiple game balls such as those paid out from the payout device 100 described below, a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and flow into the overflow ball flow path described below, and a launch operation device 13 for launching the game balls.

The audio output devices 9 are provided at two locations spaced apart on the top of the glass frame 4, and are designed to output background music (BGM), sound effects (SE), etc. to create a sound (music, voice) effect. A number of frame lighting devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and lighting effects are created by changing the direction of light irradiation and the color of light emitted by each lamp (LED). The frame lighting devices 10 are also equipped with an alarm LED 10a that is controlled to light up/blink when the glass frame 4 opens or a dispensing abnormality, which will be described later, occurs.

The bottom surface of the storage section 11a of the upper tray 11 for the game balls slopes downward toward the direction (right direction) of the launch operation device 13, and a ball feed solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward slope. When the game balls stored in the storage section 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball feed solenoid 11b, the ball feed solenoid 11b operates to send the game balls out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3.

In addition, in the central front part of the upper tray 11, a performance button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see Figure 1) are arranged side by side and function as input devices for performing decision operations and selection operations related to various performances described below.

The effect button device 16 is provided with an effect button 17 (not shown) that can be used to perform operations such as decision operations (operation input), an effect button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 9) that detects operations on the effect button 17, and a button drive device 17b (see FIG. 9) for driving the effect button 17, allowing the player to input specific information into the gaming machine 1.

The performance button 17 can perform a performance light emission by lighting the performance button LED (full color), which is part of the frame lighting device 10 (see FIG. 9), in a predetermined light emission pattern (e.g., white, red, rainbow). In addition, the driving force of the button drive motor, which is part of the button drive device 17b, can move the button 17 up and down between a standby position (origin position) located below and a performance position located above, and the button position detection sensor (not shown) detects that the button 17 is in the origin position. Furthermore, the driving force of the button vibration motor, which is part of the button drive device 17b, can vibrate in a predetermined vibration pattern to perform a performance action, and the performance button 17 can be operated even when the button vibration motor is vibrating.

The selection button device 18 is provided with a cross key 19 (not shown) that can be used to perform operations such as selection, and a cross key detection switch 19a (see FIG. 9) that is connected to the cross key 19 and detects operations on the cross key 19, allowing the player to input specified information into the gaming machine 1.

In addition, a lending operation unit 20 is provided on the right side of the upper tray 11, which allows the lending of game balls and the return of storage media such as cards that store the remaining balance. When the lending button on the lending operation unit 20 is operated, a ball lending machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine 1 subtracts the remaining balance stored in the storage media and lends out game balls, and when the return button on the lending operation unit 20 is operated, the storage media is returned from the ball lending machine (not shown).

Between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12, an overflow ball flow path (not shown) is formed to receive game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and guide them to the lower tray 12. In addition, a tray full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 9) is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path to detect when the lower tray 12 is full of game balls, and while the tray full detection switch 32a detects that the lower tray 12 is full, the payout device 100 (described later) stops paying out game balls.

The launch operation device 13 is provided with a base 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a launch handle 15 rotatably mounted on the base 14, a touch sensor 15a (see FIG. 9) that detects whether the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, a launch volume 15b (see FIG. 9) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the launch handle 15, and multiple handle LEDs (frame lighting device 10) for illuminating the launch handle 15 in a predetermined manner. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15, the ball feed solenoid 11b is activated and the game balls are sent out one by one.

The game board mounting frame 3 is provided with a game board mounting section 25 for mounting the game board 5, a launching device 26 for launching game balls toward the game area 5a, a locking mechanism 27 for locking the game board mounting frame 3 and the glass frame 4 in a closed state, and an opening detection switch 31a for detecting the opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4.

The game board mounting section 25 is formed in a recessed chamber shape that opens to the front at approximately the center near the top of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. At the back of the recessed chamber of the game board mounting section 25, an opening that opens in the front-to-rear direction is provided, and through this opening, various devices and the like provided on the back side of the game board 5 face the rear of the gaming machine 1.

The launching device 26 is provided with a launching member 28 for launching the game ball, a launching solenoid 28b (see FIG. 9) for driving the launching member 28, a launching rail 29 that slopes upward from the launching member 28 toward the lower left end of the game board, and a stopper 30 that stops the game ball A at the launch position, which is the lower end of the slope of the launching rail 29. Then, when the game ball sent out by the ball feed solenoid 11b is received at the launch position, the game ball A is launched toward the game area 5a by the operation of the launching member 28.

The locking mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting part 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. When a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the game board mounting frame 3 is unlocked and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, there are provided a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 located on the outside of the inner rail 35, and a guide member 37 that guides the game balls toward the center of the game area 5a. Between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36, there is formed a launched ball guide path 38 that guides the game balls launched by the launching device 26 to the upstream part of the game area 5a. In addition, at the most downstream part of the game area 5a, there is formed an outlet 39 for guiding the game balls that have flowed down outside the game area (the collection part of the game board mounting frame 3).

A decorative frame 40, which is a frame that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior, known as a center case, is provided in the approximate center of the play area 5a, and a presentation space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. A warp device 41 is provided on the side of the decorative frame 40 to guide game balls flowing down the play area 5a into the decorative frame 40, and a stage section 42 is provided at the bottom of the decorative frame 40 to roll the game balls introduced into the decorative frame 40 by the warp device 41 and cause them to flow down below the decorative frame 40.

At the bottom of the game area 5a, there are multiple (four in this embodiment) general winning openings 43 spaced apart, through which game balls can always enter (be entered). When a game ball that has entered (been entered) one of the general winning openings 43 is detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a (see Figure 9), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 100 (not shown) to the upper tray 11.

On both sides (left and right areas) of the game area 5a, there are provided normal gates 44 (normal start areas) through which the game ball can pass. When a game ball that has passed through the normal gates 44 is detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 9), a winning lottery for a normal symbol (auxiliary game determination) is held. The winning lottery for a normal symbol will be described later.

At the bottom of the game area 5a, directly below the stage section 42, there is a first start hole 45 (special symbol start area) where game balls can always enter (enter), and when a game ball that has entered (entered) this first start hole 45 is detected by the first start hole detection switch 45a (see FIG. 9), a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three balls) are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 100 to the upper tray 11. In addition to paying out prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of the first special symbol (identification information) described below is made.

Below the first starting hole 45, there is a variable starting section 46 that changes from a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter (slot) to an open state (special mode) in which it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter (slot) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning the lottery for a normal pattern).

The variable start section 46 is provided with a second start hole 47 (special chart start area) through which the game ball can enter (enter), a second start hole detection switch 47a (see FIG. 9) that detects the entry (entry) of the game ball into the second start hole 47, a movable member 48 that converts (varies) the second start hole 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second start hole opening/closing solenoid 48b (see FIG. 9) that converts the movable member 48 between an open state and an closed state. When the second start hole 47 is in a closed state, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter, and when the second start hole 47 is in an open state, it is possible or easy for the game ball to enter (enter).

When a game ball that has entered the second start hole 47 is detected by the second start hole detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three balls) are paid out as prize balls from the payout device 100 to the upper tray 11. In addition to paying out the prize balls, a jackpot determination (special game determination) of the second special symbol (identification information) described below is made.

A winning port lamp NR (not shown) is provided between the first starting port 45 and the variable starting section 46 to illuminate the first starting port 45 and the area around the variable starting section 46 in a predetermined manner, and a lighting effect can be created by illuminating the board lighting device 76, which has multiple lamps (full-color LEDs, etc.).

Above the guide member 37 and downstream of the right-side regular gate 44, there is a variable winning section 49 that is converted from a closed state (basic mode) in which the game ball cannot win (enter) to an open state (special mode) in which the game ball can win (enter) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning the jackpot judgment for a special pattern).

The variable winning section 49 is provided with a large winning opening 50 through which the game ball can win (enter), a large winning opening detection switch 50a (see FIG. 9) for detecting the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening 50, an opening/closing member 51 for converting (variable) the large winning opening 50 between a closed state and an open state, and a large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b for converting the opening/closing member 51 between open and closed. When the large winning opening 50 is in a closed state, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win, and when the large winning opening 50 is in an open state, it is possible or easy for the game ball to win (enter).

In addition, when a game ball that has entered the large prize opening 50 is detected by the large prize opening detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are paid out from the payout device 100 to the upper tray 11 as prize balls.

On the back side of the game board 5, there is an out-ball flow path that receives and collects game balls that have entered the general prize opening 43, the first start opening 45, the second start opening 47, and the large prize opening 50 and are detected by the general prize opening detection switch 43a, the first start opening detection switch 45a, the second start opening detection switch 47a, and the large prize opening detection switch 50a, as well as game balls that have flowed into the outlet 39, and allows them to flow down, and an out-ball detection switch 52a is provided at the most downstream part of the out-ball flow path. Game balls that flow down this out-ball flow path and are detected by the out-ball detection switch 52a are discharged from the outlet on the back side of the game machine 1 to the outside of the game machine 1 (island equipment).

Outside the play area 5a, there is a main information display device 59 consisting of a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol reserved display 63, a second special symbol reserved display 64, and a normal symbol reserved display 65, a round number display 66 (see FIG. 9) that displays the number of rounds when a jackpot game (special game mode) described later is executed, a right-hand hit display 67 (see FIG. 9) that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the right area of the play area 5a during a jackpot game (special game) or a time-saving game state, and a status confirmation display 68 (see FIG. 9) that indicates that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode described later is set.

A winning probability display sticker (not shown) is attached near the main information display device 59. The winning probability display sticker has the winning probability (1/285 to 1/300) and the set value (4 to 1) of the jackpot of the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment printed on it. Note that the location of the winning probability display sticker 200 is just one example, and is not limited to the vicinity of the main information display device 59, but may be on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1.

The first special symbol display 60 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of the jackpot determination for the first special symbol, which is performed on the condition that the gaming ball enters (sinks) the first starting hole 45, the second special symbol display 61 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of the jackpot determination for the second special symbol, which is performed on the condition that the gaming ball enters (sinks) the second starting hole 47, and the normal symbol display 62 is a variable display for displaying (informing) the result of the winning lottery for the normal symbol, which is performed on the condition that the gaming ball enters (sinks) the normal gate 44.

The jackpot determination for the first special symbol corresponds to obtaining a random number value for jackpot determination (first special symbol determination information) when the gaming ball enters (enters) the first starting hole 45, and comparing the obtained random number value for jackpot determination with the jackpot determination value to determine whether or not there is a "jackpot". When a jackpot determination for the first special symbol is made, the first special symbol is displayed in a varying manner on the first special symbol display 60, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the first special symbol, which indicates the lottery result, is displayed stationarily. In other words, the stationary display of the first special symbol serves as an announcement of the lottery result.

The jackpot determination for the second special symbol corresponds to obtaining a random number value for jackpot determination (second special symbol determination information) when the game ball enters (enters) the second starting hole 47, and determining whether or not there is a "jackpot" by comparing the obtained random number value for jackpot determination with the jackpot determination value. When a jackpot determination for the second special symbol is made, the second special symbol is displayed in a varying manner on the second special symbol display 61, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, the second special symbol, which indicates the lottery result, is displayed stationarily. In other words, the stationary display of the second special symbol serves as an announcement of the lottery result.

The first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61 are each composed of multiple LEDs, and when each special symbol changes, the LEDs of the corresponding display blink at a predetermined interval or sequence. When a special symbol is displayed stationary, the LEDs light up in a manner that indicates the result of each jackpot determination (jackpot, miss).

In this embodiment, a "jackpot" refers to a state in which the right to play a jackpot game (special game) is acquired in a jackpot judgment (special game judgment) of the first special symbol or a jackpot judgment (special game judgment) of the second special symbol. A "jackpot game" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the big prize opening 50 is opened in a predetermined manner is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

The maximum number of times the jackpot opening 50 can be opened and the maximum opening time for each round of play are preset, but if a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., nine balls) enter the jackpot opening 50 even before the maximum number of times or maximum opening time is reached, one round of play ends. In other words, the "jackpot game (special game)" is a game state that is advantageous for players who are more likely to win prize balls. In this embodiment, it is possible for one of several types of jackpot games to occur, each with a different degree of advantage to the player, which will be described in more detail below.

The winning lottery for the normal symbol corresponds to obtaining a random number value for winning judgment when the game ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, and comparing the obtained random number value for winning judgment with the winning judgment value to determine whether or not there is a "win". When the winning lottery for the normal symbol is performed, the normal symbol is displayed in a varying manner on the normal symbol display 62, and after a predetermined time has passed, the normal symbol is displayed stationarily to indicate the lottery result. In other words, the stationary display of the normal symbol serves as a notification of the lottery result.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of one or more LEDs, and the LEDs flash at a predetermined interval or sequence when displaying the normal symbol in a variable manner. When displaying a normal symbol in a static manner, the LEDs light up in a manner that indicates the result of the winning lottery (a winning state or a losing state).

In this embodiment, "win" refers to a state in which the right to play a win state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a winning lottery for a normal symbol. "Winning game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting hole 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

The maximum number of times the second start hole 47 can be opened and the maximum opening time during a winning game (auxiliary game) are preset, but if a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., nine balls) enter the second start hole 47 even before the maximum number of times or maximum opening time is reached, the winning game (auxiliary game) ends. In other words, the "winning game (auxiliary game)" is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed (the conditions for starting the variable display are likely to be met). In this embodiment, multiple types of winning games (auxiliary games) with different degrees of advantage to the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.

The first special symbol reserved indicator 63 is composed of multiple LEDs, and is intended to display the number of rights (first reserved memories) to make a jackpot determination for the first special symbol (display of the variation of the first special symbol) that is stored when a game ball enters (enters) the first starting hole 45, and lights up or flashes in a manner that indicates the number of first reserved memories. Note that up to four first reserved memories can be stored, but the number may be more or less than four.

The second special symbol reserved indicator 64 is composed of multiple LEDs, and is intended to display the number of rights (second reserved memories) to make a jackpot determination for the second special symbol (display of the variation of the second special symbol) that is stored when the game ball enters (enters) the second starting hole 47, and lights up or flashes in a manner that indicates the number of second reserved memories. Note that up to four second reserved memories can be stored, but the number may be more or less than four.

The normal symbol reserved indicator 65 is composed of multiple LEDs, and is intended to display the number of rights (normal symbol reserved memories) to hold a winning lottery for a normal symbol (variable display of normal symbols) that are stored when a game ball enters (passes) the normal symbol gate 44, and lights up or flashes in a manner that indicates the number of normal symbol reserved memories. Note that up to four normal symbol reserved memories can be stored, but the number may be more or less than four.

The first special symbol display 60 and/or the second special symbol display 61 can also be configured with a seven-segment LED. For example, if the special symbol wins the jackpot, a static "7" is displayed, and if it is a miss, a static "-" is displayed, with the light going off and the "-" alternating during the variable display. Before the variable display of the special symbol begins, the stopped result of the previous variable display is displayed by the LED being lit, so by starting with the LED being turned off when the variable display begins, it becomes easier to know that the variable display has started.

The round number indicator 66 is composed of multiple LEDs and is intended to display the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) occurs. When a jackpot game starts, the LEDs start to light up in a predetermined manner indicating the number of rounds, the LEDs continue to light up during the jackpot game, and when the jackpot game ends, the LEDs are turned off. For example, if the jackpot game has two rounds, only the fourth LED from the left lights up, and if the jackpot game has sixteen rounds, all LEDs light up.

The right-hit indicator 67 is composed of one LED, and is used to display a right-hit display that encourages the player to shoot the game ball toward the right-side game area (so-called right hit) during a jackpot state (special game state) and during a time-limited game state, and the LED lights up during the jackpot state (special game state) and during the time-limited game state.

The status confirmation indicator 68 is composed of a single LED and is intended to indicate that the setting change mode, which will be described later, or the setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is set. When the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is entered, the LED starts to light up, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is ended, the LED goes out. In this way, the status confirmation indicator 68, which indicates that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, is provided on the front (surface) of the gaming machine, making it easy to check whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set.

Note that the installation location of the status check indicator 68 is just an example, and is not limited to the installation location in this embodiment, but may be on the front (surface) of the gaming machine 1.

In addition, in this embodiment, the same display mode (illuminated display) is displayed regardless of whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set, but the display may be made so that it is possible to recognize which mode it is set to. For example, when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 may be flashed, or when the setting change mode is set, the status confirmation indicator 68 and one of the indicators of the second game information display device 69 may be illuminated, and when the setting confirmation mode is set, only the status confirmation indicator 68 may be illuminated.

In addition, in this embodiment, a status confirmation indicator 68 is provided as a dedicated indicator to indicate that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode is set, but it may be used in combination with another indicator. For example, in the setting change mode and setting confirmation mode, the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69 described below are turned off, so these displays may be used. Specifically, one LED of the display of either the main information display device 59 or the second game information display device 69 may be turned on, or all LEDs of the main information display device 59 and the second game information display device 69 may be turned on.

At the bottom right inside the play area 5a, there is provided a sub information display device 80 consisting of a sub first change indicator 81, a sub second change indicator 82, a sub first hold indicator 83, a sub second hold indicator 84, a sub normal map change indicator 85, a sub normal map hold indicator 86, and a sub right hit indicator 87 that prompts the player to shoot the game ball toward the right area of the play area 5a (so-called right hit). Note that the sub information display device 80 does not have an indicator such as the above-mentioned status confirmation indicator 68 that indicates that the setting change mode or setting confirmation mode described below is set.

The sub-first variable indicator 81 is for displaying (informing) the result of the jackpot determination for the first special symbol, and the sub-second variable indicator 82 is for displaying (informing) the result of the jackpot determination for the second special symbol, and each is composed of one LED. Then, when the variable display of the corresponding special symbol starts, the LED blinks at a predetermined interval (the first lamp symbol LZ or the second lamp symbol LZ is displayed variable), and when the corresponding special symbol is displayed stationary, the result of the jackpot determination (lights up in the case of a jackpot, goes out in the case of a miss) is displayed stationary.

In addition, the sub-first change display 81 and the sub-second change display 82 may be configured to flash while the special pattern is being displayed and to light up or go out when the special pattern is displayed as stopped, so that it is possible to know whether or not the special pattern is being displayed as changed.

The sub-first hold indicator 83 is for displaying the number of first hold memories (hold number), and the sub-second hold indicator 84 is for displaying the number of second hold memories (hold number), and each is composed of two LEDs, one on the left and one on the right. When the hold number is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the hold number is "1", the left LED is turned on and the right LED is turned off, when the hold number is "2", the left LED is blinking and the right LED is turned on when the hold number is "3", and when the hold number is "4", the left and right LEDs are blinking.

The sub-regular symbol variation display 85 is for displaying (informing) the result of the winning lottery, and is composed of one LED. Then, when the variation display of the regular symbol starts, the LED blinks (varies) at a specified interval. Then, when the regular symbol is displayed in a static state, the mode indicating the result of the winning lottery (lights up in the case of a win, and goes out in the case of a loss) is displayed in a static state.

In addition, the sub-regular pattern change indicator 85 may be configured to flash while displaying the normal pattern change, and to light up or go out when the normal pattern is displayed as stopped, so that it is possible to know whether or not the normal pattern change is being displayed.

The sub-regular map reservation indicator 86 is used to display the number of reserved regular map memories (reserved number), and is composed of two LEDs lined up on the left and right. When the reserved regular map number is "0", the left and right LEDs are turned off, when the reserved regular map number is "1", the left LED is lit and the right LED is turned off, when the reserved regular map number is "2", the left LED flashes and the right LED is lit, and when the reserved regular map number is "4", the left and right LEDs flash.

A first image display device 70 (main LCD) consisting of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the performance space 40a, a second image display device 71 (sub LCD) consisting of a liquid crystal display with a smaller display area than the first image display device 70 (main LCD) is provided at the bottom of the performance space 40a and in front of the first image display device 70 (main LCD), a first movable member 73 modeled after a character's face is provided at the top of the performance space 40a, and a circular second movable member 74 is provided at the right part of the performance space 40a.

The image display device consisting of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) displays various effects according to the progress of the game. The effects include a customer waiting demo effect that is executed during a customer waiting state (a waiting state where the game is not progressing) in which the special symbol changing display is not being performed, and a changing effect that accompanies the changing display of the special symbol 70a that is executed during the changing display of the special symbol.

The display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) has three columns of variable display areas, a left area, a central area, and a right area, and the variable display of the performance pattern 70a is performed by scrolling the performance pattern 70a displayed in each variable display area vertically (from top to bottom in this embodiment). In addition, a special pattern display area is formed in the lower right corner of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), and the variable display of the special pattern TZ is performed by scrolling the special pattern TZ displayed in the special pattern display area vertically (from top to bottom in this embodiment) in response to the variable display of the special pattern.

The performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are composed of patterns showing numbers from "1" to "9", for example, and the display of the change in the performance pattern 70a is performed in response (synchronization) to the display of the change in the special pattern executed by the first special pattern display device 60 and the second special pattern display device 61. That is, the display of the change in the performance pattern 70a starts in response to the start of the display of the change in the special pattern, the display of the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (oscillating display) before the display of the change in the special pattern stops, and the display of the change in the performance pattern 70a is stopped (static display) in response to the stop display of the display of the change in the special pattern. In addition to the patterns showing numbers, the performance pattern 70a may be provided with patterns showing the alphabet such as "A" to "F".

Note that a "temporary stop display" refers to a state in which the performance pattern 70a fluctuates slightly or changes shape slightly, making it appear to the player that the performance pattern 70a is stopped (but is not completely stopped).

When the performance symbol 70a is displayed in a stopped state, the performance symbol 70a stops for a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) in a predetermined state (miss state, jackpot state, etc.) that indicates the result of the jackpot determination. A jackpot state (special result state) is a combination of the same performance symbols such as "777" or a combination of performance symbols with a pattern such as "357", while a miss state is any other state. Note that the state of the variable display of the performance symbol 70a is not limited to this, and it may scroll left and right, or rotate (spin) on the spot.

In addition, while the display of the effect pattern 70a is changing, various effect images and movies such as reach effects, background images, characters, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) and the second image display device 71 (sub-LCD) depending on the result of the jackpot determination, thereby increasing the player's anticipation of the execution of a jackpot (special game) (hereinafter referred to as the "jackpot winning expectation").

Here, "reach effect" refers to a change pattern that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be played, such as when some of the combinations of effect patterns 70a that indicate a jackpot temporarily stop and other effect patterns 70a change. For example, when a combination of effect patterns 70a with three digits, "777," is set as the combination of effect patterns 70a that indicates a jackpot (jackpot result mode), this refers to a state in which two effect patterns 70a temporarily stop at "7" in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect patterns 70a in the center area change.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are seven types of reach effects: "normal reach effect", "SP reach effect", "SPSP reach effect", "SPSP "7" reach effect", "full rotation reach effect", and "special SP reach".

A "normal reach effect" is a reach effect that is performed in a state where the background image before the reach is displayed, two performance symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left and right areas, and the remaining performance symbol 70a fluctuates in the central area to form a reach state.

The "SP reach effect" is a reach effect that is executed after the normal reach effect, in which the effect pattern 70a that has formed the reach state is displayed in a reduced size in the corner of the screen, and the effect is more effective (higher expectation of a jackpot) than the normal reach effect.

An "SPSP reach effect" is a reach effect that is executed after a normal reach effect or an SP reach effect, and has a greater effect (higher expectation of a jackpot) than a normal reach effect or an SP reach effect.

The "full rotation reach effect" is a reach effect that changes slowly when all the combinations of multiple performance symbols 70a that indicate a jackpot are in place. In this embodiment, this reach effect is executed only when a jackpot is determined to be a win.

A "special SP reach" is a reach effect that is executed after a normal reach effect, in which the effect pattern 70a that has formed the reach state is displayed in a reduced size in the corner of the screen, and has a stronger effect than a normal reach effect (higher expectation of a jackpot), and is different from a normal SP reach.

In this embodiment, the expected probability of winning a jackpot related to reach effects increases in the following order: normal reach effects < SP reach effects < SPSP reach effects < full rotation reach effects (guaranteed jackpot), and then increases in the following order: normal reach effects < special SP reach effects.

In addition, at the bottom of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), there are formed a first reserved icon display area 70B for displaying a number of first reserved icons corresponding to the first special reserved number (U1), which is the current number of first reserved memories in the normal game state, a second reserved icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second reserved icons corresponding to the second special reserved number (U2), which is the current number of second reserved memories in the specific game state, and a corresponding icon display area 70C for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display of the special pattern (performance pattern 70a) being executed in the normal game state and the specific game state.

The first reserved icon display area 70B is divided into a first display section 70B1, a second display section 70B2, a third display section 70B3, and a fourth display section 70B4 from the side closest to the icon display area 70C, and each display section 70B1 to 70B4 displays a number of first reserved icons corresponding to the number of first special reserved drawings (U1). In other words, the number of first reserved icons increases or decreases in response to an increase or decrease in the number of first special reserved drawings (U1).

Specifically, the first display section 70B1 displays a first hold icon H11 indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed first, the second display section 70B2 displays a first hold icon H12 indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed second, the third display section 70B3 displays a first hold icon H13 indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed third, and the fourth display section 70B4 displays a first hold icon H14 indicating the first hold memory in which the first special symbol variable display is executed fourth.

The second reserved icon display area 70D is divided into a first display section 70D1, a second display section 70D2, a third display section 70D3, and a fourth display section 70D4 from the side closest to the icon display area 70C, and each of the display sections 70D1 to 70D4 displays a number of second reserved icons corresponding to the number of reserved second special charts (U2). In other words, the number of second reserved icons increases or decreases in response to an increase or decrease in the number of reserved second special charts (U2).

Specifically, the first display section 70D1 displays a second reserved icon H21 indicating a second reserved memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed first, the second display section 70D2 displays a second reserved icon H22 indicating a second reserved memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed second, the third display section 70D3 displays a second reserved icon H23 indicating a second reserved memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed third, and the fourth display section 70D4 displays a second reserved icon H24 indicating a second reserved memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth. Note that in this embodiment, the "first special symbol reserved number" may be referred to as the "first reserved number" and the "second special symbol reserved number" may be referred to as the "second reserved number".

In the icon display area 70C, the first reserved icon displayed in the first display section 70B1 of the first reserved icon display area 70B or the second reserved icon displayed in the first display section 70D1 of the second reserved icon display area 70D moves (shifts) in response to the start of the variable display of the special pattern (performance pattern 70a), and the icon TI disappears (is erased) when the variable display of the special pattern (performance pattern 70a) ends. The icon may be erased during the variable display of the special pattern (performance pattern 70a). In this embodiment, the "first reserved icon", "second reserved icon", and "the icon" may be collectively referred to as "icon".

In addition, on the left side of the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), there is a first special chart reserved number display area 70E for displaying a first reserved number indicating the current number of first special chart reserved numbers (U1) in normal game mode and specific game mode, and a second special chart reserved number display area 70F for displaying a second reserved number indicating the current number of second special chart reserved numbers (U2) in normal game mode and specific game mode.

The first movable member 73 can emit light for special effects by lighting the first movable member LED (full color), which is part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 9), in a specified light emission mode, and can perform special effects by moving vertically between a standby position (origin position) located above and a special effect position located below by the driving force of the first movable member drive motor, which is part of the board drive device 75 (see FIG. 9). The first movable member 73 is detected to be in the origin position by a first position detection sensor (not shown).

The second movable member 74 can emit light for special effects by lighting the second movable member LED (full color), which is part of the board lighting device 76 (see FIG. 9), in a specified light emission mode, and can perform special effects by moving diagonally up and down between a standby position (origin position) located in the upper right and a special effect position located in the lower left by the driving force of the second movable member drive motor, which is part of the board drive device 75 (see FIG. 9). The second movable member 74 is detected to be in the origin position by a second position detection sensor (not shown).

The first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are designed so that their performance positions overlap in part, so that the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not move simultaneously and therefore do not collide with each other.

In addition, if the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 do not collide with each other, one movable member may be moved to its performance position when it returns to a position that does not overlap with the performance position of the other movable member.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there are a payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on the establishment of a predetermined payout condition (prize balls, ball loan), a game ball storage section (not shown) that stores game balls supplied from an island facility and supplies them to the payout device 100, a main control device 110A (not shown) that incorporates a main control board 110 that controls the overall progress of the game, a payout control device 120A (not shown) that incorporates a payout control board 120 that controls the payout device 100 in response to a payout control command from the main control board 110, a performance control device 130A (not shown) that incorporates a performance control board 130 that controls the performance in response to a performance control command from the main control board 110, a power supply device 160A (not shown) that incorporates a power supply board 160 that supplies power supply voltage to various control devices, and a game information output terminal board 90 (not shown) for outputting game information (game signal) to the outside of the game machine (see FIG. 9).

In addition, a door-type cover member is provided that opens and closes in the left-right direction on one side around a rotation axis set on the left or right side to cover the upper part of the main control device 110A and the entire performance control device 130A from the rear, and the performance control device 130A is provided with a changeover switch 22 (see Figure 9) that is covered by the cover member and is used to switch adjustment modes related to adjusting the volume of the performance sound output from the audio output device 9 and the light intensity of the display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) and various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76).

On the front side of the main control board 110, there are mounted a main control unit 110m consisting of a one-chip microcomputer for controlling the game, an RWM clear switch 111a for inputting a signal to clear the memory contents of the main RAM 110c of the main control unit 110m or to update a setting value which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game (differentiating the advantageous degree of the game), a setting key switch 112a for inputting a signal to move to a state in which the setting value can be changed by operating the setting key or to a state in which the setting value can be confirmed, and an information display 113 for displaying performance information and setting values which allow the actual performance of the gaming machine 1 to be grasped.

The information display 113 is used to display set values and performance information (normal base values, described later), and is configured with four 7-segment displays with decimal points DP arranged side-by-side. The two 7-segment displays corresponding to the top two digits form an identification segment for displaying identification information indicating the type of performance information (data type), and the two 7-segment displays corresponding to the bottom two digits form a numeric segment for displaying numeric information indicating the set value and the numerical value of the performance information.

(Configuration of the back of the game board)
Next, the configuration of the back side of the game board will be described with reference to FIGS.
FIG. 2 is a rear view showing a state in which each unit is assembled to the base frame, and FIG. 3 is a partially exploded perspective view of FIG.

As shown in Figures 2 and 3, a base frame 170 (liquid crystal base frame) with an opening penetrating in the front-to-rear direction is attached to the rear (rear) of the game board 5, and an image display unit (first image display device 70, and image display cover 185) 180 is attached to the rear (rear) side of the base frame 170 so as to cover the opening. A lamp relay board 186 is attached to the rear (rear) side of the image display cover 185 (liquid crystal cover), and a main board case 200 housing the main control device 110A (main control board 110) is attached to the lower rear part of the image display cover 185 below the lamp relay board 186.

The base frame 170 (liquid crystal base) is a substantially rectangular ring-shaped body having an opening penetrating in the front-rear direction, and its ring-shaped front surface 171 is attached and fixed to the rear surface of the game board 5. The rear surface of the base frame 170 has space for arranging various circuit boards and components.
The performance control board 130 is disposed on the rear side of the image display unit 180 (liquid crystal unit) fixed to the rear side of the base frame 170. The image display unit 180 is configured so that it can be freely slidably mounted on the side (left-right direction), up-down direction, or diagonally of the base frame in a gap (storage space) for storing the image display unit provided in front of the performance control board.
The various circuit boards arranged on the rear surface of the base frame are covered with a cover member 190 .

As shown in FIG. 2, at least the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a of the main control board 110 are exposed on the rear side of the main board case 200.
In addition, the information display 113 provided on the main control board 110 can be seen through the transparent main board case 200.
Staff at the gaming facility can open the door of the gaming machine and, while visually checking the information display 113 on the back of the gaming machine, operate the RWM clear switch 111a and the setting key switch 112a to perform operations such as RWM clear, change settings, check settings, and check the performance information of the gaming machine.

The RWM clear switch 111a on the main control board 110 is not directly exposed, and an operating member 685 that can be operated by game arcade staff, etc., protrudes from an opening provided in the main board case 200 at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a.
When a staff member or the like presses the operation member 685, the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed by the pressed operation member 685. This causes the RWM clear switch 111a to be operated.

The setting key switch 112a is a cylindrical member protruding from the main control board 110 and has a keyhole on the end face thereof into which a key is inserted.
The end face of the setting key switch 112 a having a keyhole is exposed from an opening provided in the main board case 200 .
Staff at the gaming establishment can insert a key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a to operate it.

(Main board case)
Next, the configuration of the main board case 200 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.
In this embodiment, the game board 5 side is defined as the front side with respect to the main board case 200, and the direction opposite the game board 5 is defined as the rear side. Therefore, the left-right direction in the figure is the left-right direction when the main board case 200 is viewed from the opposite side to the game board 5.

FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating the main board case 200, FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view including the base of the main board case 200, and FIG. 6 is a rear perspective view of the main board case 200 when disassembled.
The main board case 200 of this embodiment is attached to the rear of a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine via a base 280 with the main control board 110 equipped with electronic components housed inside.

The base 280 is a connecting means for attaching the main board case 200 to a gaming machine side holding portion (in this embodiment, the lamp relay board 186) provided on the rear side of the gaming machine main body.
The main board case 200 housing the main control board is assembled with the lower case piece 210 attached to the back of the gaming board of a pachinko machine or the like via a base 280, so that the electronic components mounted on the internal main control board 110 can be seen from the back of the gaming board through the upper case piece 220.

The base 280 is a part used to attach the main board case 200 to the rear of the game board 5. As shown in FIG. 5, the base 280 is formed in a generally rectangular shape with the two sides along the left-right direction longer than the two sides along the top-bottom direction, and has a pair of shafts 281 near both the left and right ends of the lower side, and a plate-shaped portion in the left-right center of the upper side. The axial direction of the shafts 281 coincides with the left-right direction.

The main board case 200 is provided with a pair of hooks 249 that engage with each of the shafts 281. The pair of hooks 249 are provided on the lower side of the upper case piece 220, which will be described later. The hooks 249 are formed in a U-shape that protrudes toward the front.

When attaching the main board case 200 to the base 280, the main board case 200 is positioned so that the hook portions 249 are convex toward the rear side. This allows the hook portions 249 to engage with the shaft portions 281, so the main board case 200 is brought closer to the base 280 and each hook portion 249 is engaged with each shaft portion 281.

Then, once the hook portion 249 engages with the shaft portion 281, the free end side of the main board case 200 is rotated upward around the shaft portion 281, and the main board case 200 is placed on the base 280. At this time, the plate-shaped hook 282 provided on the upper edge of the base 280 is caught in the recess D provided on the upper edge of the main board case 200. Therefore, the main board case 200 is fixed to the base 280 by the engagement between the hook portion 249 and the shaft portion 281 and the engagement between the plate-shaped hook 282 and the main board case 200.

Then, attach the protective cover 229 to the main board case 200. The protective cover 229 covers the lower portion of the main board case 200, including the hook portion 249. In this way, the main control device 110A is attached to the rear side of the game board 5.

The main board case 200 is equipped with two transparent resin case pieces (lower case piece 210, upper case piece 220) that house the main control board 110 (printed circuit board) that is a single-sided mounting type with electronic components arranged on only one side, a cutting member 230 for cutting the anti-opening seal that is held between the edges of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220, and a cap 240 that is detachably attached to the sealing base part 310 of the main board case 200 to which the anti-opening seal 250 described below is adhered.

The main board case 200 houses the main control board 110 with the multiple connectors 771-776 mounted on the main control board 110 exposed. The main board case 200 is formed from a light-transmitting material, such as transparent plastic.

The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 form a main board case body (sealing body 300).
A protective cover 229 is disposed at the bottom of the upper case piece 220 to cover the connection between the internal connector provided on the internal main control board 110 and the external connector.
In this embodiment, the lower case piece 210 is fixed to the upper case piece 220 by a crimping member, with the main control board 110 sandwiched therebetween.

Crimping fastening parts 291 using crimping members are arranged at appropriate locations along the edge of the main board case 200, and the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are locked in a closed state by driving (locking) the crimping members (locking members) into the crimping fastening holes (sealing parts) provided in the crimping fastening parts 291. By removing (breaking) the crimping members driven (locked) into the crimping fastening holes, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 become openable, detachable, and removable.

In the crimping fastening portion 291 of the main board case 200 of this embodiment, two crimping fastening holes (crimping fastening holes 291A, 291B) are provided.
Each of the crimp fastening holes 291A, 291B is formed by communication between a lower case side fastening hole 292 provided in the lower case piece 210 and an upper case side fastening hole 293 provided in the upper case piece 220.

Note that only one crimp fastening hole is used for fastening the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 at a time. After removing (breaking) the crimping member to release the fastening (after opening the main board case 200), if fastening is to be performed again, the crimping member is driven into the other remaining crimp fastening hole to perform the fastening. In other words, the main board case of this embodiment can be opened up to two times.

The lower case piece 210 is combined with the upper case piece 220 to form an inner container section 581 for containing the main control board 110. The upper case piece 220 is provided on the rear side of the main board case 200, which is the side of the main control unit 110m. The lower case piece 210 is provided on the front side of the main board case 200, which is the side opposite the main control unit 110m.

The lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 each include a control board storage section 211, 221 that stores the main control board 110, and sealing sections 212, 222 that form the sealing base section 310 described below. The control board storage sections 211, 221 each include a plate section 211a, 221a formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and a flange section 211b, 221b that protrudes from the peripheral edge of the plate section 211a, 221a and surrounds one side of each plate section 211a, 221a.

A cylindrical portion 565 is provided on the left side of the plate portion 211a of the lower case piece 210, extending rearward toward the main control board 110. A hole portion 566 is formed in the cylindrical portion 565, extending in the front-to-rear direction. A screw thread is formed on the inside of the hole portion 566. A hole portion 567 is provided in the main control board 110 at a position opposite the cylindrical portion 565.

The main control board 110 is fixed to the lower case piece 210. More specifically, a hole 567 of the main control board 110 is disposed behind a cylindrical portion 565 of the lower case piece 210. The shank of a screw for fixing the main control board 110 is inserted from the rear side of the main control board 110 through the hole 567 into the hole 566 of the cylindrical portion 565. The threads formed in the hole 567 of the cylindrical portion 565 are mated with the threads provided on the shank of the screw. As a result, the main control board 110 is sandwiched between the head of the screw and the rear surface of the cylindrical portion 565, and the main control board 110 is fixed to the lower case piece 210. That is, the main control board 110 is screwed to the lower case piece 210 side.

The flange portion 211b of the control board storage section 211 has three L-shaped hook pieces 211c formed on each of the portions (hereinafter referred to as "male portions") that protrude from the plate portion 211a along the two long sides of the plate portion 211a. On the other hand, the flange portion 221b of the control board storage section 221 has a portion (hereinafter referred to as "female portion") that protrudes from the plate portion 221a along the two long sides of the plate portion 221a. The flange portion 221b of the control board storage section 221 has a double wall shape, and an insertion groove portion 221c into which the male portion of the control board storage section 211 can be inserted is provided between the walls that form the double wall. Also, each insertion groove portion 221c has a hook piece 221d formed therein.

When the lower case piece 210 to which the main control board 110 is screwed is assembled with the upper case piece 220, the male part of the flange part 211b is inserted into the female part of the flange part 221b. Then, the control board storage parts 211, 221 are slid toward each other in the left-right direction indicated by the arrow α in FIG. 6. Then, the hook piece 211c provided on the male part engages with the hook piece 221d, so that the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are assembled together so that they will not come apart unless they move toward each other in the direction opposite to the arrow α.

When combined in this manner, the control board storage sections 211, 221 form a box-shaped inner container section 581 that is shielded from the outside. Since the main control board 110 is stored in the inner container section 581, the possibility of the main control board 110 and main control section 110m being illegally replaced, etc. can be reduced.

The main control board 110 is attached to the inside of the control board storage section 221 before the control board storage sections 211 and 221 are combined. At this time, the ICs and other components mounted on the main control board 110 are attached so as to face the plate section 221a of the control board storage section 221. This is because the plate section 221a is also made of transparent plastic, so that even if the main control board 110 is stored in the main board case 200, it is possible to check from the outside through the plate section 221a whether the electronic components such as the main control section 110m mounted on the main control board 110 have not been illegally replaced. In this embodiment, when the main control device 110A equipped with the main board case 200 is attached to the game board 5, the electronic components mounted on the main control board 110 in the main board case 200 can be seen from the rear side of the game machine 1 through the upper case piece 220.

The right ends of the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are provided with sealing parts 212 and 222. As shown in FIG. 34, the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are provided with a first screw-fastening piece 91 and a second screw-fastening piece 92 above the sealing parts 212 and 222. When the control board storage parts 211 and 221 are slid and assembled, the sealing base part 310 is formed by the sealing parts 212 and 222 at the longitudinal end of the assembled sealing body 300. When the cap 240 is attached to the sealing body 300 by covering the sealing base part 310, the third screw-fastening piece 393 provided on the cap 240 overlaps with the first screw-fastening piece 91, the second screw-fastening piece 92, and the third screw-fastening piece 393 provided on the cap 240 overlaps with the longitudinal end of the sealing body 300, forming the screw-fastening part 390 for screw fastening.

The sealing parts 212 and 222 protrude to the right from the right end of the control board storage parts 211 and 221. The sealing parts 212 and 222 are formed to have the same height in the left-right direction and the same width in the up-down direction. Each sealing part 212 and 222 has a long groove part 212a and 222a formed along the left-right direction. The sealing part 222 has two parallel groove parts 222a formed along the left-right direction at a predetermined distance, and the sealing part 212 has one groove part 212a formed along the left-right direction. When the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 are combined, the sealing parts 212 and 222 form a sealing base part 310 on the right part of the combined control board storage parts 211 and 221. In the sealing base part 310, the sealing parts 212 and 222 are arranged in parallel with a certain interval, and an insertion and removal space is formed between the surfaces of the sealing parts 212 and 222 facing each other.

The open-danger seal 250 is used as a means for sealing the main board case 200, and certifies that it is an authentic product issued by an organization or the like that has certification qualifications. The open-danger seal 250 is made of an easily cuttable material such as paper, with an adhesive surface on one side thereof, and has multiple cuts formed thereon, taking into consideration cuttability. As will be described later, for example, a hologram and a QR code (registered trademark), etc. are printed on the open-danger seal 250. The words "open-danger seal" are also printed on the open-danger seal 250.
The cutting member 230 is formed in a shape having a base portion 230a, a pair of cut portions 361, and a cutting portion 364. The base portion 230a, which forms the base of the cutting member 230, is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. One of the two long sides of the base portion 230a is formed with a cutting portion 364. The cutting portion 364 is a portion where the tip of the base portion 230a is formed in a blade shape. The cut portions 361 are provided on both ends of the base portion 230a in the longitudinal direction, and are formed in a shape that is bent in an overall "L" shape. The left end of the cut portion 361 is called a free end portion 361a.

The cap 240 is formed to a size that can be placed over the sealing base portion 310 to cover the entire sealing base portion 310, and is formed to be detachable from the sealing base portion 310. The cap 240 includes a cap body 241 formed in a bowl shape that covers the sealing base portion 310, and a third screw stop piece 393 formed on one end side of the cap body 241 in the longitudinal direction. A protrusion 382 is provided on the inner surface of the cap body 241 at a position where the free end portion 361a of the pinch portion 361 of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion space 310a is caught when the cap 240 is attached to the sealing base portion 310. In addition, a groove portion 386 is formed on the inner surface of the cap body 241.

The cutting member 230 is inserted into the insertion/removal space of the sealing base 310. Then, the open-prohibition seal 250 is affixed. Furthermore, when the cap 240 is placed over the sealing base 310, the groove 386 fits into the part of the cutting member 230 inserted into the insertion/removal space 310a. In addition, the protrusion 382 engages with the free end 361a of the pinch portion 361 of the cutting member 230.

When the cap 240 is placed over the sealing base portion 310, the third screw-fastening piece 393 overlaps the combination of the first screw-fastening piece 91 of the lower case piece 210 and the second screw-fastening piece 92 of the upper case piece 220, forming a screw-fastening portion 390 for screw fastening. When the crimping member 94 is driven into the screw-fastening portion 390, the lower case piece 210, the upper case piece 220, and the cap 240 are fixed together.

When the seal of the main board case 200 is to be removed, the crimping member 94 is removed and the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base 310. The same applies when the seal of the main board case 200 is to be fraudulently removed. The cutting member 230 and the cap 240 are integrated. Therefore, when the cap 240 is removed from the sealing base 310, the cutting member 230 is also removed from the sealing base 310 at the same time. This causes irreparable damage to the open-do-not-tamper seal 250 by the cutting portion 364 etc.

(Main control board)
Next, the configuration of the main control board 110 according to this embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 7. Fig. 7 is a diagram for explaining the structure of the main control board.
The main control board 110, which controls the game, is equipped with a main control unit 110m, an RWM clear switch 111a, a setting key switch 112a, an information display 113, a number of electronic components 595 (ICs, resistors, connectors, capacitors, coils, etc.) different from the main control unit 110m, and a number of connectors 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, 776, etc.

The main control unit 110m stores memory contents used for controlling the game, and also stores memory contents that affect the outcome of the game.
The main control unit 110m is a one-chip microcomputer that integrates a main CPU 110a, a main ROM 110b, and a main RAM 110c, which will be described later.
The multiple connectors 771 to 776 are lined up in order from left to right on the lower part of the main control board 110. The multiple connectors 771 to 776 are arranged inside six openings 779 provided on the lower part of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200.

Of the multiple connectors 771-776, two connectors 774 and 775 are called detection signal connectors 774 and 775. Signals from at least some of the first start hole detection switch 45a, second start hole detection switch 47a, general prize hole detection switch 43a, and large prize hole detection switch 50a that detect the entrance of a game ball are input to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775. In this embodiment, all signals from the first start hole detection switch 45a, second start hole detection switch 47a, general prize hole detection switch 43a, and large prize hole detection switch 50a that detect the entrance of a game ball are input to the detection signal connectors 774 and 775. The detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are a different color from the other connectors 771, 772, 773, and 776. In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are fluorescent, and the other connectors 771, 772, 773, and 776 are a color different from the fluorescent color.

The main control unit 110m includes a plate-shaped main body extending in the left-right direction, and a plurality of signal pins (first signal pins) extending downward from the lower end of the main body and electrically connected to the main control board 110. The signal pins (first signal pins) are mounted (soldered) on the main control board 110 so as to be visible through the main board case 200.
The electronic components 595 each include a signal pin (second signal pin). The signal pin (second signal pin) is mounted (soldered) on the main control board 110 so as to be visible through the main board case 200.

The RWM clear switch 111a will now be described.
4 and 8, the RWM clear switch 111a on the main control board 110 is not directly exposed. A recess 688 is provided in the upper case piece 220 of the board case 200, and an opening 687 is provided in the recess 688.
5, the operating member 685 is provided at a position corresponding to the RWM clear switch 111a, and when a staff member or the like presses the operating member 685, the RWM clear switch 111a is pressed by the pressed operating member 685. This causes the RWM clear switch 111a to be operated.
A cover member 686 is provided in the recess 688. The cover member 686 is journaled within the recess 688 so as to be rotatable between a first position where the operating member 685 is covered to make it inoperable, and a second position where the operating member 685 is opened to make it operable.
By moving the operating member 685 to the second position, the RWM clear switch 111a can be operated.
In this way, it is only necessary to provide the substrate case 200 with an opening 687 large enough to insert the operating member 685. Furthermore, the operating member 685 cannot be operated unless the cover member 686 is opened. Therefore, unauthorized access to the inside of the substrate case 200 can be prevented.
The RWM clear switch 111 a may have an end exposed from the opening 687 so that it can be operated directly without being operated using the operating member 685 .

The setting key switch 112a is a cylindrical member protruding from the main control board 110 and has a keyhole on the end face thereof into which a key is inserted.
The end face of the setting key switch 112 a having a keyhole is exposed from an opening 661 provided in the upper case piece 220 of the board case 200 , but is slightly lower than the surface of the board case 200 .
Staff or the like can insert a key into the keyhole of the setting key switch 112a to perform the operation.

(Identification mark)
The following describes the identification markings 520. As shown in FIG. 5, the identification markings 520 are provided on the main control board 110, the main control unit 110m, the lower case half 210, the upper case half 220, and the cap 240.
The identification mark 520 is a mark including information related to the gaming machine 1. In the following description, the identification mark 520 provided on the main control board 110 is referred to as an identification mark 521, and the identification mark 520 provided on the main control unit 110m is referred to as an identification mark 522. The identification mark 520 provided on the upper case piece 220 is referred to as an identification mark 523, the identification mark 520 provided on the lower case piece 210 is referred to as an identification mark 524, and the identification mark 520 provided on the cap 240 is referred to as an identification mark 525.

As shown in Fig. 5, the identification mark 521 is displayed by silk screen printing on the upper part of the rear surface of the main control board 110. The identification mark 521 is an information identification section for displaying specific information. The identification mark 522 is affixed by engraving to the main control section 110m. The identification mark 522 is an information identification section for displaying specific information.
Identification marks 523, 524, and 525 attached to main board case 200 are information identification sections for displaying specific information. Identification mark 524 is formed in the upper right part of the front surface of lower case piece 210 by stamping using a mold for manufacturing lower case piece 210 (see FIG. 33).
The identification mark 525 is formed on the rear surface of the cap 240 by stamping using a mold used to manufacture the cap 240. The display mode of the identification mark 523 will be described later.

The identification indications 521 to 525 are related to each other, and include at least the same identification indication 529. In this embodiment, as an example, the identification indication 521 is the character string "ABCD01", and the identification indication 522 is the character string "ABCD02". The identification indication 523 is the character string "ABCD03", and the identification indication 524 is the character string "ABCD04". The identification indication 525 is the character string "ABCD05". The same identification indication 529 in the identification indications 521 to 525 is "ABCD". The identification indication 529 is, for example, an indication corresponding to the manufacturer name and model name. In this embodiment, as an example, in "ABCD", "AB" represents the manufacturer name, and "CD" represents the model name.

In addition, in the identification displays 521 to 525, the manufacturer name may be displayed as it is, rather than as "AB" included in "ABCD". Also, the model name may be displayed as it is, rather than as "CD" included in "ABCD". Also, the model of the gaming machine may be displayed in the identification displays 521 to 525.

(Sealing member)
5 and 8, a seal member 1560 and a seal member 1561 are attached to the outer surface 531 of the upper case piece 220 of the main board case 200.

The sealing member 1560 is attached to a position indication portion 561 provided on the lower left side of the upper case piece 220 in the left-right direction, and the sealing member 1561 is attached to a position indication portion 561 provided on the upper right corner of the upper case piece 220.
Both of the sealing members 1560 and 1561 are formed from a material having optical transparency, and in the present embodiment, as an example, they are transparent (made of a transparent material).
Each of the sealing members 1560 and 1561 is disposed across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 8). Note that various electronic components such as the plurality of electronic components 595 located in front of the sealing members 1560 and 1561 are not shown in FIG.

The seal member 1560 is a seal for managing the main board.
In this example, a watermark for preventing counterfeiting is provided on a seal member main body 1560A (base portion) of the seal member 1560. That is, the seal member 1560 (opener indication seal) is a processed seal in which a watermark processing is applied to the seal member main body 1560A.
A "watermark" is, for example, a display that looks different depending on the viewing angle, and various types can be applied, such as those that use holograms or those that look different depending on their physical shape.
However, although sealing member main body 1560A has been subjected to a predetermined processing (watermark processing), it is transparent and at least has high light transmittance, ensuring a certain degree of visibility.

The seal member 1560 has, on the seal member body 1560A, a white writing area 1570 (writing column), a code portion 1572, and an information display portion 1573 within a frame with a black heading such as "Main Board Control Number."
The writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, the information display portion 1573, and the text display associated with these areas (described later) are non-translucent areas with low translucency because the transparent material of the sealing member main body 1560A is not exposed.
The sealing member 1560 has a number of non-transparent portions, through which it is difficult to see the main control board 110 inside the main board case 200 .
The code portion 1572 as a non-transparent portion, the information display portion 1573 and the writing area 1570 are provided at positions on the seal member main body 1560A that do not overlap with the main control portion 110m and the information display device 113.

On the other hand, the areas other than the writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, the information display portion 1573, and the areas associated with these areas and containing the text display described below in the sealing member main body 1560A are translucent portions 1574 in which the transparent material of the sealing member main body 1560A is exposed and which have high translucency.
The translucent portion 1574 is the above-mentioned viewing portion through which the electronic components 595 on the main control board 110 in the main board case 200 can be seen through a transparent material.

In the main board case 200, the main control board 110 is visible through the sealing member 1560 and the main board case 200. This allows an inspector to easily check the main control board 110. This allows an inspector to check the main control board 110 through the sealing member 1560 and easily determine whether or not cheating has occurred. This allows players to play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.

Furthermore, regardless of whether or not there is a translucent or non-translucent portion, the sealing member 1560 is attached to the sealing member 1562 attached to the main control unit 110m on the main control board 110 in a position that can be seen from all angles.
Furthermore, regardless of whether or not there is a light-transmitting portion or a non-light-transmitting portion, the sealing member 1560, including the writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573, is positioned so that the entire sealing member 1560 does not overlap with the main control unit 110m from any angle.
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the main control unit 110m can always be seen through the main board case 200.
Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control unit 110m. Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control unit 110m and determine whether or not cheating is occurring. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is increased.
Regardless of whether or not there is a light-transmitting portion or a non-light-transmitting portion, the sealing member 1560, including the writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, and the information display portion 1573, is positioned so that the entire sealing member 1560 does not overlap with the information display device 113 from any angle.
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the information display 113 can be seen through the main board case 200.

In FIG. 8, it cannot be said that the sealing member 1560 and the information display 113 are in close proximity to each other. However, if the following conditions are met: the sealing member 1560 does not overlap the main control unit 110m and the information display 113, the information display 113 is located sufficiently separated from the connectors 771 to 776, and the sealing member 1561 does not overlap the information display 113, then the sealing member 1560 and the information display 113 may be in close proximity to each other.

The display contents of the seal member 1560 will be described in detail below.
The writing area 1570 is an area for writing down the person who opened the main board case 200 and the date of opening.
The writing area 1570 is a white base formed on a transparent material on which writing can be performed with a pen or the like.
As an example, six writing areas 1570 are provided, with three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction, allowing three sets of "opener" and "date of opening" to be written.
The writing area 1570 is printed on a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) base.

Above the writing areas 1570, headings such as "Opener" and "Date Opened" are printed in black, and to the left of each writing area, a circled number indicating the number of the writing area is printed.
That is, "Opener" is printed in black above the upper left writing area 1570. "Date Opened" is printed in black above the upper right writing area 1570. A circle 1 is printed to the left of the upper left writing area 1570. A circle 2 is printed to the left of the writing area 1570 in the vertical center on the left side. A circle 3 is printed to the left of the lower left writing area 1570.

For example, when an inspector opens the main board case 200, the inspector writes the inspector's name in the left writing area 1570, and writes the date that the main board case 200 was opened in the right writing area 1570. The inspector may also write in the writing area 1570 the date that the inspector confirmed whether or not any tampering had occurred with the main control board 110.

Code portion 1572 is provided in the upper left part of seal member 1560. Code portion 1572 includes predetermined information. Code portion 1572 is a portion where information can be read by other devices, and for example, a QR code (registered trademark), barcode, etc. is printed in black in a rectangular colored area (white in this embodiment). In this embodiment, as an example, code portion 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code portion 1572 is linked to information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110, which is stored in a device other than the gaming machine 1 (hereinafter referred to as the "other device").
For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code section 1572, is read by a camera provided on a portable information terminal or the like. The portable information terminal uses the URL to access other devices via a network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed on the portable information terminal includes the delivery destination of the main control board 110 (for example, the name of the store to which the gaming machine 1 was delivered) and information on whether the gaming machine 1 was discarded or not. This allows the inspector to easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110 and information on whether the gaming machine 1 was discarded or not. Therefore, the inspector can confirm the information on the delivery destination and easily determine whether or not fraud has occurred in which a main control board 110 with a different delivery destination has been installed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

The information display section 1573 includes various information. The information display section 1573 may include, for example, information similar to the identification display 529. In this embodiment, as an example, the information display section 1573 has the character string "EF001" printed in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. The character string is, for example, the management number of the main control board 110. Using the management number, an inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1 and whether the gaming machine 1 has been discarded from information linked to the management number held by the manufacturer. The character string of the information display section 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer name, model name, model, etc. In addition, the rectangular area of the information display section 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code section 1572 are connected in the left-right direction.

The light transmitting portion 1574 (viewing portion) of the sealing member 1560 will be described.
The light-transmitting portion 1574 is the area of the seal member main body 1560A other than the writing area 1570, the code portion 1572, the information display portion 1573, the notation "Main board control number", the frame, the notation of the opener, the notation of the opening date, and the notations of circles 1 to 3.
The light-transmitting portion 1574 is, for example, an area extending in the left-right direction between three lines of writing areas 1570 in the vertical direction.
The light-transmitting portion 1574 is an area extending in the left-right direction between the code portion 1572 and the information display portion 1573 arranged side by side, and the two writing areas 1570 on the upper side.
The light-transmitting portion 1574 is also an area extending in the vertical direction between the two horizontal rows of writing areas 1570 .
An inspector can check electronic component 595 (see FIG. 62(a)) through light-transmitting portion 1574. Therefore, compared to a case where light-transmitting portion 1574 is not provided, an inspector can easily check whether or not tampering has occurred with electronic component 595. This reduces the possibility of tampering, allowing players to play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.

The seal member 1561 will now be described.
The seal member 1561 is attached to the main control unit 110m on the main control board 110 in a position where it can be seen from all angles.
The seal member 1561 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the main control unit 110m from any angle.
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the main control unit 110m can always be seen through the main board case 200.
The seal member 1561 is provided in a position such that it does not overlap with the information display 113 from any angle.
Therefore, when the main board case 200 is viewed from the front, the information display 113 can be seen through the main board case 200.

The seal member 1561 is an information identifying portion for displaying specific information.
For example, at least one of the model name, manufacturer name, rated voltage, and total capacity is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR AIU GH101" and manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed. In this embodiment, the part on which this information is printed is also referred to as the printed part 1563. The specific information displayed on the seal member 1561 is referred to as the identification mark 1595. In this embodiment, the identification mark 1595 is the model name including the model number "CR AIU GH101", the manufacturer name "AA Company", the rated voltage, and the total capacity (AC 24V ± 5%, 250VA).
In addition, in the area where the model name is to be displayed, a background is created using a conspicuous color such as red or yellow against the transparent material, and the model name is displayed in white letters on the background.

In addition, a seal member 1562 is attached to the main control unit 110m.
The seal member 1562 is an information identification section for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In the present embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed on the seal member 1562 as the predetermined information. The specific information displayed on the seal member 1562 is called an identification display 1596. In the present embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR AIU GH101" and the manufacturer name "AA Company".
A QR code (registered trademark) showing the information specified by the identification mark 1596 may be displayed on the seal member 1562 .
Furthermore, the seal member 1561 and the seal member 1562 are displayed including at least the same identification marks 1595, 1596. In this embodiment, the type name "CR Aiu", model number "GH101", and manufacturer name "AA Company" in the identification marks 1595, 1596 are all the same, but it is sufficient if only some of them are the same.
Although the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are provided on the main board case 200 and the main control unit 110m, they may be provided on other components. For example, the main control board 110 may be displayed with the same identification marks as the identification marks 1595 and 1596.

As described above, in this embodiment, the sealing members 1560, 1561 are arranged across at least a portion of the multiple electronic components 595 (see FIG. 8), so that, for example, by checking the positional relationship between the sealing members 1560, 1561 and the electronic components 595, an inspector can determine whether or not tampering has occurred with the main control board 110. This reduces the possibility of tampering, allowing players to play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.

In addition, since the seal member 1560 is provided with an area 1575, the inspector can write the inspector's name and the date that the main board case 200 was opened in the area 1575 (more specifically, the writing area 1570). The inspector can also write in the area 1575 the date on which it was confirmed whether or not tampering had occurred with the main control board 110. In addition, since the light-transmitting portion 1574 (peeking portion) is provided between the areas 1575, the area 1575 is more noticeable than when only the area 1575 is provided. This makes it easier for the inspector to check the characters and the like written in the area 1575. This reduces the possibility of tampering, and the player can play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.

Furthermore, since the sealing member 1560 is provided with the light-transmitting portion 1574 (viewing portion), the inspector can check the electronic component 595 through the light-transmitting portion 1574 (viewing portion). Therefore, compared to a case where the light-transmitting portion 1574 (viewing portion) is not provided, the inspector can easily check whether or not tampering has occurred with the electronic component 595. This reduces the possibility of tampering, allowing the player to play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.
Moreover, the code portion 1572 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the main control portion 110m. Therefore, the inspector can easily check the main control portion 110m. Therefore, the inspector can check the main control portion 110m and easily determine whether or not cheating is being performed. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the interest of the player is increased.

Furthermore, the code section 1572 is linked to information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110, which is stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1. This allows an inspector to easily check the information indicating the delivery destination of the main control board 110 using the code section 1572. Therefore, the inspector can check the delivery destination information and easily determine whether or not fraud has occurred in which a main control board 110 with a different delivery destination has been installed. This allows the player to play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.
Also, a seal member 1562 is attached to the main control unit 110m, and predetermined information is displayed on the seal member 1562. Therefore, an inspector can easily check for tampering such as replacing the main control unit 110m by checking the seal member 1562. This reduces the possibility of tampering, allowing players to play with peace of mind. This increases the player's interest.
Furthermore, since at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name is printed on the seal member 1561, the inspector can easily ascertain at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name. Therefore, the inspector can check at least one of the model name and the manufacturer name and easily determine whether or not cheating has occurred. Therefore, the player can play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is increased.

The various information displayed on the seal members 1560 and 1561 may be displayed at an angle that allows the mounting location of the main control unit 110m to be visually recognized.
The main board case 200, particularly the upper case piece 220, does not have any ventilation holes.
The main board case 200 has date marks formed on the lower case piece 210 and the upper case piece 220 .
The date mark is a mark for lot management that is added to the case, which is a plastic molded product, during production (molding).
A feature of this embodiment is that no parts are provided near the main control unit 110m that are so high that the seal member 1562 becomes invisible.

As described above, the main control board 110 is mounted with the main control unit 110m that controls the game, the information display 113 that displays the performance of the gaming machine, and other electronic components 595 that are different from these. A transparent seal member 1560 is attached to the main control board 110. This allows the other electronic components 595 to be seen through the transparent seal member 1560 and the main board case 200. In addition, the main control unit 110m and the information display 113 can be directly seen through the main board case 200.

By applying watermarking to the transparent portion of the seal member 1560, which has a transparent portion and multiple non-transparent portions that must be affixed to the main board case 200, it is possible to prevent the seal member 1560 from being copied. In addition, by applying watermarking to the transparent portion of the seal member 1560 so that it does not overlap with the main control unit 110m and the information display 113, it is possible to reliably ensure the visibility of the main control unit 110m, which is an important board component, and the information display 113, which must be read accurately, without being affected by the watermarking or the multiple non-transparent portions.

The state of electronic components 595, which are less important than the main control unit 110m and the information display 113, can be checked through the gaps between the multiple non-transparent parts and the surrounding transparent parts 1574 (viewing parts) via watermark processing. Even if there are multiple non-transparent parts, the transparent parts ensure visibility of the board parts. In addition, the non-transparent parts can display specific information, such as necessary information to identify the main control unit 110m. Different information can be displayed or written in each of the multiple non-transparent parts.

The information display 113 may be disposed on the lower end side instead of the upper end side of the main control board 110. In that case, it is desirable to dispose the connectors 771 to 776 on the upper end side opposite (opposite) the information display 113.
The information display 113 may be disposed on the left or right end side of the main control board 110. In that case, it is desirable that the connectors 771 to 776 are disposed on the end opposite (opposite) the information display 113.
As described above, the information display 113 may be disposed on the inside of the main control board 110 instead of at the end of the board. Even in this case, the information display 113 must be disposed in a position that does not overlap with the cables and harnesses extending from the connectors 771 to 776, the seal member 1560, and the like.

In this embodiment, the RWM clear switch 111a is described as being located on the main control board 110, but this is not limited thereto and it may be provided on the dispensing control board 120. Also, in this embodiment, the setting key switch 112a is described as being located on the main control board 110, but this is not limited thereto. The setting key switch 112a can be located in a different position away from the main control board 110 as long as it is electrically connected to the main control board 110.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically described with reference to Fig. 9. Fig. 9 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The main control board 110 controls the overall progress of the game (basic operations). The main control board 110 is equipped with a main control unit 110m as a one-chip microcomputer equipped with a main CPU 110a that performs arithmetic processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs, and a main RAM 110c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, as well as input and output ports for main control. The main CPU 110a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the programs stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while using the main RAM 110c as a work area, thereby controlling controlled devices (various solenoids and various displays) and sending predetermined commands based on the results of the arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the performance control board 130, etc.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to allow commands (data) to be communicated in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 is configured to allow commands (data) to be communicated in only one direction, from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130.

The input port of the main control board 110 is connected to the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the gate detection switch 44a, the first starting hole detection switch 45a, the second starting hole detection switch 47a, the large winning hole detection switch 50a, the out ball detection switch 52a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, the RWM clear switch 111a, the setting key switch 112a, the information display 113, and the payout control board 120. When detection signals from the various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing is performed according to the detection signals.

The output port of the main control board 110 is connected to the second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, the large prize opening opening solenoid 51b, the main information display device 59, the game information output terminal board 90, the payout control board 120, and the performance control board 130. Drive control signals for controlling the various solenoids, display control signals for controlling the various displays, and game information to be notified from the game information output terminal board to the outside of the gaming machine (such as a hall computer) are output via the output port.

The payout control board 120 is a slave control board that controls the payout of game balls based on the payout command received from the main control board 110, and also controls the launch of game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control unit 121 that drives the payout device 100 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control unit 122 that drives the launch device 26 to control the launch of game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs calculation processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program, etc., a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and an input port and an output port for payout control. The payout CPU 121a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown) and reads out the payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, and performs calculation processing related to the payout of game balls while using the payout RAM 121c as a work area, controls the payout device 100, and transmits predetermined commands based on the results of the calculation processing to the main control board 110, the performance control board 130, etc.

The input port of the payout control unit 121 is connected to an open detection switch 31a, a tray full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the payout device 100, and a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit, and the output port of the payout control unit 121 is connected to a payout motor 100b provided in the payout device 100.

When the payout control unit 121 receives a payout command from the main control board 110, it drives the payout motor 100b provided in the payout device 100 to control the payout of a predetermined number of game balls, and ends the control of the payout of game balls when the payout ball detection switch 100a detects that the predetermined number of game balls have been paid out.

The firing control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, and an output port (not shown). The input port of the firing control unit 122 is connected to the touch sensor 15a and the firing volume 15b, and the output port of the firing control unit 122 is connected to the ball feed solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b.

When the launch control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the launch handle 15 based on a touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows current to flow to the ball feed solenoid 11b and the launch solenoid 28b, and when it detects a change in the rotation angle of the launch handle 15 based on a detection signal from the launch volume 15b, it drives the ball feed solenoid 11b and drives the launch solenoid 28b to launch the game ball with a launch strength that corresponds to the rotation angle of the launch handle 15.

The launch solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the launch member 28 is directly connected to the rotating shaft. When the rotating shaft rotates, the launch member 28 rotates and launches the game ball A. The operation of the launch solenoid 28b is set to approximately 99.9 (times/minute) based on the frequency based on the output period of the crystal oscillator provided in the launch control unit 122, so the number of game balls launched per minute is approximately 99.9 (pieces/minute). In other words, a game ball is launched approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The presentation control board 130 is a slave control board (slave control means) that controls the presentation of the game (performed in the gaming machine 1) based on the presentation command received from the main control board 110. The presentation control board 130 is equipped with a sub-CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub-ROM 130b that stores the presentation control program, a presentation control unit 130m that includes a sub-RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, a display control unit 140 that controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), and the sound output device 9 (speaker), a lamp control unit 150 that controls the frame lighting device 10, the button drive device 17b, the board drive device 75, and the board lighting device 76, and input and output ports for presentation control.

The sub-CPU 130a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the game program stored in the sub-ROM 130b, and performs calculation processing related to the presentation while using the sub-RAM 130c as a work area, thereby controlling (outputting data and commands) the various control units (display control unit 140, lamp control unit 150) to execute various presentations in response to commands received from the main control board 110 and input signals from the presentation button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a.

The input port of the performance control board 130 is connected to the performance button detection switch 17a, the cross key detection switch 19a, and a button position detection sensor (not shown). When the performance button detection switch 17a inputs a performance button detection signal indicating that the performance button 17 has been operated, or when the cross key detection switch 19a inputs a cross key detection signal (up button detection signal, left button detection signal, down button detection signal, right button detection signal) indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated, the performance control board 130 performs processing to execute a performance according to the detection signal.

The display control unit 140 receives commands from the performance control unit 130m and controls the first image display device 70 (main LCD) and the second image display device 71 (sub LCD) to display a specified image, and controls the audio output device 9 to output a specified sound.

The display control unit 140 includes a general control unit 141 that performs general control of image display and audio output based on reception of a performance control command from the performance control unit 130m, an image control unit 145 (VDP) that controls the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 based on reception of a display control command (display list) from the general control unit 141, a CGROM 146 in which image data and the like are stored, an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) that controls the audio output device 9 based on reception of an audio control command from the general control unit 141, and an audio ROM 149 in which audio data and the like are stored.

The overall control unit 141 includes an overall CPU 141a that performs calculation processing, an overall ROM 141b in which an overall control program is stored, an overall RAM 141c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports to which an image control unit 145 (VDP) and an audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) are connected.

The general CPU 141a receives an operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the general control program stored in the general ROM 141b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the general RAM 141c as a work area. This allows it to perform control processing for generating display control commands (display lists) that indicate the performance images to be displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71 and sending them to the display control unit 140, and control processing for generating audio control commands that indicate the performance sounds to be output from the audio output device 9 and sending them to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

The VRAM 143 provided in the image control unit 145 (VDP) has a display list storage area that temporarily stores the display list output from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142a), a frame buffer area corresponding to the first image display device 70 (main LCD) and the second image display device 71 (sub LCD), etc.

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying images, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area alternate between being a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer" each time drawing begins.

Therefore, based on instructions (display list) from the general control unit 141, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 in the "drawing frame buffer" in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147, reads the drawing data from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area, generates video signals (RGB signals, etc.) based on the read drawing data, and outputs them to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display various images.

The image control unit 145 (VDP) receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, and divides the operating clock to generate synchronization signals (horizontal and vertical synchronization signals) for synchronizing with the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), which are output to the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal). In this embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 seconds = approximately 33 ms) so that 30 drawings (image displays) are performed per second, but it may be 60 fps (1/60 seconds = approximately 16.6 ms) so that 60 drawings (image displays) are performed per second.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and controls the audio output device 9 to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. in accordance with the display of the first image display device 70 (main LCD) and the second image display device 71 (sub LCD) based on various performance data (including commands) sent from the performance control unit 130m.

The lamp control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs calculation processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores the lamp control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, and input/output ports.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs calculation processing related to the performance while using the lamp RAM 150c as a work area, thereby controlling (outputting data and commands) the controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform a specified performance in accordance with the performance instruction commands received from the performance control unit 130m.

The input/output ports of the lamp control unit are connected to the frame lighting device 10, the button driving device 17b, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80, and based on various performance data (including commands) sent from the performance control unit 130m (sub-CPU 130a), it controls the lighting of various LEDs in the frame lighting device 10, the board lighting device 76, and the sub-information display device 80, and controls the driving of drive sources such as the motors and solenoids of the button driving device 17b and the board driving device 75.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power supply (operating power supply) required for the operation of the gaming machine 1 from a power supply supplied from outside the gaming machine 1, and supplies it to the gaming machine 1 (the main control board 110, the payout control board 120, the performance control board 130, and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 is equipped with a power interruption detection circuit 162 that detects whether a power interruption (power outage) has occurred and outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of a power interruption (power outage), and a backup power supply circuit 163 that supplies backup power to the main control board 110 in the event of a power interruption (power outage).

The power supply board 160 also has a power switch that can be operated by an arcade staff member to switch between an ON state that supplies main power to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, presentation control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state that stops the supply. When the power switch is turned ON, the supply of main power begins and the gaming machine 1 starts operating. Note that the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained even when the power switch is turned OFF.

The power interruption detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, outputs a power interruption detection signal to the main control board 110. More specifically, when the power interruption detection signal goes high, the main CPU 110a enters an operable state, and when the power interruption detection signal goes low, the main CPU 110a enters a stopped state.

The backup power circuit 163 is equipped with a capacitor that stores electricity when the gaming machine is energized, and in the event of a power outage (blackout), the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is supplied to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. This allows the contents stored in the main RAM 110c and the payout RAM 121c to be retained even in the event of a power outage (blackout), and after recovery from the power outage (blackout), the game control state can be restored to the state before the power outage (blackout). Note that a backup power supply may also be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the performance control board 130.

(Explanation of game state)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be described. In this embodiment, there are a "low probability state" and a "high probability state" as states related to the jackpot determination of the special symbol, and there are a "non-time-saving state" and a "time-saving state" as states related to the movable member 48 of the second starting hole 47.

In this embodiment, the following three game states are provided.
(1) A normal gaming state that is a "low probability state" and a "non-time-saving state" (a low probability non-time-saving gaming state)
(2) A time-saving gaming state that is a "low probability state" and a "time-saving state" (low probability time-saving gaming state)
(3) A probability-variable game state in which the game is both a "high probability state" and a "time-saving state" (high probability time-saving game state)

The gaming state when the game is started, i.e., the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1, is set to the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state." In this embodiment, the "low-probability time-saving gaming state" and the "high-probability time-saving gaming state" are sometimes referred to as "specific gaming states" because they are gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state.

In this embodiment, a "low probability state" refers to a gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is set low at approximately 1/300 when the jackpot determination for a special symbol is performed on the condition that a gaming ball enters the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, for example, when the setting value (of the jackpot probability in the jackpot determination), which is the stage of the advantageous degree of the game, is "1." In contrast, a "high probability state" refers to a gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is improved compared to the low probability state, and when the setting value is "1," the probability of winning a jackpot is set high at approximately 1/60.

Specifically, there are four setting values, from "1" to "4." When the setting value is "1," the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability state is approximately 1/300, and the probability of winning a jackpot in a high probability state is approximately 1/60. When the setting value is "2," the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability state is approximately 1/295, and the probability of winning a jackpot in a high probability state is approximately 1/59. When the setting value is "3," the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability state is approximately 1/290, and the probability of winning a jackpot in a high probability state is approximately 1/58. When the setting value is "4," the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability state is approximately 1/285, and the probability of winning a jackpot in a high probability state is approximately 1/57.

Therefore, it is easier to win a jackpot in a "high probability state" than in a "low probability state." Also, the state changes from the low probability state to the high probability state after the jackpot game described below is completed. Therefore, in this embodiment, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the high probability state is called a "variable jackpot." Also, the jackpot that triggers the transition to the low probability state is called a "normal jackpot."

In this embodiment, the "non-time-saving state" refers to a game state in which, in a winning lottery for a normal symbol, which is held on the condition that a gaming ball has passed through the normal symbol gate 44, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol corresponding to the lottery result is set longer than in the "time-saving state," and the opening time of the second start hole 47 when a winning lottery is won is likely to be set shorter. For example, when a gaming ball passes through the normal symbol gate 44, a winning lottery for a normal symbol is held, and the normal symbol is displayed fluctuatingly on the normal symbol display 62, but the normal symbol is displayed stationary, for example, 30 seconds after the fluctuating display begins. Then, if the lottery result is a winning lottery, the second start hole 47 is controlled to be open for, for example, 0.2 seconds after the normal symbol is displayed stationary.

In contrast, the "time-saving state" refers to a game state in which the average fluctuation time of the normal pattern corresponding to the lottery result is set to 0.5 seconds, which is shorter than the "non-time-saving state", in the normal pattern winning lottery, which is performed on the condition that the game ball has passed through the normal pattern gate 44, and the opening time of the second start hole 47 when a winning lottery is won is set to, for example, 2.5 seconds, which is longer than the "non-time-saving state". Furthermore, in the "non-time-saving state", the probability of winning in the normal pattern winning lottery is set low, for example, 1/128, and in the "time-saving state", the probability of winning in the normal pattern lottery is set high, for example, 127/128. Therefore, in the "time-saving state", when the game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, the second start hole 47 is more easily controlled to the open state than in the "non-time-saving state". As a result, in the "time-saving state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game in a state in which it is difficult to consume game balls.

The "time-saving game state" is set to a normal time-saving game state that is controlled after the end of a jackpot game (via a jackpot game), which will be described later, and a special time-saving game state that is controlled (without going through a jackpot game) when the number of times the special symbol has displayed a miss variable display, which is executed after a specified condition is met (executing an RWM clear, clearing the number of variables based on the end of a jackpot game to 0), reaches a specified number (900 times in this embodiment).

In the embodiment, the "time-saving state" is set to be more favorable than the "non-time-saving state" in terms of the normal symbol change time, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery, but the "time-saving state" may be set to be more favorable in terms of only one of the normal symbol change time, the opening time of the second start port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery. Also, in the non-time-saving state, the probability of winning in the normal symbol winning lottery may be, for example, 0/128.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning a jackpot in a high probability state is 5 times (regardless of the set value) the probability of winning a jackpot in a low probability state. The probability of determining a jackpot is not limited to 5 times, but may be set to any value up to 10 times, such as 3 times or 8 times.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot determination is made so that a small prize, which is less advantageous to the player than a big prize, cannot be won, but it may be made so that, for example, there is a probability of about 1/100 of winning a small prize. In this case, it is preferable to make the probability of a small prize the same regardless of whether the setting value is "1" to "4."

In addition, the larger the set value, the more advantageous it is for the player (the higher the probability of winning the jackpot), but conversely, it may be set so that the smaller the set value, the more advantageous it is for the player (the higher the probability of winning the jackpot).

Also, the probability of determining that a jackpot occurs in a low probability state and/or a high probability state may be the same for all setting values (1-4), or, for example, the probability of determining that a jackpot occurs in a low probability state and/or a high probability state may be the same for two or three setting values (1 and 2, 1-3, etc.). Also, the setting values in this embodiment are four levels, 1-4, but are not limited to four levels and may be more or less than four levels (for example, one level).

In addition, a normal time-saving game state and a special time-saving game state are provided as time-saving game states, but when a special miss different from a normal miss is won as a result of the jackpot determination process, and a special miss special pattern is displayed as a stopped special pattern as a result of the special pattern changing display, a special time-saving game state may be generated for a predetermined period of time (for example, until the special pattern changing display is performed 100 times). It is preferable that various controls in the special time-saving game state conform to those in the special time-saving game state.

Next, we will explain the details of the various tables stored in main ROM 110b with reference to Figures 10 to 15.

(Big win determination table)
Figure 10 (a) is a jackpot determination table for the first special pattern for determining (jackpot determination) special pattern determination information obtained based on the entry (scoring) of the gaming ball into the first starting hole 45, and Figure 10 (b) is a jackpot determination table for the second special pattern for determining (jackpot determination) special pattern determination information obtained based on the entry (scoring) of the gaming ball into the second starting hole 47.

As shown in Figures 10(a)-(b), the jackpot determination table associates the current setting value, the current probability state, the random number value for jackpot determination, and the jackpot determination result (jackpot, miss), and for reference, the rightmost column lists the approximate probability of winning in the case of a "jackpot."

The main CPU 110a refers to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 10(a) or the jackpot determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 10(b), and determines whether it is a "jackpot" or a "miss" based on the current setting value, the probability state, and the random number value for jackpot determination.

For example, according to the jackpot determination table for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 10(a), when the set value is "1" and normal play is in progress, 200 random numbers for jackpot determination from "100" to "299" are determined as "jackpots." Any random number other than those determined as jackpots is determined as a "miss."

The special symbol determination information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole 45 is stored in the first special symbol determination information reserve memory area of the main RAM 110c, and the special symbol determination information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting hole 47 is stored in the second special symbol determination information reserve memory area of the main RAM 110c. When a jackpot determination is made, the special symbol determination information stored in the first special symbol determination information reserve memory area or the second special symbol determination information reserve memory area is shifted to the special symbol determination information storage area of the main RAM 110c, and the shifted special symbol determination information is used to make a jackpot determination.

The first special pattern determination information reservation memory area is divided into a first storage section to a fourth storage section, and reservation icons corresponding to the special pattern determination information stored in the first storage section to the fourth storage section are displayed in the first display section 70B1 to the fourth display section 70B4 of the first reservation icon display area 70B, respectively. The second special pattern determination information reservation memory area is divided into a first storage section to a fourth storage section, and reservation icons corresponding to the special pattern determination information stored in the first storage section to the fourth storage section are displayed in the first display section 70D1 to the fourth display section 70D4 of the second reservation icon display area 70D, respectively.

(Special symbol determination table)
FIG. 11(a) is a special pattern determination table for a jackpot for determining the type of special pattern when a jackpot is determined, and FIG. 11(b) is a special pattern determination table for a miss for determining the type of special pattern when a miss is determined.

As shown in Figures 11(a)-(b), the special symbol determination table associates the type of special symbol to be stopped, a random number value for special symbol determination, the special symbol determination result, the stop special symbol data corresponding to the determination result, and the special symbol designation command corresponding to the determination result.

The special symbols "00" and "10" are the losing special symbols that do not trigger a jackpot game. The special symbols "01" and "04" are the jackpot special symbols that trigger the first jackpot game, the special symbols "02" and "05" are the jackpot special symbols that trigger the second jackpot game, and the special symbol "03" is the jackpot special symbol that triggers the third jackpot game.

In the "first jackpot game", the large prize winning hole 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, and then the large prize winning hole 50 is closed for two seconds in a round game that is executed up to six times. Note that in the round game, if a specified number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) enter the large prize winning hole 50 even before the opening time has elapsed, one round game ends. In addition, after the first jackpot game ends, the game is set to a normal time-saving game state (low-probability non-time-saving game state) until the second special symbol is displayed 50 or 100 times.

In the "second jackpot game", the big prize opening 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, and then the big prize opening is closed for 2 seconds in a round game that is executed up to 10 times. After the second jackpot game ends, the game is set to a sure-win game state (high-probability time-saving game state) until the variable display of the second special symbol is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, based on the probability of winning a jackpot in the high-probability game state, the next jackpot is almost guaranteed.

In the "third jackpot game", the second big prize opening 56 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds, and then the big prize opening is closed for two seconds in a round game that is executed up to four times. In addition, after the third jackpot game ends, the game is set to a sure-win game state (high-probability time-saving game state) until the variable display of the second special symbol is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, based on the probability of winning a jackpot in the high-probability game state, the next jackpot is almost certain.

Note that one losing special symbol is associated with each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, but multiple losing special symbols may be associated with at least one of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol determination table shown in any one of Figures 11(a) to (b), and determines the type of special symbol, the special symbol stop data, and the special symbol designation command based on the type of special symbol to be stopped and the random number value for special symbol determination, and transmits the special symbol designation command to the performance control board 130.

The first feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 is that the type of the big win special symbol and the type of the losing special symbol are the same and do not change depending on the setting value. This allows the player to play with confidence without complicating the gameplay.

The second feature of the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 is that the selection ratios of various special jackpot symbols and various losing symbols are constant and do not change depending on the setting value. This prevents the player's degree of advantage from changing drastically depending on the setting value, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

(Normal special chart variation pattern determination table)
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a normal special symbol variation pattern determination table that is referenced when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol in the normal game state.

Specifically, FIG. 12(a) is a normal special pattern change pattern determination table 1 that is referenced when executing a change display of a basic special pattern in a normal game state, and FIG. 12(b) is a normal special pattern change pattern determination table 2 that is referenced when executing a change display corresponding to the remaining reserved number of the second special pattern at the end of the special time-saving game state when transitioning from the special time-saving game state to the normal game state.

(Special chart fluctuation pattern judgment table for special/normal time reduction)
FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol change pattern determination table for the ...

Specifically, FIG. 13(a) is special symbol change pattern determination table 1 for special symbol change in special symbol change/normal time-saving play that is referenced when executing a basic special symbol change display in special symbol change play state or normal time-saving play state, and FIG. 13(b) is special symbol change pattern determination table 2 for normal time-saving play that is referenced when executing a special symbol change display that is the final round in normal time-saving play state.

(Special chart fluctuation pattern determination table for special time reduction)
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a special symbol change pattern determination table for special time-saving which is referenced when determining the change pattern of the special symbol in the special time-saving game state.

Specifically, FIG. 14(a) is special time-saving special pattern change pattern determination table 1 that is referenced when a special pattern change display is executed when there is no jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c, FIG. 14(b) is special time-saving special pattern change pattern determination table 2 that is referenced when there is jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c and a special pattern change display that is the first of the special time-saving game states is executed, FIG. 14(c) is special time-saving special pattern change pattern determination table 3 that is referenced when there is jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c and a special pattern change display that is before the end of the special time-saving game state is executed, and FIG. 14(d) is special time-saving special pattern change pattern determination table 4 that is referenced when there is jackpot history information in the main RAM 110c and a special pattern change display that is the last of the special time-saving game states is executed.

As shown in Figures 12 to 14, the special symbol variation pattern determination table associates the type of special symbol (starting hole) that performs the variation display, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data), a random number value for reach determination, the first special symbol reserved number (U1) or the second special symbol reserved number (U2), a random number value for special symbol variation pattern determination, the special symbol variation pattern as the determination result, the special symbol variation time, and a special symbol variation pattern designation command that indicates the special symbol variation pattern.

Therefore, a "special pattern change pattern" can be said to be something that can specify the type of special pattern, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special pattern, and the change time of the special pattern.

The main CPU 110a refers to the special symbol variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 12 to 14, and determines the special symbol variation pattern based on the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result (stop special symbol data), the random number value for reach determination, the first special symbol reserved number (U1) or the second special symbol reserved number (U2), and the random number value for special symbol variation pattern determination, and transmits a special symbol variation pattern designation command corresponding to the special symbol variation pattern to the performance control board 130.

In addition, as described below, the performance control board 130 determines the content (performance mode) of the variable performance accompanied by the variable display of the performance pattern 70a according to the variable pattern designation command (jackpot determination result, special pattern determination result, etc.), so that the rightmost column of the special pattern determination table shown in Figures 12 to 14 lists the performance contents that can be executed in the variable performance for reference.

The effect contents shown in the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figures 12 to 14, "normal fluctuation," "shortened fluctuation," and "ultra-shortened fluctuation," mean that the three effect patterns 70a fluctuate independently at high speed and stop without reaching a reach.

"Reach" refers to a variation mode that makes the player expect a jackpot game to be played, such as when some of the combinations of performance symbols 70a that indicate a jackpot temporarily stop and other performance symbols 70a change. For example, when the combination of three performance symbols 70a, "777," is set as the combination of performance symbols 70a that indicate a jackpot, the same performance symbol 70a temporarily stops at "7" in the left and right areas, and the remaining performance symbols 70a change in the center area.

Note that a "temporary stop" refers to a state in which the performance pattern 70a slightly shakes or deforms, making it appear to the player that the performance pattern 70a is stopped (but is not completely stopped).

"Normal reach" refers to a reach effect in which the same effect symbol 70a temporarily stops in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect symbol 70a fluctuates in the center area, and is the reach effect with the lowest expectation of a jackpot.

In addition, "SP reach" and "special SP reach" are super reach effects that have a higher chance of winning than a normal reach, and are executed after an advanced effect is executed from the normal reach effect. For example, the two effect patterns 70a shrink and move to the corners of the first image display device 70, and a special reach effect is executed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. Note that a "special SP reach" executes a more special effect than an "SP reach".

In addition, the "SPSP Reach" and "SPSP "7" Reach" are special reach effects that have a higher chance of winning than the Super Reach, and are executed after the Normal Reach effect or the Super Reach effect. For example, an extension effect is executed from the Normal Reach effect, and then the three effect symbols 70a shrink and move to the corners of the first image display device 70, and a more special reach effect than the "SP Reach" is executed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70. In the "SPSP Reach", the reach effect is executed with the effect symbols 70a other than "7", and in the "SPSP "7" Reach", the reach effect is executed with the "7" symbol.

The "full rotation reach" is a reach that guarantees a jackpot, and is executed after a normal reach performance. For example, an advanced performance is executed from a normal reach performance, and then the three performance patterns 70a all move at a slow speed while being identical, and a more special reach performance (a reach performance that guarantees a jackpot) than the "SPSP reach" or "SPSP "7" reach" is performed using almost the entire display area of the first image display device 70.

In addition, a "Revival Fluctuation (Win)" is a revival effect that suggests a jackpot and a return to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, and is executed without going through a reach after an end notification effect is performed that suggests the end of a specific game state that is advantageous to the player after transitioning from a special time-saving game state to a normal game state.

"Chance Presentation Change (Win)" is a change presentation in which a chance presentation is executed, suggesting that there is a chance for a big win game to be executed, and is executed without going through a reach. For example, the first image display device 70 displays a text image of "Chance Approaching" followed by a presentation in which three presentation symbols 70a are displayed in a line.

"Result change" refers to a display that, in the final change display of the normal time-saving game state, displays the results of the game during a series of advantageous periods during which the time-saving game state continues, triggered by a jackpot game from the normal game state, known as the first win. Note that the result display may be made during a series of advantageous periods during which a state advantageous to the player continues, rather than from the first win.

"Result revival change (win)" refers to a revival effect that suggests a jackpot has been hit and that the player will be resurrected to a specific game state that is favorable to the player, and is executed without going through a reach after the result display is shown in the final change display of the normal time-saving game state.

"(Thrust) ~ Change" means that if it is the first change of the special time-saving game state, a short-entry effect is performed that suggests entering the special time-saving game state in a relatively short time (for example, 2 seconds), and if it is not the first change of the special time-saving game state, a short-entry effect is not performed.

The "long entry effect change" is a change pattern that occurs when the special time-saving play state changes for the first time, and indicates the entry into the special time-saving play state for a relatively long period of time (for example, 6 seconds). This change pattern is specifically for the first change into the special time-saving play state when there is a jackpot history.

"Instant Win Variation (Win)" is a presentation that notifies the player of a favorable result (jackpot) without going through a reach, and ultimately produces a presentation in which the three presentation symbols 70a are displayed in a line.

An "end indication change" is a display that notifies the player that a special time-saving game state is about to end, and is executed during the final change display of a special time-saving game state that has a jackpot history.

The "End Suggestion Revival Change (Win)" is a revival effect that suggests a jackpot and a return to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player, and is executed without going through a reach after the end notification effect has started in the final change display of the special time-saving game state.

Note that, while the "instant win change" is not executed when the first special symbol is displayed in a normal game state, the "instant win change" may be executed even when the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

The first feature of the special chart variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 12 to 14 is that during the variation display that is the final round of the normal time-saving game state (series of advantageous periods), a variation effect in which the result is displayed is executed. This allows the player to check the results of the game during the series of advantageous periods, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the special chart variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 12 to 14 is that during the variation display that is the final round of the special time-saving game state, no result is displayed and an end notification effect is performed. This makes it possible to prevent players from becoming dissatisfied by the results of a series of advantageous periods being displayed even when a jackpot game has not been played, and makes it possible to increase interest in the game.

The third feature of the special chart variation pattern determination table shown in Figures 12 to 14 is that different special chart variation pattern determination tables are used for the normal time-saving play state and the special time-saving play state. By doing so, even if the time-saving play state is the same, the presentation content can be made different between the normal time-saving play state and the special time-saving play state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the special chart fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figures 12 to 14 is that the fluctuation display during the special time-saving game state uses a different special chart fluctuation pattern determination table depending on whether or not there is a jackpot history (RWM clear). In this way, the presentation content during the fluctuation display during the special time-saving game state can be made different depending on whether or not there is a jackpot history, making the game more interesting.

The fifth feature of the special chart change pattern determination table shown in Figures 12 to 14 is that, for the first change during the special time-saving game state, a different special chart change pattern determination table is used depending on whether or not there is a jackpot history (RWM clear). In this way, the presentation content during the first change display during the special time-saving game state can be made different depending on whether or not there is a jackpot history, making the game more interesting.

The sixth feature of the special chart change pattern determination table shown in Figures 12 to 14 is that, in the initial change during the special time-saving game state, the number of special chart change patterns that are determined when there is no jackpot history is greater than the number of special chart change patterns when there is a jackpot history (RWM clear). In this way, the presentation content during the initial change display during the special time-saving game state can be made different depending on whether or not there is a jackpot history, making the game more interesting.

The seventh feature of the special chart change pattern determination table shown in Figures 12 to 14 is that if the first change during a special time-saving game state with a jackpot history (RWM clear) is a miss, a special chart change pattern is determined the first time. By doing this, a special presentation (long entry presentation) can be performed during the first change during the special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the special chart change pattern determination table shown in Figures 12 to 14 is that, in the final change during the special time-saving game state, a different special chart change pattern determination table is used depending on whether or not there is a jackpot history (RWM clear). In this way, the presentation content during the final change display during the special time-saving game state can be made different depending on whether or not there is a jackpot history, making the game more interesting.

The ninth feature of the special chart change pattern determination table shown in Figures 12 to 14 is that, in the final change during the special time-saving game state, the number of special chart change patterns that are determined when there is no jackpot history is greater than the number of special chart change patterns when there is a jackpot history (RWM clear). In this way, the presentation content during the final change display during the special time-saving game state can be made different depending on whether or not there is a jackpot history, making the game more interesting.

The tenth feature of the special chart change pattern determination table shown in Figures 12 to 14 is that if the final change during a special time-saving game state with a jackpot history (RWM clear) is a miss, a special chart change pattern is determined for the final round. By doing this, a special presentation (end suggestion presentation) can be performed during the final change during the special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

An eleventh feature of the special symbol change pattern determination table shown in Figures 12 to 14 is that, during a special time-saving game state, a greater number of special symbol change patterns (change presentation patterns) are determined (executed) when a miss change display of the second special symbol (second change presentation) is executed than when a miss change display of the first special symbol (first change presentation) is executed. In this way, it is possible to induce the player to execute a change display of the second special symbol that is advantageous to the player during the special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature of the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination table shown in Figures 12 to 14 is that the average fluctuation time of the special symbols (mainly the second special symbol) during the time-saving play state is longer than the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols during the time-saving play state. By doing this, even in the time-saving play state where the average fluctuation time of the special symbols is shorter than in the normal play state, the second reserved memory is more likely to accumulate, and by speedily executing the fluctuation display of the special symbols, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Pre-judgment table)
Figure 15(a) is a diagram showing an example of a pre-judgment table for the non-time-saving state for pre-judging (reading ahead) special chart judgment information obtained based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 during the non-time-saving state, and Figure 15(b) is a diagram showing an example of a pre-judgment table for the time-saving state for pre-judging (reading ahead) special chart judgment information obtained based on the winning of a game ball into the second starting hole 47 during the time-saving state.

As shown in FIG. 15, the advance judgment table associates the type of special symbol (starting hole), the jackpot judgment result, the special symbol judgment result, the random number value for reach judgment, the random number value for special symbol fluctuation pattern judgment, the special symbol planned fluctuation pattern as the judgment result, and the look-ahead specification command indicating the special symbol planned fluctuation pattern.

Therefore, the "special symbol planned change pattern" can be said to be something that can identify the type of special symbol, the result of the jackpot determination, the type of special symbol, and the special symbol change pattern that is planned to be executed.

The main CPU 110a refers to the advance determination table shown in FIG. 15, and determines the planned special symbol variation pattern based on the random number value for determining a jackpot, the random number value for determining a special symbol, the random number value for determining a reach, and the random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern, and transmits a look-ahead command corresponding to the planned special symbol variation pattern to the performance control board 130.

(Game Status Setting Table)
FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of a game state setting table for setting the game state after the end of a big win game.

As shown in FIG. 16, the game status setting table associates the special stop data of the jackpot special symbol, game status information at the time of winning the jackpot, the game status flag to be set (a time-saving flag indicating a time-saving state, a high-probability flag indicating a high-probability state), a first time-saving count (J1) which is the number of times the first special symbol changes to end the time-saving game state, a second time-saving count (J2) which is the number of times the second special symbol changes to end the time-saving game state, and a third time-saving count (J3) which is the number of times the combined first and second special symbols change to end the time-saving game state.

The first feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16 is that there is a jackpot game (first jackpot game) in which the second time-saving number of times (J2) is set when the game is executed in the time-saving state is greater than the second time-saving number of times (J2) when the game is executed in the normal game state. By doing this, the second time-saving number of times (J2) can be set differently depending on the type of jackpot game, which makes it possible to improve the gameplay and increase the interest in the game.

The second feature of the game state setting table shown in FIG. 16 is that three types of time-saving counts are set, so that regardless of whether the first special pattern or the second special pattern is changed during the time-saving state, the time-saving state ends at an appropriate count, so that a fair time-saving state can be provided among players, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

Next, we will use a flowchart to explain how the game progresses on gaming machine 1.

(Main processing of the main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 17. Fig. 17 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110. This main processing is performed when a system reset, which occurs when a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, is input to the main CPU 110a.

First, the main CPU 110a prohibits all interrupts in step S1, performs initial CPU settings such as setting the built-in registers in step S2, and performs processing to wait for the startup of other boards in step S3. Specifically, it waits for one second for the payout control board 120 and performance control board 130 to start up so that no commands from the main control board 110 are missed.

In step S4, the main CPU 110a permits access to the RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S5, transmits a launch permission command to the payout control board 120. This causes the payout control unit 121 to carry out processing to permit the launch device 26 to launch game balls.

In step S6, the main CPU 110a determines whether a backup flag indicating that power has been restored has been saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c. If the backup flag has been saved, it is assumed that power has been restored and the process proceeds to step S7. If the backup flag has not been saved, it is assumed that power has been turned on for the first time and the process proceeds to step S8.

In step S7, the main CPU 110a calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) for the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) of the main RAM 110c.

In step S8, the main CPU 110a determines whether a setting change operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether the setting key switch 112a and the RWM clear switch 111a are ON. If a setting change operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S9 to transition to setting change mode, and if a setting change operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S10.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting change process in step S9. Specifically, it displays a status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 indicating that the setting is being changed or confirmed, displays the current setting value saved in the setting value area of the gaming RWM area on one of the 7-segment LEDs of the information display 113, and transmits a setting change command to the performance control board 130.

Furthermore, each time the RWM clear switch 111a is operated, the set value is changed (updated) within the range of "1" to "4" and the updated set value is displayed on the 7-segment LED. When a setting confirmation operation is performed in which the setting key switch 112a is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the set value is confirmed and the changed (updated) set value is saved in the set value area, the display of the set value on the information display 113 is terminated, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is terminated, and processing is performed to end the setting change mode.

When the performance control board 130 receives the setting change command, it performs processing to execute a setting change notification to notify the user that the setting value is being changed. Specifically, the image display devices 70, 71 may display a setting change in progress screen indicating that the setting value is being changed, and the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 may be all lit up in a specified light color (e.g., white) throughout the setting change. The audio output device 9 may output a setting change notification sound ("setting change in progress") indicating that the setting is being changed.

In step S10, the main CPU 110a determines whether the checksum is normal. Specifically, it determines whether the checksum saved in the gaming RWM area matches the checksum calculated in step S7. If the checksum is normal (there is no abnormality in the data in the gaming RWM area), processing proceeds to step S11. If the checksum is not normal (there is an abnormality in the data in the gaming RWM area), processing proceeds to step S12, assuming that the control state before the power failure cannot be restored normally.

If the backup flag has not been saved, i.e. when the power is turned on for the first time, the checksum will be determined to be abnormal.

In step S11, the main CPU 110a determines whether the setting value in the setting value area is within the appropriate range (here, 1 to 4). If it is determined that the setting value in the setting value area is within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S13, and if it is determined that the setting value in the setting value area is not within the appropriate range, the process proceeds to step S12.

In step S12, the main CPU 110a performs irrecoverable error processing. Specifically, it displays error information "E" indicating an irrecoverable error on the information display 113, sends an irrecoverable error designation command to the performance control board 130 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred, then sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interruption, clears the output port, and then outputs an irrecoverable error signal (security signal) indicating the occurrence of an irrecoverable error from the security signal terminal of the game information output terminal board 90, and performs processing to wait until the power supply is completely cut off. As a result, the performance control board 130 performs processing to execute an irrecoverable error notification.

An "irrecoverable error" is an error state in which game control is no longer performed (there is no transition to game control), and it cannot be released unless a setting change process is performed. Therefore, when an irrecoverable error occurs, the error will not be released even if the power switch on the power supply board 160 is turned OFF and then turned ON without a setting change operation; it is necessary to turn the power switch ON while performing a setting change operation. Note that during an irrecoverable error, the presence or absence of signal input from the various input devices (various switches, various sensors) is not monitored at all.

In the previous version, the "unrecoverable error" was set to not be cleared unless a setting change process was performed, but it may also be set to be cleared when an RWM clear is performed without a setting change process.

An "irrecoverable error notification" is a notification to make the user aware that an irrecoverable error has occurred, and involves displaying an irrecoverable error screen on the image display devices 70, 71 ("This is an irrecoverable error. Please change the settings"), lighting the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 in a specified light color (e.g. red) until the power is turned off, and outputting an irrecoverable error sound ("This is an irrecoverable error" + buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 indicating that an irrecoverable error has occurred until the power is turned off.
In addition, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the image display devices 70, 71, and the board lighting device 76 may be collectively referred to as the "performance device."

In step S13, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not an RWM clear operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the RWM clear switch 111a is in the ON state. If an RWM clear operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S14 to execute RWM clear, and if an RWM clear operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S16.

The main CPU 110a performs an RWM clear process in step S14. Specifically, it performs a process to initialize the game control state (initialize everything except the setting value area of the game RWM area).

In step S15, the main CPU 110a sends a power-on command to the payout control board 120 and the presentation control board 130, indicating that the game control state has been initialized and the current game state (here, a low-probability non-time-limited game state as the normal game state), and moves processing to step S21. As a result, the presentation control board 130 performs processing to execute a power-on notification.

The "power-on notification" is a notification to make the player aware that the game control state has been initialized, and involves displaying the initial screen (background image and initial performance pattern "135") when the power is turned on on the image display devices 70, 71, lighting up the frame lighting device 10 and the board lighting device 76 in a predetermined light color (e.g., red) for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds), and outputting from the audio output device 9 a power-on notification sound ("RWM has been cleared" + buzzer sound) indicating that the RWM area has been initialized for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 30 seconds).
In addition, in the power-on notification, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, a display notifying that the RWM has been cleared may be displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

In step S16, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a setting confirmation operation has been performed. Specifically, it determines whether or not the setting key switch 112a is ON. If a setting confirmation operation has been performed, the process proceeds to step S17 to transition to setting confirmation mode, and if a setting confirmation operation has not been performed, the process proceeds to step S18 to return the game control state to the state before the power was turned off.

The main CPU 110a performs a setting confirmation process in step S17. Specifically, the status confirmation display 68 displays a status confirmation display indicating that the setting is being changed or confirmed, and one of the 7-segment LEDs on the information display 113 displays the current setting value saved in the setting value area of the gaming RWM area, and transmits a setting confirmation command to the performance control board 130.

Furthermore, when a confirmation end operation is performed in which the setting key switch 112a is changed from the ON state to the OFF state, the display of the setting value on the information display 113 is ended, the status confirmation display on the status confirmation display 68 is ended, and processing is performed to end the setting confirmation mode.

In addition, when the performance control board 130 receives the setting confirmation command, it performs processing to execute a setting confirmation notification to notify that a setting confirmation is being performed. Specifically, a setting confirmation screen indicating that a setting confirmation is being performed may be displayed on the image display devices 70, 71, and the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 may be fully lit in a specified light color (e.g., white) during the setting confirmation. In addition, a setting confirmation notification sound indicating that a setting confirmation is being performed ("The setting value is being confirmed") may be output from the audio output device 9.

In step S18, the main CPU 110a clears (clears to 0) the backup flag and checksum saved in the game RWM area, and sets the game RWM area when power is restored. This returns (restores) the game progress state (control state) to the state before the power was cut off, making it possible to resume play from the state before the power was cut off.

In step S19, the main CPU 110a sends a power restoration command to the presentation control board 130, indicating that the game control state has been restored and the game state before the power outage occurred. This causes the presentation control board 130 to perform processing to end the setting confirmation notification, etc., described below, and execute the power restoration notification.

A "power restoration notification" is a notification to make the player aware that the game control state has returned to the state before the power was cut off, and involves displaying the initial screen at the time of power restoration (background image and initial performance pattern "135") on the image display devices 70, 71, lighting up the frame lighting device 10 and board lighting device 76 in a predetermined light color (e.g. blue) for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 60 seconds), and outputting a power restoration notification sound ("Power has been restored" + buzzer sound) from the audio output device 9 for a predetermined period of time (e.g. 30 seconds) indicating that power has been restored (from a power outage).
In addition, in notifying the restoration of power, instead of displaying the initial screen on the image display devices 70 and 71, a display notifying that the power has been restored may be displayed on the image display devices 70 and 71.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a transmits other commands (a special chart reservation number designation command indicating the first special chart reservation number (U1) and the second special chart reservation number (U2), a regular chart reservation number designation command indicating the regular chart reservation number (G), etc.) to the performance control board 130. This enables the performance control board 130 to grasp the special chart reservation number and the regular chart reservation number, and performs processing to display the first reservation icon and the second reservation icon on the first image display device 70.

In step S21, the main CPU 110a transmits a setting value designation command to the performance control board 130. This allows the performance control board 130 to grasp the current setting value. Note that this setting value designation command may be transmitted to the performance control board 130 before the power-on designation command or power-restoration designation command is transmitted. The setting value designation command may also be transmitted each time the display of the special pattern begins to change, or each time a jackpot game begins.

In step S22, the main CPU 110a starts the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate a timer interrupt (4 milliseconds), and in step S23, allows all interrupts.

In step S24, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for special pattern determination, which are used to determine the fluctuation mode (fluctuation time) of the special pattern, and in step S25, performs an initial value random number update process to update the initial value random number value for jackpot determination, the initial value random number value for special pattern determination, the initial value random number value for hit determination, and the initial value random number value for normal pattern determination.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether a power interruption (blackout) has occurred in step S26. Specifically, it determines whether a power interruption detection signal has been input from the power interruption detection circuit of the power supply board 160, and if a power interruption detection signal has not been input, it proceeds to step S24, and if a power interruption detection signal has been input, it proceeds to step S27.

In step S27, the main CPU 110a sets an interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts, in step S28, it clears the output port, in step S29, it calculates a checksum (abnormality determination data) of the game RWM area (excluding the set value area) of the main RAM 110c and saves it in the game RWM area, in step S30, it saves a backup flag in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, in step S31, it prohibits RAM access, and waits until the power supply voltage is completely cut off.

In this way, multiple conditions (operations) are set for setting change operations, making it difficult to change settings, which helps to prevent fraudulent activity and improves the security of the gaming machine.

In addition, by having more conditions (operations) set for the setting change operation than for the RWM clear operation or the setting check operation, it is possible to increase security for the event in which fraudulent activity is most likely to occur (setting changes), and to effectively prevent fraudulent activity.

In addition, if the checksum is abnormal, an unrecoverable error process is executed to stop the game from progressing, which prevents the gaming machine from performing unexpected operations that cause trouble for gaming facilities and players, thereby improving the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, if the value in the setting value area is not within the appropriate range, in other words, if the previous power outage may have occurred while the settings were being changed, an unrecoverable error process is executed and game progress is halted even if the checksum is normal. This prevents game play from progressing with a setting value that the gaming facility did not intend, making it possible to improve the reliability of the gaming machine.

In addition, when the settings are being changed (in setting change mode) or confirmed (in setting confirmation mode), it is possible to know that the settings are being changed on the front (front side) of the gaming machine 1 by checking the status confirmation display 68, image display devices 70, 71, frame lighting device 10, and board lighting device 76, and on the back (rear side) it is possible to know that the settings are being changed by checking the information display 113. In other words, it is possible to know whether the settings are being changed from either the front (front side) or the back (rear side) of the gaming machine 1.

The conditions for the setting change operation, RWM clear operation, and setting confirmation operation may include that the open detection switch 31a is in the ON state. This increases the number of conditions, making it possible to prevent fraudulent activities and further improve the security of the gaming machine.

In addition, if it is determined that there is no backup flag (this is the first time the power has been turned on) and that no setting change operation has been performed, then if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in step S10, an unrecoverable error process is executed. However, at the point where it is determined that there is no backup flag, the game program may initialize (clear to 0) the game RWM area, save the initial value "1" in the setting value area, and move to step S13.

In addition, if it is determined that there is a backup flag (power has been restored) and that no setting change operation has been performed, if the checksum is determined to be abnormal in the subsequent step S10, an unrecoverable error process is executed. However, at the point in time when it is determined that the checksum is abnormal, the game program may initialize (clear to 0) the game RWM area, save the initial value "1" in the setting value area, and move the process to step S13.

In addition, the power-on command and power restoration command are transmitted together with information indicating the current game status, but a game status command indicating the current game status may be transmitted after the power-on command or power restoration command is transmitted.

In addition, when a power outage occurs or when the power is turned on, the game program calculates a checksum for the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) of the main RAM 110c, but the information program may also calculate the checksum. In this case, it is recommended that the calculated checksum be saved in the information RWM area.

In addition, when a power outage occurs or when the power is turned on, the checksum of the game RWM area (excluding the setting value area) is calculated, but it is also possible to calculate the checksum of the entire RWM area, or to calculate the checksum of the game RWM area and the checksum of the information RWM area separately, and transition to unrecoverable error processing if either checksum is abnormal.

In addition, a setting change command is sent when the setting change process starts, and a power-on command is sent after the setting change process ends, but it is also possible to send a setting change start command instead of the setting change command, and a setting change end command instead of the power-on command. In this case, the setting change end command may be sent at the end of the setting change process, or after the setting change process ends.

In addition, when settings are changed, the RWM clear process is performed after the settings are changed, but the RWM clear process may be performed before the settings are changed.

(Timer interrupt processing on the main control board)
The timer interrupt process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 18. Fig. 18 is a flow chart showing the timer interrupt process executed in the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the registers to a stack area, and in step S110, performs time control processing to update various timer counters such as updating the special symbol time counter, updating the special game timer counter such as the opening time of the special electric role, updating the normal symbol time counter, and updating the opening and closing time of the movable member 48. Specifically, it performs processing to subtract 1 from counters such as the special symbol time counter, special game timer counter, normal symbol time counter, start hole opening timer counter, and start hole closing timer counter.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a performs a specific random number update process to update the random number value for determining a jackpot, the random number value for determining a special symbol, the random number value for determining a special symbol variation pattern, the random number value for determining a win, the random number value for determining a normal symbol, and the random number value for determining a normal symbol variation pattern. Specifically, each random number value and the random number counter are updated by incrementing them by +1. If the incremented random number counter value exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (if the random number counter has completed one cycle), the random number counter is reset to 0, and if the random number counter has returned to the initial value for the cycle, the corresponding initial value random number value is set as a new cycle initial value and the random number value is updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a performs an initial random number value update process to update the initial random number value for determining a jackpot, the initial random number value for determining a special symbol, the initial random number value for determining a win, and the initial random number value for determining a normal symbol, in the same manner as in step S30.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not there has been input to various switches such as the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the special winning hole detection switch 50a, the first starting hole detection switch 45a, the second starting hole detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, and the out ball detection switch 52a, and performs input control processing to set predetermined data if there has been input. This will be described in more detail later with reference to FIG. 19.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol special electric control processing to determine the number of reserved special symbols (such as determining a big win), control the display of special symbols, control the opening and closing of the big prize opening 50 (opening and closing member 51), control the game state, etc. The details of the special symbol special electric control processing will be described later.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs normal symbol and normal power control processing to determine the number of normal symbols stored (such as winning determination), control the display of normal symbols, and control the opening and closing of the second starting hole 47 (movable member 48).

The types of winning and losing normal symbols determined as a result of the normal symbol determination information performed in the normal symbol and normal power control process remain the same regardless of the setting value. This prevents the game from becoming too complicated, allowing players to play with peace of mind.

In addition, the selection ratios of various winning normal symbols and various losing normal symbols, which are determined as a result of the normal symbol determination information performed in the normal symbol normal power control process, are fixed and do not change depending on the setting value. By doing this, the player's degree of advantage will not change drastically depending on the setting value, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a performs a payout control process to send a payout status confirmation designation command to the payout control board 120 to check the payout status of the payout control board 120, and to send a payout number designation command corresponding to each winning port to the payout control board 120 by referring to the prize ball counters (3 prize ball counter, 10 prize ball counter, 15 prize ball counter) described below. This causes the payout control board 120 to execute control to pay out prize balls from the payout device 100.

In step S600, the main CPU 110a performs magnetic/radio wave abnormality determination processing to determine whether a magnetic anomaly or radio wave abnormality has occurred based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and to transmit a magnetic anomaly error designation command or a radio wave abnormality error designation command to the performance control board 130. When the performance control board 130 receives a magnetic anomaly error designation command or a radio wave abnormality error designation command, it performs control to notify the magnetic anomaly error or the radio wave abnormality error.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a performs a data creation process to create data such as external information data (game information) output from the game information output terminal board 90, start opening/closing data output to the second start opening/closing solenoid 48b, large prize opening opening/closing data output to the large prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, special pattern display data output to the first special pattern display 60 and the second special pattern display 61, normal pattern display data output to the normal pattern display 62, special pattern reserved display data output to the first special pattern reserved display 63 and the second special pattern reserved display 64, and normal pattern reserved display data output to the normal pattern reserved display 65.

In step S750, the main CPU 110a performs output control processing to execute a port output process for outputting signals such as the external information data, start gate opening/closing data, and large prize gate opening/closing data created in step S700, a display output process for outputting signals such as special symbol display data, normal symbol display data, special symbol reserved display data, and normal symbol reserved display data, a payout command transmission process for transmitting commands set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120, and a performance command transmission process for transmitting commands set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the performance control board 130.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs processing when an information program is called. Specifically, after prohibiting interrupts, the flag register is saved to the game RWM area, and processing is performed to call the target information program using the CALL command.

In step S810, the main CPU 110a performs game ball counting processing (information program). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs processing to count the normal payout number, which is the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of game balls into various winning ports (general winning port, large winning port, start port) during the normal game state, the normal out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a during the normal game state, and the total out number, which is the number of game balls detected by the out ball detection switch 52a regardless of the game state.

The total number of outs, number of payouts during normal play, and number of outs during normal play are game information that are not affected by changes to the setting value (are unrelated to the setting value), so by counting these, it is possible to calculate performance information that eliminates the influence of the setting value (the normal base value, described below), which can be useful in understanding the performance of gaming machine 1.

In step S830, the main CPU 110a performs a performance information calculation process (information program). Specifically, it calculates the normal base value ((normal payout number ÷ normal out number) × 100) in the current play section, which is divided by the total number of outs, and performs a process of saving the normal base value rounded off to the first decimal place in the first area of the base memory area set in the information RWM area.

The play section is updated every time the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and the base memory area is provided with a first area in which the normal base value for the current play section is stored, a second area for storing the normal base value for the play section one period before, a third area for storing the normal base value for the play section two periods before, and a fourth area for storing the normal base value for the play section three periods before, and the base values for four play sections including the current one are saved in each area.

In step S850, the main CPU 110a performs a performance display data setting process (information program). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process of setting performance display data for displaying on the information display 113 the normal base values (performance information) for the four play intervals calculated in the performance information calculation process and saved in the base memory area while switching them every five seconds.

In step S870, the main CPU 110a performs a test data creation process (information program). Specifically, the main CPU 110a performs a process to create test data (test information) to be output to the test equipment used when testing the gaming machine 1.

In step S880, the main CPU 110a performs output control processing (information program). Specifically, it performs display output processing to output signals such as the performance display data (performance information) set in step S850 above to various displays, and processing to output signals such as the test data created in step S870 above.

In step S890, the main CPU 110a performs processing for returning to the game program. Specifically, it performs processing to return the flag register from the game RWM area, permit interrupts, and return to the game program.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a and ends this timer interrupt process.

In this way, since timer interrupts are not executed during the setting change process, RWM clear process, and setting confirmation process, the number of payouts and the number of outs are not counted, the performance information of the gaming machine is not calculated, and the performance information of the gaming machine is not displayed, which makes it possible to reduce the control burden on the main control board 110.

In the above, the performance information calculation process is performed in the timer interrupt process of the main control board 110, but it may be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. The game ball counting process may also be performed in the main process of the main control board 110. Specifically, it may be performed between step S25 and step S26.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 19. Fig. 19 is a flowchart showing the input control process in the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a performs a general prize opening detection switch input process in step S210. In this general prize opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the general prize opening detection switch 43a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the general prize opening 43. If there is no detection signal input from the general prize opening detection switch 43a, the process proceeds to step S220.

When a detection signal is input from the general prize opening detection switch 43a, the prize ball counter for the general prize opening used for prize balls (5 prize ball counter) is updated by adding data indicating 5 prize balls, and the prize ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the prize opening is updated by adding "1" (D←D+1), and then the general prize opening detection switch input process is terminated.

The main CPU 110a performs a special prize opening detection switch input process in step S220. In this special prize opening detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the special prize opening detection switch 50a, i.e., whether a game ball has entered the special prize opening 50. If there is no detection signal input from the special prize opening detection switch 50a, the process proceeds to step S230.

When a detection signal from the large prize opening detection switch 50a is input, the prize ball counter for the large prize opening (15 prize ball counter) used for prize balls is updated by adding data indicating 15 prize balls, the prize ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the prize opening is updated by adding "1" (D←D+1), and it is determined whether or not a large prize game (special game) is currently in progress. If a large prize game is currently in progress, the round prize counter (C) for counting the game balls that have entered the large prize opening 50 is updated by adding "1" (C←C+1), and the large prize opening detection switch input process is terminated.

If the current game state is not a special game state, the illegal winning ball counter (E), which indicates the number of game balls that have won (entered) a specific winning port (second start port 47, large winning port 50) outside the winning period, is updated by adding "1" (E←E+1), and a determination is made as to whether the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is greater than a specified number (e.g., 10 balls), and if the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is equal to or less than the specified number, the large winning port detection switch input process is terminated.

If the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is greater than the specified number, it is determined that an illegal winning (illegal winning) has occurred, in which a game ball wins (enters) the game outside the winning period, and an illegal winning error designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the illegal winning error designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, which then issues an illegal winning error notification, thereby notifying the user that an illegal winning has occurred.

Then, external information data (output data) for outputting an illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared, and the large winning port detection switch input process is terminated. As a result, an illegal winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and an external device can grasp (identify) that an illegal winning has occurred.

In step S230, the main CPU 110a performs a first start hole detection switch input process. In this first start hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, i.e., whether the game ball has entered the first start hole 45. The details of the first start hole detection switch input process will be described later.

In step S240, the main CPU 110a performs a second start hole detection switch input process. In this second start hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the second start hole detection switch 47a, i.e., whether the game ball has entered the second start hole 47. Details of the second start hole detection switch input process will be described later.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. In this gate detection switch input processing, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the gate detection switch 44a, i.e., whether the game ball has passed through the normal gate 44. If a detection signal has not been input from the gate detection switch 44a, the input control processing is terminated.

When a detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether the number of reserved regular symbols, which is the number of reserved regular symbols stored in the reserved regular symbol memory area, is less than 4. If the number of reserved regular symbols is not less than 4, the input control process is terminated.

If the number of reserved regular symbols is less than four, the number is updated by adding "1", regular symbol determination information (random number value for winning determination, random number value for determining regular symbol pattern, random number value for determining regular symbol variation pattern) is obtained, and the available memory units are searched in order starting from the first memory unit in the regular symbol reserved memory area, the obtained regular symbol determination information is stored in the available memory unit, and the input control process is terminated.

(First start port detection switch input processing of the main control board)
The first start hole detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 20. Fig. 20 is a flowchart showing the first start hole detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a (a game ball has entered the first start hole 45). If a detection signal has been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, the process proceeds to step S230-2, and if a detection signal has not been input from the first start hole detection switch 45a, the current first start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3 prize ball counter used for prize balls by adding data indicating 3 prize balls, and in step S230-3, obtains special symbol determination information (random number value for determining a jackpot, random number value for determining special symbols, random number value for determining reach, random number value for determining special symbol fluctuation pattern).

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of first special symbols reserved (U1) stored in the first special symbol reserved memory area is less than 4. If the number of first special symbols reserved (U1) is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S230-5, and if the number of first special symbols reserved (U1) is not less than 4, the first start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the first special chart reserved number (U1) by adding "1" (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, sets a first special chart reserved number designation command corresponding to the updated first special chart reserved number (U1) in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the first special chart reserved number designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, making it possible for the performance control board 130 to grasp the first special chart reserved number.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a stores the acquired special symbol determination information in the first special symbol reserved memory area. Specifically, since the first special symbol reserved memory area is divided into the first memory section to the fourth memory section, the available memory sections are searched in order starting from the first memory section, and the acquired special symbol determination information is stored in the available memory section.

As a result of the above, a first reserved memory (first reservation) consisting of special pattern determination information (random number value for determining a jackpot, random number value for determining a special pattern, random number value for determining a reach, and random number value for determining a special pattern change pattern, etc.) is stored in a specified memory section of the first special pattern reserved memory area.

In step S230-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current game state is a non-time-saving game state (normal game state). If it is, the process proceeds to step S230-9. If it is not in a non-time-saving game state (a sure-win game state or a time-saving game state), the process proceeds to step S230-12 assuming that a left-hit error has occurred.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special time-saving game state is within a predetermined number of fluctuations (e.g., 5 times). If it is not within the predetermined number of fluctuations, the process proceeds to step S230-10. If it is within the predetermined number of fluctuations, the process ends the current first start hole detection switch input process without executing a pre-reading judgment of the special chart judgment information.

The main CPU 110a performs a first look-ahead judgment process in step S230-10. In this first look-ahead judgment process, the pre-judgment table (not shown) is referenced, and the currently acquired special pattern judgment information (first reserved memory) is pre-judged prior to the execution of the special pattern variation display based on the judgment information, and a planned variation pattern, which is the variation pattern that is scheduled to be executed, is determined.

In step S230-11, the main CPU 110a sets the first look-ahead designation command corresponding to the determined planned fluctuation pattern in the performance transmission data storage area, and ends this first start port detection switch input process.

As a result, the first look-ahead specification command is sent to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130 can execute a look-ahead preview performance that executes a predetermined preview performance over one or more variable displays executed before the start of the variable display of the special pattern corresponding to the first look-ahead specification command. The look-ahead preview performance is performed using one or more of the image display device, audio output device 9, frame lighting device 10, first movable member 73, second movable member 74, and board lighting device 76.

In step S230-12, the main CPU 110a sets the left-hit error designation command in the performance transmission data storage area and ends the first start hole detection switch input process. This causes the left-hit error designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, which then issues a left-hit error notification to promote right-hitting.

(Main control board second start port detection switch input processing)
The second start hole detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 21. Fig. 21 is a flowchart showing the second start hole detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S240-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a detection signal has been input from the second start hole detection switch 47a (a game ball has entered the second start hole 47). If a detection signal has been input from the second start hole detection switch 47a, the process proceeds to step S240-2, and if a detection signal has not been input from the second start hole detection switch 47a, the current second start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S240-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 1 prize ball counter used for prize balls by adding data indicating 1 prize ball, and in step S240-3, obtains special symbol determination information (random number value for determining a jackpot, random number value for determining special symbols, random number value for determining reach, random number value for determining special symbol fluctuation pattern).

In step S240-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second special symbol reservation number (U2) stored in the second special symbol reservation memory area is less than 4. If the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is less than 4, the process proceeds to step S240-5, and if the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not less than 4, the second start hole detection switch input process is terminated.

In step S240-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the second special chart reserved number (U2) by adding "1" (U2←U2+1), and in step S240-6, sets a second special chart reserved number designation command corresponding to the updated second special chart reserved number (U2) in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the second special chart reserved number designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, making it possible for the performance control board 130 to grasp the second special chart reserved number.

In step S240-7, the main CPU 110a stores the acquired special symbol determination information in the second special symbol reserved memory area. Specifically, since the second special symbol reserved memory area is divided into the first memory section to the fourth memory section, the available memory sections are searched in order starting from the first memory section, and the acquired special symbol determination information is stored in the available memory section.

As a result of the above, a second reserved memory (second reservation) consisting of special pattern determination information (random number value for determining a jackpot, random number value for determining a special pattern, random number value for determining a reach, and random number value for determining a special pattern change pattern, etc.) is stored in a specified memory section of the first special pattern reserved memory area.

In step S240-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current game state is a high probability game state or a time-limited game state. If it is, the process proceeds to step S240-9. If it is not in a high probability game state or a time-limited game state (if it is in a normal game state), the process proceeds to step S240-12 assuming that a right-hit error has occurred.

In step S240-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the number of times has changed within a predetermined number of times (e.g., 5 times) since the start or end of the time-saving state. If the number of times has not changed within the predetermined number of times, the process proceeds to step S240-10. If the number of times has changed within the predetermined number of times, the process ends the current second start hole detection switch input process without executing a pre-reading determination of the special chart determination information.

The main CPU 110a performs a second look-ahead judgment process in step S240-10. In this second look-ahead judgment process, the pre-judgment table (not shown) is referenced, and the currently acquired special pattern judgment information (second reserved memory) is pre-judged prior to the execution of the special pattern variation display based on the judgment information, and a planned variation pattern that is the variation pattern that is scheduled to be executed is determined.

In step S240-11, the main CPU 110a sets the second look-ahead designation command corresponding to the determined planned fluctuation pattern in the performance transmission data storage area, and ends this second start port detection switch input process.

As a result, the second look-ahead specification command is sent to the performance control board 130, and the performance control board 130 can execute a look-ahead preview performance that executes a predetermined preview performance over one or more variable displays executed before the variable display of the special pattern corresponding to the second look-ahead specification command begins. The look-ahead preview performance is performed using one or more of the image display device, audio output device 9, frame lighting device 10, first movable member 73, second movable member 74, and board lighting device 76.

In step S240-12, the main CPU 110a sets the right-hit error designation command in the performance transmission data storage area and ends the second start hole detection switch input process. This causes the right-hit error designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, which then issues a right-hit error notification to promote left-hitting.

(Special diagram special electric control processing of the main control board)
The special pattern special voltage control process of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 22. Fig. 22 is a flowchart showing the special pattern special voltage control process of the main control board 110.

First, in step S301, the main CPU 110a loads the value of the special chart special power processing data, and in step S302, references the branch destination address from the loaded special chart special power processing data, executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address, and ends the current special chart special power control process.

Specifically, if the special symbol special electric processing data = 0, the display of the special symbol changes based on the judgment result of the reserved memory (special symbol judgment information) is started, the change time is set, and a special symbol memory judgment process (step S310) is executed to perform processing for sending start commands (special symbol memory designation command, game state designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) to the performance control board 130 and processing for changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "1". Details of the special symbol memory judgment process will be described later.

If the special symbol special signal processing data = 1, the display of the special symbol is stopped as the change time elapses, a stop time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) is set, and a special symbol change process (step S320) is executed to send a stop command (special symbol stop command) to the performance control board 130 and to change the special symbol special signal processing data to "2". Details of the special symbol change process will be described later.

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 2, then after the stop time (0.5 seconds) of the special symbol has elapsed, if it is a losing special symbol, the special symbol special electric processing data is changed to "0", and if it is a jackpot special symbol, the opening time of the jackpot game is set, and a process is executed to send an opening designation command to the performance control board 130 and a special symbol stop process (step S330) is executed to change the special symbol special electric processing data to "3".

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 3, the jackpot game process (step S340) is executed to perform processes such as starting a round game as the opening time of the jackpot game elapses and sending a round number designation command to the performance control board 130, setting the ending time of the jackpot game based on the end of the final round game and sending an ending designation command to the performance control board 130, and changing the special symbol special electric processing data to "4".

If the special symbol special electric processing data = 4, a jackpot game end process (step S350) is executed to perform a process to end the jackpot game due to the passage of the ending time, a process to set the game state after the jackpot ends (low probability time-saving game state, high probability time-saving game state, high probability number of times, number of time-saving times), a process to change the special symbol special electric processing data to "0", etc. Details of the jackpot game end process will be described later.

(Special pattern memory determination process of the main control board)
The special symbol memory determination process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 23. Fig. 23 is a flow chart showing the special symbol memory determination process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S310-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state. If the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state, the main CPU 110a ends the current special symbol memory determination process, and if the special symbol is not being displayed in a changing state, the process proceeds to step S310-2.

In step S310-2, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of reserved second special drawings (U2) is 1 or greater. If the number of reserved second special drawings (U2) is 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S310-3. If the number of reserved second special drawings (U2) is not 1 or greater, the process proceeds to step S310-4.

In step S310-3, the main CPU 110a updates the second special symbol reserved number (U2) by subtracting "1", and in step S310-6, sets a special symbol storage command corresponding to the second special symbol reserved number (U2) after subtraction in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special symbol storage command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to update the reserved icon displayed on the first image display device 70 and the display of the icon.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, shifts the data stored in the second special pattern determination information reserve memory area, shifting the special pattern determination information stored in the first memory unit to the fourth memory unit to the previous memory unit.

For example, the special pattern determination information stored in the fourth memory section of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area is shifted to the third memory section of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area. In addition, the special pattern determination information stored in the first memory section of the second special pattern determination information holding memory area is shifted to the zeroth memory section, which is the special pattern determination information execution memory area, and the special pattern determination information used in the previous game that was stored in the zeroth memory section is erased.

On the other hand, in step S310-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of reserved first special drawings (U1) is 1 or more. If the number of reserved first special drawings (U1) is 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S310-5, and if the number of reserved first special drawings (U1) is not 1 or more, the process proceeds to step S319-1.

The main CPU 110a updates the first special symbol reserved number (U1) by subtracting "1" in step S310-5, and sets a special symbol storage command corresponding to the first special symbol reserved number (U1) after subtraction in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S310-6. This causes the special symbol storage command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to update the reserved icon and the display of the icon displayed on the first image display device 70.

In step S310-7, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S310-8, shifts the data stored in the first special symbol reserve memory area, shifting the special symbol determination information stored in the first memory unit to the fourth memory unit to the previous memory unit.

For example, the special symbol determination information stored in the fourth memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area is shifted to the third memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area. In addition, the special symbol determination information stored in the first memory section of the first special symbol reserve memory area is shifted to the zeroth memory section, which is the special symbol determination information execution memory area, and the special symbol determination information used in the previous game that was stored in the zeroth memory section is erased.

In addition, in conjunction with the shifting process of the special symbol determination information in step S310-8, special symbol reserved display data indicating the first special symbol reserved number (U1) and the second special symbol reserved number (U2) after subtraction is set in a specified area of the main RAM 110c. This updates the display contents of the first special symbol reserved indicator 63 and the second special symbol reserved indicator 64.

In addition, in this embodiment, the second special chart determination information reserve memory area is shifted with priority over the first special chart determination information reserve memory area in steps S310-2 to S310-8 (the second special chart reserved number is subtracted with priority over the first special chart reserved number), but the first special chart determination information reserve memory area or the second special chart determination information reserve memory area may be shifted in the order in which the game ball enters the starting hole (the first special chart reserved number and the second special chart reserved number are subtracted in the order of winning), or the first special chart determination information reserve memory area may be shifted with priority over the second special chart determination information reserve memory area (the first special chart reserved number is subtracted with priority over the second special chart reserved number).

The main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination process in step S311. Specifically, the special symbol determination information (random number value for jackpot determination) stored in the 0th memory section, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, is compared with the jackpot determination table shown in FIG. 10 to determine whether or not a jackpot has occurred. In addition, the special symbol determination information (random number value for special symbol determination) stored in the 0th memory section, which is the special symbol determination information execution storage area, is compared with the special symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11 to perform a process of determining the type of special symbol to be stopped.

In step S312, the main CPU 110a sets a special symbol designation command corresponding to the type of special symbol determined in the big win determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the special symbol designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the performance symbol 70a that will be displayed in a stopped state as a result of the variable performance.

In step S313, the main CPU 110a performs a special pattern change pattern determination process. Specifically, the special pattern determination information stored in the 0th memory unit, which is the special pattern determination information execution memory area, is compared with the special pattern change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 18 to determine the special pattern change pattern (change time), which is the change pattern of the special pattern. Details of the special pattern change pattern determination process will be described later.

In step S314, the main CPU 110a sets a special pattern change pattern designation command corresponding to the type of special pattern change pattern determined in the special pattern change pattern determination process in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the special pattern change pattern designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the change performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the change performance performed during the special pattern change display.

In step S315, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol fluctuation time (counter value) corresponding to the type of special symbol fluctuation pattern determined in the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S316 starts displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol. As a result, the data creation process in step S700 creates LED lighting data for displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the created lighting data is output in the output control process in step S800, thereby displaying the fluctuation of the special symbol on the first special symbol display device 60 or the second special symbol display device 61.

In step S317, the main CPU 110a clears the customer waiting state flag to end the customer waiting state, and in step S318, sets the special symbol special signal processing data to "1" and ends this special symbol memory determination process.

In step S319-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a customer waiting state flag indicating a customer waiting state is set in the main RAM 110c. If the customer waiting state flag is set, the current special symbol storage determination process is terminated, and if the customer waiting state flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S319-2. Note that the customer waiting state refers to a state in which the special symbol changing display and special game (jackpot game) are not being executed, but the requirement may also include that the normal symbol changing display and auxiliary game are not being executed.

In step S319-2, the main CPU 110a sets a customer waiting state flag in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S319-3, sets a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the machine is in a customer waiting state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and ends this special symbol memory determination process. This causes the customer waiting state designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to execute a customer waiting demo performance to encourage the player to play.

(Main control board special chart variation pattern determination process)
The special symbol variation pattern determination process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 24. Fig. 24 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation pattern determination process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S313-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current game state is normal. If the current game state is normal, the process proceeds to step S313-2. If the current game state is not normal, the process proceeds to step S313-3, assuming that the current game state is a special chance game state or a time-limited game state.

In step S313-2, the main CPU 110a selects the appropriate table (matching the game situation) from the normal special chart fluctuation pattern determination table (see FIG. 12) for determining the special chart fluctuation pattern in the normal game state, and proceeds to step S313-4.

In step S313-3, the main CPU 110a selects the relevant table (matching the game situation) from the special pattern change determination table (see Figures 13-14) for determining the special pattern change pattern in the special game state or the time-saving game state, and proceeds to step S313-4.

In step S313-4, the main CPU 110a compares the type of special symbol, the jackpot determination result, the special symbol determination result, the random number value for reach determination, the reserved number (U1 or U2), and the random number value for special symbol variation pattern determination against the special symbol variation pattern determination table to determine the special symbol variation pattern.

In step S313-5, the main CPU 110a sets the change time corresponding to the determined special chart change pattern in a specified area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S313-6, sets a special chart change pattern designation command corresponding to the determined change pattern in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. As a result, the special chart change pattern designation command is sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is performed to determine the change performance pattern, which is the performance mode of the change performance.

In step S313-7, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is a low probability state. If the current state is not a low probability state (a sure-win state), the process proceeds to step S313-9. If the current state is a low probability state, in step S313-8, the number of variations stored in the main RAM 110c is updated by +1; specifically, the number of variations of the special symbol that have been performed since a predetermined condition was met (RWM cleared, the number of variations being cleared to 0 based on the end of a jackpot game). The number of variations is updated by +1 regardless of whether the current state is a normal game state, a time-saving game state, or the first or second special symbol variation display. This number of variations is referenced in the special symbol variation process described below.

In step S313-9, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not the current state is a time-saving game state (normal time-saving game state or special time-saving game state). If the current state is not a time-saving game state, the current special chart change pattern determination table is terminated, and if the current state is a time-saving game state, in step S313-10, a time-saving count designation command corresponding to the remaining number of time-saving times is set in the performance transmission data storage area. This causes the time-saving count designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and the remaining number of time-saving times is notified. When this process is completed, the current special chart change pattern determination process is terminated.

(Special pattern change processing on the main control board)
The special symbol variation process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 25. Fig. 25 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S320-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether the change time set in the special symbol change pattern determination process described above has elapsed. If the change time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S320-2, and if the change time has not elapsed, the current special symbol change process is terminated.

In step S320-2, the main CPU 110a stops and displays the special symbol determined in the jackpot determination process described above, and in step S320-3, sets a stop time (basically 0.5 seconds) according to the game status in a specified area of the main RAM 110c.

In step S320-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a time-saving flag is set in the main RAM 110c. If the time-saving flag is set, the process proceeds to step S320-5 to update the remaining number of time-saving times, and if the time-saving flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S320-10 to not update the remaining number of time-saving times.

In step S320-5, the main CPU 110a determines whether the current variable display of the special symbol is the first special symbol. If it is the first special symbol, in step S320-6, the first time-saving number (J1), which is the number of time-saving times for the first special symbol saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and the third time-saving number (J3), which is the total number of time-saving times for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, are decremented by one each. If it is not the first special symbol (it is the second special symbol), in step S320-7, the second time-saving number (J2), which is the number of time-saving times for the second special symbol saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and the third time-saving number (J3) mentioned above are decremented by one each.

In step S320-8, the main CPU 110a determines whether any one of the first time-saving count (J1), the second time-saving count (J2), and the third time-saving count (J3) has become "0." If it has become "0," the process moves to step S320-9 to end the time-saving game state, and if it has not become "0," the process moves to step S320-12.

In step S320-9, the main CPU 110a clears the high probability flag, time-saving flag, and various time-saving counts (J1, J2, J3) saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and starts the normal gaming state.

In step S320-10, the main CPU 110a determines whether or not a special jackpot symbol has stopped and been displayed. If it is not a special jackpot symbol, processing proceeds to step S320-12. If it is a special jackpot symbol, processing proceeds to step S320-11, where the high probability flag, time-saving flag, and various time-saving counts (J1, J2, J3) saved in the gaming RWM area of the main RAM 110c are cleared, and the normal gaming state is started. Once this processing is completed, processing proceeds to step S320-16.

In step S320-12, the main CPU 110a determines whether the number of fluctuations saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c has reached a specified number (900 in this embodiment). If the number of fluctuations has reached the specified number, the process proceeds to step S320-13, assuming that the special time-saving game state will be started, and if the number of fluctuations has not reached the specified number, the process proceeds to step S320-15, assuming that the special time-saving game state will not be started.

In step S320-13, the main CPU 110a sets the number of times for special time-saving (J1=100, J2=750, J3=750) in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S320-14, sets a special time-saving flag in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c to transition to the special time-saving game state.

In step S320-15, the main CPU 110a sets the time-saving count designation command corresponding to the various time-saving counts (J1, J2, J3) saved in the game RWM area of the main RAM 110c in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the time-saving count designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, which notifies the user of the remaining number of time-saving counts.

In step S320-16, the main CPU 110a sets the special symbol special signal processing data to "2", and in step S320-17, sets a game state designation command corresponding to the current game state (the game state identified from the presence or absence of the high probability flag and the time-saving flag) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the game state designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing to update the game state is performed on the performance control board 130. When this processing is completed, the current special symbol variation processing ends.

In this way, when the number of times the special symbol changes display after a certain condition is met (executing RWM clear, clearing the number of changes to 0 based on the end of a jackpot game) reaches a specified number of times, a special time-saving game state is generated, so the player can be surprised that the time-saving state occurs without going through a jackpot game, making the game more interesting.

In addition, the number of times (900 times) at which the special time-saving game state occurs is greater than the maximum number of times (100 times) set in the normal time-saving game state. This means that the special time-saving game state will not occur during the normal time-saving game state, eliminating the inconvenience of players losing track of the game's progress, and making the game more interesting.

In addition, when a special time-saving game state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c is not reset to 0. This means that the special time-saving game state will not occur again between big wins (after the special time-saving game state has started or ended), ensuring a balance of profits between the gaming facility and the player, and making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, rather than setting the maximum number of time-saving times in the normal time-saving game state (100 times) to a number less than the number of fluctuations at which the special time-saving game state occurs (900 times), the maximum number of time-saving times in the normal time-saving game state and the number of fluctuations at which the special time-saving game state occurs may be set to the same number. In this way, the normal time-saving game state and the special time-saving game state are seamlessly connected, making it feel as if the normal time-saving game state has been extended, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, when a special time-saving game state occurs, the number of fluctuations stored in the main RAM 110c may be cleared to 0, and a special time-saving game state occurring flag indicating that the special time-saving game state has occurred may be set in the main RAM 110c (game RWM). In this case, if the special time-saving game state occurring flag does not exist when the number of fluctuations reaches the specified number (500 times), the number of fluctuations may be cleared to 0 to cause the special time-saving game state to occur, and if the special time-saving game state occurring flag exists, the number of fluctuations may be cleared to 0 to prevent the special time-saving game state from occurring.

(Main control board jackpot game end processing)
The big win game end process (game program) of the main control board 110 will be described with reference to Fig. 26. Fig. 26 is a flow chart showing the big win game end process in the main control board 110.

In step S350-1, the main CPU 110a acquires the stop special data set in the main RAM 110c, in step S350-2 selects the game status setting table (see FIG. 16), and in step S350-3 compares the stop special data with the game status setting table to determine the game status after the big win game ends.

In step S350-4, the main CPU 110a sets game state information (high probability flag, time-saving flag, number of time-saving times) corresponding to the determined game state in the main RAM 110c. This causes a high probability game state or a normal time-saving game state to occur.

In step S350-5, the main CPU 110a sets a time-saving number designation command corresponding to the set number of time-saving times (J1, J2, J3) in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. This causes the time-saving number designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing such as displaying the remaining number of time-saving times is performed.

In step S350-6, the main CPU 110a sets a game state designation command corresponding to the set game state in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and in step S350-7, sets the special chart special signal processing data to "0" and ends the current jackpot game end processing. This causes the game state designation command to be sent to the performance control board 130, and processing is executed to create a performance corresponding to the current game state.

(Main processing of the production control section)
Next, the main processing of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 27. Fig. 27 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the performance control unit 130m.

When power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub-CPU 130a, and the sub-CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

In step E10, the sub-CPU 130a sets interrupt inhibition to inhibit timer interrupts, and in step E20, performs initialization processing. Specifically, in response to power-on, the sub-CPU 130a reads the main processing program from the sub-ROM 130b, initializes flags and the like stored in the sub-RAM 130c, and performs processing such as initial settings.

In step E30, the sub-CPU 130a sets an interrupt permission to allow a timer interrupt, and in step E40, performs a sub-random number update process. Specifically, it performs a process to update various random numbers stored in the sub-RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of the production control unit)
The timer interrupt process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 28. Fig. 28 is a flow chart showing the timer interrupt process executed in the performance control unit 130m at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

In step E100, the sub-CPU 130a saves the information stored in the registers of the sub-CPU 130a to a stack area, and in step E120, performs a timer update process. In this timer update process, the sub-CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

In step E130, the sub-CPU 130a performs input control processing. Specifically, it determines whether or not there has been input to various switches such as the performance button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and if there has been input, it performs processing to set predetermined data.

In step E150, the sub-CPU 130a performs command analysis processing. Specifically, it determines whether various commands have been sent from the main control board 110, and if various commands have been sent, it stores the received commands in the receive buffer of the sub-RAM 130c.

The sub-CPU 130a performs setting change/confirmation processing in step E170. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a setting change designation command or a setting confirmation designation command has been received, and if a setting change designation command has been received, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing to execute the setting change notification described above, and if a setting confirmation designation command has been received, the sub-CPU 130a performs processing to execute the setting confirmation notification described above.

The sub-CPU 130a performs power-on processing in step E200. Specifically, it refers to the receive buffer in the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a power-on command has been received, and if so, performs processing to execute a power-on notification. More specifically, it sends a power-on notification command to the display control unit 140, causing the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display a power-on screen and causes the audio output device 9 to output a power-on sound.

In step E250, the sub-CPU 130a performs power outage recovery processing. Specifically, it refers to the receive buffer in the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a power restoration designation command has been received, and if so, performs processing to execute a power outage recovery notification. More specifically, it sends a power restoration notification command to the display control unit 140, causing the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display a power restoration screen, and causes the audio output device 9 to output a power restoration sound.

In step E300, the sub-CPU 130a performs customer waiting performance processing. Specifically, it refers to the receiving buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a customer waiting state designation command has been received, and if so, performs processing to perform a customer waiting demo performance after a predetermined time has elapsed. In more detail, it sends a customer waiting performance command to the display control unit 140 to cause the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) to display a customer waiting demo screen and to output a customer waiting demo sound from the audio output device 9. Details of the customer waiting performance processing will be described later.

In step E320, the sub-CPU 130a performs menu operation processing. Specifically, in response to the operation of the effect button 17 or the cross key 19, it selects and decides on various menu items ("Machine Description" which explains information about the machine, "Effect Customization" which selects settings that set the execution ratios of various effects executed during variable effects, "Pachi Log" which manages game history in cooperation with a device such as a mobile phone owned by the player, and "Exit" which ends the menu operation) and performs processing according to the menu item. Details of the menu operation processing will be described later.

In step E350, the sub-CPU 130a performs a game status update process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a game status designation command has been received, and if so, performs a process to update the game status information stored in the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E400, the sub-CPU 130a performs a reserved information update process. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a special reserved number designation command or a regular reserved number designation command has been received, and if so, performs a process to update the first special reserved number, second special reserved number, regular reserved number, etc. stored (knowledged) in the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E500, the sub-CPU 130a performs look-ahead performance processing. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a look-ahead designation command has been received, and if so, performs processing related to the look-ahead performance, such as icon change performance, continuous preview performance, and lamp change performance. Details of the look-ahead performance processing will be described later.

An "icon change effect" is a type of pre-reading preview effect that changes the reserved icon and the display mode of the icon to give the player the expectation that a jackpot game will be executed, and the timing of the performance may overlap with the jackpot preview effect described below. Note that in this embodiment, an icon change effect for a reserved icon may be referred to as a "reserved icon change effect" and an icon change effect for that icon may be referred to as a "respective icon change effect."

The "continuous preview performance" is a type of anticipatory preview performance that makes the player anticipate the execution of a jackpot game by executing a predetermined performance over one or more variable performances. It is executed during a predetermined period after the start of the variable performance, but is designed so that it does not overlap with the jackpot preview performance described below.
The "lamp change effect" is a type of anticipatory preview effect that makes the player anticipate a jackpot game by changing the lighting state of the winning slot lamp over one or more variable effects, and the timing of the performance may overlap with the jackpot preview effect described below.

In step E600, the sub-CPU 130a performs special symbol special electric effect processing. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a special symbol designation command, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a special symbol stop designation command, a jackpot opening designation command, a round number designation command, and a jackpot ending designation command have been received, and if so, performs processing to execute the effect corresponding to the received command.

In step E700, the sub-CPU 130a performs normal symbol and normal power presentation processing. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether a normal symbol designation command, a normal symbol variation pattern designation command, a normal symbol stop designation command, a winning opening designation command, and a winning ending designation command have been received, and if so, performs processing to execute the presentation corresponding to the received command.

In step E800, the sub-CPU 130a performs a presentation mode update process. Specifically, it determines whether or not an update condition (change in game state, winning a mode update lottery, execution of a SP/SPSP reach presentation that results in a loss, etc.) for the presentation mode (presentation stage) that specifies the presentation elements (background image, presentation image, presentation sound, etc.) in the sound output device 9, the first image display device 70, the second image display device 71, etc., has been met, and if the update condition has been met, it performs a process to update the presentation mode to one of the multiple presentation modes.

The "presentation modes" include presentation modes A-C that are set in the normal game state, presentation modes D-E that are set in the special variable game state, presentation modes F-G that are set in the normal time-saving game state, and presentation mode H that is set in the special time-saving game state. Note that the presentation mode that is first set when the game is controlled to the normal game state when the power is turned on (for example, after changing the settings, clearing the RWM, or checking the settings) is always presentation mode A, the presentation mode that is first set when the game is controlled to the special variable game state when the power is turned on is always presentation mode D, the presentation mode that is first set when the game is controlled to the normal time-saving game state when the power is turned on is always presentation mode F, and the presentation mode that is first set when the game is controlled to the special time-saving game state when the power is turned on is always presentation mode H.

In addition, in presentation modes A to C, the presentation pattern 70a is composed of numbers (identification characters) + characters corresponding to the numbers (decorative part) + a pattern effect image (decorative part) that decorates the background of the numbers and characters, and the design of the numbers and characters differs between presentation modes. In presentation modes D to H, the presentation pattern 70a is composed of numbers (identification characters) only, and the design of the numbers is the same between presentation modes. In addition, in presentation modes A to H, the background image corresponding to each presentation mode normally scrolls left and right (reciprocating motion, dynamic display).

In addition, in the normal game state, the conditions for changing the presentation mode are more likely to be met when the first special symbol variable display (first variable display) is executed than when the second special symbol variable display (second variable display) is executed (the SP/SPSP reach display resulting in a loss is more likely to be executed, the mode update lottery is more likely to be won, the look-ahead zone display is more likely to be executed, etc.), so the presentation mode is more likely to change when the first special symbol variable display (first variable display) is executed than when the second special symbol variable display (second variable display). Therefore, the presentation effect can be made different depending on the type of special symbol variable display (variable display) executed in the normal game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the conditions for updating the presentation mode are less likely to be met (it is less likely that an SP/SPSP reach presentation that results in a loss will be executed, it is easier to win the mode update lottery, it is less likely that a look-ahead zone presentation will be executed, there are fewer presentation modes, etc.) when the first special symbol changing display (first changing presentation) is executed in various time-saving play states than when the first special symbol changing display (first changing presentation) is executed in the normal play state. Therefore, it is possible to vary the presentation effect when the first special symbol changing display (first changing presentation) is executed depending on the play state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the number of presentation modes in the probability variable play state and various time-saving play states (normal time-saving play state, special time-saving play state) may be increased, so that even in the probability variable play state and various time-saving play states (normal time-saving play state, special time-saving play state), the presentation mode is more likely to change when the first special pattern change display (first change display) is executed than when the second special pattern change display (second change display) is executed.

The sub-CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether an error specification command or an error cancellation specification command has been received, and if so, performs processing to execute an error notification effect corresponding to the received error specification command, or performs processing to end the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation specification command.

In step E900, the sub-CPU 130a performs output control processing. Specifically, it performs processing to output signals such as predetermined data, and to transmit various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150.

In step E950, the sub-CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub-CPU 130a and ends this timer interrupt process.

(Customer waiting performance processing by the performance control unit)
The customer waiting performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 29. Fig. 29 is a flowchart showing the customer waiting performance processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E300-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If the customer waiting state designation command has not been received, the process proceeds to step E300-4. If the customer waiting state designation command has been received, in step E300-2, a demo waiting time determination table (see FIG. 30) is selected to determine the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demo performance. Details of the demo waiting time determination table will be described later.

In step E300-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines the demo waiting time and sets it in the demo waiting timer. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 30, and determines one demo waiting time from among multiple demo waiting times based on the current game state and the current state.

In step E300-4, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the machine is in demo standby. Specifically, it determines whether or not the demo standby timer is set. If the machine is not in demo standby, it ends the current customer waiting performance process assuming that the customer waiting demo performance will not be executed, and if the machine is in demo standby, in step E300-5, it updates the demo standby timer by -1.

In step E300-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the demo waiting timer = 0. If the demo waiting timer = 0, the sub-CPU 130a ends the current customer waiting performance processing, assuming that the customer waiting demo performance has not yet been executed. If the demo waiting timer = 0, in step E300-7, the sub-CPU 130a sets a customer waiting demo performance command in the transmission buffer, and ends the current customer waiting performance processing. As a result, the customer waiting demo performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a customer waiting demo performance is executed to appeal to the player to play the game.

(Demo waiting time determination table)
FIG. 30 shows a demo waiting time determination table which is referred to when determining the waiting time until the start of the customer waiting demo performance.

The demo waiting time determination table in Figure 30 associates the game state, the current state, and the demo waiting time to be selected. Four types of demo waiting times ranging from 30 seconds to 80 seconds are set for the demo waiting time in the normal game state, and four types of demo waiting times ranging from 35 seconds to 85 seconds are set for the demo waiting time in the specific game state.

The first feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 30 is that the demo waiting time from when the static display of the performance pattern is displayed on the image display device immediately after power is turned on, the demo waiting time from when the static display of the performance pattern is displayed on the image display device immediately after power is restored, the demo waiting time from when the dynamic display of the performance pattern ends (the dynamic time has passed) and the static display of the performance pattern is displayed, and the demo waiting time from when the static display of the performance pattern is displayed after the customer waiting demo performance ends are different. Therefore, the customer waiting demo performance can be executed at an appropriate time according to the current state, which makes it possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The second feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 30 is that the demo waiting time from when the display of the dynamic effect symbols ends (the dynamic time has passed) and the static effect symbols are displayed is longer than the demo waiting time from when the display of the dynamic effect symbols is statically displayed on the image display device immediately after the power is turned on. Therefore, the customer waiting demo effect can be executed at an appropriate time according to the likelihood that the player is playing, which makes it possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The third feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 30 is that the demo waiting time from when the performance symbol is displayed statically on the image display device immediately after power is restored is longer than the demo waiting time from when the display of the performance symbol's varying patterns ends (the varying time has passed) and the performance symbol is displayed statically. Therefore, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demo performance at an appropriate time according to the likelihood that the player is playing, which makes it possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The fourth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 30 is that the demo waiting time from when the static display of the performance pattern on the image display device immediately after power is restored is longer than the demo waiting time from when the static display of the performance pattern on the image display device immediately after power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to execute the customer waiting demo performance at an appropriate time according to the likelihood that the player is playing, which makes it possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The fifth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in Figure 30 is that the demo waiting time from when the performance pattern is statically displayed after the customer waiting demo performance ends is the shortest. This makes it possible to effectively increase the appeal of the game to players and improve the operation of the gaming machine.

The sixth feature of the demo waiting time determination table shown in FIG. 30 is that the waiting time for each demo in a specific game state (low probability time-saving game state, high probability time-saving game state) is longer than the waiting time for each demo in a normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to execute a customer waiting demo performance at an appropriate time according to the likelihood that the player is playing, which makes it possible to improve the operation of the gaming machine.

(Menu operation processing of the production control unit)
The menu operation process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 31. Fig. 31 is a flowchart showing the menu operation process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E320-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the machine is currently waiting for customers. If it is, the process proceeds to step E320-2. If it is not (if a variable display or jackpot display is in progress), the process proceeds to step E320-7, assuming that no processing related to menu operation is to be performed.

In step E320-2, the sub-CPU 130a obtains the menu processing number that is updated for each process in the menu operation process, references the branch destination address from the menu processing number, and executes the process corresponding to the branch destination address.

Specifically, if the menu processing number = "0", various menu items (machine description, performance customization, Pachi-log, end) are displayed in response to operation of the performance button 17, a menu item is selected by operating the cross key 19 and the menu item is confirmed by operating the performance button 17, a menu item selection process (step E320-3) is executed to set a menu processing number corresponding to the confirmed menu item ("1" for "machine description", ""2" for "performance customization", ""3" for "Pachi-log", ""0" for "end"), and the menu operation process is terminated.

If the menu processing number = "1", various explanatory information about the model is displayed in sequence in response to operation of the cross key 19, and a model explanation process (step E320-4) is executed in which the menu processing number is set to "0" by selecting and confirming the end item, and the menu operation process is terminated.

If the menu processing number is "2", a normal setting (normal mode) in which various effects (e.g., icon change effects, continuous preview effects, timer effects, etc.) executed during variable effects in response to operation of the cross key 19 are executed at a normal rate, and a simple setting (simple mode) in which they are executed at a lower rate than the normal rate is selected, and a performance customization process (step E320-5) determined by operation of the effect button 17 is executed, and the menu operation process is terminated.

If the menu processing number is "3", the game accepts input of a history password using the effect button 17 and cross key 19 to start updating the game history, issues a history password according to the updated game history in response to the effect button 17 and cross key 19, and executes Pachilog processing (step E320-6) that manages the game history in conjunction with a terminal such as a mobile phone owned by the player, and then ends the menu operation processing.

If the menu operation number is "4", a termination process (step E320-7) is executed to terminate the menu operation and set the menu processing number to "0", and the menu operation process is terminated.

In this way, based on the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19, the various effects executed during the fluctuation effect (such as the icon change effect, continuous preview effect, timer effect, and effect of the device preview at the start of the fluctuation, which will be described later) can be set to a normal setting (normal mode) or a simple setting (simple mode) with different execution ratios (the execution ratios of the icon change effect, continuous preview effect, timer effect, and effect of the device preview at the start of the fluctuation can be set), allowing the player to customize the balance of effects to their liking, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, rather than customizing the execution ratio of various effects (effects to be customized) executed during variable effects by selecting between the normal setting and the simple setting, the performance balance may be customized by allowing the high and low execution ratios of various effects (effects to be customized) executed during variable effects to be individually set, or the performance balance may be customized by allowing the high and low execution ratios of various effects (effects to be customized) to be individually set while selecting between the normal setting and the simple setting.

In addition, the effects to be customized do not have to be limited to the icon change effects, continuous preview effects, timer effects, and start-of-change role preview effects described above, but the start-of-change role preview effects, pre-reach preview effects (dialogue preview effects, step-up preview effects), and confirmation effects described below may be customized as effects to be customized, and the execution ratio may be set between the normal setting and the simple setting.

In addition, it may be possible to individually set the execution ratio of specific effects among the effects to be customized (for example, in the case of dialogue previews, dialogue preview pattern 6 for hot lines with high expectations and dialogue preview pattern 1 for normal lines with low expectations, etc.).

(Preview processing of the performance control unit)
The look-ahead performance processing of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 32. Fig. 32 is a flowchart showing the look-ahead performance processing in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E510, the sub-CPU 130a performs an icon change performance determination process to determine whether or not to execute an icon change performance and the performance mode of the icon change performance. The icon change performance determination process will be described in detail later.

In step E520, the sub-CPU 130a performs an icon change performance execution process to execute the icon change performance determined to be executed in the icon change performance determination process (changing the display mode of the pending icon or the icon that is already displayed). Details of the icon change performance execution process will be described later.

In step E530, the sub-CPU 130a performs a continuous preview performance determination process to determine whether or not to execute a continuous preview performance and the performance mode of the continuous preview performance. The details of the continuous preview performance determination process will be described later.

In step E540, the sub-CPU 130a performs a continuous preview performance execution process to execute the continuous preview performance that was determined to be executed in the continuous preview performance determination process. The details of the continuous preview performance determination process will be described later.

In step E550, the sub-CPU 130a performs a lamp change effect execution process to execute a lamp change effect (to light up the winning port lamp NR so that the light emission mode corresponds to the icon whose display mode has changed). The lamp change effect execution process will be described in detail later.

In step E560, the sub-CPU 130a performs a winning light-emitting effect determination process to determine whether or not to execute a winning light-emitting effect that indicates the likelihood of a special game being played by illuminating the top lamp 10b located at the top center of the glass frame 4 of the frame lighting device 10 in a special light-emitting mode different from the normal light-emitting mode depending on the result of the pre-reading judgment when the game ball enters the starting hole, and to determine the mode of the winning light-emitting effect to be executed. The details of the winning light-emitting effect determination process will be described later.

In step E570, the sub-CPU 130a performs a winning light-emitting effect execution process to execute the winning light-emitting effect that was determined to be executed in the winning light-emitting effect determination process, and ends this look-ahead effect process.

(Icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 33. Fig. 33 is a flowchart showing the icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m.

In step E510-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a look-ahead designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If a look-ahead designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E510-2, and if a look-ahead designation command has not been received, the current icon change performance determination process ends.

In step E510-2, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the received look-ahead command and determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, the type of jackpot game, and the presentation content (planned variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the current time is a period during which an icon change performance can be performed. If the current time is a period during which an icon change performance can be performed, the process proceeds to step E510-4. If the current time is not a period during which an icon change performance can be performed, the process proceeds to step E510-7.

The "period during which the icon change effect can be executed" refers to a period when a jackpot game is not being executed, when an icon change effect is not being executed, or when an icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. Note that it is also possible to set only one or two of the above three conditions. It is also possible to set a normal game state when the received look-ahead designation command is based on winning at the first start port 45, and a specific game state (low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state) when the received look-ahead designation command is based on winning at the second start port 47.

In step E510-4, the sub-CPU 130a acquires a random number value for determining the final display mode of the icon to be additionally displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display), and in step E510-5, selects an icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 34) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

In step E510-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 34, and determines one of the multiple final icon display modes based on the expected change pattern indicated by the look-ahead specification command and the selection rate (%) of each final icon display mode.

In step E510-7, the sub-CPU 130a determines the normal icon (white icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E510-8, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the determined final icon display mode is a display mode (special icon) that executes an icon change performance. If it is a display mode that executes an icon change performance, the process proceeds to step E510-9, and if it is not a display mode that executes an icon change performance, the process proceeds to step E510-12.

In step E510-9, the sub-CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 32) for determining the change scenario of the icon change presentation. Details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from when the reserved icon appears to when it disappears.

In step E510-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c corresponding to the reserved number counter. Specifically, the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 32 is referenced, and one change scenario is determined from among multiple change scenarios based on the final icon display state, the reserved number of special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead designation command, and the selection rate (%) of each change scenario.

In step E510-11, the sub-CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode that will be displayed first on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) from the determined change scenario, sets the icon display command for that winning icon in the transmission buffer, and ends this icon change presentation determination process. As a result, the icon display command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and a pending icon in a display mode that corresponds to the icon display command for the winning icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal display) and a specified sound effect is output.

In step E510-12, the sub-CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which no icon change performance is performed, and sets this in the pre-read information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c corresponding to the pending number counter.

In step E510-13, the sub-CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer and ends the icon change presentation decision process. This causes the icon display command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a reserved icon with a display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the normal icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main LCD) and a predetermined sound effect (first winning sound) is output.

(Icon Final Display Mode Determination Table)
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table which is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table associates the expected change pattern indicated by the look-ahead command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode in the normal setting and simple setting through performance customization, and the selected icon final display mode, and for reference, the type of notification sound when each type of icon is generated is also listed.

The final icon display mode is set to a white icon as a normal icon, and a blue icon, red icon, or rainbow icon as special icons that indicate the possibility of a jackpot (a jackpot game being played).

The likelihood of winning the jackpot for special icons increases in the following order: (white icon <) blue icon < red icon < rainbow icon, with the rainbow icon being the icon that guarantees a jackpot.

The image display device is configured so that when a white icon is displayed on the image display device, a first occurrence alert sound is output, when a blue icon is displayed, a second occurrence alert sound is output, when a red icon is displayed, a third occurrence alert sound is output, and when a rainbow icon is displayed, a fourth occurrence alert sound is output.

The rate at which blue or red icons are selected in the simple setting is set to half the rate at which blue or red icons are selected in the normal setting, but it may be more or less than half.

The first feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 34 is that the selection rate of the icon final display mode is varied depending on the scheduled fluctuation pattern. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the scheduled fluctuation pattern is an SP reach or SPSP reach, the special icon is selected at a higher rate than when the scheduled fluctuation pattern is a normal fluctuation, shortened fluctuation, or normal reach that is not a reach.

The second feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in Figure 34 is that the execution rate of the icon change effects changes depending on the effect customization settings (normal setting, simple setting) made by the player. In this way, it is possible to set the effect balance to suit the player's preferences, making the game more interesting.

When a jackpot is hit, the normal icon (white icon) is not selected as the final icon display mode, but it may be selected instead.

In addition, while different alert sounds were set for each of the multiple icon display modes (four types), it would also be possible to have two types: an alert sound when a white icon appears, and an alert sound when the icon changes to a blue icon, red icon, or rainbow icon. Alternatively, no alert sound could be output when a white icon appears, and an alert sound could be output only when the icon changes to one of the modes. Also, for the rainbow icon, which is confirmed to be a jackpot, a dedicated alert sound could be provided, making it possible to have three types.

(Change Scenario Decision Table)
FIG. 35 is a diagram showing a variation scenario determination table which is referred to when determining a variation scenario.

The change scenario determination table associates the final display mode of the icon, the reserved number of special symbols corresponding to the look-ahead command, the selection rate (%) of each change scenario, and the change scenario to be selected, and for reference, the prior changes in each change scenario and the update mode of the icon in that change are listed.

"Pre-change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that was stored before the special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command, and "the change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command.

The change scenarios include scenarios (e.g., scenario 01, etc.) in which the display mode of the icon does not change while the pre-change is being performed (the pending icon change performance is not executed) but changes while the change is being performed (the relevant icon change performance is executed), scenarios (e.g., scenario 02, etc.) in which the display mode of the icon changes while the pre-change is being performed (the pending icon change performance is executed) but does not change while the change is being performed (the relevant icon change performance is not executed), and scenarios (e.g., scenario 15, etc.) in which the display mode of the icon changes while the pre-change is being performed and while the change is being performed (the pending icon change performance and the relevant icon change performance are executed).

In the change scenario determination table of this embodiment, a scenario for changing the display mode of the icon is determined regardless of whether or not a reach performance (which may be a reach other than a normal reach performance) is executed in the pre-variation, but a scenario for changing the display mode of the icon may be determined by a change scenario determination table in which a reach performance that suggests the possibility of a jackpot game being executed in the pre-variation is used as a determination factor. When using such a change scenario determination table, it is preferable to set various scenarios so that the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of a pre-variation in which a reach performance is executed, and the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of a pre-variation in which a reach performance is not executed. In addition, various scenarios may be set so that the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of a pre-variation in which a reach performance is executed and a pre-variation in which a reach performance is not executed, but the display mode of the icon changes at a higher rate during the execution of a pre-variation in which a reach performance is not executed than during the execution of a pre-variation in which a reach performance is executed.

(Icon change performance execution process of the performance control unit)
The icon change performance execution process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 36. Fig. 36 is a flowchart showing the icon change performance execution process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E520-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a special chart variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If a special chart variation pattern designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E520-2, and if a special chart variation pattern designation command has not been received, the process for executing the icon change effect is terminated.

In step E520-2, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, and in step E520-3, determines whether there is a reserved icon that will change (update) the display mode in the current variation performance. If there is a reserved icon that will change the display mode, the process proceeds to step E520-4, and if there is no reserved icon that will change the display mode, the process proceeds to step E520-7.

In step E520-4, the sub-CPU 130a selects a hold icon change pattern determination table (see FIG. 37) for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the hold icon to be changed. Details of the hold icon change pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E520-5, the sub-CPU 130a determines the pending icon change pattern. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the pending icon change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 37, and determines one pending icon change pattern from among multiple pending icon change patterns based on the manner in which the pending icon changes in the current variation performance and the selection rate (%).

In step E520-6, the sub-CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined pending icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the change effect command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the display state of the pending icon displayed on the first image display device 70 changes according to the change timing corresponding to the pending icon change pattern and the change stage at the change timing, or a predetermined sound effect (change sound) is output.

In step E520-7, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a scenario (change scenario, non-change scenario) for the icon is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c. If a scenario for the icon is stored, the process proceeds to step E520-8. If a scenario for the icon is not stored, the process terminates, assuming that a command abnormality has occurred in which the scenario is not stored in the look-ahead information storage area due to failure to properly receive power recovery or winning commands (special chart reservation number designation command, look-ahead designation command), which would result in the scenario being cleared from the look-ahead information storage area.

In step E520-8, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated). If there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process proceeds to step E520-9. If there is no icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process for executing the icon change effect is terminated.

In step E520-9, the sub-CPU 130a selects, from among a plurality of icon change pattern determination tables for determining the change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed, a change pattern determination table (see FIG. 38) for the icon corresponding to the change stage at which the icon will change in the current change performance. Details of the change pattern determination table for the icon corresponding to the change stage will be described later.

The sub-CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-10. Specifically, it refers to a change pattern determination table for the selected icon, and determines one icon change pattern from among a plurality of icon change patterns based on the state of the icon change in the current variation performance and the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern.

In step E520-11, the sub-CPU 130a sets the change performance command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer and ends the current icon change performance execution process. This causes the change performance command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the display state of the icon displayed on the first image display device 70 changes according to the change timing corresponding to the icon change pattern and the change stage at the change timing, or a specified sound effect (change sound) is output.

(Change pattern determination table for hold icon)
FIG. 37 shows a hold icon change pattern determination table that is referenced when determining a hold icon change pattern.

The pending icon change pattern determination table associates the manner in which the pending icon changes in the current change presentation, the selection rate (%) of each pending icon change pattern, and the selected pending icon change pattern, and for reference, the timing at which the pending icon change presentation occurs and the change stage for each pending icon change pattern are also listed.

The reserved icon change patterns include a normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the reserved icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the reserved icon shifts (when the change begins) in response to the disappearance of the icon, a normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the reserved icon changes while changing with the output of a sound effect, a character effect change pattern 01 in which a character appears and an action effect is performed on the icon starting from the character, changing the display mode of the icon, and a pattern effect change pattern 01 in which a change notification pattern indicating that the display mode of the icon will change as a result of the change effect is temporarily displayed and an action effect is performed on the reserved icon starting from the change notification pattern, changing the display mode of the reserved icon.

The timing of the pending icon change effect is classified in relation to the progress of the change effect, and includes when the change effect starts (change start time), when the change effect is in progress (changing), and when the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops ((temporarily) stopped).

The pending icon change stages are set to 1UP, which changes the display mode of the jackpot winning expectation to one level higher (for example, changing from a white icon to a blue icon, or from a blue icon to a red icon), and 2UP, which changes the jackpot winning expectation to two levels higher (for example, changing from a white icon to a red icon).

The timing for the change effect of the reserved icon to occur is the three mentioned above, but it is not limited to these timings and other timings may be provided. For example, it may occur during the execution of the change effect until a reach is achieved (during the change), during the execution of a normal reach, or during the execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, etc.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
Figure 38 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for the icon which is referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon, where Figure 38(a) is a table which is referred to when the display mode of the icon is changed by one stage, and Figure 38(b) is a table which is referred to when the display mode of the icon is changed by two stages.

The icon change pattern determination table associates the mode of the icon change in the current change performance, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the icon change pattern that will be selected, and for reference, the timing at which the icon change performance occurs in each icon change pattern and the change stage are also listed.

The icon change patterns include normal change pattern 01, in which the display mode of the reserved icon changes when the change starts accompanied by the output of a sound effect, normal change pattern 02, in which the display mode of the reserved icon changes during the change accompanied by the output of a sound effect, and character action change pattern 01, in which a character appears and an action performance is performed on the icon starting from the character, changing the display mode of the icon.

The timing of the icon change effect is classified according to the progress of the change effect, and includes when the change effect starts (change start time), when the change effect is in progress (changing), and when the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops ((temporarily) stopped).

The icon change stages are set to 1UP, which changes the probability of winning the jackpot to a display mode that is one level higher (for example, changing from a white icon to a blue icon, or changing from a blue icon to a red icon), and 2UP, which changes the probability of winning the jackpot to a display mode that is two levels higher (for example, changing from a white icon to a red icon, or changing from a blue icon to a rainbow icon).

In the change pattern determination table for the icon in this embodiment, the pattern action change pattern 01 cannot be selected, but it may be selected. For example, in a change performance that performs a pseudo consecutive performance, the change notification pattern may be temporarily stopped when the performance pattern 70a before the pseudo change is temporarily stopped.

"Pseudo consecutive performance" refers to a special mode of performance pattern change display in which a re-change display in which all performance patterns 70a temporarily stop and then start changing again is executed once or multiple times within the special pattern change time determined for a winning (ball entry) into one start port (first start port 45, second start port 47) in order to make it look as if the performance pattern change display has been executed multiple times in response to a jackpot determination based on a winning (ball entry) into one start port (first start port 45, second start port 47).

The timing for the icon change effect to occur is the two mentioned above, but is not limited to these timings and other timings may be provided. For example, it may occur during the execution of the change effect until a reach is achieved (during the change), during the execution of a normal reach, or during the execution of an SP (SPSP) reach, etc.

(Continuous preview performance decision process of the performance control unit)
The continuous preview performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 39. Fig. 39 is a flowchart showing the continuous preview performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E530-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a look-ahead designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If a look-ahead designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E530-2, and if a look-ahead designation command has not been received, the process for determining the continuous preview performance is terminated.

In step E530-2, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the received look-ahead command and determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, the type of jackpot game, and the presentation content (planned variation pattern).

In step E530-3, it is determined whether or not the current period is one in which a continuous preview performance can be executed. If the current period is one in which a continuous preview performance (pre-reading action performance, pre-reading effect performance, pre-reading vibration performance, pre-reading zone performance) can be executed, processing proceeds to step E530-4. If the current period is not one in which a continuous preview performance can be executed, processing proceeds to step E530-16, assuming that the continuous preview performance based on the currently received pre-reading designation command will not be executed.

The "anticipatory action effect" is an effect that intermittently indicates the likelihood of a special game being played by executing an action effect (preview effect) that operates the second movable member 74 in a predetermined manner immediately after the start of one or more variable effects.

The "pre-reading effect" is an effect that intermittently suggests the likelihood of a special game being played by executing an effect effect (pre-notice effect) that displays an effect image of a predetermined color around the effect pattern 70a immediately after the start of one or more variable effects.

The "pre-reading vibration effect" is an effect that intermittently indicates the likelihood of a special game being played by executing a vibration effect (pre-notice effect) that vibrates the effect button 17 in a predetermined manner without generating an effective period for the effect button 17 immediately after the start of one or more variable effects.

The "pre-reading zone effect (pre-reading mode effect)" is an effect that continuously suggests the likelihood of a special game being played by executing a zone in-effect (pre-notice effect) that displays a zone image from a specific timing in one or more variable effects.

The "period during which the consecutive preview performance can be executed" includes the following: there is no item in the advanced reserve that executes the consecutive preview performance; a jackpot game is not in progress; a normal game state is in effect when a look-ahead command based on a win at the first start port 45 is received; a specific game state (low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state) is in effect when a look-ahead command based on a win at the second start port 47 is received; etc.

In step E530-4, the sub-CPU 130a selects a continuous preview type determination table (see Figures 40 and 41) corresponding to the current presentation mode, and in step E530-5, refers to the continuous preview type determination table to determine the continuous preview type (whether or not to execute a continuous preview presentation, and the type of continuous preview presentation to be executed). Details of the continuous preview type determination table will be described later.

In step E530-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the continuous preview type is one that will execute a continuous preview performance. If a continuous preview performance is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-16. If a continuous preview performance is to be executed, in step E530-7, a continuous preview scenario determination table (see Figures 42 and 43) corresponding to the current performance mode is selected. Details of the continuous preview scenario determination table will be described later.

In step E530-8, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a continuous preview type for executing a look-ahead action performance has been determined. If a look-ahead action performance is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-10. If a look-ahead action performance is to be executed, in step E530-9, the continuous preview scenario determination table is referenced to determine a preview scenario for the look-ahead action performance and set it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether a continuous preview type for executing a look-ahead effect performance has been determined. If a look-ahead effect performance is not to be executed, processing proceeds to step E530-12. If a look-ahead effect performance is to be executed, in step E530-11, the continuous preview scenario determination table is referenced to determine a preview scenario for the look-ahead effect performance and set it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-12, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a continuous preview type for executing a look-ahead vibration performance has been determined. If a look-ahead vibration performance is not to be executed, the process proceeds to step E530-14. If a look-ahead vibration performance is to be executed, in step E530-13, the continuous preview scenario determination table is referenced to determine a preview scenario for the look-ahead vibration performance and set it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E530-14, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a continuous preview type for executing a look-ahead zone performance (look-ahead mode performance) has been determined. If a look-ahead zone (look-ahead mode performance) performance is not to be executed, the current continuous preview performance determination process is terminated. If a look-ahead zone performance is to be executed, in step E530-15, the continuous preview scenario determination table is referenced to determine a preview scenario for the look-ahead zone performance (look-ahead mode performance) and set it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, and the current continuous preview performance determination process is terminated.

In step E530-16, the sub-CPU 130a determines a non-preview scenario for the consecutive preview performance (a preview scenario indicating that the consecutive preview performance will not be executed) and sets it in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, terminating this consecutive preview performance determination process.

The preview scenario or non-preview scenario set in the pre-read information storage area of sub-RAM 130c is referenced in the continuous preview performance execution process of step E540 described above, and processing for executing the continuous preview performance or processing for not executing the continuous preview performance is performed.

In this way, according to the continuous preview performance determination process shown in FIG. 39, since the look-ahead operation performance related to the variable display (variation performance) of the second special pattern is not executed in the normal gaming state, in the normal gaming state, the look-ahead operation performance (the operation of the second movable member 74) is more likely to be executed when the variable display (variation performance) of the first special pattern is executed than when the variable display (variation performance) of the second special pattern is executed. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect related to the variable display (variation performance) of the first special pattern in the normal gaming state, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the continuous preview performance determination process shown in FIG. 39, since the look-ahead vibration performance related to the variable display (variation performance) of the second special pattern is not executed in the normal game state, in the normal game state, the look-ahead vibration performance (vibration performance of the performance button 17) is more likely to be executed when the variable display (variation performance) of the first special pattern is executed than when the variable display (variation performance) of the second special pattern is executed. Therefore, the performance effect related to the variable display (variation performance) of the first special pattern can be enhanced in the normal game state, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the process for determining the successive preview effects shown in FIG. 39, since the look-ahead operation effect related to the variable display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is not executed in the specific gaming state, the look-ahead operation effect (the operation of the second movable member 74) is more likely to be executed in the specific gaming state when the variable display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed than when the variable display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, the effect of the effect related to the variable display (variation effect) of the second special symbol can be enhanced in the specific gaming state, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the process for determining the consecutive preview effects shown in FIG. 39, since the look-ahead vibration effect is not executed in the variable display (variation effect) of the first special symbol in the specific game state, in the specific game state, the look-ahead vibration effect (vibration effect of the effect button 17) is more likely to be executed when the variable display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed than when the variable display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed. Therefore, the effect of the effect of the variable display (variation effect) of the second special symbol in the specific game state can be enhanced, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

(Continuous notice type determination table)
Figure 40 is a diagram showing a successive preview type determination table that is referenced to determine the type of successive preview in presentation modes A to C (normal game playing state), and Figure 41 is a diagram showing a successive preview presentation determination table that is referenced to determine the type of successive preview in presentation modes D to H (specific game playing state).

As shown in Figures 40 and 41, the continuous preview type determination table associates look-ahead designation commands (planned change patterns), the selection rate (%) of each continuous preview type in normal and simple settings by performance customization, and the continuous preview type to be selected. The continuous preview types include "not executed", which does not execute a continuous preview performance, "look-ahead action performance", "look-ahead effect performance", "look-ahead vibration performance", "look-ahead zone performance", which executes one of multiple types of continuous preview performances, "look-ahead effect performance & look-ahead vibration performance", and "look-ahead action performance & look-ahead zone performance", which execute two of multiple types of continuous preview performances.

For example, if the look-ahead command (planned change pattern) is a miss and an SP reach effect is to be executed, there is an 85% chance that "not executed" will be determined, a 5% chance that "look-ahead effect effect" will be determined, a 4% chance that "look-ahead action effect" will be determined, a 3% chance that "look-ahead vibration effect" will be determined, a 2% chance that "look-ahead zone effect" will be determined, and a 1% chance that "look-ahead effect effect & look-ahead vibration effect" will be determined.

The rate at which various continuous preview effects are selected in the simple setting is set to half the rate at which various continuous preview effects are selected in the normal setting, but it may be more or less than half.

Here, the first feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in Figures 40 to 41 is that when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization in response to the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19, the execution rate of the first continuous notice effect (any one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, look-ahead vibration effect, and look-ahead zone effect) is a first rate, and the execution rate of the second continuous notice effect (the first continuous notice of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, look-ahead vibration effect, and look-ahead zone effect) is a second rate. When the second variable effect (display of a variable second special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization, the execution rate of the first consecutive notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, and look-ahead vibration effect) is a rate different from the first rate (here, 0%), and the execution rate of the second consecutive notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, and look-ahead vibration effect other than the first consecutive notice effect) is a rate different from the second rate (here, 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization, the effect can be made to differ depending on the type of variable effect (special symbol), which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, a second feature of the continuous notice type determination table shown in Figures 40 to 41 is that when a first variable effect (variable display of a first special symbol) is executed in a normal game state after a simple setting (simple mode) is set in the effect customization in response to the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19, the execution rate of the first continuous notice effect (any one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, look-ahead vibration effect, and look-ahead zone effect) is a first rate, and the execution rate of the second continuous notice effect (any one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, look-ahead vibration effect, and look-ahead zone effect) is a second rate. When the execution rate of the first consecutive preview performance (one of the pre-reading effect performance, pre-reading chance eye performance, pre-reading action performance, and pre-reading vibration performance) is a second rate, and when the second variable performance (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization, the execution rate of the first consecutive preview performance (one of the pre-reading effect performance, pre-reading chance eye performance, pre-reading action performance, and pre-reading vibration performance) is a rate different from the first rate (here, 0%), and the execution rate of the second consecutive preview performance (one of the pre-reading effect performance, pre-reading chance eye performance, pre-reading action performance, and pre-reading vibration performance other than the first consecutive preview performance) is a rate different from the second rate (here, 0%). Therefore, even when the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the performance customization, the performance effect can be made to differ depending on the type of variable performance (special symbol), making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, a third feature of the consecutive notice type determination table shown in Figures 40 to 41 is that when a second variable effect (variable display of a first special symbol) is executed in a specific game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization according to the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19, the execution rate of the first consecutive notice effect (any one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, look-ahead vibration effect, and look-ahead zone effect) is a first rate, and the execution rate of the second consecutive notice effect (any one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, look-ahead vibration effect, and look-ahead zone effect) is a first rate. When the first variable effect (display of the variable second special symbol) is executed in a specific game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization, the execution rate of the first consecutive notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, and look-ahead vibration effect) is a rate different from the first rate (here, 0%), and the execution rate of the second consecutive notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, and look-ahead vibration effect other than the first consecutive notice effect) is a rate different from the second rate (here, 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization, the effect can be made to differ depending on the type of variable effect (special symbol), which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the fourth feature of the consecutive notice type determination table shown in Figures 40 to 41 is that when a second variable effect (variable display of a first special symbol) is executed in a specific game state after a simple setting (simple mode) is set in the effect customization according to the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19, the execution rate of the first consecutive notice effect (any one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, look-ahead vibration effect, and look-ahead zone effect) is a first rate, and the execution rate of the second consecutive notice effect (any one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, look-ahead vibration effect, and look-ahead zone effect) is a first rate. When the first variable effect (display of the variable second special symbol) is executed in a specific game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization, the execution rate of the first consecutive notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, and look-ahead vibration effect) is a rate different from the first rate (here, 0%), and the execution rate of the second consecutive notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, and look-ahead vibration effect other than the first consecutive notice effect) is a rate different from the second rate (here, 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization, the effect can be made to differ depending on the type of variable effect (special symbol), which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the fifth feature of the consecutive notice type determination table shown in Figures 40 to 41 is that when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization according to the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19, the execution rate of the first consecutive notice effect (any one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, look-ahead vibration effect, and look-ahead zone effect) is the first rate, and the execution rate of the second consecutive notice effect (any one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, look-ahead vibration effect, and look-ahead zone effect) is the first rate. When the first variable effect (display of the variable first special symbol) is executed in a specific game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization, the execution rate of the first consecutive notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, and look-ahead vibration effect) is a rate different from the first rate (here, 0%), and the execution rate of the second consecutive notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, and look-ahead vibration effect other than the first consecutive notice effect) is a rate different from the second rate (here, 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization, the effect can be made to differ depending on the game state and the type of variable effect (special symbol), which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the sixth feature of the consecutive notice type determination table shown in Figures 40 to 41 is that when a second variable effect (variable display of a second special symbol) is executed in a specific game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization according to the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19, the execution rate of the first consecutive notice effect (any one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, look-ahead vibration effect, and look-ahead zone effect) is a first rate, and the execution rate of the second consecutive notice effect (any one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, look-ahead vibration effect, and look-ahead zone effect) is a first rate. When the second variable effect (display of the variable second special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization, the execution rate of the first consecutive notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, and look-ahead vibration effect) is a rate different from the first rate (here, 0%), and the execution rate of the second consecutive notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, and look-ahead vibration effect other than the first consecutive notice effect) is a rate different from the second rate (here, 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization, the effect can be made to differ depending on the game state and the type of variable effect (special symbol), which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the seventh feature of the consecutive notice type determination table shown in Figures 40 to 41 is that when a second variable effect (variable display of a second special symbol) is executed in a specific game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization according to the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19, the execution rate of the first consecutive notice effect (any one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, look-ahead vibration effect, and look-ahead zone effect) is the first rate, and the execution rate of the second consecutive notice effect (any one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, look-ahead vibration effect, and look-ahead zone effect) is the first rate. When the first variable effect (display of the variable first special symbol) is executed in a specific game state after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization, the execution rate of the first consecutive notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, and look-ahead vibration effect) is a rate different from the first rate (here, 0%), and the execution rate of the second consecutive notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, and look-ahead vibration effect other than the first consecutive notice effect) is a rate different from the second rate (here, 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization, the effect can be made to differ depending on the game state and the type of variable effect (special symbol), which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the eighth feature of the consecutive notice type determination table shown in Figures 40 to 41 is that when a second variable effect (variable display of a second special symbol) is executed in a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) after a normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization according to the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19, the execution rate of the first consecutive notice effect (any one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, look-ahead vibration effect, and look-ahead zone effect) is a first rate, and the execution rate of the second consecutive notice effect (any one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, look-ahead vibration effect, and look-ahead zone effect) is a first rate. When the first variable effect (display of a variable first special symbol) is executed in the first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization, the execution rate of the first consecutive notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, and look-ahead vibration effect) is a rate different from the first rate (here, 0%), and the execution rate of the second consecutive notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, and look-ahead vibration effect other than the first consecutive notice effect) is a rate different from the second rate (here, 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization, the effect can be made to differ depending on the game state and the type of variable effect (special symbol), which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the ninth feature of the consecutive notice type determination table shown in Figures 40 to 41 is that when a second variable effect (variable display of a second special symbol) is executed in a first specific game state (normal time-saving game state) after a normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization according to the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19, the execution rate of the first consecutive notice effect (any one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, look-ahead vibration effect, and look-ahead zone effect) is a first rate, and the execution rate of the second consecutive notice effect (any one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, look-ahead vibration effect, and look-ahead zone effect) is a first rate. When the first variable effect (display of the variable first special symbol) is executed in the second specific game state (special time-saving game state) after the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization, the execution rate of the first consecutive notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, and look-ahead vibration effect) is a rate different from the first rate (here, 0%), and the execution rate of the second consecutive notice effect (one of the look-ahead effect effect, look-ahead chance eye effect, look-ahead action effect, and look-ahead vibration effect other than the first consecutive notice effect) is a rate different from the second rate (here, 0%). Therefore, even if the normal setting (normal mode) is set in the effect customization, the effect can be made to differ depending on the game state and the type of variable effect (special symbol), which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Continuous preview performance scenario decision table)
Figure 42 is a diagram showing a successive preview scenario determination table for presentation modes A to C (normal game playing states), and Figure 43 is a diagram showing a successive preview scenario determination table for presentation modes D to H (specific game playing states).

The consecutive preview scenario determination table associates the number of reserved special symbols, the look-ahead command (planned change pattern), the selection rate (%) of each preview scenario, and the selected preview scenario, and for reference, lists the pre-changes in each scenario (4 changes before, 3 changes before, 2 changes before, 1 change before) and the presentation style of the consecutive preview performance in that change.

"Pre-change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that was stored before the special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command, and "the change" refers to a change display (change performance) that is executed based on special chart determination information that corresponds to the newly received look-ahead command.

A "weak notice" is a presentation that differs depending on the type of continuous notice. In the case of a pre-reading action presentation, the second movable member 74 performs a weak action in which it emits blue light and operates, and a weak action sound effect is output. In the case of a pre-reading effect presentation, a blue effect image is displayed around the presentation pattern 70a, and a blue effect sound effect is output. In the case of a pre-reading vibration presentation, the vibrator for vibrating the presentation button 17 vibrates weakly for one second, and the presentation button 17 flashes white. In the case of a pre-reading zone presentation, a blue zone image is displayed, and a zone sound effect is output.

The "strong notice" has different presentation modes depending on the type of continuous notice. In the case of a pre-reading action presentation, the second movable member 74 emits red light and performs a strong action, and a strong action sound effect is output. In the case of a pre-reading effect presentation, a red effect image is displayed around the presentation pattern 70a, and a red effect sound effect is output. In the case of a pre-reading vibration presentation, the vibrator for vibrating the presentation button 17 vibrates strongly for three seconds, and the presentation button 17 flashes red. In the case of a pre-reading zone presentation, a red heat zone image is displayed, and a heat zone sound effect is output.

The continuous preview performance scenarios include a scenario in which a weak or strong preview is not executed during the pre-change but is executed during the change itself (e.g., scenario 11), and a scenario in which a weak or strong preview is executed both during the pre-change and during the change itself (e.g., scenario 22).

The first feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performances shown in Figures 40 to 43 is that the expectation of a big win is higher when multiple types of continuous preview performances are executed than when one type of continuous preview performance is executed. This effectively increases the player's sense of expectation, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The second feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview effects shown in Figures 40 to 43 is that the continuous preview effects are more likely to be executed (the execution rate is higher) in presentation modes D to H (specific game states) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states), meaning that the expectation of a big win when the continuous preview effect is executed is lower. Therefore, the gameplay can be varied depending on the type of presentation mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of varying the execution rate of the consecutive preview performance between presentation modes A to C and presentation modes D to H, for example, the execution rate of the consecutive preview performance may be varied between presentation modes A to C, such as making it easier to execute the consecutive preview performance in presentation mode B than in presentation mode A, or the execution rate of the consecutive preview performance may be varied between presentation modes D to H, such as making it easier to execute the consecutive preview performance in presentation mode E than in presentation mode D. In this way, the expectation of a big win for the consecutive preview performance changes between presentation modes, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performance shown in Figures 40 to 43 is that the continuous preview performance (here, the look-ahead effect performance, the look-ahead action performance) is more likely to be executed in performance modes D to H (specific game states) when a normal reach performance is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) than in performance modes A to C (normal game states) when a normal reach performance is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result). Therefore, in specific game states where (ultra) shortened fluctuations are more likely to occur than in performance modes A to C (normal game states), it is possible to prevent the variable performance from becoming monotonous, making the game more interesting.

The fourth feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performances shown in Figures 40 to 43 is that the continuous preview performances (here, the look-ahead effect performance, the look-ahead action performance, and the look-ahead zone performance) are more likely to be executed when an SP reach performance is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in performance modes D to H (specific game states) than when an SP reach performance is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in performance modes A to C (normal game states). Therefore, in specific game states where (ultra) shortened fluctuations are more likely to occur than in performance modes A to C (normal game states), it is possible to prevent the variable performances from becoming monotonous, making the game more interesting.

The fifth feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performances shown in Figures 40 to 43 is that the continuous preview performances (here, the look-ahead effect performance, the look-ahead action performance, and the look-ahead zone performance) are more likely to be executed when the SPSP reach performance is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in performance modes D to H (specific game states) than when the SPSP reach performance is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) in performance modes A to C (normal game states). Therefore, in specific game states where super-shortened fluctuations are more likely to occur than in performance modes A to C (normal game states), it is possible to prevent the fluctuation performances from becoming monotonous, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the various tables relating to the continuous preview effects shown in Figures 40 to 43 is that the continuous preview effects (here, the look-ahead action effect and the look-ahead zone effect) are more likely to be executed in presentation modes D to H (specific game states) when a full rotation reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states) when a full rotation reach effect is scheduled to be executed (look-ahead result). Therefore, in specific game states where super-shortened fluctuations are more likely to occur than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states), it is possible to prevent the fluctuation effects from becoming monotonous, making the game more interesting.

The seventh feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview effects shown in Figures 40 to 43 is that the predictive vibration effect (vibration effect without the effective period of the effect button 17 or the display of the operation prompt image) is more likely to be executed (higher execution rate = different expectation of big win) in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) than in the effect modes D to G (specific game state). Therefore, in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), where the stay period is more likely to be longer than in the effect modes D to H (specific game state), it is possible to make the predictive vibration effect more easily experienced by the player, which makes it possible to increase the interest in the game. Also, in the effect modes D to H (specific game state), where the fluctuation time is more likely to be shorter than in the effect modes A to C (normal game state), it is possible to give the predictive vibration effect a rarity, which makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The look-ahead vibration effect may be executed more easily (at a higher execution rate) in presentation modes D to H than in presentation modes A to C. In addition, in the normal game state, the look-ahead continuous effect may be executed more easily in presentation mode A than in presentation modes B or C, thereby making the execution rate of the look-ahead vibration effect different between presentation modes A to C, and in the specific game state, the look-ahead vibration effect may be executed more easily in presentation mode D than in presentation modes E to H, thereby making the execution rate of the look-ahead vibration effect different between presentation modes D to H. In this way, it is possible to differ the probability of a jackpot when the look-ahead vibration effect is executed between presentation modes, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview effects shown in Figures 40 to 43 is that the look-ahead vibration effect is less likely to be executed (the execution rate is lower) when a specific reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result) in presentation modes D to H (specific game state) than when a specific reach effect (normal reach effect, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect) is scheduled to be executed (pre-reading result) in presentation modes A to C (normal game state). Therefore, in presentation modes D to H (specific game state), where the fluctuation time is more likely to be shorter than in presentation modes A to C (normal game state), it is possible to give the look-ahead vibration effect a rarity, which makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The ninth feature of the various tables relating to the continuous preview effects shown in Figures 40 to 43 is that the look-ahead action effect is more likely to be executed (higher execution rate) in presentation modes D to H (specific game states) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states). Therefore, in presentation modes D to H (specific game states), in which the fluctuation time is more likely to be shorter than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states), it is possible to give the look-ahead vibration effect a sense of rarity, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The tenth feature of the various tables relating to the continuous preview performances shown in Figures 40 to 43 is that when a continuous preview performance that ends with one variable performance is executed in performance modes D to H (specific game state), it is less likely (lower rate of execution) that a reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) will be executed in the variable performance that is the subject of the preview of the continuous preview performance, compared to when a continuous preview performance that ends with one variable performance is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of performance mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The eleventh feature of the various tables relating to the continuous preview performances shown in Figures 40 to 43 is that when a continuous preview performance that ends with two variable performances is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state), it is more likely that a reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) will be executed in the variable performance that is the subject of the preview of the continuous preview performance, than when a continuous preview performance that ends with two variable performances is executed in performance modes D to H (specific game state). Therefore, the playability can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The twelfth feature of the various tables relating to the continuous preview performance shown in Figures 40 to 43 is that when the continuous preview performance can be executed over multiple variable performances (number of reserved times is 2 to 4), it is more difficult to execute a reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) in the variable performance that is the subject of the preview of the continuous preview performance when the continuous preview performance with only one variable performance is executed in performance modes D to H (specific game state) than when the continuous preview performance with only one variable performance is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state). Therefore, the playability can be varied depending on the type of performance mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The thirteenth feature of the various tables relating to the continuous preview performances shown in Figures 40 to 43 is that when a continuous preview performance spanning three variable performances is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state), it is easier for a reach performance (normal reach performance, SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) to be executed in the variable performance that is the subject of the preview of the continuous preview performance, compared to when a continuous preview performance spanning three variable performances is executed in performance modes D to H (specific game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of performance mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourteenth feature of the various tables relating to the continuous preview performances shown in Figures 40 to 43 is that when a continuous preview performance spanning three variable performances is executed in performance modes D to H (specific game state), it is more likely that a reach performance with a high probability of winning (for example, an SP reach performance, an SPSP reach performance) will be executed in the variable performance that is the subject of the preview of the continuous preview performance than when a continuous preview performance spanning three variable performances is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of performance mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fifteenth feature of the various tables relating to the continuous preview effects shown in Figures 40 to 43 is that, although it is possible to execute the look-ahead action effect using the same movable member (second movable member 74) in effect modes A to C (normal game state) and effect modes D to H (specific game state), the expectation of a big win when the look-ahead action effect is executed differs between effect modes A to C (normal game state) and effect modes D to G (specific game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of effect mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The 16th feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performance shown in Figures 40 to 43 is that when a look-ahead action performance is executed in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to H (specific game state), the rate at which the second movable member 74, which is not used in the deciding performance, is operated (100%) is higher than the rate at which the first movable member 73, which is used in the deciding performance described below, is operated (0%). This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of mistaking the execution of a look-ahead action performance for a jackpot, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, in the strong notice of the look-ahead action presentation, the first movable member 73 may be operated instead of the second movable member 74. Even in this case, when executing the look-ahead action presentation in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) and presentation modes D to H (special game state), it is preferable to operate the second movable member 74 more frequently than the first movable member 73.

The 17th feature of the various tables relating to the continuous preview effects shown in Figures 40 to 43 is that when a look-ahead vibration effect is executed in effect modes A to C (normal game state) and effect modes D to H (specific game state), the percentage of effect button 17 in the normal state (0%) is higher than the percentage of effect button 17 in the protruding state (0%). This ensures the rarity of effect button 17 being in the protruding state (it is protruding only in the deciding effect described below), making the game more interesting.

In addition, in the strong notice of the pre-reading vibration effect, the effect button 17 may be vibrated in a protruding state rather than being vibrated in a normal state. Even in this case, when executing the pre-reading vibration effect in the effect modes A to C (normal game state) and the effect modes D to H (special game state), it is preferable to make the proportion of the effect button 17 in the normal state higher than the proportion in the protruding state.

The 18th feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performance shown in Figures 40 to 43 is that during a predetermined period (from the start of the fluctuation to the first high-speed fluctuation period of the performance pattern 70a) after the start of the fluctuation performance that is the subject of the continuous preview performance, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when a weak notice of a pre-reading vibration performance (weak vibration of the performance button 17 for one second) that is executed without displaying an operation prompting image is executed than when a weak notice of a pre-reading action performance (weak movement of the first movable member 73 + blue light emission) or a weak notice of a pre-reading effect performance (display of a blue effect image around the performance pattern 70a) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively increase the player's sense of expectation using an operating means that the player can operate, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The 19th feature of the various tables related to the continuous preview performance shown in Figures 40 to 43 is that during a specified period (from the start of the fluctuation to the first high-speed fluctuation period of the performance pattern 70a) after the start of the variable performance that is the subject of the continuous preview performance, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when a strong preview of the pre-reading vibration performance (strong vibration of the performance button 17 for 3 seconds) is executed than when a strong preview of the pre-reading action performance (strong movement of the first movable member 73 + red light emission) or a strong preview of the pre-reading effect performance (display of a red effect image around the performance pattern 70a) is executed. Therefore, the player's sense of expectation can be effectively increased using an operating means that the player can operate, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Continuous preview performance execution process of the performance control unit)
The continuous preview performance execution process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 44. Fig. 44 is a flow chart showing the continuous preview performance execution process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E540-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a special chart variation pattern designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If a special chart variation pattern designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E540-2, and if a special chart variation pattern designation command has not been received, the process for executing the current continuous preview performance is terminated.

In step E540-2, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the preview scenario of the continuous preview performance (preview action performance, preview effect performance, preview vibration performance, preview zone performance) stored in the preview information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, and in step E540-3, determines whether or not a preview scenario of the continuous preview performance is stored. If a preview scenario is stored, the process proceeds to step E540-4, and if no preview scenario is stored, it is determined that a power recovery or command abnormality (missing of a preview command, etc.) has occurred, and the continuous preview performance execution process ends.

In step E540-4, the sub-CPU 130a determines the preview pattern (type of continuous preview performance, weak preview, strong preview) to be executed in the current variable performance according to the preview scenario stored in the preview information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c, and in step E540-5, sets the continuous preview performance command corresponding to the determined preview pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the continuous preview performance command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and the continuous preview performance corresponding to the determined preview pattern is executed. When this process ends, the current continuous preview performance execution process ends.

According to the continuous preview performance execution process shown in FIG. 44, if the performance scenario for the continuous preview performance is not stored in the look-ahead information storage area due to the occurrence of power recovery or a command abnormality (such as a missed look-ahead command), the continuous preview performance will not be executed in the variable performance that is about to start. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as unstable execution of the continuous preview performance due to power recovery or a command abnormality, and makes the game more interesting.

(Lamp change performance execution process of the performance control unit)
The lamp change performance execution process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 45. Fig. 45 is a flowchart showing the lamp change performance execution process in the performance control unit 130m.

In step E550-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether an icon change scenario is stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-RAM 130c. If an icon change scenario is stored, the process moves to step E550-2 assuming that an icon change performance will be executed, and if an icon change scenario is not stored, the process moves to step E550-6 assuming that a command abnormality has occurred in which the scenario is not stored in the look-ahead information storage area due to failure to properly receive power recovery or winning commands (special chart reservation number designation command, look-ahead designation command) that would clear the change scenario from the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E550-2, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether it is time for the icon to change. If it is time for the icon to change, the process proceeds to step E550-3. If it is not time for the icon to change, the process for executing the lamp change effect ends.

In step E550-3, the sub-CPU 130a sets a lamp effect command corresponding to the color of the icon after the change in the transmission buffer. This causes the lamp effect command to be sent to the lamp control unit 150, and the lamp change effect is executed by changing the light emission mode (light emission color, lit/blinking) of the winning port lamp NR in response to the color change of the icon.

In step E550-4, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether a lamp changing flag, which indicates that a lamp changing performance is being executed, is set in the sub-RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the current lamp changing performance execution process is terminated, and if the lamp changing flag is not set, the lamp changing flag is set and the current lamp changing performance execution process is terminated.

In step E550-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the lamp changing flag is set in the sub-RAM 130c. If the lamp changing flag is set, the process proceeds to step E550-7. If the lamp changing flag is not set, the process ends for this lamp change effect execution.

In step E550-7, the sub-CPU 130a clears the lamp change in progress flag set in the sub-RAM 130c, and in step E550-8, sets a lamp performance end command in the transmission buffer and ends the current lamp change performance execution process. This causes the lamp performance command to be sent to the lamp control unit 150, and the lamp change performance that was being executed ends.

In this way, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 45, the lamp change effect is executed by changing the light emission mode (light emission color, on/off) of the winning slot lamp NR in response to the change of the icon in the icon change effect. Therefore, the effect of the effect can be enhanced by a synergistic effect with the icon change effect, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 45, unlike the icon change effect and the continuous preview effect, even if the power is restored while the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect will not be executed again. This makes it possible to ensure the rarity of the lamp change effect while reducing the control burden, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 45, when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) is executed in the normal game state, the icon change effect is not executed, and therefore the lamp change effect is not executed either. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is possible to encourage the game ball to enter the first starting hole 45, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the lamp change effect execution process shown in FIG. 45, when the first special symbol change display (first change effect) is executed in the specific game state, the icon change effect is not executed, and therefore the lamp change effect is not executed either. Therefore, in the specific game state, it is possible to encourage the game ball to enter the second starting hole 47, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

When power is restored, as in the case of an icon change effect, the lamp change effect may be executed again in the variable effect that begins after power is restored. In this case, it is advisable to execute the lamp change effect so that it corresponds to the icon change effect that begins after power is restored.

In addition, instead of executing a lamp change performance in response to an icon change performance, the final light emission mode of the winning port lamp NR, the light emission scenario from the previous change to the actual change, etc. may be determined by lottery to execute the lamp change performance.

In addition, when the second special symbol changing display (second changing effect) is executed in the normal game state, or when the first special symbol changing display (first changing effect) is executed in the specific game state, if a lamp change effect (lamp change effect for reserved memory to be executed later) has already been executed, the lamp change effect may be ended and not resumed, or the lamp change effect may be interrupted and resumed after the changing display of the corresponding special symbol has finished.

(Winning light-emitting effect determination process of the effect control unit)
The process of determining the light-emitting effect when the player wins the prize in the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 46. Fig. 46 is a flowchart showing the process of determining the light-emitting effect when the player wins the prize in the performance control unit 130m, and this process is executed in the special chart special electric effect process described above.

In step E560-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a look-ahead command has been received from the main control board 110. If a look-ahead command has been received, the process proceeds to step E560-2, and if a look-ahead command has not been received, the process for determining the light-emitting effect to be displayed when the player wins is terminated.

In step E560-2, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the look-ahead command received from the main control board 110, and in step E560-3, determines whether or not the current time is a time when the light-emitting effect at the time of winning can be executed. If the current time is a time when the light-emitting effect at the time of winning can be executed, the process proceeds to step E560-4. If the current time is not a time when the light-emitting effect at the time of winning can be executed, the process ends, assuming that the light-emitting effect at the time of winning based on the look-ahead command received this time will not be executed.

The "period during which the light-emitting effect can be executed when a winning jackpot is not in progress, the normal game state is in effect when a look-ahead command based on a winning jackpot is received at the first starting port 45, and the time-saving game state is in effect when a look-ahead command based on a winning jackpot is received at the second starting port 47.

In step E560-4, the sub-CPU 130a acquires a random number value for determining the winning light-emitting performance pattern to be executed by the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10, and in step E560-5, selects a winning light-emitting performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 47) for determining the winning light-emitting performance pattern. Details of the winning light-emitting performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E560-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines the winning light-emitting performance pattern. Specifically, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the winning light-emitting performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47, and determines one winning light-emitting performance pattern from among multiple winning light-emitting performance patterns based on the type of special symbol, the type of pre-read command (expected change pattern), and the selection rate (%) of each winning light-emitting performance pattern.

In step E560-7, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the determined winning light-emitting effect pattern is a pattern that executes a winning light-emitting effect. If it is a pattern that executes a winning light-emitting effect, the process proceeds to step E560-8. If it is a pattern that does not execute a winning light-emitting effect, the process ends.

In step E560-8, the sub-CPU 130a sets the winning light-emitting effect execution command corresponding to the determined winning light-emitting effect pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends this winning light-emitting effect determination process. This causes the winning light-emitting effect execution command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and the winning light-emitting effect is executed in the effect mode corresponding to the winning light-emitting effect execution command.

(Winning Light Emitting Pattern Determination Table)
FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of a winning light-emitting effect pattern determination table that is referenced when determining a winning light-emitting effect pattern.

The winning light-emitting performance pattern determination table associates the type of special symbol, the type of pre-reading command (planned change pattern), the selection rate (%) of each winning light-emitting performance pattern, and the winning light-emitting performance pattern to be selected, and for reference, the performance format for each winning light-emitting performance pattern is also listed.

The winning light-emitting performance patterns include winning light-emitting performance pattern 00, which does not execute the winning light-emitting performance, and winning light-emitting performance patterns 01 and 02, which execute the winning light-emitting performance. In winning light-emitting performance patterns 01 and 02, the top lamp 10b of the frame lighting device 10 emits white or yellow light and a specified sound effect is output from the audio output device 9.

The first feature of the winning light-emitting effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that a winning light-emitting effect is more likely to be executed with a look-ahead command (planned fluctuation pattern) with a high probability of winning than with a look-ahead command (planned fluctuation pattern) with a low probability of winning. This makes it easier to increase the player's anticipation for the execution of a fluctuation effect with a high probability of winning, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The second feature of the winning light effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that the winning light effect is more likely to be executed in the event of a big win than in the event of a miss. This can heighten the player's anticipation of a big win, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The third feature of the winning light pattern determination table shown in FIG. 47 is that, unlike the icon final display mode shown in FIG. 34, there is no winning light presentation pattern (presentation mode) that guarantees a jackpot (a sure win). By doing this, it is possible to maintain the player's sense of anticipation from the time the game ball enters the starting hole until the result of the variable presentation is derived, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

It is also possible to provide a winning illumination pattern that guarantees a jackpot (for example, the top lamp 10b illuminates in rainbow colors and the audio output device 9 outputs a confirmation sound). In this case, it is advisable to determine the winning illumination pattern that guarantees a jackpot with the lowest probability when a full rotation reach is executed.

(Variable performance pattern determination process of the performance control unit)
The variable performance pattern determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 48. Fig. 48 is a flowchart showing the variable performance pattern determination process in the performance control unit 130m, and this process is executed in the special chart special electric performance process described above.

First, in step E610-1, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the received variable pattern designation command, and in step E610-2, selects a variable presentation pattern determination table (see Figures 49 to 51) that corresponds to the current presentation mode. Details of the variable presentation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E610-3, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the selected variable performance pattern determination table to determine one variable performance pattern from among the multiple variable performance patterns, and sets it in a specified area of the sub-RAM 130c.

In step E610-4, the sub-CPU 130a sets the variable performance pattern instruction command corresponding to the determined variable performance pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and ends this variable performance pattern determination process. This causes the variable performance pattern instruction command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the variable performance.

(Variable performance pattern determination table)
Figure 49 is a diagram showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes A to C which is referenced to determine the variable presentation pattern in presentation modes A to C (normal game state), Figure 50 is a diagram showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation modes D to G (specific game state) which is referenced to determine the variable presentation pattern in presentation modes D to G, and Figure 51 is a diagram showing a variable presentation pattern determination table for presentation mode H (specific game state) which is referenced to determine the variable presentation pattern in presentation mode H.

As shown in Figures 49 to 51, the variable presentation pattern determination table associates the special chart variable presentation pattern designation command, the selection rate (%) of each variable presentation pattern, and the selected variable presentation pattern, and for reference, the presentation configuration for each variable presentation pattern is listed.

"Variation" in the performance configuration column indicates that a normal variation display is executed in which no reach state is formed by the performance pattern 70a.
"Shortened variation" indicates that a shortened variation display is executed that is shorter than the normal variation display and does not result in a reach state.

"Pseudo failure" refers to the execution of a pseudo consecutive failure effect in which the pseudo consecutive effect is not executed after a performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped during the display of a single changing special pattern and then changed again, which indicates whether or not the pseudo consecutive effect will be executed.
"Pseudo success" indicates that after a presentation is performed to hint at whether or not a pseudo consecutive performance will be performed, a pseudo consecutive success performance is performed, which results in the pseudo consecutive performance being performed.
"(Variation → Pseudo Success) x 2" indicates that two sets of effects are performed, one of which is a teasing effect to hint at whether or not a pseudo consecutive performance will be executed, followed by a pseudo consecutive success performance that results in a pseudo consecutive performance.
"(Variation → Pseudo Success) x 3" indicates that three sets of effects are performed, each of which involves a teasing effect to hint at whether or not a pseudo consecutive performance will be performed, followed by a pseudo consecutive success performance that results in a pseudo consecutive performance being performed.

"Change (Episode 1)" indicates that there is a possibility that it will be executed with a change presentation including pseudo-failures and pseudo-successes, and that the first stage presentation (playback of the movie of the first story episode) of a stage presentation (story presentation) in which the presentation can progress in stages will be performed.
"Change (Episode 2)" indicates that there is a possibility that it will be executed with a change presentation including pseudo-failures and pseudo-successes, and that the second stage of the stage presentation (story presentation) in which the presentation can progress in stages (playing a movie of the second story episode following the first episode) will be performed.
"Change (Episode 3)" indicates that there is a possibility that it will be executed with a change presentation including pseudo-failures and pseudo-successes, and that the third stage of the stage presentation (story presentation) in which the presentation can progress in stages (playing a movie of the third story episode following Episode 2) will be performed.

"N Reach" indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach presentation is executed.
"N "7"Reach" indicates that the above-mentioned normal reach effect is executed when a reach state is formed by the "7" effect pattern 70a.
"SP Reach" indicates that the above-mentioned SP Reach performance is executed.
"Special SP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned special SP reach performance is executed.
"SPSP reach" indicates that the above-mentioned SPSP reach performance is executed.
The "full rotation reach" indicates that the full rotation reach presentation described above is executed.

"SP Development" indicates that a development effect is executed which suggests that an SP reach effect will be executed.
"SPSP Development" indicates that a development effect is executed, which suggests that an SPSP reach effect will be executed.
"Full rotation development" indicates that a development performance is executed that suggests that a full rotation reach will be executed.

"CI" indicates that one of a number of cut-in effects with different odds of winning will be executed depending on whether the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period or the valid period has elapsed.
"Decision" indicates that a decision effect indicating whether or not a jackpot game will be played is executed depending on the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period or the lapse of the valid period.
"Failure" indicates that a failed decision effect is executed as a result of the decision effect, which suggests that a big win game will not be executed.
"Success" indicates that a successful winning effect is executed as a result of the winning effect, which suggests that a big win game will be executed.

"Miss" refers to the formation of a losing result (a losing display pattern such as "358" or "948" that is different from the initial result described below) by the performance pattern 70a consisting of only numbers and no characters, and then temporarily stopping.
"C pattern miss" indicates that the display pattern 70a including a character forms a missing result (a missing display pattern such as "358" or "948" that is different from the initial result described below) and temporarily stops.
"IC" indicates that an eye-catching effect is executed in which an eye-catching image suggesting that the effect pattern 70a will stop being displayed is displayed on the image display device.
The "pattern matching" refers to a temporary stop of a jackpot result (a jackpot display pattern such as "222" or "777") formed by a performance pattern 70a consisting of numbers only and no characters.
The "c pattern alignment" indicates that a jackpot result (a jackpot display pattern such as "222" or "777") is formed and temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a in a display pattern including a character.

"Re-draw" refers to the execution of a re-draw effect in which a promotion success effect that results in a favorable jackpot outcome is performed or a promotion failure effect that does not result in a favorable jackpot outcome is performed after inducing whether the performance pattern 70a that has been provisionally stopped at the jackpot outcome (jackpot display mode) will be a favorable jackpot outcome for the player (whether it will change from an even performance pattern that results in a normal jackpot to an odd performance pattern that results in a special jackpot outcome, or a "7" performance pattern that results in the most favorable jackpot game).

"Strong vibration for 4 seconds" indicates that a strong vibration effect (a vibration effect that guarantees a big win) will be executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 will vibrate strongly for 4 seconds.
"Strong vibration for 1 second" indicates that a strong vibration effect (a big win confirmation vibration effect) will be executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 will vibrate strongly for one second.

"Special pattern change (continuation of end notification display)" indicates that the end notification display executed during the final change display in the special time-saving game state described below is continued, but the change display of the display pattern 70a is not executed, and only the change display of the special pattern TZ is performed.
The "revival effect" refers to a revival effect that appears to end the special time-saving game state, but notifies the player that a jackpot has been won.
The "special pattern alignment" refers to the special pattern TZ forming a jackpot result (a jackpot display pattern such as "222" or "777") and stopping to be displayed when the performance pattern 70a is not displayed.

The "chance effect" indicates that the above-mentioned chance effect (an effect in which a text image of "chance approaching" is displayed on the first image display device 70) is performed.
"Winning effect (strong downward movement of the reel)" indicates that a jackpot winning effect (in which the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position and the success effect image SEF is displayed) is performed, suggesting that a jackpot has been won.

"Result display" indicates that the above-mentioned result display will be performed.
"Revival effect (strong downward movement of the device)" refers to the execution of a revival effect (in which the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position and the success effect image SEF is displayed) that appears to end the normal time-saving play state but notifies the player of a jackpot.

"Fluctuation (short entry effect)" indicates that when this is the first change to the special time-saving game state, the above-mentioned short entry effect is performed, and when this is not the first change to the special time-saving game state, the above-mentioned short entry effect is not performed.
"Change + long entry effect" indicates that the above-mentioned long entry effect is performed upon the first change of the special time-saving game state.

"Instant win success" indicates that a presentation is performed in which the player is notified of a favorable result (jackpot) without going through a reach stage.
"Instant win success (strong downward movement of the reel)" indicates that an effect is performed in which the player is notified of a favorable result (jackpot) without going through a reach (an effect in which the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position and the success effect image SEF is displayed).

"End notification effect (door closed)" indicates that the above-mentioned end notification effect (an effect in which the door image closes and a text image is displayed notifying the end of the special time-saving play state) will be performed.

The first feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 49 to 51 is that when an SP reach presentation or an SPSP reach presentation is executed, an eye-catching presentation is executed that suggests that the presentation pattern 70a will stop and the presentation pattern 70a returns to a display state including the character. This makes it less likely that the player will feel uncomfortable about the change in the display state of the presentation pattern 70a, and it is possible to suggest in advance that the presentation pattern 70a will stop, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 49 to 51 is that, in the case of a jackpot, there are variable presentation patterns in which a successful winning presentation is executed and the symbols line up, and variable presentation patterns in which a successful winning presentation is executed after the symbols line up. This makes it possible to enhance the presentation effect in the case of a jackpot, and to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 49 to 51 is that in a variable presentation pattern that results in a jackpot, when a presentation pattern 70a that does not include a character is aligned, a strong vibration presentation (a jackpot confirmation vibration presentation) is executed in which the presentation button 17 is strongly vibrated for four seconds. This makes it possible to effectively present a jackpot, which increases the excitement of the game.

The fourth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 49 to 51 is that when the presentation pattern 70a including the character is aligned (pattern c), a strong vibration presentation (big win confirmation vibration presentation) is executed in which the presentation button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second. This makes it possible to effectively present the big win, which increases the excitement of the game.

The fifth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 49 to 51 is that the rate at which reach presentations (normal reach presentations, SP reach presentations, SPSP reach presentations) are produced with even presentation patterns 70a (presentations that result in a normal jackpot when the presentation is a jackpot) is higher than the rate at which reach presentations (normal reach presentations, SP reach presentations, SPSP reach presentations) are produced with odd presentation patterns 70a other than "7" (presentations that result in a jackpot when the presentation is a jackpot). This effectively stirs up the player's joy when a jackpot is produced with odd presentation patterns 70a other than "7", making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

The sixth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 49 to 51 is that the rate at which reach presentations (normal reach presentations, SP reach presentations, SPSP reach presentations) are performed with a "7" presentation pattern 70a (a presentation pattern that results in the most favorable guaranteed jackpot when it becomes a jackpot) is lower than the rate at which reach presentations are performed with an even presentation pattern 70a (a presentation pattern that results in a normal jackpot when it becomes a jackpot). This effectively stirs up the player's joy when a jackpot is achieved with the "7" presentation pattern 70a, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

The seventh feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 49 to 51 is that the rate at which reach effects (normal reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects) are produced with the "7" presentation pattern 70a (the presentation pattern that results in the most favorable probability jackpot when it becomes a jackpot) is lower than the rate at which reach effects (normal reach effects, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects) are produced with odd presentation patterns 70a other than "7" (presentation patterns that result in a probability jackpot when it becomes a jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to effectively stir up the joy of the player when a jackpot is produced with the "7" presentation pattern 70a, and to increase the excitement of the game.

The eighth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 49 to 51 is that the expectation of a big win is higher when the reach performance is executed with the "7" presentation pattern 70a than when the reach performance is executed with an even presentation pattern 70a or an odd presentation pattern 70a other than "7". This increases the player's sense of expectation as to which type of presentation pattern will result in the reach performance, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 49 to 51 is that presentation modes D to G (specific game states) are more likely to execute a reach presentation (SPSP reach presentation) with the presentation pattern 70a of "7" (the presentation pattern that results in the most favorable probability jackpot when it becomes a jackpot outcome) when the most favorable probability jackpot is reached in the most favorable probability jackpot in presentation modes D to G (specific game states) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states). Therefore, the presentation effect in presentation modes D to G (specific game states) can be improved, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The tenth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 49 to 51 is that in presentation modes A to C (normal game state), even if a reach effect is executed with the presentation pattern 70a of "7", a jackpot is not confirmed, but in presentation modes D to G (specific game state), if a reach effect is executed with the presentation pattern 70a of "7", a jackpot is confirmed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the presentation effect in presentation modes D to G (specific game state), and to increase the interest in the game.

The eleventh feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 49 to 51 is that the same variable presentation pattern is more likely to be executed when the first special symbol's miss variable presentation (miss first variable presentation) is executed in the special time-saving game state than when the first special symbol's miss variable presentation (miss first variable presentation) is executed in the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to vary the presentation effect when the first special symbol's miss variable presentation (first variable presentation) is executed depending on the game state, and it is possible to encourage the player to win the game ball into the second starting hole 47 in the special time-saving game state, thereby making the game more interesting.

The twelfth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 49 to 51 is that the same variable presentation pattern is more likely to be executed when the first special symbol's miss variable display (miss first variable presentation) is executed in the special time-saving play state than when the second special symbol's miss variable display (miss second variable presentation) is executed in the normal time-saving play state. Therefore, the presentation effect can be made to differ depending on the play state and the type of special symbol, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The thirteenth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 49 to 51 is that when the miss variable display of the second special symbol (miss second variable presentation) is executed in the special time-saving play state and when the miss variable display of the first special symbol (miss first variable presentation) is executed in the special time-saving play state, the execution rate of the variable presentation in which a premonition presentation (reach teasing presentation) suggesting the possibility of a reach presentation being executed but no reach presentation is executed is different (the execution rate is higher when the miss first variable presentation of the second special symbol is executed in the special time-saving play state). Therefore, the presentation effect of whether or not a reach is executed can be made different depending on the play state and the type of special symbol, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The execution rate of a variation effect in which a premonition effect (reach nudging effect) suggesting the possibility of a reach effect being executed but no reach effect is executed is higher when a miss variation display of the second special symbol (miss second variation effect) is executed in the special time-saving play state than when a miss variation display of the first special symbol (miss first variation effect) is executed in the special time-saving play state, but the opposite may also be true. In this case, the execution rate of the miss first variation effect may be higher after a variation effect in which a reach nudging effect is executed but no reach effect is executed is executed in both cases when a miss first variation effect is executed and when a miss second variation effect is executed in the special time-saving play state.

The fourteenth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 49 to 51 is that the execution rate of the miss variable presentation, in which a premonition presentation (reach teasing presentation) that suggests the possibility of a reach presentation being executed is executed but no reach presentation is executed, is different between the first period in the normal game state (during the consumption period of the remaining second reserved after the time-saving game state ends) and the second period different from the first period (after the consumption period of the remaining second reserved after the time-saving game state ends). Therefore, even in the normal game state, the presentation effect of whether or not a reach is executed can be made different, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fifteenth feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 49 to 51 is that the execution rate of the variable presentation in which a premonition presentation (reach teasing presentation) suggesting the possibility of a reach presentation being executed is executed but a reach presentation is not executed is different between the case where a miss variable presentation of the second special symbol (miss second variable presentation) is executed in the normal time-saving play state and the case where a miss variable presentation of the first special symbol (miss first variable presentation) is executed in the special time-saving play state. Therefore, the presentation effect of whether or not a reach is executed can be made different depending on the play state and the type of special symbol, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The 16th feature of the variable presentation pattern determination table shown in Figures 49 to 51 is that it is possible to execute a stage presentation (story presentation) that can progress step by step in the variable presentation in which the pseudo consecutive presentation is executed, and while it is possible to execute the second stage presentation of the stage presentation (playback of the movie of the second story episode) after the execution of a normal reach presentation with low expectations, it is not possible to execute the second stage presentation (playback of the movie of the second story episode) after the execution of an SP/SPSP reach presentation with high expectations. Therefore, by varying whether or not the stage presentation progresses depending on the type of reach presentation, it is possible to improve the presentation effect and increase the interest of the game.

Note that, although a reach effect is always executed in a variable performance pattern in which a pseudo consecutive performance is executed, a variable performance pattern in which a reach effect is not executed even if a pseudo consecutive performance is executed may be set.

In addition, if the reel stops provisionally on a losing number after a cut-in or failed-to-win effect, a loss is confirmed, but a revival effect may be executed after a cut-in or failed-to-win effect to confirm a big win.

In addition, when the first special symbol variable display (first variable effect) is executed in the special time-saving game state, a premonition effect (reach teasing effect) that suggests the possibility of a reach effect being executed is executed, but a variable effect that does not result in a reach effect is not executed, but it may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to execute it at a lower rate than when the second special symbol variable display (second variable effect) is executed in the normal game state or normal time-saving game state.

(Timer performance decision process in the performance control unit)
The timer performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 52. Fig. 52 is a flowchart showing the timer performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m, and this process is executed after the variable performance pattern determination process (the process of determining the variable performance pattern based on the special chart variable pattern designation command) in the special chart special line performance process described above.

In step E620-1, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the current variable presentation pattern, and in step E620-2, determines whether or not a reach presentation (including chance presentation) or higher (SP reach presentation, SPSP reach presentation, full rotation reach presentation, special SP reach, chance presentation) will be executed. If a reach presentation or higher is executed, the process moves to step E620-3, and if a SP reach presentation or higher is not executed, the current timer presentation decision process ends.

In step E620-3, the sub-CPU 130a uses the event timer count determination table (see FIG. 53) to determine the number of event timer effects to be executed during the current variable effect ("0 times" to "2 times"). Specifically, the event timer count determination table is collated with the jackpot lottery results, the variable effect pattern, and the like. Details of the event timer count determination table will be described later.

The event timer effect is an effect that indicates the occurrence of one of several suggestive events (excluding icon changes) that raises the expectation of a jackpot game being played during the execution of the variable effect, and also indicates the timing at which the suggestive event will occur. However, it is difficult for the player to determine the type of suggestive event at the time the event timer effect is executed, but the type of suggestive event can be determined at the time the suggestive event occurs.

Suggested events include normal reach effects, pseudo consecutive hits, SP reach effects, SPSP reach effects, full rotation reach effects, special SP reaches, valid periods, and jackpot symbol stops.

In step E620-4, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the determined number of times for the event timer performance is such that an event timer performance will be executed. If the event timer performance is to be executed (the number of times for the event timer performance is "1 time" or "2 times"), the process proceeds to step E620-5, and if the event timer performance is not to be executed (the number of times for the event timer performance is "0 times"), the current timer performance determination process ends.

In step E620-5, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the determined number of times for the event timer effect is 1. If it is 1, the process proceeds to step E620-6, and if it is 2 instead of 1, the process proceeds to step E620-9.

In step E620-6, the sub-CPU 130a uses the suggested event determination table for one timer (see FIG. 54) to determine the suggested event to be suggested by the event timer presentation and the timer type classified according to the type and length of the timer. Specifically, the suggestive event determination table for one timer is compared with the variable presentation pattern, etc. Details of the suggested event determination table for one timer will be described later.

Timer types include short timers, which are a classification of short timer times, middle timers, which are a classification of longer timer times, and long timers, which are a classification of long timer times. Note that the timer times set by the three timer types are short timers < middle timers < long timers.

In step E620-7, the sub-CPU 130a uses the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 56) to determine the timer update pattern (presentation mode) for the event timer presentation. Specifically, the update pattern determination table is collated with the timer type, the jackpot lottery result, etc. Details of the update pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E620-8, the sub-CPU 130a sets the suggested event and the timer performance pattern command indicating the update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and ends this timer performance decision process. This causes the timer performance pattern command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the event timer performance during the variable performance.

In step E620-9, the sub-CPU 130a uses the first suggestive event determination table for two timers (see FIG. 55(a)) to determine the suggestive event suggested by the first event timer presentation, and the timer type classified according to the type and length of the timer. Specifically, the first suggestive event determination table for two timers is compared with the variable presentation pattern, etc. Details of the first suggestive event determination table for two timers will be described later.

In step E620-10, the sub-CPU 130a uses the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 56) to determine the timer update pattern (presentation mode) for the first event timer presentation. Specifically, the update pattern determination table is collated with the timer type, the jackpot lottery result, etc. Details of the update pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E620-11, the sub-CPU 130a sets the suggested event and a timer effect designation command indicating the update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c. This causes the timer effect designation command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the first event timer effect during the variable effect.

In step E620-12, the sub-CPU 130a uses the second suggestive event determination table for two timers (see FIG. 55(b)) to determine the suggestive event suggested by the second event timer presentation, and the timer type classified according to the timer length. Specifically, the variable presentation pattern, etc. is compared with the second suggestive event determination table for two timers. Details of the second suggestive event determination table for two timers will be described later.

In step E620-13, the sub-CPU 130a uses the update pattern determination table (see FIG. 56) to determine the timer update pattern (presentation mode) for the second event timer presentation. Specifically, the update pattern determination table is checked against the timer type, jackpot determination result, etc. Details of the update pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E620-14, the sub-CPU 130a sets the suggested event and the timer performance pattern command indicating the update pattern in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 120c, and ends this timer performance decision process. This causes the timer performance designation command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and processing is performed to execute the second event timer performance during the variable performance.

(Event timer count determination table)
53 is a diagram showing an event timer count determination table that is referenced when determining the number of times the event timer effects are executed during a variable effect. The event timer count determination table associates the jackpot determination result, the variable effect pattern, the allocation ratio (%) for each number of times of each event timer effect in the normal setting and the simple setting by effect customization, and the number of times of the event timer effects to be determined.

There are three options for the number of times the event timer effect will be performed: "0 times", which means the event timer effect will not be performed; "1 time", which means the event timer effect will be performed once; and "2 times", which means the event timer effect will be performed twice.

In addition, the "(Special 1)" written in the variable presentation pattern column means that it is a variable presentation pattern related to the first variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern, and the "(Special 2)" means that it is a variable presentation pattern related to the second variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern.

In addition, the ratio at which each number of times the event timer performance is executed (1 time, 2 times) is selected in the simple setting is set to 1/2 of the ratio at which each number of times the event timer performance is executed (1 time, 2 times) is selected, but it may be more or less than 1/2.

The first feature of the event timer count determination table shown in FIG. 53 is that the event timer effect is more likely to be executed when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot than when it is a miss, and the event timer effect is more likely to be executed when a reach effect with a high jackpot expectation is executed than when a reach effect with a low jackpot expectation is executed. This makes it possible to build up the player's anticipation for the execution of a jackpot game, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The second feature of the event timer count determination table shown in FIG. 53 is that the number of times the event timer effect is executed is more likely to be greater when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot than when the jackpot determination result is a miss. This makes it possible to attract the player's interest in the number of times the event timer effect is executed, thereby making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The third feature of the event timer count determination table shown in FIG. 53 is that the number of times the event timer effect is executed is more likely to be greater when a reach effect with a high probability of winning a jackpot is executed than when a reach effect with a low probability of winning a jackpot is executed. This makes it possible to build up the player's anticipation for the execution of a jackpot game, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The fourth feature of the event timer count determination table shown in Figure 53 is that the execution rate of the timer effect changes depending on the effect customization setting (normal setting, simple setting) made by the player. In this way, the effect balance can be set to suit the player's preferences, making the game more interesting.

In addition, in presentation modes A to C, when the second variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the special SP reach presentation pattern, the timer presentation is executed, but the timer presentation may not be executed (it may be limited). In this case, when the second variable presentation (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed during presentation modes A to C, and when the first variable presentation (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed during presentation modes D to H, the timer presentation will not be executed.

(Suggested event decision table for one timer)
54 is a diagram showing a suggestive event determination table for one timer, which is referenced when determining a suggested event and a timer type when an event timer effect is executed once during a variable effect. The suggestive event determination table for one timer corresponds to a variable effect pattern, an allocation ratio (%) for each suggested event, a suggested event to be determined, and a timer type.

There are eight types of suggested events: normal reach, pseudo consecutive, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect, special SP reach, valid period, and jackpot symbol stop.

There are three types of timers: short timers, which are a category of short timer times; middle timers, which are a category of longer timer times; and long timers, which are a category of long timer times. The timer times set by the three timer types are short timers < middle timers < long timers.

The first feature of the suggestive event determination table for one timer shown in Figure 54 is that the type of suggestive event is set to differ depending on the variable presentation pattern. This can increase the variety of timer presentations, preventing players from getting bored and increasing their interest in the game.

The second feature of the suggestive event determination table for one timer shown in FIG. 54 is that the higher the expectation of a jackpot for a variable presentation pattern, the more likely it is that a timer type for which a long timer time will be set is determined (the higher the expectation of a jackpot, the more likely it is that a long timer will be determined as the timer type). In this way, the longer the timer time in the timer presentation, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, so the player will have expectations regarding the length of the timer time, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

(Suggested event decision table for two timers)
55 is a diagram showing a suggested event determination table for two timers, which is referenced when determining a suggested event and a timer type when an event timer effect is executed twice during a variable effect. In the suggested event determination table for two timers, a variable effect pattern, an allocation ratio (%) for each suggested event, a determined suggested event, and a timer type are associated with each other.

Note that FIG. 55(a) shows a first suggestion event determination table for a timer that counts two times to determine the type of the first suggestion event and the type of timer type, and FIG. 55(b) shows a second suggestion event determination table for a timer that counts two times to determine the type of the second suggestion event and the type of timer type.

There are seven types of suggested events: normal reach, pseudo consecutive, SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, valid period, full rotation reach effect, and jackpot symbol stop.

There are three types of timers: short timers, which are a category of short timer times; middle timers, which are a category of longer timer times; and long timers, which are a category of long timer times. The timer times set by the three timer types are short timers < middle timers < long timers.

The first feature of the suggestive event determination table for two timers shown in Figure 55 is that the type of suggestive event is set to differ depending on the variable presentation pattern. This can increase the variety of timer presentations, preventing players from getting bored and increasing their interest in the game.

A second feature of the suggestive event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. 55 is that, for the two event timer effects that are executed during a variable effect, both an event that is executed early in the variable effect and an event that is executed late in the variable effect are likely to be determined as suggestive events. In this way, it is possible to increase the player's sense of anticipation for a long period of time, and to increase the interest of the game.

A third feature of the suggestive event determination table for two timers shown in FIG. 55 is that the higher the expectation of a jackpot for a variable presentation pattern, the more likely it is that a timer type for which a long timer time will be set is determined (the higher the expectation of a jackpot, the more likely it is that a long timer will be determined as the timer type). In this way, the longer the timer time in the timer presentation, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, so the player will have expectations regarding the length of the timer time, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

(Update Pattern Decision Table)
56 is a diagram showing an update pattern determination table that is referred to when determining a timer update pattern (performance mode). In the update pattern determination table, the timer type, the big win determination result, the allocation ratio (%) for each update pattern, and the update pattern to be determined are associated with each other, and for reference, the timer time for each update pattern, the timer display mode, the timer display position, and the possibility of executing a standby display that indicates that execution of the timer performance is standby are described.

The "normal pattern" is a normal update pattern in which the timer displayed in a predetermined area of the first image display device 70 subtracts one second at a time from the initial number of seconds until it reaches zero seconds.
The "special pattern" is a special update pattern in which a timer displayed in a specified area of the first image display device 70 subtracts one from the initial number of seconds until it reaches 0 seconds, and then the timer (number of seconds) is rewound and subtracts one again until it reaches 0 seconds.

The probability of expecting a big win for each update pattern corresponding to the short timer is normal pattern 1<normal pattern 2<normal pattern 3.
The probability of expecting a big win for each update pattern corresponding to the middle timer is normal pattern 11<normal pattern 12<normal pattern 13.
The probability of winning for each update pattern corresponding to the long timer is normal pattern 21<normal pattern 22<normal pattern 23<normal pattern 24<normal pattern 25<special pattern 1<normal pattern 26<normal pattern 27<special pattern 2<normal pattern 28.

Thus, the timer effect has multiple timer times (update patterns) set, but the timer effect counts down to 0 seconds to indicate that a specific event (icon change effect, various reach effects, zone effects, count-up effects, the effective period of the effect button 17, the stopped display of a jackpot pattern, etc.) will occur, and is an effect that suggests the timing at which a specific event will occur, so regardless of the timer time (update pattern), the count value will count up to the final point (0 seconds in this embodiment).

The first feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 56 is that, regardless of the timer type, an update pattern with a longer timer time is more likely to be determined when the jackpot lottery result is a jackpot than when it is a miss. By doing this, the longer the timer time in the timer presentation, the higher the expectation of a jackpot, so the player will have expectations regarding the length of the timer time, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The second feature of the update pattern determination table shown in FIG. 56 is that even if the timer time is the same, the probability of winning a jackpot varies depending on the display mode (text color) of the timer. This makes it possible to heighten the player's expectations regarding the display mode of the timer, thereby making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game. Specifically, the probability of winning a jackpot according to the display mode (text color) of the timer is white < blue < red < rainbow (guaranteed jackpot).

(Jackpot notice performance determination process of the performance control unit)
The big win notice performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be described with reference to Fig. 57. Fig. 57 is a flowchart showing the big win notice performance determination process in the performance control unit 130m, and this process is executed after the variable performance pattern determination process (the process of determining the variable performance pattern based on the special chart variable pattern designation command) in the special chart special electric performance process described above.

In step E650-1, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the variation presentation pattern to be executed in the current variation presentation, and in step E650-2, selects a variation start feature prediction determination table (see Figures 58 and 59) for determining a feature prediction pattern that makes the player expect a big win game to be executed at the start of the variation, and determines the feature prediction pattern. Details of the variation start feature prediction determination table will be described later.

The "start of fluctuation feature preview effect" is a type of jackpot preview effect in which the feature (first movable member 73) is operated in a manner that corresponds to the likelihood of a jackpot at the start of the fluctuation feature.

In step E650-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the preview pattern of the start-of-variation role preview performance is one that will execute a start-of-variation role preview performance. If it is not one that will execute a start-of-variation role preview performance, the process moves to step E650-5. If it is one that will execute a start-of-variation role preview performance, in step E650-4, a role preview performance command corresponding to the role preview pattern is set in the transmission buffer. This causes the role preview performance command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and a start-of-variation role preview performance corresponding to the role preview pattern is executed at the start of the variation performance.

In step E650-5, the sub-CPU 130a selects a pre-reach notice determination table (see FIG. 60) for determining a notice pattern for a pre-reach notice presentation that makes the player expect that a jackpot game will be played during the presentation period before the reach (high-speed fluctuation period), and determines the notice pattern. Details of the pre-reach notice determination table will be described later.

In step E650-6, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the pre-reach preview pattern is one that executes a dialogue preview. If it is one that executes a dialogue preview, the process proceeds to step E650-7. If it is not one that executes a dialogue preview, the process proceeds to step E650-9.

The "dialogue preview effect" is a type of jackpot preview effect in which an effective period is generated during the fluctuation effect (high-speed fluctuation period), and depending on whether the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period or the effective time has elapsed, a dialogue image suggesting the likelihood of a jackpot is displayed on the image display device, and sound corresponding to the dialogue image is output from the audio output device 9.

In step E650-7, the sub-CPU 130a selects a dialogue preview pattern determination table (see FIG. 62) for determining the dialogue preview pattern of the dialogue preview performance to determine the dialogue preview pattern, and in step E650-8, sets a dialogue preview performance command corresponding to the dialogue preview pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the dialogue preview performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a dialogue preview performance corresponding to the dialogue preview pattern is executed during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). Details of the dialogue preview pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-9, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the pre-reach preview pattern is one that will execute a step-up preview. If it is one that will execute a step-up preview, the process proceeds to step E650-10. If it is not one that will execute a step-up preview, the process proceeds to step E650-12.

The "step-up preview effect" is a type of jackpot preview effect in which step effects are executed in a predetermined order until one of multiple steps from the first step (first stage) to the fifth step (final stage) is reached, without generating an effective period for the effect button 17 during the fluctuation effect (high-speed fluctuation period).

In step E650-10, the sub-CPU 130a selects a step-up preview pattern determination table (see FIG. 63) for determining the step-up preview pattern of the step-up preview performance to determine the step-up preview pattern, and in step E650-11 sets a step-up preview performance command corresponding to the step-up preview pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the step-up preview performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a step-up preview performance corresponding to the step-up preview pattern is executed during the fluctuation performance (high-speed fluctuation period). Details of the dialogue preview pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-12, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern that executes a pseudo consecutive presentation. If it is a variable presentation pattern that executes a pseudo consecutive presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-13. If it is not a variable presentation pattern that does not execute a pseudo consecutive presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-15.

In step E650-13, the sub-CPU 130a selects a pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 64) for determining the pseudo-continuous performance pattern of the pseudo-continuous performance to determine the pseudo-continuous performance pattern, and in step E650-14, sets a pseudo-continuous performance command corresponding to the pseudo-continuous performance pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the pseudo-continuous performance command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and a pseudo-continuous performance corresponding to the pseudo-continuous performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The pseudo-continuous performance pattern determination table will be described in detail later.

In step E650-15, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern that executes a development presentation (SP development presentation, SPSP development presentation, full rotation development presentation). If it is a variable presentation pattern that executes a development presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-16, and if it is not a variable presentation pattern that executes a development presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-18.

In step E650-16, the sub-CPU 130a selects a development performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 65) for determining the development performance pattern of the development performance to determine the development performance pattern, and in step E650-17 sets a development performance command corresponding to the development performance pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the development performance command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a development performance corresponding to the development performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The development performance pattern determination table will be described in detail later.

In step E650-18, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern that executes a reach presentation (post-reach presentation). If it is a variable presentation pattern that executes a reach presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-19, and if it is not a variable presentation pattern that executes a reach presentation, the process for determining the current big win preview presentation ends.

In step E650-19, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variation presentation pattern is a variation presentation pattern that executes a cut-in presentation. If it is a variation presentation pattern that executes a cut-in presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-20, and if it is not a variation presentation pattern that executes a cut-in presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-22.

In step E650-20, the sub-CPU 130a selects a cut-in performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 66) for determining the cut-in performance pattern of the cut-in performance to determine the cut-in performance pattern, and in step E650-21 sets a cut-in performance command corresponding to the cut-in performance pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the cut-in performance command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and a cut-in performance corresponding to the cut-in performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. Details of the cut-in performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-22, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable performance pattern is a variable performance pattern that executes a deciding performance. If it is a variable performance pattern that executes a deciding performance, the process proceeds to step E650-23, and if it is not a variable performance pattern that executes a deciding performance, the process proceeds to step E650-25.

In step E650-23, the sub-CPU 130a selects a final performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 67) for determining the final performance pattern of the final performance to determine the final performance pattern, and in step E650-24 sets a final performance command corresponding to the final performance pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the final performance command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and a final performance corresponding to the final performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. Details of the final performance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E650-25, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern that executes a re-draw presentation. If it is a variable presentation pattern that executes a re-draw presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-26, and if it is not a variable presentation pattern that executes a re-draw presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-28.

In step E650-26, the sub-CPU 130a selects a re-lottery presentation pattern determination table (see FIG. 68) for determining the re-lottery presentation pattern of the re-lottery presentation to determine the re-lottery presentation pattern, and in step E650-27 sets a re-lottery presentation command corresponding to the re-lottery presentation pattern in the transmission buffer. This causes the re-lottery presentation command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150, and a re-lottery presentation corresponding to the re-lottery presentation pattern is executed during the variable presentation. The re-lottery presentation pattern determination table will be described in detail later.

In step E650-28, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern that can execute a fixed presentation (resulting in a jackpot). If the variable presentation pattern is a variable presentation pattern that can execute a fixed presentation, the process proceeds to step E650-29. If the variable presentation pattern is not a variable presentation pattern that can execute a fixed presentation, the process for determining the current jackpot advance presentation ends.

In step E650-29, the sub-CPU 130a selects a confirmed performance pattern determination table (see FIG. 69) for determining the confirmed performance pattern of the confirmed performance to determine the confirmed performance pattern, and in step E650-30, sets a confirmed performance command corresponding to the confirmed performance pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends this big win preview performance determination process. This causes the confirmed performance command to be transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and a confirmed performance corresponding to the confirmed performance pattern is executed during the variable performance. The confirmed performance pattern determination table will be described in detail later.

(Table for determining the start of the fluctuation)
Figure 58 is a diagram showing a start-of-fluctuation feature preview determination table for presentation modes A to C (normal game state) which is referenced when determining the preview pattern of the feature preview performance at the start of fluctuation in presentation modes A to C, and Figure 59 is a diagram showing a start-of-fluctuation feature preview determination table for presentation modes D to H (specific game state) which is referenced when determining the preview pattern of the feature preview performance at the start of fluctuation in presentation modes D to H.

The start-of-change bonus prediction determination table associates the presentation mode, the jackpot determination result, the change presentation pattern, the selection rate (%) of each start-of-change bonus prediction pattern, and the start-of-change bonus prediction pattern to be selected.

The role prediction patterns at the start of the change include no prediction, a rattling action that causes the first movable member 73 to swing up and down from the initial position (standby position) at the start of the change performance, and a weak downward action that causes the first movable member 73 to descend from the initial position to an intermediate position between the initial position and the performance position and then return to the initial position at the start of the change performance.

In addition, the "(Special 1)" written in the variable presentation pattern column means that it is a variable presentation pattern related to the first variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern, and the "(Special 2)" means that it is a variable presentation pattern related to the second variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern.

The first feature of the variation start feature prediction determination table shown in Figures 58 to 59 is that when the second variation effect is executed in presentation modes A to C (normal game state), the weak downward movement is not executed as the variation start feature prediction pattern, that is, the execution of the variation start feature prediction effect is limited. By doing this, in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) where hitting from the left is advantageous for the player, it is possible to promote the execution of the first variation effect that is executed when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the variation start feature prediction determination table shown in Figures 58 to 59 is that in presentation modes A to C (normal game state), when the second variation presentation corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the weak downward movement is not executed as the variation start feature prediction pattern, that is, the execution of the variation start feature prediction presentation is limited. By doing this, in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) where hitting from the left is advantageous for the player, it is possible to promote the execution of the first variation presentation that is executed when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the variation start feature prediction determination table shown in Figures 58 to 59 is that in presentation modes D to G (high probability game state, normal time-saving game state), when the first variation presentation corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the weak downward movement is not executed as the variation start feature prediction pattern, that is, the execution of the variation start feature prediction presentation is limited. By doing this, in presentation modes D to G (high probability game state, normal time-saving game state) where hitting to the right is advantageous for the player, it is possible to promote the execution of the second variation presentation that is executed when the game ball enters the second starting hole 47, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the variation start feature prediction determination table shown in Figures 58 to 59 is that in presentation mode H (special time-saving game state), when the first variation presentation corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, a weak downward movement is not executed as the variation start feature prediction pattern, in other words, the execution of the variation start feature prediction presentation is limited. By doing this, in presentation mode H (special time-saving game state) where hitting to the right is advantageous for the player, it is possible to promote the execution of the second variation presentation that is executed when the game ball enters the second starting hole 47, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in presentation modes A to C (normal gameplay state), when the second variation presentation corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol is executed in the special SP reach presentation pattern, a feature announcement (rattle action) is executed at the start of the variation, but the feature announcement at the start of the variation may not be executed (it may be limited).

In addition, in presentation modes D to G (high probability gameplay state, normal time-saving gameplay state), when the first variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in a chance presentation pattern, a feature announcement (a rattling motion) is executed at the start of the variation, but the feature announcement at the start of the variation may not be executed (it may be limited).

In addition, in presentation mode H (special time-saving game state), when the first variation presentation corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in a special SP reach presentation pattern, or when the first variation presentation corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol is executed in an end suggestion revival presentation pattern, a feature announcement at the start of the variation (a rattling motion) is executed, but the feature announcement at the start of the variation may be configured not to be executed (to be limited).

In addition, in presentation modes D to H (specific game play states), when the first variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the weak descending action of the first movable member 73 is not executed, but the weak descending action of the first movable member 73 may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to execute the weak descending action of the first movable member 73 at a lower rate than when the first variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in presentation modes A to C (normal game play states).

In addition, the feature preview effect at the start of fluctuation was not a customizable effect whose execution rate changes depending on whether the setting is normal or simple, but it may be a customizable effect. In this case, like other customizable effects, it is advisable to make the selection rate (execution rate) of "shaky action" and "weak downward action" in the simple setting lower than the selection rate (execution rate) in the normal setting (for example, 1/2 or 1/3).

(Pre-reach notice decision table)
Figure 60 is a diagram showing a pre-reach notice determination table for presentation modes A to C (normal game state) which is referenced when determining the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice performance in presentation modes A to C (normal game state), and Figure 61 is a diagram showing a pre-reach notice determination table for presentation modes D to H (specific game state) which is referenced when determining the notice pattern of the pre-reach notice performance in presentation modes D to H (specific game state).

As shown in Figures 60 and 61, the pre-reach notice determination table associates the presentation mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable presentation pattern, the selection rate (%) of each notice pattern, and the selected notice pattern.

There are three types of pre-reach preview patterns: "No Preview", where the pre-reach preview effect is not executed; "Dialogue Preview Effect", where a dialogue preview effect is executed; and "Step-up Preview Effect", where a step-up preview effect is executed. The expected probability of a jackpot game being executed (the rate at which the vibration effect associated with the aforementioned pattern matching is executed) is No Preview < Dialogue Preview Effect < Step-up Preview Effect.

In addition, the "(Special 1)" written in the variable presentation pattern column means that it is a variable presentation pattern related to the first variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern, and the "(Special 2)" means that it is a variable presentation pattern related to the second variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern.

The first feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in Figures 60 and 61 is that the pre-reach notice performance is more likely to be executed when the jackpot determination result is a jackpot than when it is a miss, and the pre-reach notice performance is more likely to be executed when a variable presentation pattern with a high jackpot expectation has been determined than when a variable presentation pattern with a low jackpot expectation has been determined. In this way, it is possible to build up the player's anticipation for the execution of a jackpot game, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

A second feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in Figures 60 and 61 is that in presentation modes D to G (specific game states), the pre-reach notice effects (both dialogue notice effects that can execute a vibration effect with the effective period of the presentation button 17, and step-up notice effects that can execute a vibration effect without the effective period of the presentation button 17) are less likely to be executed (the execution rate is lower) in the event of a miss, compared to presentation modes A to C (normal game states). Therefore, in presentation modes D to G (specific game states) where the fluctuation time is likely to be short, unnecessary pre-reach notice effects are less likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

A third feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in Figures 60 and 61 is that, even in the case of a jackpot, pre-reach notice effects are less likely to be executed (the execution rate is lower) in presentation modes D to G (specific game states) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states) when the variable presentation pattern is a pattern that executes a normal reach presentation or a pattern that executes an SP reach presentation. Therefore, in presentation modes D to G (specific game states) where the variable time is likely to be short, unnecessary pre-reach notice effects are less likely to be executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the pre-reach notice determination table shown in Figures 60 and 61 is that the expectation of a jackpot (the rate at which a vibration effect is executed in conjunction with the aforementioned pattern matching, the rate at which a vibration effect is executed in the deciding effect described below, etc.) is higher when a step-up notice effect that does not involve a valid period for the effect button 17 is executed than when a dialogue notice effect that involves a valid period for the effect button 17 is executed. This makes it possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the types of pre-reach notice effects, thereby making the game more enjoyable.

The expectation of a big win (the rate at which the vibration effect associated with the aforementioned matching of symbols is executed, the rate at which the vibration effect associated with the successful decision effect described below is executed, etc.) may be higher when the dialogue preview effect is executed than when the step-up preview effect is executed. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview effect, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in presentation modes A to C (normal gameplay state), when the second variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, a pre-reach warning presentation (dialogue warning presentation) is executed, but the pre-reach warning presentation may not be executed (it may be limited).

In addition, in presentation modes D to G (high probability gameplay state, normal time-saving gameplay state), when the first variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, a pre-reach warning presentation (dialogue warning presentation) is executed, but it is also possible to have the pre-reach warning presentation not executed (restricted).

In addition, in presentation mode H (special time-saving play state), when the first variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, a pre-reach warning presentation (dialogue warning presentation) is executed, but the pre-reach warning presentation may be configured not to be executed (restricted).

In addition, in presentation modes D to H (specific game play states), when the first variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, a step-up notice presentation (a vibration presentation in which an effective period does not occur, such as pattern 5 described below) is not executed, but a step-up notice presentation may be executed. In this case, it is preferable to execute the step-up notice presentation (a vibration presentation in which an effective period does not occur, such as pattern 5 described below) at a lower rate than when the first variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in presentation modes A to C (normal game play states).

Also, while pre-reach preview effects (dialogue preview effects, step-up preview effects) were not customizable effects whose execution rate changed depending on whether the setting was normal or simple, they may be customizable effects. In this case, like other customizable effects, it is advisable to make the selection rate (execution rate) of "dialogue preview effects" and/or "step-up preview effects" in the simple setting lower than the selection rate (execution rate) in the normal setting (for example, 1/2 or 1/3).

(Dialogue preview pattern determination table)
FIG. 62 shows a dialogue preview pattern determination table which is referred to when determining the preview pattern for the dialogue preview performance.

As shown in Figure 62, the dialogue preview pattern determination table associates the presentation mode, jackpot determination result, variable presentation pattern type, selection rate (%) of each dialogue preview pattern, and the selected dialogue preview pattern, and for reference, the presentation configuration of each dialogue preview pattern (valid suggestion presentation, valid period, presentation content) is listed.

The "valid suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of a valid period occurring, and specifically, it is an effect in which multiple semi-transparent effect button images modeled after effect button 17 are displayed and moved on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit, 3 seconds)" indicates that the valid period for the dialogue preview effect ends with one operation of the effect button 17 or the elapse of 3 seconds.

The "promotion effect" in the validity period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the validity period. Specifically, an opaque effect button image that resembles the effect button 17 is displayed in a specific position, and a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge. Note that if the effect button 17 is operated during the validity period, operation sound 1 is output.

In the promotion effect column, "Normal button white" indicates that the opaque effect button image described above will be a button image that mimics the effect button 17 in its normal, non-protruding state, emitting white light.

The "Button Status" in the Validity Period column indicates the status of the effect button 17 during the validity period, and "Normal (White)" in the Button Status column indicates the normal state in which the effect button 17 is not protruding and the effect button 17 glows white, which has a low chance of winning.

"Performance content" indicates the content of the performance that will be executed when the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period, and "Dialogue display period 3 seconds" indicates that the dialogue image will be displayed for 3 seconds.

"Normal dialogue (black)" in the dialogue presentation mode column indicates that normal dialogue that does not suggest the possibility of a jackpot game being played is displayed in black text and that the normal dialogue is output as audio.
"Chance Line (Black)" indicates that a chance line indicating the possibility of a big win game is displayed in black text and the chance line is output as voice.
"Reach dialogue (black)" indicates that a reach dialogue that confirms the execution of a reach effect is displayed in black text and that the reach dialogue is output as voice.
"Reach line (red)" indicates that a reach line that confirms the execution of a reach effect is displayed in red text and that the reach line is output as voice.

"Hot line (red)" indicates that a hot line that indicates a high possibility of a jackpot game being played is displayed in red text and the hot line is output as audio.
"Super Hot Quote (Gold)" indicates that a super hot quote that indicates a very high possibility of winning a jackpot game is displayed in gold letters and the super hot quote is output as voice.
"Determined lines (rainbow)" indicates that the confirmed lines confirming the execution of a jackpot game are displayed in rainbow-colored letters and the confirmed lines are output as voice.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column indicates that a weak vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second from the time the dialogue starts to be displayed (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).
"Strong vibration (1 second)" indicates that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 1 second from the time the dialogue starts to be displayed (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).

The probability of winning for each dialogue effect is: "Normal dialogue" < "Chance dialogue (black)" < "Reach dialogue (black)" < "Reach dialogue (red)" < "Hot dialogue (red)" < "Super hot dialogue (gold)" < "Definite dialogue (rainbow)". Also, the probability of winning for each vibration effect is: "Weak vibration effect" < "Strong vibration effect".

The first feature of the line preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that it is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 when a line with a high probability of winning (a hot line or higher) is displayed. This makes it possible to effectively inform the player that the probability of winning is high, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The second feature of the line preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (higher execution rate) when a line preview effect of a super hot line, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a hot line, is executed than when a line preview effect of a hot line is executed, and the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed when a line preview effect of a hot line is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when the line preview effect is executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a dialogue with a high probability of winning (a hot dialogue or higher) is displayed is relatively short in duration. This makes it possible to execute an effect with a high production effect while suppressing the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly believe that a jackpot game has been played, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that there are two types of vibration intensity for the vibration effect that is executed when a dialogue with a high probability of a jackpot (a hot dialogue or higher) is displayed, depending on the probability of a jackpot. Therefore, the vibration intensity of the vibration effect can indicate the probability of a jackpot, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the dialogue preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 62 is that the vibration period (1 second) of the effect button 17 while the dialogue image is being displayed is shorter than the display period (3 seconds) of the dialogue image. This allows the player to have a sense of expectation before the reach effect is executed, but without making the expectation excessive, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that, although there are weak and strong vibration effects as vibration effects executed in the dialogue preview effect, it is also possible to have only weak vibration effects or only strong vibration effects, or to make the vibration time of the strong vibration effect longer than that of the weak vibration effect.

In addition, the probability of winning a jackpot when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed during the dialogue preview effect is the same in effect modes A to C (normal game state) and effect modes D to G (specific game state), but the probability of winning a jackpot may be made higher in effect modes A to C (normal game state), or the probability of winning a jackpot may be made higher in effect modes D to G (specific game state). In this way, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of effect mode, and it is also possible to increase the player's expectations in effect modes D to G, which are advantageous to the player, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the effective period ends when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective time has elapsed, and the dialogue preview effect is executed, but if the effective period ends when the effective time has elapsed, the dialogue preview effect may not be executed.

In addition, although the dialogue preview performance is executed by generating an effective period, the dialogue preview performance may be executed without generating an effective period, and in that case, the vibration performance executed may be only a weak vibration performance for 1 second or only a strong vibration performance for 1 second.

(Step-up notice pattern determination table)
FIG. 63 shows a step-up preview pattern determination table which is referenced when determining the preview pattern of the step-up preview performance.

As shown in Figure 63, the step-up preview pattern determination table associates the presentation mode, jackpot determination result, variable presentation pattern type, selection rate (%) of each step-up preview pattern, and the selected step-up preview pattern, and for reference, the presentation content of each step-up preview pattern (step-up (SU) presentation mode, button vibration) is also listed.

"1→2" in the step-up performance mode column indicates that the first and second step performances are executed in order.
"1→2→3" indicates that the first to third step performances are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4" indicates that the first to fourth step performances are executed in order.
"1→2→3→4→5" indicates that the first to fifth step performances are executed in order.
"1→2→3→5" indicates that after the first to third step performances are executed in order, the fourth step performance is skipped and the fifth step performance is executed.
In each step-up performance mode, the performance time of the step performance before the final step performance is 1 second, and the performance time of the final step performance is 3 seconds.

"Weak vibration (1 second) at 5" in the button vibration column indicates that a weak vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second from the start of the 5th step effect.

"Button state" indicates the state of the effect button 17 while the step-up preview effect is being performed, and "Normal (off)" in the button state column indicates that the effect button 17 is in the normal state, not protruding, and the effect button 17 is off.

The probability of winning for each step-up performance is "1→2" < "1→2→3" < "1→2→3→4" < "1→2→3→4→5" < "1→2→3→5".

The first feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that when a step effect (fifth step effect) with a high probability of winning is performed, it is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 without generating an effective period for the effect button 17. This makes it possible to effectively inform the player that the probability of winning is high, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The second feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the vibration effect that is executed when the step effect (fifth step effect) with a high probability of winning is displayed is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect with a high performance while suppressing the inconvenience of making the player mistakenly believe that a winning game has been confirmed, and to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the vibration mode (vibration strength, vibration duration) of the vibration effect executed when the step effect (fifth step effect) with a high probability of winning is displayed is only one predetermined type (weak vibration (1 second)). Therefore, in the step-up notice effect where the player does not operate the effect button 17 and therefore it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration effect, it is possible to prevent the effect mode from becoming complicated, making the game more interesting.

The fourth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that in the case of a jackpot, step-up notice effects with a low expectancy are less likely to be executed (the execution rate is lower) in presentation modes D to G (specific game states) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states). This makes it possible to vary the gameplay depending on the type of presentation mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the step-up preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that weak vibration effects are more likely to be executed (higher execution rate) when a jackpot occurs in presentation modes D-G (specific game states) than in presentation modes A-C (normal game states). This allows the gameplay to be varied depending on the type of presentation mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the step-up notice pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the expectation of a big win is higher in presentation modes D to G (specific game states) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states) when a vibration presentation of the presentation button 17 that is not accompanied by an effective period (display of an operation prompting image) is executed in the step-up notice presentation. Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of presentation mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the step-up preview pattern determination table shown in FIG. 63 is that the vibration period (1 second) of the performance button 17 during the execution of the fifth step performance in the step-up preview performance is shorter than the display period (3 seconds) of the fifth step performance. This allows the player to have a sense of expectation before the reach performance is executed, but without making the expectation excessive, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

It is also possible to set the expectation of a big win higher in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) than in presentation modes D to G (specific game state) when a vibration presentation of the presentation button 17 that is not accompanied by an effective period (display of an operation prompting image) is executed in the step-up preview presentation. Even in this case, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of presentation mode, and it is easier to increase the player's expectations in presentation modes D to G that are advantageous to the player, making it possible to increase the fun of the game.

(Pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 64 shows a pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table that is referenced when determining the performance pattern of the pseudo consecutive performance.

As shown in FIG. 64, the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table associates the performance mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of variable performance pattern, the selection rate (%) of each pseudo consecutive performance pattern, and the selected pseudo consecutive performance pattern, and for reference, the performance configuration of each pseudo consecutive performance pattern (valid suggestion performance, valid period, performance content) is listed.

The "valid suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of a valid period occurring, and specifically, it is an effect in which multiple semi-transparent effect button images modeled after effect button 17 are displayed and moved on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit, 3 seconds)" indicates that the valid period in the pseudo consecutive performance ends with one operation of the performance button 17 or the passage of 3 seconds.

The "promotion effect" in the validity period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the validity period. Specifically, an opaque effect button image that resembles the effect button 17 is displayed in a specific position, and a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge. When the effect button 17 is operated during the validity period, operation sound 2, which is different from operation sound 1 described above, is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image will be displayed as a button image that imitates the effect button 17 in its normal state, not protruding and glowing white.
"White protruding button" indicates that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits white light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.

The "Button Status" in the Validity Period column indicates the status of the effect button 17 during the validity period, and "Normal (White)" in the Button Status column indicates the normal status where the effect button 17 is not protruding and the effect button 17 emits a white light which indicates a low chance of winning, and "Protruding (Red)" indicates the protruding status where the effect button 17 protrudes and the effect button 17 emits a red light which indicates a high chance of winning.

"Performance content" refers to the content of the pseudo consecutive performance, and "temporary stop period of pseudo consecutive symbols for 2 seconds" refers to the period during which the pseudo symbols described below are temporarily stopped for 2 seconds.

"Pseudo failure" in the pseudo consecutive performance mode column indicates that a pseudo consecutive failure performance is executed in which the normal performance pattern 70a temporarily stops without the pseudo pattern suggesting the execution of a pseudo consecutive performance as the central performance pattern 70a temporarily stopping, and a failure sound effect is output.
"Pseudo success" indicates that the central performance pattern 70a, which indicates the execution of a pseudo consecutive hit, temporarily stops, a success sound effect is output, and the second movable member 74 weakly moves, thereby executing a pseudo consecutive hit success performance.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column indicates that a weak vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second from the time when the pseudo pattern is temporarily stopped (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).
"Strong vibration (1 second)" indicates that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 1 second from the time when the pseudo pattern is temporarily stopped (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).

The probability of winning for each promotion effect is "normal white button" < "protruding white button." In addition, the probability of winning for each button state is "normal" < "protruding." In addition, the probability of winning for each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect" < "strong vibration effect."

The first feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that when a pseudo consecutive success performance is performed in a variable performance pattern with a high probability of winning, a vibration performance may be executed in which the effective period of the performance button 17 is generated and the performance button 17 is vibrated. This makes it possible to effectively inform the player that the probability of winning is high, thereby increasing the interest of the player in the game.

The second feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the vibration performance executed when the pseudo consecutive success performance is executed in a variable performance pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot is relatively short. Therefore, it is possible to execute a performance with a high performance effect while suppressing the inconvenience of mistaking the execution of the jackpot game for a confirmed game, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that there are two types of vibration intensity of the vibration performance executed when a pseudo consecutive successful performance is performed in a variable performance pattern with a high probability of winning. This means that the vibration intensity of the vibration performance can suggest the probability of winning, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that, although it is possible to execute a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive successful performance) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) in performance modes A to C (normal game state) and performance modes D to G (specific game state), the expectation of a big win is higher when a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive successful performance) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed in performance modes D to G (specific game state) than in performance modes A to C (normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of performance mode, and it is easier to increase the player's expectations in performance modes D to G, which are advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that there are cases where the pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive success performance) is performed using the second movable member 74, and cases where the pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive success performance) is performed using the button vibration motor that vibrates the second movable member 74 and the performance button 17. This makes it possible to enhance the performance effect of the pseudo consecutive performance, and to increase the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the pseudo consecutive performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 64 is that the vibration period (1 second) of the performance button 17 during the temporary stop of the pseudo symbol, which suggests the execution of a pseudo consecutive, is shorter than the temporary stop period (2 seconds) of the pseudo symbol. This allows the player to have a sense of expectation before the SP reach performance or SPSP reach performance is executed, but without making the expectation excessive, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that, in a variable presentation pattern with a high probability of winning, the presentation button 17 may be in a protruding state during the valid period when a pseudo consecutive successful presentation is performed, but it may be configured not to be in a protruding state.

In addition, the vibration effects executed in the pseudo consecutive success effect include weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects, but it is also possible to have only weak vibration effects or only strong vibration effects.

In addition, although a valid period is generated to execute the pseudo consecutive success or failure effect, it is also possible to execute the pseudo consecutive success or failure effect without generating a valid period, and the vibration effect executed in the pseudo consecutive success effect may be only a weak vibration effect for 3 seconds or only a strong vibration effect for 3 seconds, or only a weak vibration effect for 1 second or only a strong vibration effect for 1 second.

In addition, the presentation modes A to C (normal game state) may be set to have a higher chance of winning when a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive successful performance) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed than the presentation modes D to G (specific game state), the presentation modes B or C may be set to have a higher chance of winning when a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive successful performance) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed than the presentation mode A, and the presentation modes D to F may be set to have a higher chance of winning when a pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive successful performance) using the same performance device (performance button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed than the presentation mode G.

In addition, in the pseudo consecutive performance (pseudo consecutive successful performance), the action performance is performed using the second movable member 74, but the action performance may also be performed using the first movable member 73. In this case, it is preferable to make the execution rate of the action performance using the second movable member 74 higher than that using the first movable member 73.

(Development performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 65 shows a development effect pattern determination table which is referenced when determining the development effect pattern.

As shown in Figure 65, the development performance pattern determination table associates the performance mode, the jackpot determination result, the variable performance pattern type, the development performance type for which the development performance pattern is determined, the selection rate (%) of each development performance pattern, and the selected development performance pattern, and for reference, the performance configuration of each development performance pattern (valid suggested performance, valid period, performance content) is listed.

The "valid suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of a valid period occurring, and specifically, it is an effect in which multiple semi-transparent effect button images modeled after effect button 17 are displayed and moved on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"None" in the valid suggestion effect column indicates that a valid suggestion effect will not be executed, "Yes (false)" indicates that a valid suggestion effect will be executed but it is a false valid suggestion effect where no valid period occurs afterwards, and "Yes" indicates that a valid suggestion effect will be executed and then a valid period will occur.

"Valid period (long press for 4 seconds)" indicates that the developing performance progresses gradually by pressing and holding the performance button 17, and that the valid period of the developing performance ends when 4 seconds have elapsed.
The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and specifically, as a result of a number of semi-transparent effect button images gathering at a specific position, an opaque effect button image is displayed at the specific position, and a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge. When the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, an operation sound 3, which is different from the above-mentioned operation sounds 1 and 2, is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image will be displayed as a button image that imitates the effect button 17 in its normal state, not protruding and glowing white.
"Normal button red" indicates that the opaque effect button image described above is a button image that imitates the effect button 17 in its normal state, not protruding and emitting red light.

The "Button Status" in the Validity Period column indicates the status of the effect button 17 during the validity period, and "Normal (White)" in the Button Status column indicates that the effect button 17 is not protruding and is in its normal state, where the effect button 17 lights up in white, which has a low chance of winning, and "Normal (Red)" indicates that the effect button 17 is not protruding and is in its normal state, where the effect button 17 lights up in red, which has a high chance of winning.

"Performance content" indicates the content of the performance related to the development performance, and "Temporary stop period of development pattern 2 seconds" indicates that the period during which the development pattern described below will be temporarily stopped is 2 seconds.

"SP notification" in the development performance mode column indicates that an SP development pattern is displayed indicating development to an SP reach performance as a result of the development performance, and an SP development performance is executed in which the first development sound effect is output.
"SPSP notification" indicates that an SPSP development effect is executed in which an SPSP development pattern is derived and displayed, suggesting development to an SPSP reach effect as a result of the development effect, and a second development sound effect is output.
"Full rotation notification" indicates that a full rotation development pattern is derived and displayed, suggesting development to a full rotation reach performance as a result of the development performance, and a full rotation development performance is executed in which a third development sound effect is output.

"Weak action" in the reel action column indicates that when various patterns are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period), the second movable member 74 emits blue light and a weak action with a small operating range is performed.
"Strong action" indicates that when various patterns are derived and displayed (= at the end of the valid period), the second movable member 74 emits red light and a strong action with a large swing range is performed.

"Weak vibration (1 second)" in the button vibration column indicates that a weak vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 1 second from the time when the various development patterns are derived and displayed (= the end of the valid period).
"Strong vibration (1 second)" indicates that a weak vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 1 second from the time when various patterns are derived and displayed (= the end of the valid period).

The probability of winning for each action is "weak action" < "strong action." Also, the probability of winning for each vibration effect is "weak vibration" < "strong vibration."

In addition, the "(Special 1)" written in the variable presentation pattern column means that it is a variable presentation pattern related to the first variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern, and the "(Special 2)" means that it is a variable presentation pattern related to the second variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern.

The first feature of the development presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that when a variable presentation pattern with a high probability of winning is performed and a development presentation with a high probability of winning (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed, a vibration presentation may be executed in which an effective period of the presentation button 17 is generated and the presentation button 17 is vibrated. This makes it possible to effectively inform the player that the probability of winning is high, thereby increasing the interest of the player in the game.

The second feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (higher execution rate) when a full rotation development effect, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than an SPSP development effect, is executed than when an SPSP development effect is executed, and the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed when an SPSP development effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when an SPSP development effect is executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the development presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that the vibration presentation executed when a development presentation (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) with a high expectation of a jackpot is performed in a variable presentation pattern with a high expectation of a jackpot is performed for a relatively short period of time. Therefore, it is possible to execute a presentation with a high presentation effect while suppressing the inconvenience of mistaking the execution of a jackpot game for one that has been confirmed, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that there are two types of vibration intensity of the vibration effect that is executed when a development effect (SPSP notification, full rotation notification) is performed, which is a variable effect pattern with a high probability of winning, depending on the probability of winning. Therefore, the probability of winning can be indicated by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that, although development effects (such as SPSP development effects) can be executed using the same presentation device (presentation button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) and presentation modes D to G (specific game state), the expectation of a big win is higher when a development effect using a presentation device (presentation button vibration motor, second movable member 74, etc.) is executed in presentation modes D to G (specific game state) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game state). Therefore, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of presentation mode, and it is easier to increase the player's expectations in presentation modes D to G, which are advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The sixth feature of the development effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 65 is that the temporary stop period of the development symbol (2 seconds) is the same as the vibration period of the effect button 17 during the temporary stop of the development symbol (2 seconds), or the ratio of the difference between the temporary stop period of the development symbol (2 seconds) and the vibration period of the effect button 17 (3 seconds) is smaller than that of the pre-reach notice effect. This effectively heightens the player's sense of expectation, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that, although there are weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects as vibration effects executed in the development effects, it is also possible to have only weak vibration effects or only strong vibration effects.

In addition, the expectation of a jackpot may be higher in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) when an advanced presentation (such as an SPSP advanced presentation) using the same presentation device (such as the presentation button vibration motor, the second movable member 74, etc.) is executed than in presentation modes D to G (specific game state), the expectation of a jackpot may be higher in presentation modes B or C when an advanced presentation using the same presentation device (such as the presentation button vibration motor, the second movable member 74, etc.) is executed than in presentation mode A, and the expectation of a jackpot may be higher in presentation modes D to F when an advanced presentation using the same presentation device (such as the presentation button vibration motor, the second movable member 74, etc.) is executed than in presentation mode G.

(Cut-in performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 66 shows a cut-in effect pattern determination table which is referred to when determining the effect pattern of a cut-in effect.

As shown in Figure 66, the cut-in performance pattern determination table associates the performance mode, jackpot determination result, variable performance pattern type, selection rate (%) of each cut-in performance pattern, and the selected cut-in performance pattern, and for reference, the performance configuration of each cut-in performance pattern (valid suggestion performance, valid period, performance content) is listed.

The "valid suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of a valid period occurring, and specifically, it is an effect in which multiple semi-transparent effect button images modeled after effect button 17 are displayed and moved on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit, 4 seconds)" indicates that the valid period for the cut-in effect ends with one operation of the effect button 17 or the passage of 4 seconds.

The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, without executing a valid suggestion effect or as a result of executing a valid suggestion effect, an opaque effect button image is displayed in a specific position, and a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, operation sound 4, which is different from operation sounds 1 to 3 described above, is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image will be displayed as a button image that imitates the effect button 17 in its normal state, not protruding and glowing white.
"Red protruding button" indicates that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.
"Protruding button rainbow" indicates that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.

The "Button Status" in the Validity Period column indicates the status of the effect button 17 during the validity period. "Normal (White)" indicates that the effect button 17 is not protruding, and is in the normal state, where the effect button 17 lights up in white, which indicates a low probability of a jackpot. "Protruding (Red)" indicates that the effect button 17 is protruding, and is in the protruding state, where the effect button 17 lights up in red, which indicates a high probability of a jackpot. "Protruding (Rainbow)" indicates that the effect button 17 is protruding, and is in the protruding state, where the effect button 17 lights up in rainbow colors, which indicates a guaranteed jackpot.

"Performance content" indicates the content of the performance that will be executed when the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period or when the valid period has elapsed, and "Cut-in display period of 3 seconds" indicates that the display period of the cut-in image is 3 seconds.

"Blue cut-in" in the cut-in performance mode column indicates that a blue cut-in performance is executed in which a blue frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and the first cut-in sound effect is output.
"Green cut-in" indicates that a green frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a green cut-in performance is executed in which a second cut-in sound effect is output.
"Red cut-in" indicates that a red frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70 and a red cut-in performance is executed in which a third cut-in sound effect is output.

"Weak vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column indicates that a weak vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for 3 seconds from the time when the cut-in image begins to be displayed (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).
"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" indicates that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 3 seconds from the time when the cut-in image begins to be displayed (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).

The likelihood of winning for each cut-in is "blue cut-in" < "green cut-in" < "red cut-in." Also, the likelihood of winning for each vibration effect is "weak vibration effect" < "strong vibration effect."

In addition, the "(Special 1)" written in the variable presentation pattern column means that it is a variable presentation pattern related to the first variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern, and the "(Special 2)" means that it is a variable presentation pattern related to the second variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern.

The first feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 is that when a cut-in image with a high probability of winning is displayed (a cut-in effect is executed), a vibration effect may be executed in which an effective period of the effect button 17 is generated and the effect button 17 is vibrated. This makes it possible to effectively inform the player that the probability of winning is high, thereby increasing the interest of the player in the game.

The second feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 is that the vibration effect that is executed when a cut-in image with a high probability of winning is displayed (a cut-in effect is executed) lasts for a relatively long time. This makes it possible to effectively inform the player that the probability of winning is high, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The third feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 is that there are two types of vibration intensity for the vibration effect that is executed when a cut-in image with a high probability of winning is displayed (a cut-in effect is executed), depending on the probability of winning. Therefore, the probability of winning can be indicated by the vibration intensity of the vibration effect, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the cut-in effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 66 is that the display period of the cut-in image (3 seconds) is the same as the vibration period of the effect button 17 while the cut-in image is displayed (3 seconds) (the ratio of the difference between the display period of the cut-in image (3 seconds) and the vibration period of the effect button 17 (3 seconds) is smaller than that of the pre-reach preview effect). This effectively heightens the player's sense of anticipation, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Note that, although there are weak vibration effects and strong vibration effects as vibration effects executed during cut-in effects, it is also possible to have only weak vibration effects or only strong vibration effects.

Although the cut-in effect is executed by generating a valid period, the cut-in effect may be executed without generating a valid period, and in that case, the vibration effect executed may be only a weak vibration effect for 3 seconds or only a strong vibration effect for 3 seconds, or only a weak vibration effect for 1 second or only a strong vibration effect for 1 second.

(Decisive performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 67 shows a deciding effect pattern determination table which is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the deciding effect.

As shown in FIG. 67, the deciding effect pattern determination table associates the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each deciding effect pattern, and the deciding effect pattern to be selected, and for reference, the effect configuration of each deciding effect pattern (valid suggestion effect, valid period, effect content) is also listed.

The "valid suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of a valid period occurring, and specifically, it is an effect in which multiple semi-transparent effect button images modeled after effect button 17 are displayed and moved on the first image display device 70, and the button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit, 5 seconds)" indicates that the valid period for the deciding effect ends with one operation of the effect button 17 or the passage of 5 seconds.

The "promotion effect" in the valid period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period. Specifically, without executing a valid suggestion effect or as a result of executing a valid suggestion effect, an opaque effect button image is displayed in a specific position, and a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, operation sound 5, which is different from operation sounds 1 to 4 described above, is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image will be displayed as a button image that imitates the effect button 17 in its normal state, not protruding and glowing white.
"Red protruding button" indicates that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.
"Protruding button rainbow" indicates that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.

The "Button Status" in the Validity Period column indicates the status of the effect button 17 during the validity period. "Normal (White)" indicates that the effect button 17 is not protruding, and is in the normal state, where the effect button 17 lights up in white, which indicates a low chance of winning a jackpot. "Protruding (Red)" indicates that the effect button 17 is protruding, and is in the protruding state, where the effect button 17 lights up in red, which indicates a high chance of winning a jackpot. "Protruding (Rainbow)" indicates that the effect button 17 is protruding, and is in the protruding state, where the effect button 17 lights up in rainbow colors, which indicates a guaranteed jackpot.

"Performance content" indicates the content of the performance that is executed when the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period or when the valid period has elapsed, and "successful decision performance period 11 seconds (6 seconds for performance mode H)" indicates that the execution period for the performance related to the successful decision performance in performance modes other than performance mode H is 11 seconds, and that the execution period for the performance related to the successful decision performance in performance mode H is 6 seconds.

"Fail" in the column for the winning performance mode indicates that the first movable member 73 does not move and the screen of the first image display device 70 turns dark, resulting in a winning failure performance that suggests that a jackpot game will not be played.
"Success" indicates that the first movable member 73 moves to its maximum operating position, emits rainbow light, and a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, thereby executing a decisive success presentation suggesting that a jackpot game will be played.

In the button vibration column, "Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" indicates that the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 will vibrate strongly for 4 seconds from the start of the successful decision effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends), followed by a 1-second interval and then a strong vibration effect (successful decision vibration effect) for 5 seconds.

In the button illumination column, "Rainbow illumination (11 seconds)" indicates that the illumination button LED for illuminating the illumination button 17 will illuminate in a rainbow pattern for 11 seconds (a longer period than the illumination button 17 is vibrating strongly) from the start of the successful selection illumination (= when the illumination button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends).

The probability of winning for each promotion is as follows: "normal white button" < "protruding red button" < "protruding rainbow button." Also, the probability of winning for each button state is "normal" < "protruding."

In addition, the "(Special 1)" written in the variable presentation pattern column means that it is a variable presentation pattern related to the first variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern, and the "(Special 2)" means that it is a variable presentation pattern related to the second variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern.

The first feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67 is that when a deciding success effect is executed, a valid period is generated and a vibration effect is executed in which the effect button 17 is vibrated. This makes it possible to effectively notify the player that a big win game is about to be played, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The second feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67 is that the effective period of the effect button 17 that occurs during a variable effect occurs for the longest period of time. This makes it possible to prevent the player from forgetting to operate the effect button 17, thereby making the game more interesting.

The third feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67 is that the effect button 17 vibrates for the longest period of time as a strong vibration effect that occurs during a variable effect. This effectively heightens the player's sense of elation when a deciding effect is successful, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The fourth feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67 is that the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 lasts for a longer period than the vibration period of the effect button 17. This makes it possible to maintain the player's sense of elation even after the vibration of the effect button 17 has ended, thereby making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The fifth feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 67 is that the ratio of the difference between the execution period of the deciding success effect (11 seconds) and the vibration period of the effect button 17 during the execution of the deciding success effect (9 seconds) is smaller than that of the pre-reach advance notice effect. This effectively heightens the player's sense of expectation, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, in the deciding performance (successful deciding performance), the action performance is performed using the first movable member 73, but the action performance may also be performed using the second movable member 74. In this case, it is preferable to make the execution rate of the action performance using the first movable member 73 higher than that using the second movable member 74.

(Re-selection performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a re-lottery effect pattern determination table which is referred to when determining the effect pattern of the re-lottery effect.

As shown in FIG. 68, the re-draw performance pattern determination table associates the performance mode, the presence or absence of promotion (whether promotion is planned), the selection rate (%) of each re-draw performance pattern, and the re-draw performance pattern to be selected, and for reference, the performance configuration of each re-draw performance pattern (valid suggested performance, valid period, performance content) is also listed.

The "valid suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of a valid period occurring, and specifically, it is an effect in which multiple semi-transparent effect button images modeled after effect button 17 are displayed and moved on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit, 3 seconds)" indicates that the valid period for the re-lottery effect ends when the effect button 17 is operated once or when 3 seconds have elapsed.

The "promotion effect" in the validity period column is an effect that encourages the operation of the effect button 17 during the validity period. Specifically, it is an effect in which an opaque effect button image is displayed in a specific position without executing a validity suggestion effect, and a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the validity period by the length of the gauge. Note that when the effect button 17 is operated during the validity period, operation sound 6, which is different from operation sounds 1 to 5 described above, is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image will be displayed as a button image that imitates the effect button 17 in its normal state, not protruding and glowing white.
"Normal button red" indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image is displayed as a button image that imitates the effect button 17 in its normal state, not protruding and emitting red light.
"Normal button rainbow" indicates that, as the opaque effect button image described above, a button image imitating the effect button 17 in its normal state, not protruding and emitting rainbow light, is displayed.

The "Button Status" in the Validity Period column indicates the status of the effect button 17 during the validity period, and "Normal (White)" in the Button Status column indicates that the effect button 17 is in the normal state where it is not protruding and the effect button 17 lights up in white, which indicates a low promotion expectation. "Normal (Red)" indicates that the effect button 17 is in the normal state where it is not protruding and the effect button 17 lights up in red, which indicates a high promotion expectation. "Normal (Rainbow)" indicates that the effect button 17 is in the normal state where it is not protruding and the effect button 17 lights up in rainbow colors, which indicates a guaranteed promotion.

"Performance content" indicates the content of the performance that is executed when the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period or when the valid period has elapsed, and "promotion success performance period 4 seconds" indicates that the execution period of the promotion success performance is 4 seconds.

The "promotion failure effect" in the column for the re-draw effect mode indicates that a non-promotion pattern that is not advantageous to the player as a result of the re-draw effect (for example, an even number pattern → an even number pattern, an odd number pattern other than "7" → an odd number pattern other than "7") is derived and displayed (temporarily stopped), and a non-promotion sound effect is output.
A "successful promotion effect" refers to the derivative display (temporarily stopped) of a promoted symbol that is advantageous to the player as a result of a re-draw effect (for example, an even number symbol → odd number symbol, or an odd number symbol other than "7" → "7"), and a promotion sound effect is output.

"Strong vibration (3 seconds)" in the button vibration column indicates that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 3 seconds from the time when the promotion symbol is derived and displayed (= the end of the valid period). "Strong vibration (2 seconds)" indicates that a strong vibration effect is executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for 2 seconds from the time when the promotion symbol is derived and displayed (= the end of the valid period).

"Rainbow illumination (4 seconds)" in the button illumination column indicates that the effect button LED for illuminating the effect button 17 will emit rainbow light for 4 seconds (longer than the period during which the effect button 17 is vibrating strongly) from the time when the derived promotion symbol is displayed (= the end of the valid period). "Rainbow illumination (3 seconds)" indicates that the effect button LED for illuminating the effect button 17 will emit rainbow light for 3 seconds (longer than the period during which the effect button 17 is vibrating strongly) from the time when the derived promotion symbol is displayed (= the end of the valid period).

The probability of winning for each promotion is "normal white button" < "normal red button" < "normal rainbow button".

The first feature of the re-draw effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68 is that when a promotion success effect is executed, a valid period is generated and a vibration effect is executed to vibrate the effect button 17. This makes it possible to effectively notify the player that he or she has been promoted to a favorable effect pattern, thereby making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The second feature of the re-draw effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68 is that the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 is performed for a longer period of time than the strong vibration effect. Therefore, the player's sense of elation can be maintained even after the strong vibration effect has ended, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The third feature of the re-draw performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 68 is that the ratio of the difference between the execution period of the promotion success performance (4 seconds or 3 seconds) and the vibration period of the performance button 17 during the execution of the promotion success performance (3 seconds or 2 seconds) is smaller than that of the pre-reach advance notice performance. This effectively heightens the player's sense of expectation, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Note that, although a valid period is generated to execute a re-draw effect (promotion failure effect, promotion success effect), it is also possible to execute a re-draw effect without generating a valid period.

(Determined performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 69 shows a fixed effect pattern determination table which is referred to when determining the effect pattern of a fixed effect.

As shown in FIG. 69, the confirmed presentation pattern determination table associates the jackpot determination result, the variable presentation pattern type, the selection rate (%) of each confirmed presentation pattern, and the confirmed presentation pattern to be selected, and also lists the presentation configuration (execution timing, presentation content) of each confirmed presentation pattern for reference.

A "-" in the execution timing column indicates that the confirmation effect is not executed at that time, and an "o" indicates that the confirmation effect is executed at that time.
The "confirmation sound" in the sound column indicates that a confirmation sound is output to indicate that a big win game has been executed.
"Handle rainbow illumination" in the illumination column indicates that the handle LED for illuminating the launch handle 15 will illuminate in rainbow colors from the time the confirmation sound is output until the fluctuation stops (for more than four seconds until the performance pattern is displayed as having stopped).

In the button vibration column, "Strong vibration (3 seconds)" indicates that a strong vibration effect will be executed in which the button vibration motor for vibrating the effect button 17 will vibrate strongly for 3 seconds from the time the confirmation sound is output.

In addition, the "(Special 1)" written in the variable presentation pattern column means that it is a variable presentation pattern related to the first variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the first special pattern, and the "(Special 2)" means that it is a variable presentation pattern related to the second variable presentation corresponding to the variable display of the second special pattern.

The first feature of the fixed effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 69 is that when a fixed effect is executed, a vibration effect is executed in which the effect button 17 vibrates without generating an effective period. This makes it possible to effectively notify the player that a big win game is about to be played, thereby increasing the interest of the player in the game.

The second feature of the determined effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 69 is that the rainbow light emission of the launch handle 15 occurs for a longer period of time than the strong vibration effect. This makes it possible to maintain the player's sense of elation even after the strong vibration effect has ended, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

(Summary of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69)
34 to 69, the first feature of the various tables is that the expectation of a big win (the rate at which a vibration effect (strong vibration for 4 seconds) is executed in association with a matching pattern, the rate at which a vibration effect (strong vibration for 4 seconds to 5 seconds) is executed in a deciding effect, etc.) is higher when a vibration effect (weak vibration for 1 second) is executed in a step-up preview effect that does not involve a valid period of the effect button 17 than when a vibration effect (weak vibration for 1 second or strong vibration for 1 second) is executed in a dialogue preview effect that involves a valid period of the effect button 17. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the types of pre-reach preview effects, and to improve the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the expectation of a big win (the rate at which the vibration effect (strong vibration for 4 seconds) associated with the aforementioned pattern matching is executed, the rate at which the vibration effect (strong vibration for 4 seconds to 5 seconds) is executed in the deciding effect described below, etc.) may be higher when a vibration effect (weak vibration for 1 second or strong vibration for 1 second) is executed in a dialogue preview effect that involves the effective period of the effect button 17 than when a vibration effect (weak vibration for 1 second) is executed in a step-up preview effect that does not involve the effective period of the effect button 17. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the type of pre-reach preview effect, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The second feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 is that the vibration effects executed as the big win notice effects include a first vibration effect with a relatively short vibration period (vibration effects (1 second) during a dialogue notice effect, step-up notice effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, etc.), and a second vibration effect with a longer vibration period (effect period) than the first vibration effect (vibration effects longer than 1 second during a cut-in effect, successful decision effect, confirmation effect, etc. (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds to 5 seconds)). In a variable effect in which the first effect period (pre-reach effect) is followed by a second effect period (normal reach effect) or a third effect period (SP/SPSP reach effect), the first vibration effect is more likely to be executed (higher execution rate) during the first effect period than during the second effect period. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's sense of expectation without mistaking that it is a big win, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The look-ahead vibration effect is also a first vibration effect with a relatively short vibration period, but even when the look-ahead vibration effect is included, in a variable effect in which the first effect period (pre-reach effect) is followed by a second effect period (normal reach effect) or a third effect period (SP/SPSP reach effect), the first vibration effect is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) in the first effect period than in the second effect period. This makes it possible to heighten the player's sense of expectation without misleading them into thinking that they have won the jackpot, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

A third feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 is that in a variable presentation in which there is a third presentation period (SP/SPSP reach presentation) followed by a second presentation period (normal reach presentation) following a first presentation period (pre-reach presentation), the first vibration presentation (vibration presentation (1 second) during dialogue preview presentation, step-up preview presentation, pseudo consecutive presentation, development presentation, etc.) is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) during the first presentation period than during the third presentation period. This makes it possible to heighten expectations without misleading the player into thinking that they have won a jackpot, making it possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

The fourth feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 is that the vibration effects executed as the big win notice effects include a first vibration effect with a short vibration period (a vibration effect (1 second) during a dialogue notice effect, a step-up notice effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, etc.) and a second vibration effect with a longer vibration period than the first vibration effect (a vibration effect longer than 1 second during a cut-in effect, a successful decision effect, a confirmed effect, etc. (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds to 5 seconds)). In a variable effect in which the first effect period (pre-reach effect) is followed by a second effect period (normal reach effect) or a third effect period (SP/SPSP reach effect), the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) during the second effect period than during the first effect period. This makes it possible to effectively increase the player's sense of expectation and improve the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 is that in a variable presentation in which there is a third presentation period (SP/SPSP reach presentation) followed by a second presentation period (normal reach presentation) following a first presentation period (pre-reach presentation), the second vibration presentation (a vibration presentation longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds -> 5 seconds) during a cut-in presentation, a successful decision presentation, a confirmed presentation, etc.) is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) during the third presentation period than during the first presentation period. This makes it possible to effectively heighten the player's sense of expectation and improve the enjoyment of the game.

The sixth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 is that during the first performance period (pre-reach performance), the percentage of times the first vibration performance (1 second) is executed with the performance button 17 in the normal state is higher than the percentage of times the first vibration performance is executed with the performance button 17 in the protruding state. This prevents the player's expectations from being excessively aroused during the first performance period, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The seventh feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 is that during the third presentation period (during the SP/SPSP reach presentation), the percentage of times the presentation button 17 is in the protruding state and the second vibration presentation (3 seconds or more) is executed is higher than the percentage of times the presentation button 17 is in the normal state and the second vibration presentation is executed. This prevents the player's expectations from being excessively aroused during the first presentation period, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The eighth feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 is that the vibration effects executed as the big win notice effects include a first vibration effect with a short vibration period (vibration effects (1 second) during a dialogue notice effect, a step-up notice effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, etc.) and a second vibration effect with a longer vibration period (effect period) than the first vibration effect (vibration effects longer than 1 second during a cut-in effect, a successful decision effect, a confirmed effect, etc. (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds to 5 seconds)). In a variable effect in which a predetermined number of consecutive effects (pseudo consecutive effects) (for example, 1 or 2 times) are executed and a reach effect is executed, the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) when the first vibration effect is executed than when the first vibration effect is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectation as to whether or not the first vibration effect will be executed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 is that the vibration effects executed as the jackpot prediction effects include second vibration effects (effect period) that have a longer vibration period (effect period) than the first vibration effect (vibration effects longer than 1 second (3 seconds, 4 seconds, 4 seconds to 5 seconds) during cut-in effects, successful decision effects, confirmation effects, etc.), and in the variable effects during effect modes A to C (normal gaming state), a reach effect with the second type of effect pattern (even number pattern) is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) than a reach effect with the first type of effect pattern (odd number pattern other than "7"); a reach effect with the third type of effect pattern (the "7" effect pattern) is less likely to be executed (the rate of execution is lower) than a reach effect with the second type of effect pattern; and the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed (the rate of execution is higher) when a reach effect with the third type of effect pattern is executed than when a reach effect with the second type of effect pattern is executed. This can increase the player's expectations regarding the type of effect symbol that will trigger the reach effect, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

The tenth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 is that in a jackpot fluctuation presentation in which a reach presentation is executed, the number of vibration presentations (development presentation, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, confirmation presentation) that do not have an effective period (display of an operation prompting image) during a post-reach presentation tends to be greater than the number of vibration presentations (preview vibration presentation, step-up notice presentation, confirmation presentation) that do not have an effective period (display of an operation prompting image) during a pre-reach presentation. This makes it possible to effectively heighten the sense of expectation during the post-reach presentation, and to increase the interest in the game.

The eleventh feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 is that a jackpot fluctuation performance in which a specific reach performance (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance) is executed is more likely to result in a greater number of vibration performances (development performance, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, confirmation performance) that do not have an effective period during the post-reach performance than a jackpot fluctuation performance in which a predetermined reach performance (normal reach performance, full rotation reach performance) is executed. This makes it possible to prevent the jackpot fluctuation performance from becoming monotonous, making the game more interesting.

The twelfth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 is that in a miss-changing presentation in which a reach presentation is executed, the number of vibration presentations without a valid period (preview vibration presentation, step-up preview presentation, confirmation presentation) that are executed during the pre-reach presentation tend to be greater than the number of vibration presentations without a valid period (development presentation, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, confirmation presentation) that are executed during the post-reach presentation. Therefore, the vibration presentation without a valid period can suggest the expectation of a jackpot, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The thirteenth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 is that the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (operation of the button vibration motor) is more likely to be executed (higher execution rate) when a post-reach preview effect (cut-in effect), which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than a pre-reach preview effect (dialogue preview effect, step-up preview effect) is executed in the variable performance, and the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed when the pre-reach preview effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation as to whether or not the vibration effect of the effect button 17 will be executed when the pre-reach preview effect is executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourteenth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 is that the likelihood of a big win is higher in presentation modes D to G (specific game states) than in presentation modes A to C (normal game states) when a vibration presentation accompanied by an effective period of the presentation button 17 (display of an operation prompt image) is executed in the post-reach advance notice presentation. Therefore, the playability can be varied depending on the type of presentation mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

It is also possible to make it so that the probability of winning is higher in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) than in presentation modes D to G (specific game state) when a vibration presentation accompanied by an effective period of the presentation button 17 (display of an operation prompting image) is executed in the post-reach advance notice presentation. Even in this case, it is possible to vary the playability depending on the type of presentation mode, and it is easier to increase the player's sense of expectation in presentation modes D to G that are advantageous to the player, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The fifteenth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 is that the expectation of a jackpot is higher when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed during the first performance period (before the reach) in the variable performance than when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed, and in the jackpot variable performance, regardless of whether the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed during the pre-reach performance, the vibration effect of the effect button 17 (vibration effect when the patterns are lined up or when the C pattern is lined up) is executed during the post-reach performance (period after the successful decision performance). Therefore, the vibration effect can inform the player that a jackpot will occur, making the game more interesting.

The 16th feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 is that the vibration effects (one of the vibration effects during the dialogue preview effect, the pseudo consecutive effect, the development effect, the cut-in effect, etc.) that are accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation prompt image) executed during the variable effect are executed in one of the multiple types of vibration modes (weak vibration, strong vibration) with different jackpot expectation rates, but the vibration effects (one of the vibration effects during the step-up preview effect, when the patterns are aligned, when the C patterns are aligned, etc.) that are not accompanied by the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation prompt image) executed during the variable effect are executed in one predetermined vibration mode. Therefore, in cases where it is difficult to grasp the type of vibration mode because there is no effective period, it is possible to prevent the vibration effects from becoming complicated, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 17th feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 is that the rate at which vibration effects (vibration effects lasting 3 seconds or more when a successful decision is made, when symbols are aligned, when C symbols are aligned, etc.) are executed afterwards (in the post-reach performance period) differs between the case where a vibration effect (vibration effect during a dialogue preview performance) is executed with the effective period of the performance button 17 (display of an operation prompting image) during the pre-reach performance period in the jackpot fluctuation performance and the case where a vibration effect (vibration effect during a step-up preview performance) is executed without the effective period of the performance button 17 (display of an operation prompting image), and that vibration effects without the effective period of the performance button 17 (vibration effect during a step-up preview performance) are executed more easily (higher execution rate) during the normal game state (performance modes A to C) than during the specific game state (performance modes D to G). Therefore, the performance effect of the vibration effect without the effective period of the performance button 17 can be enhanced, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The 18th feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 is that when a jackpot fluctuation effect is executed, the execution mode (whether or not to execute, execution timing, etc.) of the vibration effect in the jackpot preview effect can be changed depending on the type of jackpot effect pattern (even numbers, odd numbers other than "7", "7") that lines up (including C pattern line), but when a vibration effect is executed in conjunction with the execution of a successful decision effect or a confirmed effect, the vibration mode is the same regardless of the type of jackpot effect pattern that lines up (including C pattern line). Therefore, while the vibration effect increases the sense of anticipation for a jackpot, it is possible to uniformly celebrate the jackpot, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The 19th feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 is that after a vibration effect (successful decision effect, etc.) with a valid period (display of an operation prompt image) is executed in a jackpot variation effect, a vibration effect (matching symbols, matching C symbols, etc.) without a valid period (display of an operation prompt image) can be executed, and the timing at which vibration starts for a vibration effect (success effect, etc.) with a valid period (display of an operation prompt image) varies depending on the operation timing of the effect button 17, while the timing at which vibration starts for a vibration effect (matching symbols, matching C symbols, etc.) without a valid period (display of an operation prompt image) is predetermined. Therefore, a vibration effect can be executed at an appropriate timing depending on whether or not it is accompanied by a valid period (display of an operation prompt image), making the game more interesting.

The twentieth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 is that, although specific effects (pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, etc.) can be executed using the same movable member (second movable member 74) in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) and presentation modes D to G (specific game state), the expectation of a big win when a specific effect is executed differs between presentation modes A to C (normal game state) and presentation modes D to G (specific game state). Therefore, the playability can be varied depending on the type of presentation mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The 21st feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 is that, in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) and presentation modes D to G (specific game state), it is possible to execute a stage presentation (step-up notice presentation, pseudo consecutive presentation, etc.) that progresses to one of several stages with different jackpot expectation rates, but the jackpot expectation rate differs when the stage presentation (step-up notice presentation, pseudo consecutive presentation, etc.) progresses to the same stage (the third step presentation, the fourth step presentation, or the fifth step presentation for the step-up notice presentation, or once or twice for the pseudo consecutive presentation) in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) and presentation modes D to G (specific game state). Therefore, the playability can be made different depending on the type of presentation mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The 22nd feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 is that in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) and presentation modes D to G (specific game state), any of a number of operation prompting presentations with different jackpot expectations can be executed, and an operation presentation (any of a development presentation, a cut-in presentation, or a deciding presentation) can be executed according to the operation of the presentation button 17. In presentation modes A to C (normal game state) and presentation modes D to G (specific game state), the jackpot expectation is different when the same operation prompting presentation (for example, the normal button is white) is executed, and in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) and presentation modes D to G (specific game state), the jackpot expectation is higher when the effective suggestion presentation is executed and the operation prompting presentation is executed than when the effective suggestion presentation is not executed and the operation prompting presentation is executed when the operation presentation is executed. Therefore, the player's expectation as to whether or not the effective suggestion presentation will be executed can be increased, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 23rd feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 is that a vibration effect with a relatively short vibration period (e.g., 1 second) associated with a jackpot preview effect may be executed with or without an effective period of the effect button 17, whereas a vibration effect with a relatively long vibration period (3 seconds or more) associated with a jackpot preview effect is executed with an effective period. This improves the effect of the effect button 17 operation, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The 24th feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 is that in the special time-saving game state, when the missing change display of the second special symbol (missing second change display) is executed, it is easier to execute operation displays involving operation of the valid period (dialogue preview display, development display, deciding display, re-draw display) than when the missing change display of the first special symbol (missing first change display) is executed. Therefore, in the special time-saving game state, the display effect can be made to differ depending on the type of special symbol (change display), making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The 25th feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, an advance effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a final effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period, and the execution rate of the first vibration effect is different (the execution rate is higher when the second variable effect is executed) when the first variable effect (display of the variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state and when the second variable effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, the performance related to the vibration effect can be made different depending on the type of variable effect (special symbol) in the special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Note that the execution rate of the first vibration effect is higher when the second variable effect is executed in a specific game state than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in a specific game state, but the opposite may also be true.

The 26th feature of the various tables shown in FIG. 34 to FIG. 69 includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-draw effect, etc.) executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to pre-reading vibration effect, step-up notice effect, confirmation effect, etc.) executed without generating the valid period, and the execution rate of the first vibration effect during the execution of the specific effect is different (the execution rate is higher when the second variable effect is executed) between the case where the first variable effect (various reach effects, chance effects, etc.) in which a specific effect (various reach effects, chance effects, etc.) that makes the player expect the execution of a jackpot game is executed in the specific game state is executed and the case where the second variable effect (various special pattern variable display) in which a specific effect (various reach effects, chance effects, etc.) that makes the player expect the execution of a jackpot game is executed in the specific game state is executed. Therefore, when a variable effect in which a specific effect is executed in the specific game state is executed, the performance related to the vibration effect can be made different depending on the type of variable effect (special pattern), making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The execution rate of the first vibration effect during the execution of a specific effect is higher when the second variable effect (various special symbol variable display) in which a specific effect (various reach effects, chance effects, etc.) that creates the expectation of a jackpot game is executed in a specific game state is executed than when the first variable effect (various special symbol variable display) in which a specific effect (various reach effects, chance effects, etc.) that creates the expectation of a jackpot game is executed in a specific game state is executed, but the opposite may also be true.

The 27th feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a confirmation effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period, and the execution rate of the second vibration effect is different (the execution rate is higher when the second variable effect is executed) when the first variable effect (the variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state and when the second variable effect (the variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, the performance related to the vibration effect can be made different depending on the type of variable effect (special symbol) in the special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Note that the second vibration effect is executed more frequently when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in a specific game state than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in a specific game state, but the opposite may also be true.

The 28th feature relating to the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect relating to development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed in response to operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (vibration effect relating to confirmation effect, etc.) that is executed without generating a valid period, and the execution rate of the second vibration effect during the execution of a specific effect is different (the execution rate is higher when the second variable effect is executed) between a case where a first variable effect (variable display of a first special pattern) is executed in which a specific effect (various reach effects, chance effects, etc.) that gives the expectation of the execution of a jackpot game is executed in a specific game state (probable change game state, various time-saving game states) and a case where a second variable effect (variable display of a second special pattern) is executed in which a specific effect (various reach effects, chance effects, etc.) that gives the expectation of the execution of a jackpot game is executed in a specific game state. Therefore, when a variable effect is executed in which a specific effect is executed in a specific game state, the performance related to the vibration effect can be made different depending on the type of variable effect (special pattern), making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The execution rate of the second vibration effect during the execution of a specific effect is higher when a second variable effect (various special symbol variable display) is executed in a specific game state, in which a specific effect (various reach effects, chance effects, etc.) that creates the expectation of a jackpot game being played is executed, than when a first variable effect (various special symbol variable display) is executed in a specific game state, in which a specific effect (various reach effects, chance effects, etc.) that creates the expectation of a jackpot game being played is executed, but the opposite may also be true.

The 29th feature of the various tables shown in FIG. 34 to FIG. 69 is that the first action presentation (prediction action presentation, role announcement presentation at the start of variation, etc.) in which the first movable member 73 (or the second movable member 74) is operated in the first mode, and the second action presentation (successful decision presentation, etc.) in which the first movable member 73 is operated in the second mode can be executed. In the first variation presentation (display of the variation of the first special symbol) of a loss in the normal game state, the first action presentation can be executed, but in the first variation presentation of a loss in the specific game state (probable bonus game state, various time-saving game states), the execution of the first action presentation is restricted, and in the first variation presentation of a jackpot in the normal game state and the first variation presentation of a jackpot in the specific game state, the second action presentation can be executed. Therefore, the execution of the action presentation can be changed depending on whether or not there is a jackpot, which makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The 30th feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 is that the winning slot lamp can be illuminated in a predetermined manner to execute a lamp change effect suggesting the possibility of a jackpot game being played, and the first movable member 73 (or the second movable member 74) can be operated during the execution of the variable effect to execute an action effect (prediction action effect, variable start feature notice effect) suggesting the possibility of a jackpot game being played, and during the execution of the first variable effect (display of the variable first special symbol) of a loss in the normal game state, the light emission effect and the action effect can be executed, and during the execution of the first variable effect of a loss in the special time-saving game state, the execution of the light emission effect and the action effect can be restricted. Therefore, the effect of the first variable effect can be made different depending on the game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The thirty-first feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 is that the lighting device (prize winning lamp NR, top lamp 10b, etc.) has the first mode (prize winning lamp flashes white), the second mode (prize winning lamp lights up blue), the third mode (top lamp lights up), and the fourth mode (prize winning lamp & top lamp off). When the lamp change performance is performed, the lighting device can be in the first mode or the second mode, and when the winning light performance is performed, the lighting device can be in the third mode. The lighting device is more likely to be in the fourth mode when the first variable performance is performed in the special time-saving play state than when the first variable performance (display of the first special symbol) is performed in the normal play state. Therefore, the performance effect during the first variable performance can be made different depending on the play state, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The thirty-second feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 is that operation effects (dialogue preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, cut-in effects, deciding effects, etc.) that suggest the likelihood of a big win can be executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and it is more difficult to execute an operation effect when a first variation effect with a miss is executed in the special time-saving game state than when a first variation effect with a miss (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state. Therefore, the effect of the first variation effect can be made different depending on the game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The thirty-third feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, an advance effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a deciding effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period, and the execution rate of the first vibration effect is different (higher when the first variation effect is executed in the normal game state) between the case where the first variation effect (the variation display of the first special pattern) is executed in the normal game state and the case where the first variation effect is executed in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, the performance related to the vibration effect during the first variation effect can be made different depending on the game state, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Note that the execution rate of the first vibration effect is higher when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state than when the first variable effect is executed in the special time-saving game state, but the opposite may also be true.

The thirty-fourth feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, an advance effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a deciding effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period, and the execution rate of the second vibration effect is different (the execution rate is higher when the first variable effect is executed in the normal game state) between the case where the first variable effect (display of the variable first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state and the case where the first variable effect is executed in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, the performance related to the vibration effect during the first variable effect can be made different depending on the game state, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The second vibration effect is executed more frequently when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal play state than when the first variable effect is executed in the special time-saving play state, but the opposite may also be true.

The 35th feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a deciding effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period, and the execution rate of the first vibration effect (mainly a vibration effect related to a deciding effect) is different (the execution rate is higher when the second variable effect is executed) between a case where the second variable effect (a variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in a special time-saving play state and a case where the first variable effect (a variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in a special time-saving play state. Therefore, the performance related to the vibration effect can be made different depending on the play state and the type of variable effect, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The execution rate of the first vibration effect (mainly a vibration effect related to the deciding effect) is higher when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving play state than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving play state, but the opposite may also be true.

The 36th feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a deciding effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period, and the execution rate of the second vibration effect (mainly a vibration effect related to a deciding effect) is different (the execution rate is higher when the second variable effect is executed) between a case where the second variable effect (a variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in a special time-saving play state and a case where the first variable effect (a variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in a special time-saving play state. Therefore, the performance related to the vibration effect can be made different depending on the play state and the type of variable effect, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The execution rate of the second vibration effect (mainly a vibration effect related to a confirmation effect) is higher when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving play state than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving play state, but the opposite may also be true.

The 37th feature of the various tables shown in FIG. 34 to FIG. 69 is that the first moving part 73 (or the second moving part 74) can be operated in a first manner (pre-reading moving part, start of movement feature preview, etc.) and the second moving part 73 (or the second moving part 74) can be operated in a second manner (successful decision, etc.). The second moving part can be executed in the second moving part (display of the second special symbol) of a big win in the normal time-saving game state and the first moving part in the big win in the special time-saving game state. The first moving part can be executed in the second moving part (display of the second special symbol) of a loss in the normal time-saving game state, but the execution of the first moving part is restricted in the first moving part of a loss in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, the execution of the moving part can be changed depending on whether or not it is a big win, which makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 38th feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a confirmation effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period, and the execution rate of the first vibration effect is different (the execution rate is higher when the second variable effect is executed in the normal time-saving play state) between the case where the second variable effect (the variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving play state and the case where the first variable effect (the variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving play state. Therefore, the performance related to the vibration effect can be made different depending on the play state and the type of variable effect, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that the execution rate of the first vibration effect is higher when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving play state than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving play state, but the opposite may also be true.

The 39th feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a confirmation effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period, and the execution rate of the second vibration effect is different (the execution rate is higher when the second variable effect is executed in the normal time-saving play state) between the case where the second variable effect (the variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving play state and the case where the first variable effect (the variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving play state. Therefore, the performance related to the vibration effect can be made different depending on the play state and the type of variable effect, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second vibration effect is executed more frequently when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving play state than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving play state, but the opposite may also be true.

The fortieth feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 includes operation effects that perform predetermined effects in response to operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period (vibration effects related to dialogue preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, cut-in effects, decision effects, re-draw effects, etc.), and vibration effects that vibrate the effect button 17 without generating a valid period (vibration effects related to look-ahead vibration effects, step-up preview effects, confirmation effects, etc.), and the execution rate of vibration effects during a predetermined period after the start of the variable effects (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) differs between the normal game state and the normal time-saving game state. Therefore, the performance related to the vibration effects can be made different depending on the game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The forty-first feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 includes operation effects that perform predetermined effects in response to operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period (vibration effects related to dialogue preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, cut-in effects, decision effects, re-draw effects, etc.), and vibration effects that vibrate the effect button 17 without generating a valid period (vibration effects related to look-ahead vibration effects, step-up preview effects, confirmation effects, etc.), and the execution rate of vibration effects that do not generate a valid period during the predetermined period after the start of the variable effects (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) differs between the normal game state and the special time-saving game state (the execution rate is higher in the normal game state). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration effects can be made different depending on the game state, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Note that the execution rate of vibration effects that do not generate an effective period during the specified period after the start of the fluctuation effect (until the first temporary stop after the high-speed fluctuation) is higher in the normal game state than in the special time-saving game state, but the opposite may also be true.

The 42nd feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 includes operation effects (vibration effects related to dialogue preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, cut-in effects, decision effects, re-draw effects, etc.) that perform predetermined effects in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and vibration effects (vibration effects related to look-ahead vibration effects, step-up preview effects, confirmation effects, etc.) that vibrate the effect button 17 without generating a valid period, and it is possible to vibrate the effect button 17 in a different manner for the initial vibration of the effect button 17 after power-on and the vibration effect. Therefore, when a vibration effect is performed, the game store staff will not mistakenly think that an initial vibration has been performed (there has been fraudulent activity such as turning the game machine on and off), and the performance effect of the vibration effect can be improved, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The 43rd feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 includes operation effects that perform predetermined effects in response to operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period (vibration effects related to dialogue preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, cut-in effects, decision effects, re-draw effects, etc.), and vibration effects that vibrate the effect button 17 without generating a valid period (vibration effects related to look-ahead vibration effects, step-up preview effects, confirmation effects, etc.). For example, when a vibration effect is executed while operating an operation means such as the cross key 19, the vibration related to the vibration effect is transmitted to the player via the operation means. Therefore, even if a vibration effect is executed without the valid period of the effect button 17 occurring, it is possible to suppress inconveniences that the player would not notice, and it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The 44th feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 includes operation effects that perform predetermined effects in response to operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period (vibration effects related to dialogue preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, cut-in effects, deciding effects, re-draw effects, etc.), and vibration effects that vibrate the effect button 17 without generating a valid period in response to the look-ahead result (look-ahead vibration effects), and when a variable effect in which a reach effect is performed during the normal game state is executed, the vibration effect is executed more frequently before the reach effect than during the reach effect. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations even before the reach effect is executed, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The 45th feature related to the various tables shown in FIG. 34 to FIG. 69 includes a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a confirmation effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their performance periods do not overlap, and the execution rate of the second vibration effect during a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable effect is different (the execution rate is higher when the first variable effect is executed in the normal game state) between the case where the first variable effect (display of the variable first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving game state (or the probability variable game state) and the case where the first variable effect is executed in the normal time-saving game state (or the probability variable game state). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration effect during the first variable effect can be made different depending on the game state, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the execution rate of the second vibration effect during a specified period after the start of the variable effect (until the first temporary stop) is higher when the first variable effect is executed in the normal time-saving play state (or the special probability play state) than when the first variable effect is executed in the normal time-saving play state (or the special probability play state), but the opposite may also be true.

The 46th feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a confirmation effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their performance periods do not overlap, and the execution rate of the second vibration effect during a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable effect is different (the execution rate is higher when the first variable effect is executed in the normal game state) between the case where the first variable effect (display of the variable first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving game state (or the probability variable game state) and the case where the second variable effect is executed in the normal time-saving game state (or the probability variable game state). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration effect can be made different depending on the game state and the type of variable effect, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The execution rate of the second vibration effect during a specified period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable effect is higher when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state than when the second variable effect is executed in the normal time-saving game state (or the special probability game state), but the opposite may also be true.

The 47th feature related to the various tables shown in FIG. 34 to FIG. 69 includes a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a confirmation effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their performance periods do not overlap, and the execution rate of the second vibration effect during a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable effect is different between the case where the first game effect (the variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state and the case where the first variable effect is executed in the special time-saving game state (the execution rate is higher when the first variable effect is executed in the normal game state). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration effect during the first variable effect can be made different depending on the game state, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the execution rate of the second vibration effect during a specified period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable effect is higher when the first game effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state than when the first variable effect is executed in the special time-saving game state, but the opposite may also be true.

The 48th feature related to the various tables shown in FIG. 34 to FIG. 69 includes a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a confirmation effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their performance periods do not overlap, and the execution rate of the second vibration effect during a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable effect is different (higher when the first variable effect is executed in the normal game state) between the case where the first variable effect (the variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state and the case where the second variable effect (the variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, the performance related to the vibration effect can be made different depending on the game state and the type of variable effect, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the execution rate of the second vibration effect during a specified period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable effect is higher when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state than when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state, but the opposite may also be true.

The 49th feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a confirmed effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their performance periods do not overlap, and the execution rate of the second vibration effect during a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable effect is different between a case where the second variable effect (variable display of the second special pattern) is executed in a normal time-saving game state (or a sure-win game state) and a case where the second variable effect is executed in a special time-saving game state (the rate is higher when the second variable effect is executed in a normal time-saving game state). Therefore, the performance related to the vibration effect during the second variable effect can be made different depending on the game state, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The execution rate of the second vibration effect during a specified period after the start of the variable effect (until the first temporary stop) is higher when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving play state (or the special variable play state) than when the second variable effect is executed in the special time-saving play state, but the opposite may also be true.

The 50th feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a confirmation effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their performance periods do not overlap, and the execution rate of the second vibration effect during a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable effect is different (higher when the second variable effect is executed) between the case where the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state and the case where the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state. Therefore, the performance related to the vibration effect during the second variable effect can be made different depending on the game state, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the execution rate of the second vibration effect during a specified period after the start of the variable effect (until the first temporary stop) is higher when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving play state than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving play state, but the opposite may also be true.

The 51st feature relating to the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed in response to operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to look-ahead vibration effect, step-up preview effect, confirmation effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period, the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their effect periods do not overlap, and the execution rate of the second vibration effect during a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable effect is different (higher when the second variable effect is executed) between a case where the first variable effect (display of variable first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving play state (or probability variable play state) and a case where the second variable effect (display of variable second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving play state (or probability variable play state). Therefore, in the normal time-saving play state (or the probability variation play state), the performance of the vibration effects can be varied depending on the type of variable effect, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The execution rate of the second vibration effect during a specified period after the start of the variable effect (until the first temporary stop) is higher when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-limited play state (or the variable probability play state) than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-limited play state (or the variable probability play state), but the opposite may also be true.

The 52nd feature related to the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a confirmation effect, etc.) executed without generating the valid period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their performance periods do not overlap, and the execution rate of the second vibration effect during a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable effect is different (higher when the second variable effect is executed) between the case where the first variable effect (display of the variable first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving play state and the case where the second variable effect (display of the variable second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving play state. Therefore, the performance related to the vibration effect can be made different depending on the type of variable effect in the special time-saving play state, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

Note that the execution rate of the second vibration effect during a specified period (until the first temporary stop) after the start of the variable effect is higher when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving play state than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving play state, but the opposite may also be true.

The 53rd feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a final effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that the effect periods do not overlap, and the initial vibration of the effect button 17 after the power is turned on and the second vibration effect can vibrate the effect button 17 in different ways. Therefore, when the second vibration effect is performed, the game store staff will not mistakenly think that an initial vibration has been performed (there has been a fraudulent act such as turning the power of the game machine on and off), and the effect of the vibration effect can be improved, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The 54th feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (vibration effects related to dialogue preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, cut-in effects, decision effects, re-draw effects, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (vibration effects related to look-ahead vibration effects, step-up preview effects, confirmation effects, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their effect periods do not overlap, and the effect button 17 can be vibrated in different ways for the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect. This makes it easier to distinguish whether it is the first vibration effect or the second vibration effect, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The 55th feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (vibration effects related to dialogue preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, cut-in effects, deciding effects, re-draw effects, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (vibration effects related to look-ahead vibration effects, step-up preview effects, confirmation effects, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their effect periods do not overlap. For example, when the second vibration effect is executed while operating an operation means such as the cross key 19, the vibration related to the second vibration effect is transmitted to the player via the operation means. Therefore, even if a second vibration effect that does not generate the valid period of the effect button 17 is executed, it is possible to suppress inconveniences that the player does not notice, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 56th feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, an advance effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (a look-ahead vibration effect) that is executed without generating a valid period depending on the look-ahead result, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their effect periods do not overlap, and when a variable effect in which a reach effect is performed during the normal game state is executed, the second vibration effect is executed more frequently before the reach effect than during the reach effect. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations even before the reach effect is executed, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The 57th feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a confirmation effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their performance periods do not overlap, and the expectation of a jackpot game being executed is higher when the second vibration effect is executed during the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) in the normal time-saving game state (or the probability game state) than when the second vibration effect is executed during the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) in the normal game state. Therefore, the expectation for the second vibration effect can be made different depending on the game state and the type of variable effect, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The 58th feature relating to the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a pseudo consecutive effect, an development effect, a cut-in effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a confirmation effect, a pattern matching effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period, the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their effect periods do not overlap, the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed during the first variable effect (variable display of the first special pattern) in the normal game state, the execution of the first vibration effect is restricted during the first variable effect in the normal time-saving game state (or the special probability game state), but the second vibration effect can be executed, and it is possible for the effect button 17 to vibrate in a different manner for the initial vibration of the effect button 17 after power is turned on and the first vibration effect. This prevents game staff from mistaking the initial vibration for a vibration effect (a fraudulent act such as turning the gaming machine on and off), and improves the effect of the vibration effect, making the game more interesting.

The 59th feature relating to the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a pseudo consecutive effect, an development effect, a cut-in effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a confirmation effect, a pattern matching effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period, the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their effect periods do not overlap, the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed during the first variable effect (variable display of the first special pattern) in the normal game state, the execution of the first vibration effect is restricted during the first variable effect in the normal time-saving game state (or the special probability game state), but the second vibration effect can be executed, and it is possible for the effect button 17 to vibrate in different manners for the initial vibration of the effect button 17 after power-on and the second vibration effect. This prevents game staff from mistaking the initial vibration for a vibration effect (a fraudulent act such as turning the gaming machine on and off), and improves the effect of the vibration effect, making the game more interesting.

The 60th feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue preview effect, step-up preview effect, etc.) executed at a predetermined timing (before the reach) during the variation effect, and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to development effect, cut-in effect, deciding effect, re-draw effect) executed at a timing different from the first vibration effect (during the reach), and the execution rate of the first vibration effect is different (higher when the second variation effect is executed) between the case where the first variation effect (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving play state (or the probability variation play state) and the case where the second variation effect (variation display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving play state (or the probability variation play state). Therefore, the performance of the vibration effect can be made different depending on the type of variation effect in the normal time-saving play state (or the probability variation play state), making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The execution rate of the first vibration effect is higher when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-limited play state (or the variable probability play state) than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-limited play state (or the variable probability play state), but the opposite may also be true.

The 61st feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue preview effect, step-up preview effect, etc.) executed at a predetermined timing (before the reach) during the variation effect, and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to development effect, cut-in effect, deciding effect, re-draw effect, etc.) executed at a timing different from the first vibration effect (during the reach), and the execution rate of the second vibration effect is different (higher when the second variation effect is executed) between the case where the first variation effect (display of the variation of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving play state (or the probability variation play state) and the case where the second variation effect (display of the variation of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving play state (or the probability variation play state). Therefore, the performance of the vibration effect can be made different depending on the type of variation effect in the normal time-saving play state (or the probability variation play state), making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The second vibration effect is executed more frequently when the second variation effect (the variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-limited play state (or the variable play state) than when the first variation effect (the variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-limited play state (or the variable play state), but the opposite may also be true.

The 62nd feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue preview effect, step-up preview effect, etc.) executed at a predetermined timing (before the reach) during the variation effect, and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-draw effect, etc.) executed at a timing different from the first vibration effect (during the reach), and the execution rate of the first vibration effect is different (higher when the second variation effect is executed) when the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving play state and when the second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving play state. Therefore, the performance of the vibration effect can be made different depending on the type of variation effect in the special time-saving play state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that the execution rate of the first vibration effect is higher when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving play state than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving play state, but the opposite may also be true.

The 63rd feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue preview effect, step-up preview effect, etc.) executed at a predetermined timing (before the reach) during the variation effect, and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-draw effect, etc.) executed at a timing different from the first vibration effect (during the reach), and the execution rate of the second vibration effect is different (higher when the second variation effect is executed) when the first variation effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving play state and when the second variation effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving play state. Therefore, the performance of the vibration effect can be made different depending on the type of variation effect in the special time-saving play state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that the second vibration effect is executed more frequently when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving play state than when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving play state, but the opposite may also be true.

The 64th feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue preview effect, step-up preview effect, etc.) executed at a predetermined timing (before the reach) during the variable effect, and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to development effect, cut-in effect, deciding effect, re-draw effect, etc.) executed at a timing different from the first vibration effect (during the reach), and the execution rate of the first vibration effect differs between the normal game state and the normal time-saving game state (or the probability change game state), and it is possible to vibrate the effect button 17 in a different manner between the initial vibration of the effect button 17 after the power is turned on and the first vibration effect. Therefore, when the first vibration effect is performed, the game store staff will not mistakenly think that the initial vibration has been performed (there has been a fraudulent act such as turning the power of the game machine on and off), and the effect of the first vibration effect can be improved, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The 65th feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue preview effect, step-up preview effect, etc.) executed at a predetermined timing (before the reach) during the variable effect, and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-draw effect, etc.) executed at a timing different from the first vibration effect (during the reach), and the execution rate of the first vibration effect differs between the normal game state and the normal time-saving game state (or the probability change game state), and it is possible to vibrate the effect button 17 in a different manner for the initial vibration of the effect button 17 after the power is turned on and the second vibration effect. Therefore, when the second vibration effect is performed, the game store staff will not mistakenly think that the initial vibration has been performed (there has been a fraudulent act such as turning the power of the game machine on and off), and the effect of the second vibration effect can be improved, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The 66th feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue preview effect, step-up preview effect, etc.) that is executed at a predetermined timing (before the reach) during the variable effect, and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to development effect, cut-in effect, deciding effect, re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed at a timing different from the first vibration effect (during the reach), and the effect button 17 is more likely to be illuminated in the first light-emitting mode (white light emission, etc.) with a low expectation of a jackpot when the first vibration effect is executed than when the second vibration effect is executed in the jackpot variable effect. Therefore, the light-emitting mode of the effect button 17 can be made different depending on the type of vibration effect and the expectation of a jackpot, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The 67th feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue preview effect, step-up preview effect, etc.) executed at a predetermined timing (before the reach) during the variable effect, and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, re-draw effect, etc.) executed at a timing different from the first vibration effect (during the reach), and the execution rate of the first vibration effect differs between the normal game state and the normal time-saving game state (or the probability change game state), and the effect button 17 is more likely to be illuminated in the first light-emitting mode (white light emission, etc.) with a low jackpot expectation when the first vibration effect is executed than when the second vibration effect is executed in the jackpot variable effect. Therefore, the light-emitting mode of the effect button 17 can be made different depending on the type of vibration effect and the jackpot expectation, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The 68th feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 is that the effective period of the effect button 17 includes a first effective period (effective period related to the dialogue preview effect and pseudo consecutive effect) that occurs at a predetermined timing (before the reach) during the variable effect, and a second effective period (effective period related to the cut-in effect, the deciding effect, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during the reach) after the first effective period, and when the effect button 17 is operated during the second effective period, a vibration effect of the effect button 17 can be executed, and the effect button 17 can be vibrated in different ways for the initial vibration of the effect button 17 after power-on and the vibration effect, and different operation sounds can be output when the effect button 17 is operated during the first effective period and when the effect button 17 is operated during the second effective period. Therefore, the effect can be made different when the first effective period occurs and when the second effective period occurs, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The 69th feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 is that the effective period of the effect button 17 includes a first effective period (effective period related to dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect) that occurs at a predetermined timing (before the reach) during the variable effect, and a second effective period (effective period related to cut-in effect, decisive effect, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during the reach) after the first effective period, and when the effect button 17 is operated during the first effective period, a vibration effect of the effect button 17 can be executed, and the effect button 17 can be vibrated in different ways for the initial vibration of the effect button 17 after power-on and the vibration effect, and different operation sounds can be output when the effect button 17 is operated during the first effective period and when the effect button 17 is operated during the second effective period. Therefore, the effect can be made different when the first effective period occurs and when the second effective period occurs, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The seventieth feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 is that the effective period of the effect button 17 includes a first effective period (effective period related to dialogue preview effect and pseudo consecutive effect) that occurs at a predetermined timing (before the reach) during the variable effect, and a second effective period (effective period related to development effect, deciding effect, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during the reach) after the first effective period, and the execution rate of the vibration effect in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the first effective period differs between the normal game state and the normal time-saving game state (or the probability change game state) (the execution rate is higher in the normal game state), and the number of vibrations in the vibration effect in response to the operation during the first effective period differs from the number of vibrations in the vibration effect in response to the operation during the second effective period (the number of vibrations in the vibration effect in response to the operation during the second effective period is higher). Therefore, the effect of the effect can be made different depending on the game state and the type of effective period, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The execution rate of the vibration effect in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the first effective period in the normal time-saving play state (or the special probability play state) is higher than the execution rate of the vibration effect in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the first effective period, but the opposite may be true. Also, the number of vibrations in the vibration effect in response to the operation during the second effective period is higher than the number of vibrations in the vibration effect in response to the operation during the first effective period, but the opposite may be true.

The 71st feature of the various tables shown in Figs. 34 to 69 is that the effective period of the effect button 17 includes a first effective period (effective period related to dialogue preview effect and pseudo consecutive effect) that occurs at a predetermined timing (before the reach) during the variable effect, and a second effective period (effective period related to development effect, deciding effect, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during the reach) after the first effective period, and the execution rate of the vibration effect in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the first effective period differs between the normal game state and the special time-saving game state (higher in the normal game state), and the number of vibrations in the vibration effect in response to the operation during the first effective period differs from the number of vibrations in the vibration effect in response to the operation during the second effective period (the number of vibrations in response to the operation during the second effective period is higher). Therefore, the effect of the effect can be made different depending on the game state and the type of effective period, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that the execution rate of the vibration effect in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the first effective period in the normal game state is higher than the execution rate of the vibration effect in response to the operation of the effect button 17 during the first effective period in the special time-saving game state, but the opposite may be true. Also, the number of vibrations in the vibration effect in response to the operation during the second effective period is higher than the number of vibrations in the vibration effect in response to the operation during the first effective period, but the opposite may be true.

The 72nd feature of the various tables shown in FIG. 34 to FIG. 69 is that the normal setting state (normal mode) and the simple setting state (simple mode) can be set to different execution rates of specific effects (continuous notice effects, icon change effects, timer effects, etc.) that make players expect a big win game to be executed according to the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19, and when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after the normal setting state is set, the execution rate of the first specific effect (e.g., continuous notice effect) is the first rate (high) and the execution rate of the second specific effect (e.g., timer effect) is the second rate (high), and when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state after the normal setting state is set, the execution rate of the first specific effect is a rate (low rate) different from the first rate and the execution rate of the second specific effect is a rate (low rate) different from the second rate. Therefore, even in the normal game state after the normal setting state is set, the effect of the effect can be made different depending on the type of variable effect, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The execution rate of the first specific effect and the execution rate of the second specific effect when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving game state after the normal setting state is set may be higher than the execution rate of the first specific effect and the execution rate of the second specific effect when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after the normal setting state is set.

The 73rd feature of the various tables shown in FIG. 34 to FIG. 69 is that the normal setting state (normal mode) and the simple setting state (simple mode) can be set to different execution rates of specific effects (continuous notice effects, icon change effects, timer effects, etc.) that make players expect a big win game to be executed according to the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19, and when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after the normal setting state is set, the execution rate of the first specific effect (e.g., continuous notice effects) is the first rate (high) and the execution rate of the second specific effect (e.g., timer effects) is the second rate (high), and when the first variable effect is executed in the normal time-saving game state (or the probability game state) after the normal setting state is set, the execution rate of the first specific effect is a rate (low rate) different from the first rate and the execution rate of the second specific effect is a rate (low rate) different from the second rate. Therefore, even in the first variable effect after the normal setting state is set, the effect of the effect can be made different depending on the game state, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The execution rate of the first specific effect and the execution rate of the second specific effect when the first variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving play state after being set to the normal setting state may be set to be higher than the execution rate of the first specific effect and the execution rate of the second specific effect when the first variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal play state after being set to the normal setting state.

The 74th feature of the various tables shown in FIG. 34 to FIG. 69 is that the normal setting state (normal mode) and the simple setting state (simple mode) can be set to different execution rates of specific effects (continuous notice effects, icon change effects, timer effects, etc.) that make players expect a big win game to be executed according to the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19, and when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special pattern) is executed in the normal time-saving game state (or the probability change game state) after being set to the normal setting state, the execution rate of the first specific effect (e.g., continuous notice effects) is the first rate (high) and the execution rate of the second specific effect (e.g., timer effects) is the second rate (high), and when the first variable effect is executed in the special time-saving game state after being set to the normal setting state, the execution rate of the first specific effect is a rate (low rate) different from the first rate and the execution rate of the second specific effect is a rate (low rate) different from the second rate. Therefore, even in the second variable effect after being set to the normal setting state, the effect of the effect can be made different depending on the game state, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

The execution rate of the first specific effect and the execution rate of the second specific effect when the first variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving play state after being set to the normal setting state may be set to be higher than the execution rate of the first specific effect and the execution rate of the second specific effect when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving play state after being set to the normal setting state.

A 75th feature relating to the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 is that the tables can be set to a normal setting state (normal mode) and a simple setting state (simple mode) in which the execution rates of specific effects (continuous preview effects, icon change effects, timer effects, etc.) that anticipate the execution of a jackpot game can be different depending on the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19, and when a second variable effect (variable display of a second special pattern) is executed in a normal time-saving game state (or a sure-win game state) after being set to the normal setting state, the execution rate of the first specific effect (e.g., continuous preview effect) is a first rate (high) and the execution rate of the second specific effect (e.g., timer effect) is a second rate (high), and when a first variable effect (variable display of a first special pattern) is executed in a normal game state after being set to the normal setting state, the execution rate of the first specific effect is a rate (low rate) different from the first rate and the execution rate of the second specific effect is a rate (low rate) different from the second rate. Therefore, even in a specific game state after the normal setting state is set, the presentation effect can be made different depending on the type of variable presentation, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The execution rate of the first specific effect and the execution rate of the second specific effect when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state after the normal setting state is set may be higher than the execution rate of the first specific effect and the execution rate of the second specific effect when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving game state (or special probability game state) after the normal setting state is set.

A 76th feature relating to the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 is that the normal setting state (normal mode) and simple setting state (simple mode) can be set to different execution rates of specific effects (continuous preview effects, icon change effects, timer effects, etc.) that anticipate the execution of a jackpot game in response to the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19, and when a second variable effect (variable display of a second special pattern) is executed in the special time-saving game state after being set to the normal setting state, the execution rate of the first specific effect (e.g., continuous preview effect) is a first rate (high) and the execution rate of the second specific effect (e.g., timer effect) is a second rate (high), and when a first variable effect (variable display of a first special pattern) is executed in the normal time-saving game state (or special chance game state) after being set to the normal setting state, the execution rate of the first specific effect is a rate (low rate) different from the first rate and the execution rate of the second specific effect is a rate (low rate) different from the second rate. Therefore, even in a specific game state after the normal setting state is set, the presentation effect can be made different depending on the type of variable presentation, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The execution rate of the first specific effect when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving play state after being set to the normal setting state may be set to be higher than the execution rate of the second specific effect, and the execution rate of the first specific effect or the execution rate of the second specific effect when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving play state (or the special probability play state) after being set to the normal setting state may be set to be higher.

The 77th feature relating to the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 is that a normal setting state (normal mode) and a simple setting state (simple mode) can be set with different execution rates of specific effects (continuous preview effects, icon change effects, timer effects, etc.) that anticipate the execution of a jackpot game in response to the operation of the effect button 17 and the cross key 19, and when a second variable effect (variable display of a second special pattern) is executed in a normal time-saving game state (or a special chance game state) after being set to the normal setting state, the execution rate of the first specific effect (e.g., continuous preview effect) is a first rate (high) and the execution rate of the second specific effect (e.g., timer effect) is a second rate (high), and when a first variable effect (variable display of a first special pattern) is executed in a special time-saving game state after being set to the normal setting state, the execution rate of the first specific effect is a rate (low rate) different from the first rate and the execution rate of the second specific effect is a rate (low rate) different from the second rate. Therefore, even in a specific game state after the normal setting state is set, the presentation effect can be made different depending on the type of variable presentation, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The execution rate of the first specific effect when the second variable effect (variable display of the second special symbol) is executed in the normal time-saving play state (or the special probability play state) after the normal setting state is set may be higher than the execution rate of the second specific effect, and the execution rate of the first specific effect or the execution rate of the second specific effect when the first variable effect (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed in the special time-saving play state after the normal setting state is set may be higher.

The 78th feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 is that when the first variation effect is executed in a specific game state, a predetermined first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, or a cut-in effect) is not executed, but a specific first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a development effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) is executed. Therefore, it is possible to guarantee the effect of the effect when the first variation effect is executed in a specific game state, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The 79th feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 is that the execution rate of the vibration effect related to the re-draw effect (execution rate of the variable effect related to the re-draw effect) is different when the first variable effect is executed in the specific game state and when the second variable effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, the performance of the vibration effect related to the re-draw effect can be made different depending on the type of variable effect (special pattern) in the specific game state, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

The 80th feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 is that it is possible to execute a first operation effect (such as a dialogue preview effect or a pseudo consecutive effect) in which a valid indication effect (such as the display of multiple semi-transparent effect button images that resemble the effect button 17) that suggests the occurrence of the valid period of the effect button 17 is not executed, and a second operation effect (such as a development effect, a cut-in preview effect, or a deciding effect) in which a valid indication effect that suggests the occurrence of the valid period of the effect button 17 is executed, and the first operation effect is more likely to be executed when a missing first variation effect is executed in the special time-saving game state than when a missing first variation effect (display of a variation of the first special symbol) is executed in the normal game state. Therefore, the effect of the first variation effect can be made different depending on the game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The 81st feature of the various tables shown in Figures 34 to 69 is that when a vibration effect is executed by operating the effect button 17 during the valid period, the movement effect of the movable effect member 73 is more likely to be executed than when a vibration effect is not executed by operating the effect button 17 during the valid period. This can heighten the player's expectations for the vibration effect, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, a specific operation effect may be provided in which a predetermined effect is executed in response to operation during the valid period but a vibration effect of the effect button 17 is not executed, and an effective indication effect (such as the display of multiple semi-transparent effect button images that resemble the effect button 17) that suggests the occurrence of the valid period of the effect button 17 is more likely to be executed when the first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, cut-in effect, deciding effect, re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed in response to operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period is executed than when the specific operation effect is executed. In this way, it is possible to increase the player's anticipation for the first vibration effect and increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Percentage of notice restriction period)
Figure 70 is a diagram showing the proportion of the advance notice limit period for miss variation effects in presentation modes A to C, Figure 71 is a diagram showing the proportion of the advance notice limit period for miss variation effects in presentation modes D to G, and Figure 72 is a diagram showing the proportion of the advance notice limit period for miss variation effects in presentation mode H.

The "notice restriction period" is a period during which the display of the performance pattern 70a and/or the special pattern TZ changes and the dynamic display of the background image are executed, but the execution of the big win notice performance (the role notice performance at the start of the change, the dialogue notice performance, the step-up notice performance, the cut-in notice performance, the deciding performance, etc.) is restricted (regulated). The "notice period" is a period during which the display of the performance pattern 70a and/or the special pattern TZ changes and the dynamic display of the background image are executed, and the big win notice performance may be executed.

For example, in fluctuation presentation pattern 3, the first half of the normal fluctuation is the notice period, and the second half of the normal fluctuation and the normal reach presentation are the restricted period, with the proportion of restricted periods in the fluctuation presentation being 70% and the number of times the restricted period occurs being 1.

Note that although the illustration shows a miss variation effect, the jackpot variation pattern also differs only in the final result of the variation effect and whether or not a re-draw effect is executed, so compared to a miss variation effect, which has the same basic presentation structure, the ratio of the notice period to the limit period is the same.

The first characteristic of the advance notice limit period shown in Figures 70 to 72 is that the proportion of the advance notice limit period is more likely to be larger for a miss variable presentation pattern in which a reach effect is not executed than for a miss variable presentation pattern in which a reach effect is executed. Therefore, the period in which the jackpot advance notice effect can be executed changes depending on the jackpot expectation of the variable presentation pattern, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the advance notice limit period shown in Figures 70 to 72 is that the number of advance notice limit periods occurring is more likely to be fewer for a miss variable presentation pattern in which a reach effect is not executed than for a miss variable presentation pattern in which a reach effect is executed. Therefore, the number of times that the jackpot advance notice effect can be executed changes depending on the jackpot expectation of the variable presentation pattern, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

A third feature of the advance notice limit period shown in Figures 70 to 72 is that the advance notice limit period tends to take up a larger proportion of the time when the first special symbol misses the display (first change effect) in presentation mode H (special time-saving play state) than when the first special symbol misses the display (first change effect) in presentation modes A to C (normal play state). This makes it possible to encourage the player to see the second special symbol (second change effect), which is advantageous to the player, in presentation mode H (special time-saving play state), and to increase the player's interest in the game.

A fourth feature of the advance notice limit period shown in Figures 70 to 72 is that the advance notice limit period is more likely to occur less frequently when the first special symbol misses the variable display (first variable display) is executed in presentation mode H (special time-saving play state) than when the first special symbol misses the variable display (first variable display) is executed in presentation modes A to C (normal play state). This makes it possible to encourage the execution of the second special symbol miss display (second variable display), which is advantageous to the player, in presentation mode H (special time-saving play state), thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fifth feature of the advance notice limit period shown in Figures 70 to 72 is that the execution rate of the variable effect that is the advance notice limit period over the entire period is different (the execution rate is higher when the first variable effect is executed in the special time-saving play state) between the case where the first special symbol miss variable display (first variable effect) is executed in the presentation modes A to C (normal play state) and the case where the first special symbol miss variable display (first variable effect) is executed in the presentation mode H (special time-saving play state). Therefore, the presentation effect when the first variable effect is executed can be made different depending on the type of presentation mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that the execution rate of the variable effect that is the advance notice limited period over the entire period is higher when the first special symbol miss variable display (first variable effect) is executed in presentation mode H (special time-saving play state) than when the first special symbol miss variable display (first variable effect) is executed in presentation modes A to C (normal play state), but the opposite may also be true.

The sixth feature of the advance notice limit period shown in Figures 70 to 72 is that a change effect that is an advance notice limit period over the entire period is more likely to be executed when the first special symbol miss change display (first change effect) is executed in presentation mode H (special time-saving play state) than when the first special symbol miss change display (first change effect) is executed in presentation modes A to C (normal play state). Therefore, the presentation effect when the change effect is executed can be made different depending on the presentation mode and the type of special symbol, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The seventh feature of the advance notice limit period shown in Figures 70 to 72 is that the advance notice limit period tends to take up a larger proportion of time when the first special symbol misses the variable display (first variable display) is executed in presentation mode H (special time-saving play state) than when the second special symbol misses the variable display (second variable display) is executed in presentation modes D to G (normal time-saving play state). Therefore, the presentation effect when the variable display is executed can be made different depending on the presentation mode and the type of special symbol, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The eighth feature of the advance notice limit period shown in Figures 70 to 72 is that the advance notice limit period is more likely to occur less frequently when the first special symbol misses a variable display (first variable display) is executed in presentation mode H (special time-saving play state) than when the second special symbol misses a variable display (second variable display) is executed in presentation modes D to G (normal time-saving play state). Therefore, the presentation effect when the variable display is executed can be made different depending on the presentation mode and the type of special symbol, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The ninth feature of the advance notice limit period shown in Figures 70 to 72 is that the execution rate of the variable effect that is the advance notice limit period over the entire period is different (the execution rate is higher when the second variable effect is executed in the special time-saving play state) between the case where the second special symbol miss variable display (second variable effect) is executed in the performance modes D to G (normal time-saving play state) and the case where the first special symbol miss variable display (first variable effect) is executed in the performance mode H (special time-saving play state). Therefore, the performance effect when the variable effect is executed can be made different depending on the performance mode and the type of special symbol, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that the execution rate of the variable effect that is the advance notice limit period over the entire period is higher when the first special symbol misses the variable display (first variable effect) is executed in the presentation mode H (special time-saving play state) than when the second special symbol misses the variable display (second variable effect) is executed in the presentation modes D to G (normal time-saving play state), but the opposite may also be true.

The tenth feature of the advance notice limit period shown in Figures 70 to 72 is that the advance notice limit period tends to take up a larger proportion of time when the first special symbol misses the variable display (first variable display) is executed in presentation mode H (special time-saving play state) than when the second special symbol misses the variable display (second variable display) is executed in presentation modes D to G (normal time-saving play state). Therefore, the presentation effect when the variable display is executed can be made different depending on the presentation mode and the type of special symbol, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

When the first special symbol miss variation display (first variation presentation) is executed in presentation mode H (special time-saving game state), the length of the advance notice limit period differs between the normal variation presentation pattern (first reserved number = 0) and the ultra-shortened variation presentation pattern (first reserved number = 1 to 3), but the length of the advance notice limit period may be the same. In this case, the length of the advance notice limit period may be the same on the premise that both the normal variation presentation pattern and the ultra-shortened variation presentation pattern are executed, or the length of the advance notice limit period may be the same on the premise that only one of the normal variation presentation pattern and the ultra-shortened variation presentation pattern is executed regardless of the first reserved number.

(Types of vibration effects for each effect mode)
FIG. 73 is a diagram showing the types of vibration effects for each effect mode.

Of the vibration effects that may be executed during the varying display of the first special pattern (first varying effect) in effect modes A to C (normal gaming state), there are six types of vibration effects that have an effective period and five types of vibration effects that do not have an effective period.
In addition, with regard to the vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the second special pattern (second variable effect) in effect modes A to C (normal gaming state), there is one type of vibration effect that generates a valid period, and three types of vibration effects that do not generate a valid period.

Of the vibration effects that may be executed during the varying display of the first special pattern (first varying effect) in effect modes D to G (high probability game play state/normal time-saving game play state), there is one type of vibration effect that generates a valid period and one type of vibration effect that does not generate a valid period.
In addition, with regard to the vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the second special pattern (second variable effect) in effect modes D to G (high probability gameplay state/normal time-saving gameplay state), there are six types of vibration effects that have a valid period and four types of vibration effects that do not have a valid period.

Of the vibration effects that may be executed during the varying display of the first special pattern (first varying effect) in effect mode H (special time-saving play state), there is one type of vibration effect that generates a valid period, and one type of vibration effect that does not generate a valid period.
In addition, with regard to the vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the second special pattern (second variable effect) in effect mode H (special time-saving play state), there are four types of vibration effects that generate a valid period, and three types of vibration effects that do not generate a valid period.

In addition, the initial operation of the effect button 17, which is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, causes the vibration operation of the effect button 17 to be strong continuous vibration for 2.5 seconds or strong intermittent vibration for 2.5 seconds, so the vibration mode (vibration time, vibration pattern, etc.) is different from the vibration operation (vibration effect) of the effect button 17 that generates an effective period executed during a variable effect and the vibration operation (vibration effect) of the effect button 17 that does not generate an effective period.

In this way, there are more types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) and do not have a valid period, compared to the number of types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in presentation modes D to G (probable bonus game state, time-saving game state). Therefore, the presentation effect when the first variable effect is executed can be made different depending on the type of presentation mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, there are more types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) and that do not have an effective period, than there are types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in presentation mode H (special time-saving game state). The presentation effect when the first variable effect is executed can be made different depending on the type of presentation mode, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, there are more types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable effect) in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) and do not have an effective period, than there are types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) in presentation modes D to G (probable bonus game state, time-saving game state). The effect of the variable effect can be made different depending on the presentation mode and the type of special symbol, making the game more interesting.

In addition, there are more types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol (first variable display) in presentation modes A to C (normal game state) and that do not have an effective period, than there are types of vibration effects that may be executed during the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable display) in presentation mode H (special time-saving game state). The presentation effect of the variable display can be made different depending on the presentation mode and the type of special symbol, making the game more interesting.

(Main processing of the general control unit)
The main processing of the overall control unit 141 will be described with reference to Fig. 74. Fig. 74 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the overall control unit 141. This main processing is performed when a system reset, which occurs when a power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, is input to the overall CPU 141a.

First, the general CPU 141a prohibits all interrupts in step T1, and performs initial setting processing in step T2. Specifically, it performs initial setting of the CPU such as setting the built-in registers, grants access to the general RAM 141c, initializes (clears to 0) all RWM areas of the general RAM 141c, starts the CTC (counter timer circuit) to generate timer interrupts, and so on, and then in step T3, it permits all interrupts.

In step T4, the general CPU 141a performs an adjustment mode switching process. Specifically, by referring to an input signal from the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by a gaming store staff member, the general CPU 141a performs a process for adjusting the volume (value) of the effect sound output from the audio output device 9 and the light intensity (value) of the backlight of the display device (first image display device 70, second image display device 71), and for switching the adjustment mode related to the volume and light intensity adjustment (whether or not the volume can be adjusted, whether or not the light intensity can be adjusted, the initial value of the volume value (any of 0 to 5) and the initial value of the light intensity value (any of 0 to 5), the adjustment range of the volume value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5) and the adjustment range of the light intensity value (0 to 5 or 1 to 5)).

The volume and light intensity can be set (adjusted) using the changeover switch 22 at any time as long as the gaming machine 1 is powered on (after the general control unit 141 has been started).

The overall CPU 141a performs a volume adjustment process in step T5. Specifically, the overall CPU 141a performs a process to adjust the volume (value) of the effect sounds output from the audio output device 9 based on the detection signal (left button detection signal, right button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a that detects the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player.

In step T6, the overall CPU 141a performs a light intensity adjustment process. Specifically, the overall CPU 141a performs a process to adjust the light intensity (value) of the backlight of the display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) based on the detection signal (down button detection signal, up button detection signal) from the cross key detection switch 19a, which detects the operation of the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player.

The setting (adjustment) of the volume value and light intensity value using the cross key 19 is restricted (limited) when the variable presentation starts and ends (when the presentation pattern 70a stops). In addition, the setting (adjustment) is also restricted (limited) during the period from when the power is turned on until the game progress control starts (specifically, during the period from when the main control board 110 starts a timer interrupt during the setting change mode, during the RWM clear preparation mode, during the setting confirmation mode, during the initial operation of the various drive sources of the board unit 500, etc.), and during the notification (output of notification sound) of important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, illegal winning, abnormal winning, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error) that should be notified with priority over a full tray error or a payout abnormality.

In addition, while the abnormality warning sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, the volume of the various sound effects (BGM, etc.) output from the audio output device 9 is reduced from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormality warning sound ends, the volume of the various sound effects is restored to the volume before the reduction.

In step T7, the general CPU 141a performs an eco mode control process. Specifically, the general CPU 141a performs a process for controlling the start and end of an eco mode that reduces the amount of light in the backlights of the display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 71) to reduce power consumption.

In step T8, the overall CPU 141a determines whether or not a performance instruction command or a notification instruction command transmitted from the performance control unit 130m has been received. If a performance instruction command or a notification instruction command has not been received, the process proceeds to step T11. If a performance instruction command or a notification instruction command has been received, the process proceeds to step T9.

In step T9, the overall CPU 141a performs an animation pattern setting process. Specifically, the overall CPU 141a performs a process of determining an animation pattern from an animation group of a type corresponding to the received performance instruction command or notification instruction command, and setting (setting) the animation pattern in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c.

In step T10, the overall CPU 141a performs a sound pattern setting process. Specifically, the overall CPU 141a determines a sound pattern from a sound group of a type corresponding to the received performance instruction command or notification instruction command, and sets the sound pattern in a predetermined area of the overall RAM 141c.

In step T11, the overall CPU 141a determines whether a frame switching flag is set in the overall RAM 141c, indicating that it is time to update the frame display image of the display device (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). If the frame switching flag is set, the process proceeds to step T12, and if the frame switching flag is not set, the process proceeds to step T4.

The frame switching flag is set by the V blank interrupt process, which is executed every time the general control unit 141 receives a V blank signal sent from the image control unit 145 (VDP) every 1/30th of a second (the time it takes for the drawing and display of one frame of the performance image to be completed). Therefore, the processing of steps T12 to T15 described below is executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

In step T12, the general CPU 141a clears the frame switching flag set in the general RAM 141c, and in step T13 performs scene update processing. Specifically, the general CPU 141a refers to the scene switching counter, wait frame counter, and frame counter that are updated in the V blank interrupt processing described above, and updates the address of the animation scene based on the animation pattern determined in step T9, and updates the address of the sound scene based on the sound pattern determined in step T10.

The overall CPU 141a performs drawing control processing in step T14. Specifically, in accordance with the priority order (drawing order) of the animation group to which the animation scene belongs, it generates a display list consisting of a group of drawing control commands from the display information (sprite identification number, display position, etc.) of one frame of the animation scene at the updated address, outputs this display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP), and performs processing to instruct the drawing of a display image based on the display list.

As a result, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws a display image based on the display list in the drawing frame buffer, and also performs processing to display the images (performance images, abnormality notification images) drawn in the display frame buffer on the display devices (first image display device 70, second image display device 71). In other words, the frame update timing corresponds to the start and end timing of various performances (image displays and sound outputs such as hold displays, variable performances, jackpot preview performances, and pre-reading performances) performed on the first image display device 70 and second image display device 71.

Note that the performances that are directly controlled by the performance control unit 130m or the lamp control unit 150 (hold display by the sub-first hold display unit 83 or the sub-second hold display unit 84, and performance operations of the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74) may or may not coincide with the frame update timing.

In step T15, the general CPU 141a performs audio control processing. Specifically, it generates an audio control command from the sound information at the updated address and outputs this audio control command to the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI).

As a result, the audio control unit 148 (audio LSI) performs processing to output various special sounds and notification sounds based on the audio control commands from the audio output device 9. When this processing ends, the process proceeds to step T4.

In this way, when the variable presentation starts and ends (when the presentation pattern 70a stops), the volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by game store staff, but volume and light intensity adjustments using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player are regulated (limited). This makes it difficult for players to miss important points such as the start and end of the variable presentation, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, during the notification (output of notification sound) of important (high security level) abnormalities (power on, power recovery, unrecoverable error, illegal win, abnormal win, magnetic error, radio wave error, door open error) that should be given priority over a full tray error or a payout abnormality, the volume and light intensity can be adjusted using the changeover switch 22 that can be operated by game store staff, but volume and light intensity adjustment using the cross key 19 that can be operated by the player is regulated (limited). This makes it possible to improve the convenience of the game store in terms of volume and light intensity adjustment while avoiding the inconvenience of a player not noticing the occurrence of an abnormality when trying to adjust the volume or light intensity.

In addition, while the abnormality notification sound is being output, even if the current volume value is lower than the maximum volume value, the volume of the various sound effects (BGM, etc.) output from the audio output device 9 is reduced from the previous volume, and when the output of the abnormality notification sound ends, the volume of the various sound effects is restored to the volume before the reduction. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of not noticing the abnormality notification sound due to the various sound effects, and ensures the security of the gaming machine.

Note that while an abnormality is being notified (an alarm sound is being output), it may be impossible to set (adjust) the volume value or light intensity value using the cross key 19 that the player can operate, or the adjustment range of the volume value or light intensity value may be limited to between 0 and 2, for example.

(Initial processing of the lamp control unit)
The role initial processing of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to Fig. 75. Fig. 75 is a flowchart showing the role initial processing of the lamp control unit 150, and this processing is executed within the timer interrupt processing executed in the lamp control unit 150 at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds).

In step R101, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) has been received from the main control board 110. If a power-on command has been received, the process proceeds to step R102; if a power-on command has not been received, the process proceeds to step R103.

In step R102, the lamp CPU 150a sets the initial processing number, which is updated during each process of the reel initial processing, to "1" to execute the origin return process for the reels (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, and performance button 17).

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the initial processing number is "1". If the initial processing number is not "1", the process proceeds to step R105 without executing the origin return process for the reel. If the initial processing number is "1", the process proceeds to step R104, where it executes the origin return process and ends the current reel initial processing. Specifically, it performs processes such as executing the return operation of the reel (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) to the origin position based on the input signal from the position detection sensor and setting the initial processing number to "2". The origin return process will be described in detail later.

In step R105, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the initial processing number is "2". If the initial processing number is not "2", the current reel initial processing is terminated without executing the initial operation processing of the reel, and if the initial processing number is "2", the initial operation processing is performed and the current reel initial processing is terminated. Specifically, the initial operation and initial light emission are performed to check whether the reel is operating normally, and the initial processing number is set to "0". Details of the initial operation processing will be described later.

In this way, according to the reel initial processing shown in FIG. 75, the origin return processing for returning the various reels to their origin positions and the initial operation processing for performing the initial operations and initial light emission of the various reels are not executed at the same time. Therefore, the return operations of the various reels to their origin positions and the initial operations and initial light emission of the various reels are not mixed, and it becomes possible to check the return operations separately from the initial operations and initial light emission.

In addition, according to the reel initial processing shown in FIG. 75, the origin return processing is executed before the initial operation processing. Therefore, the various reels perform their initial operation from the origin position, making it easier to determine whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the various reels.

(Origin return process of lamp control unit)
The origin return process of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to Fig. 76. Fig. 76 is a flowchart showing the origin return process in the lamp control unit 150.

In step R105-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board role processing number, which indicates the progress of the origin return status of the board role (first movable member 73, second movable member 74), is "0". If the board role processing number is not "0", the process proceeds to step R105-3. If the board role processing number is "0", in step R105-2, the first movable member 73 is set as the drive target to be returned to the origin, and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

In step R105-3, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board role processing number is "1." If the board role processing number is not "1," the process proceeds to step R105-12. If the board role processing number is "1," the process proceeds to step R105-4, where the second movable member 74 is set as the drive target to be returned to the origin, and the process proceeds to step R105-5.

In step R105-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the movable member to be driven is in the origin position (standby position). Specifically, it determines the input signal from the position detection sensor that detects that each movable member is in the origin position. If the movable member to be driven is not in the origin position, the process proceeds to step R105-6, and if the movable member to be driven is in the origin position, the process proceeds to step R105-11.

In step R105-6, the lamp CPU 150a drives the drive motor to move the movable member to be driven so that the movable member to be driven returns to the origin position, and in step R105-7, updates by +1 the board role object abnormality determination timer to determine the occurrence of a return abnormality in which the movable member does not return to the origin position within a specified time.

In step R105-8, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the updated board role abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit (e.g., 5 seconds). If the board role abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit, it assumes that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven and proceeds to step R105-9. If the board role abnormality determination timer is not at its upper limit, it proceeds to step R105-12.

In step R105-9, the lamp CPU 150a sets in the lamp RAM 150c return abnormality information (first movable member return abnormality information, second movable member return abnormality information) indicating that a return abnormality has occurred in the movable member to be driven, and in step R105-10, clears the board role abnormality determination timer.

In step R105-11, the lamp CPU 150a updates the board role processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board role processing number is "0", the board role processing number is updated to "1" to drive the second movable member 74, and if the board role processing number is "1", the board role processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of returning the board role (first movable member, second movable member) to the origin.

In step R105-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame role processing number, which indicates the progress of the origin return status of the frame role (performance button 17), is "0". If the frame role processing number is "0", the process proceeds to step R105-13, and if the board role processing number is not "0", the process proceeds to step R105-20.

In step R105-13, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the performance button 17 is in the origin position (standby position). Specifically, it determines the input signal from a position detection sensor that detects that the performance button 17 is in the origin position. If the performance button 17 is not in the origin position, it moves the process to step R105-14, and if the performance button 17 is in the origin position, it moves the process to step R105-19.

In step R105-14, the lamp CPU 150a drives the button drive motor to move the effect button 17 so that the effect button 17 returns to its original position, and in step R105-15, it updates by +1 the frame role object abnormality determination timer to determine the occurrence of a return abnormality in which the effect button 17 does not return to its original position within a specified time.

In step R105-16, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the updated frame role object abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit (e.g., 5 seconds). If the frame role object abnormality determination timer is at its upper limit, it assumes that a return abnormality has occurred in the performance button 17 and proceeds to step R105-17. If the frame role object abnormality determination timer is not at its upper limit, it ends the current origin return process.

In step R105-17, the lamp CPU 150a sets recovery abnormality information indicating that a recovery abnormality has occurred in the performance button 17 in the lamp RAM 150c, and in step R105-18, clears the frame role object abnormality determination timer.

In step R105-19, the lamp CPU 150a updates the frame role processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame role processing number is "0", the board role processing number is updated to "1" to end the process of returning the frame role (performance button 17) to its origin.

In step R105-20, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the termination condition. Specifically, it determines whether the board role processing number is "2" and the frame role processing number is "1". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R105-21, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current origin return process is terminated.

In step R105-21, the lamp CPU 150a clears the board role processing number and the frame role processing number, and in step R105-22, it sets the above-mentioned initial processing number to "2" to execute the initial operation processing of the role, and ends this return to origin process.

In this way, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 76, the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are not returned to the origin position at the same time (at the same time), but are returned to the origin position in a predetermined order (first movable member 73 → second movable member 74). This makes it easier to check whether various board parts have returned to their origin positions. Also, when the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are in contact with each other in a way that makes it difficult to separate them, it is possible to prevent the two movable members from applying load to each other, and to prevent the inconvenience of both movable members being damaged at the same time.

In addition, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 76, the return operation of the board role (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) to the origin position and the return operation of the frame role (performance button 17) to the origin position can be executed simultaneously (at the same time). Therefore, the time required for the return operation of each role can be shortened, and it becomes possible to smoothly transition to the initial operation of each role that will be executed next.

In addition, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 76, an upper limit is set on the time for each reel to return to its origin position. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as the return action of various reels never finishing. This makes it possible to avoid situations where various reels are performing a return action during a variable performance, resulting in no performance action being performed, and prevents a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the origin return process shown in FIG. 76, when both the return operation of the board role (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) to the origin position and the return operation of the frame role (performance button 17) to the origin position are completed, a process is performed to transition to the initial operation process. Therefore, the return operation of the various roles to their origin positions and the initial operation of the various roles are no longer performed simultaneously, making it possible to check the return operation and initial operation of the various roles separately.

The first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 are returned to the origin position in a predetermined order (first movable member 73 → second movable member 74), but they may start returning to the origin position at the same time. In this way, the time required for the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 can be shortened, and it becomes possible to smoothly transition to the initial operation of the various parts that will be executed next.

(Initial Operation Processing of Lamp Control Unit)
The initial operation process of the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to Fig. 77. Fig. 77 is a flowchart showing the initial operation process of the lamp control unit 150.

In step R107-1, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board feature processing number, which indicates the transition of the initial operation status of the board feature, is "0". If the board feature processing number is "0", the process proceeds to step R107-2, and if the board feature processing number is not "0", the process proceeds to step R107-7.

In step R107-2, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information for the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 has been set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information has not been set, the process proceeds to step R107-4, assuming that the initial operation and initial light emission of the board role will be performed. If the return abnormality information has been set, in step R107-3, the board role processing number is set to "2", assuming that the initial operation of the board role will not be performed, and the process proceeds to step R107-7.

In step R107-4, the lamp CPU 150a selects a board role initial operation pattern determination table (see FIG. 78) for determining the initial operation pattern of the board role. Details of the board role initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-5, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the board role (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, it refers to the board role initial operation pattern determination table and determines one initial operation pattern from among multiple initial operation patterns based on the type of power-on command and the presence or absence of return abnormality information.

In step R107-6, the lamp CPU 150a updates the board feature processing number by +1. Specifically, if the board feature processing number is "0", the board feature processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the board feature.

In step R107-7, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board role processing number is "1". If the board role processing number is not "1", the process proceeds to step R107-11. If the board role processing number is "1", in step R107-8, the initial operation of the board role is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the board role set in the lamp RAM 150c.

In step R107-9, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not all steps of the initial operation of the board role have been completed. If all steps of the initial operation of the board role have not been completed, the process proceeds to step R107-11. If all steps of the initial operation of the board role have been completed, the board role processing number is updated by +1 in step R107-10. Specifically, if the board role processing number is "1", the board role processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of initializing the board role.

In step R107-11, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame role processing number, which indicates the transition of the initial operating status of the frame role (performance button 17), is "0." If the frame role processing number is "0," the process proceeds to step R107-12, and if the frame role processing number is not "0," the process proceeds to step R107-17.

In step R107-12, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not return abnormality information for the effect button 17 has been set in the lamp RAM 150c. If the return abnormality information has not been set, the process moves to step R107-14, assuming that the frame role object will perform its initial operation. If the return abnormality information has been set, in step R107-13, the frame role object processing number is set to "2", assuming that the frame role object will not perform its initial operation, and the process moves to step R107-17.

In step R107-14, the lamp CPU 150a selects a frame role initial operation pattern determination table (see FIG. 79) for determining the initial operation pattern of the frame role. Details of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table will be described later.

In step R107-15, the lamp CPU 150a determines the initial operation pattern of the frame role object (performance button 17) and sets it in the lamp RAM 150c. Specifically, it refers to the frame role object initial operation pattern determination table and determines one initial operation pattern from among multiple initial operation patterns based on the type of power-on command.

In step R107-16, the lamp CPU 150a updates the frame role object processing number by +1. Specifically, if the frame role object processing number is "0", the frame role object processing number is updated to "1" to execute the initial operation of the frame role object.

In step R107-17, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the frame role processing number is "1". If the frame role processing number is not "1", the process proceeds to step R107-21. If the frame role processing number is "1", in step R107-18, the initial operation of the frame role is executed according to the initial operation pattern of the frame role set in the lamp RAM 150c.

In step R107-19, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not all steps of the initial operation of the frame role have been completed. If all steps of the initial operation of the frame role have not been completed, the process proceeds to step R107-21. If all steps of the initial operation of the frame role have been completed, the frame role processing number is updated by +1 in step R107-20. Specifically, if the frame role processing number is "1", the frame role processing number is updated to "2" to end the process of initializing the frame role.

In step R107-21, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether the board role processing number and the frame role processing number satisfy the termination condition. Specifically, it determines whether the board role processing number is "2" and the frame role processing number is "2". If the termination condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step R107-22, and if the termination condition is not satisfied, the current initial operation process is terminated.

In step R107-22, the lamp CPU 150a clears the board role processing number and the frame role processing number, and in step R107-23, it clears the initial processing number described above, and ends this initial operation processing.

In this way, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 77, the initial operation of the board role (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 17) can be executed simultaneously (at the same time). Therefore, the time required for the initial operation of each role can be shortened, and it is possible to prevent the performance operation of each role during play from being hindered.

In addition, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 77, if there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 that constitute the board role, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the movable member from completely failing or being damaged by forcibly performing the initial operation of the movable member in which a return abnormality has occurred.

In addition, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 77, if there is a recovery abnormality in the effect button 17 that constitutes the frame role object, the initial operation of the effect button 17 is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconvenience such as a complete failure or damage of the effect button 17 caused by forcibly performing the initial operation of the effect button 17 that is experiencing a recovery abnormality.

In addition, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 77, even if the initial operation of the board part where a return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the frame part where a return abnormality has not occurred is executed, and even if the initial operation of the frame part where a return abnormality has occurred is not executed, the initial operation of the board part where a return abnormality has not occurred is executed. Therefore, it is possible to check whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the part where a return abnormality has not occurred.

In addition, according to the initial operation process shown in FIG. 77, the initial operation process ends when both the initial operation of the board role (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) and the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 17) have been completed. This prevents a situation in which it is unclear whether the initial operation or the performance operation is occurring, such as when one of the board role and the frame role is performing an initial operation while the other is performing a performance operation.

(Table for determining initial operation pattern of board role)
FIG. 78 shows a board role initial movement pattern determination table which is referred to when determining the initial movement pattern of the board role (first movable member 73, second movable member 74).

The initial operation pattern determination table for the board role-playing device associates the type of command when the power is turned on, the presence or absence of recovery abnormality information, and the initial operation pattern to be selected, and for reference, the operating mode at the time of the initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are also listed.

The initial operation patterns include patterns 01-03, which are determined when a power-on command is received, patterns 04-06, which are determined when a first power restoration command is received, indicating that the machine is waiting for customers, and patterns 07-09, which are determined when a second power restoration command is received, indicating that a special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, or a third power restoration command is received, indicating that a jackpot is being played.

The "initial operation pattern 01" is determined when there are no return abnormalities in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and the first movable member 73 operates in the order of small descent → return to origin → large descent → return to origin, and then the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement → return to origin, and during that period the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up (emit light) blue and white.
The "initial operation pattern 02" is determined when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73, in which the first movable member 73 does not operate and the second movable member 74 operates in the order of movement → return to the origin, and during that period the second movable member LED lights up (emits light) blue and white.
The "initial operation pattern 03" is determined when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member 74, and after the first movable member 73 operates in the order of small descent → return to origin → large descent → return to origin, the second movable member 74 does not operate, and during that period the first movable member LED lights up (emits light) blue and white.

"Initial operation pattern 04" is determined when there is no recovery abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and is the same as initial operation pattern 01 except that the second movable member LED lights up (emits) only blue.
"Initial operation pattern 05" is determined when there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73, and is the same as initial operation pattern 02 except that the second movable member LED lights up (emits light) only in blue.
“Initial operation pattern 06” is determined when there is a return abnormality in the second movable member 74, and is ultimately the same as initial operation pattern 03 since the second movable member LED does not light up in blue.

"Initial operation pattern 07" is determined when there is no recovery abnormality in the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74, and is the same as initial operation pattern 01 or initial operation pattern 04 except that the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off.
"Initial operation pattern 08" is determined when there is a return abnormality in first movable member 73, and is the same as initial operation pattern 02 or initial operation pattern 05, except that second movable member 74 is turned off.
"Initial operation pattern 09" is determined when there is a return abnormality in second movable member 74, and is the same as initial operation pattern 03 or initial operation pattern 06 except that first movable member 73 is turned off.

Note that the color of the first movable member LED is not specified in initial operation pattern 02, initial operation pattern 05, and initial operation pattern 08. This is because the first movable member LED flashes red to indicate an abnormality in the return of the first movable member 73.

In addition, the color of the second movable member LED is not specified in initial operation pattern 03, initial operation pattern 06, and initial operation pattern 09. This is because the second movable member LED flashes red to indicate an abnormality when the second movable member 74 returns to its original position.

The first feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 78 is that the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the board role (first movable member, second movable member) is the same when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Therefore, regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored, it is possible to properly check whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the board role.

The same initial action means that at least the movement pattern of the board parts in each step is the same, and the action time in each step may be the same or different.

In addition, the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of one of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, or the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of both the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 may be different. In this way, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

In addition, when the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and/or the second movable member 74 is made different between when the power is turned on and when the power is restored, an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is turned on may be executed by the initial operation when the power is restored, or an operation that is not included in the initial operation when the power is restored may be executed by the initial operation when the power is turned on. In this way, it becomes easier to know whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The second feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 78 is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board role (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The third feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 78 is that while the light emission pattern of the first movable member LED is the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting for customers state, the light emission pattern of the second movable member LED is different. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The light emission pattern of the first movable member LED is the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state, while the light emission pattern of the second movable member LED is different. Conversely, the light emission pattern of the first movable member LED may be different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state, while the light emission pattern of the second movable member LED may be the same.

In addition, both the light emission pattern of the first movable member LED and the light emission pattern of the second movable member LED may be different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the waiting state. This makes it easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power being turned on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power being restored (the game control state is restored).

The fourth feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 78 is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted during the initial operation of the board role (first movable member, second movable member) is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored during the variable display of special symbols or when a jackpot game is played. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power being turned on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power being restored (the game control state is restored).

The fifth feature of the board role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 78 is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emission during the initial operation of the board role (first movable member, second movable member) is different when the power is restored to the waiting state and the power is restored while the special symbol is changing or during a jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to the power being restored to the waiting state and the power being restored while the special symbol is changing or during a jackpot game.

When the power is restored during the changing display of the special symbols or during a jackpot game, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are turned off, but the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED may be lit in the same illumination mode as when the power is restored to return to the waiting state.

The sixth feature of the board role object initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 78 is that, regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored, if there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 but not in the second movable member 74, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is not performed and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is performed, and if there is no return abnormality in the first movable member 73 but not in the second movable member 74, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is performed but the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is not performed. In this way, it is possible to perform an appropriate initial operation depending on whether there is a return abnormality or not.

(Frame role initial operation pattern determination table)
FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a frame role initial operation pattern determination table which is referred to when determining the initial operation pattern of the frame role (performance button 17).

The frame role initial operation pattern determination table associates the type of command when the power is turned on with the initial operation pattern to be selected, and for reference, the operating mode at the time of the initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are listed.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when a power-on command is received, and the effect button 17 operates in the following order: large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin → intermittent vibration, and during this period the effect button LED lights up (emits light) in the following order: red → green → blue.
"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first power restoration designation command, indicating that the machine is waiting for customers, is received, and the effect button operates in the following order: large rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, and during that period the effect button lights up (illuminates) blue.
"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when a second power restoration command indicating that a special pattern is being displayed in a changing manner or a third power restoration command indicating that a jackpot is being played is received, and the effect button operates in the following order: big rise & continuous vibration → return to origin, and during that period the effect button LED is turned off.

The duration of the continuous vibration of the effect button 17 (2.5 seconds) and the duration of the intermittent vibration (2.5 seconds) are different from the vibration duration of the vibration effects executed during the variable effect (vibration effects during dialogue preview effects, vibration effects during step-up preview effects, vibration effects during pseudo consecutive effects, vibration effects during development effects, vibration effects during cut-in effects, vibration effects during decision effects, vibration effects during re-lottery effects, and vibration effects during confirmation effects).

The first feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 79 is that the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 17) is different when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The second feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 79 is that the initial operation of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is set to an operation that is not included in the initial operation of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. This makes it easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The initial operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the performance button 17 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. In this way, it is possible to properly check whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame device, regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored.

The third feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in Figure 79 is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted during the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 17) is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The fourth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 79 is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted during the initial operation of the board role (first movable member, second movable member) is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored during the variable display of special symbols or when the power is restored during a jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The LED on the effect button is set to turn off when the power is restored while the special symbol is changing or during a jackpot game, but the LED on the effect button may be set to light up in the same illumination mode as when the power is restored to return to the waiting state.

The fifth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 79 is that the number of colors emitted in the initial light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is different from the number of colors emitted in the initial light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is restored. This makes it easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

Note that the number of colors emitted by the initial light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of colors emitted by the initial light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is restored, but this may be reversed.

The sixth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 79 is that the color of the light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is turned on includes a color of light that is not included in the color of the light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is restored. This makes it easier to know whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The color of the light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is restored may include a color that is not included in the color of the light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is turned on.

The seventh feature of the frame role object initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 79 is that the time during which the effect button 17 vibrates when the power is turned on or when the power is restored is different from the time during which the effect button 17 vibrates during an operation effect that is executed by operating the effect button 17 during an effective period that occurs while a variable effect is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to understand that the vibration is during the initial operation of the effect button 17.

The eighth feature of the frame role object initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 79 is that the initial vibration of the button vibration motor, which does not detect whether it is at the origin position, is executed by overlapping with the initial operation of the effect button 17, which detects whether it is at the origin position. This makes it possible to check the operation of the effect button 17 and the button vibration motor at the same time, thereby shortening the time required for operation check.

(Example of when there is no recovery error in various parts after power is turned on)
Figure 80 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is no recovery abnormality in the various parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) after power is turned on with initialization of the main RAM 110c.

Note that there are two types of power-on that involve initializing the main RAM 110c: power-on that initializes the main RAM 110c after a setting change process is performed, and power-on that initializes the main RAM 110c without performing a setting change process. Here, we will explain the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing a setting change process.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen with the words "Loading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reservation number "0" is displayed in both the first special chart reservation number display area 70E and the second special chart reservation number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the performance button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, and they turn on (light up in white) while waiting for customers, and at the timing T8, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the state becomes silent.

At the timing of T9, when a first special chart reserved number designation command (first special chart reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the first reserved number in the first special chart reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T10, when a change start command (special pattern designation command, special pattern change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special pattern reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying the changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of when the second movable member has a return abnormality after power is turned on)
81 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a return abnormality in the second movable member 74 after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case will be described where power-on results in initialization of the main RAM 110c without performing a setting change process.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen with the words "Loading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reservation number "0" is displayed in both the first special chart reservation number display area 70E and the second special chart reservation number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the origin return process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as an initial emission, and the performance button LED lights up in the order red → green → blue as an initial emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white).

At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, when a first special chart reserved number designation command (first special chart reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the first reserved number in the first special chart reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T9, when a change start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the sub-first variable display 81 starts displaying the variables, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while varying, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of when the first movable member has a return abnormality after power is turned on)
82 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a return abnormality in the first movable member 73 after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c. Here, a case will be described where power-on results in initialization of the main RAM 110c without performing a setting change process.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen with the words "Loading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reservation number "0" is displayed in both the first special chart reservation number display area 70E and the second special chart reservation number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when a recovery abnormality occurs in the first movable member 73 and the recovery operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the first movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality, and the recovery operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the second movable member LED and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as initial light emission, and the performance button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, and the initial light emission of the second movable member LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white).

At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T8, when a first special chart reserved number designation command (first special chart reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the first reserved number in the first special chart reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T9, when a change start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the sub-first variable display 81 starts displaying the variables, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while varying, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Example of when the performance button does not return to normal after power is turned on)
FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button 17 after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen with the words "Loading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reservation number "0" is displayed in both the first special chart reservation number display area 70E and the second special chart reservation number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when the recovery operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends while a recovery abnormality has occurred in the performance button 17, the performance button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality, and the recovery operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the performance button 17 is not started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are lit alternately in blue and white as initial illumination.

At time T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at time T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process is completed, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends and they are lit (white light) while waiting for customers, and at time T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the state becomes silent.

At the timing of T8, when a first special chart reserved number designation command (first special chart reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the first reserved number in the first special chart reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T9, when a change start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the performance button LED ends, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

In the specific example shown in Figures 80 to 83, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing a setting change process has been described. However, in the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after a setting change has been performed, the initial screen is displayed, and then the performance control board 130 receives a setting change command, causing a setting change screen to be displayed. After that, the performance control board 130 receives a power-on command, causing the first standby screen to be displayed, and the return and initial operations of the various parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) to begin. Note that the first standby screen may also be displayed upon receiving a setting value designation command.

(Example of when no abnormality occurs in various parts after power is restored)
Figure 84 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there are no recovery abnormalities in the various parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) after power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen with the words "Loading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command for waiting customers sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 remains silent.

In addition, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reservation number "0" is displayed in both the first special chart reservation number display area 70E and the second special chart reservation number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial emission, the second movable member LED lights up blue as the initial emission, and the performance button LED lights up blue as the initial emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends and they turn on (light up in white) while waiting for customers.

At the timing of T8, when a first special chart reserved number designation command (first special chart reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the first reserved number in the first special chart reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T9, when a change start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying the changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after power is restored)
FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen with the words "Loading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command for waiting customers sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 remains silent.

In addition, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reservation number "0" is displayed in both the first special chart reservation number display area 70E and the second special chart reservation number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the origin return process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as an initial emission, and the performance button LED lights up blue as an initial emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white).

At the timing of T7, when a first special chart reserved number designation command (first special chart reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the first reserved number in the first special chart reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the sub-first variable display 81 starts displaying the variables, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while varying, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after power is restored)
FIG. 86 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen with the words "Loading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command for waiting customers sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 remains silent.

In addition, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reservation number "0" is displayed in both the first special chart reservation number display area 70E and the second special chart reservation number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when a recovery abnormality occurs in the first movable member 73 and the recovery operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the first movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality, and the recovery operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the second movable member LED and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED and the performance button LED light up blue as the initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73, and the initial light emission of the second movable member LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white).

At the timing of T7, when a first special chart reserved number designation command (first special chart reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the first reserved number in the first special chart reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the sub-first variable display 81 starts displaying the variables, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while varying, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Example of when the performance button has a recovery error after power is restored)
Figure 87 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button 17 after power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen with the words "Loading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command for waiting customers sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 remains silent.

In addition, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reservation number "0" is displayed in both the first special chart reservation number display area 70E and the second special chart reservation number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At timing T3, when the recovery operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends while a recovery abnormality has occurred in the performance button 17, the performance button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality, and the recovery operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the performance button 17 is not started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the second movable member LED lights up blue as the initial light emission.

At time T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins, and at time T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, turning on (white) when waiting for customers.

At the timing of T7, when a first special chart reserved number designation command (first special chart reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the first reserved number in the first special chart reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the performance button LED ends, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Example of when the state after power recovery is that the special pattern is changing and there is a reserved memory)
Figure 88 shows a specific example of the state after power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c when the special pattern is changing (missing change display) and there is reserved memory.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen with the words "Loading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command for when the special chart is changing, sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off, a recovery screen including the text "Please resume play" is displayed on the image display device, and the audio output device 9 remains silent.

In addition, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number = 3, second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the image display device displays a recovery screen, so the second reservation number is not displayed in the first special chart reservation number display area 70E or the second special chart reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "3", and the sub-second reserved indicator 84 changes to a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At time T5, the initial operation of the effect button 17 ends, at time T6, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins, and at time T7, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends and the initial operation process ends, with the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remaining in an off state.

When a special symbol stop command is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T8, the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and a stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the stop sound "Bang ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At this time, three first hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state in which it is possible to display a background image or other presentation image (the pedestal image is displayed), but the icons are not displayed.

At the timing of T9, when a change start command (special pattern designation command, special pattern change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special pattern reserved number display area 70E becomes "2", and the change performance (display of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying the changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "2."

In addition, if the state after power is restored is during the special pattern changing display (missing change display) and there is no hold memory, the basic flow of operations from timing T1 to timing T8 described above is the same, except that at timing T2, the sub-1 hold display 83 displays "0", and at timing T9, a customer waiting state designation command is received and the change performance does not start.

(Example of when the power-on command is not received correctly when the power is turned on)
89 shows a specific example of a case where the power-on command is not normally received when the power is turned on. Here, a case where the power is turned on with the main RAM 110c initialized without performing a setting change process will be described.

Examples of cases in which the power-on command cannot be received normally include the first case in which power is being supplied to the performance control board 130, but power (main power and backup power) is not being supplied to the main control board 110 because the power line is broken or the power line connector is not connected (including a half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 is broken, and the third case in which the connector of the command communication line is not connected (including a half-inserted state). Here, the first case will be explained.

When the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, power is not supplied to the main control board 110, but power supply to the performance control board 130 begins. At this time, an initial screen displaying the words "Loading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device, and after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the performance control board 130 enters a control state in which it can execute a performance in response to a command.

At the timing of T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process is performed to initialize the game control state, and a power-on command is sent. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on command, even though the control state is such that it is possible to execute a performance according to the command, a return-to-origin process is initiated, and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their original positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state. In addition, the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reservation number "0" is displayed in both the first special chart reservation number display area 70E and the second special chart reservation number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the performance button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends and they turn on while waiting for customers (lights up in white). After that, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the state becomes silent.

Incidentally, the first standby screen was displayed when the performance control board 130 received the power-on command, but rather than displaying the first standby screen immediately, the first standby screen may be displayed after displaying a dark display screen, which is a type of initial screen, for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output when the dark display screen starts to be displayed, or when the first standby screen starts to be displayed.

(Example of when the power restoration command is not received properly when the power is turned on)
FIG. 90 shows a specific example of a case where the power restoration command is not normally received when the power is turned on.

Examples of cases in which the power restoration command cannot be received normally include the first case in which power is being supplied to the performance control board 130, but the main control board 110 is not being supplied with power (only main power) because the power line is broken or the power line connector is not connected (including a half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 is broken, and the third case in which the connector of the command communication line is not connected (including a half-inserted state). Here, the first case will be explained.

When the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at the timing of T1, power is not supplied to the main control board 110, but power supply to the performance control board 130 begins. At this time, an initial screen displaying the words "Loading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device, and after a predetermined time (e.g., 0.5 seconds) has elapsed, the performance control board 130 enters a control state in which it can execute a performance in response to a command.

At the timing of T2, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing is performed to restore the game control state, and a power restoration command for when waiting for customers is sent. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command, a return to origin process is started, and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their original positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state. Also, the audio output device 9 goes into a silent state.

In addition, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reservation number "0" is displayed in both the first special chart reservation number display area 70E and the second special chart reservation number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial emission, the second movable member LED lights up blue as the initial emission, and the performance button LED lights up blue as the initial emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 starts.

At the timing of T7, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends and they turn on (light up in white) while waiting for customers.

Incidentally, the second standby screen was displayed when the performance control board 130 received the power restoration command, but rather than displaying the second standby screen immediately, the second standby screen may be displayed after displaying a dark display screen as a type of initial screen for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output when the dark display screen starts to be displayed, or when the second standby screen starts to be displayed.

In addition, the audio output device 9 is set to a silent state when a power restoration command is received, but it may be set to output an alarm (alarm, etc.) to indicate (make it possible to understand) that the power has been turned ON. In this case, the alarm may be the same as that issued when a power-on command is received, or it may be a different alarm.

(Example of when the power-on command cannot be received properly when the power is on)
FIG. 91 shows a specific example of a case where power-on commands (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be received normally when the power is on.

Cases in which commands cannot be received normally when the power is on include the first case where power is being supplied to the performance control board 130 but not to the main control board 110, the second case where the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 is broken, and the third case where the connector on the command communication line is not connected (including a half-inserted state), but here we will explain the third case.

At the timing of T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON, power supply to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130 begins. At this time, an initial screen with the words "Loading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, if the performance control board 130 does not receive the power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) sent from the main control board 110 and receives a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second reservation number = 0), the image display device will maintain the initial screen displayed, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and performance button LED will remain off.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T3, when a first special chart reserved number designation command (first special chart reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the image display device maintains the initial screen displayed, but the sub first reserved indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T4, when a change start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device momentarily displays the second standby screen in which the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and then the change performance (display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ changing, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying the changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example 1 when power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 92 shows a specific example 1 of a case in which power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed while the system is waiting for customers (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130) after the origin return processing and initial operation processing have already been completed.

Examples of cases where power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted include cases where the power lines (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 are disconnected and then come into contact due to an external factor, and cases where the connectors of the power lines (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 are disconnected (including a half-inserted state) and then become connected.

Here, we will explain the case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed (main power supply, backup power supply) during a customer waiting state (including when a customer waiting demo performance is being performed), which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute performances in response to commands.

At the timing of T1, the machine is in a customer waiting state after the various reels have already completed their return operations, initial operations, and the output of the initialization notification sound. The image display device displays the second standby screen or customer waiting demo performance screen, in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and performance button LED are lit while the machine is waiting for customers.

In addition, if the timing of T1 is the customer waiting state after the end of the variable performance executed after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various reels are finished, the image display device will display a waiting screen in which the miss performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are stopped (still displayed), or a customer waiting demo performance screen.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the second waiting screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general map change indicator 85, sub general map hold indicator 86) also maintains the displayed contents.

Even if only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, if the demo waiting time has elapsed while the standby screen is being displayed (after receiving a customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether the variable performance has ended or not, or after the previous customer waiting demo performance has ended), the customer waiting demo performance will start.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply (main power) to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is initialized and the game control state is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second waiting screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub normal map change indicator 85, sub normal map hold indicator 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state instead of the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reservation number "0" is displayed in both the first special chart reservation number display area 70E and the second special chart reservation number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in blue and white as initial light emission, and the performance button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At time T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at time T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At the timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, and they turn on (light up in white) while waiting for customers, and at the timing T10, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the state becomes silent.

In addition, even if the power supply (including backup power) to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted during a control state in which the performance control board can execute a performance according to a command, such as during the execution of a variable performance (miss variable performance) after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various roles have already been completed, or during the execution of a jackpot performance (opening performance, round performance, ending performance), the screen displayed on the image display device until the power-on command is received at timing T4 is the variable performance screen (miss variable performance screen, jackpot variable performance screen) or the jackpot performance screen (opening performance screen, round game performance screen, ending performance screen), the same as when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted during a customer waiting state, and the return operation or initial operation of various roles (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) is performed, and the initialization notification sound is output from the audio output device 9, etc. are performed.

In addition, if there is a return abnormality in any of the various reels, the initial operation of the various reels or the light (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode will be performed in the same manner as in the specific examples shown in Figures 81, 82, and 83.

(Specific example 2 when power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 93 shows a specific example 2 of a case in which power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed while the system is waiting for customers (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130) after the origin return processing and initial operation processing have already been completed.

Here, we will explain the case where the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of main power is resumed while the supply of backup power continues during a customer waiting state (including when a customer waiting demo performance is being performed), which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance in response to a command.

At the timing of T1, the machine is in a customer waiting state after the various reels have already completed their return operations, initial operations, and the output of the initialization notification sound. The image display device displays the second standby screen or customer waiting demo performance screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and performance button LED are lit while the machine is waiting for customers.

In addition, when the machine is in a waiting state for customers after the end of the variable performance that was performed after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various reels have ended, the image display device will display a standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a indicating a miss and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, or a customer waiting demo performance screen.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general map change indicator 85, sub general map hold indicator 86) also maintains the display contents.

Even if the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped, if the demo waiting time has elapsed while the standby screen is being displayed (after a customer waiting state designation command is received regardless of whether or not the variable performance has ended, or after the previous customer waiting demo performance has ended), the customer waiting demo performance will start.

When the power supply (main power) to the main control board 110 is resumed at the timing of T3, processing is performed to restore the game control state without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device maintains the standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub normal map change indicator 85, sub normal map hold indicator 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command for when waiting for customers sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned off, and the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen, and the audio output device 9 is muted.

In addition, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reservation number "0" is displayed in both the first special chart reservation number display area 70E and the second special chart reservation number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED alternately lights up blue and white as the initial emission, the second movable member LED lights up blue as the initial emission, and the performance button LED lights up blue as the initial emission.

At time T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at time T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends and they turn on (light up in white) while waiting for customers.

If there is a return abnormality in any of the various reels, the initial operation of the various reels or the light (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode will be performed in the same manner as in the specific examples shown in Figures 85, 86, and 87.

(Specific example 3 when power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 94 shows a specific example 3 of a case where power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed during the execution of a variable performance (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130) after the origin return processing and initial operation processing have already been completed.

Here, we will explain the case where the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of main power is resumed while the supply of backup power continues during the execution of a variable performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance in response to a command.

At the timing of T1, the change performance is being performed, the change performance screen is displayed on the image display device, and change performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) are output from the audio output device 9. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing. In addition, a change display is being performed on the sub-first change display 81, and the reserved number "1" is displayed on the sub-first reserve display 83.

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the display of the variable performance screen, and the sub-information display device 80 (sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82, sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84, sub-general map variable display 85, sub-general map hold display 86) also maintains the display contents.

When the power supply (main power) to the main control board 110 is resumed at the timing of T3, processing is performed to restore the game control state without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device maintains the display state of the variable performance screen, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub normal map variable display 85, sub normal map hold display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command for when the special chart is changing, sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned off, the image display device displays a recovery screen including the text "Please resume play", and the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general map change indicator 85, sub general map hold indicator 86) maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED alternately lights up blue and white as the initial emission, the second movable member LED lights up blue as the initial emission, and the performance button LED lights up blue as the initial emission.

At time T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED goes out, and at time T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends and they are turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the performance control board 130 receives the special symbol stop command sent from the main control board 110, a confirmation display is made that the variable performance has lost. At this time, the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and a stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the special symbol TZ is stopped (still displayed), and the sound output device 9 outputs a stop sound "Don ♪". In addition, "1" is displayed in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special symbol reserved number display area 70F. In addition, the sub first variable display 81 displays a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating a loss.

If the result of this variable performance is a jackpot, when the performance control board 130 receives a special symbol stop command, a confirmation display of the variable performance jackpot is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a confirmation screen in which the performance symbol 70a, such as "777", which is the jackpot performance symbol, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the sub-first variable display 81 displays a jackpot that indicates a jackpot.

At the timing of T11, when a change start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) sent from the main control board 110 is received, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying the changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

Note that at timing T6, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED go into their initial light emission state when power is restored, but by making them go into a special light emission state different from the initial light emission state when the lights are turned off or when power is restored, it may be possible to make it clear that a power restoration command has been received during the variable performance.

In addition, if there is a return abnormality in any of the various reels, the initial operation of the various reels or the light (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode will be performed in the same manner as in the specific examples shown in Figures 85, 86, and 87.

In addition, even if the execution time of the variable performance recognized by the performance control board 130 has elapsed before the special chart stop designation command is received, the performance pattern 70a will not be displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped, and the variable display on the sub-1 variable display device and the sub-2 variable display device will not end.

(Specific example 4 when power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 95 shows a specific example 4 of a case where power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed during the execution of a jackpot presentation (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the presentation control board 130) after the origin return processing and initial operation processing have already been completed.

Here, we will explain the case where the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of main power is resumed while the supply of backup power continues during the execution of a jackpot performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance in response to a command.

At the timing of T1, a jackpot performance (here, the first round performance) is being executed, and the image display device displays a jackpot performance (round performance) screen, with a right-hit image MU indicating a right hit being displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, and the jackpot special symbol TZ ("777") being displayed (still displayed) in the lower right corner of the screen. In addition, "1" is displayed as the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second special symbol reserved number display area 70F.

At this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a jackpot performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, the sub-first variable display 81 displays (lights up) the jackpot.

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the big win presentation screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub normal map change indicator 85, sub normal map hold indicator 86) also maintains the display contents.

When the power supply (main power) to the main control board 110 is resumed at the timing of T3, processing is performed to restore the game control state without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the big win presentation screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub normal map change indicator 85, sub normal map hold indicator 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command for the jackpot sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned off, the image display device displays a recovery screen for when a jackpot is in progress, including the text "Please resume play (jackpot in progress)," and the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub normal map change indicator 85, sub normal map hold indicator 86) maintains the display contents.

In addition, instead of displaying the recovery screen for when a jackpot occurs, the same recovery screen as that displayed when power supply (main power only) to the main control board 110 is stopped during the variable performance shown in FIG. 94 may be displayed.

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED alternately lights up blue and white as the initial emission, the second movable member LED lights up blue as the initial emission, and the performance button LED lights up blue as the initial emission.

At time T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED goes out, and at time T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends and they are turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the performance control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the second opening (second round) sent from the main control board 110, the big win performance (round performance) is resumed. At this time, the image display device displays a special big win performance (round performance) screen instead of the normal big win performance screen, and the special big win symbol TZ ("777") is not displayed.

In addition, "1" is displayed as the first reserved number in the first special reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed as the second reserved number in the second special reserved number display area 70F. In addition, the sound output device 9 outputs a jackpot performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit during the jackpot.

After that, when the performance control board 130 receives a round number designation command for the third opening (third round) sent from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the normal jackpot performance (round performance) screen instead of the special jackpot performance (round performance) screen.

Note that if the performance control board 130 receives an ending designation command, rather than a round number designation command while the special big win performance screen is being displayed, the normal ending performance screen will be displayed.

In addition, when a round number designation command is received while a special jackpot presentation screen is being displayed, instead of switching to a normal jackpot presentation screen, the special jackpot presentation screen may be continued until the presentation control board 130 receives an ending designation command, or the special jackpot presentation screen may be continued until the presentation control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a fluctuation start command after the jackpot game has ended.

In addition, at the timing of T6, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED go into their initial light emission mode when power is restored, but by making them into a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode when the lights are turned off or when power is restored, it may be possible to make it possible to know that a power restoration command has been received during the variable performance.

In addition, if there is a return abnormality in any of the various reels, the initial operation of the various reels or the light (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode will be performed in the same manner as in the specific examples shown in Figures 85, 86, and 87.

In addition, in Figures 92 to 95, when a power-on command or a power-restoration command is received, the various parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) are reset, but it is also possible to perform the initial operation of the various parts without performing the reset operation.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 80 to 95, when the game control state is initialized, a first initial performance pattern ("135") is displayed in which the identification characters (numbers, letters, etc.) in the multiple performance patterns 70a form a first combination, and when the game control state is restored, a second initial performance pattern ("753") is displayed in which the identification characters in the multiple performance patterns 70a form a second combination. This makes it easier to understand whether the game control state has been initialized or restored.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 80 to 95, when the game control state is restored, it is possible to display a specific display suggesting the resumption of power supply before displaying the performance pattern 70a on the image display device, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device when the state is restored to waiting for customers (only displaying the initial screen) is different from the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device during the variable display of special patterns and after restoration to no reserved memory/reserved memory (displaying the initial screen + recovery screen). Therefore, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the game control state is restored, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 80 to 95, it is possible to display the number of reserved memories in the reserved icon display area (first reserved icon display area 70B, second reserved icon display area 70D) and the sub reserved display (first sub reserved display 83, second sub reserved display 84), and when the power supply that was stopped while there are reserved memories is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the reserved icon display area does not display the reserved memory when the image display device is displaying a specific display (display of the recovery screen) suggesting the resumption of power supply, but the sub reserved display can display the reserved memory. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to know the number of reserved memories before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 80 to 95, when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting demo performance is resumed and the game control state is restored, the customer waiting demo performance screen is not displayed again, but the second standby screen is displayed in a state in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, is stopped (statically displayed). Therefore, it is not necessary to be aware of whether the state before the power supply was stopped was during the customer waiting demo performance or not, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control when the game control state is restored after the power supply is resumed.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 80 to 95, when the power supply that was stopped during a variation performance is resumed and the game control state is restored, the sub-variable display (sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82) is configured not to perform a variable display (blinking display) during the variable display of the special pattern, even if the variable display of the special pattern is being executed (the recovery screen is displayed). This makes it possible to reduce the processing load when the game control state is restored after the power supply is resumed.

In addition, when the game control state is restored and the special symbol variable display is being executed (the recovery screen is displayed), the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82) may display a variable display (blinking display). In this way, it becomes easier to understand that the special symbol variable display is being executed when the game control state is restored.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 80 to 95, the sub-reserve indicators (sub-first reserve indicator 83, sub-second reserve indicator 84) are configured to display the number of reserved balls from the time when the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device (before the sub-variable indicator displays a variable display and when the special chart reserve number designation command is received). This allows the player to know the number of reserved balls immediately after the game control state is restored, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

When the sub-variation indicators (sub-first variation indicator 81, sub-second variation indicator 82) are performing a variation display (flashing display) while the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device, the sub-reservation indicators (sub-first reservation indicator 83, sub-second reservation indicator 84) may be configured to display the number of reserved balls in accordance with the start of this variation display. In this way, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the special pattern variation display is being performed when the game control state is restored, and the number of reserved balls at that time.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 80 to 95, when power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the return operation of the various reels is performed at the same timing as when power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, that is, from the timing when the performance pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (the timing when the initial screen ends). This prevents the control of the return operation of the various reels from becoming complicated, and makes it possible to reduce the processing load for the return operation of the various reels.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 80 to 95, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the light-emitting parts of the various parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) are turned off during the recovery operation of the various parts. This makes it possible to distinguish this from the initial operation of the various parts, and to know that the recovery operation is in progress.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 80 to 95, if any of the various reels have a return abnormality, the light-emitting part of the reel that has the return abnormality will flash red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the user of the abnormality. This makes it possible to identify the reel that has the return abnormality.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 80 to 95, when an abnormality is notified by flashing the light-emitting part of a reel that has had a return abnormality in red, the abnormality notification continues until the next variable performance starts. This makes it possible to reliably notify the player of the reel that has had a return abnormality.

If a reel has a return abnormality, a return operation may be performed to return the reel that had the return abnormality to its original position when the next variable performance begins. Also, if an abnormality is notified by causing the light-emitting part of the reel that had the return abnormality to flash red, the abnormality notification may be cancelled when the performance button 17 is operated.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 80 to 95, when the power supply that was stopped during the waiting state is resumed and the game control state is restored, the initial operation of the various roles (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) is performed from the timing after the performance pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (the timing when the performance pattern 70a is displayed if the recovery operation is completed immediately), but when the power supply that was stopped during the variable display of the special pattern is resumed and the game control state is restored, the initial operation of the various roles is performed from the timing before the performance pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (while the recovery screen is displayed). Therefore, it is possible to perform the initial operation of the various roles at an appropriate timing depending on the state when the power supply occurs.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 80 to 95, in the case of power-on involving initialization of the main RAM 110c or power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c, the initial operation is performed after the sub-reserve indicators (sub-first reserve indicator 83, sub-second reserve indicator 84) have become in a display state showing the number of reserved items when the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device (during the display of the changing special pattern and before the display of the performance pattern 70a). Therefore, the initial operation of the board device can be performed after the player has grasped the number of reserved items (future game progress), making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 80 to 95, in the case of power-on involving initialization of the main RAM 110c or power restoration without initialization of the main RAM 110c, the frame role (effect button 17) is configured to perform its initial operation after the sub-reserve indicators (sub-first reserve indicator 83, sub-second reserve indicator 84) have switched to a display mode showing the number of reserved items when the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device (during the display of the changing special patterns and before the display of the performance pattern 70a). Therefore, the initial operation of the frame role can be performed after the player has grasped the number of reserved items (future game progress), making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 80 to 95, when power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the initial operation of the various reels is performed at the same timing as when power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, that is, from the timing after the performance pattern 70a is displayed on the image display device (the timing when the performance pattern 70a is displayed if the return operation is completed immediately). This prevents the control related to the initial operation of the various reels from becoming complicated, and makes it possible to reduce the processing load related to the initial operation of the various reels.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 80 to 95, even if the stop screen is displayed after the recovery screen is displayed, the sound of the effect pattern 70a stopping is output. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the variable effect that was being performed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, making it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, if the stop screen is displayed after the recovery screen is displayed, the stopping sound of the performance pattern 70a may not be output.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 80 to 95, if the power-on commands (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be received, the initial screen is simply displayed and the recovery operations, initial operations, and initial light emission of the various parts are not performed. This makes it possible to grasp that an abnormality has occurred that prevents the power-on commands from being received.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 80 to 95, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be received, if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to the command and receives a special chart reserve number designation command from the main control board 110 based on the winning of a gaming ball into the starting hole, a winning sound is output. Therefore, even when the initial screen is displayed, it is possible to accurately notify that a gaming ball has won into the starting hole.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 80 to 95, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be received, if the performance control board 130 receives a fluctuation start command from the main control board 110 while in a control state in which it is possible to execute a performance according to the command, the fluctuation performance is executed without displaying the standby screen. This means that the start of the fluctuation performance is executed without delay, making it possible to execute the fluctuation performance from start to finish within the range of the fluctuation time of the special pattern.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 80 to 95, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be received, if the performance control board 130 receives a change start command from the main control board 110 while in a control state in which it is able to execute a performance according to the command, the change performance is executed without executing the return operations or initial operations of the various reels. Therefore, it is possible to execute a performance using various reels without being hindered by the return operations or initial operations during the execution of a change performance.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 80 to 95, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, such as when it is waiting for customers after the return operations and initial operations (including initial light emission) of various props have already been completed, if a power-on command or power restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by stopping and then restarting the power supply to the main control board 110, the return operations and initial operations (including initial light emission) of various props are executed again. Therefore, since the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 80 to 95, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance after the return operation of various reels and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have already been completed, if a power-on command or a power restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by stopping and then restarting the power supply to the main control board 110, the return operation of various reels and the initial operation (including initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 80 to 95, even if the return operations and initial operations (including initial light emission) of various reels have already been completed during a big win game, if a power-on command or a power-restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by stopping and then restarting the power supply to the main control board 110 alone, the return operations and initial operations (including initial light emission) of various reels are executed again. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 80 to 95, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, such as when it is waiting for customers after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished, if a power-on command is received from the main control board 110, such as when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the initialization notification sound is output again. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 80 to 95, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished, if the power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 80 to 95, even if the presentation control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute presentations according to commands, such as during a jackpot game (opening presentation, round presentation, ending presentation) after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the presentation control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the presentation control means.

When a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, the audio output device 9 may simply output an initialization notification sound rather than performing the recovery operations and initial operations (including initial light emission) of the various parts.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 80 to 95, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, such as when it is waiting for customers after the return operations of various props and the initial operations (including initial light emission) have already been completed, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and if a power restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since the commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

Even if the presentation control board 130 is in a control state where it can execute presentations according to commands, such as during a variable presentation after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished or during a jackpot game, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the presentation control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the presentation control means.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 80 to 95, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance after the return operation of various parts and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have already ended, if a power restoration command is received from the main control board 110, such as when only the power supply (main power) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the return screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 80 to 95, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, such as during a big win performance after the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have already ended, if a power restoration command is received from the main control board 110, such as by restarting the power supply (main power) to the main control board 110 after it has stopped, the initial screen is not displayed, and a recovery screen for the big win is displayed. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 80 to 95, even if the presentation control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute presentations according to commands, such as during a variable presentation after the output of the initialization notification sound has already ended or during a big win game, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and if a power restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a discrepancy between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the presentation control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the presentation control means.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 80 to 95, in a control state (waiting for customers, variable presentation, big win presentation) in which the presentation control board 130 can execute presentations in response to commands, even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the presentation control board 130 continues, the previous display screen can continue to be displayed. Therefore, the player will not feel uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 80 to 95, during a control state (waiting for customers, variable presentation, big win presentation) in which the presentation control board 130 can execute presentations in response to commands, even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the presentation control board 130 continues and then the power supply is resumed, the previous display screen can continue to be displayed. Therefore, the player will not feel uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Variation 1 when power supply to the main control board is stopped and then resumed)
Figure 96 shows variant example 1, in which power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed while the machine is waiting for customers (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130) after the origin return process and initial operation process have already been completed.

Here, we will explain the case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is resumed after only the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped during the customer waiting state, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute performances in response to commands.

At the timing of T1, the machine is in a state of waiting for customers after the return operations, initial operations, and output of the initialization notification sound of various reels have already been completed, and the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and performance button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

In addition, if the timing of T1 is the waiting state for customers after the end of the variable performance executed after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various roles have ended, the image display device will display a standby screen in which the miss performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (including the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the second waiting screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general map change indicator 85, sub general map hold indicator 86) also maintains the display contents.

Even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, if the demo waiting time has elapsed while the waiting screen is displayed (after receiving a customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether the variable performance has ended or not, or after the previous customer waiting demo performance has ended), the customer waiting demo performance will start.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device displays an initial screen including the words "Loading" instead of the second standby screen, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and performance button LED are turned off.

At this time, the sub information display devices 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general map change indicator 85, and sub general map hold indicator 86) are hidden.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain off, and instead of the initial screen, the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reservation number "0" is displayed in both the first special chart reservation number display area 70E and the second special chart reservation number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, starting the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up alternately in blue and white as initial illumination, and the performance button LED lights up in the order of red → green → blue as initial illumination.

At time T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at time T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At the timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, and they turn on (light up in white) while waiting for customers, and at the timing T10, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the state becomes silent.

In addition, even if the power supply (including backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the execution of a customer waiting demo performance after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various roles have already been completed, during the execution of a variable performance (miss variable performance, jackpot variable performance), or during the execution of a jackpot performance (opening, round play, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at timing T3 is the customer waiting demo performance screen, the variable performance screen (miss variable performance screen, jackpot variable performance screen), or the jackpot performance screen (opening performance screen, round play performance screen, ending performance screen), but is basically the same as the examples shown in Figures 93 to 95.

(Variation 2 when power supply to the main control board is stopped and then resumed)
Figure 97 shows variant example 2, in which power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed while the system is waiting for customers (power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130) after the origin return process and initial operation process have already been completed.

Here, we will explain the case where the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of main power is resumed while the supply of backup power continues during the waiting for customers state, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute performances in response to commands.

At the timing of T1, if the machine is in a customer waiting state after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various reels have already been completed, the image display device displays the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while the machine is waiting for customers.

In addition, when the machine is in a waiting state for customers after the end of the variable performance that was performed after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various reels have ended, the image display device will display a standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a indicating a miss and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, or a customer waiting demo performance screen.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general map change indicator 85, sub general map hold indicator 86) also maintains the display contents.

Even if only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, if the demo waiting time has elapsed while the waiting screen is displayed (after receiving a customer waiting state designation command regardless of whether the variable performance has ended or not, or after the previous customer waiting demo performance has ended), the customer waiting demo performance will start.

When power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed at the timing of T3, processing is performed to restore the game control state without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device displays an initial screen containing the words "Loading", and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and effect button LED are turned off.

At this time, the sub information display devices 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general map change indicator 85, and sub general map hold indicator 86) are hidden.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command for when waiting for customers sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the second standby screen in place of the initial screen, in which the effect pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state.

In addition, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reservation number "0" is displayed in both the first special chart reservation number display area 70E and the second special chart reservation number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED alternately lights up blue and white as the initial emission, the second movable member LED lights up blue as the initial emission, and the performance button LED lights up blue as the initial emission.

At time T7, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and at time T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends and they turn on (light up in white) while waiting for customers.

In addition, even if the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted during the execution of the customer waiting demo performance after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various roles have already been completed, during the execution of the variable performance (miss variable performance, jackpot variable performance), or during the execution of the jackpot performance (opening, round game, ending), the screen displayed on the image display device at the timing of T3 is the customer waiting demo performance screen, the variable performance screen (miss variable performance screen, jackpot variable performance screen), or the jackpot performance screen (opening performance screen, round game performance screen, ending performance screen), it will be basically the same as the examples shown in Figures 93 to 95.

In addition, in Figures 96 to 97, when a power-on command or a power-restoration command is received, the various parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) are reset, but it is also possible to perform the initial operation of the various parts without performing the reset operation.

In this way, according to the modified example shown in Figures 96 to 97, when the power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed, the standby screen on which the performance pattern 70a is displayed is switched to an initial screen that is different from the standby screen. Therefore, it is possible to know that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

In addition, according to the modified example shown in Figures 96 to 97, when the power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned off while the initial screen is being displayed. This makes it easier to know that the power supply to the main control board 110 has stopped (that there is an abnormality in the main control board 110).

In addition, instead of starting the initial operation of the various reels when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen, the initial operation of the various reels may be started when the initial screen is switched to or between the time when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen.

In addition, rather than switching from the standby screen to the initial screen when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the standby screen may be switched to the initial screen when a power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) is received. In this case, the initial operation of the various reels may be started at the timing when the standby screen is switched to the initial screen, or at any time between when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen, or the initial operation of the various reels may be started at the timing when the initial screen is switched to the standby screen.

In addition, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, instead of switching from the standby screen to the initial screen, the standby screen may be switched to a non-display state and then the initial screen may be displayed. In this case, the initial operation of the various reels may be started from the timing of switching from the non-display state to the initial screen, or from the timing between switching from the initial screen to the standby screen, or the initial operation of the various reels may be started when switching from the initial screen to the standby screen.

(Modification when the second movable member has a return abnormality after power is turned on)
FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a modified example in which there is a return abnormality in the second movable base 74 after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on and power supply starts, an initial screen with the words "Loading" is displayed as the initial operation of the image display device.

At the timing of T2, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the effect button LED remain off, and the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reservation number "0" is displayed in both the first special chart reservation number display area 70E and the second special chart reservation number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T3, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends, the return operation of the second movable member 74 begins. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T4, when the origin return process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED flash red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the return abnormality, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the performance button LED lights up in the order red → green → blue as the initial light emission.

At the timing of T5, when the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, the initial light emission of the performance button LED ends and the LED turns on while waiting for customers (lights white), and the initial operation process ends without the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 being executed.

At the timing of T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and becomes silent, and at the timing of T7, when a first special chart reserved number designation command (first special chart reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the first reserved number in the first special chart reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved indicator 83 becomes a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, the sub-first variable indicator 81 starts displaying the variables, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while varying, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

In addition, even if there is a recovery abnormality in the first movable member 73 when the power is turned on, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED will flash red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality, and the initial operation process will end without executing the initial operations of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74.

Even when the power is restored, if there is a recovery abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED will flash red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of the recovery abnormality, and the initial operation process will end without the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74 being performed.

In this way, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 98, if there is a return abnormality in either the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the initial operation is not performed not only for the movable member with the return abnormality, but also for the movable members without the return abnormality. This makes it possible to prevent an inconvenience such as one movable member colliding with the other movable member and breaking down. It is also possible to prevent the movable member (particularly the movable member without a return abnormality) from ceasing to operate during the execution of a game (variable performance, jackpot game), making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 98, if there is a recovery abnormality in either the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, both the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED will flash red to notify of the recovery abnormality. Therefore, it is easier to grasp that there is an abnormality in the movable member compared to when only the movable member LED provided on the one movable member having a recovery abnormality flashes red.

In addition, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 98, even if there is a return abnormality in either the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the initial operation is performed for the performance button 17 that is not at risk of colliding with the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74. Therefore, it is possible to check the operation of the performance button 17, and it is possible to grasp the abnormality in the performance button 17.

In addition, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 98, even if there is a recovery abnormality in either the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the performance button LED provided on the performance button 17 will emit an initial light without flashing red to notify of a recovery abnormality. This makes it easier to know that there is no recovery abnormality in the performance button 17.

In addition, if there is a recovery abnormality in the first movable member 73 or the second movable member 74, the initial operation process may be terminated without executing the initial operation for the performance button 17 as well. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED may be made to flash red to notify the occurrence of a recovery abnormality.

In addition, if there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button 17, the initial operation process may be terminated without executing the initial operation for the first movable member 73 and the second movable member 74. In this case, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED may be made to flash red to notify the occurrence of a recovery abnormality.

(Modification of the initial processing of the role of the lamp control unit)
A modified example of the initial processing of the reel by the lamp control unit 150 will be described with reference to Fig. 99. Fig. 99 is a flow chart showing a modified example of the initial processing of the reel by the lamp control unit 150.
In this case, the same processes as those in the initial processing of the reel shown in FIG. 75 are denoted by the same reference numerals and their explanations are omitted, and different processes are explained.

In step R101A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not there is a power ON flag that is set in the lamp RAM 150c when power supply starts. If there is no power ON flag, the process proceeds to step R102A. If there is a power ON flag, the power ON flag is cleared in step R101B.

In step R102A, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether or not a power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) sent from the main control board 110 has been received. If a power-on command has been received, the process proceeds to step R102B. If a power-on command has not been received, the process proceeds to step R104.

In step R102B, the lamp CPU 150a determines whether a predetermined time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the power was turned on. If the predetermined period (e.g., 60 seconds after the previous power was turned on, during which recovery operations and initial operations should be completed) has elapsed, the process proceeds to step R103; if the predetermined time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step R104.

In step R103, the lamp CPU 150a sets the initial processing number, which is updated during each process of the reel initial processing, to "1" to execute the origin return process for the reels (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, and performance button 17).

In this way, according to the reel initializing process shown in FIG. 99, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started, the return operation and initializing operation of the various reels are started. Therefore, there is no need to be aware of whether the game control state is being initialized or restored, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the return operation and initializing operation of the various reels after the power supply is started.

In addition, according to the reel initialization process shown in FIG. 99, when a power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) is received after a predetermined period of time (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed since the start of power supply to the gaming machine 1, the recovery and initialization operations of the various reels are performed again. This makes it possible to know that the main control board 110 has not started up normally and that the power-on command has been sent later than usual (an abnormality has occurred in the power line from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110).

When a power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) is received, the recovery operations and initial operations of various devices may be performed regardless of the time that has elapsed since power supply to the gaming machine 1 was started. In this way, it is not necessary to be aware of the time that has elapsed since power supply to the gaming machine 1 was started, and it is possible to simplify the processing when a power-on command is received.

(Example of when there is no recovery error in various parts after power is turned on)
Figure 100 shows a specific example in which there are no recovery abnormalities in the various reels (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c, assuming a modified example of the reels initial processing shown in Figure 99.

Note that there are two types of power-on that involve initializing the main RAM 110c: power-on that initializes the main RAM 110c after a setting change process is performed, and power-on that initializes the main RAM 110c without performing a setting change process. Here, we will explain the case where the main RAM 110c is initialized without performing a setting change process.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the image display device displays a dark initial screen as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general change indicator 85 are in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process ends, and the initial operation process starts, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begins.

Furthermore, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED changes to alternately light up red and white, and the light emission mode of the performance button LED changes to light up in the order red → green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is being cleared".

Furthermore, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reservation number "0" is displayed in both the first special chart reservation number display area 70E and the second special chart reservation number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T4, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at the timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit (white) while waiting for customers. At the timing of T7, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the machine enters a silent state.

At the timing of T8, when a first special chart reserved number designation command (first special chart reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the first reserved number in the first special chart reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T9, when a change start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying the changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of when the second movable member has a return abnormality after power is turned on)
Fig. 101 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the second movable member 74 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c, assuming the modified example of the role initialization process shown in Fig. 99. Here, a case where power-on is performed with the main RAM 110c initialized without performing a setting change process will be described.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the image display device displays a dark initial screen as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general change indicator 85 remain in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T3, when the origin return process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. In addition, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality.

Furthermore, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light up red and white, and the performance button LED lights up in the order red → green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is being cleared".

Furthermore, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reservation number "0" is displayed in both the first special chart reservation number display area 70E and the second special chart reservation number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At timing T4, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at timing T5, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, and the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74.

At timing T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the device enters a silent state.

At the timing of T7, when a first special chart reserved number designation command (first special chart reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the first reserved number in the first special chart reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the sub-first variable display 81 starts displaying the variables, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while varying, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of when the first movable member has a return abnormality after power is turned on)
Fig. 102 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the first movable member 73 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c, on the premise of the modified example of the role initialization process shown in Fig. 99. Here, a case where power-on is performed with the main RAM 110c initialized without performing a setting change process will be described.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the image display device displays a dark initial screen as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general change indicator 85 remain in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the recovery operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends while a recovery abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the recovery operation of the second movable member 74 starts. At this time, the first movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a recovery abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the performance button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on command sent from the main control board 110 as a command when the power is turned on, the light emission mode of the second movable member LED changes to alternately light up red and white, and the light emission mode of the performance button LED changes to light up in the order red → green → blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is being cleared".

Furthermore, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reservation number "0" is displayed in both the first special chart reservation number display area 70E and the second special chart reservation number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At timing T4, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at timing T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, and the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operation of the first movable member 73.

At the timing of T7, when a first special chart reserved number designation command (first special chart reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the first reserved number in the first special chart reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the sub-first variable display 81 starts displaying the variables, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while varying, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Example of when the performance button does not return to normal after power is turned on)
Fig. 103 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the performance button 17 has a return abnormality after power-on accompanied by initialization of the main RAM 110c, assuming the modified example of the role initialization process shown in Fig. 99. Here, a case where power-on is performed with the main RAM 110c initialized without performing a setting change process is described.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the image display device displays a dark initial screen as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general change indicator 85 remain in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the recovery operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends while a recovery abnormality has occurred in the performance button 17, the recovery operation of the second movable member 74 starts. At this time, the performance button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a recovery abnormality.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the performance button 17 is not started.

Furthermore, when the performance control board 130 receives a power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the light emission state of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED changes to alternately light up red and white.

At this time, the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is being cleared".

Furthermore, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reservation number "0" is displayed in both the first special chart reservation number display area 70E and the second special chart reservation number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At timing T4, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At time T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED turn on (light white) while waiting for customers. At time T6, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (e.g., 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the device becomes silent.

At the timing of T7, when a first special chart reserved number designation command (first special chart reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the first reserved number in the first special chart reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the performance button LED ends, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

In the specific example shown in Figures 100 to 103, the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized without a setting change process has been described. However, in the case of power-on in which the main RAM 110c is initialized after a setting change has been made, a dark screen (initial screen) is displayed, and then a setting change designation command is received by the performance control board 130, causing a setting change screen to be displayed. After that, a power-on designation command is received by the performance control board 130, causing the first standby screen to be displayed, and the return and initial operations of the various parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) are started. In addition, the first standby screen may be displayed by receiving a setting value designation command.

(Example of when no abnormality occurs in various parts after power is restored)
Figure 104 is a diagram showing a specific example in which there are no recovery abnormalities in the various reels (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) after power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c, assuming a modified example of the reels initial processing shown in Figure 99.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the image display device displays a dark initial screen as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general change indicator 85 are in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process ends, and the initial operation process starts, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begins.

Furthermore, when the performance control board 130 receives the first power restoration command as a power-on command sent from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light up blue and white, and the light emission mode of the second movable member LED and the performance button LED changes to light up blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state.

Furthermore, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reservation number "0" is displayed in both the first special chart reservation number display area 70E and the second special chart reservation number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T4, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at the timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit (white) while waiting for customers.

At the timing of T7, when a first special chart reserved number designation command (first special chart reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the first reserved number in the first special chart reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying the changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of a case where the second movable member has a return abnormality after power is restored)
Figure 105 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the second movable member 74 after power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c, assuming a modified example of the reel initializing processing shown in Figure 99.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the image display device displays a dark initial screen as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general change indicator 85 remain in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T3, when the origin return process ends with a return abnormality occurring in the second movable member 74, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the second movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a return abnormality.

Furthermore, when the performance control board 130 receives a power restoration command for when customers are waiting, sent from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternate between blue and white, and the light emission mode of the performance button LED changes to light blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state.

Furthermore, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reservation number "0" is displayed in both the first special chart reservation number display area 70E and the second special chart reservation number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T4, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at the timing T5, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, and the initial operation process ends without executing the initial operation of the second movable member 74, and the first movable member LED and the performance button LED turn on (white light) while waiting for customers.

At the timing of T6, when a first special chart reserved number designation command (first special chart reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the first reserved number in the first special chart reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T7, when a change start command (special pattern designation command, special pattern change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special pattern reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the second movable member LED ends, the sub-first variable display 81 starts displaying the variables, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while varying, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example of a case where the first movable member has a return abnormality after power is restored)
Figure 106 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the first movable member 73 after power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c, assuming a modified example of the reel initializing processing shown in Figure 99.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the image display device displays a dark initial screen as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off.
In addition, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general change indicator 85 maintain a hidden state.

At the timing of T2, when the recovery operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends while a recovery abnormality has occurred in the first movable member 73, the recovery operation of the second movable member 74 starts. At this time, the first movable member LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a recovery abnormality, and the second movable member LED and the performance button LED remain off.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the second movable member 74 and the performance button 17 is started.

Furthermore, when the performance control board 130 receives a power restoration command for when waiting for customers sent from the main control board 110, the light emission mode of the second movable member LED and the performance button LED changes to light up blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state.

Furthermore, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reservation number "0" is displayed in both the first special chart reservation number display area 70E and the second special chart reservation number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At timing T4, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at timing T5, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 ends, and the initial operation process ends without the initial operation of the first movable member 73 being executed, and the first movable member LED and the performance button LED turn on (white) while waiting for customers.

At the timing of T6, when a first special chart reserved number designation command (first special chart reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the first reserved number in the first special chart reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T7, when a change start command (special pattern designation command, special pattern change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special pattern reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the first movable member LED ends, the sub-first variable display 81 starts displaying the variables, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while varying, and the sub-first hold display 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Example of when the performance button has a recovery error after power is restored)
Figure 107 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where there is a recovery abnormality in the performance button 17 after power is restored without initializing the main RAM 110c, assuming a modified example of the reel initializing processing shown in Figure 99.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the image display device displays a dark initial screen as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general change indicator 85 remain in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the recovery operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 ends while a recovery abnormality has occurred in the performance button 17, the recovery operation of the second movable member 74 starts. At this time, the performance button LED flashes red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the occurrence of a recovery abnormality, and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED remain in an off state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed and the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is started, but the initial operation of the performance button 17 is not started.

Furthermore, when the performance control board 130 receives a power restoration command sent from the main control board 110 for when customers are waiting, the light emission mode of the first movable member LED changes to alternately light up in blue and white, and the light emission mode of the second movable member LED changes to light up in blue.

At this time, the image display device displays the second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state.

Furthermore, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reservation number "0" is displayed in both the first special chart reservation number display area 70E and the second special chart reservation number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At timing T4, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At timing T5, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends and the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED turn on (white light) while waiting for customers.

At the timing of T6, when a first special chart reserved number designation command (first special chart reserved number = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the first reserved number in the first special chart reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the first reserved icon is displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B, the sub first reserved display 83 becomes in a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T7, when a change start command (special pattern designation command, special pattern change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special pattern reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the abnormality notification period by the performance button LED ends, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Example of when the state after power recovery is that the special pattern is changing and there is a reserved memory)
Figure 108 is a diagram showing a specific example where, assuming a modified example of the reel initial processing shown in Figure 99, the state after power is restored without initialization of the main RAM 110c is when the special pattern is changing (missing change display) and there is reserved memory.

At timing T1, when the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned ON and power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the image display device displays a dark initial screen as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, and the sub-general change indicator 85 are in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T3, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process ends, and the initial operation process starts, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begins.

Furthermore, when the performance control board 130 receives a power restoration command for when the special chart is changing, transmitted from the main control board 110, the light emission state of the first movable member LED changes to alternate between blue and white, and the light emission state of the second movable member LED and the performance button LED changes to light blue. At this time, the image display device displays a recovery screen including the text "Please resume play," and the audio output device 9 remains silent.

In addition, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number = 3, second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the image display device displays a recovery screen, so the second reservation number is not displayed in the first special chart reservation number display area 70E or the second special chart reservation number display area 70F.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular map change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "3", and the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84 and the sub-regular map reserve indicator 86 change to a display mode showing "0".

At the timing T4, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at the timing T5, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At timing T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are turned off.

When a special symbol stop command is received from the main control board 110 at the timing of T7, the image display device displays the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and a stop screen (same as the second standby screen) in which the special symbol TZ is displayed in a stopped state (static display), and a stop sound is output from the audio output device 9.

At this time, three first hold icons are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B, but the icon display area 70C is secured in a state in which it is possible to display a background image or other presentation image (the pedestal image is displayed), but the icons are not displayed.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "2", and the change performance (display of the performance pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying the changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "2."

(Example of when the power-on command is not received correctly when the power is turned on)
Figure 109 is a diagram showing a specific example of a case where the power-on command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on, assuming a modified example of the reel initial processing shown in Figure 99.

Examples of cases in which the power-on command cannot be received normally include the first case in which power is being supplied to the performance control board 130, but power (main power and backup power) is not being supplied to the main control board 110 because the power line is broken or the power line connector is not connected (including a half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 is broken, and the third case in which the connector of the command communication line is not connected (including a half-inserted state). Here, the first case will be explained.

When the power switch of the gaming machine 1 is turned on at timing T1, no power is supplied to the main control board 110. When power supply starts, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the image display device displays a dark initial screen as an initial operation, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain off. In addition, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, the sub-first hold indicator 83, the sub-second hold indicator 84, the sub-general map change indicator 85, and the sub-general map hold indicator 86 are in a non-display state.

At the timing of T2, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T3, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started, at the timing of T4, the initial operation of the performance button 17 is completed, at the timing of T5, the initial operation of the first movable member 73 is completed, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is started, at the timing of T6, the initial operation process is completed, and the performance control board 130 enters a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command.

At the timing of T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, a process is carried out to initialize the control state of the game, and a power-on command is sent. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on command, even though the control state is such that it is possible to execute a performance according to the command, a return-to-origin process is started, and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their original positions.

At this time, the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ is displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is being cleared".

After that, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED light up alternately in red and white as initial light emission, and the performance button LED lights up in the order red → green → blue as initial light emission.

At timing T9, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at timing T10, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At the timing of T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, the initial illumination of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED ends and they turn on while waiting for customers (lights up in white). After that, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the machine enters a silent state.

Incidentally, the first standby screen was displayed when the performance control board 130 received the power-on command, but rather than displaying the first standby screen immediately, the first standby screen may be displayed after displaying a dark display screen, which is a type of initial screen, for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds). In this case, the initialization notification sound may be output when the dark display screen starts to be displayed, or when the first standby screen starts to be displayed.

(Example of when the power restoration command is not received properly when the power is turned on)
Figure 110 shows a specific example of a case where the power restoration command cannot be received normally when the power is turned on, assuming a modified example of the reel initial processing shown in Figure 99.

Examples of cases in which the power restoration command cannot be received normally include the first case in which power is being supplied to the performance control board 130, but the main control board 110 is not being supplied with power (only main power) because the power line is broken or the power line connector is not connected (including a half-inserted state), the second case in which the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 is broken, and the third case in which the connector of the command communication line is not connected (including a half-inserted state). Here, the first case will be explained.

Note that the timing from T1 to T7 is the same as the timing from T1 to T7 in Figure 109, so we will omit the explanation here and only explain the timing from T7 onwards.

At the timing of T7, when the power line to the main control board 110 is connected, processing is performed to restore the control state of the game, and a power restoration command is sent. Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command, even though the control state is such that it is possible to execute the performance according to the command, a return to origin process is initiated, and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their original positions.

At this time, the image display device displays the "753" performance pattern 70a, which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the second standby screen in which the special pattern TZ is displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 remains silent.

After that, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 starts. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED remain in the off state.

At the timing of T8, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started. At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as the initial light emission, and the second movable member LED and the performance button LED light up in blue as the initial light emission.

At timing T9, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at timing T10, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At timing T11, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial illumination of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED ends and they turn on (lights up in white) while waiting for customers.

In the example, the second standby screen was displayed when the performance control board 130 received the power restoration command, but instead of displaying the second standby screen immediately, it may be configured to display a dark display screen, which is a type of initial screen, for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 0.5 seconds), and then display the second standby screen.

In addition, the audio output device 9 is set to a silent state when a power restoration command is received, but it may be set to output an alarm (alarm, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 30 seconds) to indicate (make it possible to understand) that the power has been turned ON. In this case, the alarm may be the same as the alarm that was output when the power-on command was received, or it may be a different alarm.

In addition, in Figures 109 to 110, when a power-on command or a power-restoration command is received, the various parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) are reset, but it is also possible to perform the initial operation of the various parts without performing the reset operation.

(Example of when the power-on command cannot be received properly when the power is on)
Figure 111 shows a specific example of a case where the power-on commands (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be received normally when the power is turned on, assuming a modified example of the reel initial processing shown in Figure 99.

The power restoration command cannot be received normally if power is not being supplied to the main control board 110, if the command communication line from the main control board 110 to the performance control board 130 is broken, or if the connector on the command communication line is not connected (including a half-inserted state), etc.

Note that the timing from T1 to T5 is the same as the timing from T1 to T5 in Figure 109, so we will omit the explanation here and only explain the timing from T5 onwards.

At the timing of T5, if the performance control board 130 does not receive the first power restoration designation command as a power-on command sent from the main control board 110, but receives a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second reservation number = 0), the image display device will maintain the initial screen displayed.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T6, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the display state of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED changes to an off state.

At the timing of T7, when a command to designate the number of reserved first special symbols (number of reserved first special symbols = 1) based on the winning of a game ball into the first starting hole 45 is received, the initial screen remains displayed on the image display device, but the sub-first reserved indicator 83 changes to a display mode indicating "1", and the winning sound "Pong ♪" is output from the audio output device 9.

At the timing of T8, when a change start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) is received from the main control board 110, the image display device momentarily displays the second standby screen in which the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and then the change performance (display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ changing, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying the changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

(Specific example 1 when power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 112 shows a specific example 1 of a case where, assuming a modified example of the reel initial processing shown in Figure 99, the power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed in a waiting state for customers (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130) after the origin return processing and initial operation processing have already been completed.

Examples of cases where power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted include cases where the power lines (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 are disconnected and then come into contact due to an external factor, and cases where the connectors of the power lines (main power line, backup power line) from the power supply board 160 to the main control board 110 are disconnected (including a half-inserted state) and then become connected.

Here, we will explain the case where the power supply (main power supply, backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed (main power supply, backup power supply) during a customer waiting state (including when a customer waiting demo performance is being performed), which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute performances in response to commands.

At the timing of T1, the various reels have already completed their return operations and initial operations and are in a state of waiting for customers. The image display device displays the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen, in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the first movable member LED, second movable member LED, and performance button LED are lit while waiting for customers.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the second waiting screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general map change indicator 85, sub general map hold indicator 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T3, when the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed, the main RAM 110c is initialized. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the second waiting screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general map change indicator 85, sub general map hold indicator 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives the power-on command sent from the main control board 110 as a power-on command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED alternately light up in red and white as initial illumination, the effect button LED lights up in white as initial illumination, the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the effect pattern 70a of "135", which is the initial pattern when the power is turned on, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the audio output device 9 outputs an initialization notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "RAM is cleared."

In addition, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reservation number "0" is displayed in both the first special chart reservation number display area 70E and the second special chart reservation number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return to origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started.

At timing T7, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At the timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, the initial light emission of the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED ends, and they turn on (light up in white) while waiting for customers, and at the timing T10, when the output period of the initialization notification sound (for example, 60 seconds) has elapsed, the output of the initialization notification sound stops and the state becomes silent.

In addition, even if the power supply (including backup power) to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted during a control state in which the performance control board can execute a performance according to a command, such as during the execution of a variable performance (miss variable performance) after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various roles have already been completed, or during the execution of a jackpot performance (opening performance, round performance, ending performance), the screen displayed on the image display device until the power-on command is received at timing T4 is the variable performance screen (miss variable performance screen, jackpot variable performance screen) or the jackpot performance screen (opening performance screen, round game performance screen, ending performance screen), the same as when the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and restarted during a customer waiting state, and the return operation or initial operation of various roles (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) is performed, and the initialization notification sound is output from the audio output device 9, etc. are performed.

In addition, if there is an abnormality in any of the various reels, the initial operation of the various reels or the light (flashing red) will be emitted in an abnormality notification mode, as in the specific examples shown in Figures 101, 102, and 103.

(Specific example 2 when power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 113 shows a specific example 2 of a case where, assuming a modified example of the reel initial processing shown in Figure 99, the power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then resumed in a waiting state for customers (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130) after the origin return processing and initial operation processing have already been completed.

Here, we will explain the case where the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of main power is resumed while the supply of backup power continues during a customer waiting state (including when a customer waiting demo performance is being performed), which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance in response to a command.

At the timing of T1, if the machine is in a customer waiting state after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various reels have already been completed, the image display device displays the second standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while the machine is waiting for customers.

In addition, when the machine is in a waiting state for customers after the end of the variable performance that was performed after the return operation, initial operation, and output of the initialization notification sound of various reels have ended, the image display device will display a standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a indicating a miss and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state, or a customer waiting demo performance screen.

At this time, the sub-1st change indicator 81, the sub-2nd change indicator 82, and the sub-regular change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-1st reserve indicator 83, the sub-2nd reserve indicator 84, and the sub-regular reserve indicator 86 are in a display mode showing "0".

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general map change indicator 85, sub general map hold indicator 86) also maintains the display contents.

When the power supply to the main control board 110 is resumed at the timing of T3, processing is performed to restore the game control state. At this time, the image display device maintains the standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub normal map change indicator 85, sub normal map hold indicator 86) also maintains the display contents.

Even if the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped, if the demo waiting time has elapsed while the standby screen is being displayed (after a customer waiting state designation command is received regardless of whether or not the variable performance has ended, or after the previous customer waiting demo performance has ended), the customer waiting demo performance will start.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives a power restoration command sent from the main control board 110 as a power-on command, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begin to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as an initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as an initial light emission, the performance button LED lights up in white as an initial light emission, and the image display device displays a second standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state instead of the standby screen or the customer waiting demo performance screen.

In addition, when a special chart reservation number designation command (first special chart reservation number and second special chart reservation number = 0) is received as a power-on command, the reservation number "0" is displayed in both the first special chart reservation number display area 70E and the second special chart reservation number display area 70F of the image display device.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81, the sub-second change indicator 82, and the sub-general change indicator 85 continue to be in a non-display mode (losing mode) in which the lottery result is not displayed. In addition, the sub-first reserve indicator 83 and the sub-second reserve indicator 84 are in a display mode showing "0".

At timing T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process is completed, and the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started.

At the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the origin return process ends, and the initial operation process starts, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 begins.

At the timing T7, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at the timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At the timing of T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED ends and they turn on (light up in white) while waiting for customers.

In addition, if there is a recovery abnormality in the various reels, the initial operation and initial illumination of the various reels will be performed in the same manner as in the specific examples shown in Figures 105, 106, and 107.

(Specific example 3 when power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 114 shows a specific example 3 in which, assuming a modified example of the reel initial processing shown in Figure 99, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed during the execution of a variable performance (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130) after the origin return processing and initial operation processing have already been completed.

Here, we will explain the case where the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of main power is resumed while the supply of backup power continues during the execution of a variable performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance in response to a command.

At timing T1, the change performance is being performed, the change performance screen is displayed on the image display device, and change performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.) are output from the audio output device 9. At this time, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing. In addition, a change display is being performed on the sub-first change display 81, and the reserved number "1" is displayed on the sub-first reserve display 83.

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the display of the variable performance screen, and the sub-information display device 80 (sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82, sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84, sub-general map variable display 85, sub-general map hold display 86) also maintains the display contents.

When the power supply (main power) to the main control board 110 is resumed at the timing of T3, processing is performed to restore the game control state without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device maintains the display state of the variable performance screen, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82, sub first hold display 83, sub second hold display 84, sub normal map variable display 85, sub normal map hold display 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command for when the special chart is changing, sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as its initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up blue as its initial light emission, the performance button LED lights up white as its initial light emission, the image display device displays a recovery screen including the text "Please resume play", the audio output device 9 becomes silent, but the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub general map change indicator 85, sub general map hold indicator 86) maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return to origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started.

At timing T7, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At the timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED ends and they are turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the performance control board 130 receives the special symbol stop command sent from the main control board 110, a confirmation display is made that the variable performance has lost. At this time, the image display device displays a stopped screen in which the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol when the power is restored, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and a stop sound is output from the audio output device 9. In addition, "1" is displayed in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special symbol reserved number display area 70F. In addition, the sub first variable display 81 displays a loss display mode (non-display mode) indicating a loss.

If the result of this variable performance is a jackpot, when the performance control board 130 receives a special symbol stop command, a confirmation display of the variable performance jackpot is performed. At this time, the image display device displays a stopped screen in which the performance symbol 70a, such as "777", which is a jackpot performance symbol, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the sub-first variable display 81 displays a jackpot display mode indicating a jackpot, and the audio output device 9 outputs a stop sound.

At the timing of T11, when a change start command (special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) sent from the main control board 110 is received, the first reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "0", and the change performance (display of the performance pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ change, movement of the reserved icon or change to that icon, output of background music) begins.

At this time, the sub-first change indicator 81 starts displaying the changes, the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit while changing, and the sub-first hold indicator 83 changes to a display mode showing "0".

Note that at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED go into their initial light emission mode when power is restored, but by making them go into a special light emission mode different from the initial light emission mode when the lights are turned off or when power is restored, it may be possible to know that a power restoration command has been received during the change performance.

In addition, if there is a return abnormality in any of the various reels, the initial operation of the various reels or the light (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode will be performed in the same manner as in the specific examples shown in Figures 105, 106, and 107.

In addition, even if the execution time of the variable performance recognized by the performance control board 130 has elapsed before the special chart stop designation command is received, the performance pattern 70a will not be displayed as temporarily stopped or stopped, and the variable display on the sub-1 variable display device and the sub-2 variable display device will not end.

(Specific example 4 when power supply to the main control board is stopped and then restarted)
Figure 115 shows a specific example 4 of a case where, assuming a modified example of the reel initial processing shown in Figure 99, the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then resumed during the execution of a jackpot performance (while power is being supplied to the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130) after the origin return processing and initial operation processing have already been completed.

Here, we will explain the case where the supply of main power to the main control board 110 is stopped and the supply of main power is resumed while the supply of backup power continues during the execution of a jackpot performance, which is one of the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute a performance in response to a command.

At the timing of T1, the jackpot performance (here, the first round performance) is being executed, and the image display device displays the jackpot performance (round performance) screen, with the jackpot special symbol TZ ("777") displayed in a stopped (static) state. In addition, the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E displays "1" as the reserved number, and the second special symbol reserved number display area 70F displays "0" as the second reserved number.

At this time, the audio output device 9 outputs a jackpot performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit during the jackpot. In addition, the sub-first variable display 81 displays (lights up) the jackpot.

At the timing of T2, when only the power supply (excluding the backup power supply) to the main control board 110 is stopped, the image display device maintains the state in which the big win presentation screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub normal map change indicator 85, sub normal map hold indicator 86) also maintains the display contents.

When the power supply (main power) to the main control board 110 is resumed at the timing of T3, processing is performed to restore the game control state without initializing the main RAM 110c. At this time, the image display device maintains the state in which the big win presentation screen is displayed, and the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub normal map change indicator 85, sub normal map hold indicator 86) also maintains the display contents.

At the timing of T4, when the performance control board 130 receives the power restoration command for the jackpot sent from the main control board 110, the origin return process is started and the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 start to return to their origin positions.

At this time, the first movable member LED lights up alternately in blue and white as an initial light emission, the second movable member LED lights up in blue as an initial light emission, the performance button LED lights up in white as an initial light emission, the image display device displays a recovery screen for use during a jackpot including the text "Please resume play (during a jackpot)", and the audio output device 9 becomes silent. In addition, the sub information display device 80 (sub first change indicator 81, sub second change indicator 82, sub first hold indicator 83, sub second hold indicator 84, sub normal map change indicator 85, sub normal map hold indicator 86) maintains the display contents.

In addition, instead of displaying the recovery screen for when a jackpot occurs, the same recovery screen as that displayed when power supply (main power only) to the main control board 110 is stopped during the variable performance shown in FIG. 114 may be displayed.

At the timing of T5, when the return operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is completed, the return operation of the second movable member 74 is started, and at the timing of T6, when the return operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the return to origin process is completed, the initial operation process is started, and the initial operation of the first movable member 73 and the performance button 17 is started.

At timing T7, the initial operation of the performance button 17 ends, and at timing T8, when the initial operation of the first movable member 73 ends, the initial operation of the second movable member 74 begins.

At the timing T9, when the initial operation of the second movable member 74 is completed, the initial operation process ends, and the initial light emission of the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED ends and they are turned off.

At the timing of T10, when the performance control board 130 receives the round number designation command for the second opening (second round) sent from the main control board 110, the big win performance (round performance) is resumed. At this time, the image display device displays a special big win performance (round performance) screen instead of the normal big win performance screen, and the special big win symbol TZ ("777") is not displayed.

In addition, the reserved number "1" is displayed in the first reserved number display area 70E, and the second reserved number "0" is displayed in the second reserved number display area 70F. In addition, the sound output device 9 outputs a jackpot performance sound (BGM, SE, etc.), and the first movable member LED, the second movable member LED, and the performance button LED are lit during the jackpot.

After that, when the performance control board 130 receives a round number designation command for the third opening (third round) sent from the main control board 110, the image display device displays the normal jackpot performance (round performance) screen instead of the special jackpot performance (round performance) screen.

Note that if the performance control board 130 receives an ending designation command, rather than a round number designation command while the special big win performance screen is being displayed, the normal ending performance screen will be displayed.

In addition, when a round number designation command is received while a special jackpot presentation screen is being displayed, instead of switching to a normal jackpot presentation screen, the special jackpot presentation screen may be continued until the presentation control board 130 receives an ending designation command, or the special jackpot presentation screen may be continued until the presentation control board 130 receives a customer waiting state designation command or a fluctuation start command after the jackpot game has ended.

In addition, at the timing of T4, the first movable member LED and the second movable member LED are in their initial light-emitting state when power is restored, but by making them in a special light-emitting state different from the initial light-emitting state when the lights are turned off or when power is restored, it may be possible to know that a power restoration command has been received during the change performance.

In addition, if there is a return abnormality in any of the various reels, the initial operation of the various reels or the light (flashing red) in the abnormality notification mode will be performed in the same manner as in the specific examples shown in Figures 105, 106, and 107.

In addition, in Figures 112 to 115, when a power-on command or a power-restoration command is received, the various parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) are reset, but it is also possible to perform the initial operation of the various parts without performing the reset operation.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 100 to 115, when the game control state is initialized, a first initial performance pattern ("135") is displayed in which the identification characters (numbers, letters, etc.) in the multiple performance patterns 70a form a first combination, and when the game control state is restored, a second initial performance pattern ("753") is displayed in which the identification characters in the multiple performance patterns 70a form a second combination. This makes it easier to understand whether the game control state has been initialized or restored.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 100 to 115, when the game control state is restored, it is possible to display a specific display suggesting the resumption of power supply before displaying the performance pattern 70a on the image display device, and the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device when the state is restored to waiting for customers (only displaying the initial screen) is different from the display mode of the specific display displayed on the image display device during the variable display of special patterns and after restoration to no reserved memory/reserved memory (displaying the initial screen + recovery screen). Therefore, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the game control state is restored, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 100 to 115, it is possible to display the number of reserved memories in the reserved icon display area (first reserved icon display area 70B, second reserved icon display area 70D) and the sub reserved display (first sub reserved display 83, second sub reserved display 84), and when the power supply that was stopped while there are reserved memories is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the reserved icon display area does not display the reserved memory when the image display device is displaying a specific display (display of the recovery screen) suggesting the resumption of power supply, but the sub reserved display can display the reserved memory. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to know the number of reserved memories before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 100 to 115, when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting demo performance is resumed and the game control state is restored, the customer waiting demo performance screen is not displayed again, but the second standby screen is displayed in a state in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power restoration, is stopped (statically displayed). Therefore, it is not necessary to be aware of whether the state before the power supply was stopped was during the customer waiting demo performance or not, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control when the game control state is restored after the power supply is resumed.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 100 to 115, when the power supply that was stopped during a variation performance is resumed and the game control state is restored, the sub-variable display (sub-first variable display 81, sub-second variable display 82) is configured not to perform a variable display (blinking display) during the variable display of the special pattern, even if the variable display of the special pattern is being executed (the recovery screen is displayed). This makes it possible to reduce the processing load when the game control state is restored after the power supply is resumed.

In addition, when the game control state is restored and the special symbol variable display is being executed (the recovery screen is displayed), the sub variable display (sub first variable display 81, sub second variable display 82) may display a variable display (blinking display). In this way, it becomes easier to understand that the special symbol variable display is being executed when the game control state is restored.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 100 to 115, the sub-reserve indicators (sub-first reserve indicator 83, sub-second reserve indicator 84) are configured to display the number of reserved balls from the time when the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device (before the sub-variable indicator displays a variable display and when the special chart reserve number designation command is received). This allows the player to know the number of reserved balls immediately after the game control state is restored, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

When the sub-variation indicators (sub-first variation indicator 81, sub-second variation indicator 82) are performing a variation display (flashing display) while the recovery screen is displayed on the image display device, the sub-reservation indicators (sub-first reservation indicator 83, sub-second reservation indicator 84) may be configured to display the number of reserved balls in accordance with the start of this variation display. In this way, it becomes possible to easily grasp that the special pattern variation display is being performed when the game control state is restored, and the number of reserved balls at that time.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 100 to 115, when power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the return operation of the various reels is performed at the same timing as when power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (the timing when the initial screen is displayed). This prevents the control related to the return operation of the various reels from becoming complicated, and makes it possible to reduce the processing load related to the return operation of the various reels.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 100 to 115, when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the light-emitting parts of the various parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) are turned off during the recovery operation of the various parts. This makes it possible to distinguish this from the initial operation of the various parts, and to know that the recovery operation is in progress.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 100 to 115, if any of the various reels have a return abnormality, the light-emitting part of the reel that has the return abnormality will flash red (abnormality notification mode) to notify the user of the abnormality. This makes it possible to identify the reel that has the return abnormality.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 100 to 115, when an abnormality is notified by flashing the light-emitting part of the reel that has had a return abnormality in red, the abnormality notification continues until the next variable performance starts. Therefore, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the reel that has had a return abnormality.

If a reel has a return abnormality, a return operation may be performed to return the reel that had the return abnormality to its original position when the next variable performance begins. Also, if an abnormality is notified by causing the light-emitting part of the reel that had the return abnormality to flash red, the abnormality notification may be cancelled when the performance button 17 is operated.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 100 to 115, when power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c, the initial operation of the various reels is performed at the same timing as when power is restored to the customer waiting state without the initialization of the main RAM 110c, that is, immediately after the power is turned on (the timing when the initial screen is displayed). This prevents the control related to the initial operation of the various reels from becoming complicated, and makes it possible to reduce the processing load related to the initial operation of the various reels.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 100 to 115, the board parts (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) are configured to perform an initial operation before the sub-hold indicators (sub-first hold indicator 83, sub-second hold indicator 84) change to a display mode showing the number of holds (a recovery screen is displayed on the image display device) when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. This makes it easier to avoid inconveniences such as the progress of the presentation being hindered by the initial operation of the board parts, and makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 100 to 115, the frame role (performance button 17) is configured to perform an initial operation before the sub-hold indicators (sub-first hold indicator 83, sub-second hold indicator 84) change to a display mode showing the number of holds (a recovery screen is displayed on the image display device) when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110c or when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. This makes it easier to avoid inconveniences such as the progress of the performance being hindered by the initial operation of the frame role, and makes it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figs. 100 to 115, even if the stop screen is displayed after the recovery screen is displayed, the sound of the effect pattern 70a stopping is output. This makes it easier for the player to understand that the variable effect that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, making it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, if the stop screen is displayed after the recovery screen is displayed, the stopping sound of the performance pattern 70a may not be output.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 100 to 115, even if the power-on commands (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be received, the recovery operations, initial operations, and initial light emission of various parts are performed, and the initial screen continues to be displayed. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that an abnormality has occurred in which the power-on commands cannot be received.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 100 to 115, even if the initial screen continues to be displayed because the power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be received, when the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to the command and receives a special chart reserve number designation command from the main control board 110 based on the winning of a gaming ball into the starting hole, a winning sound is output. Therefore, it is possible to accurately notify that a gaming ball has won into the starting hole even when the initial screen is displayed.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 100 to 115, even if the initial screen is displayed because the power-on command (power-on command, power-restoration command) cannot be received, if the performance control board 130 receives a fluctuation start command from the main control board 110 after entering a control state in which it can execute a performance according to the command, the fluctuation performance is executed without displaying the standby screen. Therefore, the start of the fluctuation performance is executed without delay, and it is possible to execute the fluctuation performance from start to finish within the range of the fluctuation time of the special pattern.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 100 to 115, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, such as waiting for customers after the return operations of various props and initial operations (including initial light emission) have already been completed, if a power-on command or power restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by stopping and then restarting the power supply to the main control board 110, the return operations of various props and initial operations (initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 100 to 115, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance after the return operations of various reels and the initial operations (including initial light emission) have already been completed, if a power-on command or power restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by stopping and then restarting the power supply to the main control board 110 alone, the return operations of various reels and the initial operations (initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 100 to 115, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, such as during a jackpot game after the return operations of various roles and the initial operations (including initial light emission) have already been completed, if a power-on command or power restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, such as by stopping and then restarting the power supply to the main control board 110 alone, the return operations of various roles and the initial operations (including initial light emission) are executed again. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 100 to 115, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, such as when it is waiting for customers after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished, if the power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. Therefore, because commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 100 to 115, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state where it can execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished, if the power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on command is received from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. Therefore, because commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 100 to 115, even if the presentation control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute presentations according to commands, such as during a jackpot game after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished, if the power supply to the main control board 110 alone is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, the initialization notification sound is output again. Therefore, because commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the presentation control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

When a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, the audio output device 9 may simply output an initialization notification sound, rather than executing the recovery operations, initial operations, and initial light emission of the various parts.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 100 to 115, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, such as when it is waiting for customers after the return operations of various props and initial operations (including initial light emission) have already been completed, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and if a power restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

Even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state where it can execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance or a jackpot performance after the return operation of various roles and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have already ended, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 100 to 115, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state where it can execute a performance according to a command, such as during a variable performance after the return operation of various parts and the initial operation (including initial light emission) have already ended, if a power restoration command is received from the main control board 110, such as when only the power supply (main power) to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, the return screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 100 to 115, even if the performance control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute a performance according to a command, such as during a jackpot performance after the return operations of various roles and the initial operations (including initial light emission) have already ended, if a power restoration command is received from the main control board 110, such as by restarting the power supply (main power) to the main control board 110 after it has stopped, the initial screen is not displayed, and a return screen for the jackpot is displayed. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the performance control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 100 to 115, even if the presentation control board 130 is in a control state in which it can execute presentations according to commands, such as during a variable presentation after the output of the initialization notification sound has already finished or during a big win game, if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped and then restarted, and a power-on command is received again from the main control board 110, the first standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen, and if a power restoration command is received again from the main control board 110, the second standby screen is displayed without displaying the initial screen. Therefore, since commands from the main control board 110 are processed without being ignored, even if there is a mismatch between the control progress of the main control board 110 and the control progress of the presentation control board 130, it is possible to eliminate the mismatch.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 100 to 115, in a control state (waiting for customers, variable presentation, big win presentation) in which the presentation control board 130 can execute presentations in response to commands, even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the presentation control board 130 continues, the previous display screen can continue to be displayed. Therefore, the player will not feel uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 100 to 115, during a control state (waiting for customers, variable presentation, big win presentation) in which the presentation control board 130 can execute presentations in response to commands, even if the power supply to the main control board 110 is stopped while the power supply to the presentation control board 130 continues and then the power supply is resumed, the previous display screen can continue to be displayed. Therefore, the player will not feel uncomfortable when the power supply to the main control means is resumed, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

Note that the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute performance in response to a command are when waiting for customers, when a variable performance is in progress, and when a big win is in progress. However, the state in which the performance control board 130 is waiting for a command from the main control board 110 after startup (for example, when the initial screen is being displayed) may also be included in the control states in which the performance control board 130 can execute performance in response to a command.

(Specific examples of when the connection state of various detection means changes)
116(a) and 116(b) are diagrams showing specific examples of when the connection state of various detection means changes while waiting for customers.

Here, the wiring from the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a is combined into one connector, and this connector is connected to the connector on the main control board 110.

First, we will explain Figure 116(a).
Figure 116 (a) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first starting port detection switch 45a changes while waiting for customers.

At the timing of T1, it is assumed that the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110. At this time, the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state.

At timing T2, for example, if the connector connected to the main control board 110 becomes half-inserted and only the first start port detection switch 45a becomes disconnected, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a connection error, and the performance control board 130 issues a connection error notification.

At this time, the image display device displays an error notification image EG containing the words "Connection error detected," indicating that a connection error has occurred, and the audio output device 9 outputs a connection error notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "Connection error."

At the timing of T3, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released from the half-inserted state and the first start port detection switch 45a returns to the connected state, the main control board 110 detects that the connection error has been cleared, but the connection error notification continues until the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

Next, we will explain Figure 116(b).
Figure 116 (b) is a diagram showing a specific example when the connection state of the first starting port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a changes while waiting for customers.

At the timing of T1, it is assumed that the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a are normally connected to the main control board 110. At this time, the image display device displays the first standby screen in which the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped (static) state.

At timing T2, for example, if the connector connected to the main control board 110 becomes half-inserted and the first start port detection switch 45a, the magnetic detection sensor 53a, and the radio wave detection sensor 54a become disconnected, the main control board 110 detects the occurrence of a magnetic error, a radio wave error, and a connection error, and the performance control board 130 issues a magnetic error alert, a radio wave error alert, and a connection error alert.

At this time, the image display device displays an error notification image EG including the text "Magnetic error detected" indicating the occurrence of a magnetic error, the text "Radio wave error detected" indicating the occurrence of a radio wave error, and the text "Connection error detected" indicating the occurrence of a connection error, and the audio output device 9 outputs a magnetic error notification sound consisting of an alarm and the voice saying "Magnetic error."

At the timing of T3, when the connector connected to the main control board 110 is released from the half-inserted state and the magnetic detection sensor 53a, the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and the first start hole detection switch 45a return to a connected state, the main control board 110 detects that the magnetic error, radio wave error, and connection error have been eliminated, but various error notifications continue until the gaming machine 1 is powered off.

In addition, if the signal line for command communication between the main control board 110 and the dispensing control board 120 changes from a connected state to a disconnected state, the main control board 110 will not detect the occurrence of a connection error and will not issue an error notification.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 116, an error is notified when a specific detection means (start port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) that detects a specific event (start winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) connected to the main control board 110 changes from a connected state to a disconnected state. This makes it possible to grasp the occurrence of an abnormality (connector half-inserted, broken wire, fraudulent activity) and take prompt action.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 116, even if a specific detection means (starting hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) that detects a specific event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.) returns from a disconnected state to a connected state, error notification of magnetic errors and radio wave errors continues until the power of the gaming machine 1 is turned off. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts against the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 116, no error notification is issued even if the payout control board 120 changes from a connected state to a disconnected state. Therefore, in cases where the possibility of fraudulent activity is low, the game can be continued as is, and it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, even if power supply to the gaming machine 1 is started while certain detection means (start hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a) connected to the main control board 110 are in a disconnected state, various error notifications (connection error notification, magnetic error notification, radio wave error notification in the same notification format as FIG. 116) may be made while the initial screen is being displayed or after the initial screen has ended (when the first standby screen or second standby screen starts to be displayed).

In this case, the error alert (magnetic error alert, radio wave error alert) continues even if the magnetic detection sensor 53a or the radio wave detection sensor 54a changes from an unconnected state to a connected state, but the connection error alert may be cancelled when the first start hole detection switch 45a changes from an unconnected state to a connected state. In this way, it is possible to continue playing the game as is in cases where the possibility of fraud is low, and to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, radio error alarm sounds related to radio errors that have a lower priority (importance) than magnetic errors, and connection error alarm sounds related to connection errors that have a lower priority (importance) than radio errors, are not output if they occur simultaneously with a magnetic error, but the alarm sounds related to the errors that have occurred may be output in sequence.

In addition, for magnetic error alerts, radio wave error alerts, and connection error alerts, an error alert sound may be output without displaying the error alert image EG, or the error alert image EG may be displayed without outputting the error alert sound.

In addition, when the first start port detection switch 45a changes from an unconnected state to a connected state, it is assumed that a start winning has occurred, and special pattern determination information is acquired and the number of reserved first special patterns (U1) is increased, so that the display of special patterns and the display of changes (display of changes in the display pattern 70a and the display of changes in the special pattern) are executed.

(Example of operating the control unit while waiting for customers)
Using Figure 117, a specific example of operating the operation unit (performance button 17, cross key 18) while waiting for customers will be described.

As shown in FIG. 117(a), when the game transitions to a customer waiting state in which neither variable effects nor big win effects are executed, a valid indication effect (introduction effect) that suggests that a valid period may occur is not executed, and a customer waiting valid period in which operation of the effect button 17 and cross key 18 is valid begins (the customer waiting valid period is maintained until the variable effect begins, and so this can occur for a longer period than the various valid periods that occur during the variable effect).

At this time, a guide image AG (operation prompt image) is displayed in the lower right corner of the first image display device 70, which guides the user to the game support functions that are started by operating the effect button 17 and the cross key 18. Specifically, a first image (an image imitating the effect button 17) is displayed, which suggests that a menu will be displayed by operating the effect button 17, a second image (an image imitating the cross key 18 with the up and down buttons in a light color) is displayed, which suggests that volume can be adjusted by operating the up and down buttons of the cross key 18, and a third image (an image imitating the cross key 18 with the left and right buttons in a light color) is displayed, which suggests that light intensity can be adjusted by operating the left and right buttons of the cross key 18.

When the effect button 17 is operated in this state, as shown in FIG. 117(b), the effect button 17 does not vibrate, and the menu image MG is displayed superimposed in front of the effect pattern 70a, and the display sound of the menu image MG is output.

The menu image MG has an "Exit" item to end the menu display, a "Machine Description" item that provides an explanation of the machine, a "Effect Customization" item for setting the occurrence rate of a specific effect (such as a confirmed effect), and a "Pachi Log" item for managing game history in conjunction with a mobile device (such as a smartphone), and the currently selected item is displayed in a light color, while currently unselected items are displayed in a dark color.

When the effect button 17 is operated while the "End" item is selected, the menu image MG is erased without the effect button 17 vibrating, as shown in FIG. 117(c). In addition, a sound is output to indicate that the menu image MG is being erased, and the guide image AG is displayed again.

When the up button on the cross key 18 is operated in this state, as shown in FIG. 117(d), the performance button 17 and the cross key 18 do not vibrate, and a volume value image OG indicating the current volume value is displayed, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the up button of the cross key 18 is operated while the volume value image OG is displayed, the volume value of the effect sound is updated by +1 without the effect button 17 or the cross key 18 vibrating. The volume value image OG is then updated to a volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

If a predetermined period of time (e.g., 15 seconds) passes in this state without the cross key 18 being operated, the volume value image OG is erased and the guide image AG is displayed again, as shown in FIG. 117(f).

In this way, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 117, during the customer waiting valid period, which can occur for a period longer than the valid period of the effect button 17 related to the various preview effects (dialogue preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, cut-in effects, deciding effects, etc.) that occur during the variable effects, even if the effect button 17 or cross key 18 is operated, a vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 (including indirect vibration of the cross key 18 transmitted by the vibration of the effect button 17) is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being surprised when the effect button 17 or cross key 18 is operated while in the customer waiting state, and it is possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player.

The effective period of the cross key 18 related to the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment that occur during the variable performance (display of the special symbol variation) and the jackpot performance (jackpot play) can occur for a longer period than the effective period related to the various advance notice performances (dialogue advance notice performance, pseudo consecutive performance, development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, etc.) that occur during the variable performance. However, even if the cross key 18 is operated during the effective period of the cross key 18 related to the volume adjustment and light intensity adjustment, a vibration performance that vibrates the performance button 17 (including indirect vibration of the cross key 18 transmitted by the performance button 17 vibrating) is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being surprised during the variable performance or the jackpot performance, and makes it possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 117, for the valid period while waiting for customers, a valid suggestion effect (introductory effect) that suggests that the valid period may occur before the valid period occurs is not executed. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being put on edge even though useful information for the player (effects that give the player hope that a jackpot game will be executed) is not executed, and makes it possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player.

In addition, for the effective period of the cross key 18 related to the volume adjustment and light adjustment that occur during the variable effect (variable display of special symbols) and the jackpot effect (jackpot play), the effective suggestion effect (introductory effect) is not executed before the effective period occurs. This makes it possible to prevent the player from being put on guard even though useful information for the player (effect that gives the player hope of a jackpot play) is not executed, and makes it possible to avoid inconveniences that may cause discomfort to the player.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 117, the vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 is more likely to be executed when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period (display of the operation prompt image) of the effect button 17 related to various preview effects (dialogue preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, cut-in effects, deciding effects, etc.) that occur during the variable performance than when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period while waiting for customers, which can occur for a period longer than the effective period (display period of the operation prompt image) of the effect button 17 that occurs during the variable performance. This makes it possible to enhance the presentation effect of the variable performance and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 117, the effective period of the effect button 17 related to the various preview effects that occur during the variable effect includes a relatively short first effective period (an effective period accompanied by the display of an operation prompt image related to a dialogue preview effect, etc.) and a relatively long second effective period (an effective period accompanied by the display of an operation prompt image related to a deciding effect, etc.), but the vibration effect that vibrates the effect button 17 is more likely to be executed when the effect button 17 is operated during the second effective period than when the effect button 17 is operated during the customer waiting effective period, which can occur for a period longer than the effective period of the effect button 17 that occurs during the variable effect. This makes it possible to enhance the effect of the variable effect and increase the interest in the game.

When the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period of waiting for customers, a vibration effect may be executed by vibrating the effect button 17 at a predetermined rate. However, even in this case, it is preferable to execute the vibration effect at a lower rate than when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period of the effect button 17 related to the various preview effects (dialogue preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, cut-in effects, deciding effects, etc.) that occur during the variable effects.

(Example of customizing the performance while waiting for customers)
Using Figure 118, a specific example of customizing the performance (setting to normal settings or simple settings) by operating the operation unit (performance button 17, cross key 18) while waiting for customers will be described.

As shown in FIG. 118(a), when the effect button 17 is operated while waiting for customers, the first image display device 70 displays a menu image MG superimposed in front of the effect pattern 70a. The menu image MG has the above-mentioned menu items "Exit", "Machine Description", "Effect Customization", and "Pachi Log" set, with the currently selected item displayed in a light color and the currently unselected items displayed in a dark color, allowing the items to be selected using the cross key 19.

After that, when the down button of the cross key 19 is operated twice, the "Performance Customization" item is selected as shown in FIG. 118(b), and when the performance button 17 is operated in this state, performance customization is confirmed and the menu image MG changes to the performance customization image KG as shown in FIG. 118(c). The performance customization image KG has the items "Normal setting" where the frequency of appearance of various effects (continuous preview performance, icon change performance, timer performance, role preview at the start of fluctuation, etc.) is normal, and "Simple setting" where the frequency of appearance of various effects is low, the currently selected item is displayed in a light color, and the currently unselected items are displayed in a dark color, and the items can be selected with the cross key 19.

When the effect button 17 is operated with the "Normal setting" item selected, a confirmation message "Normal setting (normal mode) has been set" is displayed, as shown in FIG. 118(d). After that, when a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) has elapsed, the menu image MG is displayed again, as shown in FIG. 118(e).

In this way, by operating the effect button 17 or the cross key 19 while waiting for customers, the frequency of appearance of various effects (continuous preview effects, icon change effects, timer effects, feature announcements at the start of fluctuations, etc.) can be set (the effects can be customized). This allows players to set their preferences, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

(Example of when a variable performance starts from a waiting state)
A specific example of when a variable performance starts from a customer waiting state will be described using Figures 119 to 121. Figure 119 is a timing chart of when a variable performance starts from a customer waiting state, and Figures 120(a) to (f) and Figures 121(g) to (k) are diagrams showing examples of performance corresponding to Figure 119(a) to (k).

First, timing T0 is the 0th frame after the customer waiting state begins. At this timing, the waiting time (30 seconds) begins to be subtracted to start the customer waiting demo performance.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(a), the first image display device 70 displays the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ in a stopped state. In addition, the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E and the second special symbol reserved number display area 70F display "0", and the reserved icon and the icon TI are not displayed.

The timing of T1 is the timing when the number of reserved first special charts (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (the fourth frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the number of reserved first special charts is displayed as an increment without animation, and the number of reserved first icons is displayed as an increment without animation (completed in one frame), and the output of the first occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon occurs, begins.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special reserved number displayed in the first special reserved number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1," and the first reserved icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in normal size in the first display section 70B1. In addition, the first occurrence notification sound (beep) is output from the audio output device 9.

The timing of T2 is the timing (5th frame from the start of the waiting state) when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) decreases from "1" to "0" and the normal change pattern change performance (display of the change of special symbols) begins. At this timing, the display of the change of performance symbol 70a and special symbol TZ, the non-animated decrease display of the reserved first special symbol number, and the animated change display (decrease display) of the first reserved icon begins.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(c), in the first image display device 70, the first special reserved number displayed in the first special reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0," and the first reserved icon (white icon) H11 displayed in the first display section 70B1 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. In addition, the performance pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparatory operation) without being scrolled (updated to another performance pattern), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

The timing of T3 is the 10th frame after the start of the output of the first generated alarm sound (the 14th frame after the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first generated alarm sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(d), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon (white icon) H11 continues to move (shift) to the icon display area 70C, and the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the performance pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the 20th frame from the start of the change (decrease) in the display of the first hold icon (the 25th frame from the start of the waiting state for customers). At this timing, the change in the display of the first hold icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 that has moved from the first display unit 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and becomes the icon TI, and the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the performance pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T5 is the 40th frame after the start of the variable performance (45th frame after the start of the waiting state for customers). At this timing, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120(f), in the first image display device 70, following scrolling (downward movement) of the performance pattern 70a in the left variable display area, scrolling (downward movement) of the performance pattern 70a in the central variable display area begins.

The timing of T6 is the 50th frame after the start of the variable performance (55th frame after the start of the waiting state for customers). At this timing, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(g), in the first image display device 70, following scrolling (downward movement) of the performance pattern 70a in the central variable display area, scrolling (downward movement) of the performance pattern 70a in the right variable display area begins, resulting in a state in which the performance pattern 70a is scrolling in all variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the 225th frame after the start of the variable performance (230th frame after the start of the waiting state for customers). At this timing, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(h), in the first image display device 70, the "3" display pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (is in a swinging state) in the left variable display area, while the scrolling of the display pattern 70a continues in the central and right variable display areas.

The timing of T8 is the 255th frame after the start of the variable performance (260th frame after the start of the waiting state for customers). At this timing, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(i), in the first image display device 70, the "5" display pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (is in a swinging state) in the right-hand variable display area, while the scrolling of the display pattern 70a continues in the central variable display area.

The timing of T9 is the 285th frame after the start of the variable performance (the 290th frame after the start of the waiting state for customers). At this timing, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(j), in the first image display device 70, the "6" display pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (in a swinging state) in the central variable display area, and a combination of display patterns 70a indicating a loss is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the 300th frame after the start of the variable performance (the 305th frame after the start of the waiting state for customers). At this timing, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a and the variable display of the special pattern TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 121(k), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbols 70a that were temporarily stopped in the left, center, and right variable display areas are displayed as stopped, and the special symbols TZ are displayed as stopped in the same combination "365" as the performance symbols 70a. In addition, the icon TI that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, if the number of reserved special figures increases (changes from "0" to "1") while customers are waiting, the non-animated display of the increase in the reserved numbers and reserved icons ends in the shortest possible period (time) of one frame, so that the game can immediately transition to a variable presentation (a decrease in the reserved numbers and a change in the reserved icons) to avoid dragging on, making the game more interesting.

In addition, the notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the display of the reserved numbers and reserved icons continues until a later (frame update) timing than the end (frame update) timing of the display of the reserved numbers and reserved icons, so the player can be sure that the number of reserved special figures has increased, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, if the number of reserved special figures decreases (changing from "1" to "0"), the reserved numbers are displayed as a non-animated decrease, and the reserved icon is displayed as an animated change, allowing the player to be sure that the number of reserved special figures has decreased, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, the timing when the display of the reduction in the reserved numbers is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing when the display of the change in the reserved icon to the corresponding icon is completed (frame update), so while the number of reserved special charts is changed, it is easier for the player to understand that the number of reserved special charts has decreased due to the reserved numbers, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect pattern does not scroll (does not update to the next effect pattern) until the pending icon has completed changing to the corresponding icon, and the effect pattern starts scrolling (updating to the next effect pattern) when the pending icon has completed changing (frame update), making it easier to grasp the progress of the game, in which the changing effect starts after the pending memory has decreased, and making the game more interesting.

In addition, if the number of reserved special charts increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for customers, the display of the increase in the reserved icon may not be displayed non-animated, but may be displayed with an animation spanning multiple frames (e.g., five frames) so that it continues longer than the display of the increase in the reserved numbers. This makes it easier for players to grasp the increase in the number of reserved special charts, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, rather than starting the display of the decrease in the reserved numbers and the display of the change in the reserved icon to the corresponding icon (decrease display) at the same timing (frame update), either may be started first as long as the timing when the display of the decrease in the reserved numbers is completed (frame update) is earlier. By doing this, it is possible to increase the freedom of display control while allowing the player to know at an early stage that the number of reserved special charts has decreased, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, instead of starting the scrolling of the performance pattern (updating to the next performance pattern) when the pending icon change display is completed (frame update) (starting later than usual), the scrolling of the performance pattern (updating to the next performance pattern) may be started a little before the pending icon change display is completed (frame update).

(Example of when the number of reserved items increases during a variable performance)
A specific example of an increase in the reserved number during a variable performance will be described with reference to Figures 122 to 123. Figure 122 is a timing chart showing an increase in the reserved number during a variable performance, and Figures 123(a) to (c) are diagrams showing examples of performance corresponding to Figure 122(a) to (c).

First, the timing of T1 is the 50th frame after the start of the normal variation pattern. At this timing, the variation display of the performance pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123(a), the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are scrolled (moved downward) on the first image display device 70. Also, "0" is displayed in the first special pattern reserved number display area 70E and the second special pattern reserved number display area 70F, and the icon (white icon) TI is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special reserved number (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (the 60th frame from the start of the variable presentation). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the first special reserved number and the animated increase display of the first reserved icon begin, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon occurs, begins.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special reserved number displayed in the first special reserved number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1," and the first reserved icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in a very small size in the first display section 70B1 and begins to be enlarged. In addition, the first occurrence notification sound (beep) is output from the audio output device 9.

The timing of T3 is the 10th frame after the increase in the number of first pending icons starts (the 70th frame after the start of the variable presentation). At this timing, the increase in the number of first pending icons ends and the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 123(c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (white icon) displayed on the first display unit 70B1 is stopped and the icon is displayed at normal size.

In this way, when the number of reserved special figures increases, the reserved numbers are displayed as an increase without animation, and the reserved icon is displayed as an increase with animation, so the player can be sure that the number of reserved special figures has increased, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, the timing at which the display of the reserved numbers is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the display of the reserved icons is completed (frame update), so while the number of reserved special charts changes, it is easier for the player to understand that the number of reserved special charts has increased due to the reserved numbers, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of reserved special symbols increases while a variable performance is being performed, the reserved icon is displayed for a longer period of time compared to when the number of reserved special symbols increases while waiting for customers, so the player can be sure that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the display of the reserved numbers and the reserved icons increasing ends in synchronization with the timing when the display of the reserved icons increasing ends (frame update), so it is possible to effectively convey the increase in the number of reserved special figures, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, the period (10 frames) for the pending icon to increase in number is shorter than the period (20 frames) for the pending icon to change to the corresponding icon, so the start of the change presentation can be emphasized, making the game more interesting.

In addition, rather than starting the display of the increase in reserved numbers and the display of the increase in reserved icons at the same time (frame update), either one may be started first as long as the timing when the display of the increase in reserved numbers is completed (frame update) is earlier. By doing this, it is possible to increase the freedom of display control while allowing the player to understand at an early stage that the number of reserved special charts has increased, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, the period for the display of the increase in reserved icons may be longer than the period for the display of the change in the reserved icon to the icon in question, rather than being shorter. By doing this, the increase in the number of reserved special charts can be emphasized, making the game more interesting.

In addition, rather than making the period for the pending icon to increase in size shorter than the period for the pending icon to change in size, the two periods may be the same length.

(Example of when the number of pending orders increases immediately after decreasing)
A specific example of when the reserved number increases immediately after it is decreased will be described using Figures 124 to 125. Figure 124 is a timing chart showing when the reserved number increases immediately after it is decreased, and Figures 125(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of performances corresponding to (a) to (f) of Figure 124.

First, the timing of T0 is the timing that is the fifth frame after the static display of the performance pattern 70a. At this timing, the static display of the performance pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(a), the first image display device 70 displays the "4", "6", and "8" performance symbols 70a, which indicate a miss, and the special symbol TZ in a stopped state. In addition, "2" is displayed in the first special symbol hold number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special symbol hold number display area 70F. Furthermore, the first hold icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in the first display section 70B1, and the first hold icon (white icon) H12 is displayed in the second display section 70B2, and the icon TI is not displayed.

The timing of T1 is the timing when the change performance (change display of the special symbol) due to the normal change pattern starts (the 20th frame after the display of the performance symbol 70a is stopped). At this timing, the change display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, the non-animated decrease display of the first special symbol reserved number, the animated change display of the first reserved icon to that icon, and the animated decrease display of the first reserved icon start.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special reserved number displayed in the first special reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1". In addition, the first reserved icon (white icon) H11 displayed in the first display unit 70B1 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C, and the first reserved icon (white icon) H12 displayed in the second display unit 70B2 starts to move (shift) toward the first display unit 70B1. Furthermore, the performance pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparatory operation) without being scrolled (updated to another performance pattern), and the special pattern TZ starts to scroll.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (the 30th frame after the display of the performance symbol 70a is stopped). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the reserved first special symbol number begins, but because the change display and decrease display of the first reserved icon are in progress, the increase display of the first reserved icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, are put on hold.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(c), in the first image display device 70, the first special chart reserved number displayed in the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2," and the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the performance pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the 20th frame after the first hold icon starts changing and decreasing (40th frame after the performance pattern 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the first hold icon ends changing and decreasing. Also, the first hold icon starts increasing with animation, and the first occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon occurs, starts to be output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(d), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon H11 that has moved from the first display unit 70B1 is positioned at the center of the icon display area 70C and becomes the icon TI, while the first hold icon H12 that has moved from the second display unit 70B2 is positioned at the center of the first display unit 70B1, and the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the performance pattern 70a stops. In addition, the first hold icon (white icon) H13 is displayed in a very small size on the second display unit 70B2 and begins to be enlarged, and the sound output device 9 begins to output the first occurrence notification sound (beep).

The timing of T4 is the 5th frame after the first pending icon starts to be displayed in increasing numbers (45th frame after the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a stopped state). At this timing, the display of the first pending icon in increasing numbers and the output of the first occurrence notification sound continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon (white icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display unit 70B2 and continues to be enlarged, while the output of the first occurrence notification sound (beep) from the audio output device 9 continues. In addition, scrolling (moving downwards) of the performance pattern 70a in the variable display area on the left side begins.

The timing of T5 is the 10th frame after the increasing display of the first hold icon starts (the 50th frame after the display of the performance pattern 70a is stopped). At this timing, the increasing display of the first hold icon ends and the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 125(f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first hold icon (white icon) displayed in the first display unit 70B1 ends and the icon is displayed in normal size. Also, scrolling (moving downward) of the performance pattern 70a in the central variable display area begins.

In this way, if the number of reserved special figures increases while the reserved icon is being changed to the corresponding icon and the reserved icon is being decreased, the display of the increase in the reserved number will begin even before the display of the change and decrease is completed (frame update), so the player can recognize that the number of reserved special figures has increased even while the display of the change and decrease of the reserved icon is being executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of reserved special figures increases while the reserved icon is being changed and the reserved icon is being decreased, the display of the increased reserved icon and the output of the generated notification sound are put on hold (limited), and when the display of the changed reserved icon and the display of the decreased reserved icon are completed (frame update), the display of the increased reserved icon and the output of the generated notification sound are started, so that it is possible to prevent the change in the reserved special figure number from becoming difficult to grasp, and to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, instead of outputting the occurrence notification sound in synchronization with the increase in the reserved icon, which is executed after the increase in the reserved number, the occurrence notification sound may be output in synchronization with the increase in the reserved number.

In addition, rather than starting the display of an increase in the number of reserved icons and the output of the notification sound when the display of the change and the display of the decrease in the reserved icons are completed (frame update) (which is a delayed start from normal), the display of an increase in the number of reserved icons and the output of the notification sound may be started a little before the display of the change and the display of the decrease in the reserved icons are completed (frame update). By doing this, it is possible to prevent the progress of the reserved number of special charts from becoming difficult to grasp, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, even if the number of reserved special charts increases while the reserved icon is being displayed in an increasing manner, the display of the increased reserved icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are put on hold (restricted) in the same way as when the display of the change or decrease of the reserved icon is being displayed, while the display of the increased reserved number is started, and when the display of the increased reserved icon is completed (frame update), the display of the increased reserved icon and the output of the occurrence notification sound are started.

(Specific example of when the number of reserved balls increases during a specific reach performance)
A specific example of an increase in the reserved number during a specific reach effect will be described with reference to Figures 126 to 127. Figure 126 is a timing chart showing an increase in the reserved number during a specific reach effect, and Figures 127(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to Figure 126(a) to (f).

First, the timing of T1 is the 400th frame after the start of the SP reach variation pattern. At this timing, the normal reach variation that is executed before the SP reach variation and the variation display of the special symbol TZ continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(a), in the first image display device 70, the "5" performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, while the variable display of the performance pattern 70a continues in the central variable display area. In addition, "1" is displayed in the first special chart reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special chart reserved number display area 70F. Furthermore, the first reserved icon (white icon) H11 is displayed in the first display section 70B1, and the icon (white icon) TI is also displayed.

The timing of T2 is the 90th frame from the start of the normal reach effect (430 frames from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development effect to develop into the SP reach effect begins.

Specifically, on the first image display device 70, the "5" display pattern 70a that is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the display pattern 70a that is scrolling in the central variable display area, begin to move to the upper left of the screen and shrink, and the display pattern 70a changes to a simple display mode in which only the numbers are enlarged.

The timing of T3 is the 15th frame after the start of the development performance (445th frame after the start of the variable performance). At this timing, the development performance to develop into the SP reach performance continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(b), in the first image display device 70, the "5" display pattern 70a that is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the display pattern 70a that is scrolling in the central variable display area are displayed near the top left of the screen and are displayed in a size smaller than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the 30th frame after the start of the development performance (460th frame after the start of the variable performance). At this timing, the development performance ends and the SP reach performance begins.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(c), in the first image display device 70, the performance pattern 70a in the left, center, and right variable display areas is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left of the screen, and a showdown performance begins in the center of the screen in which friendly character C2 and enemy character C3 face off against each other. In addition, the reserved icons (here, only the first reserved icon) displayed in the reserved icon display areas (first reserved icon display area 70B, second reserved icon display area 70D) become hidden together with the reserved icon display areas, leaving only the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C.

The timing of T5 is when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (820 frames after the variable performance begins). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the reserved first special symbol number begins, but because the SP reach performance (confrontation performance) is in progress, there is no increase display of the reserved first symbol icon at this timing, and no output of the occurrence notification sound that is the notification sound when the icon occurs.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(d), in the first image display device 70, the first special chart reserved number displayed in the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2," and the final performance of the showdown performance (the deciding performance to notify whether or not a jackpot has been won) is executed.

The timing of T6 is the 420th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (showdown effect) (880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final effect (decisive effect) of the showdown effect is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(e), the first image display device 70 displays an effect in which friendly character C2 wins over enemy character C3, and the effect pattern 70a displayed in a reduced size at the top left of the screen temporarily stops (becomes oscillating) on a combination ("555") indicating a jackpot.

The timing of T7 is the 450th frame after the start of the SP reach performance (confrontation performance) (910th frame after the start of the variable performance). At this timing, the SP reach performance (confrontation performance) ends, and the first hold icon is displayed as a non-animated return and an increase.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 127(f), on the first image display device 70, the performance pattern 70a that was displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and temporarily stopped (it becomes swaying). In addition, the first hold icon (white icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display unit 70B1, and the first hold icon (white icon) H12 is displayed in normal size on the second display unit 70B2.

Then, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped in the left, center, and right variable display areas returns to a display mode consisting of characters and numbers, and finally, the performance pattern 70a stops and the special pattern TZ stops and displays the same combination "555" as the performance pattern 70a. Also, the icon TI that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, if the number of reserved special figures increases while a special effect (SP reach effect) is being performed, the display of the increased reserved numbers will begin even before the special effect ends (frame update), making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of reserved special symbols increases during the execution of a specific effect (SP reach effect), the display of the increased number of reserved icons is put on hold (limited), and when the specific effect ends (the reduced-sized missing symbol or big win symbol is enlarged) (frame update), the display of the increased number of reserved icons begins, preventing the progress of the reserved special symbol number from becoming difficult to grasp and making the game more interesting.

In addition, when the display of the reserved icons starts to increase when a specific effect (SP reach effect) ends, the display of the reserved icons is performed using a non-animated method that is completed in one frame. Therefore, even if there is an extreme discrepancy between the timing when the reserved special number increases and the timing when the display of the reserved icons is increased, it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player and increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, when the display of the reserved icons starts to increase when a special effect (SP reach effect) ends, no notification sound is output, making it difficult for the player to mistakenly believe that the number of reserved special icons has increased when the special effect ends due to the notification sound, making the game more enjoyable.

Even if the number of reserved special figures increases by multiple times during the execution of a specific effect (SP reach effect), the display of the reserved numbers will be increased while the display of the reserved icons will be put on hold (limited), and when the specific effect ends (frame update), the display of the increased reserved icons will be displayed all at once in one frame.

In addition, when the number of reserved special figures increases during the execution of a specific performance (SP reach performance), rather than not outputting the occurrence notification sound, the occurrence notification sound may be output in synchronization with the display of the increase in the reserved numbers.

In addition, although an SP reach effect has been given as an example of a specific effect, the specific effect may also include an SPSP reach effect or a full rotation reach effect.

(Specific examples of when the number of reserved balls increases or decreases before and after the end of a specific game state)
Specific examples of when the reserved number increases or decreases before and after the end of a specific game state will be described using Figures 128 to 130. Figure 128 is a timing chart showing when the reserved number increases or decreases before and after the end of a specific game state, and Figures 129(a) to (f) and Figures 130(g) to (i) are diagrams showing examples of presentations corresponding to Figure 128(a) to (i).

First, the timing of T1 is the timing that is 400 frames after the start of the last (100th) variable presentation in the specific game state. At this timing, the variable display of the presentation pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(a), "1" is displayed in the first special reserved number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second special reserved number display area 70F. Also, the first reserved icon display area 70B is erased, and the second reserved icons (white icons) H21 to H24 are displayed in the first display area 70D1 to the fourth display area 70D4 of the second reserved icon display area 70D, respectively, and the icon TI is displayed. Furthermore, the number of variable effects that can be executed in the specific game state (here, "0 remaining") is displayed at the top of the screen, and a right-hit image MU is displayed at the top right of the screen to encourage the player to shoot the game ball toward the right area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T2 is when the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (415 frames after the variable presentation starts). At this timing, the non-animated increase display of the reserved first special symbol number starts, but because the display area 70B of the reserved first symbol icon has been erased, there is no increase display of the reserved first symbol icon, and no output of the notification sound that is the notification sound when the icon is generated.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(b), in the first image display device 70, the first special chart reserved number displayed in the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2," and the scrolling of the performance pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the 430th frame after the start of the variable performance. At this timing, the performance patterns 70a that were being displayed in the variable display areas on the left, center, and right simultaneously temporarily stop.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(c), in the first image display device 70, the "285" display pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (in a swinging state) in the left, center, and right variable display areas, and a combination of display patterns 70a indicating a miss is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the 15th frame after the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (445th frame after the variable effect starts). At this timing, the result display starts, which shows the results of the game during the specified advantageous period (the period during which the jackpot game and the specific game state continue).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(d), the background image HG goes dark on the first image display device 70, and the words "Special Time Ended," indicating the end of the special game state, and "Jackpot x 1," the number of jackpot games executed during the specified advantageous period, are displayed. In addition, the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the 15th frame after the result display starts (460th frame after the variable performance starts). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(e), the first image display device 70 additionally displays the words "TOTAL 1200pt," which indicate the number of game balls acquired (paid out) during a specified advantageous period.

The timing of T6 is the 30th frame after the result display starts (475th frame after the start of the variable display). At this timing, the variable display of the display pattern 70a and the variable display of the special pattern TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 129(f), in the first image display device 70, the performance symbol 70a that was temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen moves to the center of the screen and is displayed as stopped, and the special symbol TZ is displayed as stopped with the same combination "285" as the performance symbol 70a. In addition, the icon TI that was displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

The timing of T7 is the timing when the last (100th) variable performance in the specific game state ends and the first variable performance in the normal game state starts (490 frames from the start of the variable performance). At this timing, the display of the variable performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ, the non-animated decrease display of the second reserved number, the non-animated return display of the first reserved icon, and the non-animated increase display of the first reserved icon start.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130(g), in the first image display device 70, the second reserved number in the second special chart reserved number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3," the second reserved icon display area 70D becomes hidden together with the reserved icon, and the first reserved icon display area 70B redisplays together with the reserved icon.

Furthermore, the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the effect pattern 70a starts without scrolling (updating to another effect pattern), and the special pattern TZ starts scrolling. Also, a left-hit image HU is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, encouraging the player to shoot the game ball toward the left area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T8 is the 20th frame after the change display and decrease display of the second pending icon started (510th frame after the start of the previous variable performance). At this timing, as shown in Figure 130 (h), the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the performance pattern 70a stops on the first image display device 70.

The timing of T9 is the 10th frame after the change display and decrease display of the second pending icon end (520 frames after the start of the previous variable effect). At this timing, the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130(i), in the first image display device 70, following scrolling of the performance pattern 70a in the variable display area on the left side, scrolling (movement downward) of the performance pattern 70a in the variable display area in the center begins.

In this way, if the number of reserved first special symbols (U1) increases during a specific game state, the display of the first reserved icon is put on hold (limited), while the display of the first reserved number starts to increase, so that the player can recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased even while a specific performance is being executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of reserved first special charts (U1) increases during a specific game state, the display of the first reserved icon starts to increase when the specific game state (the last variable performance in that state) ends (frame update). Therefore, even if you miss the display of the increase in the reserved first special chart numbers that was executed before that, you can recognize that the reserved first special chart number has increased, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, when the display of the first reserved icon starts to increase at the timing when the specific game state (the final variable performance in that state) ends, the display of the reserved icons is performed using a non-animated method that is completed in one frame, so even if there is an extreme discrepancy between the timing when the number of reserved special charts increases and the timing when the display of the reserved icons is increased, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of discomfort and increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, when the display of the reserved icons starts to increase when the specific game state (the final variable performance in that state) ends, the notification sound is not output, so it is difficult to mistakenly believe that the number of reserved special icons has increased when the specific game state ends due to the notification sound, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, the effect pattern does not scroll (does not update to the next effect pattern) until the pending icon has completed changing to the corresponding icon, and the effect pattern starts scrolling (updating to the next effect pattern) when the pending icon has completed changing (frame update), making it easier to grasp the progress of the effect during the changing effect, and making the game more interesting.

Even if the number of reserved first special charts increases by multiple times during a specific game state, the display of the reserved numbers is increased while the display of the reserved icons is put on hold (restricted), and when the specific game state (the last variable performance in the specific game state) ends (frame update), the display of the increased reserved icons is all displayed together in one frame.

In addition, when the number of reserved first special figures increases during a specific game state, rather than not outputting the generation notification sound, the generation notification sound may be output in synchronization with the display of the increase in the reserved numbers.

In this embodiment, in the normal game state, the first hold icon display area 70B is set (displayed), while the second hold icon display area 70D is not set (displayed), and in the specific game state, the first hold icon display area 70B is not set (displayed), while the second hold icon display area 70B is set (displayed); however, the second hold icon display area 70D may be set (displayed) in the normal game state, and the first hold icon display area 70B may be set (displayed) in the specific game state.

In addition, in this embodiment, the icon display area 70C was set (displayed) regardless of whether a specific effect (SP reach effect, SPSP reach effect, full rotation reach effect) was being executed during the variable effect, but the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during the execution of a specific effect, or the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C from the middle of the execution of a specific effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the first special chart reserved number display area 70E and the second special chart reserved number display area 70F are set (displayed) on the first image display device 70, but they may be set (displayed) on the second image display device 71, or on a dedicated display device different from the image display device (e.g., a 7-segment LED, dot matrix, dedicated LED, etc.). When set on a dedicated LED, the reserved special chart number may be displayed by the lighting color or lighting/flashing mode of the LED.

(Example of a performance when a player changes a performance element during the first variable performance in a specific game state)
Using Figure 131, we will explain an example of a presentation in which a player changes a presentation element (here, the volume value) during the first variable presentation in a specific game state.
Note that, although an example in which a special gaming state is a sure-win gaming state is shown here, the same basically applies to time-saving gaming states (normal time-saving gaming state, special time-saving gaming state).

First, as shown in FIG. 131(a), the first image display device 70 displays the "285" effect pattern 70a, which indicates a loss, and the special pattern TZ in a stopped state. When a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 in this state, the first special pattern reserved number (U1) becomes "1" and the first special pattern reserved number display area 70E becomes "1". However, since the first reserved icon display area 70B is not set (displayed) in the specific game state, the first reserved icon is not displayed and no occurrence notification sound (winning sound) is output from the audio output device 9.

When the first variable performance starts with the start of the display of the first special symbol from this state, as shown in FIG. 131(b), the first special symbol hold count display area 70E changes from "1" to "0", but the hold icon does not shift (decrease) and the performance pattern 70a starts to shrink (preparatory operation), the special symbol TZ starts scrolling, and background music is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume corresponding to the current volume value of "4".

In addition, a left-hit error notification is issued for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 4 seconds) based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 45 in a specific game state. Specifically, a left-hit error image HUE, which suggests that the game ball should be launched toward the right area of the game area 5a, is displayed in a position closer to the center of the screen and larger than the right-hit image MU, and a left-hit error sound saying "Please hit to the right" is output from the audio output device 9.

In addition, instead of issuing a left-hit error notification when one game ball enters the first starting hole 45 in a specific game state, a left-hit error notification may be issued when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three) enter the first starting hole 45.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the second starting hole 47, the second special chart reserved number (U2) becomes "1", a notification sound (winning sound) is output from the audio output device 9, and the second special chart reserved number display area 70F becomes "1". In addition, a reserved icon H21 (white icon) is displayed in the first display section 70D1 of the second reserved icon display area 70B.

The left hit error notification may be terminated when the game ball enters the second starting hole 47. In this case, the left hit error image HUE may be erased before the left hit error sound, or the left hit error sound may be erased before the left hit error image HUE.

After that, when the up button on the cross key 19 is operated, as shown in FIG. 131(c), the performance button 17 and the cross key 19 do not vibrate, and a volume value image OG indicating the current volume value of "4" is displayed, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the up button on the cross key 19 is operated while the volume value image OG is displayed, as shown in FIG. 131(d), the volume value of the effect sound is updated by +1 without the effect button 17 or cross key 19 vibrating, and the currently output BGM is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value of "5". Then, the volume value image OG is updated to a volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

In this state, when the first special symbol has stopped after the time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 131(e), the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a stops with a losing number of "379" and the special symbol TZ stops with a losing number of "379". In addition, the volume value image OG is erased in response to the stopping of the performance symbol 70a.

After that, when the stop time of the first special symbol has elapsed and the first variable performance ends, and the second variable performance starts with the start of the variable display of the next second special symbol, as shown in FIG. 131(f), the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0", and the second reserved icon (white icon) H21 displayed in the first display section 70D1 of the second reserved icon display area 70D starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. In addition, the performance pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparatory operation), the special pattern TZ starts to scroll, and the BGM continues to be output at a volume (performance element) according to the volume value "5" adjusted (changed) during the previous first variable performance.

Note that, although an example has been shown here in which the up button on the cross key 19 is operated during the first variable presentation in a specific game state to increase the volume value, the same is essentially true when the down button on the cross key 19 is operated to decrease the volume value.

Also, when the left or right button of the cross key 19 is operated to increase or decrease the light value during the first variable presentation in a specific game state, the operation of the cross key 19 displays a light value image instead of a volume value image OG, and the light intensity of the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76, image display device, etc.) changes according to the increase or decrease in the light value, but the process is basically the same.

In addition, in the case where the second variable performance is executed after the first variable performance in a specific game state, and the performance button 17 is operated during the first variable performance to change the performance mode, the background image is changed to a background image corresponding to the changed performance mode, and the BGM is changed to BGM corresponding to the changed performance mode. In this case, instead of changing the background image or BGM during the first variable performance, the changed performance mode may be entered from the start of the next second variable performance, and the background image or BGM may be changed. Also, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may be changed but the BGM may be changed. In addition, in the specific game state, even if the performance mode is changed, the display mode of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ does not change, but the display mode of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ may not be changed.

In addition, in the case where the second variable performance is executed after the first variable performance in the normal game state, and the performance button 17 is operated during the first variable performance to change the performance mode, the background image is changed to a background image corresponding to the changed performance mode, and the BGM is changed to BGM corresponding to the changed performance mode. In this case, instead of changing the background image or BGM during the first variable performance, the changed performance mode may be entered from the start of the next second variable performance, and the background image or BGM may be changed. Also, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. In addition, when the performance mode is changed in the normal game state, the display mode of the performance pattern 70a is changed, but the display mode of the special pattern TZ is not changed.

In this way, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 131, by operating the various operating parts (presentation button 17, cross key 19) while the first variable presentation is being executed in a specific game state, it is possible to change the presentation elements (volume value, light intensity value, presentation mode, etc.) used in the second variable presentation that is executed next. This makes it possible to improve convenience for the player and increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 131, even if the game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during a specific game state in which the first reserved icon is not displayed, the generation notification sound (winning sound) is not output. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the player being confused by only the generation notification sound being output even though the first reserved icon is not displayed, and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 131, even if a game ball enters the second start hole 47 in a specific game state, if a normal icon (white icon) is displayed, no notification sound (winning sound) is output, and if a special icon is displayed, a notification sound corresponding to the type of special icon is output. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of players becoming fed up with the notification sound in a specific game state where it is easier for a game ball to enter the second start hole 47, and makes it possible to increase interest in the game.

Note that at the start of the first variation performance, the pending icon is not shifted and the icon is not displayed, but it may be configured to display the icon without shifting the pending icon.

(Example of a performance when a player changes a performance element during a second variable performance in a specific game state)
Using Figure 132, we will explain an example of a presentation in which a player changes a presentation element during the second variable presentation in a specific game state.
Note that, although an example of a special gaming state is shown here, the same basically applies to a time-saving gaming state.

First, as shown in FIG. 132(a), the first image display device 70 displays the "285" effect pattern 70a, which indicates a miss, and the special pattern TZ in a stopped state. When a game ball enters the second start hole 47 in this state, the second special pattern reserved number (U2) becomes "1", the second special pattern reserved number display area 70F becomes "1", and the reserved icon H21 (white icon) is displayed in the first display section 70D1 of the second reserved icon display area 70B. Note that even if a game ball enters the second start hole 47 during a specific game state, since the white icon is displayed, no occurrence notification sound (winning sound) is output from the audio output device 9 (when a special icon is displayed, an occurrence notification sound corresponding to the type of special icon is output).

When the second variable performance starts with the start of the variable display of the second special symbol from this state, as shown in FIG. 132(b), the second special symbol hold count display area 70F changes from "1" to "0", and the second hold icon (white icon) H21 displayed in the first display section 70D1 of the second hold icon display area 70D starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. In addition, the performance symbol 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparatory operation), the special symbol TZ starts to scroll, and background music is output from the audio output device 9 at a volume corresponding to the current volume value "4".

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, the first special symbol reserved number (U1) becomes "1" and the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "1". However, since the first reserved icon display area 70B is not set (displayed) in the specific game state, the first reserved icon is not displayed and no occurrence notification sound (winning sound) is output from the audio output device 9.

In addition, a left-hit error notification is issued for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 2 seconds) based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 45 in a specific game state. Specifically, a left-hit error image HUE, which suggests that the game ball should be launched toward the right area of the game area 5a, is displayed in a position closer to the center of the screen and larger than the right-hit image MU, and a left-hit error sound saying "Please hit to the right" is output from the audio output device 9.

In addition, instead of issuing a left-hit error notification when one game ball enters the first starting hole 45 in a specific game state, a left-hit error notification may be issued when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three) enter the first starting hole 45. Also, the left-hit error notification may be terminated when a game ball enters the second starting hole 47, in which case the left-hit error image HUE may be erased before the left-hit error sound, or the left-hit error sound may be erased before the left-hit error image HUE.

After that, when the up button on the cross key 19 is operated, as shown in FIG. 132(c), the performance button 17 and the cross key 19 do not vibrate, and a volume value image OG indicating the current volume value of "4" is displayed, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the current volume value.

When the up button on the cross key 19 is operated while the volume value image OG is displayed, as shown in FIG. 132(d), the volume value of the effect sound is updated by +1 without the effect button 17 or cross key 19 vibrating, and the currently output BGM is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value of "5". Then, the volume value image OG is updated to a volume value image OG corresponding to the updated volume value, and a confirmation sound is output at a volume corresponding to the updated volume value.

In this state, when the second special symbol has stopped after the time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 132(e), the temporarily stopped performance symbol 70a stops with a losing number of "379" and the special symbol TZ stops with a losing number of "379". In addition, the volume value image OG is erased in response to the stopping of the performance symbol 70a.

After that, when the stop time of the second special symbol has elapsed and the second variable performance ends, and the first variable performance starts with the start of the next variable display of the first special symbol, as shown in FIG. 132(f), the first special symbol hold number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0", but the hold icon does not shift (decrease) and the performance symbol 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparatory operation), the special symbol TZ starts scrolling, and the BGM continues to be output at a volume (performance element) according to the volume value "5" adjusted (changed) during the previous second variable performance.

Note that, although an example has been shown here in which the up button on the cross key 19 is operated during the first variable presentation in a specific game state to increase the volume value, the same is essentially true when the down button on the cross key 19 is operated to decrease the volume value.

Also, when the left or right button of the cross key 19 is operated to increase or decrease the light value during the first variable presentation in a specific game state, the operation of the cross key 19 displays a light value image instead of a volume value image OG, and the light intensity of the various lighting devices (frame lighting device 10, board lighting device 76, image display device, etc.) changes according to the increase or decrease in the light value, but the process is basically the same.

In addition, in the case where the first variation presentation is executed after the second variation presentation in a specific game state, and the presentation button 17 is operated during the second variation presentation to change the presentation mode, the background image is changed to a background image corresponding to the changed presentation mode, and the background music is changed to background music corresponding to the changed presentation mode. However, the period during which the presentation mode can be changed during the second variation presentation (only during the pre-reach presentation) is shorter than the period during which the volume value and light intensity value can be changed (other than when the variation starts and stops).

In this case, rather than changing the background image or BGM during the second variable performance, the changed performance mode may be set from the start of the next first variable performance, and the background image or BGM may be changed. Also, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. Also, in a specific game state, even if the performance mode is changed, the display mode of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ does not change, but it is also possible that the display mode of the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ does not change.

In addition, when the first variation performance is executed after the second variation performance in the normal game state, and the performance button 17 is operated during the second variation performance to change the performance mode, the background image will be changed to a background image corresponding to the changed performance mode, and the BGM will be changed to BGM corresponding to the changed performance mode. However, the period during which the performance mode can be changed during the second variation performance (only during the performance before the reach) is shorter than the period during which the volume value and light intensity value can be changed (other than when the variation starts and stops).

In this case, rather than changing the background image or BGM during the second variable performance, the changed performance mode may be set from the start of the next first variable performance, and the background image or BGM may be changed. Also, the background image may be changed but the BGM may not be changed, or the background image may not be changed but the BGM may be changed. Also, in the normal game state, when the performance mode is changed, the display mode of the performance pattern 70a is changed, but the display mode of the special pattern TZ is not changed.

In this way, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 132, by operating the various operating parts (presentation button 17, cross key 19) while the second variable presentation is being executed in a specific game state, it is possible to change the presentation elements (volume value, light intensity value, presentation mode, etc.) used in the first variable presentation that is executed next. This makes it possible to improve convenience for the player and increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 132, even if the game ball enters the first starting hole 45 during a specific game state in which the first reserved icon is not displayed, the generation notification sound (winning sound) is not output. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the player being confused by only the generation notification sound being output even though the first reserved icon is not displayed, and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 132, even if a game ball enters the second start hole 47 in a specific game state, if a normal icon (white icon) is displayed, no notification sound (winning sound) is output, and if a special icon is displayed, a notification sound corresponding to the type of special icon is output. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of players becoming fed up with the notification sound in a specific game state where it is easier for a game ball to enter the second start hole 47, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that at the start of the first variation performance, the pending icon is not shifted and the icon is not displayed, but it may be configured to display the icon without shifting the pending icon.

(Example of a performance when a look-ahead action performance and a step-up notice performance are executed)
Using Figures 133 and 134, we will explain examples of presentations when pre-reading action presentations and step-up preview presentations are executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 133(a), the first image display device 70 displays the "468" effect pattern 70a, which indicates a miss, and the special pattern TZ in a stopped state. Also, "3" is displayed in the first special pattern hold count display area 70E, and three white icons HI are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. At this time, since there are no customers waiting, the multiple game board decorative LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting light (light emission modes other than rainbow light).

When the change performance (corresponding to a pre-change) starts from this state, as shown in FIG. 133(b), the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2," and the three reserved icons HI start to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. Also, the performance pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparatory operation), and the special symbol TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the first of three predictive action performances begins. Specifically, as a weak notice of the predictive action performance, the second movable member 74 emits blue light, performs a weak action toward the front of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak action sound effect.

Then, immediately after the movement of the reserve icon HI is completed, the reserve icon (far left in the figure) that is the subject of the preview operation performance changes to a blue icon, and as shown in FIG. 133(c), the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the performance pattern 70a ends and a scrolling display (high-speed change) at normal size begins, after which the second movable member 74 returns to its initial position and the first performance of the preview operation performance ends. In addition, the winning port lamp NR (not shown) lights up in the same blue color as the blue icon, and the lamp change performance begins.

After the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 133(d), the performance symbol 70a stops and displays a losing number of "365", and the special symbol TZ stops and displays a losing number of "365".

Furthermore, when the stop time of the performance pattern has elapsed and the next change performance (corresponding to a pre-change) begins, as shown in FIG. 133(e), the first special pattern reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1," and the two reserved icons HI begin to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. Also, the performance pattern 70a begins to be displayed in a reduced size (preparatory operation), and the special pattern TZ begins to scroll.

At this timing, the second look-ahead action performance begins. Specifically, as a weak notice of the look-ahead action performance, the second movable member 74 emits blue light, performs a weak action moving forward of the first image display device 70, and outputs a weak action sound effect.

Then, immediately after the movement of the reserved icon HI is completed, the reserved icon that is the subject of the preview operation performance changes to a red icon, and as shown in FIG. 133(f), the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the performance pattern 70a ends and the scrolling display (high-speed fluctuation) at normal size begins, after which the second movable member 74 returns to its initial position and the second performance of the preview operation performance ends. In addition, the winning port lamp NR (not shown) lights up in the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp change performance continues.

After the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 134(g), the performance symbol 70a stops and displays a losing number of "635", and the special symbol TZ stops and displays a losing number of "635".

Furthermore, when the stop time of the performance pattern has elapsed and the variable performance (corresponding to the relevant variable) that is the subject of the advance reading operation performance begins, as shown in FIG. 134 (h), the first special pattern reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0", and one reserved icon HI begins to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. Also, the performance pattern 70a begins to be displayed in a reduced size (preparatory operation), and the special pattern TZ begins to scroll.

At this timing, the third performance of the look-ahead action performance begins. Specifically, as a strong notice of the look-ahead action performance, the second movable member 74 emits red light, performs a strong action moving forward of the first image display device 70, and outputs a strong action sound effect.

After that, when the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 134(i), the reduced display (preparatory operation) of the performance pattern 70a ends and the scrolling display (high-speed fluctuation) at normal size begins, after which the second movable member 74 returns to its initial position and the third performance of the look-ahead operation performance ends.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the scrolling display (high-speed fluctuation) of the performance pattern 70a started, the first step performance of the step-up preview performance starts, as shown in FIG. 134(j). Specifically, the first step image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and the first step sound effect is output. After that, the second to fourth step performances are executed in sequence.

Furthermore, when the fourth step performance ends, as shown in FIG. 134(k), the fifth step performance starts, and the fifth step image is displayed on the first image display device 70 while the fifth step sound effect is output. Also, a weak vibration performance starts in which the performance button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second while the performance button 17 is turned off. However, since the execution of this weak vibration performance does not involve the effective period of the performance button 17, the sound effect when the operation prompt image (opaque performance button image, gauge image) is displayed and the performance sound (sound effect) when the performance button 17 is operated during the effective period are not output, but the performance light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the lamp change performance continue.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 134(l), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops, ending the weak vibration effect, and two seconds later the fifth step effect ends. After that, depending on the variation effect pattern, a normal reach effect will be executed followed by an SP reach effect, or a normal reach effect will be executed followed by an SPSP reach effect.

In this way, according to the presentation example shown in Figures 133 and 134, the look-ahead action presentation (light emission and operation of the second movable member 74) is started after the reserved number displayed in the special reserved number display area has decreased with the start of the variable presentation (after the presentation pattern 70a has started its preparation operation) and before the scrolling display (high-speed fluctuation) of the presentation pattern 70a begins. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the look-ahead action presentation is being executed while informing the player that the variable presentation has started, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example of the performance shown in Figures 133 and 134, the look-ahead operation performance (light emission and operation of the second movable member 74) is started after the movement (shift) of the reserved icon begins with the start of the change performance, but before the movement of the reserved icon is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the look-ahead operation performance is being executed while informing the player that the change performance has started, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example of the performance shown in Figures 133 and 134, the vibration performance is not performed during the first to fourth steps of the step-up preview performance, but is performed during the fifth step, which has the highest expectation. This effectively increases the player's sense of expectation, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 133 and 134, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration effect executed during the 5th step effect of the step-up preview effect is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the 5th step effect of the step-up preview effect. Therefore, the vibration effect does not overshadow the appearance of the 5th step effect, and it is possible to improve the effect of the step-up preview effect. In addition, it is possible to prevent the inconvenience of a long vibration effect causing the player to mistakenly think that a jackpot has been confirmed, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 133 and 134, the vibration effect executed during the fifth step effect does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation prompting image), so sound effects when displaying the operation prompting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) and sound effects when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period (operation sound effects, movable member operation sound effects, etc.) are not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences that may confuse the player during a vibration effect that does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17, and it is possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 133 and 134, the illumination of the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the lamp change presentation continue even during the vibration presentation of the presentation button 17. Therefore, the presentation effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as pausing the illumination of the presentation or the lamp change presentation due to the vibration presentation that accompanies the effective period of the presentation button 17, thereby making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Note that the effect button 17 is not illuminated during the vibration effect that is executed during the fifth step of the step-up preview effect, but the effect button 17 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner (a color other than the rainbow color that is the illumination color for a guaranteed jackpot, and an illumination manner different from the illumination manner during the effective period of the effect button 17, such as flashing white or flashing yellow, etc.) throughout the execution period of the vibration effect. This makes it easier to know that a vibration effect is being executed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, during a vibration effect that does not involve an active period for the effect button 17, the lighting pattern of the multiple game board decorative LEDs (for example, moving lighting toward the effect button 17, etc.) may be used to emit lighting that draws attention to the effect button 17.

(Example of a performance when pre-reading vibration and dialogue preview are performed)
Using Figures 135 and 136, we will explain examples of effects when pre-reading vibration effects and dialogue preview effects are executed.

First, as shown in FIG. 135(a), the first image display device 70 displays the "468" effect pattern 70a, which indicates a miss, and the special pattern TZ in a stopped state. Also, "3" is displayed in the first special pattern hold count display area 70E, and three white icons HI are displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B. At this time, since the machine is not in a waiting state for customers, the multiple game board decorative LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting light (light emission modes other than rainbow light).

When the change effect (corresponding to a pre-change) starts from this state, as shown in FIG. 135(b), the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2," and the three reserved icons HI start to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. Also, the effect pattern 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size (preparatory operation), and the special symbol TZ starts to scroll.

At this timing, the first of three predictive vibration effects begins. Specifically, as a weak notice of the predictive vibration effect, the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for one second and flashes white for one second. However, since the weak vibration is not performed during the effective period of the effect button 17, no sound effect is output when the operation prompt image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed, and no sound effect is output when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. However, the multiple game board decorative LEDs continue to emit light (light emission modes other than rainbow light).

Then, immediately after the movement of the reserve icon HI is completed, the reserve icon (far left in the figure) that is the subject of the preview vibration effect changes to a blue icon, and as shown in FIG. 135(c), the reduced display (preparatory action) of the performance pattern 70a ends and a scrolling display (high-speed fluctuation) at normal size begins, after which the weak vibration and white flashing of the performance button 17 stops and the first preview vibration effect ends. In addition, the winning port lamp NR (not shown) lights up in the same blue color as the blue icon, and the lamp change effect begins.

After the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 135(d), the performance symbol 70a stops and displays a losing number of "365", and the special symbol TZ stops and displays a losing number of "365".

Furthermore, when the stop time of the performance pattern has elapsed and the next change performance (corresponding to a pre-change) begins, as shown in FIG. 135(e), the first special pattern reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1," and the two reserved icons HI begin to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. Also, the performance pattern 70a begins to be displayed in a reduced size (preparatory operation), and the special pattern TZ begins to scroll.

At this timing, the second pre-reading vibration effect begins. Specifically, as a weak notice of the pre-reading vibration effect, the effect button 17 vibrates weakly for one second and flashes white for one second. However, since the execution of this weak vibration does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when the operation prompt image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the effect sound (sound effect) when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period are not output, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

Then, immediately after the movement of the reserved icon HI is completed, the reserved icon that is the subject of the preview vibration effect changes to a red icon, and as shown in FIG. 135(f), the reduced display (preparatory action) of the performance pattern 70a ends and the scrolling display (high-speed fluctuation) begins, after which the weak vibration and white flashing of the performance button 17 stops and the second preview vibration effect ends. In addition, the winning port lamp NR (not shown) lights up in the same red color as the red icon, and the lamp change effect continues.

After the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 136(g), the performance symbol 70a stops and displays a losing number of "635", and the special symbol TZ stops and displays a losing number of "635".

Furthermore, when the stop time of the performance pattern has elapsed and the variable performance (corresponding to the relevant variable) that is the subject of the advance reading vibration performance begins, as shown in FIG. 136(h), the first special pattern reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0", and one reserved icon HI begins to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C. Also, the performance pattern 70a begins to be displayed in a reduced size (preparatory operation), and the special pattern TZ begins to scroll.

At this timing, the third pre-reading vibration effect begins. Specifically, as a strong notice of the pre-reading vibration effect, the effect button 17 vibrates strongly for three seconds and flashes red for three seconds. However, since the execution of this strong vibration does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when the operation prompt image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the effect sound (sound effect) when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period are not output, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

After that, when the movement of the hold icon HI is completed, as shown in FIG. 136(i), the reduced display (preparation operation) of the performance pattern 70a ends and the scrolling display (high-speed fluctuation) begins, but the strong notice of the pre-reading vibration performance continues. After that, the strong vibration and white flashing of the performance button 17 stops, and the third performance of the pre-reading vibration performance ends.

Then, when the third look-ahead vibration effect ends and a predetermined period has elapsed, the effective period of the effect button 17 (three seconds for a single hit) occurs and the dialogue preview effect begins, as shown in FIG. 136(j). Specifically, an operation prompt image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image that imitates the effect button 17 and a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the effective period is displayed in the dialogue window image SW, a display sound effect of the operation prompt image SG is output, and the effect button 17 emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 136(k), the hot line "What's this?! It's hot!!" is displayed in red text and a sound (effect sound) corresponding to the hot line is output. In addition, a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second while the effect button 17 is turned off, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the lamp change effect continue.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 136(l), the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. After that, depending on the variation effect pattern, a pseudo consecutive effect will be executed, a normal reach effect will be executed, a normal reach effect will be executed followed by an SP reach effect, or a normal reach effect will be executed followed by an SPSP reach effect.

In this way, according to the presentation example shown in Figures 135 and 136, the look-ahead vibration presentation (vibration and white flashing of presentation button 17) is started after the reserved number displayed in the first special chart reserved number display area has decreased with the start of the variable presentation (after presentation pattern 70a has begun its preparation operation) and before the scrolling display (high-speed fluctuation) begins. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the look-ahead vibration presentation is being executed while informing the player that the variable presentation has begun, thereby making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example of the presentation shown in Figures 135 and 136, the look-ahead vibration presentation (vibration and white flashing of the presentation button 17) is started after the movement (shift) of the reserved icon begins with the start of the variable presentation, but before the movement of the reserved icon is completed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the look-ahead vibration presentation is being executed while informing the player that the variable presentation has started, thereby making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example of effects shown in Figures 135 and 136, when a look-ahead vibration effect is executed, the effect button 17 is made to flash white even though it is not in a valid period of the effect button 17. Therefore, even if the effect button 17 is not operated, it is possible to make the player more aware that a look-ahead vibration effect is being executed, which can increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 135 and 136, the illumination state of the presentation button 17 in the look-ahead vibration presentation is different from the illumination state of the presentation button 17 during the valid period in a preview presentation accompanied by the occurrence of an effective period (such as a dialogue preview presentation, a pseudo consecutive presentation, a development presentation, a cut-in presentation, or a deciding presentation). This makes it possible to prevent the inconvenience of being confused with the occurrence of an effective period of the presentation button 17 in the look-ahead vibration presentation, and to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example effects shown in Figures 135 and 136, the pre-reach preview effects (dialogue preview effects, step-up preview effects) are not executed until the look-ahead vibration effect ends. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as players being unable to notice that a look-ahead vibration effect, which is difficult to judge by appearance, is being executed due to the pre-reach preview effect, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, according to the example of effects shown in Figures 135 and 136, the pseudo consecutive effects are not executed until the predictive vibration effect ends. This prevents the player from noticing that the predictive vibration effect, which is difficult to judge by appearance, is being executed due to the pseudo consecutive effects, and makes the game more interesting.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 135 and 136, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration effect executed during the dialogue preview effect is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the dialogue preview effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the dialogue preview effect without the vibration effect dominating the appearance of the dialogue preview effect. It is also possible to prevent the inconvenience of a long vibration effect causing the player to mistakenly believe that a jackpot has been confirmed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example of effects shown in Figures 135 and 136, the vibration effect executed during the look-ahead vibration effect does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation prompting image), so the display sound effect when the operation prompting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the effect sound when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period (operation sound effect, movable member operation sound effect, etc.) are not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences that may confuse the player during a vibration effect that does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example of effects shown in Figures 135 and 136, the vibration effect executed during the dialogue preview effect accompanies the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation prompting image), so the display sound effect when the operation prompting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the effect sound (operation sound effect, dialogue voice, etc.) when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period is output. This makes it possible to improve the effect of the dialogue preview effect and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example of effects shown in Figures 135 and 136, the execution period of the vibration effect executed during the dialogue preview effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the timing of operation. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on whether or not the effect button 17 is operated and the timing of operation, and it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 135 and 136, the illumination of the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the lamp change presentation continue even during the vibration presentation associated with the effective period of the presentation button 17. Therefore, the presentation effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as pausing the illumination of the presentation or the lamp change presentation due to the vibration presentation associated with the effective period of the presentation button 17, thereby making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Note that the effect button 17 is not illuminated during the vibration effect that is executed during the dialogue preview effect, but the effect button 17 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner (a color other than the rainbow color that is the illumination color for a guaranteed jackpot, and an illumination manner different from the illumination manner during the active period of the effect button 17, such as flashing white or flashing yellow, etc.) throughout the execution period of the vibration effect.

In addition, the vibration effect that is executed during the dialogue preview performance may be executed at the same timing (for example, 0.5 seconds after the effective period ends when the performance button 17 is not operated) regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the effective period and regardless of the timing of the operation (the execution period of the vibration effect may be variable).

In addition, during a vibration effect that does not involve an active period for the effect button 17, the lighting pattern of the multiple game board decorative LEDs (for example, moving lighting toward the effect button 17, etc.) may be used to emit lighting that draws attention to the effect button 17.

(Example of a pseudo consecutive effect being executed before a reach effect)
Using Figure 137, an example of a presentation in which a pseudo consecutive presentation (a stage presentation accompanying a pseudo consecutive presentation without spanning a reach presentation) is executed before a reach presentation will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 137(a), in the first image display device 70, the "6" effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the left region, the "5" effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the right region, and the varying display of the effect symbol 70a continues in the middle region. At this time, the effective period of the effect button 17 does not occur and the pseudo consecutive success effect starts. Specifically, a teasing effect is executed in the middle region to tease whether or not the pseudo symbol suggesting the execution of the pseudo consecutive effect will temporarily stop. At this time, since the game is not in a waiting state for customers, the multiple game board decorative LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

After that, when the teasing performance ends, as shown in FIG. 137(b), the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle area and a success sound effect is output. Also, as shown in FIG. 137(c), the second movable member 74 emits light in blue and performs a weak movement toward the front of the first image display device 70, and the performance pattern 70a changes again and a "x2" is displayed in blue to indicate the number of pseudo changes (the performance stage has progressed). Also, the first stage performance (movie of the first story episode) of the stage performance executed in conjunction with the pseudo consecutive performance is executed for a predetermined period (e.g. 3 seconds).

After that, when a predetermined period of time has passed, as shown in FIG. 137(d), in the first image display device 70, the "6" performance pattern 70a temporarily stops in the left area, the "5" performance pattern 70a temporarily stops in the right area, and the display of the varying performance pattern 70a continues in the middle area, and a pseudo teasing performance is executed in the middle area to tease whether or not the pseudo pattern suggesting the execution of a pseudo consecutive win will temporarily stop. At this time, the effective period of the performance button 17 occurs, and an operation prompting image SG consisting of an opaque performance button image imitating the performance button 17 that emits white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed, and the display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the performance button 17 emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 137(e), the pseudo symbols temporarily stop in the middle area as a pseudo consecutive success effect, and a success sound effect is output. In addition, the effect button 17 is turned off, and a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the multiple game board decorative LEDs continues.

After one second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 137(f), the weak vibration of the performance button 17 stops and the weak vibration performance ends. The second movable member 74 also emits red light and performs a strong movement toward the front of the first image display device 70, causing the performance pattern 70a to change again and display "x3" in red to indicate the number of pseudo-changes (the performance stage has progressed). The second stage performance (movie of the second story episode) of the stage performances executed in conjunction with the pseudo consecutive performance is also executed for a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds).

After that, when the strong operation time (1 second) of the second movable member 74 has elapsed, the pseudo consecutive success performance ends, and as shown in FIG. 137(g), the performance pattern 70a of "5" temporarily stops in the left and right areas and a normal reach performance is executed, and then, depending on the variable performance pattern, the normal reach performance is executed followed by an SP reach performance, or the normal reach performance is executed followed by an SPSP reach performance.

(Example of a pseudo consecutive effect after a reach effect)
An example of a performance in which a pseudo consecutive performance (a stage performance accompanying a pseudo consecutive performance across a reach performance) is executed after a reach performance will be described with reference to Fig. 138. Note that Figs. 138(a)-(c) are the same as Figs. 137(a)-(c), and therefore the description thereof will be omitted here.

When a predetermined period of time has passed from the state shown in FIG. 138(c), as shown in FIG. 138(d), the "5" effect symbol 70a temporarily stops in the left and right regions, and a normal reach effect begins. After that, as shown in FIG. 138(e), when the pseudo consecutive effect begins, a pseudo teasing effect is executed, inviting the player to see whether or not the pseudo symbol suggesting the execution of the pseudo consecutive effect will temporarily stop in the middle region. At this time, the effective period of the effect button 17 occurs, and an operation prompting image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits white light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed, and the effect button 17 emits white light. At this time, since the game is not in a waiting state for customers, the multiple game board decorative LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting effect light (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 138(f), the pseudo symbols temporarily stop in the middle area as a pseudo consecutive success effect, and a success sound effect is output. In addition, the effect button 17 is turned off, and a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the multiple game board decorative LEDs continues.

After one second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 138(g), the weak vibration of the performance button 17 stops and the weak vibration performance ends. The second movable member 74 also emits red light and performs a strong movement toward the front of the first image display device 70, causing the performance pattern 70a to change again and displaying "x3" in red to indicate the number of pseudo-changes (the performance stage has progressed). The second stage performance (movie of the second story episode) of the stage performances executed in conjunction with the pseudo consecutive performance is also executed for a predetermined period (e.g., 3 seconds).

After that, when a predetermined time has passed, as shown in FIG. 138(h), the "5" performance pattern 70a temporarily stops in the left and right areas and a normal reach performance is executed, and then, depending on the variable performance pattern, a normal reach performance is executed and then an SP reach performance is executed, or a normal reach performance is executed and then an SPSP reach performance is executed.

In this way, according to the example effects shown in Figures 137 and 138, it is possible to execute a vibration effect when a pseudo consecutive effect is executed, which involves the occurrence of an effective period of the effect button 17. This makes it possible to effectively increase the player's sense of expectation, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 137 and 138, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration presentation executed during the pseudo-successful consecutive presentation is shorter than the execution period (2 seconds) of the pseudo-successful consecutive presentation. This makes it possible to improve the presentation effect of the pseudo-successful consecutive presentation without the vibration presentation dominating the appearance of the pseudo-successful consecutive presentation. It is also possible to prevent the inconvenience of a long vibration presentation leading to the mistaken belief that a jackpot has been confirmed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 137 and 138, the vibration effect executed during the pseudo consecutive effects occurs during the valid period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation prompting image), so the display sound effect when the operation prompting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the effect sound when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period (operation sound effect, success sound effect, etc.) is output. This makes it possible to improve the effect of the pseudo consecutive effects and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 137 and 138, the execution period of the vibration effect executed in the pseudo consecutive effects is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the timing of operation. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on whether or not the effect button 17 is operated and the timing of operation, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example of the performance shown in Figures 137 and 138, when a pseudo consecutive performance is executed after a reach performance, the type of performance pattern that forms the reach state after the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance is not downgraded from the type of performance pattern that formed the reach state before the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance (downgrading from reach with odd numbers to reach with even numbers, or from reach with a "7" to reach with an even number or an odd number other than "7"). Therefore, the player will not feel dissatisfied with the execution of the pseudo consecutive performance, and the interest of the game will not be improved.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 137 and 138, the illumination of the multiple game board decorative LEDs continues even during the vibration presentation associated with the effective period of the presentation button 17. Therefore, the presentation effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporarily suspending the illumination of the presentation due to the vibration presentation associated with the effective period of the presentation button 17, thereby making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example of the performance shown in FIG. 137 and FIG. 138, in the variable performance in which the pseudo consecutive performance is executed, it is possible to execute a stage performance (playback of the story episodes 1 to 3 movies) in which the performance can progress step by step with the pseudo consecutive performance (temporary stopping and re-changing of the performance pattern 70a). Therefore, it is possible to enhance the performance effect when the pseudo consecutive performance is executed, and to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 137 and 138, there are cases where the stage effect starts before the pseudo consecutive hits are made, and cases where the stage effect starts after the pseudo consecutive hits are made. This makes it possible to prevent players from being told in advance that the pseudo consecutive hits will be made because the stage effect has started, and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

Note that the effect button 17 is not illuminated during the vibration effect executed during the pseudo consecutive effects, but the effect button 17 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner (a color other than the rainbow color that is the illumination color for a guaranteed jackpot, and an illumination manner different from the illumination manner during the effective period of the effect button 17, such as flashing white or flashing yellow, etc.) throughout the execution period of the vibration effect.

In addition, the vibration effect that is executed during the pseudo consecutive performance may be executed until the same timing (for example, 0.5 seconds after the effective period ends when the performance button 17 is not operated) regardless of whether or not the performance button 17 is operated during the effective period and regardless of the timing of the operation (the execution period of the vibration effect may be variable).

In addition, during the pseudo consecutive performance, an effective period of the performance button 17 is generated, and a vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed, but during the pseudo consecutive performance, a vibration performance may be executed without generating an effective period of the performance button 17, or an effective period of the performance button 17 may be generated but a vibration performance may not be executed.

(Example of a performance when a development performance is performed and a SP reach performance is performed)
Using Figure 139, we will explain an example of a presentation when a development presentation is executed and an SP reach presentation is performed.

First, as shown in FIG. 139(a), the "5" effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the left and right regions, and a normal reach effect is being executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 139(b), when the SP development effect starts, a roulette effect is executed in which multiple special effect symbols such as an SPSP development symbol suggesting development to an SPSP reach effect, an SP development symbol suggesting development to an SP reach effect, a pseudo symbol suggesting the execution of a pseudo consecutive effect, and a trash symbol suggesting that the effect will not develop (it is a miss), are displayed diagonally at a slow rate of variance. At this time, since the game is not in a waiting state for customers, the multiple game board decorative LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting light for the effect (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission).

After that, as shown in FIG. 139(c), an effect is performed in which the SPSP development symbols, SP development symbols, pseudo symbols, and dregs symbols are displayed in a rapid, variable manner. Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 139(d), the SP development symbols are temporarily stopped in the middle area, and it is announced that the effect will develop into an SP reach effect. Note that in the roulette effect, the type of special effect symbols that are displayed in a variable manner changes depending on the variable effect pattern, so the type of special effect symbols that are displayed in a variable manner (special effect symbols that are not temporarily stopped in the end and special effect symbols that are temporarily stopped) indicates whether or not the effect will develop into an effect with a high probability of a jackpot (the probability of a jackpot).

Then, the screen goes white and the development performance ends, and as shown in FIG. 139(e), the performance pattern 70a in the middle area changes again, while the performance patterns 70a in the left and right areas are displayed in reduced size in the left and right corners at the top of the screen, and the SP reach performance begins. Note that the icon becomes hidden when the SP reach performance begins.

(Example of a performance when a development performance is executed and an SPSP reach performance is executed)
Using Figure 140, we will explain an example of a presentation when a development presentation is executed and an SPSP reach presentation is performed.

First, as shown in FIG. 140(a), the "5" effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the left and right areas, and a normal reach effect is being executed. After that, as shown in FIG. 139(b), when the SPSP development effect starts, a roulette effect is executed in which multiple special effect symbols such as an SP development symbol suggesting development to an SP reach effect, an SPSP development symbol suggesting development to an SPSP reach effect, and a full rotation symbol suggesting development to a full rotation reach effect are displayed by slowly varying diagonally. At this time, since the machine is not in a waiting state for customers, multiple game board decorative LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting light (light emission modes other than rainbow light emission).

After that, as shown in FIG. 140(c), an effect is performed in which the SP development pattern, SPSP development pattern, and full rotation pattern are displayed in rapid changing order, and an effective suggestion effect is started, suggesting that operation of the effect button 17 may be effective. Specifically, a number of semi-transparent effect button images that resemble the effect button 17 are displayed and moved, and an effect is performed in which the semi-transparent effect button images are gathered toward a specific position in the bottom right of the screen.

When the semi-transparent effect button images gather at a specific position in the bottom right of the screen, as shown in FIG. 140(d), the effective period of the effect button 17 (long press for 4 seconds) occurs, and an operation prompting image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits red light and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed at a specific position in the bottom right of the screen, a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the effect button 17 emits red light. The words "long press" are displayed on the opaque effect button image.

After that, when the effect button 17 is pressed and held, the speed of the varying display of the various development patterns gradually slows down, and when the press and hold time reaches a predetermined time (e.g., 2 seconds) or the valid period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 140(e), the SPSP development pattern temporarily stops in the middle area, a temporary stop sound effect is output, and a strong action effect is executed in which the first movable member 73 emits blue light and operates. In addition, the effect button 17 is turned off, and a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for one second, but the effect light emitted by the multiple game board decorative LEDs (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) continues.

After one second has passed, the weak vibration of the effect button 17 stops and the weak vibration effect ends. After that, the screen goes white and the development effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 140(f), the effect pattern 70a in the middle area changes again, and the three effect patterns 70a are displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen, starting the SPSP reach effect. Note that with the start of the SPSP reach effect, the reserved icon and the icon in question are hidden.

In this way, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 139 and 140, the type of special presentation symbols that are variably displayed in the roulette presentation (special presentation symbols that are not temporarily stopped in the end, and special presentation symbols that are temporarily stopped) suggests whether or not the presentation will develop into one with a high probability of a jackpot (the probability of a jackpot). Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's expectations regarding the types of special presentation symbols that are variably displayed in the roulette presentation, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 139 and 140, a valid suggestion presentation may be executed in the development presentation, which can heighten the player's expectations for the presentation developing into a reach presentation with a high probability of winning, thereby making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 139 and 140, the execution period (1 second) of the vibration presentation executed during the development presentation is shorter than the execution period (3 seconds) of the development presentation. This makes it possible to improve the presentation effect of the development presentation without the vibration presentation dominating the appearance of the development presentation. It is also possible to prevent the inconvenience of a long vibration presentation leading to the mistaken belief that a jackpot has been confirmed, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 139 and 140, the vibration presentation executed during the development presentation accompanies the effective period of the presentation button 17 (display of the operation prompting image), so the display sound effect when the operation prompting image (opaque presentation button image, gauge image) is displayed and the presentation sound when the presentation button 17 is operated during the effective period (operation sound effect, temporary stop sound effect, etc.) are output. This makes it possible to improve the presentation effect of the development presentation and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example effects shown in Figures 139 and 140, the execution period of the vibration effect executed during the development effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and regardless of the timing of operation. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on the timing of operation of the effect button 17, and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 139 and 140, the illumination of the multiple game board decorative LEDs continues even during the vibration presentation associated with the effective period of the presentation button 17. Therefore, the presentation effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporarily suspending the illumination of the presentation due to the vibration presentation associated with the effective period of the presentation button 17, thereby making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Note that the effect button 17 is not illuminated during the vibration effect that is executed during the development effect, but the effect button 17 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner (a color other than the rainbow color that is the illumination color for a guaranteed jackpot, and an illumination manner different from the illumination manner during the active period of the effect button 17, such as flashing white or flashing yellow, etc.) throughout the execution period of the vibration effect.

In addition, the vibration effects executed during the development effect may be executed at the same timing (for example, 0.5 seconds after the effective period ends when the effect button 17 is not operated) regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and regardless of the timing of the operation (the execution period of the vibration effect may be variable).

In addition, during the development performance, an effective period of the performance button 17 is generated and a vibration performance of the performance button 17 is executed, but during the development performance, a vibration performance may be executed without generating an effective period of the performance button 17, or an effective period of the performance button 17 may be generated but a vibration performance may not be executed.

(Example of a cut-in effect during a SP reach effect resulting in a big win)
Using Figures 141 and 142, we will explain an example of a presentation in which a cut-in presentation is executed during an SP reach presentation in variable presentation pattern 13, resulting in a jackpot.

First, as shown in FIG. 141(a), the effect symbols 70a in the left and right areas are displayed in reduced size in the upper left and right corners of the screen, and the SP reach effect is being executed. At this time, since the game is not in a waiting state for customers, the multiple game board decorative LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting light (light emission modes other than rainbow light emission).

When the SP reach effect approaches the end from this state, as shown in FIG. 141(b), an effective suggestion effect is started, which suggests that operating the effect button 17 may be effective for the cut-in effect. Specifically, an effect is performed in which two semi-transparent effect button images that resemble the effect button 17 converge from the bottom left and right of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

When the semi-transparent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. 141(c), the effective period of the effect button 17 (4 seconds for a single hit) occurs, and an operation prompting image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that protrudes and emits red light at a specific position in the center of the screen and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed, a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the effect button 17 protrudes and emits red light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, the red cut-in effect starts, as shown in FIG. 141(d). Specifically, a red frame cut-in image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a third cut-in sound effect is output. In addition, the effect button 17 is turned off, and a weak vibration effect is started in which the effect button 17 is weakly vibrated for three seconds, but the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) by the multiple game board decorative LEDs continues.

After that, when one second has elapsed since the output of the third cut-in sound effect has ended, the cut-in effect and weak vibration effect will end, and either the "5" effect pattern 70a or the "6" effect pattern 70a will stop in the middle area, as shown in FIG. 141(e).

After a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 141(f), the three "5" symbols 70a are temporarily stopped when aligned (symbol alignment), and a strong vibration effect (jackpot confirmation vibration effect) is initiated in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for four seconds, and the multiple game board decorative LEDs and effect button 17 light up in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve an effective period for the effect button 17, no sound effects are output when the operation prompt image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed, and no sound effects (sound effects) are output when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period.

After four seconds have passed, as shown in FIG. 142(g), the strong vibration effect ends, but the multiple game board decoration LEDs and effect button 17 continue to emit rainbow colors. After one second has passed, the multiple game board decoration LEDs resume emitting light, and the effect button 17 goes out.

Then, as shown in FIG. 142(h), the re-draw effect starts. Specifically, three "5" effect symbols 70a are aligned (symbol alignment) and are moved toward the back and displayed in a reduced size, the effective period of the effect button 17 (three seconds for a single hit) begins, an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits white light at a specific position in the center of the screen, and an operation prompting image SG consisting of a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effective period are displayed, a display effect sound of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the effect button 17 emits white light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, the promotion failure effect starts as shown in FIG. 142(i). Specifically, the three "5" effect symbols 70a that were displayed in a reduced size are enlarged and moved to the front of the screen when they are lined up (pattern alignment), and a non-promotion sound effect is output, but the effect illumination (illumination mode other than rainbow illumination) by the multiple game board decorative LEDs continues.

Then, as shown in FIG. 142(j), the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped at normal size, and the promotion failure performance ends. After that, when a predetermined period (for example, one second) has elapsed, an eye-catching performance is executed, suggesting that the performance pattern 70a will be stopped, as shown in FIG. 142(k). Specifically, an eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three performance patterns 70a.

After that, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect ends, as shown in FIG. 142(l), the effect pattern 70a returns to a display mode including the character and enters a temporary stop state, and if there is a first special reserved number, the reserved icon is displayed again. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big win confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the effect button 17 being valid for a certain period, and the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the effect button 17 is not valid for a certain period to be executed, the sound effect when the operation prompt image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the sound effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period are not output.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 142(m), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow light emitted by the multiple game board decorative LEDs will end, and the effect pattern 70a will stop at "555", and the special pattern TZ will also stop at "555".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 142(n), the opening performance of the jackpot game and the performance illumination of the multiple game board decorative LEDs begin, and a right-hit image MU suggesting a right hit is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. In addition, a strong vibration performance (opening vibration performance) is started in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the effective period of the performance button 17, and the performance button 17 emits rainbow light. However, since the execution of this strong vibration performance does not accompany the effective period of the performance button 17, the sound effect when the operation prompt image (opaque performance button image, gauge image) is displayed and the performance sound (sound effect) when the performance button 17 is operated during the effective period are not output. After that, when one second has elapsed, the strong vibration performance and the rainbow illumination of the multiple game board decorative LEDs end, the opening performance of the jackpot game ends, and the round game begins.

In the case of a variable presentation pattern in which a re-draw presentation is not executed, the display will transition to FIG. 142(k) after FIG. 142(g) and an eye-catching presentation will be executed.

In this way, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 141 and 142, a valid indication presentation may be executed during the cut-in presentation, which not only indicates that a valid period has occurred, but also suggests to the player that there is a high probability of winning, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example of effects shown in Figures 141 and 142, the execution period of the cut-in effect (3 seconds) is the same as the execution period of the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect (3 seconds). This makes it possible to effectively improve the effect of the cut-in effect. In addition, the vibration effect can suggest to the player that there is a high chance of winning, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example of effects shown in Figures 141 and 142, the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect accompanies the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation prompting image), so a display sound effect is output when the operation prompting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed, and an effect sound (operation sound effect, cut-in sound effect, etc.) is output when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period. This improves the effect of the cut-in effect, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example of the presentation shown in Figures 141 and 142, when three presentation patterns 70a that do not include characters are temporarily stopped in a line (pattern alignment), a strong vibration presentation (a vibration presentation that confirms a jackpot) is executed for a longer period of time than the vibration presentation during the cut-in presentation, so that the player can be effectively informed that a jackpot has been reached, and the excitement of the game can be increased.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figs. 141 and 142, when three effect patterns 70a including characters are temporarily stopped in a line (C pattern line), a strong vibration effect (jackpot confirmation vibration effect) is executed. This allows the player to reconfirm that a jackpot has been reached, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 141 and 142, the strong vibration effects (jackpot confirmation vibration effect, jackpot confirmation vibration effect, opening vibration effect) that are executed when the three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped or when the jackpot game is opened do not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation prompt image), so the display sound effect when the operation prompt image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the effect sound when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period (operation sound effect, other sound effect, etc.) are not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences that may confuse the player during vibration effects that do not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 141 and 142, the execution period of the vibration effect executed during the cut-in effect is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and regardless of the timing of operation. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience of not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on the timing of operation of the effect button 17, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 141 and 142, when a jackpot is reached as a result of the execution of the SP reach effect, a vibration effect is executed while the effect pattern 70a that results in a jackpot is temporarily stopped, but a vibration effect is not executed while the pattern is actually stopped. This prevents the player from mistaking the vibration effect for the variable effect to be continuing, making the game more interesting.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 141 and 142, the illumination of the multiple game board decorative LEDs continues even during the vibration presentation associated with the effective period of the presentation button 17. Therefore, the presentation effect can be maintained by not performing processing such as temporarily suspending the illumination of the presentation due to the vibration presentation associated with the effective period of the presentation button 17, thereby making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

Note that the effect button 17 is not illuminated during the vibration effect that is executed during the cut-in effect, but the effect button 17 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner (a color other than the rainbow color that is the illumination color for a guaranteed jackpot, and an illumination manner different from the illumination manner during the active period of the effect button 17, such as flashing white or flashing yellow, etc.) throughout the execution period of the vibration effect.

In addition, while the multiple game board decorative LEDs continue to emit light during the effective period related to the cut-in effect, some or all of the multiple game board decorative LEDs may be turned off immediately before the effective period occurs or between the start of the effective period and the time when the effect button 17 is operated or the effective time has elapsed, and then the multiple game board decorative LEDs may resume emitting light. In this way, the operation promotion image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 can be made to stand out, and the player can be informed that a tense scene is occurring, making the game more interesting.

In addition, when executing the promotion success effect, the rainbow light emission of the multiple game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 was started at the same time, but the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 may be started first and then the rainbow light emission of the multiple game board decoration LEDs may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 may be started first and then the rainbow light emission of the multiple game board decoration LEDs may be started.

In addition, when the SP reach effect is executed, the eye-catching effect and the effect pattern 70a are returned to a display mode including characters before the effect pattern 70a is stopped. However, if the SP reach effect results in a miss, the eye-catching effect and the effect pattern 70a are returned to a display mode including characters before the effect pattern 70a is stopped. In the case of a jackpot, the eye-catching effect and the effect pattern 70a are not returned to a display mode including characters, and the effect pattern 70a may be stopped in a display mode of numbers only.

The vibration effect that is executed during the cut-in effect may be executed at the same timing (for example, 2 seconds after the effective period ends when the effect button 17 is not operated) regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and regardless of the timing of the operation (the execution period of the vibration effect may be variable).

In addition, a vibration effect is executed during a cut-in effect or a successful promotion effect, but it is also possible to execute the vibration effect during a cut-in effect while not executing the vibration effect during a successful promotion effect, or vice versa, or not execute the vibration effect during a cut-in effect or a successful promotion effect.

In addition, a vibration effect is executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by a performance pattern 70a consisting of numbers only or when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by a performance pattern 70a including a character. However, while a vibration effect is executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by a performance pattern 70a consisting of numbers only, a vibration effect may not be executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by a performance pattern 70a including a character, or vice versa. A vibration effect may not be executed when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by a performance pattern 70a consisting of numbers only or when a jackpot is temporarily stopped by a performance pattern 70a including a character.

In addition, when the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect continues until the effect pattern 70a stops (even during the cut-in effect, the winning port lamp NR will emit light in a color corresponding to the display mode of the icon), but it may also be set to emit light and turn off in conjunction with the light emission mode of multiple game board decorative LEDs.

(Example 1 of a big win when a deciding effect is executed during an SPSP reach effect)
Using Figures 143 and 144, we will explain presentation example 1 in which a deciding presentation is executed during an SPSP reach presentation in variable presentation pattern 20, resulting in a jackpot.

First, as shown in FIG. 143(a), three effect symbols 70a form a reach state and are displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen, and the SPSP reach effect is being executed. At this time, since the game is not in a waiting state for customers, the multiple game board decorative LEDs (part of the board lighting device) provided on the game board 5 are emitting light (light emission modes other than rainbow light emission).

When the SPSP reach effect approaches the final stage from this state, as shown in FIG. 143(b), a valid suggestion effect is started, which suggests that operation of the effect button 17 may be effective for the decisive effect. Specifically, an effect is performed in which four semi-transparent effect button images that resemble the effect button 17 converge from the four corners of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen.

When the semi-transparent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, as shown in FIG. 143(c), the effective period of the effect button 17 (5 seconds for a single hit) occurs, and an operation prompting image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that protrudes and emits red light at a specific position in the center of the screen and a gauge image indicating the remaining time of the effective period is displayed, a display sound effect for the operation prompting image SG is output, and the effect button 17 protrudes and emits red light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, the successful decision effect starts as shown in FIG. 143(d). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays a success effect image SEF and outputs a success sound effect. In addition, the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for four seconds, followed by a strong vibration effect (successful decision vibration effect) in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for five seconds with a one-second interval between them, and the three "5" effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in the upper left corner of the screen. In addition, the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 are illuminated in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the successful decision effect and strong vibration effect end, as shown in FIG. 143(e), a celebration effect celebrating the big win begins while the multiple game board decoration LEDs and effect button 17 continue to emit rainbow colors. Then, when the celebration effect ends, the multiple game board decoration LEDs resume their effect illumination and the effect button 17 goes out.

After that, as shown in FIG. 143(f), the three "5" effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped when they are lined up (pattern alignment), and a strong vibration effect (jackpot confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for four seconds, and the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 light up in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not accompany the effective period of the effect button 17, the sound effect when the operation prompt image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the effect sound (sound effect) when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period are not output.

After four seconds have passed, the strong vibration effect ends, but the multiple game board decoration LEDs and effect button 17 continue to emit rainbow colors. After one second has passed, the multiple game board decoration LEDs resume emitting light and the effect button 17 goes out.

Then, as shown in FIG. 144(g), the re-draw effect starts. Specifically, three "5" effect symbols 70a are aligned (symbol alignment) and are moved toward the back and displayed in a reduced size, the effective period of the effect button 17 (three seconds for a single hit) begins, an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that emits red light at a specific position in the center of the screen, and an operation prompting image SG consisting of a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effective period are displayed, a display sound effect of the operation prompting image SG is output, and the effect button emits red light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, the promotion success effect starts as shown in FIG. 144(h). Specifically, the reduced "5" effect pattern 70a is replaced by a "7" effect pattern 70a, which is enlarged and moves to the front of the screen in a line of three (aligned patterns), and a promotion sound effect is output. In addition, the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 light up in rainbow colors, and a strong vibration effect (promotion vibration effect) is started, in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for three seconds.

Then, after the effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped at normal size and the strong vibration effect ends, a predetermined period of time (for example, one second) passes, and the multiple game board decorative LEDs resume effect illumination (illumination modes other than rainbow illumination) and the effect button 17 goes out.

After that, when a predetermined period (for example, one second) has elapsed, an eye-catching effect is executed, suggesting that the effect pattern 70a will be displayed stationary, as shown in FIG. 144(j). Specifically, an eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three effect patterns 70a.

After that, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect ends, as shown in FIG. 144(k), the effect pattern 70a returns to a display mode including the character and enters a temporarily stopped state, and the icon is redisplayed, and if there is a first special reserved number, the reserved icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big win confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the effect button 17 being effective, and the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the effect button 17 is not effective during the execution of this strong vibration effect, the sound effect when the operation prompting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the sound effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period are not output.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 144(l), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow light emitted by the multiple game board decorative LEDs will end, and the effect symbol 70a will stop at "777", and the special symbol TZ will also stop at "777".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 144(m), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the illumination of the multiple game board decoration LEDs begin, and a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the effect button 17 being valid for a certain period, and the effect button 17 illuminates in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the valid period of the effect button 17, no sound effect is output when the operation prompt image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed, and no sound effect (sound effect) is output when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period. After that, when one second has elapsed, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow illumination of the multiple game board decoration LEDs end, the opening effect of the jackpot game ends, and the first round of play begins.

(Example 2 of a performance in which a deciding effect is executed during an SPSP reach effect and a jackpot is reached)
Using Figures 145 and 146, we will explain the performance example 2 when the deciding performance is executed during the SPSP reach performance in the variable performance pattern 16 and becomes a big win. Note that Figures 145 (a) to (c) are the same as Figures 143 (a) to (c), so the explanation here is omitted.

When the effect button 17 is operated from the state shown in Fig. 145(c) or the valid period has elapsed, an effect is produced in which three "5" effect symbols 70a are lined up (pattern alignment) as shown in Fig. 145(d), and the effect symbols 70a indicate a jackpot, but no strong vibration effect is produced at this point. At this time, the effect illumination (illumination modes other than rainbow illumination) of multiple game board decorative LEDs (part of the board illumination device) continues.

After that, when a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) has passed, the successful decision effect starts as shown in FIG. 145(e). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays a success effect image SEF and outputs a success sound effect. In addition, the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 4 seconds, followed by a strong vibration effect (successful decision vibration effect) in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds with a 1-second interval between them, and the three "5" effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the upper left corner of the screen. In addition, the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 are illuminated in rainbow colors.

After that, when the first movable member 73 returns to the standby position and the successful decision effect and strong vibration effect end, as shown in FIG. 145(f), a celebration effect to celebrate the big win begins while the multiple game board decoration LEDs and effect button 17 continue to emit rainbow colors. Then, when the celebration effect ends, the multiple game board decoration LEDs resume their effect illumination and the effect button 17 goes out.

After that, when a predetermined period (for example, one second) has elapsed, an eye-catching effect is executed, suggesting that the effect pattern 70a will be displayed stationary, as shown in FIG. 146(g). Specifically, an eye-catching image IC is displayed so as to cover the three effect patterns 70a.

Then, when the eye-catching image IC is erased and the eye-catching effect ends, as shown in FIG. 146(h), the effect pattern 70a returns to a display mode including the character and enters a temporarily stopped state, and the icon is redisplayed, and if there is a first special reserved number, the reserved icon is redisplayed. In addition, a strong vibration effect (big win confirmation vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the effect button 17 being valid, and the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 emit light in rainbow colors. However, since the effect button 17 is not valid during the execution of this strong vibration effect, the sound effect when the operation prompting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the sound effect when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period are not output.

After one second has passed, as shown in FIG. 146(i), the strong vibration effect and the rainbow light emitted by the multiple game board decorative LEDs will end, and the effect pattern 70a will stop at "555", and the special pattern TZ will also stop at "555".

After that, when the stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 146(j), the opening effect of the jackpot game and the illumination of the multiple game board decoration LEDs begin, and a strong vibration effect (opening vibration effect) is started in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without the effect button 17 being valid for a certain period, and the effect button 17 illuminates in rainbow colors. However, since the execution of this strong vibration effect does not involve the valid period of the effect button 17, no sound effect is output when the operation prompt image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed, and no sound effect (sound effect) is output when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period. After that, when one second has elapsed, the strong vibration effect and the rainbow illumination of the multiple game board decoration LEDs end, the opening effect of the jackpot game ends, and the round game begins.

If the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period related to the deciding effect, or if the effective period has elapsed and a deciding failure effect is executed, the first movable member 73 is turned off and does not operate, and a failure effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a failure sound effect is output. Furthermore, the effect button 17 and some or all of the multiple game board decorative LEDs are turned off, and then the three effect patterns are temporarily stopped with a reach failure result (for example, "565"). After a predetermined period has elapsed, an eye-catching effect is executed that suggests that the effect pattern 70a will be stopped, and when the eye-catching effect ends, the effect pattern 70a returns to a display mode including the character and is temporarily stopped, and the icon is redisplayed, and if there is a first special reserved number, the reserved icon is redisplayed. After one second has elapsed, the effect pattern 70a is permanently stopped with a reach failure result, and the special pattern TZ is also permanently stopped with a reach failure result.

In this way, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 143 to 146, a valid indication presentation may be executed in the deciding presentation, which not only indicates that a valid period has occurred, but also suggests to the player that there is a high probability of winning, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example of the presentation shown in Figures 143 to 146, there are successful deciding presentations in which the first movable member 73 operates before the patterns are aligned, and successful deciding presentations in which the first movable member 73 operates after the patterns are aligned, which effectively improves the presentation effect of the deciding presentation and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example effects shown in Figures 143 to 146, the period from when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period until the vibration effect (successful decision vibration effect) is executed differs between a successful decision effect in which the first movable member 73 operates before the symbols are aligned and a successful decision effect in which the first movable member 73 operates after the symbols are aligned. This makes it possible to give the player a sense of elation from the start, or to stir up the player's sense of anxiety and then give him or her a sense of elation, and this contrast effect can effectively increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 143 to 146, the operation period (10 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the successful winning presentation is the same as the execution period (10 seconds) of the vibration presentation executed during the successful winning presentation. This makes it possible to effectively improve the presentation effect of the successful winning presentation. In addition, the vibration presentation can suggest to the player that a jackpot has been won, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 143 to 146, the vibration presentation executed at the time of the deciding presentation (decisive success vibration presentation) accompanies the effective period of the presentation button 17 (display of the operation prompting image), so the display sound effect when the operation prompting image (opaque presentation button image, gauge image) is displayed and the presentation sound when the presentation button 17 is operated during the effective period (operation sound effect, success sound effect, movable member operation sound effect, etc.) are output. This makes it possible to improve the presentation effect of the deciding success presentation, and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 143 to 146, when three effect patterns 70a that do not include characters are temporarily stopped in a line (pattern alignment), a strong vibration effect (a vibration effect that confirms a jackpot) is executed, so that the player can be effectively informed that a jackpot has been reached, and the player's interest in the game can be increased.

In addition, according to the example of effects shown in Figs. 143 to 146, when three effect patterns 70a including characters are temporarily stopped in a line (C pattern line), a strong vibration effect (jackpot confirmation vibration effect) is executed. This allows the player to reconfirm that a jackpot has been reached, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example effects shown in Figures 143 to 146, the vibration effect (opening vibration effect) that is executed when the three effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped or when the jackpot game is opened does not occur during the effective period of the effect button 17 (display of the operation prompting image), so the display sound effect when the operation prompting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed and the effect sound when the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period (operation sound effect, other sound effect, etc.) is not output. Therefore, it is possible to prevent inconveniences that may confuse the player during a vibration effect that does not occur during the effective period of the effect button 17, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example effects shown in Figures 143 to 146, the execution period of the vibration effect that is executed when a successful hit is produced is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the timing of the operation. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on the timing of the operation of the effect button 17, and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, while the multiple game board decorative LEDs continue to emit light during the effective period related to the deciding effect, some or all of the multiple game board decorative LEDs may be turned off immediately before the effective period occurs or from the start of the effective period until the effect button 17 is operated or the effective time has elapsed, and the multiple game board decorative LEDs may emit rainbow light when the deciding success effect is executed by operating the effect button 17 or the effective time has elapsed. In this way, the operation promotion image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 can be made to stand out, and the player can be informed that a tense scene is occurring, making the game more interesting.

In addition, during a successful play effect, the first movable member 73, the multiple game board decorative LEDs, and the effect button 17 are designed to emit rainbow light, but the first movable member 73 and the effect button 17 may emit rainbow light while some or all of the multiple game board decorative LEDs are turned off, or the first movable member 73 may emit rainbow light while the effect button 17 and some or all of the multiple game board decorative LEDs are turned off.

In addition, when executing the successful decision effect, the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73, the multiple game board decoration LEDs, and the effect button 17 was set to start simultaneously, but the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 may start first and then the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73 and the multiple game board decoration LEDs, or the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73 may start first and then the rainbow light emission of the multiple game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17, or the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 may start first and then the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73 and the multiple game board decoration LEDs.

In addition, after the celebration effect ends, the multiple game board decoration LEDs resume their performance illumination and the performance button 17 is turned off, but the rainbow illumination of the game board decoration LEDs may continue even after the celebration effect ends, and the performance illumination may be resumed before the start of the re-lottery effect, or the performance illumination may be resumed before the start of the eye-catching effect, or the rainbow illumination may continue until the performance pattern 70a stops.

In addition, when executing the promotion success effect, the rainbow light emission of the multiple game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17 was started at the same time, but the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 may be started first and then the rainbow light emission of the multiple game board decoration LEDs may be started, or the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 may be started first and then the rainbow light emission of the multiple game board decoration LEDs may be started.

In addition, when the SPSP reach effect is executed, the eye-catching effect and the effect pattern 70a are returned to a display mode including characters before the effect pattern 70a is stopped. However, if the SPSP reach effect results in a miss, the eye-catching effect and the effect pattern 70a are returned to a display mode including characters before the effect pattern 70a is stopped. In the case of a jackpot, the eye-catching effect and the effect pattern 70a may be stopped in a display mode of numbers only without executing a performance that returns the effect to a display mode including characters.

The vibration effect that is executed when the winning combination is successful may be executed at the same timing (for example, 3 seconds after the effective period ends when the effect button 17 is not operated) regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and the timing of the operation (the execution period of the vibration effect may be variable).

In addition, a vibration effect is executed when a successful decision is made or when a promotion is successful, but it is also possible to execute the vibration effect when a successful decision is made but not when a promotion is successful, or vice versa, or to not execute the vibration effect when a successful decision is made or when a promotion is successful.

In addition, a vibration effect is executed when the jackpot result is temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a of only numbers after the celebration effect or when the jackpot result is temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a including characters after the eye-catching effect. However, while a vibration effect is executed when the jackpot result is temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a of only numbers after the celebration effect, a vibration effect may not be executed when the jackpot result is temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a including characters after the eye-catching effect, or vice versa. A vibration effect may not be executed when the jackpot result is temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a of only numbers after the celebration effect or when the jackpot result is temporarily stopped by the performance pattern 70a including characters after the eye-catching effect.

In addition, when the lamp change effect is being executed, the lamp change effect continues until the effect pattern 70a stops (even during the winning effect, the winning port lamp NR will emit light in a color corresponding to the display mode of the icon before it was hidden), but it may also be set to light up and go out in conjunction with the light emission mode of multiple game board decorative LEDs.

(Timer effects and execution timing)
Next, using Figure 147, we will explain the execution timing of the timer performance for each variable performance pattern.

The timer effects include event timer effects such as a "pseudo consecutive occurrence timer effect" that indicates the occurrence of a pseudo consecutive occurrence, a "normal reach occurrence timer effect" that indicates the start of a normal reach effect, an "SP reach occurrence timer effect" that indicates the start of an SP reach effect, an "SPSP reach occurrence timer effect" that indicates the start of an SPSP reach effect, a "full rotation reach occurrence timer effect" that indicates the start of a full rotation reach effect, a "valid period occurrence timer effect" that indicates the occurrence of the valid period of the effect button 17, and a "jackpot pattern stop timer effect" that indicates the jackpot pattern will stop being displayed.

As shown in FIG. 147(a), in the case of variable presentation patterns 7, 15, and 20, three presentations may be executed: pseudo consecutive occurrence timer presentation, normal reach occurrence timer presentation, and SP reach occurrence timer presentation.

In this case, the pseudo consecutive occurrence timer effect starts between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. The normal reach occurrence timer effect starts between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. The SP reach occurrence timer effect starts between T5 and T6 and ends at T6.

As shown in FIG. 147(b), in the case of variable presentation patterns 8, 16, and 21, four presentations may be executed: a normal reach occurrence timer presentation, an SP reach occurrence timer presentation, an SPSP reach occurrence timer presentation, and a valid period occurrence timer presentation.

In this case, the normal reach occurrence timer effect starts between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. The SP reach occurrence timer effect starts between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. The SPSP reach occurrence timer effect starts between T5 and T6 and ends at T6. The valid period occurrence timer effect starts between T5 and T7 and ends at T7.

As shown in FIG. 147(c), in the case of variable presentation patterns 11 and 22, four effects may be executed: pseudo consecutive occurrence timer presentation, normal reach occurrence timer presentation, SPSP reach occurrence timer presentation, and valid period occurrence timer presentation.

In this case, the pseudo consecutive occurrence timer effect starts between T1 and T3 and ends at T3. The normal reach occurrence timer effect starts between T2 and T4 and ends at T4. The SPSP reach occurrence timer effect starts between T5 and T8 and ends at T8. The valid period occurrence timer effect starts between T7 and T9 and ends at T9.

(Example of timer effects)
Next, a performance example in which two timer performances are executed during a variable performance will be described with reference to Fig. 148. Here, it is assumed that in a normal game state, the execution of a variable performance pattern 22, a pseudo consecutive occurrence timer performance (normal pattern 7), and a valid period occurrence timer performance (normal pattern 21) is determined.

First, as shown in FIG. 148(a), when the white-letter timer STW is displayed and the timer effect is being executed (timer time is being subtracted), the same "7" appears temporarily as the effect symbols on the left and right, forming a reach state, and a normal reach effect begins.

Next, as shown in FIG. 148(b), after the white-text timer STW reaches "0 seconds remaining," the pseudo symbol temporarily stops in the middle area as a pseudo consecutive success performance, a success sound effect is output, and the pseudo 2-variation period ends (the red flame effect that accompanies the pseudo consecutive performance is omitted in the figure).

Then, as shown in FIG. 148(c), the performance pattern 70a changes again and "x3" is displayed in red to indicate the number of pseudo-changes (the progress of the performance stage).

After that, as shown in FIG. 148(d), the SPSP development symbol temporarily stops in the middle area, a temporary stop sound effect is output, and a strong action effect is executed in which the first movable member 73 emits blue light and moves. At this time, when the valid period occurrence timer effect starts, the image display device 70 displays the normal white text timer YTW with "35 seconds left" and starts counting down the timer time.

Then, the screen goes white and the development performance ends, and as shown in FIG. 148(e), the performance pattern 70a in the middle area changes again, and the three performance patterns 70a are displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen, starting the SPSP reach performance. Note that with the start of the SPSP reach performance, the reserved icon and the icon in question are hidden. At this time, the white-text timer YTW becomes "33 seconds remaining", which is the timer time being subtracted.

Then, when the SPSP reach effect reaches its final stage, as shown in FIG. 148(f), a valid suggestion effect is started, suggesting that operation of the effect button 17 may be effective for the deciding effect. Specifically, an effect is performed in which four semi-transparent effect button images that resemble the effect button 17 converge from the four corners of the screen toward a specific position in the center of the screen. At this time, the white-text timer YTW becomes "2 seconds remaining," which is the timer time being subtracted.

Then, the semi-transparent effect button images gather at a specific position in the center of the screen, and after the white-text timer YTW reaches "0 seconds remaining," the effective period of the effect button 17 (5 seconds for a single hit) occurs, as shown in FIG. 148 (g), and an operation prompting image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 that protrudes and emits red light at a specific position in the center of the screen, and a gauge image that indicates the remaining time of the effective period, is displayed, and a display sound effect for the operation prompting image SG is output, and the effect button 17 protrudes and emits red light.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, the successful decision effect starts as shown in FIG. 148(h). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays a success effect image SEF and outputs a success sound effect. In addition, the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for four seconds, followed by a strong vibration effect (successful decision vibration effect) in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for five seconds with a one-second interval between them, and the three "7" effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in the upper left corner of the screen. In addition, the multiple game board decorative LEDs and the effect button 17 are illuminated in rainbow colors.

(Example of a special SP reach effect being executed in the second variable effect in the effect mode A (normal game state) and resulting in a big win)
Using Figure 149, an example of a presentation in which a special SP reach presentation is executed in the second variable presentation (variable display of the second special pattern) in presentation mode A (normal gaming state) resulting in a jackpot will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 149(a), the image display device 70 displays the "635" effect pattern 70a, which indicates a miss, and the special pattern TZ in a stopped state. Also, "2" is displayed in the second special pattern hold number display area 70F. At this time, since it is in effect mode A (normal gameplay state), the second hold icon display area 70D is not displayed.

When the second variation performance (variable display of the second special symbol) starts from this state, the second special symbol reserved number display area 70F changes from "2" to "1" as shown in FIG. 149(b). Note that the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but the icon may be displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 149(c), a development effect is executed that suggests that the special SP reach effect will develop, and the special SP reach effect is executed.

Then, when the special SP reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 149(d), the effect pattern 70a stops at "555", and the special pattern TZ also stops at "555", ending the second variable effect.

In addition, when the game ball passes through the normal gate 44 and enters the first starting hole 45, a right-hit error notification based on a right-hit performed in normal game mode is issued for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 4 seconds). Specifically, a right-hit error image MUE, which suggests that the game ball should be launched toward the left area of the game area 5a, is displayed near the center of the screen, and a right-hit error sound saying "Please hit to the left" is output from the audio output device 9.

After the second variation presentation ends, as shown in FIG. 149(e), the opening presentation of the jackpot game starts during the execution period of the right-hit error notification, and a right-hit image MU suggesting a right-hit is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, a right-hit notification is made, and jackpot presentation 1 is executed. At this time, the right-hit error image MUE is erased due to the start of the right-hit notification, but the output of the right-hit error sound continues, and the output ends after a period shorter than the normal output period has elapsed. Note that if a second jackpot game is executed as a result of the first variation presentation, jackpot presentation 2 will be executed.

(Example of a performance when a chance performance is executed in the first variable performance in the performance mode G (specific game state) and a big win occurs)
Using Figure 150, an example of a presentation in which a chance presentation is executed in the first variable presentation in presentation mode G (specific game state) resulting in a jackpot will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 150(a), the image display device 70 displays the "285" effect pattern 70a, which indicates a miss, and the special pattern TZ in a stopped state. Also, "2" is displayed in the first special pattern hold number display area 70E. At this time, since it is in effect mode G (specific game state), the first hold icon display area 70B is not displayed.

When the first variable performance starts from this state, as shown in FIG. 150(b), the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1." Note that the icon TI is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but the icon may be displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 150(c), a text image saying "Chance Approaching" is displayed, and the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen, and a chance effect is executed to indicate that there is a chance for a big win to be played.

When a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the chance presentation started, the big win presentation starts, as shown in FIG. 150(d). Specifically, the first movable member 73, emitting rainbow light, moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70, and the first image display device 70 displays a success effect image SEF and outputs a success sound effect. In addition, some or all of the multiple game board decorative LEDs emit rainbow light.

Then, when the big win display ends and the first movable member 73 returns to its initial position, as shown in FIG. 150(e), the display pattern 70a stops at "555" and the special pattern TZ also stops at "555", ending the first variable display.

After the first variation effect ends, as shown in FIG. 150(f), the opening effect of the jackpot game starts, and jackpot effect 1 is executed. If the second jackpot game is executed as a result of the first variation effect, jackpot effect 2 is executed.

In this way, according to the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 149 and FIG. 150, in the case where the first variation presentation (the variation display of the first special symbol) is executed in the specific game state, and in the case where the second variation presentation (the variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the presentation is executed in a different manner (whether or not a pre-reading presentation is executed, whether or not various advance notice presentations are executed, whether or not a specific reach presentation is executed, whether or not the icon is displayed, the type of background image, the type of BGM, etc.), but the big win presentation after the first variation presentation in the specific game state and the big win presentation after the second variation presentation in the specific game state can be executed in a common manner (background image, BGM, round presentation image, etc.). Therefore, during the big win presentation, the player does not need to be aware of whether the first variation presentation or the second variation presentation is the trigger, so the player can enjoy the big win presentation without having to think about it too much, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 149 and 150, when a right hit is made during normal gameplay, a right hit error notification (display of a right hit error image HUE suggesting a left hit, and output of a left hit error voice saying "Please hit left") is executed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 4 seconds); however, if a jackpot game is started while the right hit error notification is being executed, the right hit notification is executed while the right hit error notification is continued. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that a right hit during normal gameplay is disadvantageous to the player, while at the same time not causing the player any loss due to the start of a jackpot game, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 149 and 150, if a jackpot game is started while a right-hit error notification is being executed, the display of the right-hit error image HUE is terminated, but the output of the left-hit error sound "Please hit left" continues. This allows the right-hit notification to not be significantly hindered, making the game more interesting.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in Figures 149 and 150, if a jackpot game is started during the execution of a right-hit error notification that is executed for a predetermined period of time, the left-hit error sound "Please hit left" continues to be output, but ends in a shorter time than usual (before the predetermined period has elapsed). Therefore, the right-hit notification is not significantly hindered, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the normal game state, when the first variation effect (the variation display of the first special symbol) is executed and when the second variation effect (the variation display of the second special symbol) is executed, the effects can be executed in different ways (whether or not a look-ahead effect is executed, whether or not various advance notice effects are executed, whether or not a specific reach effect is executed, whether or not the icon is displayed, the type of background image, the type of BGM, etc.), and the big win effect after the first variation effect in the normal game state and the big win effect after the second variation effect in the normal game state can be executed in a common way (background image, BGM, round effect image, etc.). In this way, during the big win effect, the player does not need to be conscious of whether the first variation effect or the second variation effect is the trigger, so the player can enjoy the big win effect without having to think about it too much, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Example of a special mission effect during a big win)
Using Figure 151, an example of a performance in which a special-chance mission performance is executed to determine whether or not a special-chance game state will occur during a jackpot (round play) will be described.

As shown in FIG. 151(a), when the opening performance of the jackpot game starts, a strong vibration performance (opening vibration performance) starts in which the performance button 17 is strongly vibrated for one second without an effective period of the performance button 17, and the performance button 17 emits rainbow light. After that, when one second has passed, the strong vibration performance ends, the opening performance of the jackpot game ends, and the first round of play begins.

After that, when the interval period after the first round of play ends and the second round of play begins, as shown in FIG. 151(b), an explanation of the special chance mission performance to determine whether or not the game will enter a special chance state begins, and the words "Destroy the enemy to enter special chance state" are displayed until the second round of play ends.

Then, when the interval period after the second round of play ends and the third round of play begins, as shown in FIG. 151(c), the effective period of the effect button 17 (5-second single hit) occurs and the special mission effect begins. Specifically, the word "Defeat it" is displayed, an operation prompt image SG consisting of an opaque effect button image imitating the effect button 17 and a gauge image showing the remaining time of the effective period is displayed, a display sound effect of the operation prompt image SG is output, and the effect button 17 emits white light. At this time, the effect light emission (light emission mode other than rainbow light emission) of multiple game board decorative LEDs (part of the board lighting device) continues.

After that, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, the mission success effect starts as shown in FIG. 151(d). Specifically, the first movable member 73 moves to the maximum operating position located in front of the first image display device 70 while emitting rainbow light, and the first image display device 70 displays a success effect image SEF and outputs a success sound effect. In addition, a strong vibration effect (promotion vibration effect) starts, in which the effect button 17 is strongly vibrated for 5 seconds, and the effect button 17 and some or all of the multiple game board decorative LEDs emit rainbow light.

After that, when the mission success presentation ends, as shown in FIG. 151(e), the word "Defeat" is displayed to indicate that the mission has been successful, the rainbow illumination of the presentation button 17 ends, and the presentation illumination of the multiple game board decorative LEDs resumes. When the third round of play is completed, the word "Defeat" is erased and the round presentation resumes.

Then, when the 9th round of play begins, as shown in FIG. 151(f), an effective period for the effect button 17 and cross key 18 occurs (here, a minimum of 11 seconds from the start of the 9th round of play until 5 seconds have elapsed since the start of the 10th round of play), and a mode selection effect begins for selecting an effect mode during the high probability game state. Specifically, an option image for effect mode D and an option image for effect mode E are displayed, and as an operation prompt image, the text "Select a mode during the high probability game state with the cross key and press the button to confirm!" and an opaque effect button image that resembles the effect button 17 that emits white light are displayed.

After that, when the right button of the cross key 18 is operated, the state changes from the state in which the option image for presentation mode D is selected (the option image for presentation mode E is displayed in a dark color) to the state in which the option image for presentation mode E is selected (the option image for presentation mode D is displayed in a dark color), as shown in FIG. 151 (g).

Then, when the effect button 17 is operated or the valid period has elapsed, the option image for effect mode E is enlarged as shown in FIG. 151(h), and it is announced that the first effect mode during the high probability game state will be effect mode E, and the mode selection effect ends. After that, when the tenth round of play ends, the ending effect is executed, and when the ending effect ends, the high probability game state begins.

In addition, when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45, a left-hit error notification is issued for a predetermined period (e.g., 4 seconds) during the jackpot game based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 45. Specifically, a left-hit error image HUE, which suggests that the game ball should be launched toward the right area of the game area 5a, is displayed in a position closer to the center of the screen and larger than the right-hit image MU, and a left-hit error sound saying "Please hit to the right" is output from the audio output device 9.

When a mission failure effect is executed, the first movable member 73 turns off and does not operate, a failure effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, and a failure sound effect is output. Furthermore, the mode selection effect is not executed and the game transitions to the ending effect.

In this way, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 151, the operation period (5 seconds) of the first movable member 73 in the mission success presentation is the same as the execution period (5 seconds) of the vibration presentation (promotion vibration presentation) executed at the time of the mission success presentation. This makes it possible to effectively improve the presentation effect of the mission success presentation. In addition, the vibration presentation can suggest to the player that the result is favorable to the player, in other words, that a special chance state will occur, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 151, the vibration effect (promotion vibration effect) executed when the mission is successful accompanies the valid period of the effect button 17, so a display sound effect is output when the operation prompting image (opaque effect button image, gauge image) is displayed, and a sound effect (success sound effect) is output when the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period. This makes it possible to improve the effect of the successful decision effect, and increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 151, the execution period of the vibration effect (promotion vibration effect) executed when the mission is successful is the same regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period and the timing of the operation. This makes it possible to avoid inconveniences such as not being able to fully experience the vibration effect depending on the timing of the operation of the effect button 17, and makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 151, even if the presentation button 17 or cross key 18 is operated during the mode selection presentation, a vibration presentation is not executed. This prevents the player from mistakenly believing that the selected presentation mode has a higher chance of winning than the unselected presentation mode, making the game more interesting. It also prevents the player from being surprised, making it possible to avoid any inconvenience that may cause the player discomfort.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 151, a right-hit notification (display of the right-hit image MU) suggesting a right hit can be executed during a jackpot game, but if a game ball is hit from the left during a jackpot game and enters the first starting hole 45, the right-hit notification (display of the right-hit image MU) continues, and a left-hit error notification (display of the left-hit error image HUE suggesting a right hit, and output of the left-hit error voice "Please hit right") is executed for a predetermined period (e.g., 4 seconds). Therefore, by encouraging a player who hits left despite a right-hit notification to hit right, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantages, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 151, the right-hit image MU displayed during a jackpot game and the left-hit error image HUE (right-hit notification image) are displayed so that they do not overlap. This makes it possible to prompt the player to hit to the right in an appropriate manner, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, while the multiple game board decorative LEDs continue to emit light during the valid period related to the special mission effect, some or all of the multiple game board decorative LEDs may be turned off immediately before the valid period occurs or from the start of the valid period until the effect button 17 is operated or the valid time has elapsed, and the multiple game board decorative LEDs may emit rainbow light when the mission success effect is executed by operating the effect button 17 or the valid time has elapsed. In this way, the operation promotion image SG displayed on the first image display device 70 can be made to stand out, and the player can be informed that a tense scene is occurring, making the game more interesting.

In addition, during the mission success presentation, the first movable member 73, the multiple game board decoration LEDs, and the presentation button 17 are arranged to emit rainbow light, but the first movable member 73 and the presentation button 17 may emit rainbow light while some or all of the multiple game board decoration LEDs are turned off, or the first movable member 73 may emit rainbow light while the presentation button 17 and the multiple game board decoration LEDs are turned off.

In addition, when executing the mission success effect, the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73, the multiple game board decoration LEDs, and the effect button 17 was set to start simultaneously, but the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 may start first and then the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73 and the multiple game board decoration LEDs, or the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73 may start first and then the rainbow light emission of the multiple game board decoration LEDs and the effect button 17, or the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 may start first and then the rainbow light emission of the first movable member 73 and the multiple game board decoration LEDs.

In addition, the vibration effect that is executed when the mission is successful may be executed at the same timing (for example, 3 seconds after the effective period ends when the effect button 17 is not operated) regardless of whether or not the effect button 17 is operated during the effective period and regardless of the timing of the operation (the execution period of the vibration effect may be variable).

In addition, a vibration effect is executed when a mission is successful, but it is also possible to not execute the vibration effect when a mission is successful.

In addition, the right hit image MU and the left hit error image (right hit notification image) are not dynamically displayed, but they may be dynamically displayed, for example by swinging left and right at a specified cycle. In this case, it is preferable not to synchronize the cycles of the dynamic display of the right hit image MU and the left hit error image (right hit notification image).

(Examples of opening and ending effects for jackpot games in each game state)
Using Figure 152, examples of the opening and ending presentations of a jackpot game for each game state will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 152(a), in presentation mode A (normal game state), the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (first variable presentation), and the first image display device 70 scrolls (moves downwards) the presentation symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ. In addition, "1" is displayed in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second special symbol reserved number display area 70F. In addition, the first display section 70B1 of the first reserved icon display area 70B displays the first reserved icon (white icon), and the icon (white icon) TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, when the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ stop at the jackpot result "444" and the stop time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 152(b), the opening performance of the jackpot game (the so-called first win) starts from the normal game state, and a right-hit image MU suggesting a right hit is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen and the first right-hit notification is executed.

After that, when the first half of the opening performance ends and the second half begins, as shown in FIG. 152(c), a large right-hit image MUD is displayed and a right-hit sound saying "Aim right" is output, and a second right-hit notification is executed. Specifically, an image imitating the top of the game board (game area 5a) is displayed, an arrow suggesting a right hit is displayed, and further, a text image saying "Aim right" is displayed.

When the round of jackpot play (so-called first win) from the normal game state ends and the ending performance starts, as shown in FIG. 152(d), a text image of "Chance Time Entry" is displayed to indicate that the game will enter the normal time-saving game state, and a warning notification is started to alert the player. Specifically, a first warning image KG1 containing the text "Be careful not to forget to take your card" is displayed to warn the player not to forget to take the card (storage medium) in which the player's valuables are stored that is inserted into the game medium lending machine attached to the gaming machine 1, and a second warning image KG2 containing the text "Be careful not to get too absorbed in the game" is displayed to warn the player not to get too absorbed in the game.

After that, when the ending performance ends and the big win game ends, the game is controlled to the normal time-saving game state and goes into performance mode F, and the first image display device 70 shows a screen in which the first reserved icon display area 70B is not set, but the icon display area 70C and the second reserved icon display area 70D are set, but the right-hit image MU continues to be displayed, and a new variable display (variable performance) of the special pattern is started.

As shown in FIG. 152(e), when the variable display (variable display) of the second special symbol starts in the display mode G (normal time-saving play state) when the remaining number of time-saving turns (J2) is 49, the display symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward) on the first image display device 70.

After that, when the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop at the jackpot result "444" and the stop time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 152(f), the opening performance of the jackpot game (so-called consecutive win) starts from the normal time-saving game state, and a right-hit image MU suggesting a right hit is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen and the first right-hit notification is executed.

After that, when the first half of the opening performance ends and the second half begins, as shown in FIG. 152(g), a large right-hit image MUD is displayed and a right-hit sound saying "Aim right" is output, and a second right-hit notification is executed. Specifically, an image imitating the top of the game board (game area 5a) is displayed, an arrow suggesting a right hit is displayed, and further, a text image saying "Aim right" is displayed.

When a round of jackpot play (a so-called consecutive win) from the normal time-saving play state ends and the ending performance begins, as shown in FIG. 152(h), a text image saying "Chance Time Enters" is displayed, indicating that the normal time-saving play state will be entered, but the ending performance continues without any warning notification to alert the player.

After that, when the ending performance ends and the big win game ends, the game is controlled to the normal time-saving game state and goes into performance mode F, and the first image display device 70 shows a screen in which the first reserved icon display area 70B is not set, but the icon display area 70C and the second reserved icon display area 70D are set, but the right-hit image MU continues to be displayed, and a new variable display (variable performance) of the special pattern is started.

(Examples of opening and ending effects for jackpot games during special time-saving game modes)
Using Figure 153, examples of the opening and ending effects of a jackpot game during a special time-saving game state will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 153(a), in presentation mode H (special time-saving play state), the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable presentation) is being executed, and the first image display device 70 scrolls (moves downwards) the presentation symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ. In addition, "0" is displayed in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E, "1" is displayed in the second special symbol reserved number display area 70F, four second reserved icons (white icons) are displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70B, and the icons (white icons) are displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, when the performance pattern 70a and special pattern TZ stop at the jackpot result "444" and the stop time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 153(b), the opening performance of the jackpot game (the so-called first win) from the special time-saving game state begins, and a right-hit image MU suggesting a right hit is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen and the first right-hit notification is executed.

After that, when the first half of the opening performance ends and the second half begins, as shown in FIG. 153(c), a large right-hit image MUD is displayed and a right-hit sound saying "Aim right" is output, and a second right-hit notification is executed. Specifically, an image that resembles the top of the game board (game area 5a) is displayed, an arrow suggesting a right hit is displayed, and further, a text image saying "Aim right" is displayed.

When the round of jackpot play (so-called first win) from the special time-saving play state ends and the ending performance begins, as shown in FIG. 153(d), a text image of "Chance Time Entry" is displayed, indicating that the game will enter the normal time-saving play state, and a warning notification is issued to alert the player. Specifically, a first warning image KG1 containing the text "Be careful not to forget to take your card" is displayed to warn the player not to forget to take the card (storage medium) in which the player's valuables are stored, which is inserted into the game medium lending machine attached to the game machine 1, and a second warning image KG2 containing the text "Be careful not to get too absorbed in the game" is displayed to warn the player not to get too absorbed in the game.

At this time, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, a left-hit error notification based on the game ball entering the first starting hole 45 in a specific game state is issued for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 4 seconds). Specifically, a left-hit error image HUE, which suggests that the game ball should be launched toward the right area of the game area 5a, is displayed in a position closer to the center of the screen and larger than the right-hit image MU, and a left-hit error sound saying "Please hit to the right" is output from the audio output device 9.

On the other hand, if it is determined in advance that there is something in the second reserved memory that will result in a jackpot game being played, and the conditions for executing the look-ahead reserved consecutive performance to notify that fact are met, the look-ahead reserved consecutive performance is executed, as shown in FIG. 153(e). Specifically, the consecutive game character RC is displayed on the first image display device 70 in parallel with the attention alert, and it is notified that there is something in the second reserved memory that will result in a jackpot game being played.

In this way, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 152 to 153, if a jackpot game (so-called first win) is executed during the normal game state, a specific notification (attention notification) related to the game can be executed in connection with the end of the jackpot game, if a jackpot game (so-called consecutive wins) is executed during the normal time-saving game state, the execution of a specific notification (attention notification) related to the game in connection with the end of the jackpot game is restricted (not executed), and if a jackpot game (so-called first win) is executed during a special time-saving game state that is executed without going through a jackpot game, a specific notification (attention notification) related to the game can be executed in connection with the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to execute a necessary and sufficient attention notification related to the game to the player, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the example of effects shown in Figures 152 to 153, it is possible to execute a special chance mission effect (a special chance promotion effect that generates a valid period and operates a movable member in response to operation of the effect button 17 during the valid period) to determine whether or not a special chance game state will occur during a jackpot game, but the execution of the special chance mission effect (special chance promotion effect) is restricted (not executed) while a warning notification is being executed. This allows the player to be properly warned, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 152 to 153, a game-related attention alert can be issued in connection with the end of a jackpot game, but even while the attention alert is being issued, a pre-reading reserved consecutive presentation can be executed to notify (suggest) that the reserved memory contains something that will become a jackpot. Therefore, the attention alert can calm the player while creating a sense of anticipation, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 152 to 153, a warning notification regarding the game can be issued in connection with the end of a big win game, but if a left hit that is disadvantageous to the player is made even while a warning notification is being issued, a left hit error notification can be issued that suggests a right hit. This makes it possible to prevent the player from suffering unnecessary losses and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

Note that, while a warning alert is issued when a jackpot game is executed during a normal game mode or a special time-saving game mode, it is also possible to issue a warning alert when a jackpot game in which a specified amount (e.g., 300 balls) or more of prize balls (outgoing balls) is won is executed, and not to issue a warning alert when a jackpot game in which a specified amount of prize balls cannot be won is executed.

(Example of a special time-saving game state)
Using Figure 154, an example of the presentation when a special time-saving game state occurs will be explained.

Here, it is assumed that the activation counter display indicating when the special time-saving game state will occur is performed from the point when the number of miss fluctuation displays of the special pattern executed after the establishment of a predetermined condition (executing RWM clear, clearing the number of fluctuations to 0 based on the end of the jackpot game) reaches 800 (the number of fluctuations remaining until the special time-saving game state occurs is 100). Specifically, a notification logo LG containing the text "Help Time", which means the special time-saving game state, and a text image of "XX remaining" indicating the number of remaining fluctuations are displayed.

In addition, a countdown effect is performed when the number of remaining fluctuations until the special time-saving game state occurs reaches three, indicating that the special time-saving game state will occur. Specifically, each time the fluctuation effect begins, a text image indicating the remaining number of times is displayed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., one second).

As shown in FIG. 154(a), when the first special symbol changing display (first changing display) starts with one remaining change until the special time-saving game state occurs, the display of the display pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ starts changing, the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "3" to "2", and the three reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the text image of "1" is displayed as a countdown display.

After that, when the time for the first special symbol to change has elapsed and it stops at the losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. 154(b), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop at the losing number "635", the icon disappears, and the remaining number of changes on the activation counter becomes "1".

Then, when the first special symbol changing display (first changing display) starts, which indicates that there is one remaining change until the special time-saving game state occurs, the display of the display pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ starts changing, the number in the first reserved number display area 70E decreases from "2" to "1", and the two reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, with one of them being displayed as the icon TI, as shown in FIG. 154(c). At this time, a text image of "0" is displayed as a countdown display.

Next, when the time for the first special symbol to change has elapsed and it stops at the losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. 154(d), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop at the losing number "635", the icon disappears, and the remaining number of changes on the activation counter becomes "0".

When the game ball passes through the normal map gate 44 at this timing, a right-hit error notification based on a right-hit performed in normal game mode is issued for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 4 seconds). Specifically, a right-hit error image MUE, which suggests that the game ball should be launched toward the left area of the game area 5a, is displayed near the center of the screen, and a right-hit error sound saying "Please hit to the left" is output from the audio output device 9.

After that, when a special time-saving game state occurs and the display of the first special symbol begins to change, as shown in FIG. 154(e), the display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ begins to change, and a blackout effect is performed to restrict the visibility of the background image, and a right-hit image MU suggesting a right-hit is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, and a right-hit notification is made. At this time, the right-hit error image MUE is erased as the right-hit notification has started, but the output of the right-hit error sound continues, and the output ends after a period shorter than the normal output period has passed.

Then, after a predetermined time (for example, one second) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 154(f), a text image of "HELP TIME ENTRY" is displayed, indicating that a special time-saving game state will be entered, and an entry effect (long entry effect or short entry effect) is executed. In addition, a right-hit image MU2, indicating a right hit, is displayed, and the sound "right hit" is output to notify the player of the right hit.

When the execution time for the entry effect has elapsed, the text image "HELP TIME ENTRY" disappears and the background image of effect mode H becomes visible. A bar image saying "HELP TIME" is displayed in the upper left corner of the screen, and the remaining time-saving times image KG, which indicates the remaining number of times of the second time-saving times (J2), is displayed in the lower left corner of the screen as "799 times remaining."

Next, when the time for the first special symbol to change has elapsed and the first special symbol stops at the losing special symbol, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop at the losing number "416" as shown in FIG. 154(g).

After that, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, a left-hit error notification is issued for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 4 seconds) based on the fact that a left-hit was made in a specific game state. Specifically, a left-hit error image HUE, which suggests that the game ball should be launched toward the right area of the game area 5a, is displayed near the center of the screen, and a right-hit error sound saying "Please hit to the right" is output from the audio output device 9.

In addition, instead of issuing a left-hit error notification when one game ball enters the first starting hole 45 in a specific game state, a left-hit error notification may be issued when a predetermined number of game balls (e.g., three) enter the first starting hole 45. Also, the left-hit error notification may be terminated when a game ball enters the second starting hole 47, in which case the left-hit error image HUE may be erased before the left-hit error sound, or the left-hit error sound may be erased before the left-hit error image HUE.

In this way, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 154, the activation counter display starts when the remaining number of fluctuations until the special time-saving game state is triggered reaches a predetermined number (here, 100). This allows the player to know the number of times the special symbol will be displayed (fluctuation presentation) before the transition to the special time-saving game state occurs, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 154, the text image showing the remaining number of changes as the activation counter display is made up of only numbers and does not include unit indications such as times or number of times. This increases the likelihood that the player will look up what the numbers mean, and by increasing the opportunities for players to see the model information, it is possible to deepen their understanding of the gaming machine and increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 154, the text image showing the remaining number of fluctuations as the activation counter display is updated not at the start of the fluctuation effect, when the jackpot preview effect or pre-reading effect is more likely to be executed (started), but at the time when the performance pattern is displayed stopped, when the jackpot preview effect or pre-reading effect is less likely to be executed (started) than at the start of the fluctuation effect. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the decrement of the activation counter, making the game more interesting.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 154, a countdown presentation is executed suggesting a transition to the special time-saving game state from the display of a changing special symbol (changing presentation) a predetermined number of times (here, three times) before the transition to the special time-saving game state. This allows the player to clearly grasp the time when the special time-saving game state will occur, and also increases the player's anticipation for the occurrence of the special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effect shown in FIG. 154, when the game enters a special time-saving game state, it is possible to execute a break-in effect (long break-in effect or short break-in effect). This allows the player to accurately recognize that the game has entered a special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 154, a right-hit notification is issued when the first variable display of the special symbol in the special time-saving game state begins. Therefore, even a player who has no knowledge of the special time-saving game state can understand that they will be hitting to the right, which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 154, the presentation for entering the special time-saving game state is executed in a presentation manner different from that for transitioning to the normal time-saving game state. Therefore, the player can be notified that a time-saving game state different from the normal time-saving game state has occurred, and the player can be notified that a special time-saving game state has occurred in a novel manner, which can increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 154, when a right hit is made during the normal game state, a right hit error notification (display of a right hit error image MUE suggesting a left hit, and output of a left hit error sound saying "Please hit left") is executed for a predetermined period of time (for example, 4 seconds); however, if a special time-saving game state is started while the right hit error notification is being executed, it is possible to execute a right hit notification while continuing the right hit error notification. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that a right hit during the normal game state is disadvantageous to the player, while at the same time not causing the player to suffer a loss due to the start of the special time-saving game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 154, if a special time-saving game state is started while a right-hit error notification is being executed, the display of the right-hit error image MUE is terminated, but the output of the left-hit error sound "Please hit left" continues. This prevents the right-hit notification from being excessively hindered, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 154, the number of images suggesting right hits (right hit images MU, right hit images MU2) is greater than the number of images suggesting left hits (right hit error images MUE). This allows the player to properly hit right, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 154, if a special time-saving game state is started while a right-hit error notification is being executed, the display of the right-hit image MU2 ends after the display of the right-hit error image MUE ends. This allows the player to perform right-hits appropriately, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 154, a right-hit notification (display of the right-hit image MU) suggesting a right hit can be executed during the special time-saving game state, but if the game ball is hit from the left during the special time-saving game state and enters the first starting hole 45, the right-hit notification (display of the right-hit image MU) continues, and a left-hit error notification (display of the left-hit error image HUE suggesting a right hit, and output of the left-hit error voice "Please hit right") is executed for a predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds). Therefore, by encouraging a player who hits left despite a right-hit notification to hit right, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantages, and to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 154, the right-hit image MU displayed during the special time-saving game state and the left-hit error image HUE (right-hit notification image) are displayed so as not to overlap. This makes it possible to prompt the player to hit to the right in an appropriate manner, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The special time-saving game state is generated in the same presentation mode regardless of whether or not there is a jackpot history. However, if a special time-saving game state is generated when there is a jackpot history, the presentation mode may be switched to countdown mode a predetermined period of time before the special time-saving game state is generated (for example, the point at which 800 variable displays have been executed since the establishment of a predetermined condition). In this way, it is possible to effectively heighten the player's anticipation for the generation of the special time-saving game state, and to increase the enjoyment of the game.

In addition, the countdown mode can be switched to in the normal game state before the special time-saving game state occurs between jackpot games, but it is preferable not to switch to the countdown mode in the normal game state after the special time-saving game state occurs. In this way, it is possible to know whether the special time-saving game state has occurred before or after it has occurred by whether the countdown mode occurs or not, which makes the game more interesting.

In addition, if the countdown mode can be generated, the rate of change in the presentation mode can be made different between the normal game state before the special time-saving game state occurs and the normal game state after the special time-saving game state occurs (making it easier for the presentation mode to change in the normal game state before the special time-saving game state occurs), making the game more interesting.

(Example of a special time-saving game state that occurs when there is no jackpot history)
Using Figure 155, an example of the presentation when a special time-saving game state that occurs without a jackpot history ends will be described.

Here, the second special pattern is displayed in a variable manner so that the remaining number of second time-saving times (J2) in the special time-saving game state is "1", and the remaining time-saving times image KG displayed in the bottom left of the screen shows "1 time remaining".

After that, when the time for the second special symbol to change has elapsed and the losing special symbol has stopped, as shown in FIG. 155(a), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ will stop at the losing number "416", and the icon will disappear.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect), which will end the special time-saving play state, begins, as shown in FIG. 155(b), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ begins, the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3", and the four reserved icons HI displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D shift toward the icon display area 70C, with one being displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the word "LAST" is displayed as a countdown effect that began from the second variable effect five times before the special time-saving play state ends, and the remaining number of times for time-saving play image KG becomes "0 times remaining".

Next, when the time for the second special symbol to change has elapsed and the symbol stops at the losing special symbol, as shown in FIG. 155(c), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop at the losing number "285", and the icon disappears.

When the game ball enters the first starting hole 45 at this timing, a left-hit error notification is issued for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 4 seconds) based on the fact that a left-hit was made in a specific game state. Specifically, a left-hit error image HUE, which suggests that the game ball should be launched toward the right area of the game area 5a, is displayed near the center of the screen, and a left-hit error sound saying "Please hit to the right" is output from the audio output device 9.

After that, when the special time-saving game state ends, as shown in FIG. 155(d), the display of the right-hit image MU ends and the left-hit notification (display of the left-hit image HU and output of the voice "Please hit left") starts. In addition, when the variable display of the second special pattern starts, the variable display of the special pattern TZ starts, and the shielding image SY that shields the presentation image corresponding to the presentation mode H (background image, presentation pattern 70a, the icon display area 70C, the second reserved icon display area 70D and the second reserved icon, etc.) is displayed, and by retreating to the left side of the screen, the presentation image corresponding to the presentation mode A (background image, presentation pattern image, etc.) becomes visible. At this time, the left-hit error image HUE is erased due to the start of the left-hit notification, but the output of the left-hit error voice continues, and the output ends after a period shorter than the normal output period has passed.

Then, after a predetermined time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 155(e), the blocking image SY moves completely to the left side of the screen, and the presentation image corresponding to presentation mode A (background image, presentation pattern 70a, first hold icon display area 70B and first hold icon, etc.) becomes fully visible, and a reduced display (preparatory action) of presentation pattern 70a becomes visible, along with the notification logo LG containing the text "Help Time", which means a special time-saving play state, and a text image of "Remaining???", which indicates that the number of remaining changes is unknown, become visible.

After that, when the reduced display of the effect pattern 70a (preparatory operation) ends, the scrolling display of the effect pattern 70a begins, as shown in FIG. 155(f). Also, when a predetermined time (6 seconds) has elapsed, the left hit notification ends.

Note that different effects (remaining number of changes "○○" and remaining number of changes "???") can be executed in the normal game state before the special time-saving game state occurs and in the normal game state after the special time-saving game state ends, but the rate at which the effect mode changes according to the progress of the game remains the same.

In this way, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 155, a countdown presentation is executed suggesting a transition to the normal game state from the variable display (variation presentation) of the special symbol a predetermined number of times (here, five times) before the special time-saving game state ends. This allows the player to clearly grasp the end time of the special time-saving game state, and also stimulates the player's sense of urgency about the special time-saving game state ending, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 155, when a left hit is made during the special time-saving game state, a left hit error notification (display of a left hit error image HUE suggesting a right hit, and output of a left hit error voice saying "Please hit right") is executed for a predetermined period of time (e.g., 4 seconds); however, if the normal game state is started while the left hit error notification is being executed, the left hit notification is executed while the left hit error notification is continued. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that a left hit during the special time-saving game state is disadvantageous to the player, while the left hit notification is executed without causing the player a loss due to the start of the normal game state, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 155, when the normal game mode starts while the left-hit error notification is being executed, the display of the left-hit error image HUE is terminated, but the output of the right-hit error sound "Please hit right" continues. This allows the left-hit notification to not be hindered too much, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 155, if the normal game state is started while the left hit error notification is being executed, the display of the left hit image HU ends after the display of the left hit error image HUE ends. This allows the player to properly hit the left side, making the game more interesting.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 155, when the special time-saving game state ends and transitions to the normal game state occurs, the notification logo LG containing the text "Help Time", which indicates the special time-saving game state, and the text image "Remaining???", which indicates that the number of remaining changes is unknown, become visible, suggesting that the special time-saving game state has already occurred. This makes it possible to suggest useful information to the player and increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 155, when a special time-saving game state that has occurred without a jackpot history ends, an end notification presentation (display of a text image of "Help Time Ended," described below) that notifies the player of the end of the special time-saving game state is not executed, and when the game transitions to the normal game state, a presentation suggesting that the game is in the normal game state (such as displaying the background image of presentation mode A) is executed. This allows the player to enjoy the special time-saving game state to the very end, making the game more interesting.

(Example of a special time-saving game state that occurs when there is a jackpot history)
Using Figure 156, an example of the presentation when a special time-saving game state that occurs without a jackpot history ends will be described.

Here, the second special pattern is displayed in a variable manner so that the remaining number of second time-saving times (J2) in the special time-saving game state is "1", and the remaining time-saving times image KG displayed in the bottom left of the screen shows "1 time remaining".

After that, when the time for the second special symbol to change has elapsed and the losing special symbol has stopped, as shown in FIG. 156(a), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ will stop at the losing number "416" and the icon will disappear.

Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable effect) that will end the special time-saving game state starts, as shown in FIG. 156(b), the variable display of the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ starts, the number in the second reserved number display area 70F decreases from "4" to "3", the four reserved icons HI displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon TI. At this time, the text image "LAST" is displayed as a countdown effect that started from the second variable effect 5 times before the special time-saving game state ends, and the time-saving remaining number image KG becomes "0 times remaining". In addition, an end notification effect is executed to notify that the special time-saving game state will end. Specifically, an effect is performed in which the door image TB that shields the background image and the effect symbol 70a, etc. closes, and a text image saying "Help time ends" is displayed in front of the door image TB.

Next, when the time for the second special symbol to change has elapsed and the special symbol is displayed as a missing symbol, the special symbol TZ is displayed as a missing number "285" while the end notification effect continues, as shown in FIG. 156(c).

After that, when the special time-saving game state ends, as shown in FIG. 156(d), the display of the right-hit image MU ends while the end notification effect continues, and the left-hit notification (display of the left-hit image HU) begins. Also, when the variable display of the second special symbol begins, the second special symbol reserved number display area changes from "3" to "2," and a variable display begins in which only the variable display of the special symbol TZ is performed while the door image TB remains closed.

Then, when the time for the second special symbol to change has elapsed and the losing special symbol is displayed, the special symbol TZ will stop and display the losing number "471" while the end notification effect continues, as shown in FIG. 156(e). After that, the change effect will be executed in which only the special symbol TZ changes and is displayed while the end notification effect continues until the second reserved number is exhausted.

Next, when the time for the second special symbol based on the last second reservation has elapsed and the symbol stops at the losing special symbol, the special symbol TZ stops at the losing number "569" while the performance symbol 70a remains obscured, as shown in FIG. 156(f).

After that, when the display of the first special pattern begins to change, as shown in FIG. 156(g), the door image TB opens, the end notification display ends, and the display image (background image, display pattern image, etc.) corresponding to display mode A becomes visible. In addition, a reduced display (preparatory operation) of the display pattern 70a begins, and the display of the special pattern TZ changes, and the two reserved icons displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and one is displayed as the icon.

If there is a jackpot among the remaining second reserved balls when the special time-saving game state ends, a revival effect will be executed while the end notification effect is continuing, and the player will be notified that a jackpot has been obtained.

In this way, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 155, the presentation mode (start timing, end timing, content of the end notification presentation, etc.) when the special time-saving game state ends is different between when a special time-saving game state that occurred without a jackpot history ends and when a special time-saving game state that occurred with a jackpot history ends. Therefore, the presentation effect when the special time-saving game state ends can be improved depending on whether there is a jackpot history, making it possible to increase interest in the game. In addition, the presence or absence of a jackpot history (whether the RWM has been cleared) can be inferred from the presentation mode when the special time-saving game state ends, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in FIG. 156, the change presentation (change presentation of the special symbol TZ) according to the remaining second reserve when the special time-saving game state ends is executed unobtrusively while the end notification presentation continues. Therefore, when the end notification presentation ends, the change presentation of the first special symbol (first change presentation) starts, allowing the player to play with a renewed feeling and making the game more interesting.

In addition, according to the example of the presentation shown in FIG. 156, if there is a jackpot among the remaining second reserved balls when the special time-saving game state ends, the jackpot is announced as a revival presentation while the end announcement presentation continues. This makes it possible to make it look as if a jackpot has been won during the special time-saving game state, which can increase the interest in the game.

When the special time-saving play state ends, a left hit notification (left hit image HU) is immediately initiated regardless of whether there is a second reserve. However, instead of immediately initiating the left hit notification regardless of whether there is a second reserve, if there is no second reserve when the special time-saving play state ends, the left hit notification may be initiated immediately, and if there is a second reserve, the left hit notification may be initiated after the variable presentation corresponding to the second reserve ends.

(Example of a performance when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped and then resumed during the execution of the icon change performance and the lamp change performance)
Using Figures 157 and 158, an example of the presentation when power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped and then resumed while the icon change presentation and lamp change presentation are being executed will be described.

As shown in FIG. 157(a), when the first hold icon (white icon) is displayed in the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2 of the first hold icon display area 70B, the "728" miss display pattern 70a is displayed in a stopped state.

After that, when the variable performance in which the SPSP reach performance is executed starts, as shown in FIG. 157(b), the variable display of the performance pattern 70a starts, and the first hold icon (white icon) displayed in the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2 shifts and is displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

Here, the icon change effect is started by changing the display mode of the icon that is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C to a red icon, and accordingly, the prize winning lamp NR changes from an off state to a flashing red state, starting the lamp change effect.

After that, as shown in FIG. 157(c), the "3" performance pattern 70a is displayed stationary (temporarily stopped) in the variable display areas to the left and right of the performance pattern 70a that was being displayed, while a reach performance (normal reach) is executed in which the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner in the central variable display area.

When the game progresses to an SP reach, as shown in FIG. 157(d), the SP reach performance begins, the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are erased together with the hold icons.

After that, when the game progresses to an SPSP reach, as shown in FIG. 157(e), the SPSP reach performance starts, and the icon display area 70C in which the icon is displayed is erased together with the icon. At this time, the winning slot lamp NR does not go out with the disappearance of the icon, and the lamp change performance of the winning slot lamp NR continues.

When the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is stopped at this timing, the image display device goes dark and the prize slot lamp NR goes out, as shown in FIG. 157(f).

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 158(g), the image display device displays an initial screen including the words "Loading", but the prize slot lamp NR remains off.

When the presentation control board 130 receives the second power restoration command sent from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. 158(h), the image display device displays a recovery screen containing the text "Please resume play" throughout the duration of the SPSP reach presentation (including the execution period of the re-lottery presentation to see whether the temporarily stopped jackpot presentation symbol will be promoted to a jackpot presentation symbol of higher value to the player), but the prize winning port lamp NR remains off.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach performance, which is a miss, ends (the performance control board 130 receives the special symbol stop command indicating a miss), as shown in FIG. 158(i), the performance symbol 70a is not temporarily stopped (shaking and changing), and a stop screen (second standby screen) is displayed in which the performance symbol 70a of "753", which is the initial symbol at the time of power recovery, and the special symbol TZ are stopped (still displayed), and the changing performance ends without resuming the lamp changing performance.

At this time, the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B displays the same white icon as before the power supply was stopped, and the icon is not displayed in the icon display area 70C, but a rectangular area image is displayed, ensuring that the display space (display area) of the icon is secured in a state in which a background image or other presentation image can be displayed.

After that, when the next variable performance starts, as shown in FIG. 158(j), the display of the variable performance pattern 70a starts, and the first hold icon (white icon) displayed in the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

On the other hand, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect which results in a jackpot ends (the effect control board 130 receives a special chart stop command indicating a jackpot), as shown in FIG. 158(k), instead of a temporary stop display (swaying fluctuation/swinging display) of the effect pattern 70a, a stop screen is displayed in which the "777" jackpot effect pattern 70a (a combination of effect patterns different from the reach combination of the "3↓3" effect pattern which formed the reach state before the power was cut off) indicating the type of jackpot game this time (here, the first jackpot game) and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state (static display), and the variable effect ends without the lamp change effect resuming on the winning port lamp NR.

In addition to the variable performance in which the SPSP reach performance is executed, other variable performances (variable performance in which normal variation is executed, variable performance in which shortened variation is executed, variable performance in which normal reach performance is executed, variable performance in which SP reach performance is executed) will also be executed. When the power supply that was stopped during execution is resumed and the execution period of the performance ends, the performance pattern 70a will not be temporarily stopped (swaying variation/swinging display) and the missing performance pattern 70a of "753" or the jackpot performance pattern that is the same or a different combination of performance patterns as the reach combination of the performance patterns that formed the reach state before the power was cut off will be displayed as a stopped display (static display).

In addition, regardless of whether the game control state of the special pattern TZ is initialized or restored, and whether the subsequent state is a normal game state or a specific game state (low-probability time-saving game state, high-probability time-saving game state), the special pattern TZ will be displayed in the same display mode (shape, design) and in a stopped (static) display with numbers that are the same combination as the performance pattern 70a.

After that, when the opening of the jackpot game starts, as shown in FIG. 158(l), the image display device starts an opening performance including information indicating the type of jackpot game ("MAX jackpot" indicating that it is the first jackpot game), and the first pending icon display area 70B, the second pending icon display area 70D, and the icon display area 70C are erased together with the icons.

The winning slot lamp NR remains off while the initial screen and/or the return screen are displayed, but the winning slot lamp NR may be lit in a lighting mode (e.g. white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change presentation (does not indicate the likelihood of winning a jackpot).

In this way, according to the presentation example shown in Figures 157 to 158, when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the variable presentation in which the presentation pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (swaying and fluctuating) and then stopped is resumed and the game control state is restored, if the special pattern fluctuation time has elapsed and a special pattern stop designation command (if the special pattern stop designation command is missed and thereafter the game transitions to a customer waiting state, a customer waiting state designation command) is received, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed as stopped (still displayed) without being temporarily stopped (swaying and fluctuating/swaying display). This allows the player to understand that the variable presentation that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in Figures 157 to 158, when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of a losing variable presentation is resumed and the game control state is restored, the presentation pattern 70a is displayed (still displayed) as a stopped pattern, and not the normal losing presentation pattern, but the combination of presentation patterns that was the initial pattern when the power was restored is displayed (still displayed). This makes it possible to avoid the need for cumbersome processing such as determining the presentation pattern to be displayed (still displayed) by lottery, and to know that the power supply has been restored and the game control state has been restored, and that the variable presentation that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended.

In addition, according to the example of the presentation shown in Figs. 157 to 158, when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the jackpot variable presentation is resumed and the game control state is restored, the presentation pattern is displayed as still (static), and the combination of jackpot presentation patterns is displayed as still (static). Therefore, it is possible to know that the power supply is restored, which restores the game control state, and that the variable presentation that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped was the jackpot variable presentation.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in Figures 157 to 158, when a combination of jackpot presentation symbols is displayed (still displayed) after the game control state is restored, it is possible to display (still display) a combination of jackpot presentation symbols different from the reach combination of presentation symbols that formed the reach state before the power supply was stopped. Therefore, there is no need to be aware of the jackpot presentation symbols that were scheduled to be displayed (still displayed) before the power supply was stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to display control after the power supply is resumed.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 157 to 158, if the variable effect being executed at the time the power supply was stopped includes the execution period of the promotion effect described above, the big win effect pattern is displayed as still (static display) without executing the promotion effect after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored. Therefore, since no unnecessary effects are performed before the effect pattern is displayed as still (static display), it becomes possible for the player to immediately understand that the variable effect being executed at the time the power supply was stopped was a big win variable effect.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 157 to 158, the display mode (type of display screen, display order of display screen) of the image display device after the power supply is resumed is the same in cases where the power supply that was stopped during the execution of a miss variation presentation is resumed and the game control state is restored, and in cases where the power supply that was stopped during the execution of a jackpot variation presentation is resumed and the game control state is restored. Therefore, simple display control can be performed without being aware of whether a miss variation presentation or a jackpot variation presentation was being executed, making it possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is resumed.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in Figures 157 to 158, after the power supply is resumed and the game control state is restored, the special symbol TZ is displayed in the same display mode as before the power supply was stopped, and is displayed stationary (statically) with the numbers that form the same combination as the presentation symbol 70a. This makes it easier to grasp that the variable presentation that was being performed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in Figures 157 to 158, if the power supply that was stopped while the icon was being displayed is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, from the time the display of the recovery screen ends until the next variable presentation (scrolling of the presentation pattern 70a) begins, a rectangular area image is displayed in the icon display area 70C, ensuring that the display space (display area) of the icon is in a state where a presentation image such as a background image can be displayed, but the icon is not displayed. This allows the player to understand that the variable presentation that was being performed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the presentation example shown in Figures 157 to 158, if the power supply that was stopped while the reserved icon was displayed is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, a rectangular area image is displayed in the reserved icon display area from the time the display of the recovery screen ends until the next variable presentation starts, so that the display space (display area) of the reserved icon is secured in a state in which a presentation image such as a background image can be displayed, and the reserved icon is displayed. Therefore, even if the power supply is stopped, it is possible to know that the reserved variable presentation has not disappeared, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 157 to 158, if the power supply that was stopped during the variable effect (storage of special chart determination information that changes the winning slot lamp NR to a lighting color (blue, red, rainbow) that has a high expectation of winning a jackpot) corresponding to the icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change effect is resumed and the game control state is restored, the lamp change effect is not resumed and the winning slot lamp NR is set to a notification mode (off or white light) that does not indicate the expectation of winning a jackpot. This makes it possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is resumed, while avoiding a situation in which the player is confused by the lamp change effect being resumed even though the variable effect has not been executed.

After the execution period of the jackpot variable performance ends, a stopped screen is displayed with the jackpot performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ frozen, but a second standby screen may be displayed with the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ frozen (static display), just like when a loss occurs.

After the execution period of the jackpot variable presentation ends, a stop screen is displayed in which the jackpot presentation pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state, but an opening presentation for the jackpot game may be started without displaying the stop screen and without displaying the jackpot presentation pattern 70a. Also, in the opening presentation, information indicating the type of jackpot game may be displayed, or the jackpot special pattern TZ of "777" may be displayed, or the special pattern TZ of "753", which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, may be displayed.

In addition, after the execution period of the miss variation effect has ended, the effect pattern 70a, which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, and the special pattern TZ may be displayed, and after the execution period of the jackpot variation effect has ended, the opening effect of the jackpot game may be started without displaying the stopped screen in which the jackpot effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a stopped state.

In addition, if it is possible to execute a specific effect that incites whether or not a jackpot game will be played (raise the expectation that a jackpot game will be played) without displaying the effect pattern 70a in the reach state during the variable effect, after the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the specific effect is resumed and the control state is restored, if it is a miss, the effect pattern 70a, which is the initial pattern when the power is restored, may be displayed in a stopped state (static display), and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot effect pattern 70a may be displayed in a stopped state (static display).

In addition, when a combination of jackpot performance symbols is displayed in a static manner (still display) after the game control state is restored, one of a plurality of combinations of jackpot performance symbols corresponding to the type of jackpot game to be executed thereafter may be displayed in a static manner.

In this case, for example, the combination of jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the first jackpot game is "333" and "777", the combination of jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the second jackpot game is "222", "444", "666", and "888", and the combination of jackpot effect symbols suggesting the execution of the third jackpot game is "111", "555", and "999".

If the reach combination before the power supply was stopped was "1↓1", which constitutes part of the combination of jackpot performance symbols that suggests the execution of a third jackpot game, then if the jackpot game to be executed afterwards is the first jackpot game, either "333" or "777" (a combination of jackpot performance symbols different from the reach combination of the performance symbols that formed the reach state) will be displayed as a static display, and if the jackpot game to be executed afterwards is the third jackpot game, either "111", "555", or "999" (a combination of jackpot performance symbols that is the same as or different from the reach combination of the performance symbols that formed the reach state) will be displayed as a static display.

In addition, after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the special pattern TZ may be displayed as a static display (static display) with numbers that are a different combination from the performance pattern 70a, rather than a static display (static display) with numbers that are the same combination as the performance pattern 70a.

In addition, if the normal game state and customer waiting state are in effect after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the performance pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are displayed as still (static), whereas if the specific game state (low probability time-shortened game state, high probability time-shortened game state) and customer waiting state are in effect after the power supply is resumed and the control state is restored, the performance pattern 70a may not be displayed as still (static), and the special pattern TZ may be displayed as still (static).

(Example of a performance when power supply to a gaming machine is stopped and then resumed during execution of a look-ahead effect performance, a reserved icon change performance, and a lamp change performance)
Figures 159 and 160 are figures showing examples of presentations when power supply to a gaming machine is stopped and then resumed during the execution of a look-ahead effect presentation, a pending icon change presentation, and a lamp change presentation.

As shown in FIG. 159(a), when the first hold icon (white icon) is displayed in the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, and the third display section 70B3 of the first hold icon display area 70B, the "728" miss display pattern 70a is displayed in a stopped state.

After that, when the pre-variation variation performance starts, as shown in FIG. 159(b), the display of the variation of the performance pattern 70a starts, and the first hold icon (white icon) displayed in the first display section 70B1, the second display section 70B2, and the third display section 70B3 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C, the first display section 70B1, and the second display section 70B2, respectively.

Here, the first pre-reading effect performance is started by displaying an effect image EF around the performance pattern 70a which starts the changing display, and the display mode of the first reserved icon (final icon display mode = red icon) which is shifted and displayed on the second display section 70B2 changes to a blue icon, starting the reserved icon change performance, and accordingly the winning slot lamp NR changes from an off state to a flashing blue state, starting the lamp change performance.

After that, as shown in FIG. 159(c), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect symbol 70a starts scrolling at high speed. Then, after the change time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 159(d), the effect symbol 70a indicating a miss is temporarily stopped, and then the miss effect symbol 70a of "259" and the special symbol TZ are stopped.

After that, when the pre-variation effect starts, as shown in FIG. 159(e), the display of the variation of the performance pattern 70a starts, and the first hold icon displayed in the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

At this point, the second pre-reading effect performance begins as an effect image EF is displayed around the performance pattern 70a that is starting to change, and the pending icon change performance and the lamp change performance continue.

Then, as shown in FIG. 159(f), the effect image EF displayed around the effect symbol 70a is erased, and the effect symbol 70a begins to scroll at high speed. If the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is cut off at this point, as shown in FIG. 159(g), the image display device becomes invisible, and the winning slot lamp NR goes out.

After that, when the power supply to the gaming machine 1 is resumed, as shown in FIG. 159(h), the image display device displays an initial screen including the words "Loading", but the winning slot lamp NR remains off without resuming the lamp change presentation.

Then, when the performance control board 130 receives the second power restoration command sent from the main control board 110, as shown in FIG. 160(i), a recovery screen containing the text "Please resume play" is displayed on the image display device for the duration of the execution of the pre-change, but the winning slot lamp NR remains off.

After that, when the execution period of the pre-change ends (the performance control board 130 receives a special pattern stop command indicating a miss), as shown in FIG. 160(j), the performance pattern 70a of "753", which is the initial pattern at the time of power recovery, and the stop screen with the special pattern TZ stopped (still displayed) are displayed without a temporary stop display (swaying change) of the performance pattern 70a, and the pre-change ends without resuming the lamp change performance.

At this time, the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B displays a white icon, not the blue icon that was displayed before the power supply was stopped, and the icon display area 70C does not display the icon, but a rectangular area image is displayed, ensuring that the display space (display area) for the icon is available for displaying a background image or other presentation image.

After that, when the variable performance in which the SPSP reach performance is executed starts, as shown in FIG. 160(k), the variable display of the performance pattern 70a starts, and the first hold icon (white icon) displayed in the first display section 70B1 shifts and is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, as shown in FIG. 160(l), the lines spoken by ally A are displayed in a line window displayed on the image display device, and the voice output device 9 outputs a sound corresponding to the lines, saying "Your chance has come!", thereby executing a line preview performance.

Then, as shown in FIG. 160(m), the "3" performance pattern 70a is displayed stationary (temporarily stopped) in the variable display areas to the left and right of the performance pattern 70a that was being displayed, while a reach performance (normal reach) is executed in which the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner in the central variable display area.

After that, when it progresses to SP Reach, as shown in FIG. 160(n), the SP Reach performance starts, the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the screen, and the first hold icon display area 70B and the second hold icon display area 70D are erased.

When the game progresses to an SPSP reach, the SPSP reach performance starts, as shown in FIG. 160(o), and the icon display area 70C is erased together with the icon.

After that, when the execution period of the SPSP reach effect which results in a jackpot ends (the effect control board 130 receives the special symbol stop command indicating a jackpot), as shown in FIG. 160(p), the jackpot effect pattern 70a of "333" which indicates the type of jackpot game this time (here, the first jackpot game) and the special symbol TZ are temporarily stopped (shaking and fluctuating) and then stopped, and the fluctuating effect ends.

The winning slot lamp NR remains off while the initial screen and/or the return screen are displayed, but the winning slot lamp NR may be lit in a lighting mode (e.g. white lighting) that is not used in the lamp change presentation (does not indicate the likelihood of winning a jackpot).

In addition, if a special pattern stop designation command cannot be received during a changing performance (temporarily stopped display (swaying change) of performance pattern 70a), the performance pattern 70a that is temporarily stopped (swaying change) will continue to be temporarily stopped (swaying change) without being stopped.

In addition, for the icon that has changed from a reserved icon to the relevant icon after the power supply is resumed, a lottery for the icon change effect may be held at the start of the change, and if a win is won, the display mode of the icon may be changed according to the result, but a new lottery for the lamp change effect may not be held, and the winning port lamp NR may remain off so that the lamp change effect is not resumed.

In this way, according to the example of the performance shown in Figures 159 to 160, if the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the look-ahead effect performance is resumed and the game control state is restored, the continuous preview performance is not resumed in the variable performance corresponding to the special chart determination information stored at the time of restoration. This makes it possible to prevent the continuous preview performance from being resumed in an incomplete state due to the power supply being stopped, making it possible to increase the interest in the game. The same applies to the case where the power supply that was stopped during the execution of another continuous preview performance is resumed and the game control state is restored.

In addition, according to the presentation examples shown in Figures 159 to 160, if the power supply that was stopped while a reserved icon was being displayed as a special icon (including cases where the display mode has not changed to the final display mode and cases where the display mode has changed to the final display mode) is resumed and the game control state is restored, the reserved icon that was displayed as a special icon is displayed as a normal icon. This means that there is no need to be aware of the display mode of the reserved icon when the power supply was stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to display control after the power supply is resumed.

In addition, according to the example of the effects shown in Figures 159 to 160, even if the power supply that was stopped during the variable effect (storage of special chart determination information that changes the winning slot lamp NR to a lighting color (blue, red, rainbow) that has a high expectation of winning a jackpot) corresponding to the reserved icon that triggered the execution of the lamp change effect is resumed and the game control state is restored, the lamp change effect is not resumed and the winning slot lamp NR is set to a notification mode (off or white light) that does not indicate the expectation of winning a jackpot. This makes it possible to reduce the control load after the power supply is resumed, while avoiding a situation in which the player is confused by the lamp change effect being resumed even though the variable effect has not been executed.

(Example 1 of when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 1 of a case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 161 and Fig. 162. Fig. 161 is a timing chart 1 of a case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 162 (a) to (j) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 1 of Fig. 161.

First, at the timing of T0, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1," and the display of the varying first special symbols begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1," and processing is performed to start the varying performance.

At this time, while the changing BGM is output, the first special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and the two reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the display of the changing performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and first lamp pattern LZ begins, but the performance pattern 70a begins scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparatory operation).

The change in the first lamp pattern LZ is indicated by the blinking of the LED of the sub-first change indicator 81, but because blinking cannot be shown in a drawing, the change is indicated by a double circle. The blinking of the LED of the sub-first hold indicator 83 is also indicated by a double circle.

Next, at the timing of T1, the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, and the number of reserved first special charts stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2". When the performance control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special chart reserved number designation command, pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special charts stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m increases from "1" to "2".

At this time, the first special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2" in one frame of non-animation, and one reserved icon HI is additionally displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B as a 10-frame animation (displayed so that it gradually becomes larger from a tiny size) (see FIG. 162(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("814"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). Also, the reserved icon HI and the icon TI are rotating (performance motion) (see FIG. 162(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to end the changing performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing pattern ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ stops in a losing pattern (off) (see FIG. 162(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the display of the variable first special symbol begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m becomes "2" to "1", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" with one frame of non-animation, and the two reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TI. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts to change, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparatory operation) (see FIG. 162 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the shifting display of the icon was completed, the performance pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, the display of the performance pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon and the icon in question are rotating (performing) (see FIG. 162(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("531"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swaying display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). Also, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 162 (f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon HI and the icon TI continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the changing display of the special pattern TZ, and the changing display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended, and accordingly the output of the BGM during the change is maintained (see FIG. 162 (f)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the display of the first special symbol changes begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0", and processing is performed to start the changing performance.

At this time, the first special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" with one frame of non-animation, and one reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, all of the performance patterns 70a, including the performance patterns 70a that are shifted from the stopping position, are displayed at the stopping position (instantly derived display) (see FIG. 162 (g)).

Then, while the changing display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, the changing display of the performance pattern 70a begins, and the performance pattern 70a begins scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparatory operation) (see Figure 162 (g)).

Then, at the timing of T9, the background image continues to scroll, and the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed. At this time, the display of the effect pattern 70a has started to change, so the icon is rotating (performs) (see FIG. 162 (h)).

Next, at timing T10, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("962"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swaying display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). Also, the icon TI continues to rotate (performance action) (see Figure 162 (i)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the changing display of the special pattern TZ, and the changing display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended (see Figure 162 (i)).

Then, at the timing of T12, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m is "0", so the machine transitions to a customer waiting state (a waiting state for playing). When the performance control unit 130m receives a customer waiting state designation command sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs processing to end the variable performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation. In addition, all performance patterns 70a (performance patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in previous variable performances), including the performance pattern 70a that is out of position, are displayed (actually stopped) at the stop position, the special pattern TZ is actually stopped in a predetermined missing state ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ is actually stopped in a missing state (off) (see FIG. 162 (j)).

In addition, if at the timing of T7 the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance command sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the same processing will be carried out as in the case where the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m.

Here, we have explained specific example 1 of a case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally in a normal game state, but even if the game state is a specific game state (a time-saving game state or a special game state), the basic flow is the same as that explained above.

Specifically, the first special chart reserved number, the first special chart reserved number designation command, the first special pattern, the sub-first reserved indicator 83, the first special chart reserved number display area 70E, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first start port 45 should be read as the second special chart reserved number, the second special chart reserved number designation command, the second special pattern, the sub-second reserved indicator 84, the second special chart reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second start port 47.

In addition, if the connector of a specific detection sensor (starting port detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) becomes unplugged, an abnormality (error notification) is immediately issued. However, if a command abnormality occurs due to a connector being unplugged on the command line that communicates between the main control board 110 and the performance control board 130, no abnormality notification is issued.

(Example 2 of when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
163 and 164, a specific example 2 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described. Fig. 163 is a timing chart 2 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 164 (a) to (i) are performance example 1 corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of Fig. 163.

First, at the timing of T0, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the display of the varying first special symbols begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the varying performance.

At this time, the first special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the four reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TI. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and first lamp pattern LZ starts to change, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparatory operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, and the number of reserved first special charts stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4." When the performance control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special chart reserved number designation command, pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special charts stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m increases from "3" to "4."

At this time, the number of reserved first special charts displayed on the sub-1st reserved indicator 83 and the 1st special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation, and one reserved icon HI is additionally displayed in the 1st reserved icon display area 70B as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so that it gradually becomes larger from a very small size) (see FIG. 164 (a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("814"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swinging display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). Also, the reserved icon HI and the icon TI are rotating (performance action) (see Figure 164 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to end the changing performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing pattern ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ stops in a losing pattern (off) (see FIG. 164 (c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the display of the variable first special symbol begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m becomes "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the number of reserved first special charts displayed on the sub-1st reserved indicator 83 and the 1st special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the four reserved icons HI displayed in the 1st reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the display of the varying performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and 1st lamp pattern LZ begins, and the performance pattern 70a begins scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparatory operation) (see FIG. 164 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shifting display of the icon is completed, the look-ahead zone performance (normal zone performance) begins. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the word "ZONE" scrolls left and right is displayed, and zone BGM is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the performance pattern 70a has begun, so that the reserved icon and the icon in question are rotating (performance operation) (see FIG. 164 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("531"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swaying display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). Also, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 164 (f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon HI and the icon TI continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. In addition, the zone performance (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained and the look-ahead zone performance continues (see FIG. 164 (g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the variable display of the first special symbol begins. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the start commands (first special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "3", and no processing will be performed to start the variable performance. At this time, the state of FIG. 164(g) will be maintained.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 164 (g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the display of the variable first special symbol begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m becomes "3" to "1", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, the excess reserved icon HI displayed third in the first reserved icon display area 70B is erased in one frame of non-animation, and all performance patterns 70a including the performance pattern 70a that is out of alignment with the stopping position (the performance pattern 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stopping position (see FIG. 164 (h)).

The two necessary hold icons HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are then shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TI. Then, the display of the change in the performance pattern 70a starts while the change in the look-ahead zone performance, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 164 (h)).

When deleting surplus reserved icons and shifting in the required reserved icons, the surplus reserved icons may remain as they are and the required reserved icons may be shifted in.

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the shifting display of the icon was completed, the performance pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the look-ahead zone performance and the scrolling of the background image continue. At this time, the display of the performance pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon and the icon in question are rotating (performance operation) (see FIG. 164(i)).

After that, if the performance control unit 130m is able to receive various commands from the main control unit 110m normally, the normal zone performance (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of a blue zone image, output of zone BGM) will be executed according to the preview scenario even during the variable performance (subject to the expectation level suggestion by the look-ahead zone performance) executed during the variable display of the special pattern in which the number of reserved first special patterns becomes "0", and the look-ahead zone performance will end when the performance pattern 70a stops.

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m is able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m at the timings T7 to T9, but the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 are unable to normally receive the performance commands sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of these commands, the same processing will be carried out as in the case where the performance control unit 130m is unable to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m.

Here, we have explained the case where the number of reserved first special charts stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1" at timing T10, but if the number of reserved first special charts changes from "4" to "2", or if the number of reserved first special charts changes from "2" to "0", in other words, if the discrepancy between the number of reserved charts known by the main control unit 110m and the number of reserved charts known by the performance control unit 130m is "2", the basic flow will be the same as that explained above.

Here, we have explained specific example 2, where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally in the normal game state, but even if the game state is a specific game state (time-saving game state, special chance game state), the basic flow is the same as that explained above.

Specifically, the first special chart reserved number, the first special chart reserved number designation command, the first special pattern, the sub-first reserved indicator 83, the first special chart reserved number display area 70E, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first start port 45 should be read as the second special chart reserved number, the second special chart reserved number designation command, the second special pattern, the sub-second reserved indicator 84, the second special chart reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second start port 47.

(Example 3 of when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 3 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 163 and Fig. 165. Fig. 163 is a timing chart 2 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 165 (a) to (i) are performance example 2 corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of Fig. 163.

Note that Figures 164 and 165 differ in that a look-ahead effect effect is executed instead of a look-ahead zone effect as a continuous preview effect, and an icon change effect is executed, so we will omit an explanation of the common parts here and only explain the differences.

At the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the display of the variable first special symbol begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m becomes "3" from "4", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special chart reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation indicator 83 and the first special chart reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the four reservation icons HI displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TI (see FIG. 165 (d)).

The display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts to change, and a look-ahead effect performance is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed at the bottom behind the performance pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparatory operation) (see FIG. 165(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the icon shift display is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect performance is temporarily stopped, and the icon change performance starts. Specifically, the third reserved icon displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon and a change sound is output. At this time, the background image continues to scroll and the display of the performance pattern 70a has started to change, so that the reserved icon and the icon in question are rotating (performance operation) (see FIG. 165(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("531"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swaying display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). Also, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 165(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon HI and the icon TI continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the changing display of the special pattern TZ, and the changing display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. In addition, the blue icon is maintained and the icon change performance continues (see FIG. 165 (g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol pending number stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the display of the first special symbol changes begins. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start commands (first special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special symbol pending number stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "3", and no processing will be performed to start the change performance. Therefore, the look-ahead effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) will not be executed, and the state of FIG. 165(g) will be maintained.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 165(g) will be maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the display of the variable first special symbol begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m becomes "3" to "1", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-1st reserved indicator 83 and the number of reserved first special symbols display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" with one frame of non-animation, the excess reserved icon HI displayed second in the 1st reserved icon display area 70B is erased with one frame of non-animation, and the reserved icon HI displayed third is displayed second with one frame of non-animation. In addition, all performance patterns 70a including the performance pattern 70a that is out of alignment with the stopping position (the performance pattern 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stopping position (see FIG. 165 (h)).

The two necessary reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are then shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TI. The display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues to change while the display of the performance pattern 70a starts to change, and a pre-reading effect performance is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed at the bottom behind the performance pattern 70a in accordance with the preview scenario, and an effect sound is output. The performance pattern 70a then starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparatory operation) (see FIG. 165 (h)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased and the look-ahead effect performance is temporarily stopped, and the icon change performance is executed, causing the performance pattern 70a to scroll at high speed. Specifically, the first reserved icon displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B changes to a red icon in accordance with the change scenario, and a change sound is output. At this time, since the variable display of the performance pattern 70a has started, the reserved icon and the icon in question are rotating (performance operation) (see FIG. 165(i)).

After that, if the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the look-ahead effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) and icon change performance (the icon change performance) are also executed during the change performance (subject to the expectation level suggested by the look-ahead preview performance) that is executed during the change display of the special pattern where the number of reserved first special patterns becomes "0". Then, the look-ahead effect performance ends when the performance pattern 70a scrolls at high speed, and the icon is erased and the icon change performance ends when the performance pattern 70a is displayed stationary.

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m is able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m at the timings T7 to T9, but the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 are unable to normally receive the performance commands sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of these commands, the same processing will be carried out as in the case where the performance control unit 130m is unable to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m.

Here, we have explained the case where the number of reserved first special charts stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "1" at timing T10, but if the number of reserved first special charts changes from "4" to "2", or if the number of reserved first special charts changes from "2" to "0", in other words, if the discrepancy between the number of reserved charts known by the main control unit 110m and the number of reserved charts known by the performance control unit 130m is "2", the basic flow will be the same as that explained above.

Here, we have explained specific example 3, where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally in the normal game state, but even if the game state is a specific game state (time-saving game state, special chance game state), the basic flow is the same as that explained above.

Specifically, the first special chart reserved number, the first special chart reserved number designation command, the first special pattern, the sub-first reserved indicator 83, the first special chart reserved number display area 70E, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first start port 45 should be read as the second special chart reserved number, the second special chart reserved number designation command, the second special pattern, the sub-second reserved indicator 84, the second special chart reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second start port 47.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 163 to 165, when a specific number (e.g., three) of reserved icons (first reserved information) that is two more than the predetermined number (e.g., one) is displayed in the reserved icon display area, if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for the variable display in which the special reserved number becomes the predetermined number, the necessary reserved icons (e.g., the first and second reserved icons) are shifted and displayed without shifting the surplus reserved icons (e.g., the third reserved icon) out of the specific number of reserved icons. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. In addition, it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the reserved number, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 163 to 165, when a specific number (e.g., three) of reserved icons (first reserved information) that is two more than a predetermined number (e.g., one) is displayed in the reserved icon display area, if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for the variable display in which the special reserved number becomes the predetermined number, the number of reserved icons that is one less than the specific number is displayed before displaying the predetermined number of reserved icons. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. It also reduces the discomfort felt when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the reserved number, making it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 163 to 165, when the sub-first reserve indicator 83 or the first special chart reserve number display area 70E is displaying a specific number (e.g., three) that is two more than the predetermined number (e.g., one), if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for the variable display that causes the special chart reserve number to become the predetermined number, the predetermined number of reserved numbers will be displayed without displaying a number that is one less than the specific number. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, since the accurate reserved number is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly inform the player of the reserved number.

(Example 4 of when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 4 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 166 and Fig. 167. Fig. 166 is a timing chart 3 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 167(a)-(i) are performance example 1 corresponding to (a)-(i) in the timing chart 3 of Fig. 166.

First, at the timing of T0, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the display of the varying first special symbols begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the varying performance.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-1st reserved indicator 83 and the number of reserved first special symbols display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the four reserved icons HI displayed in the 1st reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TI. Also, the display of the varying effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and 1st lamp pattern LZ starts, but the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparatory operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, and the number of reserved first special charts stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4." When the performance control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special chart reserved number designation command, pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special charts stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m increases from "3" to "4."

At this time, the number of reserved first special charts displayed on the sub-1st reserved indicator 83 and the 1st special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation, and one reserved icon HI is additionally displayed in the 1st reserved icon display area 70B as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so that it gradually becomes larger from a very small size) (see FIG. 167(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("814"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance action). Also, the reserved icon HI and the icon TI are rotating (performance action) (see FIG. 167(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to end the changing performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ stops in a losing state (off) (see FIG. 167(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the display of the variable first special symbol begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m becomes "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the four reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts to change, and the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparatory operation) (see FIG. 167(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shifting display of the icon is completed, the look-ahead zone performance (normal zone performance) begins. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the word "ZONE" scrolls left and right is displayed, and zone BGM is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the performance pattern 70a has begun, so that the reserved icon and the icon in question are rotating (performance operation) (see FIG. 167(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("531"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance action). Also, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 167(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon HI and the icon TI continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. In addition, the zone performance (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained, and the look-ahead zone performance continues (see FIG. 167 (g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol pending number stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the variable display of the first special symbol begins. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the start commands (first special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special symbol pending number stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "3", and no processing will be performed to start the variable performance. At this time, the state of FIG. 167(g) will be maintained.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 167(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol pending number stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the variable display of the first special symbol begins. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the start commands (first special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special symbol pending number stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "3", and no processing will be performed to start the variable performance. At this time, the state of FIG. 167(g) will be maintained.

Then, at the timing of T11, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed. At this time, the state of FIG. 167(g) is maintained.

Next, at the timing of T12, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the display of the first special symbol changes begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0", and processing is performed to start the changing performance.

At this time, the first special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "3" to "0" in one frame of non-animation, the excess reserved icons HI displayed in the second and third positions in the first reserved icon display area 70B are erased in one frame of non-animation, and all performance patterns 70a including the performance pattern 70a that is out of alignment with the stopping position (the performance pattern 70a that was scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance) are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stopping position (see FIG. 167 (h)).

Then, one of the necessary reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation and displayed as the icon TI. Also, the display of the change in the performance pattern 70a starts while the change in the look-ahead zone performance, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation) (see FIG. 167 (h)).

After that, at the timing of T13, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the shifting display of the icon was completed, the performance pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the look-ahead zone performance and the scrolling of the background image continue. At this time, the display of the performance pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon and the icon in question are rotating (performance operation) (see FIG. 167(i)).

After that, if the performance control unit 130m is able to normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the look-ahead zone performance ends when the performance pattern 70a stops.

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m is able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m at the timings T7 to T11, but the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 are unable to normally receive the performance commands sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of these commands, the same processing will be carried out as when the performance control unit 130m is unable to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m.

Here, we have explained the case where the number of reserved first special charts stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0" at timing T12. However, if the number of reserved first special charts changes from "4" to "1", that is, if the difference between the number of reserved charts known by the main control unit 110m and the number of reserved charts known by the performance control unit 130m is "3", the basic flow will be the same as that explained above.

Here, we have explained specific example 4, which is a case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally in the normal game state, but even if the game state is a specific game state (time-saving game state, special chance game state), the basic flow is the same as that explained above.

Specifically, the first special chart reserved number, the first special chart reserved number designation command, the first special pattern, the sub-first reserved indicator 83, the first special chart reserved number display area 70E, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first start port 45 should be read as the second special chart reserved number, the second special chart reserved number designation command, the second special pattern, the sub-second reserved indicator 84, the second special chart reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second start port 47.

(Example 5 of when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 5 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 166 and Fig. 168. Fig. 166 is a timing chart 3 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 168 (a) to (i) are performance example 2 corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 3 of Fig. 166.

Note that Figures 167 and 168 differ in that a look-ahead effect effect is executed instead of a look-ahead zone effect as a continuous preview effect, and an icon change effect is executed, so we will omit an explanation of the common parts here and only explain the differences.

At the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the display of the variable first special symbol begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m becomes "3" from "4", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special chart reservation number displayed on the sub-first reservation indicator 83 and the first special chart reservation number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the four reservation icons HI displayed in the first reservation icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TI.

The display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts to change, and a look-ahead effect performance is executed. Specifically, a blue effect image EF is displayed at the bottom behind the performance pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparatory operation) (see FIG. 168(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect performance is temporarily stopped, and the icon change performance starts. Specifically, the third reserved icon displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon and a change sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the performance pattern 70a has started, so that the reserved icon and the icon in question are rotating (performance operation) (see FIG. 168 (e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("531"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swaying display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). Also, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 168(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon HI and the icon TI continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the changing display of the special pattern TZ, and the changing display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. In addition, the blue icon is maintained and the icon change performance continues (see FIG. 168 (g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol pending number stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the display of the first special symbol changes begins. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special symbol pending number stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "3", and processing to start the change performance will not be performed. Therefore, the look-ahead effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) will not be executed, and the state of FIG. 168(g) will be maintained.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 168(g) will be maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol pending number stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the display of the first special symbol changes begins. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start commands (first special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special symbol pending number stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "3", and processing to start the change performance will not be performed. Therefore, the look-ahead effect performance (display of effect image EF, output of effect sound effect) will not be executed, and the state of FIG. 168(g) will be maintained.

After that, at the timing of T11, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon HI and the icon TI continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the changing display of the special pattern TZ, and the changing display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended (see Figure 168 (g)).

After that, at the timing of T12, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the display of the first special symbol changes begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0", and processing is performed to start the changing performance.

At this time, the first special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "3" to "0" with one frame of non-animation, the excess reserved icons HI displayed in the first and second positions in the first reserved icon display area 70B are erased with one frame of non-animation, and the reserved icon HI displayed in the third position is displayed in the first position with one frame of non-animation. In addition, all performance patterns 70a including the performance patterns 70a that are out of alignment with the stopping position (performance patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in past variable performances) are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stopping position.

Then, one of the necessary reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation and displayed as the icon TI. Also, the display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues to change while the display of the performance pattern 70a starts to change, and a pre-reading effect performance is executed. Specifically, a red effect image EF is displayed at the bottom behind the performance pattern 70a, and an effect sound is output. Then, the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlarging/reducing operation (preparatory operation) (see FIG. 168 (h)).

After that, at the timing of T13, the icon shift display is completed and the icon change effect is executed at the same time, the effect image EF is erased, the look-ahead effect effect ends, and the effect pattern 70a scrolls at high speed. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon in accordance with the change scenario, and a change sound is output. At this time, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a has started, so the icon is rotating (a performance operation) (see FIG. 168(i)).

After that, if the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased when the performance pattern 70a stops being displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m is able to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m at the timings T7 to T11, but the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 are unable to normally receive the performance commands sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of these commands, the same processing will be carried out as when the performance control unit 130m is unable to normally receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m.

Here, we have explained the case where the number of reserved first special charts stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0" at timing T12. However, if the number of reserved first special charts changes from "4" to "1", that is, if the difference between the number of reserved charts known by the main control unit 110m and the number of reserved charts known by the performance control unit 130m is "3", the basic flow will be the same as that explained above.

Here, we have explained specific example 5, where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally in the normal game state, but even if the game state is a specific game state (time-saving game state, special chance game state), the basic flow is the same as that explained above.

Specifically, the first special chart reserved number, the first special chart reserved number designation command, the first special pattern, the sub-first reserved indicator 83, the first special chart reserved number display area 70E, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first start port 45 should be read as the second special chart reserved number, the second special chart reserved number designation command, the second special pattern, the sub-second reserved indicator 84, the second special chart reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second start port 47.

Thus, according to the specific example shown in Figures 166 to 168, when a specific number (e.g., four) of reserved icons (first reserved information) that is three more than a predetermined number (e.g., one) is displayed in the reserved icon display area, if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for the variable display in which the special reserved number becomes the predetermined number, the predetermined number of reserved icons is displayed without displaying a number of reserved icons that is one less than the specific number. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. It also reduces the discomfort felt when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the reserved number, making it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 166 to 168, when a specific number (e.g., four) of reserved icons (first reserved information) that is three more than a predetermined number (e.g., one) is displayed in the reserved icon display area, if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for the variable display in which the special reserved number becomes the predetermined number, the reserved icons that are two less than the specific number are displayed without displaying the reserved icons that are one less than the specific number, and then the predetermined number of reserved icons are displayed. This allows the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m to work together smoothly. It also reduces the discomfort felt when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the reserved number, making it possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 166 to 168, when the sub-first reserve indicator 83 or the first special chart reserve number display area 70E is displaying a specific number (e.g., four) that is three more than the predetermined number (e.g., one), if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for the variable display that causes the special chart reserve number to become the predetermined number, the predetermined number of reserved numbers will be displayed without displaying reserved numbers that are one or two less than the specific number. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, since the accurate reserved number is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly inform the player of the reserved number.

(Example 6 of when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 6 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 169 and Fig. 170. Fig. 169 is timing chart 4 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 170(a)-(h) are performance examples corresponding to (a)-(h) in timing chart 4 of Fig. 169.

First, at the timing of T0, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the display of the varying first special symbols begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the varying performance.

At this time, the first special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the four reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TI. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and first lamp pattern LZ starts to change, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparatory operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, and the number of reserved first special charts stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4." When the performance control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special chart reserved number designation command, pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special charts stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m increases from "3" to "4."

At this time, the number of reserved first special charts displayed on the sub-1st reserved indicator 83 and the 1st special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "3" to "4" in one frame of non-animation, and one reserved icon HI is additionally displayed in the 1st reserved icon display area 70B as an animation of 10 frames (displayed so that it gradually becomes larger from a very small size) (see FIG. 170(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("814"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). Also, the reserved icon HI and the icon TI are rotating (performance motion) (see FIG. 170(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to end the changing performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing pattern ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ stops in a losing pattern (off) (see FIG. 170(c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the display of the variable first special symbol begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m becomes "4" to "3", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the number of reserved first special charts displayed on the sub-1st reserved indicator 83 and the 1st special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "4" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and the four reserved icons HI displayed in the 1st reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TI. Also, the display of the varying effect pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and 1st lamp pattern LZ starts, and the effect pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparatory operation) (see FIG. 170(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the icon shift display is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect are started. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the word "ZONE" scrolls left and right is displayed, and zone BGM is output. In addition, the third reserved icon displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the performance pattern 70a has started, so the reserved icon and the icon in question are rotating (performance operation) (see FIG. 170(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("531"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swaying display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). Also, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 170(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon HI and the icon TI continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. In addition, the zone performance (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained and the look-ahead zone performance continues, and the blue icon is maintained and the icon change performance continues (see FIG. 170 (g)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the display of the variable first special symbol begins. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start commands (command to specify the number of reserved first special symbols, command to specify special symbols, command to specify a special symbol variable pattern) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "3", and no processing will be performed to start the variable performance. Therefore, the state of FIG. 170(g) will be maintained.

Then, at the timing of T9, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 170(g) will be maintained.

Next, at the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol pending number stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the variable display of the first special symbol begins. If the performance control unit 130m cannot properly receive the start commands (first special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special symbol pending number stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "3", and no processing will be performed to start the variable performance. Therefore, the state of FIG. 170(g) will be maintained.

After that, at the timing of T11, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 170(g) will be maintained.

Then, at the timing of T12, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol pending number stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the variable display of the first special symbol begins. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the start commands (first special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special symbol pending number stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "3", and no processing will be performed to start the variable performance. Therefore, the state of FIG. 170(g) will be maintained.

Next, at the timing of T13, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed. Therefore, the state of FIG. 170(g) will be maintained.

After that, at the timing of T14, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the machine enters a customer waiting state (a waiting state for playing). When the performance control unit 130m receives a customer waiting state designation command sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process is performed to set a waiting timer until the number of reserved first special symbols stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "3" to "0" and the customer waiting demo performance begins.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-reserved first indicator 83 and the number of reserved first special symbols display area 70E changes from "3" to "0" in one frame of non-animation, and the surplus reserved icons HI displayed in the first to third positions in the first reserved icon display area 70B and the icons displayed in the icon display area 70C are erased in one frame of non-animation, and the icon change effect and the look-ahead zone effect end. In addition, all the effect patterns 70a (the effect patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable effect), including the effect pattern 70a that is out of place from the stop position, are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined miss mode ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ stops in a miss mode (off) (see FIG. 170 (h)).

Note that if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m at the timings T7 to T13, but the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance commands sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of these commands, the same processing will be carried out as in the case where the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m.

Here, we have explained the case where, at the timing of T14, the performance control unit 130m receives a customer waiting state designation command when the number of first special charts reserved is "3" as stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m. However, the basic flow is the same as that described above when the customer waiting state designation command is received when the number of first special charts reserved is "4," "2," or "1."

Here, we have explained specific example 6, where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally in the normal game state, but even if the game state is a specific game state (time-saving game state, special chance game state), the basic flow is the same as that explained above.

Specifically, the first special chart reserved number, the first special chart reserved number designation command, the first special pattern, the sub-first reserved indicator 83, the first special chart reserved number display area 70E, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first start port 45 should be read as the second special chart reserved number, the second special chart reserved number designation command, the second special pattern, the sub-second reserved indicator 84, the second special chart reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second start port 47.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 169 to 170, if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives a customer waiting state designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance symbols 70a, all performance symbols 70a (performance symbols 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in a previous variable performance), including performance symbols 70a that are out of position from the predetermined stop position, are displayed (actually stopped) at the stop position. This makes it possible to inform the player that the variable performance has ended (transitioned to a customer waiting state), which makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Example 7 of when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
171 and 172, a specific example 7 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described. Fig. 171 is a timing chart 5 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 172 (a) to (h) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (h) in the timing chart 5 of Fig. 171.

The only difference between Figure 169 and Figure 171 is whether the command received at timing T14 is a customer waiting command or an opening command, so we will not explain the common parts here and will only explain the differences.

At the timing of T14, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the jackpot game (special game) begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (recognized) by the performance control unit 130m remains at "3", and processing is performed to start the opening performance of the jackpot game.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-reserved first indicator 83 and the number of reserved first special symbols display area 70E remains at "3", the performance pattern 70a, the reserved icon HI displayed in the icon display area, and the icon are erased, and the icon change performance and the look-ahead zone performance end. In addition, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("248"), the first lamp pattern LZ stops in a losing state (off), and an opening performance image is displayed (see FIG. 172 (h)).

After that, during or after the jackpot game has ended (time-saving game mode, special bonus game mode), if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives a command to specify the number of reserved first special symbols from the main control unit 110m, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-reserved first display unit 83 and the reserved first special symbol number display area 70E will be updated to the number corresponding to the command in a non-animated manner for one frame.

Note that if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m at the timings T7 to T13, but the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance commands sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of these commands, the same processing will be carried out as in the case where the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the commands (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m.

Here, we have explained the case where, at the timing of T14, the opening designation command is received when the number of first special charts reserved is "3" as stored (understood) by the performance control unit 130m, but the basic flow is the same as that explained above even if the opening designation command is received when the number of first special charts reserved is "4," "2," or "1."

Here, we have explained specific example 7, where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally in the normal game state, but even if the game state is a specific game state (time-saving game state, special chance game state), the basic flow is the same as that explained above.

Specifically, the first special chart reserved number, the first special chart reserved number designation command, the first special pattern, the sub-first reserved indicator 83, the first special chart reserved number display area 70E, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first start port 45 should be read as the second special chart reserved number, the second special chart reserved number designation command, the second special pattern, the sub-second reserved indicator 84, the second special chart reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second start port 47.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 171 to 172, if the performance control unit 130m normally receives an opening designation command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a, the opening performance image for the jackpot game is displayed without displaying (actually stopping) all performance patterns 70a (performance patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in past variable performances), including performance patterns 70a that are out of place from the predetermined stop positions, at the stop positions. Therefore, the opening performance is no longer hindered by the performance patterns, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Example 8 of when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 8 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 173 and Fig. 174. Fig. 173 is a timing chart 6 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 174 (a) to (j) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 6 of Fig. 173.

First, at the timing of T0, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1," and the display of the varying first special symbols begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1," and processing is performed to start the varying performance.

At this time, the first special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" with one frame of non-animation, and the two reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TI. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and first lamp pattern LZ starts to change, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparatory operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, when the icon shift display is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect begin. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the word "ZONE" scrolls left and right is displayed, and zone BGM is output. Also, the first reserved icon displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the performance pattern 70a has begun, so that the reserved icon and the icon in question are performing a rotating motion (performance motion) (see FIG. 174(a)).

Then, at the timing of T2, the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2." If the performance control unit 130m cannot properly receive the winning command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, no processing is performed to update the number of reserved first special symbols stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m, and the number remains at "1" (see FIG. 174 (b)).

After that, at the timing of T3, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("814"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon HI and the icon TI continue (see Figure 174 (c)).

Next, at the timing of T4, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon HI and the icon TI continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. In addition, the zone performance (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained and the look-ahead zone performance continues, and the blue icon is maintained and the icon change performance continues (see FIG. 174 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the variable display of the first special symbol begins. When the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m decreases from "1" to "1", that is, processing is performed to start the variable performance without changing the first special symbol pending number.

At this time, the first special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "1" with one frame of non-animation, and the second reserved icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed with one frame of non-animation in the first reserved icon display area 70B (displayed in normal size from the beginning). Also, all performance patterns 70a (performance patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in past variable performances), including the performance patterns 70a that are shifted from the stopping position, are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stopping position (see Figure 174 (e)).

The two necessary hold icons HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are then shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TI. Then, the display of the change in the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, while the display of the change in the performance pattern 70a begins, and the performance pattern 70a begins scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparatory operation) (see FIG. 174 (e)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) starts. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon and a change sound is output. At this time, the background image continues to scroll and the display of the effect pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon and the icon are rotating (effect action) (see FIG. 174(f)).

Next, at the timing of T7, when a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable performance (the end of the SP reach performance), the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a reach miss state ("878"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swaying display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 174 (g)).

Then, at the timing of T8, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to end the changing performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing pattern ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ stops in a losing pattern (off) (see FIG. 174 (h)).

After that, at the timing of T9, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the display of the first special symbol changes begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0", and processing is performed to start the changing performance.

At this time, the first special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" in one frame of non-animation, and one reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B shifts toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation and is displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts to change, and the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparatory operation) (see FIG. 174 (i)).

Next, at the timing of T10, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the icon change effect begins. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory for which the effect control unit 130m was unable to properly receive the winning command) changes to a blue icon and a change sound is output. At this time, the background image continues to scroll and the display of the effect pattern 70a has started to change, so the icon is rotating (effect) (see FIG. 174 (j)).

After that, if the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased when the performance pattern 70a stops being displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m is able to successfully receive the commands (award winning command, stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at the timings of T2 to T4, but the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance commands sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of these commands, the same processing will be carried out as in the case where the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the commands (award winning command, stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m.

Here, we have explained the case where the first special chart reserved number stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "1" at timing T5, but if the first special chart reserved number changes from "0" to "0", if the first special chart reserved number changes from "2" to "2", if the first special chart reserved number changes from "3" to "3", in other words, if the reserved number stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m and the reserved number stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m are the same, the basic flow will be the same as that explained above.

Here, we have explained specific example 8, where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally in the normal game state, but even if the game state is a specific game state (time-saving game state, special chance game state), the basic flow is the same as that explained above.

Specifically, the first special chart reserved number, the first special chart reserved number designation command, the first special pattern, the sub-first reserved indicator 83, the first special chart reserved number display area 70E, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first start port 45 should be read as the second special chart reserved number, the second special chart reserved number designation command, the second special pattern, the sub-second reserved indicator 84, the second special chart reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second start port 47.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 173 to 174, when a predetermined number (e.g., one) of reserved icons (first reserved information) is displayed in the reserved icon display area, if the performance control unit 130m receives a command to start the variable display in which the number of reserved special charts becomes a predetermined number, the performance control unit 130m displays a number of reserved icons that is one more than the predetermined number (e.g., two), and then shifts the display of these reserved icons to display the predetermined number of reserved icons. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. It also reduces the sense of discomfort felt when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the reserved numbers, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 173 to 174, when the sub-first reserve display 83 or the first special chart reserve number display area 70E is displaying a predetermined number (for example, 1) of reserved numbers, if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for the variable display that causes the special chart reserve number to become the predetermined number, the reserved number is displayed as the predetermined number, without displaying a reserved number that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, 2). This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, since the accurate reserved number is displayed instantly, it is possible to quickly inform the player of the reserved number.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 173 to 174, if the performance control unit 130m receives a variable display start command that causes the special chart reservation number to become "0" while the reservation icon display area is not displaying a reservation icon (first reservation information), the reservation icon display area displays a number of reservation icons that is one more than "0" (for example, one), and then the reservation icon is shifted to a state where the reservation icon is not displayed. This allows the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m to work together smoothly. It also reduces the sense of discomfort felt when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the reservation number, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 173 to 174, when the sub-first reserve indicator 83 or the first special chart reserve number display area 70E is displaying a reserve number of "0", if the performance control unit 130m receives a command at the start of the variable display that causes the special chart reserve number to become "0", the reserve number of "0" is displayed (maintained) without displaying a reserve number that is one more than "0" (for example, 1). This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, since the accurate reserve number is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly inform the player of the reserve number.

(Example 9: When the Production Control Unit Cannot Receive Commands Normally)
Specific example 9 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 175 and Fig. 176. Fig. 175 is a timing chart 7 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 176(a)-(f) are performance examples corresponding to (a)-(f) in the timing chart 7 of Fig. 175.

First, at the timing of T0, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1," and the display of the varying first special symbols begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1," and processing is performed to start the varying performance.

At this time, the first special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" with one frame of non-animation, and the two reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TI. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and first lamp pattern LZ starts to change, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparatory operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, when the icon shift display is completed, the look-ahead zone effect (normal zone effect) and the icon change effect begin. Specifically, the background image changes to the look-ahead zone background, a blue zone image in which the word "ZONE" scrolls left and right is displayed, and zone BGM is output. Also, the first reserved icon displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B changes to a blue icon, and a change sound is output. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues, and the variable display of the performance pattern 70a has begun, so that the reserved icon and the icon in question are performing a rotating motion (performance motion) (see FIG. 176(a)).

Then, at the timing of T2, the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2." If the performance control unit 130m cannot properly receive the winning command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, no processing is performed to update the number of reserved first special symbols stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m, and the number remains at "1" (see FIG. 176 (b)).

After that, at the timing of T3, the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". If the performance control unit 130m cannot properly receive the winning command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, no processing is performed to update the number of reserved first special symbols stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m, and the number remains at "1" (see FIG. 176 (b)).

Next, at the timing of T4, the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, and the number of reserved first special charts stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m increases from "3" to "4". If the performance control unit 130m cannot properly receive the winning command (first special chart reserved number designation command, pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, no processing is performed to update the number of reserved first special charts stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m, and the number remains at "1" (see FIG. 176 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("814"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swaying display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance action). Also, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 176 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (special symbol stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the process for ending the changing performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon HI and the icon TI continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display of the special pattern TZ, and the variable display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended. In addition, the zone performance (display of the look-ahead zone background, display of the blue zone image, output of the zone BGM) is maintained and the look-ahead zone performance continues, and the blue icon is maintained and the icon change performance continues (see FIG. 176 (d)).

After that, at the timing of T7, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the display of the variable first special symbol begins. If the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m becomes "1" to "3", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-reserved first indicator 83 and the number of reserved first special symbols display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" with one frame of non-animation, and the second to fourth reserved icons HI (white icons) are additionally displayed with one frame of non-animation in the first reserved icon display area 70B (displayed in normal size from the beginning). In addition, all of the performance patterns 70a (performance patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable performance), including the performance patterns 70a that are out of alignment with the stopping position, are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stopping position (see FIG. 176 (e)).

The necessary number of four reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are then shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TI. Then, the display of the changing effect pattern 70a begins while the changing display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the display pattern 70a begins scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparatory operation) (see FIG. 176 (e)).

After that, at the timing of T8, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the icon change effect (the icon change effect) starts. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C changes to a red icon and a change sound is output. At this time, the background image continues to scroll and the display of the effect pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon and the icon are rotating (effect action) (see FIG. 176(f)).

After that, if the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased when the performance pattern 70a stops being displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m is able to successfully receive the commands (award winning command, stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m at the timings of T2 to T6, but the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance commands sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of these commands, the same processing will be carried out as in the case where the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the commands (award winning command, stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m.

Here, we have explained the case where the number of reserved first special charts stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "3" at timing T7, but if the number of reserved first special charts changes from "1" to "2", if the number of reserved first special charts changes from "0" to "2", if the number of reserved first special charts changes from "0" to "1", in other words, if the number of reserved charts stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m is greater than the number of reserved charts stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m, the basic flow will be the same as that explained above.

Here, we have explained specific example 9, where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally in the normal game state, but even if the game state is a specific game state (time-saving game state, special chance game state), the basic flow is the same as that explained above.

Specifically, the first special chart reserved number, the first special chart reserved number designation command, the first special pattern, the sub-first reserved indicator 83, the first special chart reserved number display area 70E, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first start port 45 should be read as the second special chart reserved number, the second special chart reserved number designation command, the second special pattern, the sub-second reserved indicator 84, the second special chart reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second start port 47.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 175 to 176, when a predetermined number (e.g., one) of reserved icons (first reserved information) is displayed in the reserved icon display area, if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for the variable display in which the special reserved number becomes a specific number (e.g., two) that is greater than the predetermined number, the performance control unit 130m displays a number of reserved icons that is one more than the specific number (e.g., three), and then shifts the display of these reserved icons to display the specific number of reserved icons. This allows for smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. It also reduces the discomfort felt when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the reserved number, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 175 to 176, when the sub-first reserve indicator 83 or the first special chart reserve number display area 70E is displaying a predetermined number (e.g., 1) of reserved numbers, if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for the variable display that causes the reserved number of special charts to become a specific number (e.g., 2) that is greater than the predetermined number, the reserved number is displayed as the specific number, without displaying a reserved number that is one more than the specific number (e.g., 3). This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, since the accurate reserved number is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly inform the player of the reserved number.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 175 to 176, if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for the variable display in which the number of reserved special charts becomes a predetermined number (e.g., 1) while the reserved icon (first reserved information) is not displayed in the reserved icon display area, the number of reserved icons that is one more than the predetermined number (e.g., 2) is displayed, and then the reserved icons are shifted to display the predetermined number of reserved icons. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. It also reduces the sense of discomfort felt when correcting a discrepancy (discrepancy, divergence) in the number of reserved icons, making it possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 175 to 176, when the sub-first reserve indicator 83 or the first special chart reserve number display area 70E displays a reserved number of "0" and the performance control unit 130m receives a start command for the display to change so that the reserved number of special charts becomes a predetermined number (for example, 1), the reserved number is displayed as the predetermined number, without displaying a reserved number that is one more than the predetermined number (for example, 2). This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, since the accurate reserved number is displayed instantly, it is possible to quickly inform the player of the reserved number.

(Summary of the concrete examples shown in Figures 161 to 176)
As described above, according to the concrete example shown in Fig. 161 to Fig. 176, when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command during the temporary stop of the performance symbol 70a, the temporary stop period of the performance symbol 70a, the variable period of the special symbol TZ and the lamp symbol LZ, and the output period of the BGM during the variable period are extended (continued) from the normal period. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a period in which no performance is being performed, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 161 to 176, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the reserved icon and the icon in question continue during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a. This makes it possible to prevent the performance pattern 70a from becoming extremely motionless and boring during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 161 to 176, the look-ahead preview performance (icon change performance, look-ahead zone performance) continues (is executed) even during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, the look-ahead preview performance will not end, and it is possible to increase the interest of the player by avoiding inconveniences that may increase the player's dissatisfaction.

In addition, according to the specific examples shown in Figures 161 to 176, even if the look-ahead preview performance (icon change performance, look-ahead zone performance) is continued (executed) during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a, the preview mode of the look-ahead preview performance (icon type, zone performance type) does not change during the extension (continuation) of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a. Therefore, there is no abnormality in the progress of the look-ahead preview performance, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game by avoiding inconveniences that may increase the player's dissatisfaction.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 161 to 176, if the performance control unit 130m normally receives a start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a, the variable display will start after all performance patterns 70a (performance patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past variable display), including performance patterns 70a that are shifted from the predetermined stop position, are displayed at the stop position (instantly derived and displayed). Therefore, the appearance at the start of the variable display can be made better than when the variable display starts with the performance pattern 70a shifted from the stop position, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 161 to 176, if the performance control unit 130m normally receives a start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ and lamp pattern LZ are not displayed in a stopped state, but continue to be displayed in a variable manner. This eliminates the need for complicated processing to stop the special pattern TZ and lamp pattern LZ, making it possible to reduce the control load. Also, even if the performance pattern 70a is displayed at the stopped position (instantaneous derived display), the special pattern TZ and lamp pattern LZ can inform the player that a variable performance is in progress, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 161 to 176, if the performance control unit 130m successfully receives a start command during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a, the icon is erased in a shorter time (1 frame of non-animation) than the normal time (10 frames of animation when a stop command is received). This makes it less likely that a newly executed variable performance will be hindered by the erasure of the icon, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 161 to 176, if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command normally during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a during which the look-ahead preview performance (icon change performance, look-ahead zone performance) continues (is executed), the look-ahead preview performance can also be executed in the newly executed variable performance. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, the look-ahead preview performance will not end, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game by avoiding inconveniences that may increase the player's dissatisfaction.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 161 to 176, if the performance control unit 130m receives a start command normally during the extension of the temporary stop period of the performance pattern 70a during which the look-ahead preview performance (icon change performance, look-ahead zone performance) continues (is executed), it is possible to execute a performance whose content corresponds to the scenario of the look-ahead preview performance in the newly executed variable performance. Therefore, even if a command abnormality occurs in which the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, there will be no abnormality in the progress of the look-ahead preview performance, and it is possible to increase the interest of the game by avoiding inconveniences that may increase the player's dissatisfaction.

(Example 10 of when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Specific example 10 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 177 and Fig. 178. Fig. 177 is a timing chart 8 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally, and Fig. 178 (a) to (j) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 8 of Fig. 177.

First, at the timing of T0, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1," and the display of the variable first special symbol begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (command to specify the number of reserved first special symbols, command to specify special symbol, command to specify special symbol variable pattern) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m becomes "2" to "1," and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" with one frame of non-animation, and the two reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TI. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and first lamp pattern LZ starts to change, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparatory operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the shifting display of the icon is completed. At this time, the background image continues to scroll and the display of the performance pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon and the icon in question are rotating (performing).

Then, at the timing of T2, the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2." If the performance control unit 130m cannot properly receive the winning command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, no processing is performed to update the number of reserved first special symbols stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m, and the number remains at "1."

At this time, since the winning command to change the first special chart reserved number to "2" has not been received, the first special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special chart reserved number display area 70E remains at "1", and the reserved icon HI is not displayed in the second position corresponding to the first special chart reserved number "2" in the first reserved icon display area 70B (see Figure 178 (a)).

After that, at the timing of T3, the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, and the number of reserved first special charts stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special chart reserved number designation command, pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special charts stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m increases from "1" to "3".

At this time, the first special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and no reserved icon HI is displayed in the second position of the first reserved chart number "2" in the first reserved icon display area 70B that did not receive the winning command, and one reserved icon HI is additionally displayed as a 10-frame animation (displayed gradually increasing from a tiny size) in the third position corresponding to the first special chart reserved number "3" (see FIG. 178 (b)).

Next, at timing T4, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("814"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). Also, the reserved icon HI and the icon TI are rotating (performance motion) (see FIG. 178(c)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to end the changing performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ stops in a losing state (off) (see FIG. 178(d)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "3" to "2", and the display of the variable first special symbol begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m becomes "3" to "2", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-1st reserved indicator 83 and the 1st reserved number display area 70E changes from "3" to "2" with one frame of non-animation, and the second reserved icon HI corresponding to the 1st reserved number "2" in the 1st reserved icon display area 70B for which the winning command could not be received is additionally displayed as one frame of non-animation (displayed in normal size from the beginning), and the three displayed reserved icons HI are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as 20 frames of animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TI. Also, the variable display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the 1st lamp pattern LZ is started, and the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlarging/reducing operation (preparatory operation) (see FIG. 178(e)).

Then, at the timing of T7, the shifting display of the icon is completed. At this time, the background image continues to scroll and the display of the effect pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon and the icon in question are rotating (performing) (see FIG. 178(f)).

Next, at the timing of T8, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("225"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance action). In addition, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 178 (g)).

Then, at the timing of T9, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m successfully receives a stop command (special symbol stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to end the changing performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ stops in a losing state (off) (see FIG. 178 (h)).

After that, at the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the display of the variable first special symbol begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m becomes "1" from "2", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" with one frame of non-animation, and the two reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts to change, and the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparatory operation) (see FIG. 178 (i)).

Next, at the timing of T11, when the shift display of the icon is completed, the icon change effect begins. Specifically, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C (the icon corresponding to the first pending memory for which the effect control unit 130m was unable to properly receive the winning command) changes to a blue icon and a change sound is output. At this time, the background image continues to scroll and the display of the effect pattern 70a has started to change, so the icon is rotating (effect) (see FIG. 178(j)).

After that, if the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon is erased when the performance pattern 70a stops being displayed, and the icon change performance ends.

In addition, if at the timing of T2 the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the command (a command when a prize is won) sent from the main control unit 110m, but the display control unit 140 and the lamp control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance command sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of this command, the same processing will be carried out as when the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the command (a command when a prize is won) sent from the main control unit 110m.

Here, we have explained the case where, at the timing of T3, when the number of first special charts reserved by the performance control unit 130m is "1", a winning command is received that changes the number of first special charts reserved to "3". However, the basic flow is also the same as that described above when the number of first special charts reserved by the performance control unit 130m is "1" and a winning command is received that changes the number of first special charts reserved to "4", or when the number of first special charts reserved by the performance control unit 130m is "0" and a winning command is received that changes the number of first special charts reserved to any of "2", "3", or "4".

Here, we have explained specific example 10 of a case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally in a normal game state, but even if the game state is a specific game state (a time-saving game state or a special game state), the basic flow is the same as that explained above.

Specifically, the first special chart reserved number, the first special chart reserved number designation command, the first special pattern, the sub-first reserved indicator 83, the first special chart reserved number display area 70E, the first reserved icon display area 70B, the first lamp pattern LZ, and the first start port 45 should be read as the second special chart reserved number, the second special chart reserved number designation command, the second special pattern, the sub-second reserved indicator 84, the second special chart reserved number display area 70F, the second reserved icon display area 70D, the second lamp pattern LZ, and the second start port 47.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 177 to 178, when the reserved icon (first reserved information) is not displayed in the area (e.g., the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (e.g., two) of the reserved icon display area, if the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of reserved special charts becomes a specific number (e.g., three) that is one more than the predetermined number, the reserved icon is not displayed in the area (e.g., the second) corresponding to the predetermined number of the reserved icon display area, but is displayed in the area (e.g., the third) corresponding to the specific number of the reserved icon display area. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. It is also possible to prevent the player from recognizing the incorrect reserved number, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 177 to 178, when the sub-first reserve indicator 83 or the first special chart reserve number display area 70E is displaying a reserve number that is one less (e.g., one) than a predetermined number (e.g., two), if the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command that causes the special chart reserve number to become a specific number (e.g., three) that is one more than the predetermined number, the specific number of reserved numbers is displayed without displaying the predetermined number of reserved numbers. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, since the accurate reserved number is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly inform the player of the reserved number.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 177 to 178, when the reserved icon (first reserved information) is not displayed in the area (e.g., the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (e.g., two) of the reserved icon display area, if the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of reserved special figures becomes a specific number (e.g., four) that is several times more than the predetermined number, the reserved icon is not displayed in the area (e.g., the second) corresponding to the predetermined number of the reserved icon display area, but in the area (e.g., the third) corresponding to the number that is one less than the specific number, but is displayed in the area (e.g., the fourth) corresponding to the specific number of the reserved icon display area. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. It is also possible to prevent the player from recognizing the incorrect reserved number, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 177 to 178, when the sub-first reserve indicator 83 or the first special chart reserve number display area 70E is displaying a reserve number that is one less (e.g., one) than a predetermined number (e.g., two), if the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command that causes the special chart reserve number to become a specific number (e.g., four) that is several times more than the predetermined number, the specific number of reserved numbers is displayed, without displaying the reserved number that is one less than the specific number. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, since the accurate reserved number is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly inform the player of the reserved number.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 177 to FIG. 178, when the performance control unit 130m receives a start command in which the number of reserved special charts becomes a predetermined number while the reserved icons are not displayed in the area (e.g., the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (e.g., two) of the reserved icon display area and the reserved icons are displayed in the area (e.g., the third) corresponding to a specific number (e.g., three) that is one more than the predetermined number, the reserved icons are additionally displayed in the area (e.g., the second) of the reserved icon display area corresponding to the predetermined number to display the specific number of reserved icons, and then the reserved icons are shifted to display the predetermined number of reserved icons. This allows the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m to cooperate smoothly. In addition, it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the reserved number, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in FIG. 177 to FIG. 178, when the performance control unit 130m receives a start command that causes the number of reserved special figures to be one less than the specific number while displaying reserved icons in the area (e.g., the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (e.g., two) and the area corresponding to a number one more than the predetermined number (e.g., three) of the reserved icon display area without displaying reserved icons in the area (e.g., the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (e.g., two) and the area corresponding to a number one more than the predetermined number (e.g., three), the performance control unit 130m additionally displays reserved icons in the area (e.g., the second) corresponding to a predetermined number and the area corresponding to a number one more than the predetermined number (e.g., three) of the reserved icon display area to display the specific number of reserved icons, and then shifts the reserved icons to display the number of reserved icons one less than the specific number. This allows the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m to cooperate smoothly. In addition, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort when correcting the discrepancy (discrepancy, deviation) in the reserved number, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 177 to 178, for an icon corresponding to a first reserved memory for which the performance control unit 130m was unable to properly receive a winning command, the icon change performance is not executed while the icon is displayed as a reserved icon, but the icon change performance can be executed while the icon is displayed. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the icon change performance not being executed because the winning command was not properly received, thereby making the game more interesting.

(Variation 1 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modified example (modified example 1 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command) of the specific example 2 described in Fig. 163 and Fig. 164 will be described using Fig. 163 and Fig. 179. Fig. 179 (a) to (i) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of Fig. 163.

Note that Figures 164 and 179 are identical in terms of timing from T0 to T9, so we will not explain the common parts here and will only explain the differences.

At the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the display of the variable first special symbol begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m becomes "3" to "1", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the number of reserved first special charts displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the number of reserved first special charts display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and an inconsistency due to a command abnormality occurs between the number of reserved first special charts notified by the main control unit 110m and the number of reserved first special charts stored (recognized) by the performance control unit 130m (an abnormality in which the deviation is 2 or more instead of the normal deviation of 1), and the look-ahead zone performance ends.

Specifically, the pre-read zone background is switched to a background image corresponding to presentation mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are terminated, and the changing BGM is output (see Figure 179 (h)).

In addition, the excess hold icon HI displayed second in the first hold icon display area 70B is erased with one frame of non-animation, and the hold icon HI displayed third is displayed second with one frame of non-animation. All performance patterns 70a including the performance pattern 70a that is out of alignment with the stopping position (performance patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in a past variable performance) are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stopping position (see FIG. 179 (h)).

The two necessary hold icons HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are then shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TI. Also, the display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues to change, and the display of the performance pattern 70a starts to change. The performance pattern 70a then starts to scroll after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparatory operation) (see FIG. 179 (h)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the shifting display of the icon was completed, the performance pattern 70a scrolls at high speed while the background image continues to scroll. At this time, the display of the performance pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon and the icon in question are rotating (performing) (see FIG. 179(i)).

(Variation 2 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A modified example (modified example 2 when the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command) of the specific example 3 described in Fig. 163 and Fig. 165 will be described using Fig. 163 and Fig. 180. Fig. 180 (a) to (i) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (i) in the timing chart 2 of Fig. 163.

Note that Figures 165 and 180 are identical in terms of timing from T0 to T9, so we will not explain the common parts here and will only explain the differences.

At the timing of T10, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the display of the variable first special symbol begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m becomes "3" to "1", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "3" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and an inconsistency due to a command abnormality occurs between the first special chart reserved number notified by the main control unit 110m and the first special chart reserved number stored (recognized) by the performance control unit 130m (an abnormality in which the deviation is 2 or more instead of the normal deviation of 1), and the icon change performance and the look-ahead effect performance end.

Specifically, the surplus reserved icon HI (blue icon) displayed third in the first reserved icon display area 70B is erased with one frame of non-animation. In addition, all performance patterns 70a (performance patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in a past variable performance), including performance patterns 70a that are out of alignment with the stopping position, are displayed (instantly derived and displayed) at the stopping position (see FIG. 180 (h)).

The two necessary hold icons HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are then shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TI. Also, the display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues to change, and the display of the performance pattern 70a starts to change. The performance pattern 70a then starts to scroll after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparatory operation) (see FIG. 180 (h)).

After that, at the timing of T11, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the shifting display of the icon was completed, the performance pattern 70a begins to scroll at high speed. At this time, the display of the performance pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon and the icon in question are rotating (performing) (see FIG. 180(i)).

After that, if the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the look-ahead effect performance and icon change performance will not be executed even in the change performance (subject to the expectation level suggested by the look-ahead preview performance) executed in the change display of the special pattern where the number of reserved first special patterns becomes "0".

In this way, according to the modified example shown in Figures 179 to 180, if an inconsistency occurs due to a command abnormality between the number of reserved first special charts notified by the main control unit 110m and the number of reserved first special charts stored by the performance control unit 130m (an abnormality in which the deviation is 2 or more in the decreasing direction instead of the deviation of 1 in the decreasing direction that would normally be the case), the look-ahead preview performance (look-ahead zone performance, icon change performance, look-ahead effect performance) is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as the look-ahead preview performance being executed during the execution of a variable performance that is not normally the target of the look-ahead preview performance, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Variation 3 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
173 and 181, a modified example (modified example 3 in the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command) of the specific example 8 described in Fig. 173 and Fig. 174 will be described. Fig. 181 (a) to (j) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 6 of Fig. 173.

Note that Figures 174 and 181 are identical from T0 to T4 in terms of timing, so we will not explain the common parts here and will only explain the differences.

At the timing of T5, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1", and the display of the first special symbol changes begins. When the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "1", i.e., the processing is performed to start the changing performance without changing the first special symbol pending number.

At this time, the first special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "1" in one frame of non-animation, and an inconsistency due to a command abnormality occurs between the first special chart reserved number notified by the main control unit 110m and the first special chart reserved number stored in the performance control unit 130m (an abnormality in which they are the same number when normally there should be a deviation of 1 in the decreasing direction), and the icon change performance and the look-ahead zone performance end.

Specifically, the background image corresponding to the preview zone background is switched to that corresponding to the performance mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are terminated, and the BGM during the change is output. In addition, the first blue icon in the first pending icon display area 70B returns to a white icon with one frame of non-animation, and the second pending icon HI (white icon) is additionally displayed with one frame of non-animation (displayed in normal size from the beginning). In addition, all performance patterns 70a including the performance patterns 70a that are out of alignment with the stopping position (performance patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past changing performance) are displayed at the stopping position (instantly derived display) (see FIG. 181(e)).

The two necessary hold icons HI displayed in the first hold icon display area 70B are then shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TI. Then, the display of the change in the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, while the display of the change in the performance pattern 70a begins, and the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparatory operation) (see FIG. 181(e)).

Then, at the timing of T6, the shifting display of the icon is completed. At this time, the background image continues to scroll and the display of the effect pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon and the icon in question are rotating (performing) (see FIG. 181(f)).

Next, at timing T7, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a reach miss state ("878"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swinging display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance action). Also, the scrolling of the background image and the rotation motion (performance action) of the reserved icon HI and the icon TI continue (see FIG. 181 (g)).

Then, at the timing of T8, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to end the changing performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ stops in a losing state (off) (see FIG. 181 (h)).

After that, at the timing of T9, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the variable display of the first special symbol begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0" with one frame of non-animation, and one reserved icon HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B is shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the display of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ starts to change, and the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparatory operation) (see FIG. 181 (i)).

Next, at timing T10, the shifting of the icon display is completed. At this time, the background image continues to scroll and the display of the effect pattern 70a has begun to change, so the icon is rotating (performing) (see FIG. 181(j)).

After that, if the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon will be erased when the performance pattern 70a stops being displayed.

In this way, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 181, if an inconsistency occurs due to a command abnormality between the number of reserved first special charts notified by the main control unit 110m and the number of reserved first special charts stored by the performance control unit 130m (an abnormality in which they are the same number when there should normally be a difference of 1), the look-ahead preview performance (look-ahead zone performance, icon change performance, look-ahead effect performance) is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as the look-ahead preview performance being executed during the execution of a variable performance that is not normally the target of the look-ahead preview performance, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Variation 4 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Using Fig. 175 and Fig. 182, a modified example (modified example 4 when the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally) of the specific example 9 described in Fig. 175 and Fig. 176 will be described. Fig. 182 (a) to (f) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 7 of Fig. 175.

Note that Figures 176 and 182 are identical from T0 to T6 in terms of timing, so we will not explain the common parts here and will only explain the differences.

At the timing of T7, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "4" to "3", and the display of the variable first special symbol begins. If the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m becomes "1" to "3", and processing is performed to start the variable performance.

At this time, the first special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" in one frame of non-animation, and an inconsistency due to a command abnormality occurs between the first special chart reserved number notified by the main control unit 110m and the first special chart reserved number stored (recognized) by the performance control unit 130m (an abnormality in which there is a deviation of 1 or more in the upward direction, instead of a deviation of 1 in the downward direction, which is normal), and the icon change performance and the look-ahead zone performance end.

Specifically, the background image corresponding to the preview zone background is switched to that corresponding to the performance mode A, the display of the zone image and the output of the zone BGM are terminated, and the BGM during the change is output. In addition, the first blue icon in the first pending icon display area 70B returns to a white icon with one frame of non-animation, and the second to fourth pending icons HI (white icons) are additionally displayed with one frame of non-animation (displayed in normal size from the beginning). In addition, all performance patterns 70a including the performance patterns 70a that are out of alignment with the stopping position (performance patterns 70a that were scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the past changing performance) are displayed at the stopping position (instantly derived display) (see FIG. 182(e)).

The necessary number of four reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are then shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TI. Then, the display of the changing effect pattern 70a begins while the changing display of the special pattern TZ and the first lamp pattern LZ continues, and the display of the changing effect pattern 70a begins scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparatory operation) (see FIG. 182(e)).

Then, at the timing of T8, the shifting display of the icon is completed. At this time, the scrolling of the background image continues and the variable display of the performance pattern 70a has begun, so the reserved icon and the icon in question are rotating (performing) (see FIG. 182(f)).

After that, if the performance control unit 130m is in a state where it can normally receive various commands from the main control unit 110m, the icon will be erased when the performance pattern 70a stops being displayed.

In this way, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 182, if an inconsistency occurs due to a command abnormality between the number of reserved first special charts notified by the main control unit 110m and the number of reserved first special charts stored by the performance control unit 130m (an abnormality in which there is a deviation of 1 or more in the increasing direction, instead of a deviation of 1 in the decreasing direction that would normally be the case), the look-ahead preview performance (look-ahead zone performance, icon change performance, look-ahead effect performance) is terminated. This makes it possible to prevent inconveniences such as the look-ahead preview performance being executed during the execution of a variable performance that is not normally the target of the look-ahead preview performance, and to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

(Variation 5 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
Using Fig. 177 and Fig. 183, a modified example (modified example 5 in the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive a command) of the specific example 10 described in Fig. 177 and Fig. 178 will be described. Fig. 183 (a) to (j) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (j) in the timing chart 8 of Fig. 177.

Note that since the timing of T6 to T11 is the same in Figures 178 and 183, we will not explain the common parts here and will only explain the differences.

First, at the timing of T0, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "2" to "1," and the display of the varying first special symbols begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "2" to "1," and processing is performed to start the varying performance.

At this time, the first special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1" with one frame of non-animation, and the two reserved icons HI displayed in the first reserved icon display area 70B are shifted toward the icon display area 70C as a 20-frame animation, with the first one being displayed as the icon TI. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and first lamp pattern LZ starts to change, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparatory operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the shifting display of the icon is completed. At this time, the background image continues to scroll and the display of the performance pattern 70a has started to change, so the reserved icon and the icon in question are rotating (performing).

Then, at the timing of T2, the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m increases from "1" to "2." If the performance control unit 130m cannot properly receive the winning command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, no processing is performed to update the number of reserved first special symbols stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m, and the number remains at "1" (see FIG. 183(a)).

After that, at the timing of T3, the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, and the number of reserved first special charts stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m increases from "2" to "3". When the performance control unit 130m receives the winning command (first special chart reserved number designation command, pre-reading designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special charts stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m increases from "1" to "3".

At this time, the first special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special chart reserved number display area 70E changes from "1" to "3" with one frame of non-animation, and one reserved icon HI is displayed as one frame of non-animation in the second position of the first reserved icon display area 70B, and one reserved icon HI is additionally displayed as ten frames of animation (displayed gradually increasing from a very small size) in the third position (see FIG. 183 (b)).

Next, at timing T4, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("814"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). Also, the reserved icon HI and the icon TI are rotating (performance motion) (see FIG. 183 (c)).

Then, at the timing of T5, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, processing is performed to end the changing performance.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, the special pattern TZ stops in a predetermined losing state ("248"), and the first lamp pattern LZ stops in a losing state (off) (see FIG. 183(d)).

In this way, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 183, when a reserved icon (first reserved information) is not displayed in an area (e.g., the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (e.g., two) among the reserved icon display areas, if the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command that causes the number of reserved special charts to become a specific number (e.g., three) that is one more than the predetermined number, a reserved icon is additionally displayed in the area (e.g., the second) corresponding to the predetermined number among the reserved icon display areas and the area (e.g., the third) corresponding to the specific number. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. It is also possible to prevent the player from recognizing the incorrect reserved number, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 183, when the sub-first reserve display 83 or the first special chart reserve number display area 70E displays a reserve number that is one less (e.g., one) than a predetermined number (e.g., two), if the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command that causes the special chart reserve number to become a specific number (e.g., three) that is one more than the predetermined number, the specific number of reserved numbers is displayed without displaying the predetermined number of reserved numbers. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, since the accurate reserved number is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly inform the player of the reserved number.

In addition, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 183, when a reserved icon (first reserved information) is not displayed in an area (e.g., the second) corresponding to a predetermined number (e.g., two) among the reserved icon display areas, if the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command in which the number of reserved special charts becomes a specific number (e.g., four) that is several times greater than the predetermined number, a reserved icon is additionally displayed in the area (e.g., the second) corresponding to the predetermined number among the reserved icon display areas to the area (e.g., the fourth) corresponding to the specific number. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. It also makes it possible to prevent the player from recognizing the incorrect reserved number, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

In addition, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 183, when the sub-first reserve display 83 or the first special chart reserve number display area 70E displays a reserve number that is one less (e.g., one) than a predetermined number (e.g., two), if the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command that causes the special chart reserve number to become a specific number (e.g., four) that is several times more than the predetermined number, the reserved number is displayed as the specific number, without displaying the reserved number that is one less than the predetermined number. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, since the accurate reserved number is displayed immediately, it is possible to quickly inform the player of the reserved number.

In addition, according to the modified example shown in FIG. 183, for an icon corresponding to the first reserved memory for which the presentation control unit 130m was unable to properly receive a winning command, the icon change presentation is not executed while the icon is displayed as a reserved icon, but the icon change presentation can be executed while the icon is displayed. This makes it possible to avoid the inconvenience of the icon change presentation not being executed because the winning command was not properly received, thereby making the game more interesting.

(Example 9: When the Production Control Unit Cannot Receive Commands Normally)
A specific example 13 of a case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 184. The upper diagram of Fig. 184 is a timing chart 9 of a case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally in a normal game state, and Fig. 184(a) to (f) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 9 of Fig. 184.

First, at the timing of T0, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0," and the display of a missing variation of the first special symbol begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives a start command (a command to specify the number of reserved first special symbols as a start signal, a special symbol specification command, and a special symbol variation pattern specification command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0," and processing is performed to start the first variation performance.

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-1st reserved indicator 83 and the 1st reserved number display area 70E is decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode while the BGM is output during the change, and one reserved icon HI displayed in the 1st reserved icon display area 70B is shifted (decreased) as a 20-frame animation and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the display of the changing performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and 1st lamp pattern LZ begins, but the performance pattern 70a begins scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation). In addition, the icon TI is in a state of rotating (performance operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, when the player hits the right side to play an auxiliary game, or when a ball enters the second starting hole 47 (movable member 48) during an auxiliary game played during a specific game state (time-saving game state) before the normal game state is entered, the number of reserved second special symbols stored (recognized) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (a first special symbol reserved number designation command and a look-ahead designation command as a winning signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved second special symbols stored (recognized) by the performance control unit 130m increases from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special reserved number displayed on the sub-second reserved indicator 84 and the second special reserved number display area 70F is increased from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, but since the second reserved icon display area 70D is not displayed, the reserved icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased), and since a winning has occurred at the second start port 47 during normal gameplay, a winning sound based on this winning is not output (see FIG. 184(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the first variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("814"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). Also, the rotation motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 184 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command abnormality has occurred), the process of ending the first change performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the changing display of the special pattern TZ, and the changing display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended, and the output of the BGM during the change is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 184 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol miss variable display starts as the second special symbol reserved number stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variable pattern designation command as start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command abnormality occurs), the second special symbol reserved number stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "1", and the process to start the second variable performance will not be performed (see FIG. 184(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the second special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process is performed to end the first change performance that was started in response to the display of the first special symbol change.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. In addition, the performance pattern 70a in a losing mode that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ stops at the same "814" as the performance pattern 70a. Furthermore, the first lamp pattern LZ that was being displayed in a variable manner on the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed stopped in a losing mode (turned off) (see Figure 184 (e)). Note that if a continuous preview performance was being executed for the losing variable display of the first special pattern, the continuous preview performance will end at this timing.

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m are "0", so the machine transitions to a customer waiting state (a waiting state for playing). When the performance control unit 130m receives a customer waiting state designation command sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved second special symbols stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0".

At this time, the number of reserved second special symbols displayed on the sub-second reserved indicator 84 and the number of reserved second special symbols display area 70F is displayed as being decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update manner, and the player waits until a customer waiting demo performance is performed or a new display of the changing special symbols begins (see FIG. 184 (f)).

In addition, if at timing T3 or T4 the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance command sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of this command (a command abnormality has occurred), the same processing is carried out as when the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m (a command abnormality has occurred).

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at the timing of T5, and the performance control unit 130m properly receives the customer waiting state designation command sent from the main control unit 110m at the timing of T6, a process is performed to end the first variable performance that was started at this timing in response to the variable display of the first special pattern, and the number of reserved second special patterns stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m becomes from "1" to "0."

Then, while the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation, regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ stops at the same "814" as the performance pattern 70a, and the second special pattern reserved number displayed on the sub second reserved indicator 84 and the second special pattern reserved number display area 70F is displayed as a decrease from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. Note that if a continuous preview performance was being executed for the losing variable display of the first special pattern, the continuous preview performance will end at this timing.

(Example 10 of when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 10 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 185. The upper diagram of Fig. 185 is a timing chart 10 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally in a normal game state, and Fig. 185(a) to (f) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 10 of Fig. 185.

First, at the timing of T0, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0," and the display of a missing variation of the first special symbol begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives a start command (a command to specify the number of reserved first special symbols as a start signal, a special symbol specification command, and a special symbol variation pattern specification command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0," and processing is performed to start the first variation performance.

At this time, while the BGM is output during the change, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-1 reserved indicator 83 and the number of reserved first special symbols display area 70E is displayed decreasing from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode, and one reserved icon HI displayed in the 1st reserved icon display area 70B is shifted (decreased) as a 20-frame animation and displayed as the icon TI. In addition, the display of the changing performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the 1st lamp pattern LZ begins, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI is in a state of rotating (performance operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 47 due to the player hitting the right side to execute an auxiliary game, or due to ball jamming occurring in the second starting hole 47 (movable member 48) during an auxiliary game executed during a specific game state (time-saving game state) before the normal game state is entered, the number of reserved second special symbols stored (recognized) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (a second special symbol reserved number designation command, a look-ahead designation command as a winning signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved second special symbols stored (recognized) by the performance control unit 130m increases from "0" to "1".

At this time, the second special reserved number displayed on the sub-second reserved indicator 84 and the second special reserved number display area 70F is increased from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, but since the second reserved icon display area 70D is not displayed, the reserved icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased), and since a winning has occurred at the second start port 47 during normal gameplay, a winning sound based on this winning is not output (see FIG. 185(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the first variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("814"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swinging display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance motion). Also, the rotation motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 185 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command abnormality has occurred), the process of ending the first change performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the changing display of the special pattern TZ, and the changing display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended, and accordingly the output of the BGM during the change is maintained (see Figure 185 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol jackpot variation display starts as the second special symbol reserved number stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (second special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command abnormality occurs), the second special symbol reserved number stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "1", and the process to start the second variation performance will not be performed (see FIG. 185(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the second special symbol is displayed stopped in a jackpot state. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process is performed to end the first change performance that was started in response to the display of the change in the first special symbol.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. In addition, the performance pattern 70a of the losing mode that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ stops at the same "814" as the performance pattern 70a. Furthermore, the first lamp pattern LZ that was displayed in a variable manner on the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed as a stopped pattern in a losing mode (turned off), but the second lamp pattern LZ of the big win mode is not displayed as a stopped pattern on the sub-second variable display 82 (see FIG. 185(e)). Note that if a continuous preview performance was being executed for the losing variable display of the first special pattern, the continuous preview performance will end at this timing.

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the opening period of the jackpot game begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs processing to start the opening performance.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and the word "Jackpot" is displayed. The "1" second special symbol reserved number displayed on the sub-second reserved indicator 84 and second special symbol reserved number display area 70F is maintained until a new winning command (winning signal) based on a win in the second starting hole 47 is normally received, or the performance control unit 130m receives a start command (second special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command as a start signal) based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 185(f)).

In other words, even if the performance control unit 130m receives a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning entry into the first starting port 45, or a start command based on the start of the display of the first special symbol's changes (a first special symbol reserved number designation command, a special symbol designation command, and a special symbol change pattern designation command as a start signal), the second special symbol reserved number displayed on the sub second reserved indicator 84 and the second special symbol reserved number display area 70F will remain at "1".

In addition, if at timing T3 or timing T4 the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance command sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of this command (a command abnormality has occurred), the same processing will be carried out as when the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m (a command abnormality has occurred).

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at the timing of T5, and the performance control unit 130m properly receives the opening designation command sent from the main control unit 110m at the timing of T6, a process is performed to end the first variable performance that was started at this timing in response to the variable display of the first special pattern and start the opening performance.

Then, the opening image is displayed without stopping the temporarily stopped missing performance pattern 70a or the variable special pattern TZ, and without erasing the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C as a non-animated frame (effectively, all performances other than the opening performance are ended).

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 184 to 185, in the normal game state, if a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display of the second special symbol, which started after the variable display of the first special symbol has ended, is received during the execution of the first variable display, the first variable display is terminated. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the display control unit 130m. Also, since the first variable display ends at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to end the first variable display without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 184 to 185, in the normal game state, if a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot variable display of the second special symbol that started after the variable display of the first special symbol has ended is received during the execution of the first variable display that started in response to the losing variable display of the first special symbol, the first variable display (variable display of the display symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) is ended in a losing state. This makes it possible to avoid processing such as switching the display symbol from a losing state to a jackpot state, and to end the first variable display without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 184 to 185, in the normal game state, when a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot variable display of the second special symbol that started after the end of the variable display of the first special symbol is received during the variable display of the first lamp symbol LZ that started in response to the losing variable display of the first special symbol, the sub-first variable display 81 is caused to stop displaying the losing mode (light off), and the sub-second variable display 82 is not caused to stop displaying the lamp symbol LZ in the jackpot mode (light on). This makes it possible to avoid processing such as switching the lamp symbol from the losing mode (light off) to the jackpot mode, and to end the variable display of the first lamp symbol LZ without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 184 and 185, in the normal game state, when the icon (first execution information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed, if a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display of the second special symbol that started after the variable display of the first special symbol ended is received, the icon is erased. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, since the icon is erased at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 184 to 185, in the normal game state, when a command to stop the display of the first special symbol (stop signal) is received while the icon (first execution information) corresponding to the display of the first special symbol is being displayed, the icon is erased in the same presentation mode when a command to stop the display of the second special symbol (stop signal) is received while the icon (first execution information) corresponding to the display of the first special symbol is being displayed. This makes it possible to erase the icon naturally without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 184 to 185, when the second special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-second reserved indicator 84 and the second special chart reserved number display area 70F is not "0" in the normal game state, if a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the special chart reserved number is "0" is received, the second special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-second reserved indicator 84 and the second special chart reserved number display area 70F is reduced to "0". This eliminates the player's doubt that the variable performance is not being executed even though the second special chart reserved number is not "0".

In addition, in the normal game mode, if a stop command (stop signal) for the losing variation display of the second special symbol that started after the end of the variation display of the first special symbol is received during the execution of the first variation display that started in response to the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol, the first variation display (the variation display of the performance symbol 70a, the variation display of the special symbol TZ) may be ended in the jackpot mode.

(Example 11 of when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 11 of a case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 186. The upper diagram of Fig. 186 is a timing chart 11 of a case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally in a normal game state, and Fig. 186(a) to (f) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 11 of Fig. 186.

First, at the timing of T0, the specific game state (time-saving game state) changes to the normal game state, and the second special symbol miss variation display starts as the number of reserved second special symbols stored in the main control unit 110m during the specific game state decreases from "1" to "0". When the performance control unit 130m receives a start command (a second special symbol reserved number designation command, a special symbol designation command, and a special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved second special symbols stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and processing is performed to start the second variation performance.

At this time, the second special reserved number displayed on the sub second reserved indicator 84 and the second special reserved number display area 70F is displayed decreasing from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode while the changing BGM is output. Also, since the second reserved icon display area 70D is not displayed, the reserved icon is not shifted (decreased) from the second reserved icon display area 70D, and the icon TI is displayed as a 10-frame animation in the icon display area 70C. Also, the display of the changing performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and second lamp pattern LZ starts, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI is in a state of rotating operation (performance operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1." When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (a first special symbol reserved number designation command, a look-ahead designation command as a winning signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m increases from "0" to "1."

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-reserved first indicator 83 and the number of reserved first special symbols display area 70E is increased from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, the reserved icon HI is additionally displayed (increased) in the first display section 70B1 of the first reserved icon display area 70B in a normal addition mode, and a winning sound based on this winning is output as it is a winning at the first start hole 45 during normal gameplay (see FIG. 186(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("814"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). Also, the rotation motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 186 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command abnormality has occurred), the process of ending the second variation performance will not be performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the changing display of the special pattern TZ, and the changing display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended, and the output of the BGM during the change is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 186 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the missing variable display of the first special symbol begins. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command abnormality has occurred), the first special symbol pending number stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "1", and the process to start the first variable performance will not be performed (see FIG. 186(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process is performed to end the second change performance that was started in response to the change display of the second special symbol.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. In addition, the performance pattern 70a in a losing mode that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ stops at the same "814" as the performance pattern 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was displayed in a variable manner on the sub-second variable display 82 is displayed as a stopped pattern in a losing mode (turned off) (see Figure 186 (e)). Note that if a continuous preview performance was being executed for the losing variable display of the second special pattern, the continuous preview performance will end at this timing.

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m are "0", so the machine transitions to a customer waiting state (a waiting state for playing). When the performance control unit 130m receives a customer waiting state designation command sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-reserved first indicator 83 and the number of reserved first special symbols display area 70E is displayed as being decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update manner, and the player waits until a customer waiting demo performance is executed or a new display of changing special symbols begins (see FIG. 186 (f)).

In addition, if at timing T3 or T4 the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance command sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of this command (a command abnormality has occurred), the same processing is carried out as when the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m (a command abnormality has occurred).

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at the timing of T5, and the performance control unit 130m properly receives the customer waiting state designation command sent from the main control unit 110m at the timing of T6, a process is performed to end the second variable performance that was started at this timing in response to the variable display of the second special pattern, and the number of reserved first special patterns stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m becomes from "1" to "0."

Then, while the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation, regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ stops at the same "814" as the performance pattern 70a, and the first special pattern reserved number displayed on the sub first reserved indicator 83 and the first special pattern reserved number display area 70E is displayed as a decrease from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. Note that if a continuous preview performance was being executed for the first special pattern's losing variable display, the continuous preview performance will end at this timing.

(Specific example 12 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 12 of a case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 187. The upper diagram of Fig. 187 is a timing chart 12 of a case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally in a normal game state, and Fig. 187(a) to (f) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 12 of Fig. 187.

First, at the timing of T0, the game changes from the specific game state (time-saving game state) to the normal game state, and the second special symbol miss variation display starts as the number of reserved second special symbols stored in the main control unit 110m during the specific game state decreases from "1" to "0". When the performance control unit 130m receives a start command (a second special symbol reserved number designation command, a special symbol designation command, and a special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved second special symbols stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and processing is performed to start the second variation performance.

At this time, the second special reserved number displayed on the sub second reserved indicator 84 and the second special reserved number display area 70F is displayed decreasing from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode while the changing BGM is output. Also, since the second reserved icon display area 70D is not displayed, the reserved icon is not shifted (decreased) from the second reserved icon display area 70D, and the icon TI is displayed as a 10-frame animation in the icon display area 70C. Also, the display of the changing performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and second lamp pattern LZ starts, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI is in a state of rotating operation (performance operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the game ball enters the first starting hole 45, and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1." When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (a first special symbol reserved number designation command, a look-ahead designation command as a winning signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m increases from "0" to "1."

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-reserved first indicator 83 and the number of reserved first special symbols display area 70E is increased from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, the reserved icon HI is additionally displayed (increased) in the first display section 70B1 of the first reserved icon display area 70B in a normal addition mode, and a winning sound based on this winning is output as it is a winning at the first start hole 45 during normal gameplay (see FIG. 187(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the second variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("814"). At this time, the performance pattern 70a slightly swings (swings) up and down above the predetermined stopping position, and the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swinging motion (performance motion). Also, the rotation motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 187(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the second special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command abnormality has occurred), the process of ending the second change performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the changing display of the special pattern TZ, and the changing display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended, and accordingly the output of the BGM during the change is maintained (see Figure 187 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol jackpot variation display starts as the first special symbol reserved number stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command abnormality occurs), the first special symbol reserved number stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "1", and the process to start the first variation performance will not be performed (see FIG. 187(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a jackpot state. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process is performed to end the second change performance that was started in response to the change display of the second special symbol.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. In addition, the performance pattern 70a of the losing mode that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ stops at the same "814" as the performance pattern 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was displayed in a variable manner on the sub-second variable display 82 is displayed as a stopped pattern in a losing mode (turned off), but the first lamp pattern LZ of the big win mode is not displayed as a stopped pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 (see FIG. 187(e)). Note that if a continuous preview performance was being executed for the losing variable display of the second special pattern, the continuous preview performance will end at this timing.

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the opening period of the jackpot game begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs processing to start the opening performance.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and the word "Jackpot" is displayed. The "1" for the first special symbol reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E is maintained until a new winning command (winning signal) based on a win in the first starting hole 45 is normally received, or the performance control unit 130m receives a start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command as a start signal) based on the start of the display of the first special symbol changes (see FIG. 187(f)).

In other words, even if the performance control unit 130m receives a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning entry into the second starting port 47, or a start command based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (a second special symbol reserved number designation command, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol variable pattern designation command as a start signal), the first special symbol reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E will remain at "1".

In addition, if at timing T3 or timing T4 the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance command sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of this command (a command abnormality has occurred), the same processing will be carried out as when the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m (a command abnormality has occurred).

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at the timing of T5, and the performance control unit 130m properly receives the opening designation command sent from the main control unit 110m at the timing of T6, a process is performed to end the second variable performance that was started in response to the variable display of the second special pattern at this timing and start the opening performance.

Then, the opening image is displayed without stopping the temporarily stopped missing performance pattern 70a or the variable special pattern TZ, and without erasing the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C as a non-animated frame (effectively, all performances other than the opening performance are ended).

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 186 to 187, in the normal game state, if a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display of the first special symbol, which started after the variable display of the second special symbol has ended, is received during the execution of the second variable display, the second variable display is terminated. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the display control unit 130m. Also, since the second variable display ends upon receipt of the stop command, it is possible to end the second variable display without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 186 to 187, in the normal game state, during the execution of the second variable presentation that was started in response to the losing variable presentation of the second special symbol, if a stop command (stop signal) is received for the big win variable presentation of the first special symbol that was started after the variable presentation of the second special symbol has ended, the second variable presentation (variable presentation of presentation symbol 70a, variable presentation of special symbol TZ) is ended in a losing state. This makes it possible to avoid processing such as switching the presentation symbol from a losing state to a big win state, and to end the second variable presentation without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 186 to 187, in the normal game state, when a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot variable display of the first special symbol that started after the end of the variable display of the second special symbol is received during the variable display of the second lamp symbol LZ that started in response to the losing variable display of the second special symbol, the sub-second variable display 82 is caused to stop displaying the losing mode (light off), but the sub-first variable display 81 is not caused to stop displaying the lamp symbol LZ in the jackpot mode (light on). This makes it possible to avoid processing such as switching the lamp symbol from the losing mode (light off) to the jackpot mode, and to end the variable display of the second lamp symbol LZ without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 186 to 187, in the normal game state, when the icon (second execution information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed, if a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display of the first special symbol that started after the variable display of the second special symbol ended is received, the icon is erased. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, since the icon is erased at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 186 to 187, in the normal game state, when a command to stop the display of the second special symbol (stop signal) is received while the icon (second execution information) corresponding to the display of the second special symbol is being displayed, the icon is erased in the same presentation mode when a command to stop the display of the first special symbol (stop signal) is received while the icon (second execution information) corresponding to the display of the second special symbol is being displayed. This makes it possible to erase the icon naturally without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 186 to 187, when in normal game mode the first special reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special reserved number display area 70E is not "0", if a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the special reserved number is "0" is received, the first special reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special reserved number display area 70E is reduced to "0". This prevents the player from having doubts that the variable performance is not being executed even though the first special reserved number is not "0".

In addition, in the normal game mode, if a stop command (stop signal) for the losing variation display of the first special pattern that started after the variation display of the second special pattern has ended is received during the execution of the second variation display that started in response to the jackpot variation display of the second special pattern, the second variation display (the variation display of the performance pattern 70a, the variation display of the special pattern TZ) may be ended in the jackpot mode.

(Specific example 13 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 13 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 188. The upper diagram of Fig. 188 is a timing chart 13 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally in a specific game state, and Fig. 188(a) to (f) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 13 of Fig. 188.

First, at the timing of T0, the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0" due to reasons such as the player hitting the left side and the game ball entering the first starting hole 45, or the game ball entering the first starting hole 45 during the normal game state before the specific game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state) is entered, and the display of the missing variation of the first special symbol begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and the processing to start the first variation performance is performed.

At this time, the BGM is output during the change, and the first special reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special reserved number display area 70E is displayed decreasing from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. Also, since the first reserved icon display area 70B is not displayed, the reserved icon is not shifted (decreased) from the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the icon TI is displayed as a 10-frame animation in the icon display area 70C. Also, the display of the change of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ begins, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI is in a state of rotating (performance operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the game ball enters the second starting hole 47, and the number of reserved second special symbols stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1." When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (a command to designate the number of reserved second special symbols as a winning signal, a look-ahead designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved second special symbols stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m increases from "0" to "1."

At this time, the second special reserved number displayed on the sub-second reserved indicator 84 and the second special reserved number display area 70F is increased from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, the reserved icon HI is additionally displayed (increased) in the first display section 70D1 of the second reserved icon display area 70D, and a winning sound based on this winning is output as a winning at the second start hole 47 during the specific game state (see FIG. 188(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("814"). At this time, in addition to the performance pattern 70a slightly swaying (swinging display) to move up and down the predetermined stopping position, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that make up the performance pattern 70a perform a swaying motion (performance motion). Also, the rotation motion of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 188 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command abnormality has occurred), the process of ending the first change performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the changing display of the special pattern TZ, and the changing display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended, and the output of the BGM during the change is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 188 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol miss variation display starts as the number of reserved second special symbols stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (second special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command abnormality occurs), the number of reserved second special symbols stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "1", and the process to start the second variation performance will not be performed (see FIG. 188(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the second special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process is performed to end the first change performance that was started in response to the display of the first special symbol change.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. Also, the performance pattern 70a in a losing mode that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ stops at the same "814" as the performance pattern 70a. Furthermore, the first lamp pattern LZ that was displayed in a variable manner on the sub-first variable display 81 is displayed as a stopped state (turned off) in a losing mode (see Figure 188 (e)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m are "0", so the machine transitions to a customer waiting state (a waiting state for playing). When the performance control unit 130m receives a customer waiting state designation command sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved second special symbols stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0".

At this time, the number of reserved second special symbols displayed on the sub-second reserved indicator 84 and the number of reserved second special symbols display area 70F is displayed as being decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update manner, and the player waits until a customer waiting demo performance is performed or a new display of changing special symbols begins (see FIG. 188 (f)).

In addition, if at timing T3 or T4 the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance command sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of this command (a command abnormality has occurred), the same processing is carried out as when the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m (a command abnormality has occurred).

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at the timing of T5, and the performance control unit 130m properly receives the customer waiting state designation command sent from the main control unit 110m at the timing of T6, a process is performed to end the variable performance that was started at this timing in response to the variable display of the first special pattern, and the number of reserved second special patterns stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m becomes from "1" to "0."

Then, while the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation. In addition, the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a stops permanently at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ stops permanently at the same "814" as the performance pattern 70a, and the second special pattern reservation number displayed on the sub second reservation indicator 84 and the second special pattern reservation number display area 70F is decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode.

(Specific example 14 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 14 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 189. The upper diagram of Fig. 189 is a timing chart 14 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally in a specific game state, and Fig. 189(a) to (f) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 14 of Fig. 189.

First, at the timing of T0, the number of reserved first special symbols stored in the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0" due to reasons such as the player hitting the left side and the game ball entering the first starting hole 45, or the game ball entering the first starting hole 45 during the normal game state before the specific game state (time-saving game state, probability-changing game state) is entered, and the display of the missing variation of the first special symbol begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (grasped) in the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0" and processing is performed to start the first variation performance.

At this time, the BGM is output during the change, and the first special reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special reserved number display area 70E is displayed decreasing from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. Also, since the first reserved icon display area 70B is not displayed, the reserved icon is not shifted (decreased) from the first reserved icon display area 70B, and the icon TI is displayed as a 10-frame animation in the icon display area 70C. Also, the display of the change of the performance pattern 70a, the special pattern TZ, and the first lamp pattern LZ is started, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI is in a state of rotating operation (performance operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the game ball enters the second starting hole 47, and the number of reserved second special symbols stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1." When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (a command to designate the number of reserved second special symbols as a winning signal, a look-ahead designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved second special symbols stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m increases from "0" to "1."

At this time, the second special reserved number displayed on the sub-second reserved indicator 84 and the second special reserved number display area 70F is increased from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, the reserved icon HI is additionally displayed (increased) in the first display section 70D1 of the second reserved icon display area 70D in a normal addition mode, and a winning sound based on this winning is output as it is a winning at the second start hole 47 during the specific game state (see FIG. 189(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("814"). At this time, the performance patterns 70a slightly swing (swing display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position. Also, the rotation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 189(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command abnormality has occurred), the process of ending the first change performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the changing display of the special pattern TZ, and the changing display of the first lamp pattern LZ are extended, and accordingly the output of the BGM during the change is maintained (see Figure 189 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol jackpot variation display starts as the second special symbol reserved number stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (second special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command abnormality occurs), the second special symbol reserved number stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "1", and the process to start the second variation performance will not be performed (see FIG. 189(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the second special symbol is displayed stopped in a jackpot state. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process is performed to end the first change performance that was started in response to the display of the change in the first special symbol.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. In addition, the performance pattern 70a of the losing mode that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ stops at the same "814" as the performance pattern 70a. Furthermore, the first lamp pattern LZ that was displayed in a variable manner on the first sub-variable display 81 is displayed as stopped in a losing mode (turned off), but the second lamp pattern LZ of the big win mode is not displayed as stopped on the second sub-variable display 82 (see FIG. 189 (e)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the opening period of the jackpot game begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs processing to start the opening performance.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and the word "Jackpot" is displayed. The "1" second special symbol reserved number displayed on the sub-second reserved indicator 84 and second special symbol reserved number display area 70F is maintained until a new winning command (winning signal) based on a win in the second starting hole 47 is normally received, or the performance control unit 130m receives a start command (second special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command as a start signal) based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (see FIG. 189(f)).

In other words, even if the performance control unit 130m receives a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning entry into the first starting port 45, or a start command based on the start of the display of the first special symbol's changes (a first special symbol reserved number designation command, a special symbol designation command, and a special symbol change pattern designation command as a start signal), the second special symbol reserved number displayed on the sub second reserved indicator 84 and the second special symbol reserved number display area 70F will remain at "1".

In addition, if at timing T3 or T4 the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance command sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of this command (a command abnormality has occurred), the same processing is carried out as when the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m (a command abnormality has occurred).

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at the timing of T5, and the performance control unit 130m properly receives the opening designation command sent from the main control unit 110m at the timing of T6, a process is performed to end the variable performance that was started at this timing in response to the variable display of the first special pattern and to start the opening performance.

Then, the opening image is displayed without stopping the temporarily stopped missing performance pattern 70a or the variable special pattern TZ, and without erasing the icon TI (normal icon, special icon) displayed in the icon display area 70C as a non-animated frame (effectively, all performances other than the opening performance are terminated).

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 188 to 189, in a specific game state, if a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display of the second special symbol, which started after the variable display of the first special symbol has ended, is received during the execution of the first variable display, the first variable display is terminated. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the display control unit 130m. Also, since the first variable display ends upon receipt of the stop command, it is possible to end the first variable display without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 188 to 189, in a specific game state, if a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot change display of the second special symbol that started after the end of the change display of the first special symbol is received during the execution of the first change display that started in response to the loss change display of the first special symbol, the first change display (the change display of the display pattern 70a, the change display of the special symbol TZ) is ended in a loss mode. This makes it possible to avoid processing such as switching the display pattern from a loss mode to a jackpot mode, and to end the first change display without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 188 to 189, in a specific game state, if a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot variable display of the second special symbol that started after the end of the variable display of the first special symbol is received during the variable display of the first lamp symbol LZ that started in response to the losing variable display of the first special symbol, the lamp symbol LZ in the jackpot state (lit) is not stopped and displayed on either the sub-first variable display 81 or the sub-second variable display 82. This makes it possible to avoid processing such as switching the lamp symbol from the losing state (lighted out) to the jackpot state, and to end the variable display of the first lamp symbol LZ without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 188 to 189, in a specific game state, when the icon (first execution information) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is displayed, if a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display of the second special symbol that started after the variable display of the first special symbol ended is received, the icon is erased. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, since the icon is erased at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 188 to 189, in a specific game state, when a command to stop the display of the first special symbol (stop signal) is received while the icon (first execution information) corresponding to the display of the first special symbol is being displayed, the icon is erased in the same presentation mode when a command to stop the display of the second special symbol (stop signal) is received while the icon (first execution information) corresponding to the display of the first special symbol is being displayed. This makes it possible to erase the icon naturally without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 188 to 189, in a specific game state, when the second special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-second reserved indicator 84 and the second special chart reserved number display area 70F is not "0", if a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the special chart reserved number is "0" is received, the second special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-second reserved indicator 84 and the second special chart reserved number display area 70F is reduced to "0". This eliminates the player's doubt that the variable performance is not being executed even though the second special chart reserved number is not "0".

In addition, in a specific game state, if a stop command (stop signal) for the losing variation display of the second special pattern that started after the end of the variation display of the first special pattern is received during the execution of the first variation display that started in response to the jackpot variation display of the first special pattern, the first variation display (the variation display of the performance pattern 70a, the variation display of the special pattern TZ) may be ended in a jackpot state.

(Specific example 15 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 19 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 190. The upper diagram of Fig. 190 is a timing chart 15 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally in a specific game state, and Fig. 190(a) to (f) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 15 of Fig. 190.

First, at the timing of T0, the number of reserved second special symbols stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0," and the display of a missing variation of the second special symbol begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives a start command (a second special symbol reserved number designation command, a special symbol designation command, and a special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved second special symbols stored (grasped) by the performance control unit 130m becomes from "1" to "0," and processing is performed to start the second variation performance.

At this time, the BGM is output during the change, and the second special reserved number displayed on the sub second reserved indicator 84 and the second special reserved number display area 70F is displayed decreasing from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. Also, one reserved icon HI displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D is shifted (decreased) as a 20-frame animation and displayed as the icon TI. Also, the display of the changing performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and second lamp pattern LZ begins, but the performance pattern 70a begins scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation). Also, the icon TI is in a state of rotating (performance operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the game ball enters the first starting hole 45 due to the player hitting it left, etc., and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (kept) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (a first special symbol reserved number designation command, a look-ahead designation command as a winning signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (kept) by the performance control unit 130m increases from "0" to "1".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-reserved first indicator 83 and the number of reserved first special symbols display area 70E is increased from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, but since the first reserved icon display area 70B is not displayed, the reserved icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased), and since a prize has been won at the first starting hole 45 during a specific game state, a winning sound based on this winning is not output (see FIG. 190(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("814"). At this time, the performance patterns 70a slightly swing (swing display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position. Also, the rotation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 190(b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the second special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command abnormality has occurred), the process of ending the first change performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the changing display of the special pattern TZ, and the changing display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended, and the output of the BGM during the change is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 190(c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol pending number stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0", and the missing variation display of the first special symbol begins. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol pending number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command abnormality has occurred), the first special symbol pending number stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "1", and the process to start the first variation performance will not be performed (see FIG. 190(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process is performed to end the second change performance that was started in response to the change display of the second special symbol.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation. Also, the temporarily stopped performance pattern 70a in a losing mode stops at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ stops at the same "814" as the performance pattern 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was being displayed in a variable manner on the sub-second variable display 82 stops (goes out) in a losing mode (see FIG. 190(e)).

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the number of reserved first special symbols and the number of reserved second special symbols stored (knowledged) by the main control unit 110m are "0", so the machine transitions to a customer waiting state (a waiting state for playing). When the performance control unit 130m receives a customer waiting state designation command sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m changes from "1" to "0".

At this time, the number of reserved second special symbols displayed on the sub-second reserved indicator 84 and the number of reserved second special symbols display area 70F is displayed as being decreased from "1" to "0" in a specific update manner, and the player waits until a customer waiting demo performance is performed or a new display of a changing special symbol begins (see FIG. 190(f)).

In addition, if at timing T3 or T4 the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance command sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of this command (a command abnormality has occurred), the same processing is carried out as when the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m (a command abnormality has occurred).

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at the timing of T5, and the performance control unit 130m properly receives the customer waiting state designation command sent from the main control unit 110m at the timing of T6, a process is performed to end the variable performance that was started at this timing in response to the variable display of the second special pattern, and the number of reserved first special patterns stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m becomes from "1" to "0."

Then, while the background image continues to scroll, the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as one frame of non-animation, regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. In addition, the performance pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ stops at the same "814" as the performance pattern 70a, and the first special pattern reserved number displayed on the sub first reserved indicator 83 and the first special pattern reserved number display area 70E is displayed as a decrease from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode. Note that if a continuous preview performance was being executed for the missing variable display of the second special pattern, the continuous preview performance will end at this timing.

(Specific example 16 when the production control unit cannot receive commands normally)
A specific example 20 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally will be described with reference to Fig. 191. The upper diagram of Fig. 191 is a timing chart 16 of the case where the performance control unit 130m cannot receive a command normally in a specific game state, and Fig. 191(a) to (f) are performance examples corresponding to (a) to (f) in the timing chart 16 of Fig. 191.

First, at the timing of T0, the number of reserved second special symbols stored (grasped) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0," and the display of a missing variation of the second special symbol begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives a start command (a second special symbol reserved number designation command, a special symbol designation command, and a special symbol variation pattern designation command as a start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved second special symbols stored (grasped) by the performance control unit 130m becomes from "1" to "0," and processing is performed to start the second variation performance.

At this time, the second special reserved number displayed on the sub second reserved indicator 84 and the second special reserved number display area 70F is displayed decreasing from "1" to "0" in a specific update mode while the changing BGM is output. Also, the reserved icon HI displayed in the second reserved icon display area 70D is displayed as the icon TI in the icon display area 70C by shifting (decreasing) as a 20-frame animation. Also, the display of the performance pattern 70a, special pattern TZ, and first lamp pattern LZ starts to change, but the performance pattern 70a starts scrolling after performing an enlargement/reduction operation (preparation operation), and the icon TI is in a state of rotating (performance operation).

Next, at the timing of T1, the game ball enters the first starting hole 45 due to the player hitting it left, etc., and the number of reserved first special symbols stored (kept) by the main control unit 110m increases from "0" to "1". When the performance control unit 130m receives a winning command (a first special symbol reserved number designation command, a look-ahead designation command as a winning signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the number of reserved first special symbols stored (kept) by the performance control unit 130m increases from "0" to "1".

At this time, the number of reserved first special symbols displayed on the sub-reserved first indicator 83 and the number of reserved first special symbols display area 70E is increased from "0" to "1" in a specific update mode, but since the first reserved icon display area 70B is not displayed, the reserved icon HI is not additionally displayed (increased), and since a prize has been won at the first starting hole 45 during a specific game state, a winning sound based on this winning is not output (see FIG. 191(a)).

After that, at the timing of T2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, the left, center, and right performance patterns 70a temporarily stop in a losing state ("814"). At this time, the performance patterns 70a slightly swing (swing display) up and down above the predetermined stopping position. Also, the rotation of the icon TI continues (see FIG. 191 (b)).

Then, at the timing of T3, when the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, the second special symbol is displayed stopped in a losing state. If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the stop command (special symbol stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command abnormality has occurred), the process of ending the second variation performance is not performed.

At this time, while the scrolling of the background image and the rotation of the icon TI continue, the period of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, the changing display of the special pattern TZ, and the changing display of the second lamp pattern LZ are extended, and the output of the BGM during the change is maintained accordingly (see FIG. 191 (c)).

After that, at the timing of T4, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the first special symbol jackpot variation display starts as the first special symbol reserved number stored (grasp) by the main control unit 110m decreases from "1" to "0". If the performance control unit 130m cannot normally receive the start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol variation pattern designation command as start signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing (a command abnormality occurs), the first special symbol reserved number stored (grasp) by the performance control unit 130m will remain at "1" and the process to start the variation performance will not be performed (see FIG. 191(d)).

After that, at the timing of T5, when the time for the special symbol to change has elapsed, the first special symbol is displayed stopped in a jackpot state. When the performance control unit 130m receives a stop command (special symbol stop command as a stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, a process is performed to end the second change performance that was started in response to the change display of the second special symbol.

At this time, the background image continues to scroll, but the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased as a 10-frame animation regardless of whether it is a normal icon or a special icon. In addition, the performance pattern 70a of the losing mode that was temporarily stopped stops at the stop position, and the special pattern TZ stops at the same "814" as the performance pattern 70a. Furthermore, the second lamp pattern LZ that was displayed in a variable manner on the sub-second variable display 82 is displayed as a stopped pattern in a losing mode (turned off), but the first lamp pattern LZ of the big win mode is not displayed as a stopped pattern on the sub-first variable display 81 (see FIG. 191 (e)). Note that if a continuous preview performance was being executed for the losing variable display of the second special pattern, the continuous preview performance will end at this timing.

After that, at the timing of T6, when the stop time of the special symbol has elapsed, the opening period of the jackpot game begins. When the performance control unit 130m receives the opening designation command sent from the main control unit 110m at this timing, the performance control unit 130m performs processing to start the opening performance.

At this time, an opening image consisting of an opening background and the word "Jackpot" is displayed. The "1" for the first special symbol reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E is maintained until a new winning command (winning signal) based on a win in the first starting hole 45 is normally received, or the performance control unit 130m receives a start command (first special symbol reserved number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command as a start signal) based on the start of the display of the first special symbol changes (see FIG. 191(f)).

In other words, even if the performance control unit 130m receives a new winning command (winning signal) based on a winning entry into the second starting port 47, or a start command based on the start of the variable display of the second special symbol (a second special symbol reserved number designation command, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol variable pattern designation command as a start signal), the first special symbol reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E will remain at "1".

In addition, if at timing T3 or T4 the performance control unit 130m successfully receives the command (stop command) sent from the main control unit 110m, but the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150 are unable to successfully receive the performance command sent from the performance control unit 130m based on the reception of this command (a command abnormality has occurred), the same processing is carried out as when the performance control unit 130m is unable to successfully receive the command (stop command, start command) sent from the main control unit 110m (a command abnormality has occurred).

In addition, if the performance control unit 130m is unable to properly receive the stop command (stop signal) sent from the main control unit 110m at the timing of T5, and the performance control unit 130m properly receives the opening designation command sent from the main control unit 110m at the timing of T6, a process is performed to end the second variable performance that was started in response to the variable display of the second special pattern at this timing and start the opening performance.

Then, the opening image is displayed without stopping the temporarily stopped missing performance pattern 70a or the variable special pattern TZ, and without erasing the icon TI displayed in the icon display area 70C as a non-animated frame (effectively, all performances other than the opening performance are terminated).

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 190 to 191, in a specific game state, if a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display of the first special symbol, which started after the variable display of the second special symbol has ended, is received during the execution of the second variable display, the second variable display is terminated. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the display control unit 130m. Also, since the second variable display ends at the timing when the stop command is received, it is possible to end the second variable display without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 190 to 191, in a specific game state, if a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot variable display of the first special symbol that started after the variable display of the second special symbol has ended is received during the execution of the second variable display that started in response to the losing variable display of the second special symbol, the second variable display (variable display of the display symbol 70a, variable display of the special symbol TZ) is ended in a losing state. This makes it possible to avoid processing such as switching the display symbol from a losing state to a jackpot state, and to end the second variable display without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 190 to 191, in a specific game state, if a stop command (stop signal) for the jackpot variable display of the first special symbol that started after the variable display of the second special symbol has ended is received during the variable display of the second lamp symbol LZ that started in response to the losing variable display of the first special symbol, neither the sub-first variable display 81 nor the sub-second variable display 82 will stop displaying the lamp symbol LZ in the jackpot state (lit). This makes it possible to avoid processing such as switching the lamp symbol from the losing state (lighted out) to the jackpot state, and to end the variable display of the second lamp symbol LZ without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 190 to 191, in a specific game state, when the icon (second execution information) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed, if a stop command (stop signal) for the variable display of the first special symbol that started after the variable display of the second special symbol ended is received, the icon is erased. This allows smooth cooperation between the main control unit 110m and the performance control unit 130m. Also, since the icon is erased by receiving the stop command, it is possible to erase the icon without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 190 to 191, in a specific game state, when a command to stop the display of the second special symbol (stop signal) is received while the icon (second execution information) corresponding to the display of the second special symbol is being displayed, the icon is erased in the same presentation mode when a command to stop the display of the first special symbol (stop signal) is received while the icon (second execution information) corresponding to the display of the second special symbol is being displayed. This makes it possible to erase the icon naturally without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 190 to 191, in a specific game state, when the first special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special chart reserved number display area 70E is not "0", if a customer waiting state designation command indicating that the special chart reserved number is "0" is received, the first special chart reserved number displayed on the sub-first reserved indicator 83 and the first special chart reserved number display area 70E is reduced to "0". This eliminates the player's doubt that the variable performance is not being executed even though the first special chart reserved number is not "0".

In addition, in a specific game state, if a stop command (stop signal) for the losing variation display of the first special pattern that started after the end of the variation display of the second special pattern is received during the execution of the second variation display that started in response to the jackpot variation display of the second special pattern, the second variation display (the variation display of the performance pattern 70a, the variation display of the special pattern TZ) may be ended in a jackpot state.

Second Embodiment
The second embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. The second embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a performance lever device 23 is provided in addition to the performance button 17 as an operation means that can be operated by the player.

First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be described using FIG. 192. FIG. 192 is an example of a front view of the gaming machine 1 in the second embodiment. Note that a description of the same parts as in the first embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 192, a performance lever device 23 that functions as an input device is provided on the central bottom side of the upper tray 11, opposite the performance button device 16.
The effect lever device 23 is located on the central bottom side of the upper tray 11, forming the front and back of the effect button device 16, and is equipped with a effect lever 24 that the player can operate by pulling it towards himself, a effect lever detection switch (not shown) that detects operation of the effect lever 24, and a lever vibration motor (not shown) for vibrating the effect lever 24, and by operating the effect lever 24, the player can input specified information into the gaming machine 1.

The effect button device 16 and the effect lever device 23 are provided on the upper tray 11, so when the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect lever 24 via the upper tray 11, which acts as a transmission member. On the other hand, when the lever vibration motor that vibrates the effect lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect button 17 via the upper tray 11. In other words, when a player is operating one operation part with his/her hand and a vibration effect that vibrates the other operation part (a vibration effect with/without an effective period of the operation part related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a dialogue preview effect, a step-up preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, an advance effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, a confirmation effect, etc.) is executed, the vibration is transmitted to the player's hand via the other operation part.

In addition, since the effect button device 16 and the effect lever device 23 are provided on the upper tray 11 attached to the glass frame 4, when the button vibration motor that vibrates the effect button 17 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the firing handle via the upper tray 11 and the glass frame 4, which act as transmission members. Furthermore, when the lever vibration motor that vibrates the effect lever 24 is driven, the vibration is transmitted to the effect button 17 via the upper tray 11 and the glass frame 4.

(Decisive performance pattern determination table)
FIG. 193 is a diagram showing a finishing effect pattern determination table that is referenced when determining the effect pattern of the finishing effect in the second embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 193, the deciding effect pattern determination table associates the effect mode, the jackpot determination result, the type of variable effect pattern, the selection rate (%) of each deciding effect pattern, and the deciding effect pattern to be selected, and for reference, the effect configuration of each deciding effect pattern (valid suggestion effect, valid period, effect content) is listed.

The "valid suggestion effect" is an introductory effect that suggests the possibility of a valid period occurring, and specifically, a semi-transparent effect button image that imitates the effect button 17 and a semi-transparent effect lever image that imitates the effect lever 24 are displayed and moved on the first image display device 70, and the semi-transparent effect button images and semi-transparent effect lever images are caused to gather toward a specific position.
"Valid period (single hit, 5 seconds)" indicates that the valid period for the deciding effect ends with one operation of the effect button 17 or effect lever 24 or the passage of 5 seconds.

The "operation target" in the validity period column indicates the type of operation part (effect button 17, effect lever 24) whose operation is valid during the validity period; if it is a "effect button", operation of the effect button 17 is valid, and if it is a "effect lever", operation of the effect lever 24 is valid.

The "promotion effect" is an effect that prompts the user to operate the operation unit (effect button 17, effect lever 24) during the valid period. Specifically, without executing a valid suggestion effect or as a result of executing a valid suggestion effect, an opaque effect button image or opaque effect lever image is displayed in a specific position, and a gauge image is displayed that indicates the remaining time of the valid period by the length of the gauge. When the effect button 17 is operated during the valid period, operation sound 5, which is different from operation sounds 1 to 4 described above, is output.

"Normal button white" in the promotion effect column indicates that the above-mentioned opaque effect button image will be displayed as a button image that imitates the effect button 17 in its normal state, not protruding and glowing white.
"Red protruding button" indicates that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits red light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.
"Protruding button rainbow" indicates that a button image that imitates the effect button 17 that is in a protruding state and emits rainbow light is displayed as the opaque effect button image described above.

"Normal lever" indicates that an effect lever image imitating the effect lever 24 of a predetermined size is displayed as the opaque effect lever image described above.
"Large lever rainbow" indicates that an effect lever image that imitates the effect lever 24 larger than a predetermined size is displayed as the opaque effect lever image described above.

The "operation unit state" in the validity period column indicates the state of the operation unit (effect button 17, effect lever 24) during the validity period. "Normal (white)" indicates that if the target operation unit is the effect button 17, it is in the normal state where it is not protruding, and the effect button 17 emits white light. "Normal (red)" indicates that if the target operation unit is the effect button 17, it is in the normal state where it is not protruding, and the effect button 17 emits red light. "Normal (rainbow)" indicates that if the target operation unit is the effect lever 24, it is in the normal state where it is not protruding, and the effect lever 24 emits rainbow light. "Protruding (red)" indicates that if the target operation unit is the effect button 17, it is in the protruding state, and the effect button 17 emits red light. "Protruding (rainbow)" indicates that if the target operation unit is the effect button 17, it is in the protruding state, and the effect button 17 emits rainbow light to confirm a jackpot. Note that the effect lever 24 does not have a protruding state, so it is only in the normal state.

"Performance content" indicates the content of the performance that is executed when the performance button 17 is operated during the valid period or when the valid period has elapsed, and "successful decision performance period 11 seconds (6 seconds for performance mode H)" indicates that the execution period for the performance related to the successful decision performance in performance modes other than performance mode H is 11 seconds, and that the execution period for the performance related to the successful decision performance in performance mode H is 6 seconds.

"Fail" in the column for the winning performance mode indicates that the first movable member 73 does not move and the screen of the first image display device 70 turns dark, resulting in a winning failure performance that suggests that a jackpot game will not be played.
"Success" indicates that the first movable member 73 moves to its maximum operating position, emits rainbow light, and a success effect image is displayed on the first image display device 70, thereby executing a decisive success presentation suggesting that a jackpot game will be played.

In the button vibration column, "Strong vibration (4 seconds → 5 seconds)" indicates that the vibrator for vibrating the effect button 17 will vibrate strongly for 4 seconds from the start of the successful decision effect (= when the effect button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends), followed by a 1-second interval and then a strong vibration effect (successful decision vibration effect) for 5 seconds.

In the button illumination column, "Rainbow illumination (11 seconds)" indicates that the illumination button LED for illuminating the illumination button 17 will illuminate in a rainbow color for 11 seconds (a longer period than when the illumination button 17 is vibrating strongly) from the start of the successful decision illumination (= when the illumination button 17 is operated or when the valid period ends). Note that the illumination button 17 will illuminate in a rainbow color even if the target of operation is the illumination lever 24.

The probability of winning for each promotion is as follows: "normal white button" < "protruding red button" < "normal lever" < "protruding rainbow button" = "large lever rainbow." Also, the probability of winning for each operating state is "normal" < "protruding."

The first feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 193 is that when a deciding success effect is executed, a vibration effect (decision success vibration effect) is executed, which generates a valid period and vibrates the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24. This makes it possible to effectively notify the player that a big win game is being played, which can increase the interest of the game.

The second feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 193 is that the effective period occurs for the longest period of time that occurs during a variable effect. This can prevent the player from forgetting to operate the effect button 17, making the game more interesting.

The third feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 193 is that the strong vibration effect that occurs during the variable effect causes the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 to vibrate for the longest period of time. This effectively increases the player's sense of elation when a deciding effect is successful, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

The fourth feature of the deciding effect pattern determination table shown in FIG. 193 is that the rainbow light emission of the effect button 17 lasts for a longer period than the vibration period of the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24. Therefore, the player's sense of elation can be maintained even after the vibration of the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 has ended, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

(Frame role initial operation pattern determination table)
Figure 194 is a diagram showing a frame role initial operation pattern determination table which is referenced when determining the initial operation pattern of the frame role (performance button 17, performance lever 24) in the second embodiment.

The frame role initial operation pattern determination table associates the type of command when the power is turned on with the initial operation pattern to be selected, and for reference, the operating mode at the time of the initial operation and the number of steps of the initial operation are listed.

"Initial operation pattern 01" is determined when a power-on command is received, and the effect button 17 rises sharply, while the effect button 17 and effect lever 24 vibrate continuously for 2.5 seconds, after which the effect button 17 returns to its original position, after which the effect button 17 and effect lever 24 vibrate intermittently for 2.5 seconds (1.25 second vibration -> 1 second interval -> 1.25 second vibration), during which time the effect button 17 lights up (emits light) in the following order: red -> green -> blue.

"Initial operation pattern 02" is determined when the first power restoration command is received, indicating that the machine is in a waiting state for customers. The effect button 17 rises sharply, and the effect button 17 and effect lever 24 vibrate continuously for two seconds, after which the effect button 17 returns to its original position, during which time the effect button 17 lights up (emits light) in blue.

"Initial operation pattern 03" is determined when the second power restoration command, which indicates that the special symbol is being displayed in a changing state, or the third power restoration command, which indicates that a jackpot is being played, is received, and the effect button 17 rises sharply, and the effect button 17 and effect lever 24 vibrate continuously for two seconds, after which the effect button 17 returns to its origin, during which time the effect button 17 is turned off.

The duration of the continuous vibration (2.5 seconds) and the intermittent vibration (2.5 seconds) of the effect button 17 and effect lever 24 is different from the vibration duration of the vibration effects executed during the variable effect (vibration effects during dialogue preview effects, vibration effects during step-up preview effects, vibration effects during pseudo consecutive effects, vibration effects during development effects, vibration effects during cut-in effects, vibration effects during decision effects, vibration effects during re-lottery effects, and vibration effects during confirmation effects).

The first feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 194 is that the operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the initial operation of the frame role (effect button 17, effect lever 24) is different when the power is turned on with the initialization of the main RAM 110 and when the power is restored without the initialization of the main RAM 110c. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The second feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 194 is that the initial operation of the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is set to perform an operation that is not performed by the initial operation of the effect button 17 when the power is restored. This makes it easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The initial operation mode (number of steps, operation of each step) of the performance button 17 may be the same when the power is turned on and when the power is restored. In this way, it is possible to properly check whether there is an abnormality in the operation of the frame device, regardless of whether the power is turned on or restored.

The third feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 194 is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted during the initial operation of the frame role (performance button 17) is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored to the customer waiting state. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The fourth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 194 is that the light emission pattern of the initial light emitted during the initial operation of the board role (first movable member, second movable member) is different when the power is turned on and when the power is restored during the variable display of special symbols or when the power is restored during a jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the initial operation is due to power being turned on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power being restored (the game control state is restored).

The LED on the effect button is set to turn off when the power is restored while the special symbol is changing or during a jackpot game, but the LED on the effect button may be set to light up in the same illumination mode as when the power is restored to return to the waiting state.

The fifth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 194 is that the number of colors emitted in the initial light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is different from the number of colors emitted in the initial light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is restored. This makes it easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

Note that the number of colors emitted by the initial light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is turned on is greater than the number of colors emitted by the initial light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is restored, but this may be reversed.

The sixth feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 194 is that the color of the light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is turned on includes a color of light that is not included in the color of the light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is restored. This makes it easier to understand whether the initial operation is due to power-on (the game control state is initialized) or the initial operation is due to power restoration (the game control state is restored).

The color of the light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is restored may include a color that is not included in the color of the light emitted by the effect button 17 when the power is turned on.

The seventh feature of the frame role initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 194 is that the vibration time of the effect button 17 and effect lever 24 when the power is turned on or when the power is restored is different from the vibration time of the vibration effects executed during the variable performance (vibration effect during dialogue preview performance, vibration effect during step-up preview performance, vibration effect during pseudo consecutive performance, vibration effect during development performance, vibration effect during cut-in performance, vibration effect during decision performance, vibration effect during re-draw performance, vibration effect during confirmation performance). Therefore, it is possible to understand that it is a vibration during the initial operation of the effect button 17 or effect lever 24.

The eighth feature of the frame role object initial operation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 194 is that the initial vibration of the button vibration motor and lever vibration motor, which do not detect whether they are at the origin position, is executed by overlapping with the initial operation of the performance button 17, which detects whether they are at the origin position. Therefore, it is possible to check the operation of the performance button 17 and the button vibration motor and lever vibration motor at the same time, which makes it possible to shorten the time required for operation check.

The effect lever 24 may be movable between the normal position and the effect position, and may be operated (moved, vibrated) simultaneously with the effect button 17 during initial operation, or may be operated (moved, vibrated) in a specified order (for example, effect button 17 → effect lever 24, or vice versa). In this case, when the "normal lever" is used in the deciding effect, the effect lever 24 may be placed in the normal position, and when the "large lever" is used, the effect lever 24 may be moved to the effect position.

In addition, the effective period of the effect lever 24 was only 5 seconds for a single hit related to the deciding effect, but for example, the effect lever 24 may be operated multiple times, such as for 5 seconds of continuous pull, and the effect may progress with each operation of the effect lever 24 (for example, by increasing the level gauge), and when the number of operations reaches a predetermined number (for example, 5 times), a deciding success effect or a deciding failure effect may be executed. Alternatively, the effect lever 24 may be operated continuously, such as for 5 seconds of prolonged pull, and the effect may progress while the operation of the effect lever 24 continues (for example, by increasing the level gauge), and when the duration reaches a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds), a deciding success effect or a deciding failure effect may be executed.

In addition, during the effective period related to the development effect or pseudo consecutive effect, when an effect with a high probability of winning is executed, the effect lever 24 may be operated once, the effect lever 24 may be pulled repeatedly, or the effect lever 24 may be pulled for a long time (e.g., 2 seconds). In the case of a continuous pull, the effect may be advanced (e.g., the level gauge may be raised) with each operation of the effect lever 24, and when the number of operations reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 3 times), an SPSP development effect or pseudo consecutive success effect may be executed. In the case of a prolonged pull, the effect may be advanced (e.g., the level gauge may be raised) while the operation of the effect lever 24 continues, and when the duration reaches a predetermined period (e.g., 2 seconds), an SPSP development effect or pseudo consecutive success effect may be executed.

In addition, when pulling the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 for a long time or repeatedly, the effect button 17 or the effect lever 24 may be made to vibrate weakly, for example, each time the effect progresses (the level gauge increases to the next level).

In addition, the vibration strength of the effect button 17 can be weak or strong, and the vibration strength of the effect lever 24 can be strong, but even if the vibration is the same, the vibration strength of the strong vibration of the effect lever 24 can be made higher than that of the effect button 17, or the vibration strength of the strong vibration of the effect button 17 can be made higher than that of the effect lever 24.

The type of vibration (vibration time, vibration strength) may be varied according to the type of effective period (operation prompt image: single hit, long press, consecutive hits, long pull, consecutive pull). For example, if the performance button 17 is single-hit for 3 seconds during a dialogue preview performance or pseudo consecutive performance, weak vibration will be used for 1 second, if the performance button 17 is long-pressed for 4 seconds during a development performance, weak vibration will be used for 1 second, if the performance button 17 is single-hit for 4 seconds during a cut-in performance, weak vibration will be used for 3 seconds, if the performance button 17 is single-hit for 5 seconds during a deciding performance, strong vibration will be used for 4 seconds → 5 seconds, and if the performance lever 24 is long-pressed for 4 seconds during a development performance, strong vibration will be used for 1 second,

In addition, when the reserved icon or the icon changes to a display mode that indicates a high probability of winning (e.g., red or rainbow), the effect button 17 or effect lever 24 may be vibrated weakly or strongly for one second.

Third Embodiment
The third embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to the drawings. In the third embodiment, the first start port 45 in the first embodiment is provided with a start winning device 430 equipped with a first start port 450 and a second start port 470, the first special symbol variable display and the second special symbol variable display are executed in the order of winning the first start port 450 or the second start port 470, the reserved icon display area 70B for displaying the first reserved icon and the second reserved icon is provided, and in the normal game state, a pre-determination of special symbol determination information based on winning the first start port 450 and a pre-determination of special symbol determination information based on winning the second start port 470 are executed to execute a pre-reading notice performance. In addition, the description of the same parts as the first embodiment is omitted.

(Configuration of the start-up winning device)
First, the configuration of the start winning device 430 in the third embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 195, the start winning device 43 has an internal space S with a ball entry port 440 at the top. On both the left and right sides of the vertical center of the internal space S, openings 440c and 440d are provided to allow game balls to enter from the game area 5a, a first start port 450 and a first start port detection switch 450a are provided at a position toward the left of the internal space S, and a second start port 470 and a second start port detection switch 470a are provided at a position toward the right of the internal space S.

In addition, directly below the ball entrance 440 and above the first starting opening 450 and the second starting opening 470, a distribution member 440a is provided to distribute the game balls that flow in from the ball entrance 440 alternately to the first starting opening 450 and the second starting opening 470 and cause them to flow down, and at the bottom of the internal space S, a discharge port 440d is provided to discharge the game balls that have entered the first starting opening 450 or the second starting opening 470 to the outside of the start winning device 43.

The distribution member 440a is in a generally inverted T shape with a standing part rising upward from the center of the left and right of the flat plate part extending in the left and right direction, and a left ball receiving part is formed on the left side of the standing part, and a right ball receiving part is formed on the right side of the standing part, and the intersection part of the flat plate part and the standing part is supported on a support, and can swing left and right. In the right-tilted state, the left ball receiving part is located below the ball entrance 440, and when a game ball is received in the left ball receiving part, it changes to a state inclined to the left due to the weight of the game ball, and the game ball in the left ball receiving part flows down toward the first starting hole 450, while in the left-tilted state, the right ball receiving part is located below the ball entrance 440, and when a game ball is received in the right ball receiving part, it changes to a state inclined to the right due to the weight of the game ball, and the game ball in the right ball receiving part flows down toward the second starting hole 470, so that the game balls flowing in from the ball entrance 440 are alternately distributed to the first starting hole 450 and the second starting hole 470.

(Example of a ball hitting the left side of the hole in a normal game state)
Next, using Figure 195, a specific example will be described in which a game ball hit from the left side during normal game play enters the starting hole.

As shown in FIG. 195(a), in normal game mode, the first special reserved number display area 70E and the second special reserved number display area 70E display "0" while the variable display of the second special pattern (second variable performance) is being executed, the icon corresponding to the second special pattern is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the reserved icon is not displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B, and the distribution member 44a is tilted to the right. In this state, when a game ball enters the ball entrance 44, the game ball is received by the left ball receiving portion of the distribution member 440a located directly below the ball entrance 440, and the distribution member 440a moves in a direction that tilts left due to the weight of the game ball.

Then, as shown in FIG. 195(b), when the distribution member 440a is converted to a left-inclined state, the game ball received in the left ball receiving portion flows down toward the first starting hole 450, and after the game ball enters the first starting hole 450, it flows into the discharge hole 440d. At this time, the first reserved number increases by 1, the first special symbol reserved number display area 70F becomes "1", and a reserved icon corresponding to the first special symbol is additionally displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the ball entrance 440, as shown in FIG. 195(c), the game ball is received by the right ball receiving portion of the distribution member 440a located directly below the ball entrance 440, and the distribution member 440a moves in a direction that tilts to the right due to the weight of the game ball.

Then, as shown in FIG. 195(d), when the distribution member 440a is converted to a state inclined to the right, the game ball received in the right ball receiving portion flows down toward the second starting port 470, and after the game ball enters the second starting port 470, it flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the second reserved number increases by 1, the second special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", and a reserved icon corresponding to the second special symbol is additionally displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the ball entrance 440, as shown in FIG. 195(e), the game ball is received by the right ball receiving portion of the distribution member 440a located directly below the ball entrance 440, and the distribution member 440a moves in a direction tilting to the left due to the weight of the game ball.

At this time, the variable presentation ends (presentation pattern 70a and special pattern TZ are displayed as stopped) in response to the display of the variable presentation of the second special symbol (second variable presentation), and the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C disappears. Furthermore, with the start of the display of the variable presentation of the next first special symbol (first variable presentation), the first special symbol reserved number display area 70F becomes "0", and the reserved icons displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon.

Then, as shown in FIG. 195(f), when the distribution member 440a is converted to a left-inclined state, the game ball received in the left ball receiving portion flows down toward the first starting port 450, and after the game ball enters the first starting port 450, it flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the first reserved number increases by 1, the first special symbol reserved number display area 70F becomes "1", and a reserved icon corresponding to the first special symbol is additionally displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B.

(Example of a case where a ball hit from the left side enters the starting hole in a specific game state)
Next, using Figure 196, a specific example will be described in which a game ball hit from the left side enters the starting hole in a specific game state (a special game state, any time-saving game state).

As shown in FIG. 196(a), in a specific game state, the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E and the second special symbol reserved number display area 70E display "0" while the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) is being executed, the icon corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed in the icon display area 70C, and the reserved icon is not displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B, and the distribution member 440a is tilted to the right. In this state, when a game ball enters the ball entrance 440, the game ball is received by the left ball receiving portion of the distribution member 440a located directly below the ball entrance 440, and the distribution member 440a moves in a direction that tilts left due to the weight of the game ball.

Then, as shown in FIG. 196(b), when the distribution member 440a is converted to a left-inclined state, the game ball received in the left ball receiving portion flows down toward the first starting port 450, and after the game ball enters the first starting port 450, it flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the first reserved number increases by 1 and the first special symbol reserved number display area 70F becomes "1", but since it is a specific game state, the reserved icon corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the ball entrance 440, as shown in FIG. 196(c), the game ball is received by the right ball receiving portion of the distribution member 440a located directly below the ball entrance 440, and the distribution member 440a moves in a direction that tilts to the right due to the weight of the game ball.

Then, as shown in FIG. 196(d), when the distribution member 440a is converted to a state inclined to the right, the game ball received in the right ball receiving portion flows down toward the second starting port 470, and after the game ball enters the second starting port 470, it flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the second reserved number increases by 1, the second special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", and a reserved icon corresponding to the second special symbol is additionally displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B.

Furthermore, when a game ball enters the ball entrance 440, as shown in FIG. 196(e), the game ball is received by the right ball receiving portion of the distribution member 440a located directly below the ball entrance 440, and the distribution member 440a moves in a direction tilting to the left due to the weight of the game ball.

At this time, the variable presentation ends (presentation pattern 70a and special pattern TZ are displayed stopped) in response to the display of the variable presentation of the second special symbol (second variable presentation), and the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C disappears. Furthermore, with the start of the display of the variable presentation of the next first special symbol (first variable presentation), the first special symbol reserved number display area 70F becomes "0", but the reserved icon displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B is not shifted and the variable presentation is executed in a state where the icon is not displayed.

Then, as shown in FIG. 196(f), when the distribution member 440a is converted to a left-inclined state, the game ball received in the left ball receiving portion flows down toward the first starting port 450, and after the game ball enters the first starting port 450, it flows into the discharge port 440d. At this time, the first reserved number increases by 1 and the first special symbol reserved number display area 70F becomes "1", but since it is a specific game state, the reserved icon corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B.

In this way, according to the specific example shown in Figures 195 to 196, in the normal game state, the reserved icon corresponding to the first special pattern and the reserved icon corresponding to the second special pattern are displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B in the order in which they were won in the first and second start holes, and in the specific game state, the reserved icon corresponding to the first special pattern is not displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B, but the reserved icon corresponding to the second special pattern is displayed. Therefore, in the normal game state, it is easy to know the number of times the variable presentation is executed, while in the specific game state, it is easier to encourage the player to hit to the right to win the second start hole 47, making it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 195 to 196, in the specific game state, the reserved icon corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B, but the display of the reserved number in the first special symbol reserved number display area and the sub-first reserved display 83 is updated. Therefore, even if a game ball enters the first starting hole in the specific game state, it is possible to know the reserved number, which makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, according to the specific example shown in Figures 195 to 196, in the normal game state, the icon corresponding to the first special symbol and the icon corresponding to the second special symbol are displayed in the icon display area 70B, and in the specific game state, the icon corresponding to the first special symbol is not displayed in the icon display area 70B, but the icon corresponding to the second special symbol is displayed. Therefore, in the normal game state, the player can play without worrying about the type of special symbol, while in the specific game state, it is easier to encourage the player to hit to the right to win the second starting hole 47, making it possible to increase the interest of the game.

In addition, in the specific game state, the reserved icon corresponding to the first special symbol and the icon are not displayed, but the reserved icon corresponding to the first special symbol may be displayed without displaying the icon corresponding to the first special symbol. In this way, it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity that occurs when a variable performance is executed without the icon being displayed, and to increase the interest of the game.

The special icon change effect determination process of the effect control unit 130m will be explained using Figure 197. Figure 197 is a flowchart showing the special icon change effect determination process in the effect control unit 130m. Note that the special icon change effect determination process is executed after the winning light-emitting effect execution process of the above-mentioned look-ahead effect process of the effect control unit 130m.

In step E580-1, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not a look-ahead designation command has been received from the main control board 110. If a look-ahead designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step E580-2, and if a look-ahead designation command has not been received, the process for determining the special icon change effect is terminated.

In step E580-2, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the received look-ahead command and determines whether or not a jackpot has been reached, the type of jackpot game, and the presentation content (planned variation pattern).

In step E580-3, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is one in which a special icon change effect (a MAX reserved chance effect or a puzzle reserved chance effect, described below) can be executed. If the current period is one in which a special icon change effect can be executed, the process proceeds to step E580-4. If the current period is not one in which a special icon change effect can be executed, the process for determining the current special icon change effect is terminated.

The "period during which a special icon change effect can be executed" refers to a period during which a jackpot game is not being executed, a normal icon change effect is not being executed, or an icon change effect is not scheduled to be executed. Note that only one or two of the above three conditions may be set.

In step E580-4, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current total number of reserved balls is equal to the upper limit of "8". If the total number of reserved balls is equal to the upper limit of "8", the process proceeds to step E580-5. If the total number of reserved balls is not equal to the upper limit of "8" (it is between 1 and 7), the process proceeds to step E580-8, assuming that the MAX reserved ball chance performance will not be executed.

The "MAX Hold Chance Effect" is an effect that can be executed when the total number of reserved balls reaches the upper limit of "8". It is a type of pre-reading preview effect that changes all reserved icons displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B to a special display mode, and when the icon becomes the selected icon, it changes to a normal display mode or a special display mode, giving the player hope that a jackpot game will be executed.

In step E580-5, the sub-CPU 130a selects a MAX reserved chance icon final mode determination table (see FIG. 198(a)) for determining the display mode when the reserved icon that is the subject of the MAX reserved chance presentation becomes the icon in question. Details of the MAX reserved chance icon final mode determination table will be described later.

In step E580-6, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table for the MAX reserved chance to determine the final icon display mode for each reserved icon, and in step E580-7, sets a MAX reserved chance performance execution command corresponding to the determined final icon display mode in the transmission buffer, and ends this special icon change performance determination process. As a result, the MAX reserved chance performance execution command is transmitted to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and the MAX reserved chance performance is executed.

In step E580-8, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current total number of reserved balls is 2 or more and less than 5 (2 to 4). If the total number of reserved balls is 2 or more and less than 5, the process proceeds to step E580-9. If the total number of reserved balls is not 2 or more and less than 5, the process ends, deciding not to execute the puzzle reserved chance performance.

The "Puzzle Reserve Chance Effect" is an effect that can be executed when the total number of reserved balls is 2 or more and less than 5 (2-4). It is a type of pre-reading preview effect that changes the target reserved icon to a special display mode and executes a stage effect when the reserved icon displayed in the special display mode becomes the icon in question, giving the player hope that a jackpot will be played.

In step E580-9, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether the current reserved memory (the most recent reserved memory in response to the look-ahead command) is one for which an SP reach effect or higher will be executed. If an SP reach effect or higher will be executed, the process proceeds to step E580-10. If an effect less than an SP reach effect (no reach, normal reach effect, etc.) will be executed, the process ends, assuming that a puzzle reserved chance effect will not be executed.

In step E580-10, the sub-CPU 130a determines whether or not there is a jackpot or reach effect in the preceding reserved memory that will be executed. If there is no jackpot or reach effect that will be executed, the process proceeds to step E580-11, and if there is a jackpot or reach effect that will be executed, the process ends with the current special icon change effect determination process assuming that the puzzle reserved chance effect will not be executed.

In step E580-11, the sub-CPU 130a selects a puzzle reservation chance pattern determination table (see FIG. 198(b)) for determining the puzzle reservation chance presentation pattern (progress scenario). Details of the puzzle reservation chance pattern determination table will be described later.

In step E580-12, the sub-CPU 130a refers to the puzzle reservation chance pattern determination table to determine the puzzle reservation chance presentation pattern, and in step E580-13, determines whether the determined puzzle reservation chance presentation pattern is a presentation pattern that executes a puzzle reservation chance presentation. If the presentation pattern is a presentation pattern that executes a puzzle reservation chance presentation, the process proceeds to step E580-14, and if the presentation pattern is a presentation pattern that does not execute a puzzle reservation chance presentation, the process ends the current special icon change presentation process.

In step E580-14, the sub-CPU 130a sets the puzzle pending chance performance execution command corresponding to the determined performance pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends this special icon change performance determination process. This causes the puzzle pending chance performance execution command to be sent to the display control unit 140 and lamp control unit 150, and the puzzle pending chance performance is executed.

(Table for determining the final display mode of the icon for the MAX reserved chance)
FIG. 198(a) is a diagram showing a final icon display mode determination table for the MAX hold chance, which is referenced when determining the final icon display mode in the MAX hold chance presentation.

The icon final display mode determination table for the MAX reserved chance associates the expected change pattern indicated by the look-ahead specification command, the selection rate (%) of each icon final display mode, and the selected icon final display mode.

The final icon display mode is set to the normal card icon, the Character A card icon, and the special card icons, the Character B card icon, the Character C card icon, and the Character D card icon, which indicate the possibility of a special game being played.

The chances of winning the jackpot for special card icons increase in the following order: (Character A card icon <) Character B card icon < Character C card icon < Character D card icon, with the Character D card icon being the card icon that guarantees a jackpot.

The first feature of the icon final display mode determination table for the MAX reserved chance shown in FIG. 198(a) is that the selection rate of the icon final display mode is varied depending on the expected fluctuation pattern. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the expected fluctuation pattern is an SP reach or SPSP reach, the special card icon is selected at a higher rate than when the expected fluctuation pattern is a normal fluctuation, shortened fluctuation, or normal reach that does not result in a reach. This makes it possible to enhance the presentation effect of the MAX reserved chance and increase the interest in the game.

The second feature of the icon final display mode determination table for the MAX Reserve Chance shown in FIG. 198(a) is that the special card icon is selected at a higher rate in the case of a jackpot than in the case of a miss. This can enhance the presentation effect of the MAX Reserve Chance, making the game more interesting.

The third feature of the icon final display mode determination table for the MAX Reserve Chance shown in FIG. 198(a) is that, although multiple reserved icons are displayed as card reserved icons different from the normal display mode in the MAX Reserve Chance presentation, no particular card reserved icon is more likely to result in a reach presentation, and whether or not a reach presentation will be performed depends on the special chart determination information corresponding to the card reserved icon. This allows the player to have a sense of anticipation for each card reserved icon, making it possible to increase interest in the game.

Note that the execution rate of the icon change effect in the MAX hold chance effect does not change depending on the effect customization settings made by the player, but the execution rate of the icon change effect in the MAX hold chance effect may be changed depending on the effect customization settings (normal setting, simple setting).

(Puzzle Hold Chance Production Pattern Determination Table)
Figure 198 (b) shows a puzzle reserve chance presentation pattern determination table which is referenced when determining a puzzle reserve chance presentation pattern (progress scenario).

The puzzle pending chance presentation pattern determination table associates the expected change pattern indicated by the look-ahead command, the selection rate (%) of the presentation pattern for each puzzle pending chance presentation, the number of pending presentations, and the presentation pattern for the puzzle pending chance presentation that will be selected, and for reference, the advancement of each presentation pattern and the progress mode of the progress presentation executed during that change are also listed.

There are two presentation patterns: presentation pattern 0, in which the puzzle reserve chance presentation is not executed, and presentation patterns 1 to 6, in which the puzzle reserve chance presentation is executed.

For example, in presentation pattern 6, when the game ball enters the starting hole, four reserved icons, including the three reserved icons already displayed and the newly added reserved icon, are displayed as puzzle reserved icons and the progress presentation begins; when the puzzle reserved icon changes from the icon three changes ago, a presentation is performed in which a puzzle piece appears from the icon and covers the background of the first image display device 70, covering 1/4 of the screen; when the puzzle reserved icon changes from the icon two changes ago, a presentation is performed in which a puzzle piece appears from the icon and covers the background of the first image display device 70, covering 1/2 of the screen; when the puzzle reserved icon changes from the icon one change ago, a presentation is performed in which a puzzle piece appears from the icon and covers the background of the first image display device 70, covering 3/4 of the screen; and when the puzzle reserved icon changes from the icon in the change, a presentation is performed in which a puzzle piece appears from the icon and covers the background of the first image display device 70, covering 4/4 of the screen.

The first feature of the puzzle reserve chance presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 198(b) is that the selection rate of each presentation pattern is varied depending on the scheduled fluctuation pattern. Specifically, in this embodiment, the presentation pattern for executing the puzzle reserve chance presentation is selected at a higher rate when the scheduled fluctuation pattern is an SPSP reach or full rotation reach than when the scheduled fluctuation pattern is an SP reach. This makes it possible to enhance the presentation effect of the puzzle reserve chance presentation, and increase the interest in the game.

The second feature of the puzzle reserve chance presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 198(b) is that the presentation pattern in which the puzzle reserve chance presentation is executed is selected more frequently in the case of a big win than in the case of a miss. This makes it possible to enhance the presentation effect of the puzzle reserve chance presentation, and to increase the interest of the game.

The third feature of the puzzle reserve chance presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 198(b) is that, like the MAX reserve chance presentation, multiple reserved icons are displayed as puzzle reserve icons that differ from the normal display mode, but the reach presentation is not executed in the change presentation corresponding to the preceding puzzle reserve icon, but in the change presentation corresponding to the last puzzle reserve icon. This allows the player's anticipation for the last puzzle reserve icon to gradually increase, making the game more interesting.

The fourth feature of the puzzle pending chance presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 198(b) is that an SPSP reach presentation is executed when the background of the first image display device 70 is covered as a result of the progress presentation, covering 4/4 of the screen. Therefore, the progress presentation executed while the puzzle pending icon is displayed can gradually increase the player's sense of expectation, making it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

The fifth feature of the puzzle reserve chance presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 198(b) is that the rate at which reach presentation is executed during a variable presentation corresponding to a reserved icon that is a specific number (for example, the very first one) before the last reserved icon displayed in a display mode different from the normal display mode is different between when a MAX reserve chance presentation is executed and when a puzzle reserve chance presentation is executed (the rate is higher for the MAX reserve chance presentation). Therefore, the timing at which the player feels a sense of expectation can be made different between the MAX reserve chance presentation and the puzzle reserve chance presentation, making the game more enjoyable.

The sixth feature of the puzzle reserve chance presentation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 198(b) is that the rate at which a reach presentation is executed during the variable presentation corresponding to the last reserved icon displayed in a display mode different from the normal display mode differs between when a MAX reserve chance presentation is executed and when a puzzle reserve chance presentation is executed (higher for the puzzle reserve chance presentation). Therefore, the timing at which the player feels a sense of expectation can be made different between the MAX reserve chance presentation and the puzzle reserve chance presentation, making the game more enjoyable.

In addition, when the MAX hold chance effect is executed, the probability that a reach effect is executed during a change effect corresponding to a hold icon that is a specific number (for example, the very first) before the last hold icon displayed in a display mode different from the normal display mode is higher, but it may be possible to make the probability that a reach effect is executed during a change effect corresponding to a specific hold icon higher in the puzzle hold chance effect.

In addition, the execution rate of whether or not the puzzle reserve chance effect is executed does not change depending on the effect customization settings made by the player, but the execution rate of whether or not the puzzle reserve chance effect is executed may be changed depending on the effect customization settings (normal setting, simple setting).

(Example of a performance when the MAX Hold Chance performance is executed)
Using Figure 199, an example of the presentation when the MAX reserve chance presentation is executed in the normal gaming state will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 199(a), the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner (first variable presentation) in presentation mode A (normal game state), and the presentation symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are scrolled (moved downward) on the first image display device 70. In addition, "3" is displayed in the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E, "4" is displayed in the second special symbol reserved number display area 70F, seven reserved icons (white icons) are displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B, and the icon (white icon) TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 450, as shown in FIG. 199(b), the first special reserved number display area 70E becomes "4" and when the total reserved number reaches the upper limit of "8", the MAX reserved chance presentation starts. Specifically, a character is displayed near the icon display area 70C, and a text image saying "MAX reserved chance" is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 199(c), all eight reserved icons change to card icons that show cards turned over.

Then, when the time for the first special symbol to change has elapsed and the display of the first special symbol has finished, as shown in FIG. 199(d), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ will stop at the losing number "728" and the icon will disappear.

Next, when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) starts, as shown in FIG. 199(e), the second special symbol reserved number display area 70F becomes "3", the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ starts, and the reserved icons displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as the icon.

After that, when the character displayed near the icon display area 70C performs the action of turning over the card icon, the icon turns face up and is displayed as the Character A card icon (Figure 199 (f)), and a presentation is performed that suggests the expectation level of the current variation presentation.

When the game ball enters the second starting hole 470, as shown in FIG. 199(g), the second special chart hold count display area 70E becomes "4", and a hold icon is additionally displayed in the eighth display section of the hold icon display area 70B. However, since this is a hold icon that is displayed after the start of the MAX hold chance performance, it is displayed as a normal white icon.

Next, when the time has elapsed and the first special symbol has finished changing, as shown in FIG. 199(h), the effect symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop at the losing number "872" and the icon disappears. After that, effects like those in FIG. 199(f)-(h) are performed until the change effect corresponding to the reserved icon displayed as the card icon ends, and finally the character is erased and the MAX reserved chance effect ends.

In this way, in the MAX Reserve Chance presentation, all eight reserved icons are displayed as the same card reserved icon, and when that icon appears, a card is turned over to indicate the likelihood of a big win. This creates a sense of anticipation for each reserved icon in the player's mind, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the reserved icons that are additionally displayed after the start of the MAX Reserve Chance performance are displayed as normal reserved icons, not card reserved icons. This avoids the inconvenience of not being able to grasp the number of reserved icons that are the subject of the MAX Reserve Chance performance, making the game more interesting.

(Example of a Puzzle Hold Chance Presentation)
Using Figure 200, an example of a presentation when a puzzle reservation chance presentation is executed in normal game mode will be described.

First, as shown in FIG. 200(a), the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable display) is being executed in display mode A (normal game state), and the display symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are being scrolled (moved downward) on the first image display device 70. In addition, the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E and the second special symbol reserved number display area 70F each display "1", two reserved icons (white icons) are displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B, and the icon (white icon) TI is displayed in the icon display area 70C.

After that, when the game ball enters the first starting hole 450, as shown in FIG. 200(b), the first special chart reserved number display area 70E becomes "2", the total reserved number becomes 3, and the puzzle reserved chance presentation starts. Specifically, a text image saying "Puzzle reserved chance" is displayed, and all three reserved icons change to puzzle icons shaped like puzzle pieces.

Then, when the time for the second special symbol to change has elapsed and the display of the second special symbol has finished, as shown in FIG. 200(c), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ will stop at the losing number "728" and the icon will disappear.

Next, when the first special symbol variable display (first variable effect) starts, as shown in FIG. 200(d), the first special symbol reserved number display area 70E becomes "1", the variable display of the effect pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ starts, and the puzzle reserved icons displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as that icon. In addition, the progress effect starts, and puzzle pieces appear from the icons, covering two places at the top right and bottom left of the background image of the first image display device 70, covering 1/2 of the screen, and the expectation that the last puzzle reserved icon, which is the subject of the preview, will be a jackpot is gradually indicated.

After that, when the time for the first special symbol to change has elapsed and the display of the change in the first special symbol has ended, as shown in FIG. 200(e), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ will stop at the losing number "872" and the icon will disappear.

Then, as shown in FIG. 200(f), when the variable display of the second special symbol (second variable performance) starts, the second special symbol reserved number display area 70F becomes "0", the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ starts, and the puzzle reserved icons displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and the first one is displayed as that icon. Also, as the progression performance continues, puzzle pieces appear from the icons, covering one spot in the bottom right of the background image of the first image display device 70, covering 3/4 of the screen, and the expectation that the last puzzle reserved icon, which is the subject of the preview, will be a jackpot is gradually indicated.

After that, when the change time has elapsed and the change display of the first special symbol has ended, as shown in FIG. 200(g), the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ stop at the losing number "827", and the icon disappears. Also, when the game ball enters the second starting hole 470, the second special symbol reserved number display area 70F becomes "1", and a reserved icon is additionally displayed in the second display section of the reserved icon display area 70B, but since it is a reserved icon displayed after the puzzle reserved chance performance has started, it is displayed as a normal white icon.

Next, when the first special symbol variable display (first variable display) starts, as shown in FIG. 200(h), the display of the display pattern 70a and the special symbol TZ variable display starts, and the last puzzle reserved icon and the normal reserved icon displayed in the reserved icon display area 70B shift toward the icon display area 70C, and the last puzzle reserved icon is displayed as that icon. Furthermore, as the progression display continues, puzzle pieces appear from that icon, covering one spot in the upper left corner of the background image of the first image display device 70, covering 4/4 of the screen, and gradually indicating the likelihood that the last puzzle reserved icon, which is the subject of the preview, will be a jackpot.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the normal reach performance begins, and then the SPSP reach performance is executed. When the fluctuation time has passed and the display of the first special pattern fluctuation has ended, the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C as a puzzle icon is erased.

In this way, in the puzzle reserve chance presentation, multiple reserved icons are all displayed as the same puzzle reserve icon, and a progress presentation is performed each time that icon is reached. This creates a sense of anticipation for the final reserved icon, which is the subject of a preview, making it possible to increase the excitement of the game.

In addition, the progression effect gradually indicates the likelihood of a jackpot for the final puzzle reserved icon that is the subject of a preview. This allows the player's anticipation for the final reserved icon, which is the subject of a preview, to be gradually increased, making the game more interesting.

In the puzzle reserve chance presentation, the puzzle pieces simply cover the screen, but each piece may be painted with an object or textual information that suggests the execution of an SPSP reach presentation, so that when the entire screen is covered by four pieces, the object or textual information that suggests the execution of an SPSP reach presentation is completed.

In addition, the puzzle hold chance effect was intended to suggest the likelihood (probability) of an SPSP reach effect being executed, but it may instead suggest the likelihood (probability) of an SP reach effect being executed, or it may suggest the likelihood (probability) of a chance effect that is not a reach effect being executed, or it may simply suggest the likelihood (probability) of a jackpot being won.

In this embodiment, all three performance patterns 70a are temporarily stopped (swaying motion) when a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variable performance, but the left and right performance patterns 70a may be stopped and only the central performance pattern 70a may be temporarily stopped (swaying motion). At this time, all three performance patterns 70a may perform a swaying motion (performance motion), or the left and right performance patterns 70a may not perform a swaying motion (performance motion) and only the central performance pattern 70a may perform a swaying motion (performance motion).

In addition, in this embodiment, the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE that constitute the decorative part are adapted to perform a swaying motion (performance motion) when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, but it is also possible to have only one of the tactile image SK and the pattern effect image ZE perform a swaying motion (performance motion).

In addition, in this embodiment, the identification section consisting of the hexagonal base image and the number section (identification characters) does not perform a swaying motion (performance action) when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, but the texture of the identification section (surface pattern, etc.) may be made to perform a swaying motion (performance action), or a lighting effect may be added to the identification section to cause it to perform a swaying motion (performance action).

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance pattern 70a is configured to swing up and down as a temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, but the performance pattern 70a may also be configured to expand and contract. In this case, when a start command is received during the temporary stop, if the performance pattern 70a is shifted in the direction of shrinking from the stop position (smaller than the normal size) or if it is shifted in the direction of expanding (larger than the normal size), it should be displayed at the stop position in the normal size.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance pattern 70a is made to sway up and down as a temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, but the performance pattern 70a may not sway, and may instead sway so that the decorative parts and number parts extend beyond the base image. In this case, when a start command is received during the temporary stop, if the decorative parts or number parts are shifted in a direction that causes them to extend beyond the base image, it is preferable to make them fit within the base image and display them at the stop position.

In addition, in this embodiment, in a specific game state (time-saving game state, special probability game state), the performance pattern 70a is composed only of a number portion (identification character), so the decorative portion does not flicker (performance action) when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped. However, the performance pattern 70a may be composed of a number portion (identification character) and a decorative portion consisting of a pattern effect image, so that the pattern effect image flickers (performance action) when the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped.

In addition, in this embodiment, no mention is made of the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76 during the extension of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, but during the extension of the temporary stop of the performance pattern 70a, at least one of the multiple light-emitting parts that make up the frame lighting device 10 may be in the same state as during the temporary stop before the extension (a light-emitting state with lower brightness than during fluctuation, a light-emitting state with less change and movement than during fluctuation), and at least one of the multiple light-emitting parts that make up the board lighting device 76 may be in the same light-emitting state as during the temporary stop before the extension (a light-emitting state with lower brightness than during fluctuation, a light-emitting state with less change and movement than during fluctuation, or turned off). In this case, when the next start command is received, the frame lighting device 10 or the board lighting device 76 will change (switch) to a light-emitting state that corresponds to the state of fluctuation.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance control unit 130m receives a start command (special symbol reservation number designation command, special symbol designation command, special symbol change pattern designation command) sent from the main control unit 110m while the performance pattern 70a is temporarily stopped, the special symbol TZ and lamp symbol LZ change display continues, but it is also possible to instantaneously derive and display them as with the performance pattern 70a and then start the change display. In this case, for the special symbol TZ, it is preferable to display the special symbol TZ at the stop position that is shifted from the predetermined stop position.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a start command or a customer waiting state designation command is received while the icon TI is displayed, the icon TI is erased with one frame of non-animation, but this need only be shorter than the 10 frames required for erasing the icon TI upon receiving a stop command, the 20 frames required for shifting the display of the hold icon HI, and the 10 frames required for additional display of the hold icon, and may be erased with, for example, five frames of animation.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a start command is received while a number of reserved icons greater than the number of reserved special drawings is displayed, the excess reserved icons HI are erased with one frame of non-animation, but the number of frames may be shorter than the 10 frames required to erase the icon TI upon receiving a stop command, the 20 frames required to shift the display of the reserved icon HI, and the 10 frames required to display additional reserved icons, and may be erased with, for example, five frames of animation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control unit 130m receives a start command that sets the number of reserved special drawings to a predetermined number. In the event that an inconsistency occurs due to a command abnormality between the number of reserved special drawings notified by the main control unit 110m and the number of reserved special drawings stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m (an abnormality in which the numbers are the same, or an abnormality in which there is a deviation in the increasing direction), the predetermined number of reserved icons are displayed after displaying one more reserved icon than the predetermined number; however, it is also possible to display the predetermined number of reserved icons as is without displaying one more reserved icon than the predetermined number.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the performance control unit 130m receives a start command that sets the number of reserved special drawings to a specified number, if an inconsistency occurs due to a command abnormality between the number of reserved special drawings notified by the main control unit 110m and the number of reserved special drawings stored (knowledged) by the performance control unit 130m (an abnormality in which the numbers are the same, an abnormality in which there is a deviation in the increasing direction), the icon is displayed during the variable performance executed in response to the reception of this start command, but it is also possible not to display the icon during the variable performance executed in response to the reception of the start command.

In addition, in this embodiment, the normal icon is a white icon regardless of the type of presentation mode, but the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon may be different depending on the type of presentation mode or game state. In this case, the special icon may be a character icon regardless of the type of presentation mode, or the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon may be different depending on the type of presentation mode or game state.

In addition, when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the normal icon is made different depending on the type of presentation mode or game state, the operation mode (mode of presentation operation) during the variable presentation may be made different depending on the form of the normal icon. Furthermore, when the form (shape, color, etc.) of the special icon is made different depending on the type of presentation mode or game state, the operation mode (mode of presentation operation) during the variable presentation may be made different depending on the form of the special icon.

In addition, in this embodiment, only the special icon was displayed as a result of the icon change effect, but a special icon suggesting a change to a special icon (displayed during the process of changing to a special icon) or a specific icon suggesting that a specific reach effect (for example, an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect) will be executed may be provided. In this case, it is advisable to make the shape of the special icon or specific icon and the mode of the performance operation different from the shape of the normal icon or special icon and the mode of the performance operation.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reserved icon is displayed when both the special reserved number designation command and the look-ahead designation command are received successfully as winning commands, but the reserved icon may be displayed when the special reserved number designation command is received but the look-ahead designation command is not received successfully, while the reserved icon may not be displayed when the special reserved number designation command is not received successfully but the look-ahead designation command is received successfully, or vice versa. Note that when only one of the special reserved number designation command and the look-ahead designation command is received and the reserved icon is displayed, the icon change effect for this reserved icon may not be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the player cannot change the presentation mode by operating the presentation button 17, but it may be possible to change the presentation mode by operating the presentation button 17. In this case, during the extension of the temporary stop period of the presentation pattern 70a based on a command abnormality in which the presentation control unit 130m cannot receive the command normally, the operation to change the presentation mode is not accepted, in other words, the change of the presentation mode based on the operation of the presentation button 17 is restricted.

In addition, in this embodiment, the reserved icon change effect is executed without operating the effect button 17, but the reserved icon may be displayed as a button icon that prompts the operation of the effect button 17, and an operation change effect may be executed in which the button icon is changed to any of the normal icon, special icon, and specific icon in response to the operation of the effect button 17 while the button icon that activates the effect button 17 is displayed. In this case, the operation change effect may change the effect button 17 from the first operation mode (non-vibration, non-protruding state in the standby position) to the second operation mode (vibration, protruding state in the effect position) at a predetermined rate. In this case, it is preferable that the rate at which the effect button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the above-mentioned dialogue preview effect or deciding effect is higher than the rate at which the effect button 17 changes from the first operation mode to the second operation mode in the operation change effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, the display mode of the effect button image executed in the valid suggestion effect is semi-transparent, but the effect button image may be an outline only, or a silhouette only.

In addition, in this embodiment, a vibration effect (operation of the button vibration motor) of the effect button 17 can be executed when a pre-reach preview effect (dialogue preview effect, step-up preview effect) or a development effect is executed, but a frame movable member may be provided in the glass frame 4, and an action effect that operates the frame movable member may be executed when a vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed in a pre-reach preview effect or a development effect, or an action effect that operates the frame movable member may be executed instead of a vibration effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, a vibration effect of the effect button 17 can be executed when a post-reach preview effect (pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, cut-in effect, decision effect, confirmation effect) is executed or when symbols are aligned, but a frame movable member may be provided in the glass frame 4, and an action effect that operates the frame movable member may be executed when the vibration effect of the effect button 17 is executed when symbols are aligned, or an action effect that operates the frame movable member may be executed instead of a vibration effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, while an SP reach effect or an SPSP reach effect is being performed, no title is displayed to indicate that the reach effect is being performed. However, the title may be displayed in one of two display modes with different odds of winning (white characters, red characters which have a higher odds of winning than white characters, rainbow characters which guarantee a win, etc.), and the title may be displayed in white characters and then changed to red characters or rainbow characters.

In addition, in this embodiment, the cut-in effect is performed at the end of the SP reach effect, but it may be performed in the middle (first period) or end (second period) of the SP reach effect, so that the effect button 17 is more likely to protrude (the probability of protruding is higher) when the cut-in effect is performed at the end of the SP reach effect than when the cut-in effect is performed in the middle of the SP reach effect.

In addition, in this embodiment, an effective period during which the effect button 17 is pressed and held is generated in the development effect, but it is also possible to generate an effective period during which the effect button 17 is pressed and held as a jackpot preview effect other than the development effect, and to execute an operation progress effect that progresses the effect according to the length of time the button is pressed and held during the effective period. In this case, it is preferable to determine that the long press is continuing at multiple judgment timings during the effective period, and to what stage the effect should be progressed based on the judgment results.

<Contents of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment 1>
In conventional gaming machines, judgment information acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition is stored as a reserved memory, and based on the judgment information, it is judged whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and a variable performance is executed based on the judgment result. Among such gaming machines, there are some that allow the player to grasp the progress of the game by increasing or decreasing the reserved image corresponding to each reserved memory, or by displaying an execution image corresponding to the reserved memory in which the variable performance is executed (for example, see JP 2017-018225 A). However, the gaming machine described in the above Patent Document 1 has a problem that it is difficult to immediately grasp the reserved number when the reserved number changes.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control board 130) for controlling the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into a starting hole), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the slave control means is equipped with a variable performance execution means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the judgment on an image display means (image display device), and a storage means for storing the number of the reserved memories. and an information display means capable of displaying first pending information (pending number) indicating the number of pending memories and second pending information (pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, the image display means updates the display image at each predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms), the information display means is capable of displaying a reduction in the first pending information and a reduction in the second pending information when the number of pending memories decreases, and the frame update timing at which the reduction in the display of the first pending information (updating to the pending number subtracted by 1) is completed is earlier than the frame update timing at which the reduction in the display of the second pending information (moving to the center of the adjacent display section in the pending icon display area) is completed. This makes it easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control board 130) that controls the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into a starting hole), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the slave control means is equipped with a variable performance execution means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the judgment on an image display means (image display device), first reserved information (reserved number) indicating the number of the reserved memories, and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory. and an information display means capable of displaying second pending information (pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the memories, the image display means updating a display image at each predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms), the information display means being capable of displaying a reduction in the first pending information and a change display that changes the second pending information in which the variable performance has started to execution information (the icon) when the number of pending memories decreases, the frame update timing at which the reduction display of the first pending information (updating to the pending number subtracted by 1) is completed is earlier than the frame update timing at which the change display of the second pending information to the execution information (moving from the pending icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. This makes it easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆A third configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control board 130) for controlling the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into a starting hole), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the slave control means is equipped with a variable performance execution means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the judgment on an image display means (image display device), and a first reserved information (reserved number) indicating the number of the reserved memories and an identifier corresponding to each of the reserved memories. and an information display means capable of displaying the second pending information (pending icon) indicating the number of pending messages, the image display means updates the display image at each predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms), the information display means is capable of displaying a decrease in the first pending information and a decrease in the second pending information when the number of pending messages decreases, and is capable of displaying an increase in the first pending information and an increase in the second pending information when the number of pending messages increases, and if the number of pending messages increases while the second pending information is being displayed in a decreased state, the display of an increase in the first pending information (updating the pending number to one more) is started even before the frame update timing at which the display of the decrease in the second pending information (moving to the center of the adjacent display section in the pending icon display area) is completed. This makes it easier to grasp the number of pending messages.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control board 130) for controlling the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into a starting hole), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the slave control means is equipped with a variable performance execution means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the judgment on an image display means (image display device), first reserved information (reserved number) indicating the number of the reserved memories, and second reserved information (reserved icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reserved memories. and an information display means capable of displaying the above, wherein the image display means updates the display image at each predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms), and when the number of the pending memories decreases, the information display means can execute a display of a decrease in the first pending information and a display of a change in which the second pending information for which the variable display has started is changed to execution information (the icon), and when the number of the pending memories increases, the information display means can execute a display of an increase in the first pending information and a display of an increase in the second pending information, and when the number of the pending memories increases during the display of the change in the second pending information, the display of an increase in the first pending information (updating to a pending number increased by 1) is started even before the frame update timing at which the display of a decrease in the second pending information (movement from the pending icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. This makes it easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control board 130) for controlling the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into a starting hole), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the slave control means is equipped with a variable performance execution means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the judgment on an image display means (image display device), a first reserved information (reserved number) indicating the number of the reserved memories, and a previous reserved information (reserved number) indicating the number of the reserved memories. and an information display means capable of displaying second pending information (pending icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the pending memories, the image display means updates the display image at each predetermined frame update timing (1/30 ms), the information display means is capable of increasing the display of the first pending information and the second pending information when the number of pending memories increases, and when the number of pending memories increases during the execution of the variable performance, the frame update timing at which the increasing display of the first pending information (updating to the pending number incremented by 1) is completed is earlier than the frame update timing at which the increasing display of the second pending information (expanding the pending icon additionally displayed in the pending icon display area to its normal size) is completed. This makes it easier to grasp the number of pending memories.

◆As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control board 130) for controlling the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into a starting hole), and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the slave control means is equipped with a variable performance execution means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the judgment on an image display means (image display device), first reserved information (reserved number) indicating the number of the reserved memories, and a storage means capable of storing the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory. and an information display means capable of displaying second reserved information (reserved icon) indicating the corresponding identifier, and the variable performance execution means is capable of executing a specific performance (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance) that anticipates the execution of the special game during the execution of the variable performance, and the information display means is capable of displaying an increase in the first reserved information and an increase in the second reserved information when the number of reserved memories increases, and if the number of reserved memories increases during the execution of the specific performance, the increase in the first reserved information (updating the reserved number to one) is executed, but the increase in the second reserved information is not executed until a predetermined condition is met (the specific performance ends, and the losing performance pattern or big win performance pattern that was displayed in a reduced size is displayed in an enlarged size). This makes it easier to grasp the number of reserved items.

◆As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a slave control means (performance control board 130) for controlling the performance of the game based on a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a judgment means capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to a player based on judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into a starting hole), a storage means capable of storing the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and a gaming state control means capable of controlling between a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the slave control means is equipped with a variable performance execution means capable of executing a variable performance according to the result of the judgment on an image display means (image display device), and a first reserved information indicating the number of the reserved memories. and an information display means capable of displaying the first reserved information (reserved number) and second reserved information (reserved icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reserved memories, and the information display means is capable of displaying an increase in the first reserved information and an increase in the second reserved information when the number of reserved memories increases, and the storage means stores the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into the first start hole) as the first reserved memory, and stores the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into the second start hole) as the second reserved memory, and when the number of the first reserved memories increases in the specific game state, the increase in the first reserved information (updating to the reserved number incremented by 1) is executed, but the increase in the second reserved information is not executed until a predetermined condition is established (the final variable performance in the specific game state ends, and the normal game state is restored). This makes it easier to grasp the number of reserved items.

<Contents of the invention described in this embodiment 2>
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the acquired determination information, and to execute the special game according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the game control state after the start of power supply or restores the state before the power supply is stopped (see, for example, JP 2017-189604 A). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that it is difficult to grasp whether the game control state has been initialized or restored.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine capable of playing a game includes movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17) that can operate (move, emit light) in a predetermined manner, initial processing means (main control board 110) that can initialize the control state of the game after the power supply starts or restore it to the state before the power supply is stopped, and presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that can perform the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable presentation means after the power supply starts and perform the presentation operation (presentation operation, presentation light emission) of the movable presentation means while the game is being played, and the presentation control means is configured to differ in the operation mode (operation mode, light emission mode, etc.) of the initial operation when the control state of the game is initialized from when the control state of the game is restored. Therefore, it becomes possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or restored.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine capable of playing a game is provided with an operation means (effect button 17) that can be operated by a player and can emit light in a predetermined manner, an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can initialize the game control state after the power supply starts or restore it to the state before the power supply is stopped, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) that can perform initial illumination of the operation means after the power supply starts and perform effect illumination of the operation means while a game is being played, and the effect control means is configured to differ in the illumination mode (e.g., illumination mode) of the initial illumination when the game control state is initialized from when the game control state is restored. This makes it easier to know whether the game control state has been initialized or restored.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine capable of playing a game includes a movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate in a predetermined manner and emit light in a predetermined manner, an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can initialize the control state of the game after the power supply starts or restore it to the state before the power supply is stopped, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can perform the initial operation and initial light emission of the movable performance means after the power supply starts and perform the performance operation and light emission of the movable performance means while the game is being played. The performance control means has the same operation mode (operation mode such as the number of steps and the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the movable performance means when the control state of the game is initialized and when the control state of the game is restored, but the light emission mode (light emission mode, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable performance means is different. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp whether the control state of the game has been initialized or restored.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine capable of playing a game is provided with movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that is capable of operating in a predetermined manner and emitting light in a predetermined manner, an initial processing means (main control board 110) that is capable of initializing the control state of the game after power supply starts or restoring it to the state before power supply is stopped, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that is capable of performing initial illumination of the movable performance means after power supply starts and of performing illumination of the movable performance means while a game is being played, the movable performance means including a first movable performance means (first movable member 73) and a second movable performance means (second movable member 74), and the performance control means is configured to make at least a portion of the illumination mode of the initial illumination of the first movable performance means the same when the control state of the game is initialized and when the control state of the game is restored, but to make the illumination mode of the initial illumination of the second movable performance means different. This makes it easier to understand whether the game control state has been initialized or restored.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on determination information (special symbol determination information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition, an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a variable table of multiple performance symbols displayed on a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means. The game device further includes a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of performing a variable presentation accompanied by a display, and the plurality of presentation patterns include identification characters (numbers, letters, etc.) that allow each of the presentation patterns to be identified. When the game control state is initialized, the presentation control means sets the identification characters in the plurality of presentation patterns displayed on the display means to a first combination (e.g., "135"), and when the game control state is restored, the presentation control means sets the identification characters in the plurality of presentation patterns displayed on the display means to a second combination (e.g., "753"). This makes it easier to know whether the game control state has been initialized or restored.

<Content 3 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, the game control state is generally initialized after the start of power supply, or the state before the power supply is stopped is generally restored. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that performs an initial operation of a movable performance means after the start of power supply (for example, see JP 2016-187648 A). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that the movable performance means may not be able to perform a suitable initial operation.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine capable of playing a game includes a movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position toward the center of the first image display device 70), an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restore it to the state before the power supply is stopped, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that can perform the initial operation of the movable presentation means after the start of power supply and perform the presentation operation of the movable presentation means while the game is being played. If the movable presentation means is in the second position at the start of power supply (power restoration) when the control state of the game is restored, the presentation control means performs the return operation of the movable presentation means to the first position and then performs the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to perform an appropriate initial operation for the movable presentation means.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine capable of playing a game includes a movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position toward the center of the first image display device 70), an initial processing means (main control board 110) that can initialize the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restore it to the state before the power supply is stopped, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that can perform the initial operation of the movable performance means after the start of power supply and perform the performance operation of the movable performance means while playing a game. When the movable performance means is in the second position at the start of power supply (power restoration) when the control state of the game is restored, the performance control means performs the return operation of the movable performance means to the first position, and when the movable performance means returns to the first position, the initial operation is performed, but when the movable performance means does not return to the first position, the initial operation is not performed. Therefore, it is possible to perform an appropriate initial operation for the movable performance means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) operable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position toward the center of the first image display device 70), an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 13) capable of performing the initial operation of the movable presentation means after the start of power supply and performing the presentation operation of the movable presentation means while the game is being played. 0), the movable performance means includes a first movable performance means (first movable member 73) and a second movable performance means (second movable member 74), and the performance control means performs an operation of returning the first movable performance means to the first position if the first movable performance means is in the second position and the second movable performance means is in the first position when the power supply starts (power restoration) at which the control state of the game is restored, and performs the initial operation of the second movable performance means without performing the initial operation of the first movable performance means if the first movable performance means does not return to the first position. Therefore, it is possible to perform an appropriate initial operation for the movable performance means.

◆A fourth configuration for solving the above problem is a gaming machine capable of playing a game, which comprises a movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) operable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position closer to the center of the first image display device 70), an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a presentation control means capable of performing an initial operation of the movable presentation means after the start of power supply and performing a presentation operation of the movable presentation means while a game is being played. (Performance control board 130), the movable performance means includes a first movable performance means (first movable member 73) and a second movable performance means (second movable member 74), and the performance control means performs an operation of returning the first movable performance means to the first position if the first movable performance means is in the second position and the second movable performance means is in the first position when the power supply starts (power restoration) at which the control state of the game is restored, and does not perform the initial operation of the second movable performance means if the first movable performance means does not return to the first position. Therefore, it is possible to perform an appropriate initial operation for the movable performance means.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, there is provided a movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) operable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position closer to the center of the first image display device 70), an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of performing an initial operation of the movable presentation means after the start of power supply and performing the presentation operation of the movable presentation means while the game is being played. ), the movable performance means includes a first movable performance means (first movable member 73) and a second movable performance means (second movable member 74), and the performance control means performs an operation of returning the first movable performance means to the first position if the first movable performance means is in the second position and the second movable performance means is in the first position when the power supply starts (power is turned on) at which the control state of the game is initialized, and performs the initial operation of the second movable performance means without performing the initial operation of the first movable performance means if the first movable performance means does not return to the first position. Therefore, it is possible to perform an appropriate initial operation for the movable performance means.

◆As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine capable of playing a game is provided with movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) operable between a first position (origin position) and a second position (position closer to the center of the first image display device 70), initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of performing the initial operation of the movable presentation means after the start of power supply and performing the presentation operation of the movable presentation means while the game is being played, The movable performance means includes a first movable performance means (first movable member 73) and a second movable performance means (second movable member 74) whose second position overlaps with the second position of the first movable performance means, and the performance control means performs an operation of returning the first movable performance means to the first position if the first movable performance means is in the second position and the second movable performance means is in the first position when the power supply starts (power is turned on) to initialize the control state of the game, and does not perform the initial operation of the second movable performance means if the first movable performance means does not return to the first position. Therefore, it is possible to perform an appropriate initial operation for the movable performance means.

<Content 4 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the acquired judgment information, and to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on a display means according to the result of the judgment. Among such gaming machines, there was a gaming machine that initialized the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restored it to the state before the power supply was stopped (for example, see JP 2017-189604 A). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there was a problem that there was room for improvement in the control of the display means when the power supply that was stopped during the variable performance was resumed and the control state of the game was restored, and the interest in the game may be reduced.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on determination information (special pattern determination information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition, an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a display means (image display device) for displaying a performance pattern according to the determination result of the determination means. The game machine is equipped with a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of performing a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display, and in the variable presentation, the variable presentation pattern can be displayed as a swaying display (temporary stop display) and then a still display (stop display), and when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the variable presentation in which the presentation pattern is swayed is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the presentation control means can display the presentation pattern as a still display on the display means without swaying at a specified timing (when a special pattern stop designation command is received, when a customer waiting command is received). Therefore, it is possible to make the player understand that the variable presentation that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on determination information (special pattern determination information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into a starting hole), an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a display means (image display device) capable of changing a plurality of performance patterns displayed according to the determination result of the determination means. The device is equipped with a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of performing a variable presentation accompanied by a dynamic display, and the variable presentation includes a reach variable presentation in which a reach state is formed and displayed by some of the presentation patterns to execute a reach presentation, and when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the reach presentation is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the presentation control means is capable of displaying a combination of the presentation patterns in a static state on the display means, which is different from the reach combination of the presentation patterns that formed and displayed the reach state at a specified timing (when a special chart stop designation command is received, when a customer waiting command is received). Therefore, it is possible to make the player understand that the variable presentation that was being executed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

<Content 5 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the acquired judgment information, and to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on a display means according to the result of the judgment. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that initializes the control state of the game after the start of power supply, or restores it to the state before the power supply is stopped (for example, see JP 2017-189604 A). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and there is a problem that the interest in the game may decrease.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine capable of playing a game is provided with a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing judgment information (special pattern judgment information) acquired when an acquisition condition is satisfied (entry of a gaming ball into a starting hole) as reserved memory, a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the judgment information, an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of performing a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern displayed on a display means (image display device) according to the judgment result of the judgment means. The states include a customer waiting state in which the variable performance is not executed, a first state in which the variable performance is executed when there is no reserved memory, and a second state in which the variable performance is executed when there is reserved memory, and the performance control means is capable of performing a specific display (such as displaying an initial screen) before displaying the performance pattern on the display means when the control state of the game is restored, and the display mode of the specific display (only displaying the initial screen) when the power supply stopped in the customer waiting state is resumed and the game is restored to the customer waiting state is different from the display mode of the specific display (displaying the initial screen + recovery screen) when the power supply stopped in the first state or the second state is resumed and the game is restored to the first state or the second state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game when the stopped power supply is resumed and the game control state is restored.

<Content 6 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the acquired judgment information, and to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on a display means according to the result of the judgment. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that performs a customer waiting performance on a display means when a player is not playing a game (for example, see JP 2018-064835 A). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document has a problem that the customer waiting performance is not executed at an appropriate time according to the state of the gaming machine.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on determination information (special chart determination information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into a starting hole), an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a display means (image display device) that displays a display according to the determination result of the determination means. The game machine includes a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance involving a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on the display means, and the performance control means is capable of performing a customer waiting performance (customer waiting demo performance) on the display means when a predetermined period of time has passed since the performance pattern is statically displayed on the display means, and it is possible to make the period until the customer waiting performance is performed different between when the performance pattern is statically displayed after the variable performance time has passed and when the performance pattern is statically displayed after the control state is initialized or after the control state is restored. Therefore, the customer waiting performance can be performed at an appropriate time according to the state of the game machine, and it is possible to improve the operation of the game machine.

<Content 7 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the acquired judgment information, and to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on a display means according to the result of the judgment. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays execution information corresponding to the judgment information during the execution of the variable performance on a display means (for example, see JP 2018-064835 A). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is room for improvement in the control of the display means when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, and there is a problem that the interest in the game may decrease.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on determination information (special pattern determination information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into a starting hole), an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of performing a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern displayed on a display means (image display device) according to the determination result of the determination means, When the control state of the game is restored, the control means can perform a specific display (such as displaying an initial screen) before displaying the performance pattern on the display means, and can display execution information (the icon) corresponding to the judgment information during the variable performance in a specified display area (the icon display area 70C) of the display means. When the power supply that was stopped while the execution information was being displayed is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the specified display area is secured in a predetermined state (a state in which a performance image such as a background image can be displayed) from the end of the specific display to the start of the next variable display, but the execution information is not displayed in the specified display area. Therefore, it is possible to make the player aware that the variable performance that was being performed at the time the power supply was stopped has ended, and it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game.

<Contents of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment 8>
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the acquired judgment information, and to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on a display means according to the result of the judgment. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a pre-reading notice performance over a plurality of variable performances based on the advance judgment result of the judgment information (for example, see JP 2017-143904 A). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the interest in the game may decrease when the power supply that was stopped during the pre-reading notice performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired when an acquisition condition is met (a gaming ball enters a starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the judgment information, a pre-judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information before the judgment by the judgment means, an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the game control state after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and The display control means (performance control board 130) is capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the performance pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the judgment result of the judgment means. The performance control means is capable of performing a predetermined look-ahead preview performance (continuous preview performance) over a plurality of the variable performances based on the judgment result of the advance judgment means. If the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the look-ahead preview performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the look-ahead preview performance is not resumed, and a preview performance different from the look-ahead preview performance (for example, an alternative preview performance) can be performed in the variable performance that is executed next to the variable performance where the power supply was stopped. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction caused by the end of the continuous preview performance due to the power supply being stopped, and to increase the interest of the game.

<Contents of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment 9>
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the acquired judgment information, and to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on a display means according to the result of the judgment. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a specific performance that gradually suggests the expectation of the execution of a special game over a plurality of variable performances (for example, see JP 2017-143904 A). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the interest in the game may decrease when the power supply that was stopped during the specific performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired when an acquisition condition is met (a game ball enters a starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the judgment information, a pre-judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information before the judgment by the judgment means, an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the game control state after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a pre-judgment means (main control board 110) capable of determining the judgment information before the judgment by the judgment means, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of performing a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of the presentation pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the judgment result of the judgment means. The presentation control means is capable of performing a specific presentation (e.g., an icon change presentation) that gradually indicates the expectation of the special game being executed over a number of the variable presentations. If the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the specific presentation is resumed and the game control state is restored, the specific presentation can be executed in the variable presentation executed next to the variable presentation where the power supply was stopped, but is not executed from the continuation of the stage that was indicated before the power supply was stopped. Therefore, an icon change presentation that conforms to the content of the current variable presentation can be executed, making the game more interesting.

<Content 10 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the acquired judgment information, and to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on a display means according to the result of the judgment. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a specific performance in which the display mode of the identification information displayed corresponding to each of the judgment information for which the execution of the variable performance has not been completed is gradually changed (for example, see JP 2018-061728 A). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the power supply that was stopped during the variable performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, there is a risk that the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is resumed will be high.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing judgment information (special pattern judgment information) acquired when an acquisition condition is satisfied (entry of a game ball into a starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the judgment information, a pre-judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information before the judgment by the judgment means, an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 110) capable of performing a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern displayed on a display means (image display device) according to the judgment result of the judgment means. The display control means is capable of displaying identification information (the icon, the pending icon) corresponding to each of the judgment information for which the execution of the variable performance has not been completed and the judgment information for which the variable performance has not been started, and is capable of executing a specific performance (e.g., an icon change performance) that suggests the expectation of the special game being executed by gradually changing the display mode of the identification information, and the display mode includes a first stage mode (e.g., a white icon), a second stage mode (e.g., a blue icon), and a third stage mode (a red icon), and when the power supply that has stopped during the display of the identification information that changes to the third stage mode is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the identification information that was displayed in the second stage mode is displayed in the first stage mode. Therefore, it is not necessary to be aware of the display mode of the pending icon when the power supply is stopped, and it is possible to reduce the processing load related to the display control after the power supply is resumed.

<Contents 11 of the invention described in this embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the acquired judgment information, and to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on a display means according to the result of the judgment. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that displays the number of reserved memories, which is judgment information for which judgment has not been executed, in a display area (for example, see JP 2018-061728 A). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, it takes time to grasp the number of reserved memories, which may reduce the interest of the game.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing judgment information (special pattern judgment information) acquired when an acquisition condition is satisfied (entry of a gaming ball into a starting hole) as reserved memory, a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the judgment information, an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and a presentation control means ( The display control board 130) is provided, and when the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to perform a specific display (such as displaying an initial screen) before displaying the performance pattern on the display means, and a hold display showing the number of the hold memories can be performed in each of the first display area (sub-first hold display 83, sub-second hold display 84) and the second display area (first hold icon display area 70B, second hold icon display area 70D) different from the first display area, and when the power supply that was stopped while there was a hold memory is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the hold display is not performed in the second display area during the execution of the specific display, but the hold display can be performed in the first display area. Therefore, when the stopped power supply is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to grasp the number of hold memories before the end of the specific display, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

<Contents of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment 12>
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the acquired judgment information, and to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on a display means according to the result of the judgment. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that executes a performance that suggests the expectation of the special game being executed (for example, see JP 2017-143904 A). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a problem that the interest in the game may decrease when the power supply that was stopped during the performance that suggests the expectation of the special game being executed is resumed and the control state of the game is restored.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of playing a game, there is provided a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired when an acquisition condition is met (a gaming ball enters a starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the judgment information, a pre-judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging the judgment information prior to the judgment means, and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the game control state after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped. The game machine includes a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of performing a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the performance pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the judgment result of the judgment means, and a light-emitting means (winning port lamp NR) that can be changed to one of a plurality of notification modes, and the performance control means is capable of performing a change performance (lamp change performance) that indicates the expectation of the special game being executed by changing the light-emitting means to a specific notification mode, and when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the change performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the light-emitting means is set to a notification mode (white light or off) different from the specific notification mode. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player is confused, such as the lamp change performance being resumed even though the variable performance is not being executed, while reducing the control load after the power supply is resumed, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

<Contents of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment 13>
Conventional gaming machines generally include a main control means capable of controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there are gaming machines that include movable presentation means that can be operated in a predetermined manner (see, for example, JP 2016-187648 A). However, such gaming machines do not take into consideration the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the presentation control means are misaligned.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, is equipped with movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) that can be operated (operated, illuminated) in a predetermined manner, and the performance control means is capable of executing the initial operation (initial operation, initial illumination) of the movable performance means and the performance operation (performance operation, performance illumination) of the movable performance means, and is capable of executing the initial operation when a predetermined signal (power-on command, power-restore command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (waiting for customers state, variable performance, big win performance) in which the performance according to the signal can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, is equipped with movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) that can be operated (operated, illuminated) in a predetermined manner, and the performance control means is capable of executing the initial operation (initial operation, initial illumination) of the movable performance means and the performance operation (performance operation, performance illumination) of the movable performance means, and is capable of executing a customer waiting performance in a waiting state (waiting for customers state) in which the game is not progressing, and is capable of executing the initial operation when a predetermined signal (power-on command, power recovery command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the execution of the customer waiting performance. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means is equipped with movable performance means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, performance button 17) that can be operated (moved, illuminated) in a predetermined manner, and the performance control means is capable of executing the initial operation (initial operation, initial illumination) of the movable performance means and the performance operation (performance operation, performance illumination) of the movable performance means, and is capable of executing a variable performance to notify the player whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and is capable of executing the initial operation when a predetermined signal (power-on command, power-restore command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the execution of the variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling the presentation in accordance with a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, the gaming machine is equipped with movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17) that can operate (move, emit light) in a predetermined manner, and the presentation control means is capable of executing the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission) of the movable presentation means and the presentation operation (presentation operation, presentation light emission) of the movable presentation means, and is capable of executing special game presentations (jackpot presentation, opening presentation, round presentation, ending presentation) during the execution of a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and is capable of executing the initial operation when a predetermined signal (power-on command, power-restoration command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the execution of the special game presentation. This makes it possible to eliminate discrepancies between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, enabling smooth coordination between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, is equipped with movable presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74) that can operate in a predetermined manner and emit light in a predetermined light-emitting manner, and initial processing means (main control board 110) that can initialize the control state of a game after the start of power supply or restore it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and the presentation control means performs the initial operation and initial light emission of the movable presentation means. It is possible to perform the initial operation of the movable performance means, and to execute the performance operation and the performance light emission of the movable performance means. When the game control state is initialized and when the game control state is restored, the operation mode (operation mode such as the number of steps and the operation of each step) of the initial operation of the movable performance means is the same, but the light emission mode (light emission color, light emission pattern, etc.) of the initial light emission of the movable performance means is different, and when a predetermined signal (power-on command, power-restore command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (waiting for customers, variable performance, big win performance) in which a performance corresponding to the signal can be executed, it is possible to execute the initial operation of the movable performance means. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentation in response to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, comprising: presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) capable of operating (moving, emitting light, outputting sound, displaying images) in a predetermined manner; a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into a starting hole); and an initial processing means (main control board 110) capable of initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and the presentation control means controls the initial operation of the presentation means (initial operation, initial light emission, alarm sound output, initial screen display), It is possible to execute the performance operation (performance operation, performance light emission, performance sound output, performance image display) of the movable performance means, and it is possible to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the performance pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the judgment result of the judgment means, and in the variable performance, it is possible to display the variable display of the performance pattern in a swinging manner (temporary stop display) and then in a static display (stop display), and when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the variable performance in which the performance pattern is swinging is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the performance control means can display the performance pattern in a static manner on the display means without swinging it at a predetermined timing (when a special pattern stop designation command is received, when a customer waiting command is received), and when a predetermined signal (power on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, big win performance) in which the performance according to the signal can be executed, it is possible to execute the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, the presenter includes a presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) that can be operated (movement, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner, and a control circuit that stores judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired by the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into the starting hole). The game device includes a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing information as a permanent memory, a determination means (main control board 110) capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the determination information, and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing a control state of a game after the start of power supply or for restoring the state to a state before the power supply is stopped, and the presentation control means is capable of executing an initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) of the presentation means and a presentation operation (presentation operation, presentation light emission, presentation sound output, presentation image display) of the presentation means. and according to a determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on a display means (image display device), and the states of the gaming machine include a customer waiting state in which the variable performance is not executed, a first state which is a period during which the variable performance is executed in a state in which the reserved memory is not present, and a second state which is a period during which the variable performance is executed in a state in which the reserved memory is present, and the performance control means is capable of performing a specific display (such as displaying an initial screen) before displaying the performance pattern on the display means when the control state of the game is restored, and is capable of differentiating the display mode of the specific display (only displaying the initial screen) when the power supply that was stopped during the customer waiting state is resumed and the state is restored to the customer waiting state from the display mode of the specific display (displaying the initial screen + a recovery screen) when the power supply that was stopped during the first state or the second state is resumed and the state is restored to the first state or the second state, and is capable of executing the initial operation when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power-restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state in which it is possible to execute a performance corresponding to the signal (customer waiting state, variable performance, big win performance). This makes it possible to eliminate discrepancies between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, enabling smooth coordination between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As an eighth configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentation in response to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, comprising presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) capable of operating (moving, emitting light, outputting sound, displaying images) in a predetermined manner, storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into a starting hole) as reserved memory, judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player based on the judgment information, and initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of power supply or for restoring it to the state before the stop of power supply, and the presentation control means is equipped with an initial operation (initial It is possible to execute a variable performance involving a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on a display means (image display device) according to a judgment result of the judgment means, and when a predetermined period has elapsed after the performance pattern is statically displayed on the display means, it is possible to execute a customer waiting performance (customer waiting demo performance) on the display means, and it is possible to make the period until the customer waiting performance is executed different between a case where the performance pattern is statically displayed after the variable performance time has elapsed and a case where the performance pattern is statically displayed after the control state is initialized or after the control state is restored, and it is possible to execute the initial operation when a predetermined signal (power on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state in which a performance corresponding to the signal can be executed (customer waiting state, variable performance, jackpot performance). This makes it possible to eliminate discrepancies between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, enabling smooth coordination between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, the presenting means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) that can be operated (movement, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner, and ...movement, light emission, sound output, image display) that can be operated (movement, light emission, image display) in response to the establishment of an acquisition condition (the entry of a player to a starting hole) The game device is provided with a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing judgment information (special game judgment information) acquired by a game ball entering the game as a reserved memory, a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player based on the judgment information, and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and the presentation control means controls the initial operation (initial operation, initial light emission, report It is possible to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a performance pattern displayed on a display means (image display device) according to a judgment result of the judgment means, and it is possible to execute a predetermined look-ahead notice performance (continuous notice performance) over a plurality of the variable performances based on the judgment result of the advance judgment means, and if the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the look-ahead notice performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, it is possible to execute a notice performance different from the look-ahead notice performance (for example, an alternative notice performance) in the variable performance executed next to the variable performance where the power supply was stopped, without resuming the look-ahead notice performance, and it is possible to execute the initial operation when a predetermined signal (power-on command, power-restoration command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (waiting for customers state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which a performance according to the signal can be executed. This makes it possible to eliminate discrepancies between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, enabling smooth coordination between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a tenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means, the presenter includes presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) that can be operated (movement, light emission, sound output, image display) in a predetermined manner, and a display means (a display means) that displays a display when an acquisition condition is met (starting port The game machine is equipped with a storage means (main control board 110) capable of storing judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired by a game ball entering a special game area (a game area where a game ball has entered a special game area) as reserved memory, a judgment means (main control board 110) capable of judging whether or not a special game (a big win game) advantageous to a player is to be executed based on the judgment information, and an initial processing means (main control board 110) for initializing the control state of the game after the start of the power supply or for restoring it to the state before the power supply was stopped, and the presentation control means controls the initial operation (initial operation, initial It is possible to execute the display operation of the performance means (performance operation, performance light emission, performance sound output, performance image display), and it is possible to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of the performance pattern displayed on the display means (image display device) according to the judgment result of the judgment means, and it is possible to execute a specific performance (for example, an icon change performance) that gradually suggests the expectation degree of the special game being executed over a plurality of the variable performances, and if the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the specific performance is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the specific performance can be executed in the variable performance executed next to the variable performance where the power supply was stopped, but it is not executed from the continuation of the stage that was suggested before the power supply was stopped, and when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power restoration designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (customer waiting state, variable performance, big win performance) in which a performance according to the signal can be executed, it is possible to execute the initial operation. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentation in response to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, further comprising: a light-emitting means (winning port lamp NR) that can be changed to one of a plurality of notification modes; presentation means (first movable member 73, second movable member 74, presentation button 17, various LEDs, audio output device 9, image display device) that can operate (operate, emit light, output sound, display image) in a predetermined mode; a storage means (main control board 110) that can store judgment information (special chart judgment information) acquired upon the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a game ball into the starting port) as a reserved memory; a judgment means (main control board 110) that can judge whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player based on the judgment information; and a control state of the game is initialized after the start of power supply, or The device is equipped with an initial processing means (main control board 110) that restores the state before the power supply was stopped, and the presentation control means is capable of executing the initial operation of the presentation means (initial operation, initial light emission, notification sound output, initial screen display) and the presentation operation of the presentation means (presentation operation, presentation light emission, presentation sound output, presentation image display), and is capable of executing a change presentation (lamp change presentation) that indicates the expectation of the special game being executed by changing the light-emitting means to a specific notification state, and when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the change presentation is resumed and the control state of the game is restored, the light-emitting means is controlled to a notification state (white light or off) different from the specific notification state, and when a predetermined signal (power-on command, power-restore command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (waiting for customers state, variable presentation, big win presentation) in which a presentation corresponding to the signal can be executed, the initial operation can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the presentation control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the presentation control means.

◆As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, is equipped with a sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.), and the performance control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and is capable of outputting the predetermined notification sound when a predetermined signal (power-on command, power recovery command, etc.) is received from the main control means during a control state (waiting for customers state, variable performance, jackpot performance) in which a performance according to the signal can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, is equipped with a sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.), and the performance control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and is capable of executing a customer waiting performance in a waiting state (customer waiting state) in which a game is not progressing, and is capable of outputting the predetermined notification sound when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the execution of the customer waiting performance. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a 14th configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means is equipped with a sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.), and the performance control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and is capable of executing a variable performance to notify the player whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and is capable of outputting the predetermined notification sound when a predetermined signal (power-on designation command, power recovery designation command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the execution of the variable performance. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of a game, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling a performance according to a signal (command, etc.) from the main control means, is equipped with a sound output means (audio output device 9) capable of outputting game performance sounds (BGM, SE, etc.), and the performance control means is capable of outputting a predetermined notification sound (power-on notification sound, power recovery notification sound, etc.) indicating the start of power supply from the sound output means, and is capable of executing a special game performance (jackpot performance, opening performance, round performance, ending performance) during the execution of a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, and is capable of outputting the predetermined notification sound when a predetermined signal (power-on command, power recovery command, etc.) is received from the main control means during the execution of the special game performance. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the discrepancy between the control state of the main control means and the control state of the performance control means, and it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

<Contents of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment 14>
Conventional gaming machines generally include a main control means for controlling the progress of a game and a presentation control means for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means. Among such gaming machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a display means capable of displaying presentation images (see, for example, JP 2016-187648 A). However, such gaming machines do not take into consideration the case where the power supply to the main control means is stopped while the power supply to the presentation control means is continuing.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) capable of controlling presentations in response to signals (commands, etc.) from the main control means is equipped with a display means (image display device 70, 71) capable of displaying presentation images (variable presentations, big win presentations, etc.), and the presentation control means is capable of displaying a game standby screen (a still display screen of presentation patterns) on the display means in a standby state (waiting for customers) in which the game is not progressing, and if the power supply to the main control means is stopped while the game standby screen is being displayed, it is possible to continue displaying the game standby screen. Therefore, when the power supply to the main control means is stopped, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and it is possible to prevent a decline in interest in the game.

<Contents of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment 15>
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to have a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means for controlling presentations in response to commands from the main control means. Some of these gaming machines execute an abnormality notification based on an input signal from a predetermined detection means (see, for example, JP 2017-113441 A). However, in the gaming machine described in the above patent document, there is a possibility that an abnormality notification is not performed appropriately.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine capable of playing games is provided with detection means (starting hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or performance control board 130) for performing predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means, and if the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (connector coming loose, disconnection, etc.) when power supply to the gaming machine is started, it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality alert (disconnection alert, magnetic abnormality alert, radio wave abnormality alert, etc.). This makes it possible to appropriately alert the abnormality.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine capable of playing games is provided with a detection means (starting hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) for detecting a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.), and a control means (main control board 110 and/or performance control board 130) for performing a predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means, and if the control means and the detection means are in a disconnected state (connector disconnection, disconnection, etc.) when power supply to the gaming machine is started, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and if the control means and the detection means become connected during the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification, the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification is continued for a predetermined period (30 seconds have passed, until the power is turned off, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to properly execute an abnormality notification.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine capable of playing games is provided with detection means (starting hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) that detects a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.), and control means (main control board 110 and/or performance control board 130) that performs predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means, and if the control means and the detection means become disconnected (connector coming loose, wire breakage, etc.) while power is being supplied to the gaming machine, it is possible to execute a predetermined abnormality alert (wire breakage alert, magnetic abnormality alert, radio wave abnormality alert, etc.). This makes it possible to appropriately issue an abnormality alert.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, a gaming machine capable of playing games is provided with a detection means (starting hole detection switch, magnetic detection sensor 53a, radio wave detection sensor 54a, etc.) that detects a predetermined event (starting winning, magnetism, radio waves, etc.), and a control means (main control board 110 and/or performance control board 130) that performs a predetermined control (jackpot determination, abnormality determination, etc.) based on an input signal from the detection means, and if the control means and the detection means become disconnected (connector coming loose, disconnection, etc.) while power is being supplied to the gaming machine, a predetermined abnormality notification (disconnection notification, magnetic abnormality notification, radio wave abnormality notification, etc.) can be executed, and if the control means and the detection means become connected while the predetermined abnormality notification is being executed, the execution of the predetermined abnormality notification is continued for a predetermined period (after 30 seconds, until the power is turned off, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to properly execute an abnormality notification.

<Contents of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment 16>
In conventional gaming machines, a gaming machine generally judges whether or not to execute a jackpot game advantageous to a player based on judgment information acquired based on the winning of a gaming medium in a starting area, and executes a game presentation according to the result of the judgment. Among such gaming machines, there are those equipped with a main control means for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means for controlling presentations according to commands (signals) from the main control means (see, for example, JP 2017-143904 A). However, the gaming machine described in the above patent document did not take into consideration the case where the control state of the main control means and the control state of the presentation control means are misaligned.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to a signal (command) from the main control means, the main control means includes a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on first judgment information (special chart judgment information) obtained by the establishment of a first start condition (ball entering the first start hole) or second judgment information (special chart judgment information) obtained by the establishment of a second start condition (ball entering the second start hole), and a pre-selection means for selecting whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game). The present invention is provided with a variable display means for executing a variable display of a pattern (special pattern) based on a judgment result of the judgment means, a storage means for storing the first judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a first reserved memory and storing the second judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a second reserved memory, and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probable bonus game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to a player, and the presentation control means controls a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of presentation patterns in response to the variable display based on the judgment result of the first judgment information in the normal game state. It is possible to execute the above, and the first reserved information (first reserved icon) is additionally displayed in the display area (image display device 70) according to an increase in the first reserved memory, and each of the first reserved information can be shifted and reduced according to a decrease in the first reserved memory. When the multiple performance patterns are temporarily stopped in the variable performance, the first reserved information can be subjected to a performance operation (swaying, rotating, etc.). When the first reserved information is temporarily stopped during the performance operation of the multiple performance patterns, and a specific number (e.g., three) of the first reserved information that is two more than a specific number (e.g., one) is displayed, when a start signal (reserved number designation command, special pattern designation command, special pattern change pattern designation command) is received when the first reserved memory becomes the specified number, the variable performance is started, and the first reserved information corresponding to the specific number (at least the first reserved icon from the icon display area side) is shifted and displayed without shifting the first reserved information (the third reserved icon from the icon display area side) corresponding to the specific number of the specific number of the first reserved information. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation in response to a signal (command) from the main control means, the main control means determines whether a special game (big game) is to be played based on the first judgment information (special pattern judgment information) obtained when the first start condition is satisfied (ball entering the first start hole) or the second judgment information (special pattern judgment information) obtained when the second start condition is satisfied (ball entering the second start hole). a variable display means for variable displaying a pattern (special pattern) based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means; a storage means for storing the first judgment information when the judgment has not been executed as a first reserved storage and storing the second judgment information when the judgment has not been executed as a second reserved storage; and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (a sure-win game state, a time-saving game state) advantageous to a player, wherein the presentation control means, in the normal game state, , it is possible to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of multiple performance patterns in front of the background image so as to correspond to the variable display based on the judgment result of the first judgment information, it is possible to display first pending information (first pending icons) corresponding to each of the first pending memories in the display area (image display device 70), it is possible to perform a performance operation (scrolling, changing, etc.) on the background image when the multiple performance patterns are temporarily stopped in the variable performance, and when the background image is temporarily stopping the multiple performance patterns performing the performance operation and a specific number (e.g., three) of first pending information that is two more than a predetermined number (e.g., one) is displayed, if a start signal (a reserved number designation command, a special pattern designation command, a special pattern variable pattern designation command) is received when the first reserved memory becomes the predetermined number, the variable performance is started, and the first reserved information that is one less than the specific number (e.g., two) is displayed, and then the predetermined number (e.g., one) of first reserved information is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly perform cooperation between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to a signal (command) from the main control means, the main control means includes a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the first judgment information (special pattern judgment information) obtained when the first start condition is satisfied (ball entering the first start hole) or the second judgment information (special pattern judgment information) obtained when the second start condition is satisfied (ball entering the second start hole), and a pattern ( a variable display means for executing a variable display of a plurality of performance symbols (special symbols), a storage means for storing the first judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a first reserved memory and storing the second judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a second reserved memory, and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probable bonus game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to a player, wherein the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of presentation symbols in response to the variable display based on a judgment result of the first judgment information in the normal game state, and is configured to set a first reserved number indicating the number of the first reserved memories to a first reserved number. It is possible to display the first hold information (first hold icon) corresponding to each of the first hold memories in a display area (sub-first hold display 83), and it is possible to display the first hold information (first hold icon) corresponding to each of the first hold memories in a second display area (image display device 70). When the plurality of performance patterns are temporarily stopped in the variable performance, it is possible to perform a performance operation (swaying operation, etc.) of a predetermined element (a tactile image of a character, a pattern effect image) constituting the performance pattern, and the predetermined element is performing a performance operation. During the temporary stop of the plurality of performance patterns, a specific number (e.g., three) of the first hold information (first hold icon) corresponding to each of the first hold memories is displayed in a second display area (image display device 70). When a signal for starting the variable display (a command for specifying the number of reserved items, a command for specifying a special pattern, a command for specifying a special pattern variable pattern) is received when the first reserved memory becomes the predetermined number while one reserved item is being displayed, the variable display is started, the predetermined number of the first reserved items (e.g., one) is displayed in the first display area without displaying the first reserved items (e.g., two) that are one less than the predetermined number, and the number of the first reserved items (e.g., two) that are one less than the predetermined number is displayed in the second display area before displaying the predetermined number (e.g., one). This allows for smooth cooperation between the main control means and the display control means.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to a signal (command) from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the first judgment information (special pattern judgment information) obtained when the first start condition is satisfied (ball entering the first start hole) or the second judgment information (special pattern judgment information) obtained when the second start condition is satisfied (ball entering the second start hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a pattern (special pattern) based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a storage means for storing the first judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a first reserved memory and storing the second judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a second reserved memory, and a state control means for controlling the normal game state and a specific game state (probable bonus game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player, and the presentation control means is equipped with It is possible to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of performance patterns so as to correspond to the variable display based on the judgment result of the first judgment information, and it is possible to display the first reserved information (first reserved icon) corresponding to each of the first reserved memories in the display area (image display device 70), and when the plurality of performance patterns are temporarily stopped in the variable performance, it is possible to perform a performance operation (swaying, rotating, etc.) of the first reserved information, and when the first reserved information is temporarily stopped and a specific number (e.g., four) of the first reserved information that is three more than a predetermined number (e.g., one) is displayed while the plurality of performance patterns for which the first reserved information is performing a performance operation is being temporarily stopped, if a start signal (reserved number designation command, special pattern designation command, special pattern change pattern designation command) is received when the first reserved memory becomes the predetermined number, the variable performance is started, and the first reserved information of the predetermined number (e.g., one) is displayed without displaying the number of the first reserved information that is one less than the specific number (e.g., three). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to a signal (command) from the main control means, the main control means executes a special game (jackpot game) based on the first judgment information (special chart judgment information) obtained upon the establishment of a first start condition (ball entering the first start hole) or the second judgment information (special chart judgment information) obtained upon the establishment of a second start condition (ball entering the second start hole). a variable display means for executing a variable display of a pattern (special pattern) based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means; a storage means for storing the first judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a first reserved storage and storing the second judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a second reserved storage; and a state control means for controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability variable gaming state, time-limited gaming state) advantageous to a player, wherein the presentation control means controls the display of the first judgment information based on the result of the judgment by the judgment means in the normal gaming state. It is possible to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of multiple performance patterns in front of the background image so as to correspond to the variable display, and it is possible to display first pending information (first pending icons) corresponding to each of the first pending memories in the display area (image display device 70), and when the multiple performance patterns are temporarily stopped in the variable performance, it is possible to perform a performance operation (scrolling, changing, etc.) on the background image, and when the background image is temporarily stopping the multiple performance patterns performing the performance operation and a specific number (e.g., four) of first pending information that is three more than a predetermined number (e.g., one) is displayed, if a start signal (a reserved number designation command, a special pattern designation command, a special pattern variable pattern designation command) is received when the first reserved memory becomes the predetermined number while the background image is temporarily stopping the multiple performance patterns performing the performance operation and a specific number (e.g., four) of first pending information that is three more than a predetermined number (e.g., one) is displayed, the variable performance is started, and the first reserved information that is two less than the specific number (e.g., two) is displayed without displaying the first reserved information that is one less than the specific number (e.g., three), and then the first reserved information that is the predetermined number (e.g., one) is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to a signal (command) from the main control means, the main control means includes a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the first judgment information (special pattern judgment information) obtained when the first start condition is satisfied (ball entering the first start hole) or the second judgment information (special pattern judgment information) obtained when the second start condition is satisfied (ball entering the second start hole), and a fluctuation of the pattern (special pattern) based on the judgment result of the judgment means. The present invention is provided with a variable display means for executing a display, a storage means for storing the first judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a first reserved memory and storing the second judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a second reserved memory, and a state control means for controlling a normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (probability change gaming state, time-saving gaming state) advantageous to a player, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a plurality of presentation symbols in accordance with the variable display based on the judgment result of the first judgment information in the normal gaming state, and a first reserved number indicating the number of the first reserved memories is displayed in a first display area (sub first reserved display unit 8). 3), and the first hold information (first hold icon) corresponding to each of the first hold memories can be displayed in the second display area (image display device 70). When the plurality of performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the variable performance, it is possible to perform a performance operation (swaying operation, etc.) of a predetermined element (a tactile image of a character, a pattern effect image) constituting the performance symbol. During the temporary stop of the plurality of performance symbols in which the predetermined element is performing a performance operation and during the display of a specific number (e.g., four) of the first hold information that is three more than a predetermined number (e.g., one), the first hold memory is When a start signal for the variable display that is a predetermined number (reserved number designation command, special pattern designation command, special pattern variable pattern designation command) is received, the variable performance is started, the predetermined number of first memory numbers (e.g., 1) is displayed in the first display area without displaying the first memory numbers that are two less than the specific number (e.g., 2), and the number of first reserved information that is two less than the specific number (e.g., 2) is displayed in the second display area without displaying the number of first reserved information that is one less than the specific number (e.g., 3), and then the predetermined number (e.g., 1) of first reserved information is displayed. This makes it possible for the main control means and the performance control means to cooperate smoothly.

◆As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to a signal (command) from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the first judgment information (special pattern judgment information) obtained when the first start condition is satisfied (ball entering the first start hole) or the second judgment information (special pattern judgment information) obtained when the second start condition is satisfied (ball entering the second start hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a pattern (special pattern) based on the judgment result of the judgment means, and a state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (high probability game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player, and the presentation control means is In the normal game state, it is possible to execute a variable performance accompanied by a variable display of multiple performance symbols so as to correspond to the variable display based on the judgment result of the first judgment information, and when the multiple performance symbols are temporarily stopped in the variable performance, it is possible to perform a performance operation (swaying operation, etc.) of a predetermined element (a tactile image of a character, a pattern effect image) constituting the performance symbol, and when the predetermined element is performing a performance operation and the temporarily stopped performance symbol is displaced from the stop position in the variable performance, if a start signal of the variable display based on the judgment result of the first judgment information (a reserved number designation command, a special pattern designation command, a special pattern change pattern designation command) is received, the performance symbol is displayed at the stop position with the start of the variable performance and then variable display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As an eighth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to a signal (command) from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the first judgment information (special pattern judgment information) obtained when the first start condition is satisfied (ball entering the first start hole) or the second judgment information (special pattern judgment information) obtained when the second start condition is satisfied (ball entering the second start hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a pattern (special pattern) based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a storage means for storing the first judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a first reserved memory and storing the second judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a second reserved memory, and a state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state (high probability game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player, and the presentation control means is equipped with a judgment means for executing a variable display of a pattern (special pattern) based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a first reserved memory for storing the first judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a first reserved memory and a second reserved memory for storing the second judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed, and a state control means for controlling between a normal game state and a specific game state advantageous to the player (high probability game state, time-saving game state), and in the specific game state, It is possible to execute a variable performance (variable display of the performance pattern 70a, etc.) so as to correspond to the variable display based on the judgment result of the second judgment information, and the second reserved information (second reserved icon) is additionally displayed in the display area (image display device 70) according to an increase in the second reserved memory, and the second reserved information can be shifted and reduced by one according to a decrease in the reserved memory. When a specific number (e.g., three) of the second reserved information that is two more than a predetermined number (e.g., one) is displayed, if a start signal (reserved number designation command, special pattern designation command, special chart variable pattern designation command) is received at the start of the variable display when the second reserved memory becomes the predetermined number, the variable performance is started, and the second reserved information corresponding to the predetermined number (the first to second reserved icons from the icon display area side) is shifted and displayed without shifting the second reserved information corresponding to the specific number of the specific number of the second reserved information (the third reserved icon from the icon display area side). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to a signal (command) from the main control means, the main control means comprises a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the first judgment information (special pattern judgment information) obtained when the first start condition is satisfied (ball entering the first start hole) or the second judgment information (special pattern judgment information) obtained when the second start condition is satisfied (ball entering the second start hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a pattern (special pattern) based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a storage means for storing the first judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a first reserved memory and storing the second judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a second reserved memory, and a normal game state and a specific game state advantageous to the player. The display control means is capable of executing a variable display (variable display of the display pattern 70a, etc.) in the specific game state so as to correspond to the variable display based on the judgment result of the second judgment information in the specific game state, and is capable of displaying second reserved information (second reserved icon) corresponding to each of the second reserved memories in the display area (image display device 70). When a specific number (e.g., three) of second reserved information that is two more than a predetermined number (e.g., one) is displayed, if a start signal (reserved number designation command, special pattern designation command, special pattern change pattern designation command) is received at the start of the variable display when the second reserved memory becomes the predetermined number, the variable display is started, and the second reserved information that is one less than the specific number (e.g., two) is displayed, and then the predetermined number (e.g., one) of second reserved information is displayed. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the display control means.

◆As a tenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to a signal (command) from the main control means, the main control means executes a special game (jackpot game) based on the first judgment information (special chart judgment information) obtained by the establishment of a first start condition (ball entering the first start hole) or the second judgment information (special chart judgment information) obtained by the establishment of a second start condition (ball entering the second start hole). a variable display means for executing a variable display of a pattern (special pattern) based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means; a storage means for storing the first judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a first reserved storage and storing the second judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a second reserved storage; and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probability variable game state, time-limited game state) advantageous to a player, wherein the presentation control means controls, in the specific game state, based on a result of the judgment of the second judgment information. It is possible to execute a variable performance (such as a variable display of the performance pattern 70a) so as to correspond to the variable display based on the display, and it is possible to display a second memory number indicating the number of the second reserved memories in the first display area (sub-second reserved display device 84), and it is possible to display second reserved information (second reserved icons) corresponding to each of the second reserved memories in the second display area (image display device 70). When a start signal for the variable display (reserved number designation command, special pattern designation command, special pattern variable pattern designation command) at which the second reserved memory becomes the predetermined number is received during the display of a specific number (e.g., three) of second reserved information that is two more than a predetermined number (e.g., one), the variable performance is started, and the predetermined number of second memory numbers (e.g., one) are displayed in the first display area without displaying the second memory number (e.g., two) that is one less than the specific number, and then the predetermined number (e.g., one) of second reserved information is displayed in the second display area. This allows for smooth coordination between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of a game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to a signal (command) from the main control means, the main control means comprises a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the first judgment information (special pattern judgment information) obtained when a first start condition is satisfied (ball entering the first start hole) or the second judgment information (special pattern judgment information) obtained when a second start condition is satisfied (ball entering the second start hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a pattern (special pattern) based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a storage means for storing the first judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a first reserved memory and storing the second judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a second reserved memory, and a normal game state and a specific game state advantageous to a player ( The display control means is capable of executing a variable display (such as a variable display of the display pattern 70a) in response to the variable display based on the judgment result of the second judgment information in the specific game state, and is capable of displaying second reserved information (second reserved icon) corresponding to each of the second reserved memories in the display area (image display device 70). When a specific number (e.g., four) of second reserved information that is three more than a predetermined number (e.g., one) is displayed, if a start signal (a reserved number designation command, a special pattern designation command, a special pattern change pattern designation command) is received at the start of the variable display when the second reserved memory becomes the predetermined number, the variable display is started, and the second reserved information of the predetermined number (e.g., one) is displayed without displaying the second reserved information of the number one less than the specific number (e.g., three). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the display control means.

◆As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to a signal (command) from the main control means, the main control means includes a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on the first judgment information (special pattern judgment information) obtained when the first start condition is satisfied (ball entering the first start hole) or the second judgment information (special pattern judgment information) obtained when the second start condition is satisfied (ball entering the second start hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a pattern (special pattern) based on the judgment result of the judgment means, a storage means for storing the first judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a first reserved memory and storing the second judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a second reserved memory, and a normal game state and a specific game state (probable bonus game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to the player. and a state control means, the presentation control means being capable of executing a variable presentation (such as a variable display of the presentation pattern 70a) in response to the variable display based on the judgment result of the second judgment information in the specific game state, and being capable of displaying second reserved information (second reserved icons) corresponding to each of the second reserved memories in the display area (image display device 70). When a start signal (reserved number designation command, special pattern designation command, special pattern variable pattern designation command) is received during the display of a specific number (e.g., four) of second reserved information that is three more than a predetermined number (e.g., one) of the second reserved information, the presentation is started, and the second reserved information that is two less than the specific number (e.g., two) is displayed without displaying the second reserved information that is one less than the specific number (e.g., three), and then the second reserved information that is the predetermined number (e.g., one). Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the presentation control means.

◆As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problems, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to a signal (command) from the main control means, the main control means determines whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on first judgment information (special chart judgment information) obtained upon the establishment of a first start condition (ball entering the first start hole) or second judgment information (special chart judgment information) obtained upon the establishment of a second start condition (ball entering the second start hole). a variable display means for executing a variable display of a pattern (special pattern) based on a result of the judgment by the judgment means; a storage means for storing the first judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a first reserved storage and storing the second judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a second reserved storage; and a state control means for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probable bonus game state, time-saving game state) advantageous to a player, and the presentation control means controls a variable presentation ( It is possible to execute a command to start the variable display (such as a variable display of the performance pattern 70a), to display a second memory number indicating the number of the second reserved memories in the first display area (sub-second reserved display 84), and to display second reserved information (second reserved icons) corresponding to each of the second reserved memories in the second display area (image display device 70). When a signal to start the variable display (a reserved number designation command, a special pattern designation command, a special pattern variable pattern designation command) is received during the display of a specific number (e.g., four) of second reserved information that is three more than a predetermined number (e.g., one) and the second reserved memory becomes the predetermined number, the variable display is started, and the predetermined number of second memory numbers (e.g., one) are displayed in the first display area without displaying the second memory numbers (e.g., two) that are two less than the specific number, and the second reserved information of the number that is two less than the specific number (e.g., two) is displayed in the second display area without displaying the second reserved information of the number that is one less than the specific number (e.g., three), and then the predetermined number (e.g., one) of second reserved information is displayed. This allows for smooth coordination between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a 14th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to a signal (command) from the main control means, the main control means includes a determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on first determination information (special pattern determination information) obtained when a first start condition is satisfied (ball entering the first start hole) or second determination information (special pattern determination information) obtained when a second start condition is satisfied (ball entering the second start hole), a variable display means for performing a variable display of a pattern (special pattern) based on the determination result of the determination means, and a normal game state control means for performing a variable display of a pattern (special pattern) based on the determination result of the determination means. and a state control means for controlling the state to a specific game state advantageous to the player (probable bonus game state, time-saving game state), and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of the presentation pattern in response to the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information in the specific game state, and when the presentation pattern temporarily stopped in the variable presentation is shifted from the stop position and a start signal of the variable display based on the determination result of the second determination information (a reserved number designation command, a special pattern designation command, a special pattern variation pattern designation command) is received, the presentation pattern is displayed at the stop position with the start of the variable presentation and then the variable display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the presentation control means.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to a signal from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on judgment information (special pattern judgment information) acquired by the establishment of a start condition (ball entering the start hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a pattern (special pattern) based on the judgment result of the judgment means, and a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation (variable display of presentation pattern 70a, etc.) in response to the variable display based on the judgment result of the judgment information, and the reserved information (reserved A) is increased in accordance with an increase in the reserved memory. The display area (image display device 70) can be additionally displayed with the reserved information shifted as the reserved memory decreases, and one of the reserved information can be displayed as the execution information (the icon). When a specific number (e.g., three) of reserved information that is two more than a predetermined number (e.g., one) is displayed, if a signal is received at the start of the variable display (reserved number designation command, special pattern designation command, special pattern variable pattern designation command) at which the reserved memory reaches the predetermined number, the execution information is erased and the variable performance is started, and the reserved information corresponding to the specific number of the specific number of reserved information (the third reserved icon from the icon display area) is not shifted, but the necessary amount of reserved information (the first and second reserved icons from the icon display area) is shifted and one is displayed as the execution information. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a 16th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to a signal from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on judgment information (special pattern judgment information) obtained by the establishment of a start condition (ball entering the start hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a pattern (special pattern) based on the judgment result of the judgment means, and a storage means for storing the judgment information where the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the presentation control means executes a variable presentation (variable display of presentation pattern 70a, etc.) in response to the variable display. It is possible to display the reserved information (reserved icon) corresponding to each of the reserved memories in the display area (image display device 70), and to display the reserved information for which the variable display has started as execution information (the icon). When a specific number (e.g., three) of reserved information that is two more than a predetermined number (e.g., one) is displayed, if a start signal for the variable display (reserved number designation command, special pattern designation command, special pattern variable pattern designation command) is received in which the reserved memory becomes the predetermined number, the execution information is erased, the variable performance is started, and the reserved information that is one less than the specific number (e.g., two) is displayed, and then the reserved information and the execution information for the predetermined number (e.g., one) are displayed. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a 17th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to a signal from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on judgment information (special pattern judgment information) obtained by the establishment of a start condition (ball entering the start hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a pattern (special pattern) based on the judgment result of the judgment means, and a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation (variable display of the presentation pattern 70a, etc.) to correspond to the variable display, and the reserved number indicating the number of the reserved memories is displayed in a first display area (sub-first reserved indicator 83, sub-second reserved indicator 84, first special pattern reserved number display area 70E, second special pattern reserved number display area 70F). It is possible to display the reserved information (reserved icon) corresponding to each of the reserved memories in the second display area (reserved icon display area) and to display the reserved information for which the variable display has started as execution information (the icon). When a specific number (e.g., 3) of reserved information that is two more than a predetermined number (e.g., 1) is displayed and a variable display start signal (reserved number designation command, special pattern designation command, special pattern variable pattern designation command) is received in which the reserved memory becomes the predetermined number, the execution information is erased and the variable performance is started, the reserved number (e.g., 1) is displayed without displaying the reserved number (e.g., 2) that is one less than the specific number in the first display area, and the reserved information (e.g., 2) that is one less than the specific number is displayed in the second display area, and then the reserved information and the execution information of the predetermined number (e.g., 1) are displayed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As an 18th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to a signal from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on judgment information (special pattern judgment information) obtained by the establishment of a start condition (ball entering the start hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a pattern (special pattern) based on the judgment result of the judgment means, and a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the presentation control means executes a variable presentation (variable display of presentation pattern 70a, etc.) in response to the variable display. It is possible to display the reserved information (reserved icon) corresponding to each of the reserved memories in the display area (image display device 70), and to display the reserved information for which the variable display has started as execution information (the icon). When a specific number (e.g., four) of reserved information that is three more than a predetermined number (e.g., one) is displayed, if a variable display start signal (reserved number designation command, special pattern designation command, special pattern variable pattern designation command) is received in which the reserved memory becomes the predetermined number, the execution information is erased, the variable performance is started, and the reserved information and the execution information of the predetermined number (e.g., one) are displayed without displaying the reserved information that is one less than the specific number (e.g., three). This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a 19th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to a signal from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on judgment information (special pattern judgment information) obtained upon the establishment of a start condition (ball entering the start hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a pattern (special pattern) based on the judgment result of the judgment means, and a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation (variable display of presentation pattern 70a, etc.) in response to the variable display, and corresponding to each of the reserved memories The display area (image display device 70) displays pending information (pending icon) that indicates the start of the variable display, and the pending information for which the variable display has started can be displayed as execution information (the icon). When a specific number (e.g., four) of pending information that is three more than a predetermined number (e.g., one) is displayed, if a start signal (a pending number designation command, a special symbol designation command, a special symbol variable pattern designation command) is received in which the pending memory reaches the predetermined number, the execution information is erased, the variable performance is started, and the pending information that is two less than the specific number (e.g., two) is displayed without displaying the pending information that is one less than the specific number (e.g., three), and then the pending information of the predetermined number (e.g., one) and the execution information are displayed. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a 20th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) for controlling the progress of the game, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling presentation in response to a signal from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a judgment means for judging whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on judgment information (special pattern judgment information) obtained by the establishment of a start condition (ball entering the start hole), a variable display means for executing a variable display of a pattern (special pattern) based on the judgment result of the judgment means, and a storage means for storing the judgment information for which the judgment has not been executed as a reserved memory, the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation (variable display of the presentation pattern 70a, etc.) to correspond to the variable display, and is capable of displaying the reserved number indicating the number of the reserved memories in the first display area (sub-first reserved indicator 83, sub-second reserved indicator 84, first special pattern reserved number display area 70E, second special pattern reserved number display area 70F), and each of the reserved memories The reserved information (reserved icon) corresponding to the reserved information is displayed in the second display area (reserved icon display area), and the reserved information for which the variable display has started is displayed as execution information (the icon). When a signal (reserved number designation command, special pattern designation command, special pattern variable pattern designation command) is received when the reserved memory becomes the predetermined number during the display of a specific number (e.g., four) of reserved information that is three more than the predetermined number (e.g., one), the execution information is erased and the variable performance is started, the reserved number (e.g., one) is displayed without displaying the reserved number (e.g., two) that is two less than the specific number in the first display area, the reserved information (e.g., two) that is two less than the specific number is displayed without displaying the reserved information (e.g., three) that is one less than the specific number in the second display area, and then the reserved information (e.g., one) and the execution information are displayed. This makes it possible to smoothly cooperate with the main control means and the performance control means.

◆As a 21st configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine equipped with a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that controls presentation according to a signal (command) from the main control means, the main control means is equipped with a judgment means that judges whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) based on judgment information (special pattern judgment information) acquired by the establishment of a start condition (ball entering the start hole), and a variable display means that executes a variable display of a pattern (special pattern) based on the judgment result of the judgment means, and the presentation control means is capable of executing a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of the presentation pattern so as to correspond to the variable display, and when the presentation pattern that is temporarily stopped in the variable presentation is deviated from the stop position, the start signal of the variable display (reserved number designation command, special pattern designation command, special pattern variation pattern designation command) is received, the presentation pattern is displayed at the stop position with the start of the variable presentation and then the variable display is performed. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly cooperate between the main control means and the presentation control means.

<Contents of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment 17>
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the determination information acquired based on the establishment of a starting condition, and execute a game presentation according to the result of the determination. Among such gaming machines, there are also known ones that execute presentations using a predetermined presentation device (presentation button, movable member, etc.) (see, for example, JP 2019-033816 A). However, the gaming machines described in the above patent documents have a problem in that the interest of the game is low.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the machine is provided with an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) depending on the judgment result of the judgment means, and the performance control means controls the game performance. A vibration effect can be executed by vibrating the operating means during execution, and the game effects include a specific game effect (reach fluctuation effect) in which a second effect (reach post effect) is executed after a first effect (reach pre effect), and the vibration effects include a first vibration effect (a vibration effect lasting one second during a dialogue preview effect, a step-up preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, etc.) and a second vibration effect different from the first vibration effect (a vibration effect lasting three seconds or more during a cut-in effect, a successful decision effect, a confirmation effect, a matching pattern effect, etc.), and in the specific game effects, the first vibration effect is more likely to be executed during the first effect than during the second effect. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the judgment result of the judgment means, and the performance control means is capable of executing a vibration performance that vibrates the operation means while the game performance is being executed. The game presentation includes a specific game presentation (reach variation presentation) in which a specific presentation (reach presentation) that makes the player expect the special game to be played is played after a specific number of specific presentations (pseudo consecutive presentations) (for example, once or twice) have been played, and the vibration presentation includes a first vibration presentation (a vibration presentation lasting one second during a dialogue preview presentation, a step-up preview presentation, a pseudo consecutive presentation, a development presentation, etc.) and a second vibration presentation different from the first vibration presentation (a vibration presentation lasting three seconds or more during a cut-in presentation, a successful decision presentation, a confirmation presentation, a matching pattern, etc.), and in the specific game presentation, the second vibration presentation is more likely to be played when the first vibration presentation is played than when the first vibration presentation is not played. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the machine is provided with an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the judgment result of the judgment means, and the performance control means indicates that there is a possibility that the special game will be executed during the execution of the game performance. It is possible to execute suggestive effects (pre-reading effect effects, pre-reading action effects) that suggest a certain outcome, and vibration effects that vibrate the operating means (pre-reading vibration effects, dialogue preview effects, cut-in effects, successful decision effects, etc.), and the vibration effects include a first vibration effect (dialogue preview effects, cut-in effects, successful decision effects, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation prompt display, and a second vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effects, etc.) that is executed without the operation prompt display, and during a predetermined period after the start of the game performance (until the first high-speed fluctuation of the performance pattern 70a ends), the expectation of the special game being executed is higher when the second vibration effect is executed than when the suggestive effect is executed. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) operable by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a game state control means (main control board 110) for controlling a normal game state and a specific game state (probable bonus game state, time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect that changes and displays multiple types of effect patterns depending on the judgment result of the judgment means, and the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means while the variable effect is being executed, and the variable effect The vibration effects include a first specific variation effect in which a reach effect is executed by a first type of performance pattern (even number pattern), a second specific variation effect in which a reach effect is executed by a second type of performance pattern (odd number pattern other than "7"), and a third specific variation effect in which a reach effect is executed by a third type of performance pattern ("7" pattern). The vibration effects include a first vibration effect (a vibration effect of 1 second during a dialogue preview effect, a step-up preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, etc.) and a second vibration effect different from the first vibration effect (a vibration effect of 3 seconds or more during a cut-in effect, a successful decision effect, a confirmation effect, etc.). In the normal game state, the first specific variation effect is more likely to be executed than the second specific variation effect, the third specific variation effect is more difficult to execute than the first specific variation effect, and the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the third specific variation effect is executed than when the first specific variation effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance) according to the judgment result of the judgment means, and the performance control means controls the operation means during the execution of the game performance. The vibration effects include a first vibration effect (a line preview effect, a cut-in effect, a successful decision effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation prompt display, and a second vibration effect (a pre-reading vibration effect, etc.) that is executed without the operation prompt display. When the first vibration effect is executed, a predetermined effect sound (a display sound effect of an operation prompt image, an effect sound in response to the operation of an effect button, an operation sound effect of a role) is output in response to the operation of the operation means, whereas when the second vibration effect is executed, the predetermined effect sound is not output. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) operable by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect (variable effect) according to the judgment result of the judgment means, the effect control means being capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means during the execution of the game effect, and the game effect is a specific game effect in which a specific effect (reach effect) that raises expectations of the execution of the special game is executed. The vibration effects include a first vibration effect (a dialogue preview effect, a cut-in effect, a successful decision effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation prompt display, and a second vibration effect (a look-ahead vibration effect, etc.) that is executed without the operation prompt display, and when the first vibration effect is executed, a predetermined effect image (an operation prompt image, an effect image corresponding to the operation of an effect button) related to the operation of the operation means is displayed, while when the second vibration effect is executed, the predetermined effect image is not displayed, and in the specific game effect (a big win reach fluctuation effect) in which the special game is executed, the number of times the second vibration effect is executed after the start of the specific effect (maximum seven times) is more likely to be greater than the number of times the second vibration effect is executed before the start of the specific effect (maximum three times). This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a game performance (variable performance) that is executed according to the judgment result of the judgment means. The game machine includes a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for controlling the game, the operation means including a first operation means (presentation button 17) and a second operation means (presentation lever 24) different from the first operation means, the presentation control means is capable of executing vibration effects (preview vibration effects, dialogue preview effects, cut-in effects, successful decision effects, etc.) that vibrate the first operation means while the game presentation is being executed, and when the vibration effects are executed while the second operation means is being operated, the vibrations related to the vibration effects are transmitted to the player via the second operation means. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆As an eighth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with a frame performance section (performance button 17 (button vibration motor), performance lever (lever vibration motor), frame movable member) provided on the front side of the gaming frame (frame body consisting of a gaming board mounting frame 3 and a glass frame 4), an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game performance (variable performance) according to the judgment result of the judgment means, and the performance control means is provided with a frame performance section (performance button 17 (button vibration motor), performance lever (lever vibration motor), frame movable member) provided on the front side of the gaming frame (frame body consisting of a gaming board mounting frame 3 and a glass frame 4), an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game performance (variable performance) according to the judgment result of the judgment means, A suggestive effect (jackpot notice effect) that suggests the expectation of the special game being executed during the execution of a win can be executed, and an operation effect (vibration effect, operation effect, etc.) that operates (operates, vibrates) the frame effect unit during the execution of the suggestive effect can be executed, and the suggestive effect includes a first suggestive effect (weak notice, pre-reach notice effect) and a second suggestive effect (strong notice, post-reach notice effect) that has a higher expectation than the first suggestive effect, and the operation effect is more likely to be executed when the second suggestive effect is executed than when the first suggestive effect is executed, and the expectation of the special game being executed is higher when the operation effect is executed during the execution of the first suggestive effect than when the operation effect is not executed during the execution of the first suggestive effect. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) operable by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game performance (variable performance) according to the judgment result of the judgment means, and the performance control means is provided with a first performance mode ( The display can be controlled to a first presentation mode (presentation modes A to C) and a second presentation mode (presentation modes D to G), and can execute a vibration presentation that vibrates the operation means while the game presentation is being executed. The vibration presentation includes a first vibration presentation (a vibration presentation during a dialogue preview presentation, a cut-in presentation, a successful decision presentation, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation prompt display, and a second vibration presentation (a vibration presentation during a look-ahead presentation, a step-up preview presentation, etc.) that is executed without the operation prompt display. The first presentation mode and the second presentation mode have different expectations for the special game being executed when the second vibration presentation is executed. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆As a tenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) operable by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game performance (variable performance) according to the judgment result of the judgment means, and the performance control means is a first performance mode. The display can be controlled to a first mode (modes A to C) and a second mode (modes D to G), and can execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operating means while the game effect is being executed. The vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect during a dialogue preview effect, a cut-in effect, a successful decision effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the operation prompt display, and a second vibration effect (vibration effect during a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, etc.) that is executed without the operation prompt display. The first and second vibration modes have different expectations for the special game being executed when the first vibration effect is executed. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with a frame effect section (effect button 17 (button vibration motor), effect lever (lever vibration motor), frame movable member) provided on the front side of a gaming frame (frame body consisting of a gaming board mounting frame 3 and a glass frame 4), an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect (variable effect) according to the judgment result of the judgment means, and the effect control means is provided with a frame effect section (effect button 17 (button vibration motor), effect lever (lever vibration motor), frame movable member) provided on the front side of a gaming frame (frame body consisting of a gaming board mounting frame 3 and a glass frame 4), an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game effect (variable effect) according to the judgment result of the judgment means, During the execution of the effect, a change effect (vibration effect, action effect, light emission effect, etc.) can be executed that changes the frame effect unit from a first state (standby state, off state) to a second state (vibration state, action state, specified light emission state), and the change effect includes a specific game effect (reach change effect) in which a second effect (reach post effect) is executed after a first effect (reach pre effect), and the expectation of the special game being executed is higher when the change effect is executed than when the change effect is not executed during the execution of the first effect, and in the specific game effect (jackpot reach change effect) in which the special game is executed, the change effect is executed during the execution of the second effect regardless of whether the change effect is executed during the execution of the first effect. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) operable by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect (variable effect) according to the judgment result of the judgment means, the effect control means being capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates the operating means during the execution of the game effect, and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (during a dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive performance) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during an operation promotion display. The first vibration effect is executed in one of a plurality of vibration modes with different expectations for the special game being executed (weak or strong vibration for one second for vibration effects during dialogue notice effects, pseudo consecutive effects, and development effects, and weak or strong vibration for three seconds for vibration effects during cut-in effects), and the second vibration effect is executed in one vibration mode (weak vibration for one second for vibration effects during step-up notice effects, pseudo consecutive effects, and development effects, strong vibration for four seconds for vibration effects during pattern effects, and strong vibration for one second for vibration effects during C patterns) that is determined in advance when a predetermined effect (step-up notice effects, pattern effects, and C pattern effects) is performed. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) operable by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a gaming state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the normal gaming state and a specific gaming state (variable gaming state, time-saving gaming state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a gaming performance (variable performance) according to the judgment result of the judgment means, and the performance control means generates a vibration performance that vibrates the operation means during the execution of the gaming performance. The vibration effects include a predetermined vibration effect (a vibration effect lasting 1 second such as a look-ahead vibration effect, a dialogue preview effect, or a step-up preview effect) and a specific vibration effect (a vibration effect lasting 3 seconds or more such as a successful decision effect or a matching pattern effect) that is different from the predetermined vibration effect, and the predetermined vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (a vibration effect during a dialogue preview effect) that is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation prompt display, and a second vibration effect (one of the vibration effects during a look-ahead vibration effect or a step-up preview effect) that is executed without the operation prompt display, and in the game effect in which the special game is executed, the ratio of the specific vibration effect being executed after the first vibration effect is executed differs from the ratio of the specific vibration effect being executed after the second vibration effect is executed, and the second vibration effect is more likely to be executed during the normal game state than during the specific game state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 14th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) operable by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a variable effect that variably displays multiple types of effect patterns according to the judgment result of the judgment means, and the effect control means displays a special effect (decisive success effect, confirmed effect) that suggests the execution of the special game during the execution of the variable effect. It is possible to execute a vibration effect that vibrates the operating means in one of a plurality of vibration modes (vibration effects such as pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue preview effect, step-up preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, cut-in effect, successful decision effect, confirmation effect, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, etc.), and when a variable effect in which the special game is executed is executed, the execution mode of the vibration effect (whether or not it is executed, execution timing, etc.) differs depending on the type of performance pattern that suggests the execution of the special game (even number pattern, odd number pattern other than "7", "7" pattern), and when the vibration effect is executed in conjunction with the execution of the special effect, the vibration mode of the vibration effect is the same regardless of the type of performance pattern that suggests the execution of the special game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) operable by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect (variable effect) according to the judgment result of the judgment means, the operation means including a first operation means (effect button 17) and a second operation means (effect lever 24) different from the first operation means, and the effect control means controls the above during the execution of the game effect. It is possible to execute vibration effects (preview vibration effects, dialogue preview effects, cut-in effects, successful decision effects, etc.) that vibrate the first operating means, and the vibration effects include a first vibration effect (vibration effects at dialogue preview effects, cut-in effects, successful decision effects, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the first operating means during the operation prompt display, and a second vibration effect (vibration effects at preview vibration effects, step-up preview effects, etc.) that is executed without the operation prompt display, and the first vibration effect has a different vibration start timing depending on the operation timing of the first operating means, and the second vibration effect has a vibration start timing that is predetermined, and when the vibration effect is executed during the operation of the second operating means, the vibration related to the vibration effect is transmitted to the player via the second operating means. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 16th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and an execution means (variable performance) that executes a game performance according to the judgment result of the judgment means. and an output control means (performance control board 130), the performance control means being capable of executing a vibration performance that vibrates the operating means, the effective period of the operating means including a first effective period (effective period related to dialogue preview performance, pseudo consecutive performance, development performance, cut-in performance, deciding performance, re-draw performance, etc.) and a second effective period (effective period during waiting for customers) different from the first effective period, and the vibration performance is more likely to be executed when the operating means is operated during the first effective period than when the operating means is operated during the second effective period. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆As a 17th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) that can be operated by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and an effect control means (effect control board 110) that executes a game effect (variable effect) according to the judgment result of the judgment means. The game machine includes a display control means (130) and the effect control means is capable of executing a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means, and the effective period of the operation means includes a first effective period (effective period related to dialogue preview effects, etc.), a second effective period (effective period related to cut-in effects, deciding effects, etc.) different from the first effective period, and a third effective period (effective period while waiting for customers) different from the first effective period and the second effective period, and the vibration effect is more likely to be executed when the operation means is operated during the second effective period than when the operation means is operated during the third effective period. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆As an 18th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, a presentation section (presentation button 17 (button vibration motor), presentation lever 24 (lever vibration motor), second movable member 74) that can be operated in a predetermined manner, acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47), judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a game according to the judgment result of the judgment means. The device is equipped with a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a presentation (variable presentation), and the presentation control means can be controlled to a first presentation mode (presentation modes A to C) and a second presentation mode (presentation modes D to G), and can execute a change presentation (vibration presentation, operation presentation, light-emitting presentation, etc.) that changes the presentation unit from a first state (standby state, off state) to a second state (vibration state, operation state, specified light-emitting state) while the game presentation is being executed, and the expectation of the special game being executed when the change presentation is executed differs between the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆As a 19th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a game presentation (variable presentation) according to the judgment result of the judgment means, and the presentation control means is a first presentation mode (presentation mode The game can be controlled to a first presentation mode (presentation modes A to C) and a second presentation mode (presentation modes D to G), and can execute a stage presentation (step-up notice presentation, pseudo consecutive presentation) that progresses to one of a number of stages with different expectations for the special game being executed during the execution of the game presentation, and the expectation of the special game being executed when the stage presentation progresses to a predetermined stage (the third step presentation, the fourth step presentation, or the fifth step presentation for the step-up notice presentation, or once or twice for the pseudo consecutive presentation) differs between the first presentation mode and the second presentation mode. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆As a 20th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a game presentation (variable presentation) according to the judgment result of the judgment means, and the presentation control means is provided with a first presentation mode (presentation modes A to C) and a second presentation mode (presentation modes B to C). It is possible to control the game in one or more game modes (presentation modes D to G), and to execute consecutive presentations (preview effect presentations, preview action presentations, preview vibration presentations, preview zone presentations, etc.) that perform advance notice presentations in one or more game presentations, and to execute specific presentations (reach presentations) that give the expectation that the special game will be executed in the game presentations, and it is more difficult for the specific presentation to be executed in the game presentation that triggers the execution of the consecutive presentation when the consecutive presentations are executed a predetermined number of times in the second presentation mode than when the consecutive presentations are executed a predetermined number of times (one time) in the first presentation mode. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆As a 21st configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a game presentation (variable presentation) according to the judgment result of the judgment means, and the presentation control means is provided with a first presentation mode (presentation modes A to C) and a second presentation mode. It is possible to control the mode (presentation modes D to G), and it is possible to execute consecutive presentations (preview effect presentations, preview action presentations, preview vibration presentations, preview zone presentations, etc.) that perform advance notice presentations in one or more of the game presentations, and it is possible to execute specific presentations (reach presentations) that give the expectation of the execution of the special game in the game presentations, and it is easier for the specific presentation to be executed in the game presentation that triggers the execution of the consecutive presentation when the consecutive presentations are executed a predetermined number of times in the first presentation mode than when the consecutive presentations are executed a predetermined number of times (2 or 3 times) in the second presentation mode. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆As a 22nd configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the machine is provided with an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a game presentation (variable presentation) according to the judgment result of the judgment means, and the presentation control means is controllable to a first presentation mode (presentation modes A to C) and a second presentation mode (presentation modes D to G), and is capable of executing a continuous presentation (preview effect presentation, preview action presentation, preview vibration presentation, preview effect presentation, etc.) for performing a preview presentation in one or more of the game presentations. A specific effect (reach effect) that anticipates the execution of the special game can be executed in the game effect, and the specific effect includes a first specific effect (normal reach effect) and a second specific effect (SP/SPSP reach effect) that has a higher expectation of the special game being executed than the first specific effect. When the consecutive effects are executed a first number of times, the specific effect is executed more easily in the first effect mode than in the second effect mode in the game effect that triggers the execution of the consecutive effects, and when the consecutive effects are executed a second number of times, which is greater than the first number of times, the second effect is executed more easily in the second effect mode than in the first effect mode in the game effect that triggers the execution of the consecutive effects. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆As a 23rd configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an operation means (effect button 17, effect lever 24) operable by the player, a display means (image display device) capable of displaying effect images, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (entry of a gaming ball into the first start hole 45 or the second start hole 47), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect (variable effect) according to the judgment result of the judgment means, and the effect control means performs an operation promotion display (opaque button image) for encouraging the operation of the operation means during the execution of the game effect, and an operation effect (development effect, cut-out effect) according to the operation of the operation means. It is possible to perform a suggestive display (a semi-transparent button image) on the display means before the operation prompting display is performed, which suggests that the operation prompting display may be performed. The operation prompting display includes a first operation prompting display (a white button image in a normal state) and a second operation prompting display (a red button image in a normal state, a red button image in a protruding state, and a rainbow button image in a protruding state) which has a different expectation of the special game being performed from the first operation prompting display. The expectation of the special game being performed when the first operation prompting display is performed differs between the first and second presentation modes, and in the first presentation mode, the expectation of the special game being performed is higher when the operation prompting display is performed after the suggestive display is performed than when the operation prompting display is performed without the suggestive display. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

<Contents of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment 18>
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the determination information acquired based on the establishment of a starting condition, and execute a game performance (variable performance) according to the result of the determination. In such gaming machines, there are also known ones that execute performance using a predetermined performance device (performance button, movable member, lamp, image display device, etc.) (for example, see JP 2019-033816 A). However, in conventional gaming machines such as those described in the above patent documents, there was a problem that the interest of the game was low.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the machine is provided with an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special symbol judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole), a storage means (main control board 110) for storing the judgment information acquired by the acquisition means as a reserved memory, a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a game presentation (a variable presentation involving a variable display of a presentation symbol, a variable presentation only showing a variable display of a fourth symbol, a variable presentation only flashing a lamp) according to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is provided with a number of reserved memories according to which the number of reserved memories is increased or decreased. The device can display the reserved information that has been set, and can execute a first display effect (a change in the tarot card for MAX 8) that displays the reserved information in a predetermined mode different from the normal mode, and a second display effect (a puzzle change for a puzzle reach) that displays the reserved information in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode. It can also execute a specific effect (a predetermined advance notice effect, various reach effects, etc.) that gives the player hope that the special game will be executed during the execution of the game effect, and the rate at which the specific effect is executed during the game effect corresponding to the reserved information that is a specific number (e.g., the first) before the specific number (e.g., the fourth) differs between when the first display effect is executed and when the second display effect is executed. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a storage means (main control board 110) for storing the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition as a first reserved memory and storing the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition as a second reserved memory, a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a state control means (main control board 110), and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes game presentations (variable presentations with variable display of presentation symbols, variable presentations with only variable display of the fourth symbol, and variable presentations with only blinking lamps) according to the results of the judgment, the judgment means judges the judgment information acquired based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition and the judgment information acquired based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition in the order of acquisition, the presentation control means is capable of displaying a number of reserved information (reserved icons) according to the reserved memory, and in the normal game state, the first reserved information and the second reserved information are displayed in the order in which the judgment information was acquired, and in the specific game state, the first reserved information is not displayed, and the second reserved information is displayed in the order in which the judgment information was acquired. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control board 110) for executing a variable display of a pattern (special pattern) depending on the result of the judgment, a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the judgment that the special game is not to be executed, and a control means (main control board 110) for initializing the game control state when power supply starts. The present invention includes an initialization means capable of performing the initialization, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes game presentations (variable presentations with variable display of presentation symbols, variable presentations with only variable display of the fourth symbol, and variable presentations with only blinking lamps) according to the results of the judgment, and the state control means ends the specific game state when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, and the variable display execution means is capable of determining a variable pattern using different variable pattern tables for the variable display that is the final time in the specific game state controlled in a state where the special game was not executed after the initialization, and the variable display that is the final time in the specific game state controlled in a state where the special game was executed after the initialization. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control board 110) for executing a variable display of a pattern (special pattern) depending on the result of the judgment, a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the judgment that the special game is not executed, and an initialization means capable of initializing the game control state when power supply is started. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes game presentations (variable presentations with variable display of presentation symbols, variable presentations with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable presentations with only blinking lamps) according to the results of the judgment, and the state control means ends the specific game state when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times, and the presentation control means can make the presentation mode (start timing, end timing, content of the end notification presentation, etc.) different when the specific game state ends, depending on whether the specific game state controlled in a state where the special game was not executed after the initialization ends or the specific game state controlled in a state where the special game was executed after the initialization ends. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a variable display execution means (main control board 110) for executing a variable display of a pattern (special pattern) according to the result of the judgment, a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the judgment that the special game is not executed, and a game presentation (presentation) according to the result of the judgment. The game device includes a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a presentation with a variable presentation with a variable display of a pattern, a variable presentation with only a variable display of a fourth pattern, and a variable presentation with only a blinking lamp, and the game presentation includes a first game presentation (a variable presentation corresponding to a first special pattern) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game presentation (a variable presentation corresponding to a second special pattern) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the number of types of game presentation patterns when the second game presentation that notifies the non-execution of the special game in the specific game state is executed is greater than the number of types of game presentation patterns when the first game presentation that notifies the non-execution of the special game in the specific game state is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), and a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, The present invention is equipped with a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific game state (probability game state, normal time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) which executes a game presentation (a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern, a variable presentation only of a variable display of a fourth pattern, a variable presentation only of a lamp flashing) according to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is a vibration presentation (a pre-reading vibration presentation, a step-up notice presentation, etc.) which vibrates the operation means during the execution of the game presentation. The vibration effects include a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a decision effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period while generating an operation effective period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a decision effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the effective period, and the game effects include a first game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the execution ratio of the first vibration effect is different between the case where the first game effect is executed in the specific game state and the case where the second game effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to a player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a special game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game state. The game machine includes a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game state to a fixed game state (probability game state, normal time-saving game state), and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing game presentations (variation presentations with variable display of presentation symbols, variation presentations with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variation presentations with only blinking of lamps) according to the results of the judgment, and the presentation control means controls vibration presentations (forecast vibration presentations, step-up notice presentations, dialogue notice presentations, cut-in presentations, decision success presentations, etc.) that vibrate the operation means during the execution of the game presentations, and a pre-show presentation (pre-show presentations, step-up notice presentations, dialogue notice presentations, cut-in presentations, decision success presentations, etc.) that vibrate the operation means. The specific effects (various reach effects, chance effects, etc.) that make players expect the execution of the special game can be executed, and the vibration effects include a first vibration effect (vibration effects related to development effects, cut-in effects, decision effects, re-draw effects, etc.) that generates an effective operation period and is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the effective operation period, and a second vibration effect (vibration effects related to pre-reading vibration effects, step-up notice effects, confirmation effects, etc.) that is executed without generating the effective period, and the game effects include a first game effect (variable effect corresponding to a first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (variable effect corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the execution rate of the first vibration effect during the execution of the specific effect is different between the case where the first game effect in which the specific effect is executed in the specific game state and the case where the second game effect in which the specific effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eighth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an operation means (effect button, effect lever) operable by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect (a variable effect involving a variable display of the effect pattern, a variable effect only showing a variable display of the fourth pattern, a variable effect only flashing a lamp) according to the result of the judgment, and the effect control means is provided with a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, step-up advance notice effect, dialogue advance notice effect) for vibrating the operation means during the execution of the game effect. The vibration effects include a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a decision effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period while generating an operation effective period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a decision effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the effective period, and the game effects include a first game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the execution ratio of the second vibration effect is different between the case where the first game effect is executed in the specific game state and the case where the second game effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a game state that is more advantageous to the player than in a normal game state. The game machine includes a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game state to a specific game state (probable game state, normal time-saving game state, special time-saving game state) that is convenient for the player, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes game presentations (variation presentations with variable display of presentation symbols, variation presentations with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variation presentations with only lamp flashing) according to the results of the judgment, and the presentation control means controls vibration presentations (pre-reading vibration presentations, step-up notice presentations, dialogue notice presentations, cut-ins, etc.) that vibrate the operation means during the execution of the game presentations. The vibration effects include a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a development effect, a cut-in effect, a decision effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that generates an effective operation period and is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the effective operation period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a decision effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the effective period. The game effects include a first game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. The execution rate of the second vibration effect during the execution of the specific effect is different between the case where the first game effect in which the specific effect is executed in the specific game state and the case where the second game effect in which the specific effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a tenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, a movable performance member (first movable member, second movable member) that can operate in a predetermined manner, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), and a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information. ), a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific game state (probability change game state, normal time-saving game state, special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a game presentation (a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern, a variable presentation only of a variable display of a fourth pattern, a variable presentation only of a lamp flashing) according to the result of the determination, and the presentation control means controls the It is possible to execute a first action presentation (pre-reading action presentation, role object preview presentation at the start of variation, etc.) for operating the movable presentation means in a first mode, and a second action presentation (successful decision presentation, etc.) for operating the movable presentation means in a second mode, and the game presentation includes a first game presentation (variation presentation corresponding to a first special pattern) according to a result of a judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game presentation (variation presentation corresponding to a second special pattern) according to a result of a judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the first action presentation can be executed in the first game presentation that notifies the player that the special game will not be executed in the normal game state, but the execution of the first action presentation is restricted in the first game presentation that notifies the player that the special game will not be executed in the specific game state, and the second action presentation can be executed in the first game presentation that notifies the player that the special game will be executed in the normal game state and the first game presentation that notifies the player that the special game will be executed in the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, a light-emitting means (winning hole lamp) capable of emitting light in a predetermined manner, movable performance members (first movable member, second movable member) capable of operating in a predetermined manner, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), and a control means for executing the special game based on the judgment information. a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific game state (special time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state based on the determination that the special game is not executed; and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a game presentation (a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern, a variable presentation only of a variable display of a fourth pattern, a variable presentation only of a lamp flashing) according to the result of the determination, and the presentation control means controls the light emitting means to a predetermined state. A light-emitting effect (lamp change effect by foresight) that suggests the possibility of the special game being executed can be executed by illuminating the movable effect means in a predetermined manner during the execution of the game effect (foresight action effect, character preview effect at the start of variation) that suggests the possibility of the special game being executed can be executed, and the game effect includes a first game effect (variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (variation effect corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and during the execution of the first game effect that notifies the non-execution of the special game in the normal game state, the light-emitting effect can be executed and the action effect can be executed, and during the execution of the first game effect that notifies the non-execution of the special game in the specific game state, the execution of the light-emitting effect can be restricted and the execution of the action effect can be restricted. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, a presentation means for performing a predetermined presentation (winning hole lamp NR, top lamp 10b, etc.), an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information. The game device is provided with a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing game presentations (variable presentations with variable display of presentation symbols, variable presentations with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable presentations with only blinking lamps) according to the results of the judgment, the presentation control means being capable of executing suggestive presentations (lamp change presentations with foresight, light emission presentations at the time of winning, etc.) which suggest the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed using the presentation means, and the game presentations include the first acquisition condition. The presenting means includes a first game presentation (a variable presentation corresponding to a first special symbol) according to a result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and a second game presentation (a variable presentation corresponding to a second special symbol) according to a result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. The presenting means includes a first mode (a winning port lamp flashes white), a second mode (a winning port lamp lights up blue) different from the first suggestion mode, a third mode (a top lamp lights up) different from the second mode, and a fourth mode (a winning port lamp and a top lamp are turned off) different from the third mode. The suggestion mode includes a first mode (a winning port lamp flashes white), a second mode (a winning port lamp lights up blue) different from the first suggestion mode, a third mode (a top lamp lights up) different from the second mode, and a fourth mode (a winning port lamp and a top lamp are turned off). The system includes a suggestive effect (a lamp change effect based on foresight) and a second suggestive effect (a light-up effect when a win is won) that is different from the first suggestive effect, and when the first suggestive effect is executed, the presentation means can be in the first and second modes, and when the second suggestive effect is executed, the presentation means can be in the third mode, and the presentation means is more likely to be in the fourth mode when the first game presentation is executed in the specific game state than when the first game presentation is executed in the normal game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the fulfillment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the judgment that the special game is not executed, and a game presentation (a variable presentation with a variable display of the presentation pattern, a variable presentation with only a variable display of the fourth pattern, a variable presentation with only a flashing lamp) depending on the result of the judgment. The game device includes a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes the game presentation in one of a plurality of game presentation patterns (variable presentation patterns), and the game presentation includes a first game presentation (variable presentation corresponding to a first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game presentation (variable presentation corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the same game presentation pattern is more likely to be executed when the first game presentation that notifies the non-execution of the special game is executed in the specific game state than when the first game presentation that notifies the non-execution of the special game is executed in the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 14th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine includes an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game state to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the judgment that the special game is not executed, and a performance control means (performance The control board 130) is provided, and the presentation control means is capable of executing an operation presentation (such as a dialogue preview presentation, a pseudo consecutive presentation, a development presentation, a cut-in presentation, and a deciding presentation) that indicates the expectation of the special game being executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period during the execution of the game presentation, and the game presentation includes a first game presentation (a variable presentation corresponding to a first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game presentation (a variable presentation corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the operation presentation is more difficult to execute when the first game presentation that notifies the non-execution of the special game is executed in the specific game state than when the first game presentation that notifies the non-execution of the special game is executed in the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the special game to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the judgment that the special game is not executed, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 110) for executing a game presentation (a variable presentation with a variable display of a presentation pattern, a variable presentation with only a variable display of a fourth pattern, a variable presentation with only a blinking lamp) according to the result of the judgment. The game device includes a display control means for controlling the game effects to one of a plurality of display modes (including a look-ahead mode), and the game effects include a first game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. In this case, the game effect is more difficult to change in the display mode (it is more difficult to execute an SP/SPSP reach effect that results in a loss, it is easier to win a mode update lottery, it is more difficult to execute a look-ahead zone effect, there are fewer display modes, etc.) when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state than when the first game effect is executed in the normal game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆As a 16th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and The game machine includes a state control means (main control board 110) that can control a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state based on a determination that a game is not being executed, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (a variable performance with a variable display of a performance pattern, a variable performance with only a variable display of a fourth pattern, a variable performance with only a blinking lamp) according to the result of the determination, and the performance control means vibrates the operation means during the execution of the game performance (a vibration performance with a pre-reading vibration performance, a standby ... The vibration effects include a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a successful decision effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the effective operation period while generating an effective operation period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a decision effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the effective period, and the game effects include a first game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the execution ratio of the first vibration effect is different between when the first game effect is executed in the normal game state and when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 17th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and The game machine includes a state control means (main control board 110) that can control a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state based on a determination that a game is not being executed, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (a variable performance with a variable display of a performance pattern, a variable performance with only a variable display of a fourth pattern, a variable performance with only a blinking lamp) according to the result of the determination, and the performance control means vibrates the operation means during the execution of the game performance (a vibration performance with a pre-reading vibration performance, a standby ... The vibration effects include a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a successful decision effect, etc.) that generates an effective operation period and is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the effective operation period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a decision effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the effective period. The game effects include a first game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the execution ratio of the second vibration effect is different between when the first game effect is executed in the normal game state and when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an 18th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the game state to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the judgment that the special game is not executed, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a variable presentation involving a variable display of a presentation pattern on a display means according to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means controls the game state during the execution of the variable presentation. The display means can dynamically display a background image and perform multiple preview effects that indicate the expectation that the special game will be performed. The dynamic display of the background image can be performed, but a preview restriction period can be generated during which the execution of the multiple preview effects is restricted. The variable effects include a first variable effect (a variable effect corresponding to a first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second variable effect (a variable effect corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. The first variable effect that notifies the non-execution of the special game in the specific game state is more likely to be dominated by the preview restriction period than the first variable effect that notifies the non-execution of the special game in the normal game state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 19th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the game state to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the judgment that the special game is not executed, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern on a display means according to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is configured to control the game state to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the judgment that the special game is not executed. In the game, the dynamic display of the background image of the display means and a plurality of preview effects suggesting the expectation of the special game being executed can be executed, and the dynamic display of the background image can be executed, but a preview restriction period can be generated during which the execution of the plurality of preview effects is restricted, and the variable effects include a first variable effect (variable effect corresponding to a first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second variable effect (variable effect corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the proportion of the entire performance period being the preview restriction period differs between when the first variable effect is executed in the normal game state and when the first variable effect is executed in the specific game state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 20th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering a first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering a second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the special game to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the judgment that the special game is not executed, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern on a display means according to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means The control means can execute a prediction effect (such as a reach-triggering effect) that suggests the possibility of a reach effect being executed during execution of the change effect, and the change effect includes a first change effect (a change effect corresponding to a first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second change effect (a change effect corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the ratio of effects in which the prediction effect is executed but the reach effect is not executed is different between a case in which the second change effect that notifies the non-execution of the special game is executed in the specific game state and a case in which the first change effect that notifies the non-execution of the special game is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 21st configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and The game machine includes a state control means (main control board 110) that can control a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state based on a determination that a game is not being executed, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (a variable performance with a variable display of a performance pattern, a variable performance with only a variable display of a fourth pattern, a variable performance with only a blinking lamp) according to the result of the determination, and the performance control means vibrates the operation means during the execution of the game performance (a vibration performance with a pre-reading vibration performance, a standby ... The vibration effects include a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a successful decision effect, etc.) that generates an effective operation period and is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the effective operation period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a decision effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the effective period. The game effects include a first game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the execution ratio of the first vibration effect is different between when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state and when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 22nd configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and The game machine includes a state control means (main control board 110) that can control a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state based on a determination that a game is not being executed, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (a variable performance with a variable display of a performance pattern, a variable performance with only a variable display of a fourth pattern, a variable performance with only a blinking lamp) according to the result of the determination, and the performance control means vibrates the operation means during the execution of the game performance (a vibration performance with a pre-reading vibration performance, a standby ... The vibration effects include a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the effective operation period while generating an effective operation period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a decision effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the effective period, and the game effects include a first game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the execution ratio of the second vibration effect is different between the case where the second game effect is executed in the specific game state and the case where the first game effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 23rd configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific game state (probability change game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a variable presentation involving a variable display of a presentation pattern on a display means according to the result of the judgment, and the specific game state is a first specific game state (probability change game state, normal time-saving game state) controlled according to the end of the special game, and a second specific game state controlled based on the judgment that the special game is not executed. The display control means is capable of dynamically displaying the background image of the display means and displaying a plurality of preview effects indicating the expectation of the special game during the variable performance, and is capable of generating a preview restriction period during which the dynamic display of the background image is executed but the execution of the plurality of preview effects is restricted. The variable performance includes a first variable performance (a variable performance corresponding to a first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second variable performance (a variable performance corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the first variable performance notifying the non-execution of the special game in the second specific game state is more likely to have a larger proportion of the preview restriction period than the second variable performance notifying the non-execution of the special game in the first specific game state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 24th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probable bonus game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a game presentation according to the result of the judgment, and the specific game state is a first specific game state (probable bonus game state, normal time-saving game state) that is controlled in response to the end of the special game, and a second specific game state ( The display control means is capable of dynamically displaying the background image of the display means and displaying a plurality of preview effects indicating the expectation of the special game during the variable performance, and is capable of generating a preview restriction period during which the dynamic display of the background image is executed but the execution of the plurality of preview effects is restricted. The game performance includes a first game performance (a variable performance corresponding to a first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game performance (a variable performance corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the proportion of the entire performance period being the preview restriction period differs between the case where the second game performance is executed in the first specific game state and the case where the first game performance is executed in the second specific game state. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 25th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, a movable performance member (first movable member, second movable member) that can operate in a predetermined manner, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and The present invention is provided with a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game to a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) more advantageous to the player than the special game state, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing game presentations in accordance with the result of the judgment, the specific game state having a first specific game state (probability variable game state, normal time-saving game state) controlled in accordance with the end of the special game, and a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) controlled based on the judgment that the special game is not to be executed, and the presentation control means controls the game presentation. A first action presentation (pre-reading action presentation, variation start feature notice presentation, etc.) that operates the movable presentation means in a first manner during execution, and a second action presentation (decision success presentation, etc.) that operates the movable presentation means in a second manner can be executed, and the game presentation includes a first game presentation (variation presentation corresponding to a first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game presentation (variation presentation corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. In addition, the second action presentation can be executed in the first game presentation that notifies the execution of the special game in the first specific game state and the first game presentation that notifies the execution of the special game in the second specific game state, and the first action presentation can be executed in the second game presentation that notifies the non-execution of the special game in the first specific game state, but the execution of the first action presentation is restricted in the first game presentation that notifies the non-execution of the special game in the second specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆As a 26th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with movable performance members (first movable member, second movable member) operable in a predetermined manner, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probability change game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game performance according to the result of the judgment, and the specific game state is a first specific game state (probability change game state) that is controlled in response to the end of the special game. , normal time-saving game state) and a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is controlled based on the determination that the special game is not being executed, and the presentation control means can execute the game presentation in any of a plurality of game presentation patterns (variable presentation patterns), and the game presentation includes a first game presentation (variable presentation corresponding to a first special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game presentation (variable presentation corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the same game presentation pattern is more likely to be executed when the first game presentation that notifies the non-execution of the special game is executed in the second specific game state than when the second game presentation that notifies the non-execution of the special game is executed in the first specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 27th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a game state that is more advantageous to the player than in a normal game state. The game machine includes a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game machine to a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game state) that is advantageous to the player, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a game presentation according to the result of the judgment, and the specific game state includes a first specific game state (probability variable game state, normal time-saving game state) that is controlled according to the end of the special game, and a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is controlled based on the judgment that the special game is not to be executed, and the presentation control means vibrates the operation means during the execution of the game presentation. The vibration effects include a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a successful decision effect, etc.) that generates an effective operation period and is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the effective operation period (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a decision effect, a re-draw effect, etc.), and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a decision effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the effective period. The game effects include a first game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the execution ratio of the first vibration effect is different between the case where the second game effect is executed in the first specific game state and the case where the first game effect is executed in the second specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 28th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to a player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a game state that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game state. The game machine includes a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game machine to a specific game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a game presentation in accordance with the result of the judgment, and the specific game state includes a first specific game state (probability variable game state, normal time-saving game state) controlled in accordance with the end of the special game, and a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) controlled based on the judgment that the special game is not to be executed, and the presentation control means swings the operation means during the execution of the game presentation. The vibration effects include a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a successful decision effect, etc.) that generates an effective operation period and is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the effective operation period (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a decision effect, a re-draw effect, etc.), and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a decision effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the effective period. The game effects include a first game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a first special pattern) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a second special pattern) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the execution ratio of the second vibration effect is different between the case where the second game effect is executed in the first specific game state and the case where the first game effect is executed in the second specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 29th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the machine is provided with an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific game state (variable probability game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a game presentation according to the result of the judgment, and the specific game state is The game has a first specific game state (probability bonus game state, normal time-saving game state) that is controlled in response to the end of the special game, and a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is controlled based on the determination that the special game is not being executed. The presentation control means can execute a specific notification (a display to prevent addiction, a display to prevent forgetting to take a card, etc.) related to the game in relation to the end of the special game. If the special game (a so-called consecutive win) is executed during the first specific game state, the execution of the specific notification is restricted, and if the special game (a so-called first win) is executed during the second specific game state, the specific notification can be executed. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆As a 30th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering a starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (variable probability game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game state, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a game presentation according to the result of the judgment, and the specific game state is a first specific game state that is controlled according to the end of the special game. The game has a first specific game state (a probability variation game state, a normal time-saving game state) and a second specific game state (a special time-saving game state) that is controlled based on the determination that the special game is not being executed, and the presentation control means can execute a specific notification (a display to prevent addiction, a display to prevent forgetting to take a card, etc.) related to the end of the special game, and when the special game (a so-called first win) is executed during the normal game state, the execution of the specific notification is restricted when the special game (a so-called consecutive win) is executed during the first specific game state, and when the special game (a so-called first win) is executed during the second specific game state, the specific notification can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆As a 31st configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the entry of a gaming medium into a start area (start port) provided in a gaming area, a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the state to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the judgment that the special game is not to be executed, and a control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the judgment result. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing the game presentation. When the game medium is released into the second area of the game area during the normal game state, the presentation control means can execute a first notification presentation (right-hit error notification) for a predetermined period of time to prompt the release of the game medium into the first area of the game area, and when the specific game state is started, a second notification presentation (right-hit notification) to prompt the release of the game medium into the second area of the game area can be executed. If the specific game state is started during the execution of the first notification presentation, the second notification presentation can be executed while continuing the first notification. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆As a 32nd configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment that the special game is not to be executed. The game device is equipped with a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) which executes game presentations (variable presentations with variable display of presentation symbols, variable presentations with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable presentations with only blinking lamps) according to the results of the judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing specific presentations (continuous notice presentations, icon change presentations, timer presentations, etc.) which give the player hope for the execution of the special game during the game presentation, and according to the operation of the operation means, The game state can be set to a first setting state (normal setting) and a second setting state (simple setting) having different execution rates of the specific effects, and the game effects include a first game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a first special pattern) according to a result of a judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a second special pattern) according to a result of a judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the specific effects include a first specific effect (e.g., a continuous preview effect) and a second specific effect (e.g., a timer effect) different from the first specific effect, and when the first game effect is executed in the normal game state after the first setting state is set, the execution rate of the first specific effect is a first rate (high appearance rate) and the execution rate of the second specific effect is a second rate (high appearance rate), and when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state after the first setting state is set, the execution rate of the first specific effect is a rate different from the first rate (low appearance rate) and the execution rate of the second specific effect is a rate different from the second rate (low appearance rate). This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆As a 33rd configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine includes an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a specific game that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game state. The game machine includes a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game state (probability game state, various time-saving game states), and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing game presentations (variable presentations with variable display of presentation symbols, variable presentations with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable presentations with only lamp flashing) according to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing specific presentations (continuous notice presentations, icon change presentations, timer presentations, etc.) that give the player hope for the execution of the special game during the game presentation, and executes the specific presentations according to the operation of the operation means. The game state can be set to a first setting state (normal setting) and a second setting state (simple setting) having different row ratios, the game presentation includes a first game presentation (a variable presentation corresponding to a first special symbol) according to a result of a judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game presentation (a variable presentation corresponding to a second special symbol) according to a result of a judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, the specific presentation includes a first specific presentation (e.g., a continuous preview presentation) and a second specific presentation (e.g., a timer presentation) different from the first specific presentation, and when the first game presentation is executed in the normal game state after the first setting state is set, the execution ratio of the first specific presentation is a first ratio (high appearance rate) and the execution ratio of the second specific presentation is a second ratio (high appearance rate), and when the first game presentation is executed in the specific game state after the first setting state is set, the execution ratio of the first specific presentation is a ratio different from the first ratio (low appearance rate) and the execution ratio of the second specific presentation is a ratio different from the second ratio (low appearance rate). This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆As a 34th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a specific game state (variable probability game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The game device includes a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, variable performance with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable performance with only lamp flashing) according to the result of the judgment, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, variable performance with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable performance with only lamp flashing), and the specific game state includes a first specific game state (probability variable game state, normal time-limited game state) controlled according to the end of the special game, and a second specific game state (special time-limited game state) controlled based on the judgment that the special game is not executed, and the performance control means controls a specific performance (a The game presentation can execute a specific presentation (e.g., an icon changing presentation, a timer presentation, etc.), and can be set to a first setting state (normal setting) and a second setting state (simple setting) having different execution rates of the specific presentation depending on the operation of the operating means, and the game presentation includes a first game presentation (a variable presentation corresponding to a first special symbol) depending on the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game presentation (a variable presentation corresponding to a second special symbol) depending on the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the specific presentation includes a first specific presentation (e.g., a continuous notice presentation), and includes a different second specific effect (e.g., a timer effect), and when the second game effect is executed in the first specific game state after the first setting state is set, the execution rate of the first specific effect is a first rate (high occurrence rate) and the execution rate of the second specific effect is a second rate (high occurrence rate), and when the first game effect is executed in the second specific game state after the first setting state is set, the execution rate of the first specific effect is a rate different from the first rate (low occurrence rate) and the execution rate of the second specific effect is a rate different from the second rate (low occurrence rate). Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆As a 35th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a specific game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The game machine includes a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game state (probability game state, various time-saving game states), and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing game presentations (variable presentations with variable display of presentation symbols, variable presentations with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable presentations with only lamp flashing) according to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing specific presentations (continuous notice presentations, icon change presentations, timer presentations, etc.) that give the player hope for the execution of the special game during the game presentation, and executes the specific presentations according to the operation of the operation means. The game state can be set to a first setting state (normal setting) and a second setting state (simple setting) having different row ratios, the game presentation includes a first game presentation (a variable presentation corresponding to a first special symbol) according to a result of a judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game presentation (a variable presentation corresponding to a second special symbol) according to a result of a judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, the specific presentation includes a first specific presentation (e.g., a continuous preview presentation) and a second specific presentation (e.g., a timer presentation) different from the first specific presentation, and when the second game presentation is executed in the specific game state after the first setting state is set, the execution ratio of the first specific presentation is a first ratio (high appearance rate) and the execution ratio of the second specific presentation is a second ratio (high appearance rate), and when the first game presentation is executed in the specific game state after the first setting state is set, the execution ratio of the first specific presentation is a ratio different from the first ratio (low appearance rate) and the execution ratio of the second specific presentation is a ratio different from the second ratio (low appearance rate). This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆As a 36th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine includes an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a state that can be controlled to a specific game state (variable probability game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state. The game device is provided with a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing game presentations (variable presentations with variable display of presentation symbols, variable presentations with only variable display of a fourth symbol, variable presentations with only blinking of lamps) according to the results of the judgment, and the specific game states include a first specific game state (probable variable game state, normal time-saving game state) controlled according to the end of the special game, and a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) controlled based on the judgment that the special game is not to be executed, and the presentation control means controls a specific presentation (continuous notice The game device can execute a specific effect (such as a special effect, an icon change effect, a timer effect, etc.), and can set a first setting state (normal setting) and a second setting state (simple setting) in which the execution rate of the specific effect is different according to the operation of the operating means. The game effect includes a first game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. The specific effect includes a first specific effect (for example, a continuous notice effect) and a second specific effect (such as a continuous notice effect) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. When the second game performance is executed in the second specific game state after the first setting state is set, the execution rate of the first specific performance is a first rate (high occurrence rate) and the execution rate of the second specific performance is a second rate (high occurrence rate), and when the first game performance is executed in the first specific game state after the first setting state is set, the execution rate of the first specific performance is a rate different from the first rate (low occurrence rate) and the execution rate of the second specific performance is a rate different from the second rate (low occurrence rate). Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆As a 37th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine includes an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a state that can be controlled to a specific game state (variable probability game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state. The game device is provided with a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state of the game and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing game presentations (variable presentations with variable display of presentation symbols, variable presentations with only variable display of a fourth symbol, variable presentations with only blinking of lamps) according to the results of the judgment, and the specific game states include a first specific game state (probable variable game state, normal time-saving game state) controlled according to the end of the special game, and a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) controlled based on the judgment that the special game is not to be executed, and the presentation control means controls a specific presentation (continuous notice The game device can execute a specific effect (such as a special effect, an icon change effect, a timer effect, etc.), and can set a first setting state (normal setting) and a second setting state (simple setting) in which the execution rate of the specific effect is different according to the operation of the operating means. The game effect includes a first game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. The specific effect includes a first specific effect (for example, a continuous notice effect) and a second specific effect (such as a continuous notice effect) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. When the second game performance is executed in the first specific game state after the first setting state is set, the execution rate of the first specific performance is a first rate (high occurrence rate) and the execution rate of the second specific performance is a second rate (high occurrence rate), and when the first game performance is executed in the second specific game state after the first setting state is set, the execution rate of the first specific performance is a rate different from the first rate (low occurrence rate) and the execution rate of the second specific performance is a rate different from the second rate (low occurrence rate). Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

<Contents of the Invention Described in the Present Embodiment 19>
In conventional gaming machines, it is common to determine whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to a player based on the determination information acquired based on the establishment of a starting condition, and execute a game performance (variable performance) according to the result of the determination. In such gaming machines, there are also known ones that execute performance using a predetermined performance device (performance button, movable member, lamp, image display device, etc.) (for example, see JP 2019-033816 A). However, in conventional gaming machines such as those described in the above patent documents, there was a problem that the interest of the game was low.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, a light emitting means (winning hole lamp) that can be changed to one of a plurality of notification modes, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the special game ends. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a game presentation (a variable presentation with a variable display of a presentation symbol, a variable presentation with only a variable display of a fourth symbol, or a variable presentation with only a blinking lamp) according to the result of the judgment. The presentation control means is capable of displaying execution information (the icon) corresponding to the judgment information with which the game presentation has been started, and indicates the expectation of the special game being executed by displaying the execution information in a special form (special icon) different from a normal form (normal icon). It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation by changing the light emitting means to a specific notification mode (blue light emission, red light emission, rainbow light emission, etc.) corresponding to the execution information being displayed in the special mode, thereby executing a change effect (lamp change effect) suggesting the degree of expectation, and during a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) after the start of the game effect, an operation effective period is generated, and a predetermined effect is performed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period (vibration effect related to a dialogue advancement effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, etc.), and It is possible to execute vibration effects (such as vibration effects related to look-ahead vibration effects, step-up notice effects, and confirmation effects) that vibrate the operating means without generating an effective period, and the execution ratio of the vibration effects during a predetermined period after the start of the game effects (until the first temporary stop after high-speed fluctuation) differs between the normal game state and the specific game state, and when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the change effect is resumed and the game control state is restored, the execution information is not executed and the light-emitting means is set to a notification mode (white light emission, off) different from the specific notification mode. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆ As a second configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine includes an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the judgment that the special game is not executed. The present invention is provided with a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled in a state in which the player can change the display pattern according to the result of the judgment, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a variable performance that changes and displays the performance pattern according to the result of the judgment, and the performance control means generates an operation effective period during a predetermined period (until the first temporary stop after the high-speed change) after the start of the variable performance, and performs a predetermined performance according to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period (vibration performance related to a dialogue advancement performance, a pseudo consecutive performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-draw performance, etc.), and and a vibration effect (such as a look-ahead vibration effect or a vibration effect related to a step-up notice effect) that vibrates the operation means without generating a warning. In a specific variation effect (variation effect involving pseudo consecutive wins) in which the variation display of the performance symbols is performed multiple times in a simulated manner, a stage effect (story effect) in which the performance can progress stepwise and a reach effect that gives rise to the expectation that the special game will be executed can be executed. The stage effect includes a first stage effect (story 1) and a second stage effect (story 2) that is executed after the first stage effect. The reach effect includes a first reach effect (normal reach effect) and a second reach effect (SP/SPSP reach effect) in which the expectation that the special game will be executed is higher than that of the first reach effect. In the specific variation effect, the second stage effect can be executed after the first reach effect is executed, but the second stage effect is not executed after the second reach effect is executed, and the execution rate of the vibration effect in a predetermined period after the start of the variation effect differs between the normal game state and the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, a light emitting means (winning hole lamp) that can be changed to one of a plurality of notification modes, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance pattern, variable performance with only variable display of the fourth pattern, variable performance with only lamp flashing) according to the result of the judgment, the performance control means is capable of executing an initial vibration that vibrates the operating means after the start of power supply, and is capable of displaying execution information (the icon in question) corresponding to the judgment information from which the game performance has been started, and the special game is executed by displaying the execution information in a special mode (special icon) different from the normal mode (normal icon). It is possible to suggest the degree of expectation that the game will be played, and it is possible to execute a change effect (lamp change effect) that suggests the degree of expectation by changing the light-emitting means to a specific notification mode (blue light emission, red light emission, rainbow light emission, etc.) corresponding to the execution information displayed in the special mode. During the execution of the game effect, it is possible to execute an operation effect that generates an operation effective period and performs a predetermined effect according to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period (vibration effect related to dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive performance, development performance, cut-in performance, decision performance, re-lottery performance, etc.), and a vibration effect that vibrates the operation means without generating the operation effective period (vibration effect related to pre-reading vibration effect, step-up preview effect, decision performance, etc.). When the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the change effect is resumed and the game control state is restored, the execution information is not performed and the light-emitting means becomes a notification mode different from the specific notification mode (white light emission, off), and it is possible to vibrate the operation means in different modes for the initial vibration and the vibration effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

◆ As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an operation means (effect button, effect lever, launch handle) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and an operation means (main control board 110) that executes a variable performance (variable performance) that changes and displays the performance pattern depending on the result of the judgment. and a control means for controlling the presentation of the game (a presentation control board 130), the operation means including a first operation means (a presentation button) and a second operation means (a presentation lever, a launch handle) different from the first operation means, the presentation control means generating an effective operation period during the execution of the variable presentation, and performing a predetermined presentation in response to the operation of the first operation means during the effective operation period (vibration presentation related to a dialogue preview presentation, a pseudo consecutive presentation, a development presentation, a cut-in presentation, a deciding presentation, a re-draw presentation, etc.), and a control means for controlling the first operation means without generating the effective operation period. It is possible to execute a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, step-up notice effect, etc.) that vibrates the operation means, and in a specific variation effect (variation effect with pseudo consecutive wins) in which the variation display of the performance pattern is performed multiple times in a pseudo manner, it is possible to execute a stage effect (story effect) in which the performance can progress step by step, and a reach effect that gives the player the expectation that the special game will be executed. When the vibration effect is executed during the operation of the second operation means, the vibration related to the vibration effect is transmitted to the player via the second operation means, and the stage effect includes a first stage effect (story 1) and a second stage effect (story 2) that is executed after the first stage effect, and the reach effect includes a first reach effect (normal reach effect) and a second reach effect (SP/SPSP reach effect) that has a higher expectation that the special game will be executed than the first reach effect, and in the specific variation effect, the second stage effect can be executed after the first reach effect is executed, but the second stage effect is not executed after the second reach effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fifth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine includes an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, a light emitting means (winning hole lamp) that can be changed to one of a plurality of notification modes, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole), a storage means (main control board 110) that stores the judgment information acquired by the acquisition means as pending memory, and a judgment means (main control board a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific game state (probability game state, various time-saving game states) which are more advantageous to a player than a normal game state; and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a variable presentation which causes a presentation pattern to be displayed in a variable manner according to the result of the judgment, the presentation control means being capable of displaying execution information (the icon) corresponding to the judgment information according to which the variable presentation was started, and displaying the execution information in a special mode (special icon) different from a normal mode (normal icon). ) to suggest the expectation of the special game being executed, and by changing the light-emitting means to a specific notification mode (blue light emission, red light emission, rainbow light emission, etc.) corresponding to the execution information being displayed in the special mode, a change effect (lamp change effect) suggesting the expectation can be executed, and during the execution of the change effect, an operation effective period is generated, and a predetermined effect is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period (vibration effect related to a dialogue advance effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, etc.), and It is possible to execute a vibration effect (predictive vibration effect) that vibrates the operating means without generating an effective period, and the vibration effect is executed according to the result of the advance judgment, and when the power supply that was stopped during the execution of the change effect is resumed and the game control state is restored, the execution information is not executed and the light emitting means becomes a notification mode different from the specific notification mode (white light emission, off), and when the change effect in which a reach effect is executed during the normal game state is executed, the vibration effect is executed more frequently before the reach effect is executed than during the reach effect. This makes it possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆As a sixth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine includes an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a game state that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game state after the special game ends. The apparatus is equipped with a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific game state (probability game state, normal time-saving game state), and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing game presentations (variation presentations with variable display of presentation symbols, variation presentations with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variation presentations with only lamp flashing) according to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means controls vibration presentations (vibration presentations related to pre-reading vibration presentations, dialogue advancement presentations, pseudo consecutive presentations, development presentations, cut-in presentations, decision presentations, re-draw presentations, confirmation presentations, etc.) for vibrating the operation means during the execution of the game presentations. the vibration effects include a first vibration effect (a vibration effect relating to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a decision effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) which is executed in response to an operation of the operating means during the effective operation period while generating an operation valid period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect relating to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a decision effect, etc.) which is executed without generating the effective period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their performance periods do not overlap, and the game effects include a first game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a first special pattern) according to a result of a determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a second special pattern) according to a result of a determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the execution rate of the second vibration effect in a predetermined period after the start of the game effect (until the first provisional stop after high-speed variation) is different between a case in which the first game effect is executed in the normal game state and a case in which the first game effect is executed in the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆As a seventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a special game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the special game ends. The game machine is equipped with a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a fixed game state (probability game state, normal time-saving game state), and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing game presentations (variation presentations with variable display of presentation symbols, variation presentations with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variation presentations with only lamp flashing) according to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means executes vibration presentations (vibration presentations related to pre-reading vibration presentations, dialogue advancement presentations, pseudo consecutive presentations, development presentations, cut-in presentations, decision presentations, re-draw presentations, confirmation presentations, etc.) that vibrate the operation means during the execution of the game presentations. The vibration effects include a first vibration effect (a vibration effect relating to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a decision effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) which generates an operation valid period and is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation valid period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect relating to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a determination effect, etc.) which is executed without generating the valid period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their performance periods do not overlap. The game effects include a first game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a first special pattern) according to a result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a second special pattern) according to a result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the execution rate of the second vibration effect in a predetermined period after the start of the game effect (until the first provisional stop after high-speed variation) is different between a case where the first game effect is executed in the normal game state and a case where the second game effect is executed in the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆As an eighth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a control means for changing the state of the game from a normal game state based on the judgment that the special game is not to be executed. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a game presentation (a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation symbol, a variable presentation only of a variable display of a fourth symbol, a variable presentation only of a blinking lamp) according to the result of the judgment. The presentation control means controls a vibration presentation (a pre-reading vibration presentation, a dialogue preview presentation, a pseudo consecutive presentation, a development presentation, a cut-in presentation, a deciding presentation, a re-draw presentation, a confirmation presentation, etc.) that vibrates the operation means during the execution of the game presentation. The vibration effects include a first vibration effect (a vibration effect relating to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a decision effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that generates an operation valid period and is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation valid period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect relating to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a determination effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their performance periods do not overlap. The game effects include a first game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a first special pattern) according to a result of a determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a second special pattern) according to a result of a determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the execution rate of the second vibration effect in a predetermined period after the start of the game effect (until the first provisional stop after high-speed variation) is different between a case in which the first game effect is executed in the normal game state and a case in which the first game effect is executed in the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆As a ninth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a control means for changing the state of the game from a normal game state based on the judgment that the special game is not to be executed. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a game presentation (a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation symbol, a variable presentation only of a variable display of a fourth symbol, a variable presentation only of a blinking lamp) according to the result of the judgment. The presentation control means controls a vibration presentation (a pre-reading vibration presentation, a dialogue preview presentation, a pseudo consecutive presentation, a development presentation, a cut-in presentation, a deciding presentation, a re-draw presentation, a confirmation presentation, etc.) that vibrates the operation means during the execution of the game presentation. The vibration effects include a first vibration effect (a vibration effect relating to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a decision effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that generates an operation valid period and is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation valid period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect relating to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a determination effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their performance periods do not overlap. The game effects include a first game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a first special pattern) according to a result of a determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a second special pattern) according to a result of a determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the execution rate of the second vibration effect in a predetermined period after the start of the game effect (until the first provisional stop after high-speed variation) is different between a case in which the first game effect is executed in the normal game state and a case in which the second game effect is executed in the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆As a tenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an operating means (effect button, effect lever) operable by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a state control means ( The present invention is provided with a main control board 110) and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing game presentations (variable presentations with variable display of presentation symbols, variable presentations with only variable display of a fourth symbol, and variable presentations with only blinking lamps) according to the results of the judgment, and the specific game states include a first specific game state (probable bonus game state, normal time-saving game state) controlled according to the end of the special game, and a second specific game state (special time-saving game state) controlled based on the judgment that the special game is not to be executed, and the presentation control means controls vibration presentations (pre-reading vibration presentations, dialogue preview presentations, It is possible to execute vibration effects related to pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, cut-in effects, deciding effects, re-selection effects, and confirmation effects, and the vibration effects include a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, cut-in effects, deciding effects, re-selection effects, and the like) that is executed in response to an operation of the operation means during the effective operation period while generating an operation effective period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, and confirmation effects, and the like) that is executed without generating the effective period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect are arranged so that their performance periods do not overlap. The game presentation includes a first game presentation (a variation presentation corresponding to a first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game presentation (a variation presentation corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the execution rate of the second vibration presentation during a predetermined period after the start of the game presentation (until the first temporary stop after the high-speed fluctuation) is different between the case where the second game presentation is executed in the first specific game state and the case where the second game presentation is executed in the second specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest of the game.

◆As an eleventh configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a normal game state based on the judgment that the special game is not to be executed. and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game performance (a variable performance with a variable display of a performance symbol, a variable performance with only a variable display of a fourth symbol, a variable performance with only a blinking lamp) according to the result of the judgment, and the performance control means controls a vibration performance (a vibration performance related to a pre-reading vibration performance, a dialogue notice performance, a pseudo consecutive performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-draw performance, a confirmation performance, etc.) for vibrating the operation means during the execution of the game performance. the vibration effects include a first vibration effect (a vibration effect relating to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a decision effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) which is executed in response to an operation of the operating means during the effective operation period while generating an operation valid period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect relating to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a determination effect, etc.) which is executed without generating the effective period, the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their performance periods do not overlap, the game effects include a first game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a first special pattern) according to a result of a determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a second special pattern) according to a result of a determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the execution rate of the second vibration effect in a predetermined period after the start of the game effect (until the first provisional stop after high-speed variation) is different between a case in which the first game effect is executed in the specific game state and a case in which the second game effect is executed in the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆As a twelfth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine includes an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a game state that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game state after the special game ends. The game machine includes a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific game state (probability change game state, normal time-saving game state), and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing game presentations (variation presentations with variable display of presentation symbols, variation presentations with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variation presentations with only lamp flashing) according to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means executes vibration presentations (vibration presentations related to pre-reading vibration presentations, dialogue advancement presentations, pseudo consecutive presentations, development presentations, cut-in presentations, deciding presentations, re-draw presentations, confirmation presentations, etc.) that vibrate the operation means during the execution of the game presentations. The vibration effects include a first vibration effect (a vibration effect relating to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a decision effect, a re-lottery effect, etc.) which is executed in response to an operation of the operating means during the effective operation period while generating a valid operation period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect relating to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a determination effect, etc.) which is executed without generating the valid period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their performance periods do not overlap. The game effects include a first game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a first special pattern) according to a result of a determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a second special pattern) according to a result of a determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and an execution rate of the second vibration effect in a predetermined period after the start of the game effect (until the first provisional stop after a high-speed variation) is different between a case in which the first game effect is executed in the specific game state and a case in which the second game effect is executed in the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆As a thirteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a normal game state based on the judgment that the special game is not to be executed. and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game performance (a variable performance with a variable display of a performance symbol, a variable performance with only a variable display of a fourth symbol, a variable performance with only a blinking lamp) according to the result of the judgment, and the performance control means controls a vibration performance (a vibration performance related to a pre-reading vibration performance, a dialogue notice performance, a pseudo consecutive performance, a development performance, a cut-in performance, a deciding performance, a re-draw performance, a confirmation performance, etc.) for vibrating the operation means during the execution of the game performance. the vibration effects include a first vibration effect (a vibration effect relating to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a decision effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) which is executed in response to an operation of the operating means during the effective operation period while generating an operation valid period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect relating to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a determination effect, etc.) which is executed without generating the effective period, the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their performance periods do not overlap, the game effects include a first game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a first special pattern) according to a result of a determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a second special pattern) according to a result of a determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the execution rate of the second vibration effect in a predetermined period after the start of the game effect (until the first provisional stop after high-speed variation) is different between a case in which the first game effect is executed in the specific game state and a case in which the second game effect is executed in the specific game state. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆As a 14th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the machine is provided with an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special symbol judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) that executes a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, variable performance with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable performance with only lamp flashing) according to the result of the judgment, and the performance control means is capable of executing an initial vibration that vibrates the operation means after the start of power supply, and a vibration control means that vibrates the operation means during the execution of the game performance. It is possible to execute a vibration effect (vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, a final effect, etc.), and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that generates an effective operation period and is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the effective operation period, and a second vibration effect (vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a final effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the effective period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that the performance periods do not overlap, and the operation means can be vibrated in different ways for the initial vibration and the second vibration effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fifteenth configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the machine is provided with an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect (variable effect with variable display of effect pattern, variable effect with only variable display of the fourth pattern, variable effect with only lamp flashing) according to the result of the judgment, and the effect control means is a vibration effect (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue preview effect) that vibrates the operation means during the execution of the game effect. The vibration effects include a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, a confirmation effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the effective operation period while generating an effective operation period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a confirmation effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the effective period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their performance periods do not overlap, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be vibrated in different ways by the operation means. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 16th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with: an operation means (effect button, effect lever) operable by a player; an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special symbol judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or the establishment of a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole); a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information; and an effect control means (effect control board 130) for executing a game effect (variable effect with variable display of effect symbols, variable effect with only variable display of a fourth symbol, variable effect with only lamp flashing) according to the result of the judgment, the operation means including a first operation means (effect button) and a second operation means (effect lever, launch handle) different from the first operation means, and the effect control means is configured to control a previous game effect during the execution of the game effect. It is possible to execute vibration effects (vibration effects related to pre-reading vibration effects, dialogue preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, cut-in effects, deciding effects, re-draw effects, final effects, etc.) that vibrate the first operating means, and the vibration effects include a first vibration effect (vibration effects related to dialogue preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, cut-in effects, deciding effects, re-draw effects, etc.) that generates an operation valid period and is executed in response to the operation of the first operating means during the operation valid period, and a second vibration effect (vibration effects related to pre-reading vibration effects, step-up preview effects, final effects, etc.) that is executed without generating the valid period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their performance periods do not overlap, and when the second vibration effect is executed during the operation of the second operating means, the vibration related to the second vibration effect is transmitted to the player via the second operating means. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 17th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole), a storage means (main control board 110) that stores the judgment information acquired by the acquisition means as reserved memory, and a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information. 10), a pre-determination means (main control board 110) for pre-determining whether or not the special game is to be executed, a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling to a specific game state (probability change game state, various time-saving game states) which are more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing a variable presentation that changes and displays a presentation pattern according to the result of the determination, the operation means including a first operation means (presentation button) and a second operation means (presentation lever, launch handle) different from the first operation means, The effect control means is capable of executing vibration effects (vibration effects related to look-ahead vibration effects, dialogue preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, cut-in effects, deciding effects, re-draw effects, final effects, etc.) that vibrate the first operation means during the execution of the variable effects, and the vibration effects include a first vibration effect (vibration effects related to dialogue preview effects, pseudo consecutive effects, development effects, cut-in effects, deciding effects, re-draw effects, etc.) that generates an effective operation period and is executed in response to the operation of the first operation means during the effective operation period, and a second vibration effect (vibration effects related to look-ahead vibration effects, step-up preview effects, final effects, etc.) that is executed without generating the effective period, and the second vibration effect is executed in response to the result of the advance determination, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their effect periods do not overlap, and when the variable effects in which a reach effect is performed during the normal game state are executed, the second vibration effect is executed more frequently before the reach effect is executed than during the reach effect. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an 18th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game state. The game machine includes a state control means (main control board 110) that can control the game state to a certain probability game state, various time-saving game states, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes game presentations (variation presentations with variable display of presentation symbols, variation presentations with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variation presentations with only blinking of lamps) according to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means executes vibration presentations (vibration presentations related to pre-reading vibration presentations, dialogue advancement presentations, pseudo consecutive presentations, development presentations, cut-in presentations, deciding presentations, re-draw presentations, confirmation presentations, etc.) that vibrate the operation means during the execution of the game presentations. The vibration effects include a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a decision effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a decision effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the effective period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their performance periods do not overlap. The game effects include a first game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a first special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the expectation of the special game being executed is higher when the second vibration effect is executed during the second game effect in the specific game state than when the second vibration effect is executed during the first game effect in the normal game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 19th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine includes an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a specific game state (variable game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the special game ends (variable game state, The game device is provided with a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game device to a normal time-saving game state (normal time-saving game state), and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing game presentations (variable presentations with variable display of presentation symbols, variable presentations with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable presentations with only blinking of lamps) according to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing vibration presentations (vibration presentations relating to pre-reading vibration presentations, dialogue advancement presentations, pseudo consecutive presentations, development presentations, cut-in presentations, deciding presentations, re-draw presentations, confirmation presentations, etc.) for vibrating the operation means during the execution of the game presentation, and the vibration presentations include a function for setting an operation effective period. The game includes a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a decision effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a pattern alignment, a C pattern alignment, a confirmation effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the effective period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their performance periods do not overlap, and the game performance includes a first vibration effect and a second vibration effect that are executed in response to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. The first game presentation (variable presentation corresponding to the first special symbol) and the second game presentation (variable presentation corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition are included, and the number of types of the second vibration presentation (vibration presentation related to symbol matching, etc.) that may be executed during the first game presentation in the normal game state is greater than the number of types of the second vibration presentation (vibration presentation related to symbol matching, etc.) that may be executed during the first game presentation in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆As a 20th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a specific game that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the judgment that the special game is not executed. The game machine includes a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the state (special time-saving game state) and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing game presentations (variation presentations with variable display of presentation symbols, variation presentations with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variation presentations with only blinking of lamps) according to the result of the judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing vibration presentations (vibration presentations relating to pre-reading vibration presentations, dialogue advancement presentations, pseudo consecutive presentations, development presentations, cut-in presentations, decision presentations, re-draw presentations, confirmation presentations, etc.) that vibrate the operation means during the execution of the game presentations, and the vibration presentations include a vibration presentation relating to a pre-reading vibration presentation, a dialogue advancement presentation, a pseudo consecutive presentation, a development presentation, a cut-in presentation, a decision presentation, a re-draw presentation, a confirmation presentation, etc. The game includes a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a decision effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the operation means during the operation effective period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a pattern alignment, a C pattern alignment, a decision effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the effective period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their performance periods do not overlap, and the game effect is executed in response to a result of a determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. The first game presentation (variable presentation corresponding to the first special symbol) according to the first game presentation and the second game presentation (variable presentation corresponding to the second special symbol) according to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the number of types of the second vibration presentation (such as vibration presentation related to symbol matching) that may be executed during the first game presentation in the normal game state is greater than the number of types of the second vibration presentation (such as vibration presentation related to symbol matching) that may be executed during the first game presentation in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 21st configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a specific game state (probability bonus game state, normal time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the special game ends. and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing game presentations (variable presentations with variable display of presentation symbols, variable presentations with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable presentations with only blinking of lamps) according to the results of the judgment, and the presentation control means is capable of executing vibration presentations (vibration presentations relating to pre-reading vibration presentations, dialogue advancement presentations, pseudo consecutive presentations, development presentations, cut-in presentations, deciding presentations, re-draw presentations, confirmation presentations, etc.) that vibrate the operation means during the execution of the game presentations, and the vibration presentations generate an operation effective period and control the operation of the operation means. The first vibration effect (vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the valid period, and the second vibration effect (vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a pattern alignment, a C pattern alignment, a confirmation effect, etc.) executed without generating the valid period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their performance periods do not overlap, and the game performance includes a first game performance (a first special pattern corresponding to a first special pattern) according to a result of a determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. The first game presentation (variable presentation corresponding to a second special symbol) corresponds to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the number of types of the second vibration presentation (pre-reading vibration presentation, step-up notice presentation, vibration presentation related to symbol alignment, C symbol alignment, confirmation presentation, etc.) that may be executed during the first game presentation in the normal game state is greater than the number of types of the second vibration presentation (pre-reading vibration presentation, step-up notice presentation, vibration presentation related to symbol alignment, C symbol alignment, confirmation presentation, etc.). Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆As a 22nd configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine includes an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a specific game state (special and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing game presentations (variable presentations with variable display of presentation symbols, variable presentations with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable presentations with only blinking of lamps) according to the results of the judgment, the presentation control means being capable of executing vibration presentations (vibration presentations relating to pre-reading vibration presentations, dialogue advancement presentations, pseudo consecutive presentations, development presentations, cut-in presentations, deciding presentations, re-draw presentations, confirmation presentations, etc.) that vibrate the operation means during the execution of the game presentations, and the vibration presentations are capable of generating an operation effective period. In addition, the present invention includes a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) that is executed in response to the operation of the operating means during the effective operation period, and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a step-up preview effect, a pattern alignment, a C pattern alignment, a decision effect, etc.) that is executed without generating the effective period, and the first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their presentation periods do not overlap, and the game presentation includes a first game presentation (a second game presentation) according to the result of the determination of the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition. The first game presentation (variable presentation corresponding to the first special symbol) corresponds to the result of the judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the number of types of the second vibration presentation (pre-reading vibration presentation, vibration presentation related to step-up notice presentation, pattern alignment, C pattern alignment, confirmation presentation, etc.) that may be executed during the first game presentation in the normal game state is greater than the number of types of the second vibration presentation (pre-reading vibration presentation, vibration presentation related to pattern alignment, confirmation presentation, etc.) that may be executed during the second game presentation in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

◆As a 23rd configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game state. The present invention is provided with a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing game presentations (variation presentation with variable display of presentation symbols, variation presentation with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variation presentation with only lamp flashing) according to the result of the judgment, the presentation control means being capable of executing initial vibration for vibrating the operation means after the start of power supply, and vibration presentations (foresight vibration presentation, dialogue advancement presentation, pseudo consecutive presentation, development presentation, etc.) for vibrating the operation means during the execution of the game presentation. The game presentation includes a first game presentation (a variable presentation corresponding to a first special symbol) according to a result of a judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game presentation (a variable presentation corresponding to a second special symbol) according to a result of a judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. The vibration presentation includes a first vibration presentation (a vibration presentation corresponding to a pseudo consecutive presentation, a development presentation, a cut-in presentation, etc.) executed at a predetermined timing (before a reach) and a second vibration presentation (a vibration presentation related to a confirmation presentation, a pattern alignment, etc.) executed at a timing different from the first vibration presentation (during a reach). During the execution of the first game presentation in the normal game state, the first vibration presentation and the second vibration presentation can be executed. During the execution of the first game presentation in the specific game state, the execution of the first vibration presentation is restricted, but the second vibration presentation can be executed. The initial vibration and the first vibration presentation can be vibrated in different ways. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆As a 24th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine includes an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and a specific game state that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game state. The present invention is provided with a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game state (probability variable game state, various time-saving game states) and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) for executing game presentations (variation presentation with variable display of presentation symbols, variation presentation with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variation presentation with only lamp flashing) according to the result of the judgment, the presentation control means being capable of executing initial vibration for vibrating the operation means after the start of power supply, and vibration presentations (foresight vibration presentation, dialogue advancement presentation, pseudo consecutive presentation, development presentation, etc.) for vibrating the operation means during the execution of the game presentation. The game presentation includes a first game presentation (a variable presentation corresponding to a first special symbol) according to a result of a judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game presentation (a variable presentation corresponding to a second special symbol) according to a result of a judgment of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition. The vibration presentation includes a first vibration presentation (a vibration presentation corresponding to a pseudo consecutive presentation, a development presentation, a cut-in presentation, etc.) executed at a predetermined timing (before a reach) and a second vibration presentation (a vibration presentation related to a confirmation presentation, a pattern alignment, etc.) executed at a timing different from the first vibration presentation (during a reach). During the execution of the first game presentation in the normal game state, the first vibration presentation and the second vibration presentation can be executed. During the execution of the first game presentation in the specific game state, the execution of the first vibration presentation is restricted, but the second vibration presentation can be executed. The initial vibration and the second vibration presentation can be vibrated in different ways. This makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of the game.

◆As a 25th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and The game machine is provided with a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game state (probability game state, normal time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the special game ends, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes game presentations (variation presentations with variable display of presentation symbols, variation presentations with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variation presentations with only lamp flashing) according to the results of the judgment, and the presentation control means is a vibration presentation (pre-reading vibration presentation, bidding presentation, etc.) that vibrates the operation means during the execution of the game presentation. It is possible to execute vibration effects related to a first special pattern, a pseudo consecutive pattern, a development pattern, a cut-in pattern, a final pattern, a re-draw pattern, a final pattern, etc., and the game effects include a first game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a first special pattern) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a second special pattern) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the vibration effects include a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a line preview effect, a step-up preview effect, etc.) executed at a predetermined timing (before the reach) and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a development effect, a cut-in effect, a final pattern, a re-draw pattern) executed at a timing different from the first vibration effect (during the reach), and the execution ratio of the first vibration effect is different between when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state and when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 26th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and The game machine is provided with a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling the game state (probability game state, normal time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the special game ends, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes game presentations (variation presentations with variable display of presentation symbols, variation presentations with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variation presentations with only lamp flashing) according to the results of the judgment, and the presentation control means is a vibration presentation (pre-reading vibration presentation, bidding presentation, etc.) that vibrates the operation means during the execution of the game presentation. It is possible to execute vibration effects related to a first special pattern, a pseudo consecutive pattern, a development pattern, a cut-in pattern, a final pattern, a re-draw pattern, a final pattern, etc., and the game effects include a first game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a first special pattern) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a second special pattern) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the vibration effects include a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a line preview effect, a step-up preview effect, etc.) executed at a predetermined timing (before the reach) and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a development effect, a cut-in effect, a final pattern, a re-draw pattern, etc.) executed at a timing different from the first vibration effect (during the reach), and the execution ratio of the second vibration effect is different between when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state and when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 27th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and The present invention is provided with a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state based on a determination that a different game is not being executed, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a game presentation (a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern, a variable presentation only of a variable display of a fourth pattern, a variable presentation only of a lamp flashing) according to the result of the determination, and the presentation control means is configured to execute a vibration presentation (a pre-reading vibration presentation, It is possible to execute vibration effects related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, a confirmation effect, etc., and the game effects include a first game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a first special pattern) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a second special pattern) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the vibration effects include a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a dialogue preview effect, a step-up preview effect, etc.) executed at a predetermined timing (before the reach) and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a development effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) executed at a timing different from the first vibration effect (during the reach), and the execution ratio of the first vibration effect is different between when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state and when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 28th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, there is provided an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by the player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special chart judgment information) based on the establishment of a first acquisition condition (ball entering the first starting hole) or a second acquisition condition (ball entering the second starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and The present invention is provided with a state control means (main control board 110) capable of controlling a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state based on a determination that a different game is not being executed, and a presentation control means (presentation control board 130) that executes a game presentation (a variable presentation accompanied by a variable display of a presentation pattern, a variable presentation only of a variable display of a fourth pattern, a variable presentation only of a lamp flashing) according to the result of the determination, and the presentation control means is configured to execute a vibration presentation (a pre-reading vibration presentation, It is possible to execute vibration effects related to a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, a confirmation effect, etc., and the game effects include a first game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a first special pattern) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition, and a second game effect (a variable effect corresponding to a second special pattern) according to the result of the judgment information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition, and the vibration effects include a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a dialogue preview effect, a step-up preview effect, etc.) executed at a predetermined timing (before the reach) and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a development effect, a cut-in effect, a deciding effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) executed at a timing different from the first vibration effect (during the reach), and the execution ratio of the second vibration effect is different between when the first game effect is executed in the specific game state and when the second game effect is executed in the specific game state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 29th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an operation means (effect button, effect lever) operable by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probable change game state, various time-saving game states) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance patterns, variable performance with only variable display of a fourth pattern, variable performance with only lamp flashing) according to the result of the judgment, and the performance control means controls the above after the start of power supply. It is possible to execute an initial vibration that vibrates the operating means, and it is possible to execute a vibration effect (vibration effects related to pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, cut-in effect, deciding effect, re-draw effect, confirmation effect, etc.) that vibrates the operating means during the execution of the game effect, and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (vibration effects related to pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue preview effect, step-up preview effect, etc.) executed at a predetermined timing (before the reach) and a second vibration effect (vibration effects related to development effect, cut-in effect, deciding effect, re-draw effect, etc.) executed at a timing different from the first vibration effect (during the reach), and the execution ratio of the first vibration effect is different between the normal game state and the specific game state, and it is possible to vibrate the operating means in different ways between the initial vibration and the first vibration effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 30th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an operation means (effect button, effect lever) operable by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling to a specific game state (probable change game state, various time-saving game states) which is more advantageous to a player than a normal game state, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance patterns, variable performance with only variable display of a fourth pattern, variable performance with only lamp flashing) according to the result of the judgment, and the performance control means controls the above after the start of power supply. It is possible to execute an initial vibration that vibrates the operating means, and it is possible to execute a vibration effect (vibration effects related to pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, cut-in effect, deciding effect, re-draw effect, confirmation effect, etc.) that vibrates the operating means during the execution of the game effect, and the vibration effect includes a first vibration effect (vibration effects related to pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue preview effect, step-up preview effect, etc.) executed at a predetermined timing (before the reach) and a second vibration effect (vibration effects related to development effect, cut-in effect, deciding effect, re-draw effect, etc.) executed at a timing different from the first vibration effect (during the reach), and the execution ratio of the first vibration effect is different between the normal game state and the specific game state, and it is possible to vibrate the operating means in different ways between the initial vibration and the second vibration effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 31st configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the machine is provided with an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by a player and can emit light in a predetermined manner, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) that executes a game effect (a variable effect involving a variable display of the effect pattern, a variable effect only showing the variable display of the fourth pattern, a variable effect only flashing a lamp) according to the result of the judgment, and the effect control means is provided with a vibration effect (a look-ahead vibration effect, a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect, a development effect, a cut-in effect) that vibrates the operation means while the game effect is being executed. It is possible to execute vibration effects related to a first vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a look-ahead vibration effect, a dialogue preview effect, a step-up preview effect, etc.) executed at a predetermined timing (before the reach) and a second vibration effect (a vibration effect related to a development effect, a cut-in effect, a decision effect, a re-draw effect, etc.) executed at a timing different from the first vibration effect (during the reach), and the light emission mode of the operation means includes a first light emission mode (white light emission, red light emission) and a second light emission mode (rainbow light emission) in which the expectation of the special game being executed is higher than that of the first light emission mode, and in the game effect that notifies the execution of the special game, the operation means is more likely to be illuminated in the first light emission mode when the first vibration effect is executed than when the second vibration effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 32nd configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by a player and can emit light in a predetermined manner, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a state control means (main control board 110) that can be controlled to a specific game state (probable change game state, various time-saving game states) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) that executes a game effect (a variable effect accompanied by a variable display of the effect pattern, a variable effect only showing the variable display of the fourth pattern, a variable effect only flashing a lamp) according to the result of the judgment, and the effect control means is provided with a vibration effect (a look-ahead vibration effect, a dialogue preview effect, a pseudo consecutive effect) that vibrates the operating means while the game effect is being executed, The vibration effects include a first vibration effect (vibration effects related to pre-reading vibration effects, dialogue preview effects, step-up preview effects, etc.) that is executed at a predetermined timing (before the reach) and a second vibration effect (vibration effects related to development effects, cut-in effects, decision effects, re-draw effects, etc.) that is executed at a timing different from the first vibration effect (during the reach), and the execution rate of the first vibration effect is different between the normal game state and the specific game state, and the light emission state of the operation means includes a first light emission state (white light emission, red light emission) and a second light emission state (rainbow light emission) that has a higher expectation that the special game will be executed than the first light emission state, and in the game effect that notifies the execution of the special game, the operation means is more likely to be illuminated in the first light emission state when the first vibration effect is executed than when the second vibration effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 33rd configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) that executes a game effect (variable effect with variable display of effect pattern, variable effect with only variable display of the fourth pattern, variable effect with only lamp flashing) according to the result of the judgment, and the effect control means is capable of executing an initial vibration that vibrates the operating means after the start of power supply, and a vibration effect that vibrates the operating means during the execution of the game effect (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, card effect, etc.). The effective period of the operation means includes a first effective period (effective period related to a dialogue preview effect and a pseudo consecutive effect) that occurs at a predetermined timing (before the reach) during the game effect, and a second effective period (effective period related to a cut-in effect, a decision effect, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during the reach) after the first effective period during the game effect, and the vibration effect can be executed when the operation means is operated during the second effective period. The operation means can be vibrated in different ways for the initial vibration and the vibration effect executed when the operation means is operated during the second effective period, and different operation sounds can be output when the operation means is operated during the first effective period and when the operation means is operated during the second effective period. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 34th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the machine is provided with an operation means (effect button, effect lever) that can be operated by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) that acquires judgment information (special pattern judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) that judges whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, and an effect control means (effect control board 130) that executes a game effect (variable effect with variable display of effect pattern, variable effect with only variable display of the fourth pattern, variable effect with only lamp flashing) according to the result of the judgment, and the effect control means is capable of executing an initial vibration that vibrates the operating means after the start of power supply, and a vibration effect that vibrates the operating means during the execution of the game effect (pre-reading vibration effect, dialogue preview effect, pseudo consecutive effect, development effect, card effect, etc.). The effective period of the operation means includes a first effective period (effective period related to a dialogue preview effect and a pseudo consecutive effect) that occurs at a predetermined timing (before the reach) during the game effect, and a second effective period (effective period related to a cut-in effect, a decision effect, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during the reach) after the first effective period during the game effect, and the vibration effect can be executed when the operation means is operated during the first effective period. The operation means can be vibrated in different ways for the initial vibration and the vibration effect executed when the operation means is operated during the first effective period, and different operation sounds can be output when the operation means is operated during the first effective period and when the operation means is operated during the second effective period. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 35th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an operation means (effect button, effect lever) operable by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special symbol judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state to a specific game state (probable bonus game state, normal time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state after the special game ends, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game performance (variable performance with variable display of performance symbols, variable performance with only variable display of the fourth symbol, variable performance with only lamp flashing) according to the result of the judgment, and the performance control means is capable of executing an initial vibration that vibrates the operation means after the start of power supply, and a valid period that occurs during the game performance. It is possible to execute vibration effects (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up advancement effects, dialogue advancement effects, pseudo consecutive effects, cut-in effects, successful decision effects, successful promotion effects, etc.) that vibrate the operating means in response to the operation of the operating means during the effective period, and the effective period includes a first effective period (effective period related to dialogue advancement effects and pseudo consecutive effects) that occurs at a predetermined timing (before the reach) during the game performance, and a second effective period (effective period related to development effects, decision effects, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during the reach) after the first effective period during the game performance, and the execution ratio of the vibration effects in response to the operation during the first effective period is different between the game performance in the normal game state and the game performance in the specific game state, and the number of vibrations (time) in the vibration effects executed in response to the operation during the first effective period is different from the number of vibrations (time) in the vibration effects executed in response to the operation during the second effective period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a 36th configuration for solving the above problem, in a gaming machine capable of executing a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to a player, the gaming machine is provided with an operation means (effect button, effect lever) operable by a player, an acquisition means (main control board 110) for acquiring judgment information (special symbol judgment information) based on the establishment of an acquisition condition (ball entering the starting hole), a judgment means (main control board 110) for judging whether or not to execute the special game based on the judgment information, a state control means (main control board 110) for controlling the state to a specific game state (special time-saving game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state based on the judgment that the special game is not executed, and a performance control means (performance control board 130) for executing a game performance (a variable performance with a variable display of a performance symbol, a variable performance with only a variable display of a fourth symbol, a variable performance with only a blinking lamp) according to the result of the judgment, and the performance control means is capable of executing an initial vibration that vibrates the operation means after the start of power supply, and a special vibration that occurs during the game performance. It is possible to execute vibration effects (pre-reading vibration effects, step-up advancement effects, dialogue advancement effects, pseudo consecutive effects, cut-in effects, successful decision effects, successful promotion effects, etc.) that vibrate the operating means in response to the operation of the operating means during the effective period, and the effective period includes a first effective period (effective period related to dialogue advancement effects and pseudo consecutive effects) that occurs at a predetermined timing (before the reach) during the game performance, and a second effective period (effective period related to development effects, decision effects, etc.) that occurs at a second timing (during the reach) after the first effective period during the game performance, and the execution ratio of the vibration effects in response to the operation during the first effective period is different between the game performance in the normal game state and the game performance in the specific game state, and the number of vibrations (time) in the vibration effects executed in response to the operation during the first effective period is different from the number of vibrations (time) in the vibration effects executed in response to the operation during the second effective period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is not limited to being used as a pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used as a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used as a jan-ball gaming machine or an arrange-ball gaming machine.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment transitions to a low probability gaming state after the end of a jackpot game if the type of the special jackpot pattern is a normal pattern, and transitions to a high probability gaming state that continues until the next jackpot game after the end of a jackpot game if the type of the special jackpot pattern is a specific pattern, but the gaming machine may transition to a high probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after the end of all jackpot games.

Also, the gaming machine may transition to a high probability gaming state after all jackpot games have ended, and if a player wins a drop lottery that is executed at the start of the variable display of special symbols in the high probability gaming state, the gaming machine may end the high probability gaming state and return to the normal gaming state.

In addition, the gaming machine may be configured such that, when the gaming ball passes through a specific area during a specific round of jackpot play, the gaming machine transitions to a high probability play state for a predetermined number of times after the jackpot play ends.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol are not executed simultaneously (in parallel), and the display of the second special symbol is executed with priority, but the gaming machine may be configured so that the display of the first special symbol and the display of the second special symbol are executed simultaneously (in parallel).

Furthermore, the embodiments disclosed herein should be considered to be illustrative and not restrictive in all respects. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include the meaning equivalent to the claims and all modifications within the scope.

1 Gaming machine 5 Gaming board 44 Regular gate 45 First start gate 47 Second start gate 50 Big prize gate 70 First image display device 71 Second image display device 110 Main control board 110a Main CPU
120 Payout control board 130 Performance control board 130a Sub-CPU

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of controlling the progress of a special game,
The game machine includes an operating means operable by a player,
A variation effect of the symbol can be executed according to the judgment information acquired based on the establishment of the acquisition condition,
The determination information in which the variable performance has not been executed can be determined in advance,
The game state can be controlled to a second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state.
An initial vibration is executed to vibrate the operation means after the start of power supply,
During the execution of the variable performance, a predetermined performance that makes the player expect the execution of the special game, a vibration performance that vibrates the operation means, a reach performance that makes the player expect the execution of the special game, and a winning/losing performance that suggests whether or not the special game will be executed can be executed.
The vibration effects include:
A first vibration effect is executed in response to an operation of the operating means during an operation valid period;
A second vibration effect is executed without generating the operation effective period,
The second vibration effect includes:
A first performance executed at a predetermined timing;
A second performance executed at a timing different from that of the first performance,
It is possible to make the vibration mode in the first performance different from the vibration mode in the second performance, and it is possible to execute the first performance and the second performance so that their performance periods do not overlap during the execution of the variable performance,
The operation effective period for the first vibration effect is:
This occurs when the reach effect is being executed and the winning or losing effect is being executed,
A vibration period in the first vibration performance associated with the winning/losing performance is set to be longer than a vibration period in the first performance,
The predetermined performance and the first performance can be executed according to a result of the advance determination,
During a predetermined period after the start of the variable presentation, the expectation of the special game being executed is higher when the first presentation is executed than when the predetermined presentation is executed;
The first vibration effect and the second vibration effect can be executed so that their effect periods do not overlap,
The ease of executing the second vibration effect during a predetermined period after the start of the variable effect differs between the first game state and the second game state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the operating means can be vibrated in different ways during the initial vibration and the first presentation.